Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2025-014 - 1/14/2025 - Approved
�s CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF FAR SOUTH POLICE SUBSTATION G . O . Bond 2022] Project Number: 23177 o # CORPORA;� 1852 TURNER I RAMIREZ I A R C H I T E C T S 3751 South Alameda St. Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 361.944.8900 [08/30/2024] Record Drawing Number: PBG-933 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 00 01 00 Table of Contents 00 01 01 Seals Page 00 01 02 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev 3-2023) Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev 5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment(Rev5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev10-201s) 01 35 00 Special Procedures(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Revs-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) Part S Standard Specifications 020100 Survey Monuments 021020 Site Clearing and Stripping 021040 Site Grading 021080 Removing Abandoned Structures 022020 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 022022 Trench Safety for Excavations 022040 Street Excavation 022100 Select Material 022420 Silt Fence Table of Contents 00 01 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 025205 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk, & Driveway Replacement 025210 Lime Stabilization 025213 Asphalt Stabilized Base (S-26) 025223 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base 025404 Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions 025412 Prime Coat 025424 Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement 025608 Inlets 025610 Concrete Curb and Gutter 025612 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 025614 Concrete Curb Ramps 025802 Temporary Traffic Control During Construction 025807 Pavement Markings (Paint and Thermoplastic) 025813 Preformed Thermoplastic Striping, Words and Emblems 025816 Raised Pavement Markings 025818 Reference Specification—TxDot DMS-4200 Pavement Markers (reflectorized) 025828 Reference Specification—TxDot DMS-6130 Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Marker 026202 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems 026204 PVC Pipe—Pressure Pipe for Wastewater Force Main, Irrigation System, and Water Tans Line ASTM D2241 026206 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 026210 PVC Pipe—AWWA c900/c905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and Wastewater Force Mains 026402 Waterlines 026404 Water Service Lines 026406 Private Water Services Line (S-112) Form WS-1, Form WS-2, Foundation Exhibit, Site Plan 026409 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves 026411 Gate Valves for Waterlines 026416 Fire Hydrants 027200 Control of Wastewater Flows 027202 Manhole 027203 Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manhole and Structures Table of Contents 00 01 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 027205 Fiberglass Manhole 027402 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culverts 027602 Gravity Wastewater Lines 027604 Disposal of Waste from Wastewater Cleaning Operations 027606 Wastewater Service Lines 027608 Private Sewer Services 028020 Seeding 028040 Sodding 028300 Fence Relocation 028320 Chain Link Fence 028340 Chain Link Security Fence 030020 Portland Cement Concrete 032020 Reinforcing Steel 038000 Concrete Structures 055420 Frames, Gates, Rings, and Covers Part T Technical Specifications 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management& Coordination 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 41 00 Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 19 Windstorm Construction Requirements 014200 References 014339 Mockups 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Division 02 Existing Conditions 02 37 60 Drilled Footings 02 41 19 Selective Demolition Division 03 Concrete Table of Contents 00 01 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 033100 Epoxy Related Work Division 04 Masonry 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 23 00 Reinforced Unit Masonry Division 05 Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 20 00 Steel Joists 05 31 00 Steel Roof Deck 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Division 06 Concrete 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Clad Architectural Cabinets 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling (FRP1) Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 19 17 Anti-Graffiti Coatings 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 07 42 13.19 Insulated Metal Window and Wall Panels 07 42 43 Composite Wall Panels 07 52 16 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Table of Contents 00 01 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section Division 08 Openings 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 16 Interior Aluminum Framing(Litespace) 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 91 19 Fixed Louvers Division 09 Finishes 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 26.23 Drywall Ceiling Grid Suspension Systems 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 14 Acoustical Metal Ceilings 0965 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 91 13 Painting 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings (Epoxy) Division 10 Specialties 10 11 00 Visual Display Units 101416 Plaques 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 10 14 23.16 Room Identification Panel Signage Table of Contents 00 01 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 10 26 00 Wall Corner Protection 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 10 71 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 10 75 16 Ground-Set Flagpoles Division 12 Furnishings 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 12 36 61.16 Solid Surface Countertops 12 56 33 Fixed Seminar Tables Division 22 Plumbing 22 03 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 22 07 00 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 22 08 00 Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 22 14 00 Hangers and Supports 22 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking 22 26 00 Piping Insulation 22 41 00 Plumbing Piping and Valves 22 41 10 Natural Gas Piping 22 43 00 Plumbing Specialties 22 44 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning(HVAC) 23 03 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 23 05 00 Basic Material and Methods 23 05 10 Starting of Systems 23 07 19 DX Piping System Insulation 23 14 00 Hangers, Supports and Anchors 23 17 00 Motors and Motor Controllers Table of Contents 00 01 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 23 24 00 Sound and Vibration Control 23 26 00 Piping Insulation 23 29 00 Duct Insulation 23 53 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 57 60 HVAC Roof Curbs 23 58 54 DX Fan Coil Unit 23 67 10 Air Cooled Condensing Units 23 78 00 Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units Electric Cooling—Gas Heating 23 86 00 Power Ventilators 23 88 10 Air Distribution Devices 23 88 85 Air Filters 23 89 00 Metal Ductwork 23 91 00 Ductwork Accessories 23 99 00 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Division 26 Electrical 26 01 00 Electrical General Provisions 26 02 01 Coordination Drawings 26 06 00 Grounding 26 07 50 Electrical Identification 26 12 30 Wire and Cable 26 13 60 Raceways 26 14 00 Wire Devices 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 32 00 Natural Gas Engine Generator 26 33 00 Automatic Transfer Switch 26 41 19 Lightning Protection 26 43 13 Surge Protection Devices 26 44 10 Disconnect Switches 26 51 00 Luminaires 26 74 00 Telephone/Data System (Rough-In) 26 75 00 Cable Television System (Rough-In) Table of Contents 00 01 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section Division 27 Communications 27 10 00 Structured Cabling Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security 28 13 00 Access Control System 28 31 00 Fire Detection &Alarm Division 32 Exterior Improvements 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers 32 90 01 Common Planting Requirements 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 23 Sodding 32 93 00 Plants END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 01 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 00 01 01 SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT: PHILIP RAMIREZ E° ARc TURNER, RAMIREZ, &ASSOCIATES �.Rq y/ 3751 S.ALAMEDA ST. � r�Q CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411� V 361.994.8900 Na091a +Q� F 361.994.8955 E philip@trarch.com TF OF �� 8/30/24 STRUCTURAL: ROBERT E. MARTINEZ, P.E. "*SE of y �'tt` REM ENGINEERING 2218 BASSE ROAD ROBERt 01ftE2 YARrNU SAN ANTONIO,TX 78213 N $9387 ,ts/�'ENS��,�, V 210.320.1199 /P$ / $f►5/24 E I robert@remengineeringcorp.com 1K SEAL APPEA W.ON (/ IM ooaMo+t WAS NJr0 nZ1ED BY ROW"E W{RDPIM RE /89387 taPJt FM Na N44 ELECTRICAL: JOHN RODRIGUES, P.E. NRG ENGINEERING 5656 S STAPLES ST 360 P R )DRI 'iR CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 / n t V 361.852.2727 E jrod@nrgcc.com Seals Page 00 01 01- 1 Far South Police Substation -23177 08/30/2024 MECHANICAL/PLUMBING: SEAN RODRIGUEZ, P.E. OF NRG ENGINEERING a . 41 0p 5656 S STAPLES ST 312 CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 SEAM M. RODRIGUEZ Qoao° 96478aoo4 V 361.852.2727 q��!�������4.,� E � Srod@nrgcc.com CIVIL: RAMIRO MUNOZ, III, P.E., MLSE,CWI T£,f.4`�*��� MUNOZ ENGINEERING 1608 S. BROWNLEE BLVD. � RAMIRO MUNOZ III O II X CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78404 j�. 1 p0346 �i ,+10 '410ENStl� ..'~ V 361.854.3101 1,% wA..'�, E ram@munozengrg.com RAMIRO MUNOZ III, PA N . 100346 TECHNOLOGY: AkONSD/S ALFONSO DELGADO �� •10% COMBS CONSULTING GROUP Q CS, z 1022 RIVER ROAD,#2 BOERNE,TEXAS 78006 Lu Eric J Porto 0 � BICSI ID#311985 V 210.698.7887 r E adelgado@datacomdesign.com TXRIRES 1�3)-J5 Seals Page 00 01 01-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 LANDSCAPE: ROBERT GIGNAC GIGNAC LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE 3833 S.STAPLES STE. N119 CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 V 361.853.0795 ROBERT E. GRWM4 E I gignaclandscape@aol.com C PE G END OF SECTION 00 0101 Seals Page 00 0101-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 7 ® DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE F01/31/2025 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement.A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsements . PRODUCER CONTACT Tim Buttler Risk Transfer Insurance Agency,LLC PHONE FAX 200 S.Orange A/C No Ext: A/C, /C No): Ste.750 E-MAIL tbuftler@halc yonhr.com Orlando,FL 32801 ADDRESS:tbutt oe y INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A:Service American Indemnity Company 39152 INSURED INSURER B: KJM Commercial Inc DBA Victory Building Team 402 S.Chaparral St.,Ste.A INSURER C: Corpus Christi,TX 78401 INSURER D INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:BMBSZRV4 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR I POLICY NUMBER MM/DD MM/DD/YYYY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR PREM SES EaEoccurrence) $ MED EXP(Any one person) $ PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ JECT POLICY❑ PRO ❑ LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT Ea accident ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident UMBRELLA LIAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ IICESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ D RETENTION$ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION RT24MPP0670265902 10/01/2024 10/01/2025 X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY STATUTE ER YIN N ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? ❑ N/A (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Far South Police Substation CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Corpus Christi-Engineering Services 1201 Leopard St. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi,TX 78401 United States 4 �'' • Page 1 of 1 ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD , r VW VEST ' IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para presentar una queja: You may contact West Bend Insurance Company: Usted puede comunicarse con su West Bend Insurance Company: 1-800-760-9250 1-800-760-9250 You may also write to West Bend Insurance Company at: Usted tambien puede escribir a West Bend Insurance Company at: Attn: Claims/Surety Department 1900 S. 18th Avenue Attn: Claims/Surety Department West Bend, WI 53096 1900 S. 18th Avenue 1-800-252-3439 West Bend,WI 53095 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Texas: P. O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 P. O. Box 149104 Fax: (512)490-1007 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Web: www.tdi.texas.gov Fax: (512) 490-1007 E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov Web:www.tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtectionptdi.texas.gov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: or about a claim you should contact the agent or the Si tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may reclamo, debe comunicarse con el agente o la contact the Texas Department of Insurance. compania primero. Si no se resuelve la disputa, puede entonces comunicarse con el departamento (TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND: This notice is for information only and does not UNA ESTE AVISO A SU FIANZA DE GARANTIA: become a part or condition of the attached document. Este aviso es solo para proposito de informacion y no se convierte en parte o condicion del documento adjunto. NB 1671 08 23 Page 1 of 1 1900 S 18th Avenue I West Bend,WI 53095 1 Phone: (800)236-5010 1 Fax: (877)674-2663 1 www.thesilverlining.com JP 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. 2298537 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Victory Building Team Name: West Bend Insurance Company Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address (principal place of business): 402 S Chaparral Street 1900 South 18th Avenue West Bend,WI 53095 Suite A Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1900 South 18th Avenue West Bend,WI 53095 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: W1 Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): 608-410-3410 Far South Police Sub-Station Project No. 23177 Telephone(for notice of claim): 972-772-7220 Local Agent for Surety Name: Tony Fierro Award Date of the Contract: January 14, 2025 Address: 2255 Ridge Road,Ste.333 Five Million Eight Hundred Rockwall,TX 75087 Contract Price: $5,880,000.00 Eighty Thousand Dollars and 00 100 Bond Telephone: 972-772-7220 Email Address: tony.fierro@baldwin.com Date of Bond: January 16,2025 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll free number.1-500-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13-1 Rev 5/2024 Far South Police Sub-Station Project No. 23177 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs,administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work through the Warranty Period required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. The Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor is incorporated by reference into this Statutory Performance Bond,pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code, as amended,and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the some extent as if it were copied at length herein. If Contractor does not faithfully construct and complete said Work through the Warranty Period under its contract with Owner,and Owner invokes its contractual rights and declares Contractor in default,Surety shall promptly remedy the default, and at Owner's sole option,Surety shall: 1. Within a reasonable time(but not later than 30 days after Surety receives written notice of Contractor's default),with written notice to Owner,step into and assume the role,all rights and all obligations of the defaulting Contractor under the Contract Documents. Upon assumption of this role, Surety directly shall contract with a Completion Contractor hired/engaged by Surety to complete the Work. The selection of the Completion Contractor must be approved in writing by Owner. Surety shall be responsible for any and all costs incurred,up to the Bond Sum, to complete the Work;or 2. In the event Surety fails to contract with a Completion Contractor within 90 days of receipt of Owner's written notice of Default, Owner may,at Owner's sole discretion,select a Completion Contractor in accordance with Texas law to complete the Work. In this event,Surety shall pay Owner any and all costs,up to the Bond Sum,for Owner's selected Completion Contractor to complete the Work;or 3. At Owner's sole discretion,Surety shall pay Owner the estimated amount for Owner to execute a Project Completion Contract with a Completion Contractor,selected by Owner in accordance with Texas Law,solely to complete the Work. Surety shall pay Owner any and all costs, up to the Bond Sum,for Owner-selected Completion Contractor to complete the Work. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Surety agrees to be bound by the mediation clause in Article 22 of the Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor,said Contract Documents incorporated by reference in this Bond. Performance Bond 00 61 13-2 Rev 5/2024 Far South Police Sub-Station Project No. 23177 Contractor a rincipal Victory Building Team Surety West Bend Ins ce om any Signatur Signature: Name: Name: Ton Fierr Title: �k �1,10�7c'� Title: Xto(,� QQrney-in-Fact Email Address: ,1�QtVw,u fit(,( y1�d(�fr (dr1 Email Address: tony.fierropbaldwin.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 61 13-3 Far South Police Sub-Station Project No. 23177 Rev 5/2024 WEST BEND` Bond No. 2298537 POWER OF ATTORNEY Know all men by these Presents,that West Bend Insurance Company(formerly known as West Bend Mutual Insurance Company prior to 111/2024),a corporation having its principal office in the City of West Bend,Wisconsin does make,constitute and appoint: Jeremy Barnett,Ryan Cox,Tony Fierro,Caleb Hale,Jarod Jaggers,Jay Jordan,Robert G.Kanuth,Johnny Moss, Jack Nottingham,Jade Porter,Robert J.Shuya,Brennan Williamson,Brady Wilson,Jarrett Wilson lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact,to make,execute,seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed any and all bonds,undertakings and contracts of suretyship,provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of:Thirty Million Dollars($30,000,000) This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of West Bend Insurance Company by unanimous consent resolution effective the 1st day of January 2024. Appointment ofA tto rney-In-Fact. The president or any vice president,or any other officer of West Bend Insurance Company may appoint by written certificate Attorneys-In-Fact to act on behalf of the company in the execution of and attesting of bonds and undertakings and other written obligatory instruments of like nature, The signature of any officer authorized hereby and the corporate seal may be affixed by facsimile to any such power of attorney or to any certificate relating therefore and any such power of attorney or certificate hearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the company,and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in nature to which it is attached. Any such appointment may be revoked,for cause,or without cause,by any said officer at any time. Any reference to West Bend Mutual Insurance Company in any Bond and all continuations thereof shall be considered a reference to West Bend Insurance Company. In witness whereof,West Bend Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by its president undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto duly attested by its secretary this 1st day of January 2024. •```��SURq�C�''• I�� Z�� Attest Ckt?llii. l b ;rtth°. A •��p,Go�'vo rr ' Christopher C.Z gain _m; ; Robert J.Jacques �� SEAL Secretary '' President ;y�, �;.t�� State of Wisconsin tJ11rNti�p```` County of Washington On the 1st day of January 2024,before me personally came Robert Jacques,to me known being by duly sworn,did depose and say that he is the President of West Bend Insurance Company,the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument;that he knows the seal of the said corporation;that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal;that is was so affixed by order of the board of directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. �'J�ieENaG TA =u�• '0U6t 10 =\cead , orporate Attorney op'4yj"giro`,. bta'ry Public,Washington Co.,WI My Commission is Permanent The undersigned,duly elected to the office stated below,now the incumbent in West Bend Insurance Company,a Wisconsin corporation authorized to make this certificate,Do Hereby Certify that the foregoing attached Power of Attorney remains in full force effect and has not been revoked and that the Resolution of the Board of Directors,set forth in the Power of Attorney is now in force. Signed and sealed at West Bend,Wisconsin this 16th day of J a n U a ry 2025 ?Q ccVJ'04 F` — =m;y SEAL )K Christoplier C.Z4 aW NysN Secretary 1900 S 18th Avenue I West Bend,WI 53095 1 Phone:(800)236-5010 1 Fax:(877)674-2663 1 www.thesilverlining.com i C �JP i 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. 2298537 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Victory Building Team Name: West Bend Insurance Company Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 402 S Chaparral Street 1900 South 18th Avenue Suite A West Bend,WI 53095 Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1900 South 18th Avenue West Bend,WI 53095 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: W1 Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): 608-410-3410 Far South Police Sub-Station Project No. 23177 Telephone(for notice of claim): 972-772-7220 Local Agent for Surety Name: Tony FierTo Award Date of the Contract: January 14, 2025 Address: 2255 Ridge Road,Ste. 333 Five Million Eight Hundred Rockwall,TX 75087 Contract Price:$5,880,000.00 Eighty Thousand Dollars and 0/1 0 Bond Telephone: 972-772-7220 Email Address: tony.fierro@baldwin.com Date of Bond: January 16,2025 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept.of Insurance by calling the following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 5/2024 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs,administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas f r- ny lega n. Contractor as Principal Victory Building Team Surety West Bend s �Le Signature Signature: Name: Name: on ierro Title: 4kck Title: AZrney-in-Eact Email Address: Jggt 4k& Email Address: tony.fierro((Dbaldwin.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-2 5/2024 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 WEST BEND Bond No. 2298537 POWER OF ATTORNEY Know all men by these Presents,that West Bend Insurance Company(formerly known as West Bend Mutual Insurance Company prior to 1/1/2024),a corporation having its principal office in the City of West Bend,Wisconsin does make,constitute and appoint: Jeremy Barnett,Ryan Cox,Tony Fierro,Caleb Hale,Jarod Jaggers,Jay Jordan,Robert G.Kanuth,Johnny Moss, Jack Nottingham,Jade Porter,Robert J.Shuya,Brennan Williamson,Brady Wilson,Jarrett Wilson lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact,to make,execute,seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed any and all bonds,undertakings and contracts of suretyship,provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of:Thirty Million Dollars($30,000,000) This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of West Bend Insurance Company by unanimous consent resolution effective the 1st day of January 2024. Appointment of Attorney-In-Fact. The president or any vice president,or any other officer of West Bend Insurance Company may appoint by written certificate Attorneys-In-Fact to act on behalf of the company in the execution of and attesting of bonds and undertakings and other written obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby and the corporate seal may be affixed by facsimile to any such power of attorney or to any certificate relating therefore and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the company,and any such power so executed and certified by facsitnile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in nature to which it is attached. Any such appointment maybe revoked,for cause,or without cause,by any said officer at any time. Any reference to West Bend Mutual Insurance Company in any Bond and all continuations thereof shall be considered a reference to West Bend Insurance Company. In witness whereof,West Bend Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by its president undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto duly attested by its secretary this 1st day of January 2024. ` N'0'Sll RAAj 1,1i Attest Ulr I✓Y t" llii .1txt y�tu`a _V Christ4her C.Z gart m; Robert J.Jacques Secretary N y�SLAL;.? ` President State of Wisconsin County of Washington On the 1st day of January 2024,before me personally came Robert Jacques,to me known being by duly sworn,did depose and say that he is the President of West Bend Insurance Company,the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument;that he knows the seal of the said corporation;that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal;that is was so affixed by order of the board of directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order, \J`Jy`BEN,*, OTA Nam'' °(1611G Z;' 1; ad orporate Attorney Op'"111' SCO I�ota'ry Public,Washington Co.,WI My Commission is Permanent The undersigned,duly elected to the office stated below,now the incumbent in West Bend Insurance Company,a Wisconsin corporation authorized to make this certificate,Do Hereby Certify that the foregoing attached Power of Attorney remains in full force effect and has not been revoked and that the Resolution of the Board of Directors,set forth in the Power of Attorney is now in force. Signed and sealed at West Bend,Wisconsin this 16th day of January 2025 ttg1J O G aVORa �F � ?ll it }"lt't' ✓tdJa$,Gts`1: : '0 K= Christoplier C.Zxvy ai Secretary 1900 S 18th Avenue I West Bend,WI 53095 1 Phone:(800)236-5010 1 Fax:(877)674-2663 1 www.thesilverlining.com ,SUS O � 'NCORPORR�E� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on January 14, 2025, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and KJM Commercial Inc. dba Victory Building Team (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Far South Police Substation Proiect Number 23177 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Turner I Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda St. Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 philip@trarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson,Assistant Director Construction Management 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 iosephJ2@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 480 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 510 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 5,570,000.00 Alternate Bid Item A $ 10,000.00 Allowance $ 300,000.00 TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE $ 5,880,000.00 Agreement 00 52 23-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Include Wastewater CD Exhibit if Project pertains to SSO CD work. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Retie-cc�fl�t2vtz� Rebecca Huerta(Feb 17,202510:50 CST) Jeffi v Ed mends(Feb 17,202508.23 CSTI Rebecca Huerta 02/17/2025 Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E 02/17/2025 City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2025-006 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL 1 /14/2025 `�'C� RH/SB Janet Whitehead(Feb 11,202516:05 CST Assistant City Attorney 02/11/2025 ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR Jer m Baugh(Feb 11,202508:39 CST) (Seal Below) By: Jeremy Baugh Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 402 S Chaparral St. A Financial Officer Address Corpus Christi Texas 78401 City State Zip 361-991-5600 Phone Fax jeremy@victorybuiIdingteam.com EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM PROJECT: RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 RFB 6107 BIDDER: Victory Building Team TOTAL BID: $5,870,000.00 COMPLETION TIME: Not Required BIDDER INFO: 402 S Chaparral Street Suite A Corpus Christi,TX 78401 P: 3619915600 F: CIVCAS, RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A- GENERAL $425,000.00 Part B- EXISTING CONDITIONS $60,000.00 Part C- CONCRETE $700,000.00 Part D- MASONRY $300,000.00 Part E- METALS $535,000.00 Part F-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES $97,000.00 Part G-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION $215,000.00 Part H- OPENINGS $270,000.00 Part I- FINISHES $185,000.00 Part J-SPECIALTIES $203,000.00 Part K- FURNISHINGS $80,000.00 Part L- MEP $1,161,000.00 Part M-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRICA SAFETY AND SECURITY $109,000.00 Part N-SITEWORK $527,000.00 Part O- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS $351,000.00 Part P- UTILITIES $180,000.00 Part R-ALLOWANCES $472,000.00 Total $5,870,000.00 ALTERNATE 1 Total Part A- GENERAL $0.00 Part B- EXISTING CONDITIONS $0.00 Part C- CONCRETE $0.00 Part D- MASONRY $0.00 Part E- METALS $0.00 Part F-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES $0.00 Part G-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION $0.00 Part H- OPENINGS $0.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM Part I- FINISHES $0.00 Part J-SPECIALTIES $0.00 Part K- FURNISHINGS $0.00 Part L- MEP $0.00 Part M-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRICA SAFETY AND SECURITY $0.00 Part N-SITEWORK $0.00 Part O- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS $0.00 Part P- UTI LITI ES $0.00 Part Q-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE A -CONCRETE PAVING $10,000.00 Part R-ALLOWANCES $0.00 Total $10,000.00 PartA-GENERAL No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al MOBILIZATION LS 1 $25,000.00 $25,000.00 A2 STORM WATER POLLUTION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 PREVENTION A3 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS LS 1 $400,000.00 $400,000.00 A4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $425,000.00 Part IS- EXISTING CONDITIONS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B1 DRILLED FOOTINGS LS 1 $40,000,00 $40,000.00 B2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 Subtotal: $60,000.00 Part C-CONCRETE No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LS 1 $700,000.00 $700,000.00 C2 CONCRETE FORMS AND LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 REINFORCEMENT CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM C3 CONCRETE FINISHING AND CURING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $700,000.00 Part D- MASONRY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 UNIT MASONRY MORTAR AND LS 1 $300,000.00 $300,000.00 REINFORCING Subtotal: $300,000.00 Part E- METALS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND METAL LS 1 $160,000.00 $160,000.00 FRAMING E2 METAL FABRICATIONS LS 1 $375,000.00 $375,000.00 E3 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $535,000.00 Part F-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING LS 1 $40,000.00 $40,000.00 F2 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AND LS 1 $50,000.00 $50,000.00 COUNTEROPS F3 PLASTIC PANELING LS 1 $7,000.00 $7,000.00 Subtotal: $97,000.00 Part G-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G1 WATERPROOFING AND COATINGS LS 1 $70,000.00 $70,000.00 G2 INSULATION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 G3 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 G4 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS LS 1 $125,000.00 $125,000.00 MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING,AND ACCESSORIES G5 SEALANTS LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM Subtotal: $215,000.00 Part H-OPENINGS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price H1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES LS 1 $90,000.00 $90,000.00 H2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 H3 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS LS 1 $30,000.00 $30,000.00 H4 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ENTRANCES, LS 1 $150,000.00 $150,000.00 CURTAIN WALLS,AND GLAZING H5 DOOR HARDWARE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $270,000.00 Part I- FINISHES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 11 GYPSUM AND NON-STRUCTURAL METAL LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 FRAMING 12 CERAMIC TILING LS 1 $35,000.00 $35,000.00 13 RESILIENT BASE AND TILE FLOORING LS 1 $40,000.00 $40,000.00 14 TILE CARPETING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 15 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 16 PAINTING LS 1 $110,000.00 $110,000.00 Subtotal: $185,000.00 Part J-SPECIALTIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J1 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS LS 1 $2,000.00 $2,000.00 J2 PLAQUES, DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND LS 1 $32,000.00 $32,000.00 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE J3 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION LS 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 J4 TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY LS 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 ACCESSORIES J5 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS AND LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 EXTINGUISHERS J6 LOCKERS LS 1 $75,000.00 $75,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM J7 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES LS 1 $4,000.00 $4,000,00 J8 CANOPY(EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL LS 1 $65,000.00 $65,000.00 DEVICES) Subtotal: $203,000.00 Part K- FURNISHINGS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price K1 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES LS 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 K2 SEMINAR TABLES LS 1 $70,000.00 $70,000.00 Subtotal: $80,000.00 Part L- MEP No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price L1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LS 1 $275,000.00 $275,000,00 L2 DUCTWORK LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L3 CONTROLS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L4 ELECTRICAL SWITCH GEAR/PANELS LS 1 $571,000.00 $571,000.00 L5 LIGHT FIXTURES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L6 GENERAL GROUNDING/BONDING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L7 LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L8 SITE/UTILITY DUCT AND RACEWAYS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L9 BUILDING RACEWAYS/CIRCUITRY LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L10 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L11 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT/FIXTURES LS 1 $315,000.00 $315,000.00 L12 DWV/WATER PIPING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L13 NATURAL GAS PIPING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L14 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $1,161,000.00 Part M-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRICA SAFETY AND SECURITY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price M1 GROUNDING AND BONDING LS 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM M2 UNDERGROUND DUCT AND RACEWAYS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 M3 BACKBONE AND HORIZONTAL CABLING LS 1 $37,000.00 $37,000.00 M4 AUDIO VISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE LS 1 $2,000.00 $2,000.00 M5 ELECTRONIC SECURITY,ACCESS LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION M6 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 M7 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 Subtotal: $109,000.00 Part N-SITEWORK No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price N1 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK LS 1 $525,000.00 $525,000.00 N2 SITE EXCAVATION AND FILL LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N3 ROUGH AND SITE GRADING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N4 TERMITE CONTROL LS 1 $2,000.00 $2,000.00 N5 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N6 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N7 CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURB,GUTTER, LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 VALLEY GUTTER,SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAYS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS Subtotal: $527,000.00 Part O- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 01 DECORATIVE METAL FENCE AND GATES LS 1 $215,000.00 $215,000.00 02 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS,COMMON LS 1 $136,000.00 $136,000.00 PLANTING REQUIREMENTS, SOIL PREPARATION,SODDING AND PLANTS Subtotal: $351,000.00 Part P- UTILITIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price P1 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LS 1 $180,000.00 $180,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM P2 WATERLINES, PVC PIPES, DUCTILE IRON LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 PIPE AND FITTINGS P3 WATERLINE RISER ASSEMBLIES AND LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 GATE VALVES P4 FIRE HYDRANTS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 P5 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER AND CATCH LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 BASINS Subtotal: $180,000.00 Part R-ALLOWANCES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price R1 BOND AND INSURANCE AL 1 $172,000.00 $172,000.00 R2 ALLOWANCE FOR UNFORSEEN AL 1 $300,000.00 $300,000.00 BUILDING CONDITIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION Subtotal: $472,000.00 PartA-GENERAL No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al MOBILIZATION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 A2 STORM WATER POLLUTION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 PREVENTION A3 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 A4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part B- EXISTING CONDITIONS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B1 DRILLED FOOTINGS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 B2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part C-CONCRETE No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM C1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 C2 CONCRETE FORMS AND LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 REINFORCEMENT C3 CONCRETE FINISHING AND CURING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part D- MASONRY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 UNIT MASONRY MORTAR AND LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 REINFORCING Subtotal: $0.00 Part E- METALS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND METAL LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 FRAMING E2 METAL FABRICATIONS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 E3 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part F-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 F2 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AND LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 COUNTEROPS F3 PLASTIC PANELING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part G-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G1 WATERPROOFING AND COATINGS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 G2 INSULATION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 G3 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM G4 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING,AND ACCESSORIES G5 SEALANTS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part H-OPENINGS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price H1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 H2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 H3 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 H4 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ENTRANCES, LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 CURTAIN WALLS,AND GLAZING H5 DOOR HARDWARE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part I- FINISHES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 11 GYPSUM AND NON-STRUCTURAL METAL LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 FRAMING 12 CERAMIC TILING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 13 RESILIENT BASE AND TILE FLOORING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 14 TILE CARPETING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 15 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 16 PAINTING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part J-SPECIALTIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J1 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 J2 PLAQUES, DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE J3 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM J4 TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 ACCESSORIES J5 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS AND LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 EXTINGUISHERS J6 LOCKERS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 J7 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 J8 CANOPY(EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 DEVICES) Subtotal: $0.00 Part K- FURNISHINGS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price K1 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K2 SEMINAR TABLES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part L- MEP No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price L1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L2 DUCTWORK LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L3 CONTROLS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L4 ELECTRICAL SWITCH GEAR/PANELS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L5 LIGHT FIXTURES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L6 GENERAL GROUNDING/BONDING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L7 LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L8 SITE/UTILITY DUCT AND RACEWAYS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L9 BUILDING RACEWAYS/CIRCUITRY LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L10 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L11 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT/FIXTURES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L12 DWV/WATER PIPING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L13 NATURAL GAS PIPING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 L14 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM Subtotal: Part M-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRICA SAFETY AND SECURITY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price M1 GROUNDING AND BONDING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 M2 UNDERGROUND DUCT AND RACEWAYS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 M3 BACKBONE AND HORIZONTAL CABLING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 M4 AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 M5 ELECTRONIC SECURITY,ACCESS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION M6 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 M7 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 Part N-SITEWORK No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price N1 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N2 SITE EXCAVATION AND FILL LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N3 ROUGH AND SITE GRADING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N4 TERMITE CONTROL LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N5 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N6 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 N7 CONCRETE PAVEMENT,CURB,GUTTER, LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 VALLEY GUTTER,SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAYS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS Subtotal: $0.00 Part O- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 01 DECORATIVE METAL FENCE AND GATES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 02 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS, COMMON LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 PLANTING REQUIREMENTS,SOIL PREPARATION,SODDING AND PLANTS Subtotal: $0.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM Part P- UTILITIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price P1 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 P2 WATERLINES, PVC PIPES, DUCTILE IRON LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 PIPE AND FITTINGS P3 WATERLINE RISER ASSEMBLIES AND LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 GATE VALVES P4 FIRE HYDRANTS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 P5 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER AND CATCH LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 BASINS Subtotal: $0.00 Part Q-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE A -CONCRETE PAVING No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Q1 SUBGRADE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Q2 CONCRETE LS 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 Subtotal: $10,000.00 Part R-ALLOWANCES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price R1 BOND AND INSURANCE AL 1 $0.00 $0.00 R2 ALLOWANCE FOR UNFORSEEN AL 1 $0.00 $0.00 BUILDING CONDITIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION Subtotal: $0.00 CIVCAST RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE Addendum No. 1 12/04/2024 20:46:24 PM CIVCAS, RFB 6107 Far South Police Sub-Station 23177 Report Created On: 12/4/2024 9:36:58 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Plans Drawings/Plans 1 0/31/2024 1 0:58:08 AM Invitation To Bid Invitation to Bid-RFB 6107 10/31/2024 10:58:00 AM Addenda Addendum No. 1 11/22/2024 8:39:40 AM Project Name: POLICE SUBSTATION FAR SOUTH [G.O. BOND 2022] Project Number: 23177 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Joseph Johnson,Assistant Director Construction Management Designer:ITurner I Ramirez Architects By its signature below,Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees,if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: KJM Commercial Inc. DBA Victory Building Team (full legal name of Bidder) Signature. (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: Jeremy Baug (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: Vice President (title of person signing Bid Form) Dig"ay JW dby K-w P."4 Karan Pulorl a Attest- Date:2024.11.2614,40,34-06'00' y (signature) State of Residency: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 113664763 Address for Notices: 402 S Chaparral St. Suite A, Corpus Christi Phone: 361-991-5600 Email: Jbaugh@victorybuildingteam.com Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF FAR SOUTH POLICE SUBSTATION G . O . Bond 2022] Project Number: 23177 0 1852 I TURNER I RAMIREZ A R C H I T E C T S 3751 South Alameda St. Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 361.944.8900 [08/30/2024] Record Drawing Number: PBG-933 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000100 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Page 00 01 02 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev 6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev 3-2023) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work(Rev o-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev 5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Rev5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev 8-2019) Part S Standard Specifications 020100 Survey Monuments 021020 Site Clearing and Stripping 021040 Site Grading 021080 Removing Abandoned Structures 022020 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 022022 Trench Safety for Excavations 022040 Street Excavation 022100 Select Material 022420 Silt Fence Table of Contents 00 0100- 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 025205 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk, & Driveway Replacement 025210 Lime Stabilization 025213 Asphalt Stabilized Base (5-26) 025223 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base 025404 Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions 025412 Prime Coat 025424 Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement 025608 Inlets 025610 Concrete Curb and Gutter 025612 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 025614 Concrete Curb Ramps 025802 Temporary Traffic Control During Construction 025807 Pavement Markings (Paint and Thermoplastic) 025813 Preformed Thermoplastic Striping, Words and Emblems 025816 Raised Pavement Markings 025818 Reference Specification—TxDot DMS-4200 Pavement Markers (reflectorized) 025828 Reference Specification—TxDot DMS-6130 Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Marker 026202 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems 026204 PVC Pipe—Pressure Pipe for Wastewater Force Main, Irrigation System, and Water Tans Line ASTM D2241 026206 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 026210 PVC Pipe—AWWA c900/c905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and Wastewater Force Mains 026402 Waterlines 026404 Water Service Lines 026406 Private Water Services Line (5-112) Form WS-1, Form WS-2, Foundation Exhibit, Site Plan 026409 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves 026411 Gate Valves for Waterlines 026416 Fire Hydrants 027200 Control of Wastewater Flows 027202 Manhole 027203 Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manhole and Structures Table of Contents 00 0100-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 027205 Fiberglass Manhole 027402 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culverts 027602 Gravity Wastewater Lines 027604 Disposal of Waste from Wastewater Cleaning Operations 027606 Wastewater Service Lines 027608 Private Sewer Services 028020 Seeding 028040 Sodding 028300 Fence Relocation 028320 Chain Link Fence 028340 Chain Link Security Fence 030020 Portland Cement Concrete 032020 Reinforcing Steel 038000 Concrete Structures 055420 Frames, Gates, Rings, and Covers Part T Technical Specifications 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 013100 Project Management& Coordination 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 014100 Testing Laboratory Services 014119 Windstorm Construction Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 43 39 Mockups 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Division 02 Existing Conditions 02 37 60 Drilled Footings 02 41 19 Selective Demolition Division 03 Concrete Table of Contents 00 0100-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 033100 Epoxy Related Work Division 04 Masonry 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 23 00 Reinforced Unit Masonry Division 05 Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 20 00 Steel Joists 053100 Steel Roof Deck 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Division 06 Concrete 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Clad Architectural Cabinets 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling (FRP1) Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 19 17 Anti-Graffiti Coatings 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 07 42 13.19 Insulated Metal Window and Wall Panels 07 42 43 Composite Wall Panels 07 52 16 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Table of Contents 00 0100-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section Division 08 Openings 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 16 Interior Aluminum Framing(Litespace) 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 087100 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 91 19 Fixed Louvers Division 09 Finishes 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 26.23 Drywall Ceiling Grid Suspension Systems 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 14 Acoustical Metal Ceilings 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 91 13 Painting 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings(Epoxy) Division 10 Specialties 10 11 00 Visual Display Units 101416 Plaques 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 10 14 23.16 Room Identification Panel Signage Table of Contents 00 0100-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 10 26 00 Wall Corner Protection 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 10 71 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 10 75 16 Ground-Set Flagpoles Division 12 Furnishings 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 12 36 61.16 Solid Surface Countertops 12 56 33 Fixed Seminar Tables Division 22 Plumbing 22 03 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 22 07 00 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 22 08 00 Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 22 14 00 Hangers and Supports 22 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking 22 26 00 Piping Insulation 224100 Plumbing Piping and Valves 22 41 10 Natural Gas Piping 22 43 00 Plumbing Specialties 22 44 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning(HVAC) 23 03 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 23 05 00 Basic Material and Methods 23 05 10 Starting of Systems 23 07 19 DX Piping System Insulation 23 14 00 Hangers, Supports and Anchors 23 17 00 Motors and Motor Controllers Table of Contents 00 0100-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 23 24 00 Sound and Vibration Control 23 26 00 Piping Insulation 23 29 00 Duct Insulation 23 53 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 57 60 HVAC Roof Curbs 23 58 54 DX Fan Coil Unit 23 67 10 Air Cooled Condensing Units 23 78 00 Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units Electric Cooling—Gas Heating 23 86 00 Power Ventilators 23 88 10 Air Distribution Devices 23 88 85 Air Filters 23 89 00 Metal Ductwork 239100 Ductwork Accessories 23 99 00 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Division 26 Electrical 260100 Electrical General Provisions 26 02 01 Coordination Drawings 26 06 00 Grounding 26 07 50 Electrical Identification 26 12 30 Wire and Cable 26 13 60 Raceways 26 14 00 Wire Devices 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 32 00 Natural Gas Engine Generator 26 33 00 Automatic Transfer Switch 26 41 19 Lightning Protection 26 43 13 Surge Protection Devices 26 44 10 Disconnect Switches 265100 Luminaires 26 74 00 Telephone/Data System (Rough-In) 26 75 00 Cable Television System (Rough-In) Table of Contents 00 0100-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section Division 27 Communications 27 10 00 Structured Cabling Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security 28 13 00 Access Control System 283100 Fire Detection &Alarm Division 32 Exterior Improvements 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers 32 90 01 Common Planting Requirements 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 23 Sodding 32 93 00 Plants END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 1/2022 000101 SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT: PHILIP RAMIREZ ED A TURNER,RAMIREZ,&ASSOCIATES 3.R y/ 3751 S.ALAMEDA ST. � rN, A CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411� V 361.994.8900 N 9 1A CO F 361.994.8955 +P E Philip@trarch.com TF O F 8/30/24 STRUCTURAL: ROBERT E.MARTINEZ,P.E. * REM ENGINEERING 2218 BASSE ROAD ROBRT CNMV MARMV SAN ANTONIO,TX 78213 89387 ,_711 �CEk5 V 1210.320.1199 8/5/24 E I robert@remengineeringcorp.com TOE SM APPEAAW, ON IM DOOLU 4T WA5 Ajjrr 1= R IMP ir[ WAR%U, P L /89301 MIPS.Hill PA 6a4� ELECTRICAL: --79'Xm' JOHN RODRIGUES,P.E. NRG ENGINEERING 5656 S STAPLES ST 360 a' JOHN A. RODRiGUE7_ lil� CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 °°°°oo>°°°.9027 °°°°.°°oa°°° V 1361.852.2727 E I jrod@nrgcc.com Seals Page 00 01 01-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 MECHANICAL/PLUMBING: SEAN RODRIGUEZ,P.E. OF NRG ENGINEERING a a 5656 S STAPLES ST 312 m aooaoo*o¢� CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 �ooaooaooaooaooaooaooaooaoo ,+ SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ a°°°°° �478 V 361.852.2727 E Srod@nrgcc.com CIVIL: ;�tt�tti � RAMIRO MUNOZ,III, P.E., MLSE,CWI * i OF MUNOZ ENGINEERING 1608 S. BROWNLEE BLVD. RAMIRO MlJNOZ III f CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78404 ...................................� 14 `"„ V 361.854.3101 iA 184 E ram@munozengrg.com RAMIRO MUNOZ III. P. 100,346 TECHNOLOGY: J�'`pAIONS �.T ALFONSO DELGADO D/ COMBS CONSULTING GROUP �� �;��� G� 1022 RIVER ROAD,#2 Z BOERNE,TEXAS 78006 O w Eric J Porto C7 W BICSI 10#311985 V 210.698.7887 rf c� E adelgado@datacomdesign.com Y D • Seals Page 00 01 01-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 LANDSCAPE: ROBERT GIGNAC GIGNAC LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE 3833 S.STAPLES STE. N119 CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 V 361.853.0795 E gienaclandscape@aol.com END OF SECTION 00 0101 Seals Page 00 01 01-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set, dated 08/05/2024, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications. 00-FRONT END Sheet No. Sheet Name A0.0 COVER A0.00 SHEET INDEX A0.01 CONCEPTUAL RENDERINGS A0.1 2017 A117.1 EXCERPTS A0.2 2017 A117.1 EXCERPTS A0.3 2017 A117.1 EXCERPTS A0.4 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS A0.5A WALL TYPES-(3-5/8") METAL STUDS A0.513 WALL TYPES-MASONRY A0.6 GENERAL NOTES A0.10 CODE INFORMATION A0.11 CODE PLAN 01-CIVIL Sheet No. Sheet Name C1.0 CIVIL NOTES I C1.1 CIVIL NOTES II C1.2 CIVIL NOTES III C1.3 GENERAL TESTING SCHEDULE C2.0 EXISTING CONDITIONS&TOPOGRAPHY PLAN I C2.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS&TOPOGRAPHY PLAN II C3.0 DEMOLITION PLAN C4.0 SITE PLAN C5.0 SITE DIMENSIONAL CONTROL PLAN C6.0 GRADING PLAN C7.0 UTILITY PLAN I C7.1 UTILITY PLAN II C8.0 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION C9.0 STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN C10.0 MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL I C10.1 MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL II C11.0 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI DRIVEWAY STANDARD DETAILS C12.0 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WASTEWATER STANDARD DETAILS C13.0 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WATER STANDARD DETAILS C14.0 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI STORM WATER STANDARD DETAILS C15.0 WATER UTILITY NOTES& DETAILS List of Drawings 00 01 15- 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 02—LANDSCAPE Sheet Name Sheet No. L1.0 LANDSCAPE PLAN L2.0 LANDSCAPE NOTES& DETAILS L3.0 IRRIGATION PLAN L4.0 IRRIGATION NOTES AND DETAILS 03—STRUCTURAL Sheet No. Sheet Name S101 PIER LOCATION PLAN S102 FOUNDATION PLAN S103 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 5201 FOUNDATION DETAILS 5202 FOUNDATION DETAILS 5203 FOUNDATION DETAILS 5301 FRAMING DETAILS 5302 FRAMING DETAILS 5303 FRAMING DETAILS S401 GENERAL NOTES. 04—ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION Sheet No. Sheet Name AD1.0 SITE DEMOLITION 05—ARCHITECTURAL Sheet No. Sheet Name A1.0 OVERALL SITE PLAN A1.1 SITE DETAILS A1.2 SITE DETAILS A2.0 COMPOSITE FLOOR PLAN A2.1 COMPOSITE DIMENSIONAL CONTROL PLAN A3.0 ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS A4.0 PLAN DETAILS A5.0 COMPOSITE ROOF PLAN A5.1 ROOF DETAILS A5.2 ROOF DETAILS A6.0 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A6.1 BUILDING SECTIONS A6.2 BILDING SECTIONS A7.0 WALL SECTIONS A7.1 WALL SECTIONS A7.2 WALL SECTIONS A7.3 ENLARGED WALL DETAILS A7.4 ENLARGED WALL DETAILS A7.5 ENLARGED WALL DETAILS List of Drawings 00 01 15-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A8.0 DOOR SCHEDULE,WINDOW ELEV., & DOOR/FRAME TYPES A8.1 DOOR&WINDOW DETAILS A8.2 DOOR&WINDOW DETAILS A8.3 DOOR&WINDOW DETAILS A8.4 DOOR&WINDOW DETAILS A8.5 DOOR&WINDOW DETAILS A9.0 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A9.1 CEILING DETAILS 06-INTERIORS Sheet No. Sheet Name 11.0 COMPOSITE FLOOR FINISH PLAN 11.1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 12.0 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.4 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 13.0 COMPOSITE EQUIPMENT& FURNITURE PLAN 14.0 MILLWORK DETAILS 14.1 MILLWORK DETAILS 07-MECHANICAL Sheet No. Sheet Name M0.1 MECHANICAL LEGEND M1.1 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN M1.2 MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN M2.1 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M2.2 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M3.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS 08-ELECTRICAL Sheet No. Sheet Name E0.1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E1.1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN E2.1 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E2.2 ELECTRICAL ROOF POWER PLAN E3.1 ELECTRICAL SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLAN E4.1 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E4.2 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM E5.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E5.2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E5.3 ELECTRICAL LEGEND&NOTES 09-PLUMBING Sheet No. Sheet Name List of Drawings 00 01 15-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 P0.1 PLUMBING LEGENDS P1.0 PLUMBING SITE PLAN P1.1 PLUMBING DWV FLOOR PLAN P1.2 PLUMBING WATER FLOOR PLAN P1.3 PLUMBING ROOF PLAN P2.1 PLUMBING SCHEDULES P3.1 PLUMBING DETAILS P4.1 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 10—TECHNOLOGY/ COMMUNICATIONS Sheet No. Sheet Name T000 TECHNOLOGY SYMBOLS&LEGEND T100 TECHNOLOGY SITE PLAN T200 TECHNOLOGY OVERALL RCP T201 TECHNOLOGY LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN T300 TECHNOLOGY ENLARGED VIEWS T400 TECHNOLOGY TYPICAL DETAILS T500 TECHNOLOGY TYPICAL DETAILS 11—AUDIOVISUAL Sheet No. Sheet Name TA000 AUDIOVISUAL SYMBOLS&LEGEND TA200 AUDIOVISUAL OVERALL RCP PLAN TA201 AUDIOVISUAL LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN TA300 AUDIOVISUAL ENLARGED ELEVATIONS TA400 AUDIOVISUAL TYPICAL DETAILS ni inirnnci ini SIGNAL n nkni DIAGRAM NOT USED 12—SECURITY Sheet No. Sheet Name TS000 SECURITY SYMBOLS&LEGEND TS100 SECURITY SITE PLAN TS201 SECURITY LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN TS400 SECURITY TYPICAL DETAILS TS500 SECURITY SCHEDULES END OF DOCUMENT 00 0115 List of Drawings 00 01 15-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 .bus c� 0 v �N�DRPOPPSE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Far South Police Substation Proiect Number 23177 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Turner I Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda St. Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 philip@trarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson,Assistant Director Construction Management 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 josephJ2@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 480 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 510 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ Alternate Bid Item A $ Allowance $ TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE $ Agreement 00 52 23-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Include Wastewater CD Exhibit if Proiect pertains to SSO CD work. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax Entail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 12/2021 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................129 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................130 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site,and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-Vill or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions,and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim,the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at 50% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION, REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work;and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format(PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities. The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CID Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. General Conditions 00 72 00-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to General Conditions 00 72 00-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and,including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Turner Ramirez Architects B. Paragraph 1.01.A.54"Substantial Completion" is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. The Facility is fully functional and is complete for the Owner to fully inhabit and utilize, with the exception of minor Punchlist items. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of[43] rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after [43] rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: a. Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation and Recommendations for the Proposed CoCC Calallen Police Substation, Published by Rock Engineering, Report Number G124021, Dated February 28, 2024] - The Contractor may rely on the following Technical Data in using this document: 1) Subsurface investigation and technical recommendations related to preparation and design of building foundations and pavement sections. 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: None ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises—Operations 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 Per Occurrence S. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑X Required ❑ Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder's Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑X Required ❑ Not Required Installation/Equipment Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- ❑x Required ❑ Not Required owned property Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor's goal is to perform at least 30 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 "GENERAL DECISION NUMBER:TX20240288 01/05/2024 SUPERSEDED GENERAL DECISION NUMBER:TX20230288 STATE:TEXAS CONSTRUCTION TYPE: BUILDING COUNTIES:ARANSAS, NUECES AND SAN PATRICIO COUNTIES IN TEXAS. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (DOES NOT INCLUDE SINGLE FAMILY HOMES OR APARTMENTS UP TO AND INCLUDING 4 STORIES). NOTE: CONTRACTS SUBJECT TO THE DAVIS-BACON ACT ARE GENERALLY REQUIRED TO PAY AT LEAST THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM WAGE RATE REQUIRED UNDER EXECUTIVE ORDER 14026 OR EXECUTIVE ORDER 13658. PLEASE NOTE THAT THESE EXECUTIVE ORDERS APPLY TO COVERED CONTRACTS ENTERED INTO BY THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT THAT ARE SUBJECT TO THE DAVIS-BACON ACT ITSELF, BUT DO NOT APPLY TO CONTRACTS SUBJECT ONLY TO THE DAVIS-BACON RELATED ACTS, INCLUDING THOSE SET FORTH AT 29 CFR 5.1(A)(1). J IF THE CONTRACT IS ENTERED 1. EXECUTIVE ORDER 14026 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 I INTO ON OR AFTER JANUARY 30, 1 GENERALLY APPLIES TO THE 12022, OR THE CONTRACT IS CONTRACT. RENEWED OR EXTENDED (E.G.,AN 1.THE CONTRACTOR MUST PAY OPTION IS EXERCISED)ON OR I ALL COVERED WORKERS AT RAFTER JANUARY 30,2022: 1 LEAST$17.20 PER HOUR(OR THE APPLICABLE WAGE RATE LISTED ON THIS WAGE DETERMINATION, IF IT IS HIGHER) FOR ALL HOURS SPENT PERFORMING ON THE CONTRACT IN 2024. IF THE CONTRACT WAS AWARDED ON 1. EXECUTIVE ORDER 13658 J OR BETWEEN JANUARY 1, 2015 AND I GENERALLY APPLIES TO THE �JANUARY 29, 2022,AND THE I CONTRACT. I CONTRACT IS NOT RENEWED OR THE CONTRACTOR MUST PAY ALL EXTENDED ON OR AFTER JANUARY COVERED WORKERS AT LEAST 130,2022: 1 $12.90 PER HOUR(OR THE APPLICABLE WAGE RATE LISTED ON THIS WAGE DETERMINATION, IF IT IS HIGHER) FOR ALL I HOURS SPENT PERFORMING ON THAT CONTRACT IN 2024. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 THE APPLICABLE EXECUTIVE ORDER MINIMUM WAGE RATE WILL BE ADJUSTED ANNUALLY. IF THIS CONTRACT IS COVERED BY ONE OF THE EXECUTIVE ORDERS AND A CLASSIFICATION CONSIDERED NECESSARY FOR PERFORMANCE OF WORK ON THE CONTRACT DOES NOT APPEAR ON THIS WAGE DETERMINATION,THE CONTRACTOR MUST STILL SUBMIT A CONFORMANCE REQUEST. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS AND WORKER PROTECTIONS UNDER THE EXECUTIVE ORDERS IS AVAILABLE AT HTTP://WWW.DOL.GOV/WH D/GOVCONTRACTS. MODIFICATION NUMBER PUBLICATION DATE 0 01/05/2024 BOIL0074-003 07/01/2023 RATES FRINGES BOILERMAKER......................$37.00 24.64 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO278-002 08/27/2023 RATES FRINGES Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 ELECTRICIAN......................$29.50 8.94 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENG10178-005 06/01/2020 RATES FRINGES POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1)TOWER CRANE.............$32.85 13.10 (2) CRANES WITH PILE DRIVING OR CAISSON ATTACHMENT AND HYDRAULIC CRANE 60 TONS AND ABOVE.....$28.75 10.60 (3) HYDRAULIC CRANES 59 TONS AND UNDER..............$32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- I RON0084-01106/01/2023 RATES FRINGES IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 27.51 8.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 RATES FRINGES Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 BRICKLAYER.......................$20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 ** 0.00 INSULATOR- MECHANICAL (DUCT, PIPE& MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER,STRUCTURAL...........$22.16 5.26 LABORER: COMMON OR GENERAL......$ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: MASON TENDER-BRICK...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: MASON TENDER- CEMENT/CONCRETE..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: PIPELAYER..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: ROOF TEAROFF...........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 OPERATOR: BACKHOE/EXCAVATOR/TRACKHOE.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: BOBCAT/SKID STEER/SKID LOADER................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: BULLDOZER.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: DRILL.................$ 16.22 ** 0.34 OPERATOR: FORKLIFT..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: GRADER/BLADE..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: LOADER................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: MECHANIC..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: PAVER (ASPHALT, AGGREGATE,AND CONCRETE).........$ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: ROLLER................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 PAINTER(BRUSH, ROLLER,AND SPRAY)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 PIPEFITTER.......................$25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER(HVAC DUCT INSTALLATION ONLY)...............$22.73 7.52 SHEET METAL WORKER, EXCLUDES HVAC DUCT INSTALLATION...........$21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: DUMP TRUCK........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: FLATBED TRUCK.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: SEMI-TRAILER TRUCK............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: WATER TRUCK.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS- RECEIVE RATE PRESCRIBED FOR CRAFT PERFORMING OPERATION TO WHICH WELDING IS INCIDENTAL. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- ** WORKERS IN THIS CLASSIFICATION MAY BE ENTITLED TO A HIGHER MINIMUM WAGE UNDER EXECUTIVE ORDER 14026($17.20) OR 13658 ($12.90). PLEASE SEE THE NOTE AT THE TOP OF THE WAGE DETERMINATION FOR MORE INFORMATION. PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE MINIMUM WAGE REQUIREMENTS OF EXECUTIVE ORDER 14026 ARE NOT CURRENTLY BEING ENFORCED AS TO ANY CONTRACT OR SUBCONTRACT TO WHICH THE STATES OF TEXAS, LOUISIANA,OR MISSISSIPPI, INCLUDING THEIR AGENCIES,ARE A PARTY. NOTE: EXECUTIVE ORDER(EO) 13706, ESTABLISHING PAID SICK LEAVE FOR FEDERAL CONTRACTORS APPLIES TO ALL CONTRACTS SUBJECT TO THE DAVIS-BACON ACT FOR WHICH THE CONTRACT IS AWARDED (AND ANY SOLICITATION WAS ISSUED)ON OR AFTER JANUARY 1,2017. IF THIS CONTRACT IS COVERED BY THE EO,THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE EMPLOYEES WITH 1 HOUR OF PAID SICK LEAVE FOR EVERY 30 HOURS THEY WORK, UP TO 56 HOURS OF PAID SICK LEAVE EACH YEAR. EMPLOYEES MUST BE PERMITTED TO USE PAID SICK LEAVE FOR THEIR OWN ILLNESS, INJURY OR OTHER HEALTH-RELATED NEEDS, INCLUDING Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 PREVENTIVE CARE;TO ASSIST A FAMILY MEMBER(OR PERSON WHO IS LIKE FAMILY TO THE EMPLOYEE)WHO IS ILL, INJURED, OR HAS OTHER HEALTH-RELATED NEEDS, INCLUDING PREVENTIVE CARE; OR FOR REASONS RESULTING FROM, OR TO ASSIST A FAMILY MEMBER(OR PERSON WHO IS LIKE FAMILY TO THE EMPLOYEE)WHO IS A VICTIM OF, DOMESTIC VIOLENCE,SEXUAL ASSAULT, OR STALKING. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS AND WORKER PROTECTIONS UNDER THE EO IS AVAILABLE AT HTTPS://W W W.D O L.G OV/AGENCIES/W H D/GOVERNMENT-CONTRACTS. UNLISTED CLASSIFICATIONS NEEDED FOR WORK NOT INCLUDED WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE CLASSIFICATIONS LISTED MAY BE ADDED AFTER AWARD ONLY AS PROVIDED IN THE LABOR STANDARDS CONTRACT CLAUSES (29CFR 5.5 (A) (1) (III)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- THE BODY OF EACH WAGE DETERMINATION LISTS THE CLASSIFICATION AND WAGE RATES THAT HAVE BEEN FOUND TO BE PREVAILING FOR THE CITED TYPE(S)OF CONSTRUCTION IN THE AREA COVERED BY THE WAGE DETERMINATION.THE CLASSIFICATIONS ARE LISTED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER OF""IDENTIFIERS""THAT INDICATE WHETHER THE PARTICULAR RATE IS A UNION RATE (CURRENT UNION NEGOTIATED RATE FOR LOCAL), Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 A SURVEY RATE (WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATE) OR A UNION AVERAGE RATE (WEIGHTED UNION AVERAGE RATE). UNION RATE IDENTIFIERS A FOUR LETTER CLASSIFICATION ABBREVIATION IDENTIFIER ENCLOSED IN DOTTED LINES BEGINNING WITH CHARACTERS OTHER THAN ""SU"" OR ""UAVG"" DENOTES THAT THE UNION CLASSIFICATION AND RATE WERE PREVAILING FOR THAT CLASSIFICATION IN THE SURVEY. EXAMPLE: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM IS AN ABBREVIATION IDENTIFIER OF THE UNION WHICH PREVAILED IN THE SURVEY FOR THIS CLASSIFICATION,WHICH IN THIS EXAMPLE WOULD BE PLUMBERS.0198 INDICATES THE LOCAL UNION NUMBER OR DISTRICT COUNCIL NUMBER WHERE APPLICABLE, I.E., PLUMBERS LOCAL 0198.THE NEXT NUMBER, 005 IN THE EXAMPLE, IS AN INTERNAL NUMBER USED IN PROCESSING THE WAGE DETERMINATION. 07/01/2014 IS THE EFFECTIVE DATE OF THE MOST CURRENT NEGOTIATED RATE,WHICH IN THIS EXAMPLE IS JULY 1, 2014. UNION PREVAILING WAGE RATES ARE UPDATED TO REFLECT ALL RATE CHANGES IN THE COLLECTIVE BARGAINING AGREEMENT(CBA)GOVERNING THIS CLASSIFICATION AND RATE. SURVEY RATE IDENTIFIERS Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-14 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 CLASSIFICATIONS LISTED UNDER THE ""SU"" IDENTIFIER INDICATE THAT NO ONE RATE PREVAILED FOR THIS CLASSIFICATION IN THE SURVEY AND THE PUBLISHED RATE IS DERIVED BY COMPUTING A WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATE BASED ON ALL THE RATES REPORTED IN THE SURVEY FOR THAT CLASSIFICATION. AS THIS WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATE INCLUDES ALL RATES REPORTED IN THE SURVEY, IT MAY INCLUDE BOTH UNION AND NON-UNION RATES. EXAMPLE:SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU INDICATES THE RATES ARE SURVEY RATES BASED ON A WEIGHTED AVERAGE CALCULATION OF RATES AND ARE NOT MAJORITY RATES. LA INDICATES THE STATE OF LOUISIANA. 2012 IS THE YEAR OF SURVEY ON WHICH THESE CLASSIFICATIONS AND RATES ARE BASED.THE NEXT NUMBER,007 IN THE EXAMPLE, IS AN INTERNAL NUMBER USED IN PRODUCING THE WAGE DETERMINATION. 5/13/2014 INDICATES THE SURVEY COMPLETION DATE FOR THE CLASSIFICATIONS AND RATES UNDER THAT IDENTIFIER. SURVEY WAGE RATES ARE NOT UPDATED AND REMAIN IN EFFECT UNTIL A NEW SURVEY IS CONDUCTED. UNION AVERAGE RATE IDENTIFIERS CLASSIFICATION(S) LISTED UNDER THE UAVG IDENTIFIER INDICATE THAT NO SINGLE MAJORITY RATE PREVAILED FOR THOSE CLASSIFICATIONS; HOWEVER, 100%OF THE DATA REPORTED FOR THE CLASSIFICATIONS WAS UNION DATA. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG INDICATES THAT THE RATE IS A WEIGHTED UNION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-15 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 AVERAGE RATE. OH INDICATES THE STATE.THE NEXT NUMBER,0010 IN THE EXAMPLE, IS AN INTERNAL NUMBER USED IN PRODUCING THE WAGE DETERMINATION.08/29/2014 INDICATES THE SURVEY COMPLETION DATE FOR THE CLASSIFICATIONS AND RATES UNDER THAT IDENTIFIER. A UAVG RATE WILL BE UPDATED ONCE A YEAR, USUALLY IN JANUARY OF EACH YEAR,TO REFLECT A WEIGHTED AVERAGE OF THE CURRENT NEGOTIATED/CBA RATE OF THE UNION LOCALS FROM WHICH THE RATE IS BASED. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) HAS THERE BEEN AN INITIAL DECISION IN THE MATTER?THIS CAN BE: * AN EXISTING PUBLISHED WAGE DETERMINATION * A SURVEY UNDERLYING A WAGE DETERMINATION * A WAGE AND HOUR DIVISION LETTER SETTING FORTH A POSITION ON A WAGE DETERMINATION MATTER * A CONFORMANCE(ADDITIONAL CLASSIFICATION AND RATE) RULING Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-16 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 ON SURVEY RELATED MATTERS, INITIAL CONTACT, INCLUDING REQUESTS FOR SUMMARIES OF SURVEYS,SHOULD BE WITH THE WAGE AND HOUR NATIONAL OFFICE BECAUSE NATIONAL OFFICE HAS RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE DAVIS-BACON SURVEY PROGRAM. IF THE RESPONSE FROM THIS INITIAL CONTACT IS NOT SATISFACTORY,THEN THE PROCESS DESCRIBED IN 2.)AND 3.) SHOULD BE FOLLOWED. WITH REGARD TO ANY OTHER MATTER NOT YET RIPE FOR THE FORMAL PROCESS DESCRIBED HERE, INITIAL CONTACT SHOULD BE WITH THE BRANCH OF CONSTRUCTION WAGE DETERMINATIONS. WRITE TO: BRANCH OF CONSTRUCTION WAGE DETERMINATIONS WAGE AND HOUR DIVISION U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 200 CONSTITUTION AVENUE, N.W. WASHINGTON, DC 20210 2.) IF THE ANSWER TO THE QUESTION IN 1.) IS YES,THEN AN INTERESTED PARTY(THOSE AFFECTED BY THE ACTION)CAN REQUEST REVIEW AND RECONSIDERATION FROM THE WAGE AND HOUR ADMINISTRATOR (SEE 29 CFR PART 1.8 AND 29 CFR PART 7).WRITE TO: WAGE AND HOUR ADMINISTRATOR U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 200 CONSTITUTION AVENUE, N.W. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-17 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 WASHINGTON, DC 20210 THE REQUEST SHOULD BE ACCOMPANIED BY A FULL STATEMENT OF THE INTERESTED PARTY'S POSITION AND BY ANY INFORMATION (WAGE PAYMENT DATA, PROJECT DESCRIPTION,AREA PRACTICE MATERIAL, ETC.)THAT THE REQUESTOR CONSIDERS RELEVANT TO THE ISSUE. 3.) IF THE DECISION OF THE ADMINISTRATOR IS NOT FAVORABLE,AN INTERESTED PARTY MAY APPEAL DIRECTLY TO THE ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD (FORMERLY THE WAGE APPEALS BOARD). WRITE TO: ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 200 CONSTITUTION AVENUE, N.W. WASHINGTON, DC 20210 4.)ALL DECISIONS BY THE ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD ARE FINAL. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES B. For the Contractor's convenience,the following telephone numbers are listed: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-18 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Turner I Ramirez Architects 361-994-8900 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after Water/Wastewater/Stormwater hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks & Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div. for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryLi n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Refer to Section 0133 01 Submittal Register. Specification Section Shop Drawing Description Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-19 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Refer to Section 0133 01 Submittal Register. Specification Section Record Data Description END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-20 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 3/2023 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment,tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. The Far South Police Sub-Station will be located on approximately two(2)acres of the 5 acre site at the southwest corner of the Del Mar College Oso Creek campus, 6718 Yorktown Blvd.The facility will be a one story structure with approximately 7,300 square feet of enclosed space that will be designed as a Risk Category IV. Foundation will be a suspended slab supported on drilled piers. Exterior walls shall be load bearing concrete masonry units supporting steel joist roof structure and modified bitumen membrane roof covering. Exterior finishes include CMU veneer, fiber cement composite panels and metal veneer panels. Spaces shall be divided by non-load bearing drywall partitions. Ceilings are a combination of suspended drywall and acoustical tile.Wet areas such as restrooms and showers will have ceramic/porcelain tile floor and wall finishes. Other interior finishes consist of vinyl plank flooring and carpet tile. Sitework includes asphalt and Concrete paving, underground utilities, landscape and irrigation. MEP services include roof top mounted air conditioners, domestic water,sanitary sewer and natural gas service. Electrical and telecommunications shall be underground service. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. Installation of security systems by City's subcontractor. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents,the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. Summary of Work 01 11 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 10/2018 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. Owner furnished,Contractor installed items as listed in the Drawings. 2. Owner furnished, Owner installed items listed in the Drawings. B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 11 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 10/2018 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Lump Sum Bid Items described as "Allowances" have been set as noted in the Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate A-CONCRETE PAVING AND REINFORCING: 1. Subgrade preparation and reinforced concrete paving as specified in Civil Engineering Drawings in lieu of asphalt paving. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10- 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Bid Item R-1 Bonds and Insurance 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. B. Allowance R-2 -ALLOWANCE FOR UNFORSEEN BUILDIING CONDITIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION: 1. The sum of$300,000.00 to be used unforeseen building conditions arising during construction. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and Owner and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50%of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50%completion has occurred, minus retainage. C. Bid Item A-3—General Site Conditions: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. D. Bid Item A-4-Temporary Facilities: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. E. Bid Item B-1—Drilled Footings: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. F. Bid Item B-2—Selective Demolition: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. G. Bid Item C-1—Cast-In-Place Concrete: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 H. Bid Item C-2—Concrete Forms and Reinforcement: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. I. Bid Item C-3—Concrete Finishing and Curing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. J. Bid Item D-1—Unit Masonry Morter and Reinforcing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. K. Bid Item E-1—Structural Steel and Metal Framing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. L. Bid Item E-2—Metal Fabrications: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. M. Bid Item E-3—Cold Formed Metal Framing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. N. Bid Item F-1—Rough Carpentry and Sheathing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. O. Bid Item F-2—Architectural Cabinets and Countertops: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. P. Bid Item F-3—Plastic Paneling: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Q. Bid Item G-1—Waterproofing and Coatings: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. R. Bid Item G-2—Insulation: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. S. Bid Item G-3—Composite Wall Panels: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. T. Bid Item G-4—SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing, Flashing, and Accessories: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. U. Bid Item G-5 -Sealants: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. V. Bid Item H-1—Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 W. Bid Item H-2—Flush Wood Doors: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. X. Bid Item H-3—Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Y. Bid Item H-4—Aluminum Storefront Entrances, Curtain Walls, and Glazing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Z. Bid Item H-5—Door Hardware: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. AA. Bid Item 1-1—Gypsum and Non-Structural Metal Framing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. BB. Bid Item 1-2—Ceramic Tiling: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. CC. Bid Item 1-3—Resilient Base and Tile Flooring: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. DD. Bid Item 1-4—Tile Carpeting: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. EE. Bid Item 1-5—Acoustical Ceilings: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. FF. Bid Item 1-6—Painting: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. GG. Bid Item J-1—Visual Display Units: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. HH. Bid Item J-2—Plaques, Dimensional Letters and Room-Identification Panel Signage: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. 11. Bid Item J-3—Wall and Door Protection: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. JJ. Bid Item J-4—Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. KK. Bid Item J-5—Fire Protection Cabinets and Extinguishers: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 LL. Bid Item J-6—Lockers: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. MM.Bid Item J-7—Ground-Set Flagpoles: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. NN. Bid Item J-8—Canopy(Exterior Sun Control Devices): 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. 00. Bid Item K-1—Roller Window Shades: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. PP. Bid Item K-2—Seminar Tables: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. QQ. Bid Item L-1— Mechanical Equipment: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. RR. Bid Item L-2— Ductwork: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. SS. Bid Item L-3—Controls: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. TT. Bid Item L-4— Electrical Switch Gear/Panels: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. UU. Bid Item L-5— Light Fixtures: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. VV. Bid Item L-6—General Grounding/Bonding: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. WW. Bid Item L-7— Lighting Protection System: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. XX. Bid Item L-8—Site/Utility Duct and Raceways: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. YY. Bid Item L-9— Building Raceways/Circuitry: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. ZZ. Bid Item L-10—Emergency Power Generator: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 AAA. Bid Item L-11—Plumbing Equipment/Fixtures: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. BBB.Bid Item L-12—DWV/Water Piping: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. CCC.Bid Item L-13—Natural Gas Piping: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. DDD. Bid Item L-14—Adjusting and Balancing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. EEE. Bid Item M-1—Grounding and Bonding: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. FFF. Bid Item M-2—Underground Duct and Raceways: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. GGG. Bid Item M-3—Backbone and Horizontal Cabling: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. HHH. Bid Item M-4—Audio Visual Infrastructure: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. III. Bid Item M-5—Electronic Security,Access Control and Intrusion Detection: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. JJJ. Bid Item M-6—Video Surveillance: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. KKK.Bid Item M-7—Fire Detection and Alarm System: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. LLL. Bid Item N-1—Soils for Earthwork: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. MMM. Bid Item N-2—Site Excavation and Fill: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. NNN. Bid Item N-3—Rough and Site Grading: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. 000. Bid Item N-4—Termite Control: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 PPP. Bid Item N-5—Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. QQQ. Bid Item N-6—Lime Stabilized Subgrade: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. RRR.Bid Item N-7—Concrete Pavement,Asphalt Pavement, Curb Gutter,Valley Gutter, Sidewalk, Driveways and Pavement Markings: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. SSS. Bid Item 0-1— Decorative Metal Fence and Gates: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. TTT. Bid Item 0-2 — Underground Sprinklers, Common Planting Requirements, Soil Preparation, Sodding, and Plants: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. UUU. Bid Item P-1—Reinforced Concrete Pipe: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. VVV.Bid Item P-2—Waterlines, PVC Pipes, Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 WWW. Bid Item P-3—Waterline Riser Assemblies and Gate Valves: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. XXX.Bid Item P-4—Fire Hydrants: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. YYY. Bid Item P-5—Gravity Sanitary Sewer and Catch Basins: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. ZZZ. Bid Item Q-1—Subgrade: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. AAAA. Bid Item Q-2—Concrete Paving and Reinforcing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. BBBB. Bid Item R-1—: Bonds and Insurance: 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically forthis Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. CCCC. Bid Item R-2—Allowances for Unforeseen Building Conditions During Construction: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01- 12 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. DDDD. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01- 13 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 5/2020 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 0133 015ubmittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample None 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.4 Record Data Sample None 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample None 04 23 00 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 1.3 Shop Drawing None None 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.5 Shop Drawing None None 05 20 00 STEEL JOISTS 1.4 Shop Drawing None None 05 31 00 STEEL ROOF DECK 1.5 Shop Drawing None None 05 31 00 STEEL ROOF DECK 1.5 Record Data None None 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 1.3 Record Data None None 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 1.3 Shop Drawing None None 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 1.3 Record Data None None 06 16 00 SHEATHING 1.2 Record Data None None 06 41 16 PLASTIC LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.2 Shop Drawing Sample None 06 41 16 PLASTIC LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.2 Record Data None None 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING FRP1 1.3 Record Data Sample None 07 13 26 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 1.2 Record Data None None 07 19 17 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATINGS 1.2 Record Data None None 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 1.2 Record Data None None 07 52 16 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 1.3 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.5 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.5 Record Data None None 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 1.6-1.8 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 1.6-1.8 Record Data None None 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 1.2-1.4 Record Data None None 078443 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 1.2-1.4 Record Data None 0&M Manual 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 1.2-1.4 Record Data Sample O&M Manual 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.2 Shop Drawing None None 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.2 Record Data None None 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1.2 Shop Drawing None None 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1.2 Record Data None None 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 1.2 Record Data None None 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 1.2-1.4 Shop Drawing None O&M Manual 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 1.2 Record Data None None 084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.3-1.5 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.3 Record Data None None 08 80 00 GLAZING 1.3-1.6 Record Data Sample O&M Manual 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1.3 Record Data None None 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 1.2-1.3 Record Data Sample None 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 1.3 None Mockup None 093013 CERAMICTILING 1.2 Record Data Sample None 093013 CERAMICTILING 1.3 None Mockup None 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1.2-1.4 Record Data Sample O&M Manual 09 51 14 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 1.2-1.4 Record Data Sample O&M Manual 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1..2 Record Data Sample None 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1.2-1.3 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 1.2-1.5 Record Data Sample O&M Manual 099113 PAINTING 1.4 Record Data Sample None 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 1.2-1.4 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 1.2-1.4 Record Data None None 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 1.2-1.4 Shop Drawing Sample None 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 1.2-1.4 Record Data None None 10 14 23.16 ROOM IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2-1.4 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 10 14 23.16 ROOM IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2-1.4 Record Data None None 10 26 00 WALL CORNER PROTECTION 1.3 Record Data Sample None 10 28 00 TOILET BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 1.2-1.5 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1.2-1.3 Shop Drawing None O&M Manual 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1.2-1.3 Record Data None None 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS 1.2-1.4 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual Submittal Register 0133 01-Page 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 10/2018 Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1.2-1.3 Record Data None None 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS 1.2-1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS 1.2-1.4 Record Data None None 10 71 13 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 1.4 Record Data Sample None 10 71 13 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 1.4 Shop Drawing None None 10 75 16 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES 1.2-1.3 Record Data None 0&M Manual 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 1.2 Record Data Sample O&M Manual 12 36 61.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 1.2-1.3 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 12 36 61.16 ISOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 1.2-1.3 Record Data None None 12 56 33 FIXED SEMINAR TABLES 1.2 Record Data Sample None 22 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 1.3 Record Data None O&M Manual 22 14 00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1.05 Shop Drawing None None 22 26 00 PIPING INSULATION 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 22 26 00 PIPING INSULATION 1.04 Record Data None None 22 41 00 PLUMBING AND PIPING AND VALVES 1.04 Record Data None None 22 43 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 1.05 Record Data None None 224400 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.04 Shoo Drawing None O&M Manual 224400 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.04 Record Data None None 224500 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 1.04-1.05 Shop Drawing None O&M Manual 224500 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 1.04 Record Data None None 23 07 19 DX PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION 1.03 Record Data None None 23 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1.05 Shop Drawing None None 23 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1.05 Record Data None None 23 17 00 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 23 17 00 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 1.04 Record Data None None 23 24 00 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONROL 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 23 24 00 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONROL 1.04 Record Data None None 23 26 00 PIPING INSULATION 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 23 26 00 PIPING INSULATION 1.04 Record Data None None 23 29 00 DUCT INSULATION 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 23 29 00 DUCT INSULATION 1.04 Record Data None None 23 57 60 HVAC ROOF CURBS 1.3 Shop Drawing None None 23 57 60 HVAC ROOF CURBS 1.3 Record Data None None 23 86 00 POWER VENTILATORS 1.04 Shop Drawing None 0&M Manual 23 86 00 POWER VENTILATORS 1.04 Record Data None None 23 88 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 1.04 Shop Drawing None O&M Manual 23 88 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 1.04 Record Data None None 23 89 00 METAL DUCTWORK 1.05 Shop Drawing None O&M Manual 23 91 00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 1.04 Shop Drawing None O&M Manual 23 91 00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 1.04 Record Data None None 26 06 00 GROUNDING 1.03-1.04 Record Data None None 26 07 50 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1.03 Record Data None None 26 12 30 WIRE&CABLE 1.03-1.04 Record Data None None 26 13 60 RACEWAYS 1.03-1.04 Record Data None None 26 14 00 WIRE DEVICES 1.03 Record Data None None 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 1.03-1.04 Record Data None None 26 32 00 NG GENERATOR 1.4 Shop Drawing None None 26 32 00 NG GENERATOR 1.4 Record Data None None 26 33 00 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 26 33 00 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 1.04 Record Data None None 264100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION C Shop Drawing None None 264100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION C Record Data None None 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 1.3 Shop Drawing None None 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 1.3 Record Data None None 264410 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 264410 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1.04 Record Data None None 26 51 00 LIGHTING 1 1.04 1 Shop Drawing None None 26 51 00 LIGHTING 1.04 Record Data None None Submittal Register 0133 01-Page 2 of 3 Northwest Police Substation-23176 Rev 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 27 10 00 STRUCTURED CABLING 1.04 Record Data None None 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 1.04 Record Data None 0&M Manual 28 13 00 JACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 28 23 00 IVIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 1.04 Shop Drawing None I 0&M Manual 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 1.04 Record Data None None 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION&ALARM 1.4 Shop Drawing None 0&M Manual 32 31 19 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 1.3-1.4 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 32 31 19 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 1.3 Record Data None None 32 84 23 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 1.04 Record Data None O&M Manual 32 90 01 ICOMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS 1.3 None None 0&M Manual 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION 1.4 Record Data Sample O&M Manual 32 92 23 SODDING 1.2 Record Data None 0&M Manual 32 93 00 PLANTS 1.3 None Sample O&M Manual Submittal Register 0133 01-Page 3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 10/2018 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: 1. N/A. B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and Special Procedures 0135 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 10/2018 C. Submit plan [1 month] prior to beginning the Work. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Liquidated Critical Operation Max.Time Hours Operation Damages Out of Operation can be Shut Down ($ per hour) B. Submit a written plan of action per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner's normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. E. Liquidated damages will be assessed if Work on critical operations is not completed within the time indicated. 1. Not applicable F. Designated Critical Operations are described in more detail as follows: 1. Critical Operation 1—N/A 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. Not Applicable. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 0135 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 10/2018 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. 3. Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times,and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor.The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings,sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs,framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 0157 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. S. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 0157 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 0157 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 0157 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Oso Creek. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER—Not Applicable H. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be US Ecology(USET)in Robstown,Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi,Texas. I. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for Temporary Controls 01 57 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.13 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Owner shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 01 57 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 Rev 8/2019 SECTION 020100 SURVEY MONUMENTS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing and installing survey monuments as required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS a) Brass Monument Marker: 21/4" diameter brass disk with 31/2" anchor rod to be provided by the City. b) Concrete: Class A, in accordance with Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". c) Rebar: No. 5 deformed bar, 3'/2 feet long, in accordance with Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The location of survey markers shall be established in the field by the Engineer and/or his representative Surveyor. The Engineer and/or his representative Surveyor will provide four off-set stakes with intersecting string line for precise location of horizontal alignment to which the brass disk shall be positioned. The Contractor shall excavate hole and set formwork. Forms shall be placed to a tolerance which allows the precise position of the brass disk to be within one inch of the center of the concrete base. The Contractor shall place concrete in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". At the appropriate time, the Contractor shall place the brass disk(provided by the City) to its precise position in the uncured concrete. The brass disk shall be placed to within 1/4" tolerance of its intended location. Positioning of the base and brass disk will be checked by the Engineer and/or his representative Surveyor. Non-compliance with specified tolerances shall result in replacement at the Contractor's expense. The properly furnished survey monument shall be neat in appearance with the exposed brass face free of cement mortar and constructed to an elevation of approximately one inch of finished grade. (See Survey Markers Detail on the following page.) 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, survey monuments shall be measured as individual units for each monument placed. Payment shall be at the unit price bid, which price shall constitute full compensation for all work, materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals required to install the survey monuments complete in-place. 020100 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 I�TJ 1 SILVER SOLDER 6R 1 I I/2"O.D.X .065 M 1 14 B.a S.GA. i BRASS TUBING V a I 3141 DISC DETAIL Mts. A A O —� PLAN 12� TOP ELEV. APPROX. I N 8-V2" ABOVE NATURAL GROUND--,,, ' �� I"CHAMFER _ • • REBAR 2" CLEAR NO. 5 REBAR 3!-6"LONG =� CLASS CONCRETE SECTION A-A SURVEY MARKERS DETAIL 020100 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 021020 SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for clearing, grubbing and stripping of objectionable matter as required to complete the project, and shall include removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter as indicated on the drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. Tree stumps and roots shall be grubbed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below natural ground or 2 feet below base of subgrade, whichever is lower. Areas that underlie compacted backfill shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top six (6) inches of the soil. All material removed from the site under this operation shall become the Contractor's responsibility. The material shall be disposed of either at a disposal site indicated on the drawings or at a disposal site obtained by the Contractor. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site clearing and stripping or clear right-of-way shall be measured by the acre. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for removing,handling, and disposing of objectionable matter from the site as indicated above. 021020 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 021040 SITE GRADING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for backfill and grading of the site to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to site grading, the site shall be cleared in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 021020 "Site Clearing and Stripping". Unless specified otherwise on the drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six (6) inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with fill required to bring the site to the required grades and elevations indicated on the plans. Fill shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content. Fill shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade in layers not to exceed six (6) inches of uncompacted depth, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of natural ground unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction. All irregularities, depressions and soft spots that develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. Excess material from excavation, which is not incorporated into the site as fill, shall be become property of the Contractor and disposed of away from the job site, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site grading shall not be measured for pay,but shall be considered subsidiary to other work. 021040 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 021080 REMOVING ABANDONED STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall provide for the demolition,removal and disposal of abandoned structures or portions of abandoned structures, as noted on the drawings, and shall include all excavation and backfilling necessary to complete the removal. The work shall be done in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. 2. METHOD OF REMOVAL Culverts or Sewers. Pipe shall be removed by careful excavation of all dirt on top and the sides in such manner that the pipe will not be damaged. Removal of sewer appurtenances shall be included for removal with the pipe. Those pipes which are deemed unsatisfactory for reuse by the Engineer may be removed in any manner the Contractor may select. Concrete Structures. Unwanted concrete structures or concrete portions of structures shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the drawings, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure outside of the limits designated for removal which is damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be restored to its original condition at the Contractor's entire expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing. Portions of the abandoned structure shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure, outside of the limits designated for removal, damaged during the operations of the Contractor, shall be restored to its original condition entirely at the Contractor's expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer,in writing. Concrete portions of structures below the permanent ground line, which will not interfere in any manner with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least five (5) feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Reinforcement shall be cut off close to the concrete. Steel Structures. Steel structures or steel portions of structures shall be dismantled in sections as determined by the Engineer. The sections shall be stored if the members are to be salvaged and reused. Rivets and bolts connecting steel railing members, steel beams of beam spans and steel stringers of truss spans, shall be removed by butting the heads with a "cold cut" and punching or drilling from the hole, or by such other method that will not injure the members for re-use and will meet the approval of the Engineer. The removal of rivets and bolts from connections of truss 021080 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 members, bracing members, and other similar members in the structure will not be required unless specifically called for on the plans or special provisions, and the Contractor shall have the option of dismantling these members by flame-cutting the members immediately adjacent to the connections. Flame-cutting will not be permitted, however, when the plans or special provisions call for the structure unit to be salvaged in such manner as to permit re-erection. In such case, all members shall be carefully matchmarked with paint in accordance with diagrams furnished by the Engineer prior to dismantling, and all rivets and bolts shall be removed from the connections in the manner specified in the first portion of this paragraph. Timber Structures. Timber structures or timber portions of structures to be reused shall be removed in such manner as to damage the timber for further use as little as possible. All bolts and nails shall be removed from such lumber as deemed salvable by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, timber piles shall be either pulled or cut off at the point not less than five (5) feet below ground line, with the choice between these two methods resting with the Contractor,unless otherwise specified. Brick or Stone Structures. Unwanted brick or stone structures or stone portions of structures shall be removed. Portions of such structures below the permanent ground line, which will not in any manner interfere with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least five (5) feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Salvage. All material such as pipe, timbers, railings, etc., which the Engineer deems as salvable for reuse, and all salvaged structural steel, shall be delivered to a designated storage area. Materials, other than structural steel, which are not deemed salvable by the Engineer, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed to suitable disposal sites off of the right-of-way arranged for by the Contractor, or otherwise disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Where temporary structures are necessary for a detour adjacent to the present structure, the Contractor will be permitted to use the material in the old structure for the detour structure, but he shall dismantle and stack or dispose of the material as required above as soon as the new structure is opened for traffic. Backfill. All excavations made in connection with this specification and all openings below the natural ground line caused by the removal of abandoned structures or portions thereof shall be backfilled to the level of the original ground line, unless otherwise provided on the drawings. Backfill in accordance with applicable requirements of Sections 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" and 022080 "Embankment". All open ends of abandoned pipe or other structures shall be filled or plugged as specified. That portion of the backfill which will support any portion of the roadbed, embankment, levee, or other structural feature shall be placed in layers of the same depth as those required for placing 021080 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 embankment, maximum 10" loose lifts unless otherwise specified. Material in each layer shall be wetted uniformly, if required, and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density, unless otherwise specified. In places inaccessible to blading and rolling equipment, mechanical or hand tamps or rammers shall be used to obtain the required compaction. That portion of the backfill which will not support any portion of the roadbed, embankment, or other structural feature shall be placed as directed by the Engineer in such manner and to such state of compaction as will preclude objectionable amount of settlement, maximum 10" loose lifts to minimum 95% Standard Proctor density unless otherwise specified. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the work governed by this specification shall not be measured for pay,but shall be subsidiary to the project. 021080 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022020 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for excavation and backfill for utilities required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION (1) Unless otherwise specified on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, all pipe and conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (refer to Section 022022 "Trench Safety for Excavations" of the City Standard Specifications). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall not have more than 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specifications. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material is encountered during the excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the drawings. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water,the Contractor,prior to additional excavation, shall control it. After stable conditions have been achieved,unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height;and to a depth equal to the height of pipe, 6 inches minimum,for pipes less then 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer,and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. (2) Shaping of Trench Bottom. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated on the plans and specifications. 022020 Page 1 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 (3) Dewatering Trench. Pipe or conduit shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit planing operation to insure a relatively dry (no standing water), firm bed. The trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing,pumping, or by installation of well-points,as conditions warrant. Removal of well- points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). The Contractor shall prevent groundwater from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storm water system. Groundwater from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, if applicable, and disposed of, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022021 "Control of Ground Water". (4) Excavation in Streets. Excavation in streets,together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface, shall be in accordance with drawing detail or as required by other applicable specifications. (5) Removing Abandoned Structures. When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility,such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance,the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned, these lines shall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. (6) Protection of Utilities. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas lines. Such lines,if broken, shall be restored promptly by the Contractor. When active wastewater lines are cut in the trenching operations, temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding line of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. The Contractor shall not hold the City liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. (7) Excess Excavated Material. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed by the Contractor from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved. 022020 Page 2 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 (8) Backfill A. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe (Initial Backfill) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipe as applicable shall be granular material as shown on the standard details or as described in the applicable specification section, and shall be free of large hard lumps or other debris. If indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with cement-stabilized sand backfill as described below. The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench,in layers not to exceed ten(10)inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to a density comparable to the adjacent undisturbed soil or as otherwise specified on the plans,but not less than 95%Standard Proctor density. A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12) inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe (Final Backfill) UNPAVED AREAS: The backfill for that portion of trench over one(1)foot above the pipe or conduit not located under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains and reinforced concrete storm water pipe) shall be imported select material or clean, excess material from the excavation meeting the following requirements: Free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Moisture Content: +/-3% Backfill material shall be placed in layers not more than ten (10) inches in depth (loose measurement),wetted if required to obtain proper compaction,and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95%Standard Proctor density,unless otherwise indicated. Flooding of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill may only be allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer. Regardless of backfill method, no lift shall exceed 10 inches and density shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. A period of not less than twenty-four (24)hours shall elapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four (4) feet of backfill. If jetting is used, the top four (4) feet of backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698). PAVED AREAS: At utility line crossings under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains, and reinforced concrete stone water pipe), and where otherwise indicated on the drawings, trenches shall be backfilled as shown below: From top of initial backfill (typically twelve (12) inches above top of the pipe)to three (3) feet below bottom of road base course, backfill shall be select material meeting the requirements of 022100 "Select Material". 022020 Page 3 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 Asphalt Roadway The upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course shall be backfilled to the bottom of the road base course with cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of 2 sacks of Standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand and compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Concrete Roadways The Contractor may elect to backfill the upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course with cement stabilized sand as noted above, or in the case of storm water pipe or box installation the Contractor may backfill and compact select material to 98% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698) following City Standard Specification Section 022100. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, excavation and backfill for utilities, including select material or cement-stabilized sand backfill, shall not be measured and paid for separately. It shall be considered subsidiary to the items for which the excavation and backfill is required. 022020 Page 4 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 022022 TRENCH SAFETY FOR EXCAVATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for providing for worker safety in excavations and trenching operations required to complete the project. 2. REQUIREMENTS Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavations. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the City or Engineer or Consultant, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City and Engineer and Consultant from all damages and costs that may result from failure of methods or equipment used by the Contractor to provide for worker safety. Trenches, as used herein, shall apply to any excavation into which structures, utilities, or sewers are placed regardless of depth. Trench Safety Plan, as used herein, shall apply to all methods and materials used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement of Trench Safety shall be by the linear foot of trench, regardless of depth. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of the trench. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Utility Structures shall be per each excavation. Excavations include, but are not limited to, those for manholes, vaults, pits and other such structures that are incidental to utility work. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Special Structures shall be per each excavation or by the lump sum for each special structure identified in the Proposal. Payment shall be at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all work, equipment, materials, personnel, and incidentals as required to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for the project. Revision current for Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C. Trench Safety. 022022 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022040 STREET EXCAVATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Street Excavation required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (A) Stripping and Excavation Strip the top 6 inches in all areas to underlay compacted fill, curbs, base or pavement, by removing all humus, vegetation and other unsuitable materials. Unless otherwise noted, remove existing trees, shrubs, fences, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drives, paving, pipe and structures and other items within the graded area which interfere with new construction of finished grading. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc., as directed by the Engineer, provided that the material meets the requirements for roadway embankment as specified in Article 3 below. Unwanted or unsuitable roadway excavation and roadway excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him outside the limits of the right-of-way at a location suitable to the Engineer. "Unsuitable" material encountered below subgrade elevation in roadway cuts, when declared unwanted by the Engineer, shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer with suitable material from the roadway excavation or with other suitable material. Maintain moisture and density until covered and protected by the subbase or base course. Remove soft or wet areas found at any time, replace with suitable material, and recompact (especially utility trenches). (B) Subgrade Preparation That area shown on the drawings for street construction shall be cut to grade, scarified to a depth not less than 6 inches, or as otherwise indicated on the drawings, and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) to within 0 to +3% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than I in 5 of the most recent moisture or density tests is beyond+I% deviation from the required moisture or density requirement. Irregularities exceeding %2 inch in 16 feet shall be corrected. Soft areas found at anytime shall be removed, replaced with suitable material and compacted (especially at utility trenches). The correct moisture density relationship shall be maintained until the subgrade is protected. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the subgrade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted and refinished and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 022040 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 (C) Curb Backfill and Topsoil (Sidewalks, Parkways, Islands, etc.) Fill and compact areas behind curbs and adjacent to sidewalks and driveways within 48 hours after completion of concrete work. The top 6 inches (where disturbed by construction or where unsatisfactory material is exposed by excavation) of finish earth grade shall be clean excavated material or topsoil capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. It shall be free of concrete, asphalt, shell, caliche, debris and any other material that detracts from its appearance or hampers the growth of grass. Topsoil shall meet the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 028020 "Seeding". (D) Matching Grades at Right-of-Way Line Finish grade at the property line shall be as shown on the drawings. The Engineer may require a reasonable amount of filling on private property where the sidewalk grade is above the property elevation. Use suitable material from the excavation. Unless otherwise directed, cuts at right-of- way lines shall be made at a slope of three horizontal to one vertical (3:1) or flatter. (E) Drainage During construction, the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in such condition as to insure proper drainage at all times, and ditches and channels shall be so constructed and maintained as to avoid damage to the roadway section. All slopes which, in the judgment of the Engineer, require variation, shall be accurately shaped, and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes. All breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as directed. 3. SELECTION OF ROADBED MATERIALS Where shown on the plans, Select Material shall be utilized to improve the roadbed, in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately, and deposited in the roadway within limits and at elevations required. Material used for roadway embankment shall meet the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022100 Select Material. 4. GEOGRID If indicated on the drawings, geogrid shall be placed in the base layer according to the pavement details to provide a mechanically-stabilized aggregate base layer within the pavement structure. Geogrid shall be "Tensar TX5 Triaxial Geogrid", or pre-approved equivalent. Use (and approval) of a different product must be supported by documentation showing that the alternate pavement section will meet or exceed the required number of 18-kip equivalent single axle loads (ESAL) and structural number (SN) over the stated pavement design life, and the pavement design must be sealed and signed by a Texas professional engineer. Documentation must also include the structural design value used for the geogrid structural contribution, based on and supported by 022040 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 validated test data. Alternate pavement designs shall utilize the same structural design values for other pavement structural components (HMAC, base, sub-base) as used in the original pavement design, and the pavement designs must be approved by the Engineer and the geotechnical consultant. Contractor shall take care to protect geogrid from damage. Overlap edges of geogrid in accordance with the manufacturer's recominendations, but not less than 12 inches. Do not drive tracked equipment directly on the geogrid. Provide at least 6 inches of compacted aggregate base material over the geogrid before driving any tracked equipment over the geogrid area. Standard highway- legal rubber-tired trucks may drive over the geogrid at very slow speeds (less than 5 mph). Avoid turns and sudden starts and stops when driving on the geogrid. Any damaged geogrid shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. Proper replacement shall consist of replacing the affected area adding 3 feet of geogrid in each direction beyond the limits of the affected area. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, street excavation shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings including excavation for street transitions. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, borrow material and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, compacted subgrade shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, borrow material and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, geogrid shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings, excluding overlaps. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work. All work required for disposing of waste, including hauling will not be paid for directly but shall be considered subsidiary to the various contract items. 022040 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022100 SELECT MATERIAL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the use of Select Material to be used to treat designated sections of roadways, embankments, trenches, etc. Select material shalt be non-expansive sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC), in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487). Select Material shall meet the following requirements: Free of vegetation,hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Liquid Limit(L.L.): < 35 Plasticity Index (P.I.)Range: 8 to 20 Moisture Content: as specified in the drawings 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Select material shall be mixed uniforrnly and placed in layers as indicated, not to exceed 10 inches loose depth (or 12 inches maximum for sanitary sewer trench backfill per City Standard Details for Sanitary Sewers). Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. The finished surface of the select material shall conform to the grade and section shown on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, select material shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 022100 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 022420 SILT FENCE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for providing and installing silt fencing required to control sedimentation and erosion during construction of the project. 2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Geotextile shall meet the requirements for temporary silt fence per AASHTO M288. B. Fence Reinforcement Materials: Silt fence reinforcement shall be one of the following systems. Type 1: Self-Supported Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8- 1/2 feet apart, and geotextile without net reinforcement. Fence posts shall be a minimum of 42 inches long, embedded at least one (1) foot into the ground, and constructed of either wood or steel. Soft wood posts shall be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inches in cross section and essentially straight. Hardwood posts shall be a minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 inches in cross section. Fabric attachment may be by staples or locking plastic ties at least every 6 inches, or by sewn vertical pockets. Steel posts shall be T or L shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot. Attachment shall be by pockets or by plastic ties if the posts have suitable projections. Type 2: Net-Reinforced Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8-1/2 feet apart, and geotextile with an attached reinforcing net. Fence posts shall meet the requirements of Self-Supported Fence. Net reinforcement shall be galvanized welded wire mesh of at least 12.5-gauge wire with maximum opening size of 4 x 2 inches. The fabric shall be attached to the top of the net by crimping or cord at least every 2 feet, or as otherwise specified. Type 3: Triangular Filter Dike - This system consists of a rigid wire mesh, at least 6-gauge, fonned into an equilateral triangle cross-sectional shape with sides measuring 18 inches, wrapped with geotextile silt fence fabric. The fabric shall be continuously wrapped around the dike, with a skirt extending at least 12 inches from its upslope corner. C. Packaging Requirements: Prior to installation, the fabric shall be protected from damage due to ultraviolet light and moisture by either wrappers or inside storage. 022420 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 D. Certification and Identification: Each lot or shipment shall be accompanied by a certification of conformance to this specification. The shipment must be identified by a ticket or by labels securely affixed to the fabric rolls. This ticket or label must list the following information: a. Name of manufacturer or supplier b. Brand name and style C. Manufacturer's lot number or control number d. Roll size (length and width) e. Chemical composition 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, silt fence shall be measured by the linear foot. Payment shall be at the bid price for the unit of measurement specified and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, placing, maintaining and removing the silt fence. 022420 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025205 PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the removal and replacing of all types of pavements and surfacing required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions used along with this specification shall conform to the respective following specifications: City Standard Specifications Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" Section 022100 "Select Material" Section 025223 "Crushed Limestone Flexible Base" Section 025424 "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" Section 025610 "Concrete Curb and Gutter" Section 025612 "Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways" Section 025620 "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement" Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Class "A" Concrete Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel" Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. METHOD OF CUTTING The outline of the trench shall be marked upon the surface of the pavement to be cut,and all cuts into the pavement shall be saw-cut as nearly vertical as it is possible to make them. All unwanted materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor and shall not be used as backfill material. 4. BACKFILL OF TRENCH Excavation and backfilling of trench shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." 025205 Page 1 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 5. REPLACING STREET AND OTHER PAVEMENT All pavements, driveways, sidewalks, and curbs and gutters which are cut shall be replaced in a workmanlike manner,with like or better materials or per pavement repair details to be provided on the drawings. Pavement cuts in a street for any utility requires a permit from the Director of Development Services in accordance with City Ordinance 030040, Article III Cuts and Excavations (12-17-2013). The installation of a utility that crosses the ROW at a perpendicular or near perpendicular angle and has an OD of 6" or less will not be permitted to be installed by cutting the road section. Street excavation/cut for a utility in an asphalt roadway shall include a full lane overlay or pavement repair for parallel cuts, or a 12' wide pavement repair for perpendicular cuts. Street excavation/cut for a utility in a concrete roadway shall include full panel replacement. The drawings and/or permit application should include a site specific pavement cut and restoration plan that indicates the general nature of the pavement and roadway (for examples, concrete arterial, asphalt residential) to be cut and restored, the existing pavement section (if known), the location and approximate area of the excavation/pavement repair, including the approximate length and width of the pavement repair in relation to the roadway travel lane(s). 6. REPLACING DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT On all concrete driveway pavements,the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class"A"concrete slab with a minimum thickness of six(6)inches. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old pavement. Reinforcement shall be #4 bars at 12 inches each way with additional diagonal bars as indicated on the drawings. Any other type shall be replaced with like or better replacement. Replacement shall, in general, be to original joint or score mark. 7. REPLACING SIDEWALKS On all sidewalk pavements,the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class"A"concrete slab four (4)inches thick. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old sidewalk. Replacement shall,in general,be to original joint or score marks. Reinforcement shall be 4" x 4" - W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric located at mid-depth in the slab. 8. REPLACING CURB AND GUTTER On all curb and gutter, the replacement shall consist of a section conforming in all details to the original section or to City of Corpus Christi Standard curb and gutter section, if required by the Engineer. Cuts through the curb shall be replaced with Class "A" concrete. Preserve the original steel reinforcing and reinforce all new curbs with three#4 bars. Adjust grades for positive drainage. Replacement shall,in general,be to original joint or score mark. For jointed concrete roadways,the joints in curb or in curb and gutter should match the concrete roadway joints. 025205 Page 2 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 9. REPAIRING STREET SHOULDERS AND UNIMPROVED STREETS On streets or roads without curb and gutter where a shoulder is disturbed, it shall be restored to like or better condition. The shoulder surface shall be rolled to an acceptably stable condition. The requirements of City Ordinance 030040 as stated above apply also to unimproved streets unless a specific variance is granted by the Director of Development Services. 10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,pavement repair shall be measured by the square yard of the type of repair specified; curb and gutter replacement shall be measured by the linear foot; and sidewalk and driveway replacement shall each be measured by the square foot. Payment will be made at the unit price bid for the completed work and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials,equipment,tools,and incidentals required to complete the work. No separate measurement or payment will be made for subgrade compaction, sand leveling course, geogrid, ordinary backfill, cement-stabilized sand backfill, flexible base,prime coat,hot-mix asphaltic concrete, etc. 025205 Page 3 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 SECTION 025210 LIME STABILIZATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of treating the subgrade, subbase or base by the pulverizing, addition of lime, mixing and compacting the mixed material to the required density. This specification applies to natural ground, embankment, existing pavement structure or proposed base, and shall be constructed as specified herein and in conformity with the typical sections, lines and grades as shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer. 2. MATERIALS (1) The lime shall be a commercially produced "Hydrated Lime" in accordance with AASHTO M216, or in accordance with TxDOT Specification Item 260. The specifications apply specifically to the normal hydrate of lime made from "high- calcium" type limestone. Hydrated lime for stabilization purposes shall be applied as a slurry. (2) Lime to be used for the treated subgrade, existing subbase, existing base or proposed base is determined by preliminary tests and shall be applied at a rate indicated on the drawings, but no less than 6%. 3. EQUIPMENT The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper prosecution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of construction operations. All machinery, tools and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. Hydrated lime shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before distribution on the roadbed. If storage bins are used, they shall be completely enclosed. Hydrated lime in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground dampness. If lime is furnished in trucks, each truck shall have the weight of lime certified on public scales. If lime is furnished in bags, each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight. Bags varying more than 5 percent from that weight may be rejected and the average weight of bags in any shipment, as shown by weighing 50 bags taken at random, shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight. 025210 Page 1 of 4 Rev.10-30-2014 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS General - It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of lime, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements. Application - Lime shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, lime shall be applied at a rate in pounds of dry-hydrated lime per square yard, in the form of a slurry. Application rate may be varied by the Engineer, if conditions warrant,but no less than 6%must be applied. Certification of lime quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of dry hydrated lime, CA(OH)2- The application and mixing of lime with the material shall be accomplished by the method hereinafter described. The lime shall be mixed with water in trucks with approved distributors and applied as a thin water suspension or slurry. Mixing- The mixing procedure shall be as hereinafter described. (a) First Mixing: The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Engineer, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. Materials containing plastic clays or other material which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application, brought to the proper moisture content and left to cure I to 4 days as directed by the Engineer. During the curing period, the material shall be kept moist as directed. (b) Final Mixing: After the required curing time, the material shall be unifonnly mixed by approved methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that, when all nonslaking aggregates retained on the No. 4 sieve are removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements when tested dry by laboratory sieves: 025210 Page 2 of 4 Rev.10-30-2014 Percent Minimum Passing 1" Sieve.................................................. 100 Minimum Passing No. 4 Sieve............................................. 85 Old bituminous wearing surface shall be pulverized so that 100%will pass a 2 %2" sieve. During the interval of time between applications and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of 6 hours or more, or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing, will not be accepted for payment. Compaction- Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case later than 3 calendar days after final mixing, unless approval is obtained from the Engineer. The material shall be aerated or sprinkled as necessary to provide the optimum moisture. Compaction shall begin at the bottom and shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with lime as previously specified. The first layer of the material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. The course shall be sprinkled as required to maintain moisture content on the wet side of optimum and compacted to the extent necessary to provide the specified density. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, all lime treated subgrades, sub-bases, and bases that are not in direct contact with surface or binder course shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density (AASHTO T99), unless otherwise specified. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the plans shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. After each section is completed, tests, as necessary, will be made by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements. Rework, when required to meet pulverization requirements or density requirements, shall include the addition of lime, about 10% to 15% of the initial application rate, or as deemed necessary by the Engineer. A new optimum density will be obtained. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface, upon completion, shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the drawings and to the established lines and grades. 025210 Page 3 of 4 Rev.10-30-2014 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, lime stabilization for bases, sub-bases and subgrade shall be measured by the square yard of lime-stabilized material in place. Pulverizing, mixing, watering grading, compacting, working material etc., shall not be measured for pay but shall be subsidiary to other work. Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the completion of work. 025210 Page 4 of 4 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025213 ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE (5-26) 1 . DESCRIPTION "Asphalt Stabilized Base" shall consist of base courses, subbase courses, or foundation courses to be composed of a compacted mixture of mineral aggregate and asphaltic material mixed hot in a mixing plant. 2 . MATERIALS (a) Asphalt: Asphalt for the mixture shall be of the type and grade as determined by the Engineer and shall meet the requirements of Section 025404 entitled "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" . (b) Tack Coat: The asphaltic material for tack coat shall meet the requirements for emulsified asphalt EA-11M or shall be a cutback asphalt made by combining 50 to 70 percent by volume of the asphaltic material specified for the paving mixture with 30 to 50 percent by volume of gasoline or kerosene. Asphaltic materials shall meet the requirements of Section 025404 entitled "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" . (c) Mineral Aggregate: The material shall consist of durable coarse aggregate particles, crushed or uncrushed, with approved binding materials and screened as necessary to meet the following gradation requirements. Percent Retained Square Sieve Size By Weight 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-1/411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-75 #40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-85 The mineral aggregate shall also meet the following physical requirements. Wet Ball Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 max. Plasticity Index (P.I. ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 max. Liquid Limit (L.L. ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 max. Sand equivalent value shall not he less than 40 Testing of mineral aggregates shall be in accordance with the appropriate Texas Highway Department standard laboratory test procedures. 3. MIXTURE The mixture shall be uniform and shall contain 6.0 percent by weight of asphaltic material. Samples of the material, when tested, shall not vary from the designated asphalt content by more than 0.5 percent dry weight (based on total mixture) . 4 . EQUIPMENT Equipment used in mixing, spreading, finishing, and compacting the material shall conform to the requirements of Section 025424 entitled "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement", Subsection 4 entitled "Equipment" . 025213 R-8/17/81 Page 1 of 2 5. STOCKPILING, STORAGE, PROPORTIONING, AND MIXING These requirements shall be as specified in Section 025424, Subsection 5. 6. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Construction methods shall conform to the requirements of Section 025424, Subsection 6. 7 . MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Asphalt stabilized base shall be measured by the square yard. Payment shall be made at the contract unit bid price, per square yard, and shall constitute full compensation for all labor, material, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt stabilized base course in accordance with this specification and to the lines, grades, thickness, and typical section shown on the plans. 025213 R-8/17/81 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 025223 CRUSHED LIMESTONE FLEXIBLE BASE 1. DESCRIPTION This Specification shall govern all work for furnishing and placing Crushed Limestone Flexible Base required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL Crushed Limestone Flexible Base shall consist of crushed limestone produced from oversize quarried aggregate, sized by crushing and produced from a naturally occurring single source, meeting the requirements for Type `A' material as specified in Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Specification Item 247 "Flexible Base". Crushed gravel or uncrushed gravel shall not be acceptable. No blending of sources and/or additive materials will be allowed. The material shall be free of vegetation and shall be approved by the Engineer. All acceptable material shall be screened and the oversize shall be crushed and returned to the screened material in such a manner that a uniform product will be produced which meets all of the physical requirements for Grade 1-2 as specified in TxDOT Specification Item 247 "Flexible Base". 3. TESTING The City will engage a laboratory and pay for one test each gradation, liquid limit,plasticity index, modified proctor, moisture-density relation, CBR, and necessary field densities. The Engineer may call for additional tests at any time. The cost of all retests, in case of failure to meet specifications, will be deducted from the Contractor's payment. The City will pay for proctor and soil constants and abrasion tests at the rate described in the materials testing schedule. If material changes, the Contractor shall pay the cost of additional tests required by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing and/or lime admix for small amounts for unimportant uses. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to placement of flexible base, the surface of the previous underlying course shall be finished true to line and grade as established, and in conformity with the typical section shown on the drawings. Grade tolerance shall be generally 1/2 inch, and highs and lows must approximately balance. If called for in the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents, geogrid, as specified in City Standard Specification Section 022040 "Street Excavation", shall be placed as indicated. Flexible base shall be delivered and spread the same day if possible (no later than the next day). Base shall be mixed as required to produce a uniform mixture with water. Base shall be placed in uniform lifts not to exceed 10 inch loose lifts or 8 inch compacted lifts. Moisture and density requirements shall be as indicated on the drawings, typical minimum 98% Modified Proctor 025223 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 (ASTM D1557) under flexible pavements or typical minimum 98% Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) under concrete pavement and to within ± 2% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent moisture or density tests is outside of the specified limits, and the failed test is within±1% deviation from specified moisture or density requirements. The surface of the compacted base, after meeting moisture and density requirements, shall be primed in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat". On completion of compaction and priming, the surface shall be smooth and conform to lines, grades, and sections shown on the drawings. Areas with any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross-section and in lengths of 16 feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material,reshaping, and recompacting by repriming and rolling. Moisture and density shall be maintained until the paving is complete. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the base, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted, refinished, and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, crushed limestone flexible base shall be measured by the square yard complete in place. Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, royalty, hauling, placing, compacting, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the completion of work. Prime shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. Geogrid shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. 025223 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025404 ASPHALTS, OILS AND EMULSIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for asphalt cement, cut-back and emulsified asphalts, performance-graded asphalt binders, and other miscellaneous asphaltic materials required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS When tested according to Texas Department of Transportation Test Methods,the various materials shall meet the applicable requirements of TxDOT Specification Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" (Latest Edition). 3. STORAGE, HEATING AND APPLICATION TEMPERATURES Store and apply asphaltic materials in accordance with TxDOT Item 300 (Latest Edition) at the lowest temperature yielding satisfactory results. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for any agitation requirements in storage and in application and storage temperatures. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,asphalts, oils and emulsions shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 025404 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025412 PRIME COAT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of an application of asphalt material on the completed base course and/or other approved area in accordance with this specification. Prime Coat shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60' F and falling, but it may be applied when the air temperature is above 50'F and is rising; the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Asphalt material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not suitable. 2. MATERIALS The asphalt material used for the prime coat shall be MC-30 medium-curing cutback asphalt or AE- P asphalt emulsion prime, unless otherwise specified, and when tested by approved laboratory methods shall meet the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 025404 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions". Blotter material shall be native sand. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the area and/or base is satisfactory to receive the prime coat, the surface shall be cleaned of dirt, dust, and other deleterious matter by sweeping or other approved methods. If found necessary by the Engineer, the surface shall be lightly sprinkled with water just prior to application of the asphalt material. The asphalt material shall be applied on the clean surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified, evenly and smoothly under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the asphalt material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor, for determining the rate at which it is applied, and for securing uniformity at the junction of two distributor loads. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling asphalt material shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times, and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the asphalt material with foreign material. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times. The distributor shall have been recently calibrated and the Engineer shall be furnished an accurate and satisfactory record of such calibration. After beginning of the work, should the yield on the asphalt material applied appear to be in error, the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer before proceeding with the work. Prime shall be applied at a temperature within the recommended range per City Standard 025412 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 Specification Section 025404 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions", with that range being 70 to 150 degrees F. Application rate shall be not less than 0.15 gallon per square yard, unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the Engineer accepts the work. No traffic hauling or placement of any subsequent courses shall be permitted over the freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Engineer. Spread blotter material before allowing traffic to use a primed surface. Allow sufficient time for the prime coat to cure properly before applying surface treatment or asphaltic concrete pavement. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, prime coat shall be measured by the gallon of asphalt material applied. Payment shall include furnishing, heating, hauling and distributing the asphalt material as specified; for furnishing, spreading and removing sand blotter material; for all freight involved; and for all manipulation, labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025412 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025424 HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT (Class A) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing and laying Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete (HMAC) surface, binder and base courses required to complete the project. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Ague ante. The aggregate shall consist of a blend of course aggregate, fine aggregate and, if required, a mineral filler. 2.1.1. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of that fraction of aggregate retained on a No. 10 sieve and shall consist of crushed furnace slag, crushed stone, or crushed gravel. Deleterious material in course aggregate shall not exceed 2% per TxDOT Test Method TEX-217-F. Course aggregate shall be crushed such that a minimum of 85%of the particles have more than one crushed face, unless noted otherwise on the plans. Los Angeles abrasion losses for course aggregate shall not exceed 40%by weight for the surface course and 45%for the binder and base courses per TxDOT Test Method TEX-410-A. Polish Value not less than 30 for aggregate used in the surface course per TxDOT Test Method TEX-438-A. 2.1.2. Fine Aggregate is defined as the fraction passing a No. 10 sieve and shall be of uniform quality. Fine aggregate shall consist of screenings of material that pass the Los Angeles abrasion requirements in paragraph 2.1.1 above. Screenings shall be blended with a maximum of 15% uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type D mixes, or a maximum of 10%uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type A, B, and C mixes. Grading of fine aggregate shall be as follows: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight No. 10 100 No. 200 0-15 025424 Page 1 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 2.1.3 Filler shall consist of dry stone dust,Portland cement,hydrated lime, or other mineral dust approved by the Engineer. Grading of filler shall be as follows: Sieve Size Minimum Percent Passing by Wei No. 30 95 No. 80 75 No. 200 55 2.2. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement(RAP). Reclaimed asphalt pavement maybe incorporated into the hot mix asphalt concrete furnished for the project, provided that the mixture is designed per the TxDOT Methods and meets the applicable provisions of said TxDOT Item 340 and this specification. 2.3. Asphalt. Asphalt Material shall be in accordance with Standard Specification Section 025404 "Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions" and AASHTO. 2.3.1. Paving Mixture: APPLICATION ASPHALT GRADE Residential or low volume PG 64-22 Collector Surface Course PG 70-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Arterial Surface Course PG 76-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Base Courses PG 64-22 2.3.2. Tack Coat shall consist of an emulsion, SS-1 diluted with equal volume of water and applied at a rate ranging from 0.05 to 0.15 gallon per square yard. 3. PAVING MIXTURE 3.1. Mix Design. The mixture shall be designed in accordance with TxDOT Bulletin C-14 and TxDOT Test Method TEX-204-F to conform to the requirements of this specification. The Contractor shall furnish the mix design for the job-mix to be used for the project,unless shown otherwise on the drawings. The mix design shall be submitted prior to placement of the mixture. The design procedures are actually intended to result at a job-mix with properties in compliance with these specifications,and when properly placed the j ob-mix will be durable 025424 Page 2 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 and stable. The sieve analysis of the job-mix shall be within the range of the Master Gradation and Tolerances specified herein. The job-mix shall meet the density and stability requirements as specified and shall be included with the mix design as submitted per above. If the specific gravity of any of the types of aggregates differs by more than 0.3,use volume method. Plot sieve analysis of job-mix; percent passing versus size on four-cycle semi-log paper or other appropriate type paper. Show tolerance limits and Limits of Master Gradation. 3.2. Master Gradation of A rye_ante. The aggregate for the type of mix specified shall be within the following tabulated limits per TxDOT Test Method TEX-200-F (Dry Sieve Analysis): Type Sieve A B C D Size Course Fine Course Fine Base Base Surface Surface 1-1/2" 100 1-1/4" 95-100 1" 100 7/8" 70-90 95-100 100 5/8" 75-95 95-100 1/2" 50-70 100 3/8" 60-80 70-85 85-100 1/4" No. 4 30-50 40-60 43-63 50-70 No. 10 20-34 27-40 30-40 32-42 No. 40 5-20 10-25 10-25 11-26 No. 80 2-12 3-13 3-13 4-14 No. 200 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* VMA minimum 11 12 13 14 025424 Page 3 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 * 2-8 when TxDOT Test Method Tex-200-F,Part II(Washed Sieve Analysis)is used. 3.3. Tolerances. The mixture delivered to the job site shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances specified below. The gradation of the produced mix shall not fall outside the Master Grading Limits, with the following exceptions: for Type B material coarser than 3/8"and for Type D material coarser than#4. Variations from job-mix shall not exceed the following limits, except as noted above: Item: Tolerances Percent by Weight or Volume 1" to No. 10 Plus or Minus 5.0 No. 40 to No. 200 Plus or Minus 3.0 Asphalt Weight Plus or Minus 0.5 Asphalt Volume Plus or Minus 1.2 3.4. Mix Properties. The mixture shall have a minimum Hveem stability of 40 for Type A, B, and C mixes, and 35 for Type D mixes per TxDOT Test Method TEX-208-F at an optimum density of 96% (plus or minus 1.5) of theoretical maximum density per TxDOT Test Methods TEX-227-F and TEX-207-F. 3.5. Sampling and Testing of Raw Materials. The Contractor shall sample materials as necessary to produce a mix in compliance with these specifications. 4. EQUIPMENT 4.1. MixingPlants.lants. Mixing plants shall be either the weigh batching type or the drum mix type. Both types shall be equipped with satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, aggregate screens and bins (weigh batch only), and pollution control devices as required. 4.2. Truck Scales. A set of truck scales, if needed for measurement, shall be placed at a location approved by the Engineer. 4.3. Asphalt Material Heating Equipment. Asphalt material heating equipment shall be adequate to heat the required amount of material to the desired temperature. Agitation with steam or air will not be permitted. The heating apparatus shall be equipped with a recording thermometer with a 24-hour continuous chart that will record the temperature of the asphalt at the highest temperature. 4.4. Surge-Storage_System. A surge-storage system may be used provided that the mixture coming out of the bins is of equal quality to that coming out of the mixer. The system shall be equipped with a gob hopper, rotating chute or other devices designed to minimize segregation of the asphalt mixture. 4.5. Laydown Machine. The laydown machine shall be capable of producing a surface that will meet the requirements of the typical cross section, of adequate power to propel the 025424 Page 4 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 delivery vehicles,and produce the surface tolerances herein required. It shall be wide enough to lay a 28-foot street(back-to-back of curbs)in a maximum of two passes. 4.6. Rollers. All rollers shall be self-propelled and of any type capable of obtaining the required density. Rollers shall be in satisfactory operating condition and free from fuel, hydraulic fluid, or any other fluid leaks. 5. STORAGE, PROPORTIONING AND MIXING 5.1. Storaize and Heatingof f Asphalt Materials. Asphalt cement shall not be heated to a temperature in excess of that recommended by the producer. Asphalt storage equipment shall be maintained in a clean condition and operated in such a manner that there will be no contamination with foreign matter. 5.2. Feeding and Dnjng of Aggregates. The feeding of various sizes of aggregate to the dryer shall be done in such a manner that a uniform and constant flow of materials in the required proportions will be maintained. In no case shall the aggregate be introduced into the mixing unit at a temperature in excess of 350 degrees F. 5.3. Proportioning. All materials shall be handled and proportioned in a manner that yield an acceptable mixture as herein specified and as defined by the 'o, b-mix. 5.4. Mixing. 5.4.1. Weigh Batch Plant. In charging the weigh box and in charging the pugmill from the weigh box, such methods or devices shall be used as necessary to minimize segregation of the mixture. 5.4.2. Drum Mix Plant. The amount of aggregate and asphalt cement entering the mixer and the rate of travel through the mixer shall be coordinated so that a uniform mixture of the desired gradation and asphalt content will be produced. 5.4.3. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall not vary from the joJ b-mix by more than the tolerances and restrictions herein specified. The mixture when discharged from the plant shall have a moisture content not greater than one percent by weight of total mix when detennined by TxDOT Test Method TEX-212-F. 5.4.4. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall be at a temperature between 250 and 325 degrees F. After a target mixing temperature has been established, the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall not vary from this temperature by more than 25 degrees F. 6. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 6.1. Construction Conditions. For mat thicknesses greater than 1.5 inches, the asphalt material may be placed with a laydown machine when the air temperature is 40 degrees F and 025424 Page 5 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 rising but not when the air temperature is 50 degrees F and falling. In addition,mat thickness less than and including 1.5 inches shall not be placed when the temperature of the surface on which the mat is placed is below 50 degrees F. All subsurface utilities shall be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to paving. 6.2. Prime Coat. If a prime coat is required, it shall be applied and paid for as a separate item conforming to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat", except the application temperature shall be as provided above. The tack coat or asphaltic concrete shall not be applied on a previously primed flexible base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6.3. Tack Coat. Before the asphalt mixture is laid,the surface upon which the tack coat is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be given a uniform application of tack coat using materials and rates herein specified and/or as shown on the plans. The tack coat shall be rolled with a pneumatic tire roller as necessary. Tack coat is required before any pavement course not placed immediately following the previous course placement. 6.4. Transporting Asphalt Concrete. The asphalt mixture shall be hauled to the job site in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign matter. In cool weather or for long hauls, canvas covers and insulated truck beds may be necessary. The inside of the bed may be given a light coating of lime water or other suitable release agent necessary to prevent from adhering. Diesel oil is not allowed. 6.5. Placing. The asphalt mixture shall be spread on the approved prepared surface with a laydown machine or other approved equipment in such a manner that when properly compacted, the finished surface will be smooth and of uniform density, and meet the requirements of the typical cross section as shown on the plans. 6.5.1. Flush Structures. Adjacent to flush curbs, gutters, liners and structures, the surface shall be finished uniformly high so that when compacted, it will be slightly above the edge of the curb and flush structure. 6.5.2. Construction joints of successive courses of asphaltic material shall be offset at least six inches. Construction joints on surface courses shall coincide with lane lines, or as directed by the Engineer,but shall not be in the anticipated wheel path of the roadway. 6.6. Compacting. The asphalt mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the necessary rollers to obtain the required density and surface tolerances herein described and any requirements as shown on the plans. Regardless of the method of compaction control followed, all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175 degrees F. 025424 Page 6 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 6.7. In-Place Density. In-place density control is required for all mixtures except for thin, irregular level-up courses. Material should be compacted to between 96% and 92% of maximum theoretical density or between 4% and 8% air voids. Average density shall be greater than 92%and no individual determination shall be lower than 90%. Testing shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods TEX-207-F and TEX-227-F. Pavement specimens,which shall be either cores or sections of the compacted mixture,will be tested as required to determine the percent air voids. Other methods, such as nuclear determination of in-place density,which correlate satisfactorily with actual project specimens may be used when approved by the Engineer. 6.8. Thickness. The total compacted average thickness of the combined HMAC courses shall not be less than the amount specified on the drawings. No more than 10% of the measured thickness(es)shall be more than 1/4 inch less than the plan thickness(es). If so,the quantity for pay shall be decreased as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 6.9. Surface Smoothness Criteria and Tests. The pavement surface after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established lines, grade and cross-section. The surface shall be tested by the City with the Mays Roughness Meter. The Mays Roughness Value for each 600-foot section shall not exceed ninety inches per mile per traffic lane. For each 600-foot section not meeting this criteria, the Engineer shall have the option of requiring that section to be reworked to meet the criteria,or paying an adjusted unit price for the surface course. The unit price adjustment shall be made on the following basis: Adjusted Unit Price= (Adjustment Factor) X Surface Course Unit Bid Price The adjustment factor shall be: For Residential Streets: Adjustment Factor= 1.999 - 0.0111 M For All Other Class Streets (Non Residential) Adjustment Factor= 1.287 - 0.0143 M Where M=Mays Roughness Value In no case shall the Contractor be paid more than the unit bid price. If the surface course is an inverted penetration (surface treatment) the Mays Roughness Value observed will be reduced by ten inches per mile,prior to applying the above criteria. Localized defects (obvious settlements, humps, ridges, etc.) shall be tested with a ten-foot straightedge placed parallel to the roadway centerline. The maximum deviation shall not 025424 Page 7 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 exceed 1/8 inch in ten feet. Areas not meeting this criteria shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Pavement areas having surface irregularities, segregation, raveling or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the Engineer shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. 6.10. Opening to Traffic. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Engineer. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subject to the State laws governing traffic on highways. If the surface ravels, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, hot mix asphaltic concrete pavement shall be measured by the square yard of the type and thickness of"Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete" as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of the "pay ticket" identifying the truck and showing the gross empty weight of the truck with driver as it arrives at the plant and the gross loaded weight of the truck with driver as it leaves the plant. The measured amount will be the difference of the loaded and empty trucks converted to tons. Payment shall be full compensation for quarrying,furnishing all materials,freight involved; for all heating, mixing, hauling, cleaning the existing base course or pavement, tack coat, placing asphaltic concrete mixture, rolling and finishing; and for all manipulations, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work except prime coat when required. Prime coat,performed where required,will be measured and paid for in accordance with the provisions governing City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat". All templates, straightedges, scales, and other weight and measuring devices necessary for the proper construction, measuring and checking of the work shall be furnished, operated and maintained by the Contractor at his expense. Any paving placed prior to inspection,testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. Pavement that fails to meet the in place density criteria may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense,or such pavement may, at the City's discretion, be accepted by the City and the unit price for payment shall be reduced as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 025424 Page 8 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025608 INLETS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of inlets complete in place and the materials used therein, including the installation, and the furnishing of frames, grates,rings and covers. 2. TYPES The various types of inlets are designated on the drawings by letters or by numbers indicating the particular design of each. Each type shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings and to the depth required by the profiles and schedules given. 3. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. Concrete for curb inlets shall be Class "A" concrete conforming to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", and City Standard Specification Section 030020 'Portland Cement Concrete", except as otherwise provided on the drawings. Concrete for grate inlets, drop inlets and post inlets shall be Class "C" concrete in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (2) Mortar. Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland cement and two parts clean, sharp mortar sand suitably graded for the purpose by conforming in other respects to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 'Portland Cement Concrete" for fine aggregate. Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added to the mix but in no case shall it exceed 10 percent by weight of the total dry mix. (3) Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". (4) Concrete Blocks. Concrete blocks, when shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 139. (5) Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers. Frames, grates, rings and covers shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 055420 "Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers". (6) Cast Iron. Cast iron for supports and inlet units shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown on the plans. The castings shall be clean and perfect, free from sand or blow holes or other defects. Cast iron castings shall conform to the requirements of"Gray Iron Castings" ASTM A 48, Class 30. 025608 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1) General. All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", unless otherwise specified. Forins will be required for all concrete walls, except where the nature of the surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face. (2) Inlets for Precast Concrete Pipe Sewers. The construction of inlets for precast concrete pipe sewers shall be done as soon as is practicable after sewer lines into or through inlet locations are completed. All sewers shall be cut neatly at the inside face of the walls of inlet and pointed up with mortar. Subgrade under cast-in-place and precast inlets shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. (3) Inverts. The inverts passing out or through the inlet shall be shaped and routed across the floor of inlet as shown on the plans. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. (4) Finishing Complete Inlets. Inlets shall be completed in accordance with the drawings. Backfilling to finish grade elevation with native material, free of debris and compacted to over 95% Standard Proctor density. Backfilling shall be in accordance with the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities". 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, inlets shall be measured as individual units by each inlet, complete in place. Extension to inlets will be measured by each extension separately from the inlet. Excavation, backfill, frames, grates, rings and covers will be considered subsidiary to the construction of the inlets. Payments shall be full compensation for furnishing all concrete, reinforcing steel, mortar, castings, frames, grates, rings and covers, and for all other materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to perform the work prescribed above. 025608 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025610 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of Portland cement concrete combined concrete curb and gutter or separate concrete curb with or without reinforcing steel as required, constructed on an approved subgrade or foundation material in accordance with these specifications, in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this specification shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020 'Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 'Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be redwood material meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The foundation shall be excavated and shaped to line, grade and cross-section, and hand tamped and sprinkled. If dry, the subgrade or foundation material shall be sprinkled lightly with water and compacted to not less than 98% Standard Proctor density, or as required on the drawings. Flexible base shall be compacted to specified density and moisture inunediately before concrete is deposited thereon. Outside forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight, free of warp, and of a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. They shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. Inside forms for the curb shall be approved material, shall be of such design as to provide the curb required, and shall be rigidly attached to the outside forms. For reinforced concrete roadways, all jointing must be reflected through the curb, including redwood expansion joints and construction joints. Driveway gutter shall be placed integrally with the driveway as shown on the City Standard Details. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the typical details. Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Concrete for curb and gutter shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The curb and gutter shall be placed in sections of the length indicated on the plans, and each section shall be separated by a premolded insert or board joint of cross-section specified for the curb and gutter, and of the thickness indicated on the drawings. 025610 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 After the concrete has been struck off and after it has become sufficiently set, the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly worked with a wooden float. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius indicated on the drawings. All exposed surfaces of curb and gutter, or curb, shall be brushed to a smooth and unifonn surface. The completed curb and gutter shall be cured with Type 2, white pigmented curing compound unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. The area behind the curb shall be backfilled, tamped, and sloped as directed as soon as possible and no later than 48 hours after the removal of forms. Backfill shall be placed to the full height of the curb, or as otherwise specified. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, concrete curb and gutter or concrete curb will be measured by the linear foot for each type of curb, complete in place. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including reinforcing steel and expansion joint material; for furnishing,placing, shaping and tamping backfill; and for all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025610 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025612 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of sidewalks and driveways, with or without reinforcing steel, composed of Portland cement concrete,constructed as herein specified on an approved subgrade,in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and the details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Materials and proportions used in construction under this item shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class"A"concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 'Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be redwood meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000"Concrete Structures". Cap seal shall be "Greenstreak" or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be excavated, compacted and shaped to line, grade and cross-section and hand tamped and sprinkled with water. Subgrade under concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. The subgrade shall be within 0-3% of optimum moisture content at the time the concrete is placed. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight, free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. They shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the drawings. Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Driveways shall incorporate the gutter in a unified concrete placement as shown in the City Standard Detail for driveways. Sidewalks shall be constructed in sections of the lengths shown on drawings. Unless otherwise provided by the drawings,no section shall be of a length less than 8 feet, and any section less than 8 feet shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. 025612 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 The different sections shall be separated by a premolded insert or board j oint of the thickness shown on the drawings, placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. Where the sidewalk or driveways abut a curb or retaining wall, approved expansion joint material shall be placed along their entire length. Similar expansion joint material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through sidewalks or driveways. Concrete shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer,placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden float to a gritty texture. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with approved tools to the radii shown on drawings. 5-foot wide sidewalks shall be marked into separate sections, each 5 feet in length, by the use of approved jointing tools. For other widths of sidewalk,joints to be spaced longitudinally to match the transverse width. When completed, the sidewalks and driveways shall be cured with Type 2,white pigmented curing compound. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be measured by the square foot of surface area of completed sidewalks, driveways, or sidewalks and driveways, as indicated on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing and compacting the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including concrete, reinforcing steel and expansion joint material; and for all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025612 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025614 CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for constructing Concrete Curb Ramps required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Concrete shall be Class "A" in accordance with Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete"of the City Standard Specifications. Reinforcement shall be 4x4 -W2.9xW2.9 welded wire fabric or#4 steel reinforcing bars spaced at 12 inches each way in accordance with Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel" of the City Standard Specifications. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade and cross-section, and shall be of uniform density and moisture when concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be hand tamped and sprinkled with water to achieve the desired consistency and uniform support. Subgrade compaction shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Ramps shall be constructed of Class "A" concrete to line and section as shown on the plans. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, ramps shall have a minimum concrete thickness in excess of 5 inches,prior to application of the detectable warning surfacing. Slopes, S, shall be as follows, unless shown otherwise on the drawings: RAMPS Ramp in direction of travel . . . . . S < 1:12 Side slope of ramp (flare) . . . . . S < 1:10 Cross slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100 < S < 1:50 ADJOINING AREAS Landings adjacent to ramp . . . . . . S < 1:20 Driveways abutting tied sidewalks . . S < 1:10 Width of ramp shall be 60 inches(minimum),exclusive of flare,unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. No ramp shall be less than 36 inches wide under any circumstances. Obstructions 025614 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 shall be removed or relocated, as appropriate, or the location of the ramp may be shifted, if authorized. Detectable warning surface shall be polymer composite material detectable warning panels as shown on the drawings. Surfacing shall be flush with abutting areas and placed using a template as required to achieve an esthetic well-defined edge. Surfacing shall be subsidiary work and will not be measured for separate pay. Pavement markings for street crossings shall be placed such that the crosswalk is properly aligned with respect to the curb ramp. See striping details for proper alignment of pavement markings with respect to intersection and curb ramp. Properly constructed curb ramp shall be true to line, section and grade, and shall be free of loose material and irregularities. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,concrete curb ramps shall be measured by the horizontal square foot of ramp surface area, including side flares when used. Adjoining curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and driveways will be excluded from said measurement. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, subgrade preparation, formwork, concrete, rebar, detectable warning surfaces,borders, molding and curing required to complete the curb ramp, and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 025614 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025802 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROLS DURING CONSTRUCTION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for Temporary Traffic Controls during construction. The work shall include furnishing, installing, moving, replacing, and maintaining all temporary traffic controls including, but not limited to, barricades, signs, barriers, cones, lights, signals, temporary detours, temporary striping and markers, flagger, temporary drainage pipes and structures, blue business signs, and such temporary devices as necessary to safely complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Traffic control devices shall conform to the latest edition of the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices",unless indicated otherwise on the Traffic Control Plan. 3. METHODS Sufficient traffic control measures shall be used to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and pedestrians. If the Traffic Control Plan (TCP) is included in the drawings, any changes to the TCP by the Contractor shall be prepared by a Texas licensed professional engineer and submitted to the City Traffic Engineer for approval, prior to construction. If the TCP is not included in the drawings, the Contractor shall provide the TCP prepared by a Texas licensed professional engineer and submit the TCP to the City Traffic Engineer for approval,prior to construction. The Contractor is responsible for implementing and maintaining the traffic control plan and will be responsible for furnishing all traffic control devices, temporary signage and ATSSA certified flaggers. The construction methods shall be conducted to provide the least possible interference to traffic so as to permit the continuous movement of traffic in all allowable directions at all times. The Contractor shall cleanup and remove from the work area all loose material resulting from construction operations at the end of each workday. All signs, barricades, and pavement markings shall conform to the BC standard sheets, TCP sheets and the latest version of the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices". The Contractor may be required to furnish additional barricades, signs, and warning lights to maintain traffic and promote motorists safety. Any such additional signs and barricades will be considered subsidiary to the pay item for traffic control. All signs, barricades, and posts will be either new or freshly painted. The contractor and any traffic control subcontractor must be ATSSA certified for Traffic Control. 025802 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 A competent person, responsible for implementation of the TCP and for traffic safety, shall be designated by the Contractor. The name and off-hours phone number of the competent person shall be provided in writing at the Pre-Construction Conference. The competent person shall be on site, during working hours and on call at all times in the event of off-hour emergency. The contractor must provide temporary blue sign boards that direct traffic to businesses and driveways during each phase of construction— see example below. The sign boards may be either skid mounted or barrel mounted. The City will assist the contractor in determining which businesses and driveways will receive signage during various construction phases. The provision, installation, and removal of signage will be considered to be subsidiary to the contract items provided for"Traffic Control." Example Blue Sign 24' to 3W _ _ ,C MANDARIN GARD [ 12` to tts` 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, temporary traffic controls during construction shall be measured as a lump sum. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing, installing, moving, replacing and maintaining all temporary traffic controls including, but not limited to, barricades, signs, barriers, cones, lights, signals, temporary striping and markers, flaggers, removable and non-removable work zone pavements markings and signage, channelizing devices, temporary detours, temporary flexible-reflective roadway marker tabs, temporary traffic markers, temporary drainage pipes and structures, blue business signs, and such temporary devices and relocation of existing signs and devices. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, personnel, and incidentals necessary to provide a safe condition during 025802 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 construction of all phases and elements of the project and to complete the work. Payment will be made on the following basis: The initial monthly estimate will include 50% of the lump sum bid amount minus retention (typically 5%). The balance will be paid with the final estimate, upon completion of the project. 025802 Page 3of3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025807 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (PAINT AND THERMOPLASTIC) 1. DESCRIPTION This item shall consist of markings and stripes on the surface of the roadways or parking facilities applied in accordance with this specification and at the locations shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 2. MATERIALS Type I Pavement Marking Materials shall be in accordance with TxDOT Departmental Material Specification DMS-8220 "Hot Applied Thermoplastic". All roadway markings shall be thermoplastic. Type II Pavement Marking Materials shall be in accordance with TxDOT Departmental Material Specification DMS-8200 "Traffic Paint" and are not to be used for roadway markings except as primer/sealer for Type 1 markings. Type II Pavement Markings shall be allowed for parking facilities if called for in the plans. Glass Traffic Beads shall be drop-on glass beads conforming to TxDOT Departmental Material Specification DMS-8290 "Glass Traffic Beads". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.1 Weather Limitations - Pavement marking shall be performed only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the atmospheric temperature is above 40°F., and when the weather is not excessively windy, dusty, or foggy. The suitability of the weather will be determined by the Engineer. 3.2 Equipment-All equipment for the work shall be approved by the Engineer and shall include the apparatus necessary to properly clean the existing surface, and mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand painting equipment as may be necessary to satisfactorily complete the job. The mechanical marker shall be an approved atomizing spray-type marking machine suitable for application of pavement markings. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall be designed so as to apply markings of uniform cross-sections and clear-out edges without running of spattering and within the limits for straightness set forth herein. 025807 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 Suitable adjustments shall be provided on the sprayer(s) of a single machine or by furnishing additional equipment for marking the width required. 3.3 Preparation of Existing Surface - Immediately before application of the paint or therinoplastic, the existing surface shall be dry and entirely free from old pavement markings and markers, dirt, grease, oil, acids, laitance, or other foreign matter which could reduce the bond between the marking and the pavement. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping and blowing as required to remove all dirt, laitance and loose materials. Areas that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned by brooming and blowing shall be scrubbed as directed with a water solution of trisodium phosphate (10% Na3PO4 by weight) or an approved equal solution. After scrubbing, the solution shall be rinsed off and the surface dried prior to marring. 3.4 Layouts and Alignments - Suitable layouts and lines of proposed stripes shall be spotted in advance of the marking application. Control points shall be spaced at such intervals as will insure accurate location of all markings. The Contractor shall provide an experienced technician to supervise the location, alignment, layout, dimensions, and application of the markings. At least 72 hours prior to applying the permanent pavement markings, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and City Construction Inspector to obtain City approval for the location, alignment and layout of the pavement markings. 3.5 Application - Markings shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing indicated on the plans or as specified. Markings shall not be applied until the layouts, indicated alignment, and the condition of the existing surface have been approved by the Engineer. In the application of straight stripes, any deviation of the edges exceeding 1/2 inch in 50 feet shall be obliterated and the marking corrected. The width of the markings shall be as designated within a tolerance of 5%. All markings shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Paint shall be applied uniformly by suitable equipment at a rate of not less than 105 or more than 115 square feet per gallon. The Contractor shall furnish a certified report on the quality of materials ordered for the work. This report shall not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. The Engineer shall be notified upon arrival of shipment for inspecting and sampling of the materials. When required, all emptied containers shall be returned to the paint material storage or made available for tallying by the Engineer. The containers shall 025807 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 not be removed from the job site or destroyed without permission. The Contractor shall make an accurate accounting of the paint materials used in the accepted work. 3.6 Protection - After application, all markings shall be protected while drying. The fresh markings shall be protected from damage of any kind. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for protecting the markings and shall erect or place suitable warning signs, flags or barricades, protective screens or coverings as required. All surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter, splashes, spillage, drippings of paint or other materials. 3.7 Defective Workmanship or Material - When any material not conforming to the requirements of the specifications or drawings has been delivered to the project or incorporated in the work, or any work performed is of inferior quality, such material or work shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer, at the expense of the Contractor. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, pavement markings shall be measured by the square foot or linear foot of each type of marking. Eliminating existing pavement markings and markers will not be measured and paid for separately,but shall be subsidiary to the pavement marking items. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for eliminating existing pavement markings and markers, for all preparation, layout and application of the materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025807 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 025813 PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC STRIPING, WORDS AND EMBLEMS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for furnishing and installing preformed thermoplastic striping, words and emblems required to complete the project. 2. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE When required by the Engineer, prior to beginning work on the markings but after receipt by the Engineer of the required information, a conference will be held between the representatives of the Contractor and the Engineer to set up more completely the sequence of work to be followed and the estimated progress schedule. 3. MATERIALS The preformed pavement marking material shall be thermoplastic material meeting the specifications of TxDOT Departmental Material Specification DMS-8220"Hot Applied Thermoplastic,"and shall be approved by the Engineer for use on this project. 4. CONSTRUCTION (1) General. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform work or services necessary for complete and proper construction of the completed system of pavement markings. (2) Traffic Conditions. Roadways on which markings are to be placed may be either free of traffic or open to traffic. On roadways already open to traffic,markings shall be placed under existing traffic conditions. (3) Dimensions. Markings will be in accordance with the color, length, width, shape, configuration and location requirements of the plans and as directed by the Engineer. (4) Methods. All material placement shall be in accordance with TxDOT Standard Specification Item 668"Prefabricated Pavement Markings"and City Section 025807"Pavement Markings (Paint and Thermoplastic)." (5) Surface Preparation. The pavement upon which the markings are to be placed shall be cleaned and prepared,to the satisfaction of the Engineer,prior to placement of the markings. Cleaning shall be by any effective method, approved by the Engineer that completely and effectively removes contaminants, loose materials, and conditions deleterious to proper adhesion. Surfaces shall be further prepared after cleaning by sealing or priming, as recommended by the manufacturer of the pavement marking material. 025813 Page 1 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 (6) Moisture. Pavement to which the material is to be applied shall be completely dry. When questionable, pavements will be considered dry if, on a sunny day after observation for 15 minutes, no condensation occurs on the underside of a one (1) square foot piece of clear plastic that has been placed on the pavement and weighted down on the edges. (7) Temperature. Pavement and ambient air temperature requirements recommended by the material manufacturer shall be observed. If no temperature requirements are established by the materials manufacturer,material will not be placed if the pavement temperature is below 60 degrees F or if it is above 120 degrees F. (8) Clean-Up. At all times, the project site shall be kept free of all unnecessary traffic hazards. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish from the work site, and shall clean and restore the area to a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Also,all damage done by the Contractor during the prosecution of the work must be repaired. Before acceptance, the work site must be neat and in a presentable condition throughout. No extra compensation will be allowed for fulfilling these clean-up requirements. 5. PERFORMANCE (1) Adhesion. Installed pavement markings shall adhere to the pavement sufficiently to prevent lifting, shifting, smearing, spreading, flowing or tearing by traffic. (2) Appearance. In addition to complying with all requirements listed herein, pavement markings shall present a neat,unifonn appearance,and shall be free of unsightly conditions. Markings shall be free of ragged edges,misshapen lines or contours,and splices in transverse markings. (3) Visibility. The pavement marking material,in place on the roadway,shall have uniform and distinctive retro-reflectance when observed in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex- 828-B. (4) Observation Period. All material, workmanship and labor furnished shall be covered by manufacturer's guarantee and/or warranty for a period of 12 months commencing on the final delivery date of the materials. Pavement markings that fail to meet all requirements of this specification shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor within 30 working days following notification by the Engineer of such failure. All replacement pavement markings shall also meet all requirements of this specification for the same warranty period after installation. 025813 Page 2 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 6. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, preformed striping, words and emblems shall be measured by each type and color indicated on the Bid Form including preformed arrows and words or other symbols as indicated in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for cleaning the pavement by any suitable means other than blast cleaning, for furnishing and placing all materials, and for all labor,tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025813 Page 3 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 025816 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing and installing Raised Pavement Markers required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS shall conform to Reference Specification Section 025818 "Pavement Markers (Reflectorized)" (TxDOT Departmental Material Specification 4200). Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, raised pavement markers and traffic buttons shall be of the type to be applied to the roadway surface with a non-integral adhesive. Types of raised pavement markers shall be as follows: TYPE DESCRIPTION I-A One face shall reflect amber light and the body other than the reflective face shall be yellow. I-C One face shall reflect white light and the body other than the reflective face shall be white, silver or light gray. I-R One face shall reflect red light and the body other than the reflective face shall be white, silver or light gray, or may be one-half red on the side that reflects red light. II-A-A Shall contain two reflective faces, each of which shall reflect amber light and the body other than the reflective faces shall be yellow. II-B-B Shall contain two reflective faces, each of which shall reflect blue light and the body other than the reflective faces shall be blue. (Fire Hydrant Application.) II-C-C Shall contain two reflective faces, each of which shall reflect white light and the body other than the reflective faces shall be white, silver or light gray. 025816 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 II-C-R Shall contain two reflective faces, one of which shall reflect white light and the other face shall reflect red light, and the body other than the reflective faces shall be white, silver or light gray, or may be one- half red on the side that reflects red light. ADHESIVE for securing raised pavement markers to asphalt or concrete surfaces shall conform to Reference Specification Section 025828 `Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Markers" (TxDOT Departmental Materials Specification 6130). 3. METHODS PAVEMENT SURFACE to receive raised pavement markers shall be prepared such that the surface is free of loose material, grease, moisture, and other foreign material that could impair the bond with the adhesive. ALIGNMENT AND POSITIONING of raised pavement markers shall be such that the reflective faces are aligned for proper visibility. ADHESIVE shall be applied such that 100% of the lower surface of the marker is in contact with the adhesive and in sufficient quantity to serve as a cushion between the marker and the paved surface. Any surplus adhesive shall be removed so that the visibility of the marker is not impaired. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, raised pavement markers shall be measured as individual units for each type installed, if included as a bid item in the Bid Form. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing markers complete with adhesive, and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 025816 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) DMS - 4200 PAVEMENT MARKERS (REFLECTORIZED) EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2010 4200.1. Description. This Specification governs for the pre-qualification, testing, and field evaluation requirements for reflectorized pavement markers (RPMs). 4200.2. Units of Measurements. The values given in parentheses (if provided) are not standard and may not be exact mathematical conversions. Use each system of units separately. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the standard. 4200.3. Material Producer List. The Materials and Pavements Section of the Construction Division (CST/M&P) maintains the Material Producer List (MPL) of all materials conforming to the requirements of this specification. Materials appearing on the MPL, entitled "Jiggle Bar Tiles, Pavement Markers, and Traffic Buttons,"require no further testing, unless deemed necessary by the Project Engineer or CST/M&P. 4200.4. Bidders' and Suppliers' Requirements. Before any material is allowed for use on Department projects, it must be of manufacture and product code or designation shown on the MPL. 4200.5. Pre-Qualification Procedure. The pre-qualification procedure consists of several steps, listed below, which are described in more detail in the following subsections: • Pre-qualification request, • Laboratory testing, • Field testing, • Provisional qualification, • Project evaluations, • Full qualification, • Periodic evaluation, • Disqualification, and • Re-Qualification. CST/M&P will provide notification at the completion of each step and will require confirmation from the supplier's contact person before proceeding to the next step. Costs of sampling and testing are normally borne by the Department; however, the costs to sample, test, and conduct field evaluations for materials failing to conform to the requirements of this specification are borne by the supplier. This cost will be assessed at the rate established by the Director of CST/M&P and in effect at the time of testing and will be billed directly to the Contractor or supplier. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 1-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) A. Pre-Qualification Request. Prospective suppliers interested in submitting their product for evaluation must submit a written request to the Texas Department of Transportation, Construction Division, Materials & Pavements Section (CP51), 125 East 1lth Street, Austin, TX 78701-2483. Include the following items with the request: • Name and contact information, including email address for the person who will be the primary contact during the qualification process; • Laboratory test results, from the manufacturer's lab or an independent test laboratory, showing actual test results that meet the requirements of ASTM D 4280; • Product data sheets; • List of locations and applications dates where the product is being evaluated or is in current use; and • Test results from the National Transportation Product Evaluation Program(NTPEP), if available. B. Laboratory Testing. Provide CST/M&P with 350 RPMs of each color and type for laboratory and field testing. Submit materials for laboratory testing and field evaluations at no cost to the Department. CST/M&P will acknowledge receipt of materials and specify a tentative completion date for laboratory testing. CST/M&P will test RPMs in accordance with Article 4200.6 and will send notification of results once laboratory testing is complete. If laboratory testing conducted by TxDOT or by NTPEP shows RPMs do not meet the requirements of this specification, evaluation will cease, and RPMs will not be qualified. Suppliers may resubmit materials for qualification after providing documentation identifying the cause and corrective action taken. C. Field Testing. Upon satisfactory completion of laboratory testing, CST/M&P will specify the location of one or more roadways selected for the 12-month field test and suggested application dates. The roadways will include: • a concrete surface, • a hot-mix asphalt surface, and • a Grade 3 sealcoat. The concrete and asphalt roadways will be full-access controlled freeways with a minimum average daily traffic (ADT) count of 35,000 vehicles, a minimum of 20% average daily truck traffic volume, and a minimum posted speed limit of 65 mph. The Grade 3 road test will be conducted on a four-lane divided highway with a minimum ADT count of 4,000 vehicles per lane, a minimum of 20% average daily truck traffic volume, and a minimum posted speed limit of 50 mph. Providing NTPEP test results meeting the requirements of this specification may replace the concrete and hot-mix asphalt field tests on a deck for deck basis. If TxDOT or NTPEP field testing shows RPMs do not meet the requirements of this specification, evaluation will cease, and RPMs will not be qualified. Suppliers may TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 2-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) resubmit materials for qualification after providing documentation identifying the cause and corrective action taken. 1. NTPEP Testing. Submit NTPEP test data to CST/M&P for review if available. CST/M&P will acknowledge receipt of NTPEP data and will provide results of review within one month of receipt. The 12-month NTPEP test results for the pre-qualification of RPMs must meet the following: • all the requirements specified in ASTM D 4280 for the tests performed by NTPEP; • a retention rate equal or greater than 90 % of the placed RPMs (excluding the RPMs removed for testing); • a visual evaluation of 3 or greater, as defined by the most recent NTPEP Project Work Plan for Field Evaluations of Raised Pavement Markers and Marker Adhesives, for the marker case and marker lens for a minimum of 90 % of the placed RPMs (excluding the RPMs removed for testing); and • the minimum retroreflectivity values required after 12 months on the roadway listed in Table 1. 2. Application. Provide the name of the contractor, the traffic control plan, and the manufacturer and product code for the adhesive at least two weeks prior to the application for CST/M&P review and approval. CST/M&P will confirm the date and location of the field evaluation installation and resolve any problems as necessary. CST/M&P will provide between fifty and one hundred RPMs of each submitted type for application from the samples submitted for laboratory testing. Testing of submitted markers occurs concurrently with a set of control RPMs, for compliance with the requirements of this specification. Control markers are those RPMs currently listed on the MPL; if the MPL is reorganized and no marker exists to act as a control, an RPM that has undergone the most recent NTPEP testing on both asphalt and concrete will be used. Supplier is responsible for application of the RPMs in the presence of CST/M&P. Application must meet all Department specifications for RPM application and traffic control as well as the manufacturer's recommendations. Notify CST/M&P of any problems or concerns with the installation within one week of application and request a re-installation, if necessary. 3. Evaluation. CST/M&P will notify supplier of a suggested date for field testing evaluation at least one month prior to completion of the 12-month field trial. Provide the name of the contractor and traffic control plan for the evaluation at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled evaluation date. Materials must meet the following requirements: a. Retention Rate. The retention rate of the test RPMs must be no less than 5% below that of the control RPMs. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 3-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) b. Body Damage. The test RPMs must not exhibit discoloration or body damage exceeding that of the control RPMs. They must not exhibit a repetitive form of damage or mode of failure (indicative of a design flaw) in a large percentage of the test RPMs. Body damage will be visually assessed according to NTPEP criteria. c. Functionality. Four RPMs placed at 80 foot spacing or eight RPMs placed at 40 foot spacing must be functional when viewed at night from a vehicle using the low beam headlight setting. They must be functional when viewed at a minimum distance of approximately 400 ft. in the daytime. A functional marker is both visible and conspicuous. d. Retroreflectivity. CST/M&P will remove twenty test RPMs from the pavement to undergo laboratory testing for retroreflectivity in accordance with Tex-842-B. Fifteen of the twenty RPMs pulled must pass the minimum reflective values shown in Table 1 (measured at 0.2° observation angle and 0° horizontal entrance angle). Table 1 Minimum Retroretlectivity(cd/fc)After 12 Months on the Roadway Face 12 Mo. Crystal 1.0 Amber 0.7 Red 0.2 D. Provisional Qualification. CST/M&P will grant provisional qualification after successful completion of the laboratory and field evaluations including NTPEP testing, when applicable. CST/M&P will send notification of provisional qualification, including the date of placement on the MPL, within one month after completion of the field evaluations. Failure to complete all project evaluation requirements successfully is grounds for cancellation of provisional qualification. E. Project Evaluation. Once the material is provisionally qualified and listed on the MPL, provide CST/M&P with project information for the first three jobs supplied with the RPMs and additional projects if requested. RPMs must meet the same performance criteria as for the field evaluation to receive full qualification. CST/M&P will return the project evaluation results after the 12-month evaluation of each project. 1. Full Qualification. CST/M&P will grant full pre-qualification and continue to list materials meeting all requirements of this specification on the MPL. Pre-qualification requires extensive field evaluations. It is critical that no significant changes are made to the RPMs' composition, manufacturing process, or design during or after pre-qualification without notifying CST/M&P. It is also critical that the RPMs provided be uniform, with minimum variations from marker to marker. Significant changes not reported by the manufacturer or variations in product, as determined by the Director of CST/M&P, may be cause for removal from the MPL. TEXASDEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 4-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) 2. Failure. CST/M&P will revoke provisional qualification for RPMs that do not meet the performance criteria and will remove the RPMs from the MPL. Producers not qualified under this Specification may not furnish materials for Department projects and must show evidence of correction of all deficiencies before reconsideration for qualification. F. Periodic Evaluation.Periodic evaluation consists of random department-initiated laboratory testing, audits, and periodic required submittals or field testing. 1. Department-Initiated Laboratory Testing and Audits. The Department may conduct random sampling (per Tex-729-I) and testing on pre-qualified RPMs to identify changes in the material or nonconformity in production and to perform random audits of test reports. 2. Required Submittals or Field Testing. Every 5 years,provide NTPEP data showing continued compliance with the requirements of this specification. G. Disqualification. Causes for disqualification and removal from the MPL include, but are not limited to, the following: • material fails to meet the requirements stated in this specification; • the producer fails to report changes in the composition, manufacturing process, or design to CST/M&P; • the producer has unpaid charges for failing samples; or • qualified RPMs demonstrate repeated and large-scale performance problems in the field. H. Re-Qualification. Suppliers disqualified and removed from the MPL may submit materials for requalification after submitting documentation identifying the cause of the problem and corrective action taken. 4200.6. Material Requirements. All RPMs must meet all requirements, except for requirements specified for a specific type. A. Reflectorized Types. • Type I-A must contain one face that reflects amber light. The body, other than the reflective face, must be yellow. • Type I-C must contain one face that reflects white light. The body, other than the reflective face, must be white or silver-white. • Type I-R must contain one face that reflects red light. The body, other than the reflective face, must be white or silver-white. • Type II-A-A must contain two reflective faces oriented 180' to each other, each of which must reflect amber light. The body, other than the reflective faces, must be yellow. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 5-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) • Type 11-C-R must contain two reflective faces oriented 180' to each other, one of which must reflect white light and one of which must reflect red light. The body, other than the reflective faces, must be white or silver-white. B. Appearance Requirements. The outer surface of the RPMs must be smooth except for the molding or stamping of the manufacturer's unique imprint. All corners and edges exposed to traffic must be rounded. C. Optical Requirements. The RPMs must be capable of providing amber, red, or white light reflection as required by the requisition or plans. The reflected light of each reflective face must conform to the minimum reflective specific intensity (SI) requirements listed in Table 2, measured in candelas per foot-candle (cd/fc). Table 2 Minimum SI per Reflective Face at 0.21 Observation Angle(cd/fc) Horizontal Entrance Angle Crystal Amber Red 00 3.00 2.00 0.75 200 1.50 1.00 0.30 D. Physical Requirements. When tested in accordance with Tex-434-A, the minimum strength of five markers must be 2,000 lb. with none exhibiting a deformation of more than 0.125 in. before achieving the minimum strength. A random sample of five markers will be tested in accordance with Tex-434-A. The average compression results must have a quality index value equal to or greater than 1.23. The quality index value will be calculated from the lower specification limit of 2,000 lb. load. The following equation is used to determine the quality index value: QL = (X — LSL) l s Where: QL= quality index value X= average result from test LSL = lower specification limit s = standard deviation from test. E. Heat Resistance. The RPMs must show no change in physical or optical properties when subjected to the requirements of Tex-846-B. The temperature will be 140°F with the marker in a vertical position. The SI of the pavement marker must not be less than 80% of its initial value after being subjected to the heat test. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 6-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT MARKERS(REFLECTORIZED) F. Impact Test. The RPMs will be impact tested during the pre-qualification process. They will be impacted with a 20-lb. weight in the form of a 2-in. solid right-circular cylinder with a flat impact face having rounded edges falling freely through a vertical guide. The RPMs will be impacted while resting on a solid, flat, steel plate that is at least 1/2 in. thick. The RPMs will be tested at increasing heights until failure occurs. Failure will occur when the lens or body cracks. The height at which failure occurs -6 in. will be the acceptance threshold for RPMs supplied after pre-qualification. 4200.7. Archived Versions. Archived versions are available. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 7-7 EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY2010 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS DMS - 6130 BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS EFFECTIVE DATE:JANUARY 2008 6130.1. Description. This Specification establishes the requirements for bituminous type hot- melt adhesive used for the placement of pavement markers. Two types are addressed: standard bituminous marker adhesive consisting of an asphalt base with homogeneously mixed mineral tiller; and flexible bituminous marker adhesive consisting of a highly polymer modified asphalt. Either adhesive must be suitable for bonding ceramic and plastic markers to hydraulic cement concrete, asphaltic concrete, and chip-sealed road surfaces and be applicable when road surface and marker temperatures are in the approximate range of 4-71°C (40-160°F). The composition of the adhesive must be such that its properties will not deteriorate when heated to and applied at temperatures up to 218°C (425°F)using either air or oil-jacketed melters. 6130.2. Units of Measurements. The values given in parentheses (if provided) are not standard and may not be exact mathematical conversions. Use each system of units separately. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the standard. 6130.3. Material Requirements. A. Adhesive Properties. The adhesive must be smooth and homogeneous, containing no visible particles, and must comply with the requirements in Table 1. Table 1 Adhesive Properties Material Standard Adhesive Flexible Adhesive Property Test Method min max min max Softening Point, °F ASTM D 36 200 200 Penetration, 100 g,5 s,25°C(7717),0.1 mm ASTM D 5 10 20 15 254 Flow,5 hr.,70°C(158°F),min 5 54 Heat Stability Flow,5 hr.,70°C(1587),min 5 5 Viscosity, 10 rpm,204°C(400°F),Pa-s 7.5 7.5 Flash Point,C.O.C., °F ASTM D 92 550 550 Ductility, 5 cm/min,77°F,cm AASHTO T 51 - 15 - Flexibility, 1 in. mandrel,90'bend, 10 s ASTM D 3111 pass 1.Exception to ASTM D 5329;heat the sample as described in ASTM D 5, Section 7.1. 2.Exception to ASTM D 5329;condition the sample as described in"Test Methods." 3.As modified in"Test Methods" 4.Maximum penetration of 30 is allowed provided the result of the flow test is less than l mm. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 1-3 LAST REVIEWED:SEPTEMBER 2014 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS B. Asphalt Properties. This applies to standard bituminous adhesive only. The filler-free asphalt, obtained from the Extraction and Abson recovery process, as explained in Section 6130.4, must have the properties in Table 2. Table 2 Filler-Free Asphalt Properties Property Minimum Maximum Test Method Penetration, 100 g,5 s,25°C,(77 °F), 25 ASTM D 5 0.1 mm(in.) Viscosity, 135°C(275°F)Pa-s 1.2(12) ASTM D 2171 (Poises) Viscosity Ratio, 135°C(275°F) 2.2 ASTM D 1754 and ASTM D 2171 C. Filler Properties. This applies to standard bituminous adhesive only. The filler material, obtained using the filler separation technique described in Section 6130.4, must have the properties in Table 3. Table 3 Filler Properties Property Minimum Maximum Test Method Filler Content,wt. % 50 75 As in Section 6130.4. Filler Fineness,%passing: ASTM C 430,as modified in 45 µm(No.325) 75 -- Section 6130.4. 75 µm(No.200) 95 -- 100 -- 150 µm(No. 100) 6130.4. Test Methods. A. Heat Stability Flow. To determine the heat stability flow, place 1000 g of adhesive in a loosely-covered quart can,heat to 218°C (425°F) and maintain at this temperature 4 hours before performing the flow test. B. Extraction and Abson Recovery. Use this procedure to separate and recover the base asphalt from the adhesive. Heat the adhesive just to the point where it will easily flow. Transfer between 125 and 150 g into a 1000-mL (I-qt.) Erlenmeyer flask containing 400 mL (13.5 fl. oz.) of trichloroethylene with a temperature of 52-66°C (125-150°F). Stir this mixture thoroughly to dissolve the asphalt. Decant the solvent-asphalt mixture. Recover the base asphalt from solvent according to Tex-211-F, but begin with the centrifuge step; the primary distillation is not necessary. Repeat the above extraction- recovery method as necessary to obtain the desired quantity of asphalt. C. Filler Separation Technique. Use this procedure to separate the filler material from the asphalt and determine the filler content of the adhesive. Weigh 10.00 10.01 g of solid adhesive,broken into small pieces, into a centrifuge flask with approximately 100 mL (3.5 fl. oz.)volume such as that specified in ASTM D 1796. Add 50 mL (1.7 fl. oz.) of trichloroethylene to the adhesive. Swirl or stir the mixture with a fine rod, taking care not TEXASDEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 2-3 LAST REVIEWED:SEPTEMBER 2014 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIALS SPECIFICATION BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS to lose any solids. Place the sample flask in a balanced centrifuge and spin using a minimum relative centrifugal force of 150 (as determined in ASTM D 1796, Section 6.) Remove the sample flask and decant the solvent, taking care not to lose any solids. Repeatedly add more solvent, centrifuge, and decant until the solvent becomes clear and the filler appears free of asphalt. Dry the recovered filler at 71 ± YC (160± 5°F) to remove solvent. Weigh the dried filler. Filter the decanted solvent through a filter paper with a 20-25 µm retention factor to verify there is no loss of filler. Calculate the filler content as a percentage of the original sample weight. D. Filler Fineness. Use this procedure to determine the filler fineness. Use the same apparatus as described in ASTM C 430, except also use 75µm (No. 200) and 150 µm (No. 100) sieves. Prepare a water solution containing 1 wt. percent of a nonionic, water- soluble surfactant, such as Triton X-100,beforehand. Thoroughly wet the 1 g dry sample in the surfactant solution and allow it to soak for 30 min. Transfer the filler completely into the 45 µm (No. 325) sieve cup. Wash the sample with the water spray, as described in ASTM C 430, Section 5, for 2 min., adding surfactant solution as needed to disperse any clumped particles. Dry and weigh the sample and perform calculations as directed in ASTM C 430. Repeat the procedure using the other two sieve sizes. 6130.5. Acceptance. Bituminous adhesives are pre-qualified in accordance with Tex-538-C. Consult "Bituminous Marker Adhesive" for a list of materials currently pre-qualified under this procedure. 6130.6. Packaging and Labeling. Package the adhesive in self-releasing cardboard containers with essentially flat and parallel top and bottom surfaces such that the packages will stack properly. Each package must have a net weight of either 23 or 27 kg (50 or 60 lb.) and must weigh within 1 kg (2 lb.) of the stated quantity. Self-releasing cardboard dividers, which will separate each package into sections weighing no more than 7 kg (15 lb.) each, must be part of the packaging. Each package must display: • the manufacturer's name, • net weight, • lot or batch number, and • a product name that clearly identifies the material as either standard or flexible bituminous marker adhesive. 6130.7. Archived Versions. Archived versions are available. TEXASDEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 3-3 LAST REVIEWED:SEPTEMBER 2014 SECTION 026202 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE SYSTEMS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for hydrostatic testing the completed pressure system. The Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, materials, labor, etc., as necessary, except as noted, and accomplish all testing under this specification. 2. MATERIALS Water for filling the line and making tests will be furnished by the Contractor through a standard meter connection. A meter and gauges for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor. A test pump with appropriate connector points as approved by the Water Superintendent for the installation of meter and gauge shall be furnished by the Contractor. The meter shall be directly connected to the main or pipe being tested by the use of copper tubing or an approved reinforced hose. The meter shall be protected against extreme pressures by the use of a one-inch (I") safety relief valve set at the test pressure plus ten pounds per square inch(psi) and furnished by the Contractor. 3. TEST PROCEDURE Tests shall be made only after completion of backfill as specified, and not until at least thirty-six (36)hours after the last concrete thrust block has been cast. Contractor shall coordinate hydrostatic testing with the proposed construction sequencing and phasing. Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation, shall be applied. During the filling of the pipe and before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipeline. During the test, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves,hydrants and joints shall be carefully examined. If found to be leaking, they shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. If the leaking is due to cracked or defective material, the defective material shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound material. All pipes shall be subjected to two hydrostatic tests. The first hydrostatic test shall be a two-hour test at a pressure of 150 psi. The second test shall be no less than 48 hours after successful completion of the first hydrostatic test. The second hydrostatic test shall be for a 24-hour period at City operating pressure for waterlines or at 50 psi for wastewater force mains and effluent lines. 026202 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 The maximwn allowable leakage shall be as follows: Ductile Iron Pipe, AWWA C600 L= SD P "_ or L=ND P '�� 133,200 7,400 Asbestos - Cement Pipe,AWWA C603 L=ND P viz 4,000 PVC Pipe -Uni-bell equation 99 L=ND P i 7,400 WHERE: L=Maximum Allowable Leakage (gallons/hour) S =Length of Pipe Tested(feet) N=Number of Joints in Tested Line (pipe and fittings) D=Nominal Diameter of Pipe (inches) P =Average Test Pressure (psi) If the pressure system fails to meet the leakage requirements, the Contractor shall make the required repairs to the system and the system shall be retested. This procedure shall be repeated until the system complies with leakage requirements. The cost of each retest shall be $100. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, hydrostatic testing of pressure systems will not be measured for pay,but shall be subsidiary to the installation of the pressure system component. 026202 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 026204 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (ASTM D 2241 Pressure Pipe for Wastewater Force Mains, Irrigation Systems and Water Transmission Lines) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all PVC pipe (ASTM D 2241) required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS PVC pipe shall be made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784 with an established hydrostatic design base of 4000 psi for water at 73.4°F. 3. DIMENSIONS Pipe shall be manufactured to standard steel pipe O.D. (IPS), with dimensions and tolerances in accordance with ASTM D 2241. 4. JOINTS Pipe shall have a gasket bell end with a thickened wall section integral with the pipe barrel in accordance with ASTM D 3139. The use of solvent weld pipe shall not be allowed. 5. GASKETS Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F477 (for High Head). 6. PIPE PRESSURE RATING AND STANDARD DIMENSION RATIO The pressure rating and SDR for PVC pipe (ASTM D 2241) shall be as indicated on the drawings. Pressure rating shall be based on the ISO equation in Section 4.5 of ASTM D 2241 with a maximum allowable hydrostatic design stress of 2000 psi (Safety Factor of 2.0). 7. CAUSE FOR REJECTION Pipe shall be clearly marked in accordance with Section 9 of ASTM D 2241. Unmarked or scratched pipe shall be rejected. 026204 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 S. CERTIFICATION The Contractor shall furnish, in duplicate to the Engineer, a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification. Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials, to include gaskets. 9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, PVC pipe (ASTM D 2241) will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to, but not include, the fittings. Payment shall include all labor, pipe, and equipment for hauling, bracing, trench excavation, testing, backfilling, and for all cleaning up and other incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in place,per linear foot. 026204 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 026206 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all ductile iron pipe and fittings required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151. The interior of pipe and fittings (excluding fittings for wastewater force mains)shall have a shop-applied cement-mortar lining(40 mils thick)in accordance with AWWA C104. The exterior of pipe and fittings shall have a coating of coal tar enamel of approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in AWWA C105. Ductile iron pipe shall be wrapped in two plys of 8-mil polyethylene in accordance with Section 026402 "Waterlines" of the City Standard Specifications. 3. FITTINGS All fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with AWWA C153. Fittings shall have a pressure rating of 250 psi for sizes through 12" and 150 psi for 14" and larger sizes,unless shown differently on the drawings. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, Mechanical Joints shall be used. 4. JOINTS Joints for pipe shall be mechanical type or push-on type such as "Tyton Joint", or approved equal; joints for fittings shall be mechanical joints, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C153. Mechanical joints shall be furnished complete with joint material, Cor-ten nuts, Cor-ten bolts, glands and gaskets. When restrained joints are indicated on the drawings, restrained joints for pipe and fittings of 12" diameter and less shall be mechanical joint with retainer gland Series I100 by EBAA Iron or approved equal,with a minimum of 250 psi rated working pressure. Restrained joints for pipe and fittings over 12"in diameter shall be push on type with a retainer ring as LOK-RING or FLEX-RING by American Ductile Iron Pipe, or TR FLEX by U.S. Pipe, or approved equal. Gaskets shall be of synthetic rubber. An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present shall be supplied. 026206 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 5. PIPE Pressure class ductile iron pipe requirements: Pressure Wall Range of Maximum Diameter Class Thickness Allowable Depth Cover (inches) (psi) (inches) (feet) - (feet) A - B* 4# 350 0.25 60+ 6 350 0.25 30 - 65 8 350 0.25 20 - 50 10# 350 0.26 15 - 45 12 350 0.28 15 - 44 14# 300 0.30 13 - 42 16 300 0.32 13 - 39 18 300 0.34 13 - 36 20 300 0.36 13 - 35 24 250 0.37 11 - 29 24+ x x x * Range of maximum allowable depth of pipe where: A = Ground water, or unstable bottom, or quick condition. B = Ideal trench conditions, and sand encasement is at an average density in excess of 90% Standard Proctor density. # Pipe sizes not typically specified on City projects, but shown for reference. x Requires special evaluation. The face of bells shall be plainly marked by color coding for classes so as to be readily identified in the field. 6. CERTIFICATIONS A certification shall accompany each order of pipe and fittings furnished to job site. Certification shall include the following items: indicate that pipe complies with Part 3 of this specification; indicate that fittings and joints comply with Part 4 of this specification (it should be noted that the supplier shall furnish sufficient technical material for the Engineer to determine whether or not push- on joints can comply with the "or equal" clause); and a copy of a laboratory analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. 026206 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, ductile iron pipe shall be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to, but not include, the fittings. Ductile iron fittings shall be measured per each by the type and size, as indicated in the Bid Form. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation and testing of the waterline,together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe and fittings complete in place. 026206 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 026210 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (AWWA C900 and C905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and Wastewater Force Mains) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all PVC pipe (AWWA C900 and C905)required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL PVC pipe shall be made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784 with an established hydrostatic-design-basis of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F. 3. DIMENSIONS Pipe shall be manufactured to ductile iron pipe equivalent outside diameters. 4. JOINT Pipe shall have a gasket bell end with a thickened wall section integral with the pipe barrel. The use of solvent weld pipe shall not be allowed. 5. GASKETS Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F477 (High Head). 6. PIPE PRESSURE CLASS AND DIMENSION RATIO Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, pipe shall have a dimension ratio (DR) of 18 and in accordance with: Pipe Size Desi n_ action 4" to 12" AWWA C900 Over 12" AWWA C905 7. CAUSE FOR REJECTION Pipe shall be clearly marked in accordance with AWWA Requirements. Unmarked or scratched pipe shall be rejected. 026210 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 S. CERTIFICATION The contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification, to include gaskets. Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. 9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form, PVC pipe (AWWA C900 or C905) will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to,but not include, the fittings. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation, backfilling and testing of the PVC pipe, together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in place,per linear foot. 026210 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 026402 WATERLINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification, in conjunction with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Distribution System Standards, shall govern all work necessary for the installation of all waterline facilities required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Concrete: Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Bedding Sand for Encasement: Bedding sand and initial backfill around the pipe shall be granular material of low plasticity as indicated on the drawings. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: See City Standard Specification Section 026206. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: See City Standard Specification Section 026210. Tapping Sleeves and Valves: See City Standard Specification Section 026409. Gate Valves for Waterlines: See City Standard Specification Section 026411. Fire Hydrants: See City Standard Specification Section 026416. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1) HANDLING MATERIALS a) General: The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of all materials furnished to, or by him, and accepted by him, until it has been incorporated into the completed project. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected, and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work. b) Unloading and Distribution of Materials at Work Site: Pipe and other materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the job site by the Contractor. Materials shall at all times be handled with care and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Care shall be taken not to scratch PVC pipe. Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of PVC pipe. Materials may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it is to be incorporated into the work within 10 days. The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience to the public. 026402 Page 1 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 c) Storing Materials: Materials that are not to be incorporated into the work within 10 days shall be stored on platforms. The interior of pipes and accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. (2) ALIGNMENT AND GRADE a) General: All pipes shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades. Fittings, valves and hydrants shall be at the required locations with joints centered, spigots home and all valve and hydrant stems plumb. Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structures encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense,in cooperation with the owners of such utility structures. One (1) 20-ft. section of waterline pipe shall be centered over/under gravity wastewater line at all gravity wastewater line crossings. Waterline shall be ductile iron pipe with mechanical joint fittings, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 026206, wherever new waterline crosses under new gravity wastewater line. Maintain a minimum of six inches (2 feet usual) vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a new wastewater line. Maintain a minimum of twelve inches vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses under a new wastewater line. Alternatively, at gravity wastewater line crossings, the proposed PVC waterline may be encased in a 20-ft.joint of ductile iron pipe with a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi that is at least two nominal sizes larger than the carrier pipe. The carrier pipe shall be supported in the casing at five foot (5') intervals with spacers, or shall be filled to the spring line with clean washed sand, graded as shown in the City Standard Water Details. The casing pipe shall be centered under the gravity wastewater line as indicated on the drawings, and both ends of the casing shall be sealed with cement grout or manufactured seal. b) Deviation from Drawings: No deviation from the line and grade shown on the plans may be made without the written consent of the Engineer. c) Depth of Cover: Depth of cover will be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanent improvement, or from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be 36 inches. Waterlines 12" and larger located under streets shall have 48 inches of cover at all points. 026402 Page 2 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 (3) TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL See City Standard Specification Section 022020, "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities"and applicable City Standard Details for Water. (4) POLYETHYLENE WRAPPING All ductile iron pipe, valves and fittings, except pipe or valves which are laid in encasement pipe or in concrete valve boxes, shall be wrapped in polyethylene. The polyethylene material shall have a thickness of 8 mils and may be either clear or black. The wrapping shall be lapped in such manner that all surfaces of pipe, valves and fittings, including joints, shall have a double thickness of polyethylene. If a single longitudinal lap is made using a double thickness of polyethylene, it shall be lapped a minimum of 18 inches and the lap shall be placed in the lower quadrant of the pipe and in such a manner that backfill material cannot fall into the lap. The polyethylene shall be secured in place with binder twine at not more than 6-foot intervals. If wrapping is applied before the pipe is placed in the trench, then special care shall be taken in handling the pipe so that the wrapping will not be damaged. Care shall also be exercised in backfilling around the pipe and fittings and in blocking fittings so as not to damage the wrapping. Any wrapping that may be damaged shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and so as to form the best protection to the pipes. (5) SAND ENCASEMENT All pipe and fittings that are not enclosed in concrete valve boxes or laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely encased with a minimum of eight inches (8") of sand on the bottom and sides of waterlines smaller than 16 inches in diameter, and twelve inches (12") over the top of the waterline, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. This encasement includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased with sand to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. The sand shall be compacted to a minimum of 90% Standard Proctor density. Provide twelve inches (12") of sand encasement all around the pipe for 16-inch diameter and larger waterlines. Sand shall be placed in a manner that will not injure the polyethylene wrapping and shall be compacted under, around the side, and over the pipe in a manner that will reduce settlement to a minimum and as approved by the Engineer. In order to reduce the amount of sand required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of eight inches of sand between the excavation and the pipe (twelve inches for 16-inch diameter and larger waterlines), unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. (6) LOWERING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES IN THE TRENCH a) General: The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe center line with a minimum clearance of eight inches below the pipe bottom and with a like clearance 026402 Page 3 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 from the bottom of the bell to the bottom of the bell hole. The trench shall then be refilled to the proper grade with sand as specified. The placing of the encasing material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil rock or other foreign matter. After final grading in the trench of the encasing material, bell holes shall be excavated at each joint. Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes or other suitable equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and fittings. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. b) Inspection of Pipe and Accessories: The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be replaced. c) Clean Pipe: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean both in and out of the trench at all times during the laying. (7) JOINTING PIPES All pipes shall be made up in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Pipe deflection shall not exceed 75% of the maximum amount recommended by the manufacturer. (8) CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS Temporary thrust blocks or other means of carrying thrust loads generated by hydrostatic testing shall be provided at all ends of lines to be tested. Details of the end connections and method of temporary blocking shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. After satisfactory completion of the hydrostatic testing, this temporary blocking shall be removed so that connections may be made with existing lines. This work is subsidiary to waterline installation and no separate payment will be made for it. Temporary thrust blocks are not allowed for long term use. (9) METAL HARNESS Metal harness, tie rods and clamps, or swivel fittings shall be used to prevent pipe movement. Steel rods and clamps shall be galvanized or otherwise rust proofed, or coated with hot coal tar enamel, then wrapped with two layers of polyethylene wrapping. 026402 Page 4 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 (10) STERILIZATION a) Fittings: Valves, hydrants and fittings shall be stored on timbers and kept clean. Where soil or other substance has come in contact with the water surfaces of the fittings, the interior shall be washed and sterilized with 2% solution of calcium hypochlorite. b) Pipe: As each joint of pipe is laid, the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, shall throw powdered calcium hypochlorite (70%) through the length of the joint (one pound for each 1,680 gallons of water to give 50 ppm). When the waterline is complete, and before testing, the waterline shall be slowly filled with water between valves and allowed to stand for 48 hours. After the sterilization period is completed, lines shall be flushed by the Contractor under the direct supervision of a representative of the City Water Department. The Engineer will take sample for testing two hours after refilling. If the sample does not pass State Health Department purification standards, the procedure shall be repeated. The entire procedure shall be coordinated under the supervision of the Water Division Superintendent/Engineer. During the sterilization process, valves shall be operated only under the supervision of the Water Division Superintendent/Engineer. There shall be a base fee of$100 paid by the Contractor to the City for each retest that is required. (11) HYDROSTATIC TESTING WATER SYSTEM See City Standard Specification Section 026202, "Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems". (12) WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS See Standard Specification Section 026404, "Water Service Lines". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, waterlines will be measured by the linear foot for each size installed. Payment for waterlines will be made under the appropriate pipe material item and shall include, but not be limited to, trenching, dewatering, bedding, pipe (except for fittings), restraints, temporary thrust blocking, backfill, sterilization, and hydrostatic testing. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 026402 Page 5 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 026404 WATER SERVICE LINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing and installing water service lines required to complete the project. Water service lines are those lines from the City main to the meter at the property line. 2. MATERIALS GENERAL Service fittings shall have a minimum of 150 psi working pressure rating,unless indicated otherwise. Fittings and materials shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWWA C800. All service connections shall require service clamps. SERVICE CLAMP Service clamps shall be brass saddle with two silicone bronze straps with I.P. thread and have a minimum working pressure rating of 200 psi. The saddle and nuts shall be of 85-5-5-5 brass alloy per ASTM B-62 and AWWA C800. The nuts shall have unitized washers. Straps shall be 5/8 inch high-quality silicone bronze,flattened and contoured to provide a wider bearing surface against the pipe. Clamps shall be comparable to: Ford 202B, Smith Blair 323, Rockwell 323 CORPORATION STOP Corporation stop shall be of brass with I.P. thread inlet and Mueller 110 compression connection outlet designed for Type K copper pipe and be comparable in design to the following: Mueller H-15028 for 1" size Mueller H-15023 for 1-'/2" & 2" sizes 026404 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 ANGLE METER STOP Angle meter stop shall have a Teflon coated bronze ball which rotates within two Buna-N rubber seats. Inlet shall be packed joint for Type K copper and be comparable in design to the following: Ford BA43-342 for I" service line with 5/8" x 3/4" or 3/4" meter size Brass gate valve required for 1-1/2" and 2" sizes SERVICE LINE Service line shall be of Type K copper tube or approved one piece SDR9 polyethylene with restrained compression brass fittings and stainless steel inserts. Other products of comparable features and equal quality may be substituted for the above items with approval of the Engineer. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS See City Standard Specification Section 022020, "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities ". Service lines shall be placed by the Contractor as indicated on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer. Relocation of existing meters and changeovers to the new system shall be done only under the direct supervision of the City Water Department. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, water service lines shall be measured with the units indicated in the Bid Form for each size of service line. Payment for service lines shall include,but not be limited to, the following: copper tubing, corporation stop, service clamp, angle meter stop, trenching, trench safety, backfilling including pavement repair, testing, flushing, clean-up and site restoration; and shall be full compensation for all labor,equipment,tools and incidentals required for proper installation of the water service lines. 026404 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 026406 Private Water Service Lines (5-112) 1 . Scope: This section governs the furnishing of all labor, equipment, tools and materials necessary for the construction of private water service lines as shown on the plans, as outlined herein and as necessary to complete the project. Private water service lines are defined as those lines from the customer side of the water meter to the structure. 2 . Materials: Materials for the construction of private water service lines shall comply with the provisions of the Standard Plumbing Code as published by the Southern Building Code Congress and as adopted, with local amendments, by the City of Corpus Christi, unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans. 3 . Permits: Normal plumbing permit application and fee requirements of the Standard Plumbing Code as adopted by City Code shall apply for this project. A plumbing permit for each lot will be issued to the Contractor by the Building Inspections Department of the City of Corpus Christi. The Contractor shall make application for permits upon award of the contract. 4 . General Obligations: (a) Contractor: The Contractor shall construct private water line services in accordance with the plans and these specifications in a neat and workmanlike manner. The route of the proposed water service shall be determined by the Contractor subject to approval of the Owner and the Engineer. All work on private service lines shall be supervised and inspected by a licensed plumber. Good relationships with the public are essential to the success of this project. The Contractor shall make all the required notifications and notices to the owner/occupants in the area. The work shall be accomplished with minimal inconvenience to the public and owner/occupants . The Contractor shall cooperate with all City employees involved in the execution of this contract. The removal of the existing meter from the old location and placement in the new location shall be done by the Contractor under City supervision. Contractor will be held responsible for restoring the water service level better than or equal to before. Compensation will be addressed on an as needed basis upon approval by the Engineer. (b) City: The Engineer will review work proposed by the Contractor and the City Plumbing Inspector shall inspect the installation. 5 . Sequence of Work and Construction Methods: (a) City will mail out general letter to property owner describing the project with Form WS-1 (See Appendix) for execution. (b) Contractor shall acquire authorization for site inspections, using Form WS-1 in Appendix from those owners not responding to general letter. (c) Contractor shall perform site inspection, fill-out required forms 026406 Rev. 1/22/9 Page 1 of 3 and submit copy of APrivate Water Service Inspection Report & Routing Recommendation= and Site Plan Showing Route to Engineer. (see From W-2 and Sample Site Plan in Appendix) . Contractor is encouraged to take photographs of before and after conditions on each lot. (d) Typically, the proposed service line will be connected at the existing riser serving the main structure, usually at the rear. In special cases, where existing surface improvements preclude trench excavation, the connection of the proposed line to the existing line may be allowed at an alternate location. Any alternate tie in locations must be authorized by the Engineer; and there must be evidence that equivalent water pressure of the standard connection will result using the information gathered during the site inspection. (e) Contractor notifies owner/occupant of proposed construction and acquires approval for proposed construction with City assistance using Form W-2 . (f) Construct private service lines from structure to proposed meters. (1) Materials shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and as set forth in the plumbing code. (2) The Contractor shall be responsible for laying the line along the pre-approved Site Plan Route. All lines shall be a minimum depth of 18 inches except at the riser and near water meter. Portions of the lines that are exposed shall be protected from frost action. (3) Separate trenches (one for water and one for sewer) separated by undisturbed or compacted earth shall be excavated. The trenches shall be excavated in such a manner which will minimize damage to surface vegetation. After installation of the line, the excavated material shall be tamped into the trench and the surface restored to a condition acceptable to the Engineer. Lines shall be bored, jetted or jacked under sidewalks, driveways or other such improved surfaces--unless authorized by the Engineer. (4) When authorized, the proposed line may be hung under pier and beam structures . In such cases, new line shall be insulated and supported with hangar straps at intervals not to exceed four (4) feet spacing. (5) Where required by the building code, electrical ground wires shall be installed to assure any appliances grounded to the plumbing system remain grounded. (6) Boring and casing shall be required adjacent to foundations (Foundation Protection Exhibit in Appendix) . (g) Clean, flush, and pressure test new service lines. Make final connection to riser. The service line shall remain under pressure to the angle water check valve. (h) Construct the water service lines to the angle meter stop for meter setting. Clean, flush, and put into service. 026406 Rev. 1/22/9 Page 2 of 3 (1) The proposed meter location shall be placed as follows: (a) for separated curb and sidewalk; 1.5 feet from curb edge of sidewalk; (b) for sidewalk tied to curb; 1 .5 feet behind sidewalk; (c) where no sidewalk exists; 4 .5 feet behind the curb; (2) The City shall furnish the Contractor a water meter housing so that a proper alignment of the angle meter stop and meter coupling is assured. (i) Set meter box. Existing meter boxes shall be re-used on this project. Any meter boxes which are cracked, broken, or have missing lids shall be replaced with new meter boxes provided by Water Department as deemed necessary by the City Water Inspector. (j) The Contractor shall remove the old meter and set the same meter at the new location. Concurrently, the Contractor shall plug the existing service line and backfill the old meter box pit with clean excavated material. 6 . Interruptions of Water Service: The Contractor shall advise the building occupants a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the interruption of water service. After the water service has been interrupted, the Contractor shall expeditiously continue work until service has been restored. In no case shall water service be interrupted for more than four (4) hours. 7 . Measurement and Payment : Private water service lines shall be measured per each service for the appropriate size of meter setting installed. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing all lines, valves, fittings, hangar straps, meter boxes and incidentals, trenching, trench safety, boring, jetting or jacking, flushing, testing, service restoration and all other work or materials required to provide water service lines from the meter location to the existing riser. 026406 Rev. 1/22/9 Page 3 of 3 SECTION 026409 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING VALVES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials required for furnishing and installing tapping sleeves, sleeves and valves required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Tapping sleeves shall have a Class 125 ANSI B16.1 outlet flange of cast iron, ductile iron or stainless steel. Sleeves shall be of ductile iron or 304 or 316 stainless steel. Lugs, bolts, washers and nuts shall be of 304 or 316 stainless steel. Iron sleeves shall be of the mechanical joint or caulked joint type as manufactured by Mueller, Clow, or approved equal. Stainless steel sleeves shall be of the compression gasket type capable of providing full support of the tapped pipe, as manufactured by Ford, Smith Blair, Romac, or approved equal. Gasket materials shall be of material suitable for potable water systems. Tapping sleeves shall be sized for the type and size of pipe to be tapped. The class of asbestos cement pipe that will most likely be encountered in the water will be Class 200 for pipes 6 inches in diameter and smaller, and Class 150 for larger pipes. It should be understood that existing pipes to be tapped may not be of the type of material and/or size that is shown on the drawings. The proper size and type of tapping sleeve shall be provided and installed regardless of what is encountered. Tapping valves shall conform to AWWA Standards and City Standard Specification Section 026411, "Gate Valves for Waterlines". Valve boxes shall be as described in City Standard Specification Section 026411, "Gate Valves for Waterlines". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Construction methods shall adhere to those set out in City Standard Specification Section 026402 "Waterlines", and City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, tapping sleeves and tapping valves shall be measured on a per each basis for each size installed. Payment for tapping sleeves and tapping valves shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing the valves complete in-place including joint materials, cast iron valve box, box extension, cover, concrete collar, and all other related items such as bolting, wrapping, cement-stabilized sand encasing,backfilling and compacting; and shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentals required to properly install the valves as indicated and specified. 026409 Page 1 of 1 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 026411 GATE VALVES FOR WATERLINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to provide and install all gate valves and valve boxes required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Gate Valves All valves shall meet the following requirements. Gate valves shall conform to AWWA Standard C515. 1) The gate valves shall be ductile iron resilient wedge (C515)with non-rising stems. 2) Valve ends shall be flanged or mechanical joint type or a combination of these as indicated or specified. A complete set of joint materials shall be furnished with each valve, except for bell ends and flanges. 3) Valves 16 inches and larger shall be furnished for horizontal installation—lay over. 4) Stem seals shall be the 0-ring type on valves through 12-inch size. Valves 16 inches and larger may be equipped with stuffing boxes. 5) Valves shall open left(counter clockwise). Valves over 18 inches shall have the main valve stem furnished with a combination hand wheel and operating nut. 6) Tapping valves to be used with tapping saddles shall have one end mechanical joint. 7) No position indicator will be required. 8) Within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit in triplicate, for approval, the following: a) Certified drawings of each size and type of valve 16 inches and larger showing principal dimensions, construction details, and materials used. b) On all size valves, the composition of bronze to be offered for various parts of the valve, complete with minimum tensile strength in psi, the minimum yield strength in psi, and the minimum elongation in 2"per cent. 026411 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Gate Valves Gate valves shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Cast Iron Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. When valves are in the street right-of- way, the top of box shall be set flush with the pavement or surrounding ground. In cultivated areas, the top of box shall be set twelve inches (12")below natural ground and long enough to be raised to natural ground at a future date. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, gate valves for waterlines will be measured as a unit for each gate valve and valve box installed. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing the valves complete in-place including joint materials, cast iron valve box, box extension, cover, concrete collar, and all other related items such as bolting, wrapping, cement- stabilized sand encasing, backfilling and compacting; and shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentals required to properly install the valves as indicated and specified. 026411 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 026416 FIRE HYDRANTS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to provide all fire hydrants required to complete this project. 2. MATERIALS Concrete: Concrete shall be Class "A" in accordance with Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete" of the City Standard Specifications, with a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Fire Hydrants: The fire hydrants shall conform to AWWA C502 (or latest edition) standard specifications for fire hydrants for ordinary water works service, except for changes, additions and supplementary details specifically outlined herein: a) Hydrants -Hydrants shall be of the traffic model type equipped with a safety flange or collar on both the hydrant barrel and stem. b) Type of Shutoff- The shutoff shall be of the compression type only. c) Inlet Connection - The inlet shall be ASA A-21.11 1964 mechanical joint for six-inch (6"), Class 150 ductile iron pipe. A complete set of joint material shall be furnished with each hydrant. d) Delivery Classifications -Each hydrant shall have two hose nozzles and one pumper nozzle. e) Bury Length- The hydrants shall be furnished in the bury length as indicated on drawings. f) Diameter (Nominal Inside) of Hose and Pumper Nozzles - The hose nozzles shall be two and one-half inches (2-1/2") inside diameter and the pumper nozzle shall be four inches (4") inside diameter. g) Hose and Pumper Nozzle Threads - The hose nozzles shall have two and one-half-inch (2-V2")National Standard thread (7-%2 threads per inch). The pumper nozzle shall have size (6) threads per inch with an outside diameter of 4.658 inches, pitch diameter of 4.543 inches, and a root diameter of 4.406 inches. h) Harnessing Lutes -None required. i) Nozzle Cap Gaskets -Required. j) Drain Openings -Required. 026416 Page 1 of 3 Rev.3-25-15 k) Tapping of Drain Opening- Tapping of the drain opening for pipe threads is not required. 1) Nozzle Chain-Not required. m) Direction to Open- The hydrants shall open left(counter clockwise). n) Color of Finish Above Ground Line - That portion of the hydrant above the ground line shall be painted chrome yellow. o) Shape and Size of Operating and Cap Nuts - The operating and cap nuts shall be tapered pentagon one and one-fourth inches (1-1/4") point to face at base and one and one-eighth inches (1-1/8")point to face at top of nut. p) Nozzle Cap Chains -Hydrants shall be furnished without nozzle cap chains. q) Size of Fire Hydran - The main valve opening shall not be less than five and one-quarter inches (5-1/4")inside diameter. r) Valve Facing - The main valve facing of the hydrant shall be rubber with 90± Durometer hardness. When the main valve lower washer and stem nut are not an integral casting then the bottom stem threads shall be protected with a bronze cap nut and a bronze lock nut. s) Barrel Sections - The hydrant shall be made in two or more barrel sections with flanges connecting the barrel to the elbow and to the packing plate. t) Breakable Coupling - Hydrants shall be equipped with a breakable coupling on both the barrel section and the stem. The couplings shall be so designed that in case of traffic collision the barrel and stem collar will break before any other part of the hydrant breaks. u) Hydrant Adjustment - The hydrant shall be designed as to permit its extension without excavating after the hydrant is completely installed. v) Breakable Collars, Barrel and Stem - Weakened steel or weakened cast iron bolts that are used in the breakable barrel couplings will not be acceptable. w) Operating Stem- Stems that have operating thread located in the waterway shall be made of manganese bronze, Everdure, or other high quality non-corrodible metal. Stems that do not have operating threads located in the waterway must be sealed by a packing gland or "O"-ring seal located between the stem threads and waterway. Iron or steel stems shall be constructed with a bronze sleeve extending through the packing or "O"-ring seal area. The sleeve shall be of sufficient length to be in the packing gland "O"-ring seal in the both open and closed positions of the main valve. The sleeve shall be secured to the steel stem so as to prevent water leakage between the two when subjected to 300 pounds hydrostatic test pressure. 026416 Page 2 of 3 Rev.3-25-15 x) Drain Valve Mechanism - Drain valves operating through springs or gravity are not acceptable. y) Operating Stem Nut - The operating stein nut shall be designed to prevent seepage or rain, sleet, and the accumulation of dust between the operating nut and the hydrant top. z) Packing Gland or "O"-Ring Seal - Fire hydrants having the threaded part of the stem at the hydrant top shall be equipped with a packing gland or an "O"-ring seal immediately below the threaded section of the stem. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Fire hydrants shall be installed as shown on drawings. Minimum burial length shall be 3 feet. Breakable couplings shall be located at least 2 inches and less than 6 inches above finish grade. Hydrants and fittings shall be stored on timber and kept clean. The interior surfaces of hydrants and fittings shall be washed and sterilized with approved sterilizing agent, if requested by the Engineer at the time of installation. 4. CERTIFICATION The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer two (2) certified sets of prints showing complete details and dimensions of the hydrant. The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer one (1) certified copy of the physical tests of all metals used in the manufacture of the fire hydrant that is normally manufactured and that will meet these specifications. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, fire hydrants will be measured as a unit per each. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing the complete fire hydrant assembly with valve, 6-inch line and fitting on the main; and shall be full compensation for all labor,materials, tools, equipment and incidentals required to properly complete the work. 026416 Page 3of3 Rev.3-25-15 SECTION 027200 CONTROL OF WASTEWATER FLOWS (TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS) 1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern all work necessary for designing, installing, implementing, operating, and maintaining a temporary bypass pumping and flow control system, as provided by the Contractor for the purpose of diverting wastewater flow around the work area for the duration necessary to complete the work (i.e., control of wastewater flows). The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, power, maintenance, and incidentals required to maintain continuous and reliable wastewater service in all lines for the duration of the project. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Bypass Pumping Plan Form: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to legibly and thoroughly complete, in its entirety, the attached Bypass Pumping Plan Form and submit it to the Engineer and/or the appropriate City staff for review and approval, prior to the installation of any pumping system proposed for use. Unless the bypass pumping is associated with an emergency work order, the standard approval protocol is as follows: The Contractor prepares and submits the plan to the Engineer a minimum of 7 days prior to mobilizing to site. The Engineer reviews the bypass plan and coordinates approval with Engineering Services and the Operating Department. Engineer and City will put forth a reasonable level of effort to expedite the review and approval process. No deviation from the procedure shall be allowed. B. Bypass Pumping Plan Schematic: In addition to the above referenced form, the Contractor shall also furnish a sufficiently detailed schematic drawing identifying the approximate location of all bypass pumping system components. The schematic drawing shall clearly label parallel/crossing streets, identify landmark structures, and depict the locations of all pumps and piping. At a minimum, the bypass pumping plan schematic drawing and associated attachments should include the following items: 1) Pump curves showing designed operation point for this specific project 2) Approximate location of bypass system pumping components 3) Location of manhole or access point for suction and discharge 4) Configuration,routing, location and depth of the suction and discharge piping 5) General arrangement/type of additional support equipment. 6) Temporary pipe supports, anchoring and thrust restraint blocks, if required 7) Traffic Control Plan and Traffic Department permit if the bypass is within the right- of-way. 8) Description of the method for removing pressure and all wastewater from existing force mains being taken out of service,if necessary. 9) All other City-department and Regulatory requirements. 027200 Page 1 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 10) Sewer plugging locations,method, and types of plugs 11) Method of protecting discharge manholes or structures from erosion and damage. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY/AUTHORITY A. It is essential to the operation of the existing wastewater system that there is no interruption in the flow of wastewater throughout the duration of the project. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for designing, scheduling, providing, installing, operating, fueling and maintaining the temporary bypass pumping system in a manner that does not cause or contribute to overflows, releases, or spills of wastewater from the wastewater or bypass system. The Contractor shall neither anticipate nor expect any assistance from the City of Corpus Christi departments for any of the bypass operation. B. Contractor shall provide a responsible employee to man the bypass system 24 hours per day, 7 days per week during operation. The monitoring employee shall be properly trained, experienced, and mechanically qualified such that they can quickly and effectively address any potential emergency and non-emergency situations associated with the bypass system which must remain in operation. The wastewater and bypass systems should be inspected at least once every 2 hours. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the wastewater collection system is not compromised during bypass installation or operation, and contractor shall ensure that the system operates properly during this period. C. The Contractor shall consider and be responsible for the impacts on the collection system area, both upstream and downstream of the bypass and shall maintain the system in a manner that will protect public and private property from damage and flooding. Upstream impacts may include, but are not limited to backups and overflows. Downstream impacts may include,but are not limited to surcharges and overflows. D. Contractor shall make all effort to minimize spills of raw wastewater during the improvements and bypassing. All spills and sanitary sewer overflows shall immediately be reported to the City at 361-826-2489 and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for wash down, clean-up and disinfection of said spillages or overflows to the satisfaction of the owner at no additional cost to the City of Corpus Christi. E. The City is permitted through the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality to operate the wastewater system. The final authority comes from the City as to the operation of the wastewater system and as such it reserves the right to halt the bypassing operation at any time in order to maintain public health and safety. 027200 Page 2 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Bypass Pumps a. Pumps shall be fully automatic self-priming pumps that do not require the use of foot-valves or vacuum pumps in the priming system. The pumps may be electric or diesel powered. Pre-approved manufacturers are Godwin or Rain-for-Rent. Approved equals may be considered by the Engineer if they meet all requirements in this specification but Contractor shall provide submittal package for Engineer's review and approval prior to installation. Pumps shall be equipped with critically silenced, sound attenuated enclosures with a maximum 65 dB (10-feet from pump), a diesel day tank with a minimum 24-hour runtime without refuel, and automatic start/stop controls for each pump. b. Pumping capacity of the bypass pump shall be capable of handling the flow conditions at all times and shall provide a minimum of 1.5 times the existing capacity of whatever line or lift station is being bypassed. c. The Contractor shall have adequate standby equipment available and ready for immediate operation and use in the event of an emergency or breakdown. In critical installations, as determined by the Engineer, one standby pump for each size pump utilized shall be installed at the mainline flow bypassing locations, ready for use in the event of primaiy pump failure. B. Suction and Discharge Piping: Determined according to pump size, flow calculations, system operating conditions, manhole depth, and length of suction piping in accordance with the pump manufacturers specifications and recommendations. In order to prevent the accidental spillage of flows, all discharge systems shall be temporarily constructed of heavy-duty pipe with positive restrained joints. a. High Density Polyethylene(HDPE) i. Homogeneous throughout, free of visible cracks, discoloration, pitting, varying wall thickness, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults. Defective areas shall be cut out and butt-fusion welded as per manufacturer's recommendations. ii. Assembled and joined at site using couplings, flanges, or butt-fusion method to provide leak proof joint, as per manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D- 2657. iii. Fusing must be performed by personnel certified as fusion technicians by manufacturer of HDPE pipe and/or fusing equipment. Fused joints shall be watertight and have tensile strength equal to that of pipe. iv. HDPE is required to be used in or adjacent to environmentally sensitive areas. b. Polyethylene Plastic Pipe(PE) i. High density solid wall and following ASTM F714 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-DR) based on outside diameter, ASTM D1248 and ASTM D3550 ii. Homogeneous throughout, free of visible cracks, discoloration, pitting, varying wall thickness,holes, foreign material,blisters, or other deleterious faults. c. Quick-Disconnect Steel Galvanized Pipe and Heavy-Duty Flexible Hoses 027200 Page 3 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 i. Must consist of heavy-duty steel with high tensile strength, x-ray welded, abrasion resistant and suitable for intended service with a maximum pressure rating of at least 174 PSI ii. Bauer quick-disconnect fittings/joints shall be restrained and watertight. Joints shall consist of vacuum sealing O-rings to help pumps prime faster and perform at their designed flow rates with no leaks, even at high pressure ratings iii. Joints shall provide 30-degree articulation at every coupling and shall not require perfect alignment to make each connection. iv. The galvanized couplings shall not be hindered by sand,mud, and grit. d. Valves and Fittings i. Contractor shall provide valves and fittings as necessary and in accordance with the approved pipe materials shown above. e. Plugs i. Selected and installed according to size of line to be plugged, pipe, manhole configurations, and based on specific application. ii. Prior to use, Engineer may inspect plugs for defects which may lead to failure. iii. Contractor shall provide additional plugs in the case of failure f. Miscellaneous i. When temporary piping crosses local streets/roadways and private driveways, Contractor shall provide traffic ramps or covers designed, installed, and maintained for H-20 loading requirements while in use. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULING&COORDINATION A. Unless the bypass pumping is associated with an emergency work order, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of 48 hour notice to the Engineer and Wastewater Department for the startup of bypass operations once the completed bypass plan has been approved by the design engineer. Unless needed otherwise for emergency work,no bypassing shall be initiated on Friday, Saturday or Sunday, or the day immediately preceding a City holiday. B. Inclement Weather: The Contractor shall not be allowed to commence bypass operation should inclement weather be forecast for the period of the scheduled improvements. C. Under special circumstances, as identified by the Engineer, where critical lines with large service areas are being bypassed, the Contractor is responsible for setting up a meeting between the Engineer/City/Operating Department to affirm and coordinate the approved bypass plan and to verify the intended site installation conforms to the approved plan. Engineer may also require the bypass system to be in service for at least 24-hours prior to taking existing gravity lines or force mains out of service to demonstrate reliability. D. Before beginning bypass operations, the Engineer/City Operating Department must be notified for field verification of pumps, piping, and equipment, etc., to ensure the site installation conforms to the approved plan. 027200 Page 4 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 E. Before beginning bypass operations, the Contractor shall confirm appropriate emergency contact information has been provided to the City and Engineer on the Bypass Pumping Plan Form including emergency cell phone number of bypass operators/monitors responsibly manning the bypass system 24 hours per day along with the project superintendent and pump supplier. F. The Contractor can work extended hours, if approved by the Engineer, to perform the improvements during the bypass operation. Work during extended hours cannot create a nuisance for the neighbors. G. Once a lift station is taken out of service and bypass operations begun, work shall be continuous on the lift station improvements until all improvements are completed and the lift station is returned to normal service. H. The Contractor shall cease bypass pumping operations and return flows to the new and/or existing wastewater system when directed by the Owner. This may be expected if the bypass system is not in accordance with this specification or if inclement weather is in the forecast. 3.2 INSTALLATION &OPERATIONS A. Installation of Temporary Force Mains a. Force mains may be placed along shoulder of road, medians, and/or outside of pavement. Do not place in streets or sidewalks without Engineers approval. b. When temporary piping crosses local streets/roadways and/or private driveways, Contractor shall provide traffic ramps or covers designed, installed, and maintained for H-20 loading requirements while in use. c. When traffic ramps cannot be used, install temporary piping in trenches and cover with temporary pavement, as approved by the Engineer. B. Discharge piping to gravity lines or manholes shall be designed in such a manner as to prevent discharge from contacting manhole walls or benching with as minimal turbulence as possible. C. Plugging or blocking of wastewater flows shall incorporate a primary and secondary plugging device. When plugging or blocking is no longer needed for performance and acceptance of work, it is to be removed in a manner that permits the wastewater flow to slowly return to normal without surge, to prevent surcharging or causing other major disturbances downstream. D. The Contractor shall not cut existing force mains or gravity lines until it is determined that the containment area in place is sufficient for handling any wastewater within the pipe. E. Some locations may require multiple bypass systems. If bypass system is provided with air release valves,then the valve drains shall be piped to a manhole for discharge. F. Upon completion of the bypass pumping operations, remove piping, restore property to pre-construction condition and restore pavement. 027200 Page 5 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form, Control of Wastewater Flows (Temporary Bypass Pumping Systems) shall not be measured for pay but will be considered subsidiary to the applicable pay item, to include all material, labor, equipment and supervision necessary to complete the bypass design,planning, coordination,installation, operation,maintenance and removal. 027200 Page 6 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 BYPASS PUMPING PLAN FORM Date: Project Title: No.: Engineer: Contractor: Service Area: Lift Station No.(if applicable): Start Date&Time: Completion Date&Time: Sewer Line Size being Bypassed: Estimated Peak Flow: Line Plugging Method&Locations: Suction Manhole or Lift Station Number and Depth: Discharge Manhole or Lift Station Number and Depth: Maximum Surcharge Depth Allowed: Bypass Forcemain Size,Material&Length: Pump Description: (Self-Priming,Critically Silenced,and Automatic Level Controls Required) Make,Model, Suction/Discharge Size: Diesel or Electric Total Number of Pumps/Standby Pumps: Total&Firm Capacity(GPM @ TDH): Vacuum Trucks(if required,number and capacity): Contractor Personnel Manning Bypass System(24 hours/day): Name: Phone: Name: Phone: Emergency Contacts: Name: Phone: Name: Phone: Additional Notes: Required Checklist: YES NO ❑ ❑ Schematic drawing providing details of proposed bypass pumping system,routing of bypass lines(using manhole numbers and/or lift station names as applicable), equipment location,and proposed sequencing. ❑ ❑ Has traffic control plan been appropriately modified to facilitate the bypass pumping equipment? ❑ ❑ Pumps: Self-priming&Critically Silenced. Provide pump curve with Bypass plan. (Requirement). ❑ ❑ Contractor shall coordinate with Supplier for appropriate instruction and training on pump operation. ❑ ❑ Have emergency and/or backup provisions been made for quick pump change out in the case of system failure? ❑ ❑ Contractor has confirmed no rain(less than'/z-in)in the forecast? Prepared by: Reviewed by: Contractor Representative Date Wastewater Representative Date 027200 Page 7 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 027202 MANHOLES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing of all materials and construction of manholes composed of a concrete base and concrete walls as shown on the drawings, to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on drawings or established by the Engineer. 2. MATERIALS Concrete for cast-in-place storm water manholes and storm water junction boxes shall be Class C (3,600 psi at 28 days). Manholes for wastewater shall be made from fiberglass only,in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027205 "Fiberglass Manholes". Mortar for plastering shall be one (1) part Portland cement to three (3) parts clean hard and sharp mortar sand, free of all foreign substances or injurious alkalis. Reinforcing steel, where used, shall conform to the requirements of Section 032020 'Reinforcing Steel". All wastewater manhole rings and covers for streets shall be East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. product V1430 CV or V1420/1480 Z1, or pre-approved equal, and shall have the seating surface of ring and cover machined to secure a snug fit per the City Standard Wastewater Details. All storm water manholes shall be East Jordan Iron Works,Inc.product V 1168 assembly,and for school zones shall be a bolted assembly per the City Standard Storm Water Details. Steps are not required for wastewater and storm water manholes. Joint material for precast concrete manholes shall be Rain-Nek Flexible Plastic Gaskets as manufactured by K. T. Snyder Company, Houston, Texas, or an approved equal. 3. EXCAVATION The Contractor shall do all necessary excavation for the various manholes, conforming to size and dimensions shown on plans plus a maximum of four(4)feet working room. Excavation shall not be carried to greater depth than required. Subgrade under manhole footings shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Shoring shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be installed as necessary. Shoring shall not be removed or backfilled around until entire manhole is completed, unless authorized by the Engineer. Shoring shall remain in place at least twenty-four (24)hours after concrete work has been completed. 027202 Page 1 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 4. CONCRETE MANHOLES (STORM WATER ONLY) (1) Formed-in-Place Manholes: Where formed concrete is used, forms shall be built to dimensions shown on the standard details. Inserts and openings shall be formed so concrete will not be injured during process of stripping forms. Forms shall be braced and tied to prevent spreading or bulging, and shall meet approval of the Engineer prior to placing concrete. Forms shall remain in place for minimum of twenty-four(24)hours, and shall be removed within a maximum time of seven (7) days after completion of concrete work. Reinforcing steel, if required, shall be as shown on the plans. The bottom of manholes shall be carefully formed and inverted smoothly when finished, with pipes cut to fit inside surface of walls. (2) Precast Manholes Precast manholes shall allow unobstructed view of all pipes connected to the manhole. Precast manholes shall be designed to support HS-20 traffic loading and designed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. The upper 18 inches of the corbel shall be brick to facilitate subsequent grade adjustment. Either concentric or eccentric cones may be required. Where not specified,eccentric cones shall be used. Manhole designs shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer. 5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION METHODS All items shall be installed as the work progresses and as shown on the standard details. Work shall be completed and finished in a careful workmanlike manner,with special care being given to sealing joints around all pipe extending through walls of the manholes. After finishing walls,the bottom of the manhole shall be completed by adding sufficient concrete to shape the bottom in conformity with requirements on the plans. Where old manholes are adjusted to meet new lines and grades, all old masonry or concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted before joining new masonry or concrete to it. HDPE adjustment rings are to be used to match roadway grade. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. 6. BACKFILLING/LEAKAGE TESTING Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than six inches (6") and compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density before next layer is installed. Wastewater manholes shall withstand a leakage test not to exceed the values stated in City Standard Specification Section 027205 "Fiberglass Manholes", except that an additional 10 percent of loss will be permitted for each additional two feet head over a basic two-foot internal head. 027202 Page 2 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, manholes shall be measured by each individual structure built, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the manholes, excavation,compaction,backfilling,dewatering,concrete foundation,connections,adjustment rings, ring and cover, concrete work, leakage testing,video inspection, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. Extra depth for wastewater manholes over six feet in depth shall be measured by the vertical foot and shall be paid for at the price bid per vertical foot for 'Extra Depth for Manholes". Rehabilitation of existing manholes with fiberglass inserts shall be measured by each individual structure rehabilitated, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor,materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the rigid fiberglass manhole inserts,make connections,grout the annular space,backfilling,adjustment rings, ring and cover, concrete work, leakage testing, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. 027202 Page 3 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 027203 VACUUM TESTING OF WASTEWATER MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification governs all work and materials necessary to perform vacuum testing of new or existing wastewater manholes. Manholes may be tested after installation with all connections (existing and/or proposed) in place. Vacuum testing may be performed prior to or after backfilling by the installer. Final acceptance, in accordance with the requirements of this specification, will consist of vacuum testing of the completed and installed structure (manhole) in place to include manhole/adjustment rings and manhole casting. 2. MATERIALS Vacuum testing shall consist of a minimum of the following: (a) Engine. (b) Vacuum Pump. (c) Hose. (d) Test Head device capable of sealing opening in manhole casting as required. (e) Pneumatic Test Plugs - these plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the connecting pipe to be sealed. 3. PROCEDURE (a) The test head shall be placed at the top of the manhole in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. (b) A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn on the manhole,the valve on the vacuum line of the test head closed, and the vacuum pump shut off. The time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches of mercury. (c) The manhole shall pass if the time for the vacuum reading to drop from 10 inches of mercury to 9 inches of mercury meets or exceeds the values indicated in Table 1. (d) If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made by an approved method. The manhole shall then be retested until a satisfactory test is obtained. 027203 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 1 -Minimum Test Times for Various Manhole Diameters (ASTM C1244) Depth Diameter(inches) (feet) 42 48 54 60 72 Time(seconds) 8 17 20 23 26 33 10 21 25 29 33 41 12 25 30 35 39 49 14 30 35 41 46 57 16 34 40 46 52 67 18 38 45 52 59 73 20 42 50 53 65 81 22 46 55 64 72 89 24 51 59 64 78 97 26 55 64 75 85 105 28 59 69 81 91 113 30 68 74 87 98 121 4. TESTING AND CERTIFICATION (a) Testing shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Engineer or his designated representative. All manholes and structures shall be tested as finished and completed for final acceptance. (b) ANY DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIALS shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor and retested. This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise indicated on the Bid Form, vacuum testing of wastewater manholes and structures will not be measured for pay. Such items shall be considered subsidiary to pay items applicable for Fiberglass Manholes, complete and in-place. 027203 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 027205 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for providing, installing and adjusting fiberglass manholes required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL Fiberglass manholes shall be installed at the locations indicated on the drawings. 3. MATERIALS A. Manholes Fiberglass manholes shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D3753-"Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells,"latest edition, and the referenced design criteria as follows: 1. ASTM C581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service 2. ASTM D695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics 3. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 4. ASTM C923 Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals 5. ASTM D2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading 6. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor 7. ASTM D2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins 8. ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 9. ASTM F794 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter 10. ASTM C32 Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made From Clay or Shale) The minimum wall thickness for all fiberglass manholes at all depths shall be 0.50 inch. The inside diameter of the manhole barrel shall be a minimum of 48 inches or as otherwise specified on the drawings, but shall not be less than 1.5 times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe, whichever is larger. A concentric reducer over the barrel shall have a 027205 Page 1 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 minimum inside diameter of 31.75 inches at the top, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Manhole Pipe Connectors Manhole pipe connectors for Sanitary Sewer Application shall be made of corrosion resistant plastic. The connector shall eliminate leaks around the pipe entering the manhole wall and shall permit pipe movement without loss of seal integrity, and shall be in conformance with ASTM D3212. Material for elastomeric seal in push-on joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Material for rubber sleeve shall meet the requirements of ASTM C443. Manhole pipe connectors between 4 inches and 15 inches shall be Inserta Tee from Fowler Mfg., or approved equal. Manhole pipe connection for Storm Sewer Application shall be made with Ram-Nek flexible plastic gasket material as manufactured by K.T. Snyder Company of Houston, Texas, or approved equal, and wrapped with Class `A' Subsurface Drainage Geotextile, AASHTO M288. C. Manhole Base Concrete shall be Class `A' in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Caulk for seal between fiberglass manhole and concrete cast-in-place base shall be Epo-Flex epoxy(gun grade consistency)as manufactured by Dewey Supply of Corpus Christi,Texas, or approved equal. Precast reinforced concrete manhole base shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C478, as shown on the construction plans and detail drawings. D. Inflow Inhibitors Inflow inhibitors shall be installed in sanitary manholes. They shall be of 316 stainless steel with an equivalent thickness of not less than 18 gauge, and load tested in excess of 3000 pounds. The inhibitor shall rest on the lip of the seating surface of the manhole ring and shall not exceed a depth of 6.5 inches. The seating surface of the inhibitor shall have an attached gasket on the weight-bearing side. The inhibitor shall have a gas relief valve made of Nitrite and shall operate at a one (1)psi differential pressure. The inhibitor shall be fitted with a handle of 3/16 plastic coated stainless steel cable attached to the insert body with a 6# 316 stainless steel rivet. The inhibitor shall be constructed of materials that withstand highly corrosive sewer gases. E. Rine and Cover Manhole ring and cover for all manholes shall be for street application and shall be as indicated on the drawings. Manholes 5 feet in diameter and larger shall require a nominal 3- foot ring and cover, as specified on the drawings. HDPE adjustment rings are to be used for 027205 Page 2 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 grade adjustments. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. F. Flowable Grout Flowable grout (or flowable fill) shall consist of a mixture containing Portland cement, fly ash, sand, water, and"Darafill" admixture (or approved equivalent), in the amounts shown below (or otherwise proportioned to provide 100 psi compressive strength at 28 days), to achieve a paste-like consistency immediately prior to placing the flowable grout. The flowable grout mixture shall be supplied by an approved ready-mix supplier. The manufacturer's representative shall be consulted for any final adjustments to improve the flowability of the mixture. Commercially produced flowable grout may be used with approval of the Engineer. 100 lbs/CY Portland Cement 300 lbs/CY Fly Ash 2100 lbs/CY Sand 250 lbs/CY Water 6 oz/CY "Darafill"admixture,as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or approved equivalent. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS General: The limits of excavation shall allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting,shoring,bracing,etc. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways,power poles, drainage structures, streets, etc. Subgrade under manhole footings shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Vertical Sides: When necessary to protect other improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical sides on the excavation. The limits shall not exceed three feet outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment,power poles, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all sheeting, shoring and bracing. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled. Sloping Sides: In unimproved areas where sufficient space is available,the Contractor will be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation. The back slope shall be such that the excavation will be safe from caving. Safety requirements shall govern the back slope used. De-watering: The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams,bailing,pumping,well pointing, or any combination, as the particular situation may warrant. All de-watering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction,removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of form work. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a de-watered condition for a sufficient period of time to 027205 Page 3 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 insure the safety of the structure,but in no case shall de-watering be terminated sooner than seven(7)days after placing concrete. All de-watering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before work on the structure is started. The Contractor shall provide a relatively smooth,firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the City, regardless of the soil conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether these conditions have been met. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not create an unsafe condition. Unauthorized Over-Excavation: Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that rest on earth, shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the drawings. In the event the excavation is carried below the indicated elevation, the Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to the required grade by filling with concrete. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations: For sanitary sewer application,pipe penetrations for pipe sizes 4-inch through 15-inch shall be made with appropriately sized core drill bits recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe penetrations other than described above and as authorized by the Engineer shall be made as follows: cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus 1/2 inch. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with masonry blade. Impact type tools shall not be used. Handling: Manholes shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the manhole or the surroundings. If manhole must be moved by rolling,the ground which it traverses shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. Height Adjustment: If necessary, utilize HDPE adjustment rings to adjust the manhole to the correct grade elevation. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. Installation: Lower manhole into wet concrete until it rests at the proper elevation, and a minimum of six (6) inches into concrete, then plumb. Backfill Material: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, initial backfrll around manholes (from subgrade to five feet (5') above the top of the concrete footing) shall be flowable grout. The remaining final backfill around manholes shall be cement-stabilized sand, or approved equal, containing a minimum of 2 sacks of standard Type I or Type II Portland cement per cubic yard of sand, free of large hard lumps, rock fragments or other debris. The material shall be free of large lumps or clods which will not readily break down under compaction. This material shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Topsoil should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading around the structure, if necessary. 027205 Page 4 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 Schedule of Backfilling: The Contractor may begin backfilling around manhole as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure and the forms removed. Compaction: Backfill shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6 inches compacted thickness and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698). Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. Contractor shall follow operational requirements for bypass pumping as set forth in City Standard Specification Section 027200 "Control of Wastewater Flows". 5. TESTING Manholes shall be tested for leakage by either of two tests as specified by the Engineer. Water Leakage Test: The Contractor shall provide water, labor, and materials for testing. Testing shall be as follows: 1. With sewers plugged, the manhole shall be filled with water. 2. The manhole shall be checked after 24 hours have elapsed. 3. Water loss shall not exceed 2.4 gallons per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for 4-foot diameter manholes, or 3.0 gallons per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for 5-foot diameter manholes. Water loss shall not exceed 0.6 gallon per foot of diameter per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for all sizes of sanitary manholes. 4. If the manhole is within 9 feet of a waterline that is not or cannot be encased, the manhole shall be tested for no leaks and no noticeable loss of water shall be experienced for the 24-hour period. If water loss is excessive,the Contractor shall correct the problem and the manhole shall be retested. Vacuum Test: Vacuum testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027203 "Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manholes and Structures". 6. GRADE ADJUSTMENT OF EXISTING FIBERGLASS MANHOLES The adjustment of the ring and cover is to be achieved by removal or addition of HDPE grade adjustment rings that rest above the fiberglass corbel. If the ring and cover must be lowered to the extent that the new elevation cannot be achieved by removal of adjustment rings and it is necessary to remove a section of the fiberglass manhole, this work shall be done as described below. Note that manhole repair kits are available for this work. Remove the appropriately sized section of the existing manhole from the vertical manhole wall at least 6 inches below the seam where the corbel meets the vertical wall. 027205 Page 5 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 Excavate evenly around the manhole as required. Mark, cut and remove the required section of the manhole. Make a square cut as necessary for a good butt splice. Grind and clean ends of fiberglass that are to be re-united. Replace and align the top. Fiberglass a 6-inch strip along the outside seam all around with two layers of mat with one layer of woven roving sandwiched between. After the outside has set, go on the inside and fill any voids in the seam with epoxy or material provided by the manhole manufacturer for use in such application. After the putty has set, fiberglass a 6-inch strip on the inside as previously done on the outside. After curing,backfill with cement-stabilized sand,as described above,compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,fiberglass manholes shall be measured per each for each size (diameter) of manhole indicated. Payment shall be made at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals required to complete the work. Payment shall include,but not be limited to; excavation, dewatering, compaction, concrete foundation, manhole assembly,connections,cast iron frame and cover,adjustment to finish grade,concrete work,backfill, leakage testing, bypass pumping, and other work as required to complete the fiberglass manhole. Extra depth for a sanitary manhole over 6 feet in depth will be measured by the vertical foot of depth in excess of 6 feet and bid as "Extra Depth for Manhole (Wastewater)". Rehabilitation of existing manholes with fiberglass inserts shall be measured by each individual structure rehabilitated, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor,materials,tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the rigid fiberglass manhole inserts, make connections, grout the annular space with flowable grout, backfilling, leakage testing, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. 027205 Page 6 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 027402 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforced concrete pipe culverts and the material and incidental construction requirements for reinforced concrete pipe sewers. The culvert pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of these specifications to the lines and grades shown on the plans, and shall be of the classes, sizes and dimensions shown thereon. The installation of pipe shall include all joints or connections to new or existing pipe, headwalls, etc., as may be required to complete the work. 2. MATERIALS 1. General. Except as modified herein, materials, manufacture and design of pipe shall conform to ASTM C-76 for Circular Pipe. All pipe shall be machine made or cast by a process which will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete pipe. 2. Design. All pipe shall be Class III (Wall "B") unless otherwise specified on the plans. The shell thickness, the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the pipe shall conform to the specified class as summarized in ASTM C-76 for Circular Pipe. 3. Sizes and Permissible Variations. a. Variations in diameter, size, shape, wall thickness, reinforcement, placement of reinforcement, laying length and the permissible underrun of length shall be in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe as referred to previously. b. Where rubber gasket pipe joints are to be used, the design of the Joints and Permissible Variations in Dimensions shall be in accordance with ASTM C-443. 4. Workmanship and Finish. Pipe shall be substantially free from fractures, large or deep cracks and surface roughness. The ends of the pipe shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the pipe within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. 5. Curing. Pipe shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe as referred to above. 6. Marking. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe: 027402 Page 1 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 a. The class of pipe. b. The date of manufacture. c. The name or trademark of the manufacturer. d. Marking shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. 7. Minimum Age for Shipment. Pipe shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein. 8. Inspection. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished pipe shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the pipe manufacturing plant. In addition, the finished pipe shall be subject to further inspection by the Engineer at the project site prior to and during installation. 9. Causes for Rejection. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding. c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. d. Damaged ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. 10. Repairs. Pipe may be repaired if necessary, because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling, and will be acceptable if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired pipe conforms to the requirements of the specifications. 11. Rejections. All rejected pipe shall be plainly marked by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe that meets the requirements of these specifications. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 12. Jointing Materials. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, the Contractor shall have the option of making the joints by any of the following methods: a. Rain-Nek, a pre-formed plastic base joint material manufactured by K. T. Knyder Company, Houston, Texas, or an approved equal. Use of Talcote as joint material will not be not permitted. Ram-Nek joint material and primer shall be supplied for 027402 Page 2 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 use on pipe in the following sizes, which is the minimum that will be required. Additional Ram-Nek may be required if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a proper joint is not secured. Pipe Size Primer Per 100 Jts. Cut Lengths Per Joint 12" 1.5 gals. P/2 pcs 1" x 2'-5" 15" 1.9 gals. 2 pcs 1" x 2'-5" 18" 2.7 gals. 11/2 pcs 1'/2 " x 3'-5" 21" 3.8 gals. 2 pcs 11/2 " x 3'-5" 24" 6.2 gals. 2 pcs 11/2 " x 3'-5" 30" 8.5 gals. 21/2 pcs 1'/2 " x 3'-5" 36" 9.5 gals. 3 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 42" 12.0 gals. 31/2 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 48" 15.0 gals. 4 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 54" 20.0 gals. 41/2 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 60" 25.0 gals. 5 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 66" 30.0 gals. 51/2 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 72" 32.0 gals. 6 pcs 2" x 3'-5" 84" 35.0 gals. 7 pcs 2" x 3'-5" b. TYLOX Types "C", "C-P" or "CR" rubber gaskets, as applicable, as manufactured by Hamilton Kent Manufacturing Company, Kent, Ohio, or approved equal. All gaskets, lubricants, adhesives, etc., shall be manufactured, constructed, installed, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer of the rubber gasket material and conform to ASTM Designation: C-443. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish to the City, for approval, manufacturer's brochures detailing the complete use, installation, and specifications of concrete pipe and rubber gaskets before any rubber gasket material is used on the project. All rubber gaskets shall be fabricated from synthetic rubber. c. Cement Mortar is prohibited from jointing pipe except at manholes, pipe junctions, etc., or where specifically approved by the Engineer. d. Geotextile for wrapping pipe joints shall be Class "A" subsurface drainage type in accordance with AASHTO M288. 027402 Page 3 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Reinforced concrete pipe culverts shall be constructed from the specified materials in accordance with the following methods and procedures: 1. Excavation. All excavation shall be in accordance with the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities," except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on the plans or permitted by the Engineer. When pipe is laid in a trench, the trench, when completed and shaped to receive the pipe, shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space for satisfactory bedding and jointing and thorough tamping of the backfill and bedding material under and around the pipe. The Contractor shall make such temporary provisions as may be necessary to insure adequate drainage of the trench and bedding during the construction operation. Pipe shall be placed such that the identification markings are visible at the top prior to backfill. 2. Bedding. The pipe shall be bedded in accordance with the bedding details shown on the drawings. Bedding shall not be measured for pay,but shall be subsidiary to other work. If the subgrade of the trench is unstable, even if this condition occurs at relatively shallow depths, full encasement of the pipe with crushed stone shall be required. 3. Laying Pipe. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the laying of pipe on the prepared foundation shall be started at the outlet (downstream) end with the spigot or tongue end pointing downstream, and shall proceed toward the inlet(upstream) end with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the established lines and grades. Where bell and spigot pipe are used, cross trenches shall be cut in the foundation to allow the barrel of the pipe to rest firmly upon the prepared bed. These cross trenches shall be not more than two inches larger than the bell ends of the pipe. Proper facilities shall be provided for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe into the trench without disturbing the prepared foundation and the sides of the trench. The ends of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned before the pipe is placed. As each length of pipe is laid, the mouth of the pipe shall be protected to prevent the entrance of earth or bedding material. The pipe shall be fitted and matched so that when laid in the bed, it shall form a smooth, uniform conduit. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing is used, the pipe shall be laid in the trench in such position that the markings "TOP" or "BOTTOM" shall not be more than 5 degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. For pipe over 42 inches in diameter, the Contractor may drill two holes not larger than 2 inches in diameter, in the top of each section of the pipe, to aid in lifting and placing. The holes shall be neatly drilled, without spalling of the concrete, and shall be done without the cutting of any reinforcement. After the pipe is laid, the holes shall be filled with mortar and properly cured, and placed such that they are visible from the top for inspection prior to backfill. Multiple installations of reinforced concrete pipe shall be laid with the center lines of 027402 Page 4of7 Rev.3-25-2015 individual barrels parallel. When not otherwise indicated on plans, the following clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipe shall be used. Diameter of Pipe 18" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60"to 84" Clear Distance Between Pipes 0'-9" 0'-I1" 1'-1" 1'-3" 1'-5" 1'-7" 1'-11" 2'-0" 4. Jointing. a. If the use of Portland cement mortar joints is allowed, all pipe shall be jointed tight and sealed with stiff mortar, composed of one part Portland cement and two parts sand, so placed as to form a durable water-tight joint. The installation shall be as required by the Engineer. b. Joints using Rubber Gaskets: Where rubber gasket pipe joints are required by the plans, the joint assembly shall be made according to the recommendations of the gasket manufacturer. Water-tight joints will be required when using rubber gaskets. c. Joints using Cold-Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets shall be made as follows: A suitable prime of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the gasket joint sealer shall be brush-applied to the tongue and groove joint surfaces and the end surfaces and allowed to dry and harden. No primer shall be applied over mud, sand or dirt or sharp cement protrusions. The surface to be primed must be clean and dry when primer is applied. Before laying the pipe in the trench, the plastic gasket sealer shall be attached around the tapered tongue or tapered groove near the shoulder or hub of each pipe joint. The paper wrapper shall be removed from one side only of the two-piece wrapper on the gasket and pressed firmly to the clean, dry pipe joint surface. The outside wrapper shall not be removed until immediately before pushing the pipe into its final position. When the tongue is correctly aligned with the flare of the groove, the outside wrapper on the gasket shall be removed and the pipe shall be pulled or pushed home with sufficient force and power (backhoe shovel, chain hoist, ratchet hoist or winch) to cause the evidence of squeeze-out of the gasket material on the inside or outside around the complete pipe joint circumference. The extruded gasket material shall be smoothed out over the joint on the exterior and interior of the pipe. Any joint material pushed out into the interior of the pipe that would tend to obstruct the flow shall be removed. (Pipe shall be pulled home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times.) Backfilling of pipe laid with plastic gasket joints may proceed as soon as the joint has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. Special precautions shall be taken in placing and compacting backfill to 027402 Page 5 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 avoid damage to the joints. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F, plastic joint seal gaskets shall either be stored in an area warmed to above 70 degrees F, or artificially warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Gaskets shall then be applied to pipe joints immediately prior to placing pipe in the trench, followed by connection to previously laid pipe. d. Pipe Joints for storm sewers shall be wrapped with geotextile material. The geotextile wrap shall be at least 2 feet wide and shall be centered on each joint. 5. After the pipe has been placed, bedded and jointed as specified, filling and/or backfilling shall be done in accordance with the applicable requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." If unstable conditions are encountered, fully encase the pipe with crushed stone as described above. When mortar joints are allowed, no fill or backfill shall be placed until the jointing material has been cured for at least six (6)hours. Special precautions shall be taken in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement of the pipe or damage to the joints. For side drain culverts and all other culverts where joints consist of materials other than mortar, immediate backfilling will be permitted. 6. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or permitted in writing by the Engineer, no heavy earth moving equipment will be pennitted to haul over the structure until a minimum of 4 feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed thereon. Pipe damaged by the Contractor's equipment shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost. 7. Cleaniniz and Television Inspection. All enclosed reinforced concrete pipe and manholes installed on this project shall be cleaned and televised in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027611 "Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Conduits." 4. MEASUREMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforced concrete pipe will be measured by the linear foot. Such measurement will be made between the ends of the pipe barrel along its central axis. Where spurs or branches, or connections to existing pipe lines are involved, measurement of the spur or new connecting pipe will be made from the intersection of its center axis with the outside surfaces of the pipe into which it connects. Where inlets, headwalls, catch basins, manholes,junction chambers, or other structures are included in lines of pipe, that length of pipe tying into the structure wall will be included for measurement but no other portion of the structure length or width will be so included. For multiple pipes, the measured length will be the sum of the lengths of the barrels measured as prescribed above. 027402 Page 6 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 5. PAYMENT Payment for reinforced concrete pipe measured as prescribed above will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear foot for the various sizes of 'Reinforced Concrete Pipe" of the class specified. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and transporting the pipe; hauling and placing of earth cushion material where required for bedding pipe; for the preparation and shaping of beds; for hauling, placing and jointing of pipes; for furnishing and installing geotextile pipe joint wrapping; for end finish; for all connections to existing and new structures; for cleaning and television inspection; and for all other items of materials, labor, equipment, tools, excavation, backfill and incidentals necessary to complete the culvert or storm sewer in accordance with the plans and these specifications. 027402 Page 7 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 027602 GRAVITY WASTEWATER LINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing, handling and installing gravity wastewater lines required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS A. Pipe and Fittings: 1. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE and fittings shall be in accordance with the following: 6" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 8" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 10"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 12"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 15"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 18"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 24"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 30"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 36"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 PS 115 42"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR35 PS46 48"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR35 PS46 Pipe and fittings shall have push-on compression gasket joints in accordance with ASTM D3212 and shall be a non-blue color. 2. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE shall be AWWA C900 or C905 integral green (non-blue color) with a minimum pressure rating of not less than 150 psi, made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784. One (1) 20-ft. section of PVC pressure pipe, with appropriate adapters or as an encasing pipe over the carrier pipe, shall be used for gravity wastewater lines at all waterline crossings, and shall be centered under/over the waterline as indicated on the drawings. Maintain a minimum of 2 feet vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a new non-pressurized wastewater line. Maintain a minimum of 6 inches vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a pressurized wastewater line. In all instances of water crossing wastewater, center a joint of water pipe over the wastewater pipe such that a minimum of 9 feet of horizontal offset exists from each water joint to the wastewater carrier pipe. 027602 Page 1 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 Alternatively, at waterline crossings, the PVC gravity wastewater pipe may be encased in a 20-ft.joint of pressure pipe with a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi that is at least two nominal sizes larger than the carrier pipe. The carrier pipe shall be supported in the casing at five foot(5') intervals with spacers, or shall be filled to the spring line with clean washed sand. The casing pipe shall be centered under/ over the waterline as indicated on the drawings, and both ends of the casing shall be sealed with cement grout or manufactured seal. B. Bedding and Backfill Materials: 1. BEDDING AND INITIAL BACKFILL is that material from beneath the pipe to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe. The bedding and initial backfill material shall be in accordance with Table 1 on Wastewater Standard Details, Sheet 3, unless otherwise specified. 2. FINAL BACKFILL is that material placed on the initial backfill. The material shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" and as shown on the standard details. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Trench Excavation: See City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." B. Handling of Materials: 1. HANDLING AND CARE of pipe shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Pipe shall be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site by the Contractor. Materials shall be handled with care and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. STORAGE AND SECURITY of materials shall be provided by the Contractor. Any material delivered to the site that is not to be incorporated into the work within 10 working days shall be properly stored off the ground. Stacking and handling of materials shall be done as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. REJECTED OR DEFECTIVE materials are those having cracks, flaws or other defects. Rejected materials shall be marked by the Engineer and removed from the job site by the end of the day by the Contractor. 4. DISTRIBUTION OF MATERIALS at the work site shall be allowed provided that they are incorporated into the work within 10 working days. Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the owner by the Contractor. Materials shall not be placed within five feet of the back of curb or edge of pavement without permission of the Engineer or the designated representative. 027602 Page 2 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 C. Alignment and Grade: 1. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required like and grade. 2. NO DEVIATIONS from design line and grade shall be allowed, unless authorized by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall provide offsets and cut sheets. The Contractor may use batter boards, laser, or other approved methods necessary to construct the wastewater line to design line and grade. D. Pipe Placement: 1. GENERAL: Proper implements, tools, etc., shall be used by the Contractor for safe and efficient execution of work. All pipes shall be carefully lowered into the trench by suitable equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage. Under no circumstances shall pipe be dropped or dumped into the trench. The Contractor shall not lay pipe in the trench until the bedding and condition of the trench have been approved by the Engineer. The trench shall be free of water and maintained in that condition until the pipe has been laid, the joints have been completed, and the initial backfill has been completed. All pipe markings shall be placed face up for inspection prior to backfill. 2. CLEAN PIPE: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering pipe into trench. The interior of pipe shall be maintained free of dirt during the remaining installation operations. E. Jointing Pipe: POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE shall have mating surfaces of the gasketed joint wiped clean of dirt and foreign matter. A lubricant recommended by the coupling manufacturer shall be applied to the bell and spigot mating surfaces just prior to joining. The spigot shall then be centered on grade into the bell of the previous pipe and shall be shoved home to compress the joint and to assure a tight fit between the inner surfaces. Pipe shall not be assembled in reverse order by pushing bell onto spigot. When the pipe is being thusly installed, bell holes shall be excavated in the bedding material. When the joint has been made, the bell hole shall be carefully filled with material to provide for adequate support of the pipe. The spigot shall be centered within 1/4 inch of the home line marked on the spigot. F. Bedding and Initial Backfill: POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: Bedding and initial backfill of PVC pipe shall be in accordance with the details provided in the drawings. Bedding shall be well tamped regardless of type. The type of bedding required shall depend upon the depth of cut and ground water condition and shall be as specified below: 027602 Page 3 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 BOTTOM OF TRENCH IN GROUNDWATER Depth of Cut Required Bedding Less than 20 feet Gravel or Crushed Stone Over 20 feet Crushed Stone BOTTOM OF TRENCH NOT IN GROUND WATER Depth of Cut Required Bedding Less than 15 feet Sand, Gravel, or Crushed Stone Less than 20 feet Gravel or Crushed Stone Over 20 feet Crushed Stone G. Final Backfill: See City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." H. Bypass Pumping: Contractor shall follow operational requirements for bypass pumping as set forth in Specification Section 027200 Control of Wastewater Flows. 4. TESTING AND CERTIFICATION A. Leakage Testing: (Required for all types of pipe) 1. EQUIPMENT FOR LEAKAGE TESTING shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall test the entire system for leaks. This work shall be witnessed by the Engineer. 2. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)PIPE shall be tested in accordance with Uni- Bell Plastic Pipe Association- Standard UNI-B-6 'Recommended Practice for Low- Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe"; the requirements of which are summarized by the following equation: T=0.00237D2L [Equation 1] Where: T=Minimum allowable time (seconds) for a pressure drop of one (1)psi gage pressure D=Nominal pipe diameter(inches) L=Length of pipe run(feet) The test section shall be plugged and subjected to a test pressure not in excess of five (5)psi. The time required for a one (1)psi pressure drop shall be measured and shall not exceed the value obtained in Equation 1 above. 027602 Page 4of6 Rev.7-1-2015 B. Deflection Testing: (Required for PVC Pipe) 1. EQUIPMENT FOR DEFLECTION TESTING shall be provided by the Contractor. Mandrels shall be provided by the Contractor and will be of machined rigid corrosion-resistant pipe with a length not less than 1.5 diameters. Mandrels will be sized for SDR 26 PVC pipe at 5% deflection. The outside diameter of the standard mandrels shall be as follows: Nominal Size (inches) Mandrel O.D. (inches) 8 7.11 10 8.87 12 10.55 15 12.90 18 15.76 21 18.56 24 20.87 27 23.51 30 27.14 2. TESTING shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Engineer. All pipe shall be tested for deflection no less than 30 days after placement of backfill. The Contractor may wish to check pipe immediately after backfilling for job control. However, this shall not qualify as acceptance testing. No pipe can be tested for formal acceptance until it has been in place, complete with backfill, for at least 30 days. 3. Belly: Pipe shall be rejected if belly exceeds 5%based on the readings from the video inspection. C. Retesting: ANY DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIALS shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor and retested. This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable D. Cleaning and Televising: All wastewater lines and manholes installed on this project shall be cleaned and televised in accordance with Standard Specification Section 027611 "Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Conduits". 5. SOIL BORINGS The City does not assume responsibility for subsurface information. Soil data and other subsurface information, if shown on the drawings or in the appendix, are without warranty as to correctness of fact or interpretation. 027602 Page 5 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 6. BRACING AND SHORING Trenching operation shall comply with Worker Safety Requirements for Excavation and Trenching Operations. If, for whatever reason, the trench width at the top of pipe must exceed that width indicated in the bedding details, the Contractor shall modify bedding as required by the Engineer to accommodate the additional load on the pipe. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, gravity wastewater lines shall be measured by the linear foot for each size and depth of wastewater line installed, as follows: A. Between centers of manholes. B. From the center of a manhole to the end of the line. C. From the end of an existing stub to the end of the line or center of the existing manhole. Depth shall be measured from flow line of pipe to ground surface over centerline of the pipe at the time of construction. Measurements to be made at manholes, at intervals not to exceed fifty feet, and at breaks in ground profile. Bedding shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to pipe, unless included as a separate bid item in the Bid Form. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Fonn, de-watering shall not be measured for pay,but shall be considered subsidiary unless included as a separate bid item in the Bid Form for well-pointing. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, pipe, bedding, de-watering, hauling, trench excavation and backfill, leakage and deflection testing, cleaning, televising, bypass pumping, and all cleaning up and other incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in-place. 027602 Page 6 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 SECTION 027604 DISPOSAL OF WASTE FROM WASTEWATER CLEANING OPERATIONS 1. SCOPE: This specification governs all work required for disposal of waste from wastewater cleaning operations required to complete the project. 2. METHODS: Gait,rubble,dislodged bricks and other such inorganic waste that is removed during cleaning shall not be allowed to continue down stream of the operation. Organic solids that remain in suspension would be allowed to continue downstream through the wastewater system. A weir or other suitable trap shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor for the collection of such waste. This material shall be de-watered and delivered by the Contractor to a facility that is authorized to receive it. If this material is free of organic sludge and is sufficiently de-watered to pass the paint filter test,it would be acceptable for disposal at the Elliott Sanitary Landfill subject to prior approval of the facility and the associated disposal fees. The Contractor has the option of using the City's de-watering facilities. The City has six drying beds, each with a 1-foot high containment wall each with an area of about 2,300 square feet. These drying beds are at the Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant, 1541 Saratoga. The Contractor would be required to haul and handle the material to, at and from the facility as well as the restoration of drying beds. Restoration of the drying beds includes the removal of all the de- watered material and the replacement of the existing sand bed with new sand. All work required within the treatment plant, including the replacement of sand shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth by the Plant Supervisor. The use of the drying beds would be subject to prior approval of the facility and the associated de-watering fees. If the City's facilities are used for de-watering or disposal of waste, the Contractor shall be responsible for making contact with the appropriate Solid Waste or Wastewater Officials or both, making all arrangements for the use of City facilities, scheduling of delivery and pickup, etc. Materials and handling operations shall meet the requirements set forth by said Officials. Failure to meet these requirements shall be cause for rejection of the materials by either the landfill or the treatment plant operations. Proper disposal of this waste shall be responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written documentation of the proper disposal of this waste. 3. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT: Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,this work shall be considered subsidiary to the project. 027604 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 027606 WASTEWATER SERVICE LINES 1. SCOPE: This specification governs all work and materials necessary to construct the wastewater service lines required to complete the project. Wastewater service lines are those lines, constructed in public right-of-way, from the service tee on the main up to and including the cleanout at the property line. 2. MATERIALS: Pipe and fittings for wastewater service lines shall be PVC in accordance with ASTM D2665 and ASTM D3311 with a minimum size of 4 inches. Solvent cement for PVC shall comply with ASTM D2564. No co-mingling of different materials except through the use of proper adaptors. Adaptors shall have a stainless steel or fiberglass shear ring. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS: Where possible, service tees or wyes shall be placed along the main as required for services (no taps). The minimum size pipe for services shall be 4-inch diameter for residential and 6-inch diameter for commercial. Minimum slope for 4-inch pipes shall be 1/8 inch per foot(S=1%),and minimum slope for 6-inch pipes shall be 1/16 inch per foot(S= 0.5%). Wastewater service lines shall cross under water mains. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing alignment and maintaining grade for the proposed service. Trenches shall be excavated in such a manner that will minimize damage to surface improvements. After installation,the excavated material shall be tamped into the trench to not less than the density specified in City Standard Specification Section 022020 'Excavation and Backfill for Utilities,"and the surface restored to a condition acceptable to the Engineer. Wastewater service lines shall be bored, jetted or jacked under sidewalks, driveways, and other such improved surfaces, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Service lines shall be leakage tested with the wastewater main. Contractor shall follow operational requirements for bypass pumping as set forth in Specification Section 027200 Control of Wastewater Flows 027606 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,wastewater service lines shall be measured as individual units for each connection made to the main. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, the line from the tee on the main to, and including, the cleanout at the property line. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, trench safety, bypass pumping and incidentals necessary for wastewater service lines required to complete the project. 027606 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 027608 PRIVATE SEWER SERVICES (5-39) (FOR RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL APPLICATION) 1 . Scope: This section governs the furnishing of all labor, equipment, tools and materials necessary for the construction of private sewers services as shown on the plans, as outlined herein and as necessary to complete the project. Private sewer services lines (aka Building Sewers) are defined as the sewer piping extending from the customers structure to the clean-out at the property line. 2 . General• Construction of private sewer services shall comply with the provisions of the Standard Plumbing Code as published by the Southern Building Code Congress and as adopted, with local amendments, by the City of Corpus Christi, in addition to the plans and specs. In case of conflict, between the code and the plans the more stringent prevails. 3 . Materials: PVC pipe and fittings for sewers shall be in accordance with ASTM D2665 and ASTM D 3311. Solvent cement for PVC shall meet ASTM D2564 . Asbestos cement pipe, concrete pipe and cast iron pipe shall not be used as sewer pipe. There shall be no co-mingling of different materials except through proper adaptors. Section (504.4.2) of the Standard Plumbing Code. Rejected materials shall be marked and removed from the job site. 4 . Permits: Normal plumbing permit application and fee requirements of the Standard Plumbing Code as adopted by City Code shall apply to this project. A plumbing permit for each lot will be issued to the Contractor by the Building Inspections Department of the City of Corpus Christi. The contractor shall make application for permits upon award of the contract . 5 . General Obligations : (a) Contractor: The contractor shall construct private sewer services in accordance with the plans and these specifications in a neat and workmanlike manner. The route of the proposed private service shall be determined by the Contractor subject to approval of the Owner and the Engineer. All work on private services shall be supervised and inspected by a licensed plumber. Good relationships with the public are essential to the success of this project_ The contractor shall make all the required notifications and notices to the owner/occupants in the area_ The work shall be accomplished with minimal inconvenience to the public and owner/occupants. The contractor shall cooperate with all City employees involved in the execution of this contract. (b) City: The Engineer will review work proposed by the Contractor and the City Plumbing Inspector shall inspect the installation. 6 . Sequence of Work: (a) City will mail out general letter to property owners describing the project with Form WS-1 (See Appendix) for execution. 027608 Rev. 6/98 Page 1 of 3 (b) Contractor to acquire authorizations from owners for site inspections using Form WS-1 in Appendix from those property owners not responding to general letter. The contractor is encouraged to take photographs of before and after conditions on each lot. (c) Contractor performs site inspection and fills out required form and submits copy of inspection report and Site Plan Showing Route to Engineer. (Private Sanitary Sewer Service Inspection Report & Routing Recommendations Form S-2 and Sample Site Plan in Appendix) . (d) Form S-2 reviewed by Engineer and property owner. This should be completed prior to installing main sewer. (e) Contractor notifies owner/occupant of proposed construction and acquires authority for proposed construction on Form S-2 and Site Plan in Appendix. 7 . Construction Methods : (a) Clean outs - A two-way, 4-inch double riser clean out shall be installed at the connection of proposed private sewer and building sewer and also a single wye riser at the property line. Clean outs shall be placed at change in direction and at a maximum spacing of 75 feet. All clean outs shall be brought to finish grade. (b) Bends - Change in direction in drainage piping shall be made by the appropriate use of 45' wyes, long sweep quarter bends, one-sixth, one-eighth, or one-sixteenth bends or by a combination of these, or equivalent fittings. (c) Disconnection from Old Main - Abandoned service lines shall be plugged below ground surface with concrete. (d) Fittings prohibited - A straight tee shall not be used. Saddle type fitting or running threads shall not be used. Pipe shall not be drilled or tapped unless approved by the Engineer. A fitting having a hub in the direction opposite to flow shall not be used, unless the pipe is cut by a saw or snap cutter, which will assure clean, smooth cuts of the pipe. Adaptors for connecting new pipes to existing piping shall be of the non-shear type. Adaptors with internally fitted fiberglass support ring as manufactured by DFW/HPI or Adaptors with externally fitted stainless steel shear rings and hardware as manufactured by Fernco or approved equal shall be required for matching pipe with the same nominal dimensions such as 4" clay to 4" plastic. Other types of adaptors that do not have this feature shall not be used. (e) Protection of foundations - Trenches shall not be excavated within 3 feet of foundations. (See Foundation Protection Exhibit in Appendix) Where trenching is not allowed because of insufficient clearance from foundation, the private service shall be installed in a bored or jacked casing. The ends of each casing shall be wrapped with Class AA_ subsurface Geotextile per AASHTO M288. This steel casing will only be measured for pay when it falls within the areas where open trenching is not allowed because of it being excessively close to existing foundations. Boring under surface improvements such as existing driveways, sidewalks, etc. shall not require casing. (f) Pipe size - Minimum pipe size for private services shall be 4" diameter for residential and 6" diameter for commercial. (g) Slope/velocity - Minimum slope of services shall be not less than 0. 01 or 1/8 inch per foot. 027608 Rev. 6/98 Page 2 of 3 (h) Installation - Materials shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer requirements. (I) Alignment/grade - The contractor shall be responsible for establishing alignment and grade for proposed services. (See paragraph (g) above. ) (j) Surface Restoration - Separate trenches (one for water and one for sewer) separated by undisturbed or compacted earth shall be excavated. Trenches shall be excavated in such a manner which will minimize damage to surface vegetation. After installation, the excavated material shall be tamped into the trench and the surface restored to like or better condition acceptable to the Engineer. Lines shall be bored, jetted or jacked under sidewalks, driveways or other such improved surfaces; unless authorized by the Engineer. (k) Electrical ground - Where required by the building code, electrical ground wires shall be installed to assure any appliances grounded to the plumbing system remain grounded. (1) Maintenance of service - Sanitary services shall be installed with a minimum of inconvenience to the occupant of the house. The contractor shall provide continuous service of all utilities during construction, where practical. In the event of damage to existing utility, restoration is the responsibility of the contractor. (m) Interruption of service - In the event that an unavoidable interruption of service is anticipated, the contractor shall advise the building occupant (s) a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the interruption. After the service has been interrupted, the contractor shall expeditiously continue work until service has been restored. In no case shall sewer service be interrupted for more than four (4) hours. (n) Testing - The Private sewer shall be tested for leaks prior to connecting with the clean-out at the property line. The private sewer service shall be plugged at the down stream end and a ten foot test riser placed at the up stream end(s) . The line shall be filled with water and no measurable leaks shall be allowed. The Air Test [417.2 .2] may be used at the option of the Contractor. Test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. 8 . - Measurement and Payment : Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Private Sewer Services shall be measured per each service installed. Some services may require more than one connection on the owner's pipe. For example, house with garage apartment. All connections of this nature made to common lot owner shall be considered one service. Rental house of a common owner shall be measured as separate unit for each house. Payment shall be at the contract unit bid prices and shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and installing all pipes, fittings and incidentals, trenching, trench safety, boring, jetting or jacking, flushing, surface restoration and all other work or material required to provide sewer service from the structure (s) to the sanitary clean-out at the property line. 027608 Rev. 6/98 Page 3 of 3 SECTION 028020 SEEDING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for tilling, fertilizing, planting seeds, mulching, watering and maintaining vegetation required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS 2.1 FERTILIZER: All fertilizer shall be delivered in bags or clearly marked containers showing the analysis, name, trademark and warranty. The fertilizer is subject to testing by the State Chemist in accordance with the Texas fertilizer law. Fertilizer shall have an analysis of 12-12-12 (percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash) as determined by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Fertilizer shall be free flowing and uniform in composition. 2.2 SEED: Seed shall be labeled and meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Labels shall indicate purity, germination, name and type of seed. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop, and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within twelve months of delivery to the project. The quantity of"Commercial Seed" required to equal the quantity of"Pure Live Seed" shall be computed by the following formula: Commercial Seed=Pure Live Seed x 10,000 %Purity x % Germination The quantity of pure live seed and type required are indicated below. Mixture A or C shall be used for this project, depending on the time of the year planting is performed. LB/ACRE OF PURE LIVE SEED FOR MIXTURES COMMON NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME A B C Green Sprangletop Leptochloa Dubia 1.4 1.4 - Sideoats Grama(premier) Bouteloua Curtipendula 0.6 - 0.6 Bermudagrass (Hulled) Cynodon Dactylon 7.0 7.4 - Bermudagrass (Unhulled) Cynodon Dactylon - - 30.0 K R Bluestein Andropogon Ischaemum 1.2 1.2 1.5 Buffalograss Buchloe Dactyloides - 4.2 - Annual Ryegrass Lolium Multiflorum 5.0 5.0 20.0 Mixture-A: Recommended for clay or tight soil planted between December 1 thru May 1. Mixture- B: Recommended for sandy soil planted between December 1 thru May 1. Mixture- C: Recommended for all soils planted between May 2 thru November 30. 028020 Page 1 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 2.3 MULCH: Mulch shall be either the straw type or wood cellulose fiber type. Straw Tube mulch shall be of straw from stalks of domestic grain, Bermudagrass or cotton hulls, or other approved by the Engineer. Wood Cellulose Fiber Type mulch shall have no growth inhibiting ingredients and shall be dried with a moisture content less that 10% by weight. Fibers shall be dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering and application of mulch. The cellulose fiber shall be manufactured so that after addition and agitation in slurry tank with fertilizers, seeds and other approved additives, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a homogeneous slurry; when sprayed on the ground, the material shall form a uniform cover impregnated with seeds; the cover shall allow added water to percolate to the underlying soil. The fiber material shall be supplied in packages of not more than 100 lb. gross weight and shall be marked by the manufacturer to indicate the dry weight content. 2.4 EQUIPMENT: The fertilizing, seeding and/or mulching operations shall be accomplished with equipment suitable to the required function. It shall be of current design and in good operating condition. Special seeding and mulching equipment must also meet the following requirements: Seeder - Equipment for applying a seed-fertilizer mix shall be a hydraulic seeder designed to pump and discharge a waterborne, homogeneous slurry of seed and fertilizer. The seeder shall be equipped with a power driven agitator and capable of pressure discharge. Straw Mulch Spreader - Equipment used for straw mulch application shall be trailer mounted, equipped with a blower capable of 2000 r.p.m. operation, and that will discharge straw mulch material through a discharge boom with spout at speeds up to 220 feet per second. The mulch spreader shall be equipped with an asphalt supply and application system near the discharge end of the boom spout. The system shall apply asphalt adhesive in atomize form to the straw at a predetermined rate. The spreader shall be capable of blowing the asphalt-coated mulch, with a high velocity airstream, over the surface at a uniform rate, forming a porous, stable erosion-resistant cover. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Spreader - Equipment used for this application of fertilizer, seeds, wood pulp, water and other additives shall have a built-in agitation system with sufficient capacity to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry containing up to 40 lbs. of fiber plus the required fertilizer solids for each 100 gallons of water. It shall have sufficient agitation and pump capacity to spray a slurry in a uniform coat over the area to be mulched. 028020 Page 2 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.1 PREPARATION OF SEEDBED: The area to be treated along with requirements for seed, fertilizer and other treatments, shall be done as indicated on the drawings and as specified below. Clearing—Refer to City Standard Specification Section 021020, "Site Clearing and Stripping". Grading - Refer to City Standard Specification Section 021040, "Site Grading". Tilling- The area to be seeded shall be tilled to a depth of 4 to 6 inches by disking,plowing, or other approved methods until soil condition is acceptable. Topsoiling — If the native soils are not conducive to the establishment and maintenance of grass growth, or if called for on the drawings, topsoil shall be placed over the area to be seeded to a depth of 5 inches after tilling. Topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7; shall contain between 2 and 20 percent organic material content in accordance with ASTM D5268; and shall be free of stones larger than one inch, debris, and extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 3.2 FERTILIZING: Fertilizer shall be uniformly applied at a rate of 400 lb/acre, after tilling. Fertilizing and seeding shall be done concurrently. If seeds and fertilizer are distributed in a water slurry, the mixture shall be applied to the area to be seeded within 30 minutes after all the components have come into contact. 3.3 SEEDING: The seed mixture shall be uniformly distributed at the rate specified above. Broadcast Seeding - Seed shall be placed with fertilizer, after tilling. After planting, the area shall be rolled on contour with a corrugated roller. Straw Mulch Seeding- Seed shall be placed with fertilizer, after tilling. After placement of the seed and fertilizer mixture, straw mulch shall be uniformly placed at a rate of 2 tons per acre. As soon as the mulch has been spread, it shall be anchored to the soil a minimum depth of 3 inches by use of a heavy, dulled disk harrow, set nearly straight. Disks shall be set approximately 9 inches apart. Straw Mulch With Asphalt Seeding - Seed, fertilizer and straw mulch shall be placed as described in "Straw Mulch Seeding" with the following two exceptions: 1) An asphalt-water emulsion shall be applied to the mulch near the discharge end of the boom spout at a rate of 300 to 600 gallons per acre. 2)Mechanical anchoring by disking will not be required. Asphalt Mulch Seeding - The seed and fertilizer shall be placed as described for 'Broadcast Seeding". After the area has been rolled, the area shall be watered sufficiently to assure a uniform moisture to a minimum depth of 4 inches. An asphalt-water emulsion shall be applied at a rate of 1500 to 1800 gallons per acre, immediately after watering. Asphalt shall be applied to the area in such a manner that a complete film is obtained and the finished surface shall be 028020 Page 3 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 comparatively smooth. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding - After tilling, mulch shall be applied. Wood cellulose fibers shall be added to the hydraulic seeder after the proportionate amounts of seed, fertilizer, water and other approved materials are added. Application shall be 1500 lb./acre on flats, 2000 lb./acre on slopes up to 3:1, and 2500 lb./acre on slopes steeper than 3:1. One hundred (100)pounds of fiber per acre shall be used when asphalt is to be applied over cellulose mulch. The mulch shall provide a uniform cover over the soil surface. Asphalt Over Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding - "Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding" shall be done as described above. After mulch has been placed, an asphalt-water emulsion shall be uniformly spread over the mulch at a rate of 1200 gallons per acre. 3.4 MAINTENANCE: The Contractor shall water, repair and reseed areas as required for a period of 45 days or until growth has been established, whichever is longer. This includes erosion damage. Maintenance does not include mowing or weed control, unless indicated on the plans. If at any time the seeded area becomes gullied or otherwise damaged, or the seeds have been damaged or destroyed, the affected portion shall be re-established to the specified condition prior to acceptance of the work. 3.5 GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall assure 95% of the seeded area has established grass growth at 45 calendar days after seeding, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Where established, grass growth is defined as at least one plant per square foot with no bare spots larger than three (3) square feet. The Contractor shall re-establish grass growth as directed by the Engineer during the one-year warranty period. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, seeding will be measured by the horizontal square yard of area seeded within the areas designated on the drawings. Areas disturbed by the Contractor that are outside of the designated areas (such as field office, laydown/ storage area, stockpile areas, etc.) shall be seeded by the Contractor for erosion control per the stormwater pollution prevention plan but will not be measured for payment. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work, and shall include, but not be limited to, tilling soil, topsoiling, fertilizing, planting, mulching, watering and maintaining vegetation. Payment shall be due and payable only after grass growth has been established as described above. 028020 Page 4 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 028040 SODDING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing and placing sod as required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Fertilizer: All fertilizer used shall be delivered in bags or containers with clearly marked analysis. A granulated fertilizer shall be used with an analysis of 10-20-10. These figures represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash nutrients, respectively, as determined by the methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. The rate of application shall be not less than 350 pounds per acre (7.23 lb. per 100 SY). In the event that it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer with a different analysis, it shall be granulated fertilizer with a lower concentration. The total nutrients applied per unit area shall not be less that the specified amount of each nutrient. Sod: Sod shall consist of live Berinuda grass with thickly matted roots throughout the soil and with a minimum thickness of 3 inches or 0.25 foot, or live St. Augustine with thickly matted roots throughout the soil with a minimum thickness of 1 inch or 0.08 foot. The Contractor shall not use sod where grass is thinned out. Grass shall be mowed and raked to remove all weeds and long steins prior to extraction at the source. Sod and soil shall be kept moist at all times during the sodding process. Care must be taken at all times to retain native soil on the root system. Water: Water shall be free from oils, acids, alkalis, and salts that may inhibit grass growth. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, water shall be provided by the City and shall be transported and applied by the Contractor. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Spot Sodding_ Prior to planting, the area to be sodded shall be graded and shaped. Squares of sod with a minimum width of 3 inches shall be planted in rows on 15-inch centers in both directions. Sod shall be placed so that it is firinly against the bottom of the hole, and the top of the sod shall not be more than 1/2 inch below finished grade. Soil shall be firmly packed against all sides of the sod. Soil shall not be allowed to cover the sod except for soil incidental to raking, provided that the quantity of soil is not enough to hinder the growth. Areas to be spot sodded shall be indicated on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer in field. After sod has been planted,the area shall be fertilized and watered. 028040 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 Block Sodding: Prior to planting, the area to be sodded shall be graded and shaped. Sod blocks shall be uniformly placed over the prepared area. The sodded area shall then be fertilized and watered. After the area is sufficiently dry, the area shall be rolled or tamped to form a thoroughly compacted mat. Any voids in the mats shall be filled with additional sod and tamped. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, slopes may cause displacement, areas to be block sodded shall be indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in the field. Mulch Sodding: The sod source shall be disked in two directions cutting the sod thoroughly to a depth of not less than 4 inches or more than 10 inches, being careful to avoid having soil containing no grass roots. The disked sod may be windrowed or otherwise handled in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The material shall be rejected if not kept in a moist condition. Prior to placing mulch sod, the cut slopes shall be scarified by plowing furrows 4 inches to 6 inches deep along horizontal slope lines at 2-foot vertical intervals. Excavated material from the furrows shall not protrude more than 3 inches above the original surface of the cut. Fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the area. The sod shall then be dumped upon the prepared area and spread uniformly to the required approximate thickness shown on the plans. Any section not true to lines and cross section shall be remedied by the addition of sod material. After the sod material has been spread and shaped, it shall be compacted with a corrugated roller of the "Cultipacker" type. All rolling of slope areas shall be on the contour. The area to be mulch sodded shall be indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in the field. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, spot sodding and block sodding shall be measured by the square yard taken in a horizontal plane. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, excavation, transporting, storing and placing of sod, and application of fertilizer and water. 028040 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 028300 FENCE RELOCATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to accomplish the relocation of any fence that needs to be moved to complete this project. The necessity and the time schedule for relocation of any given fence shall be determined by the Engineer. 2. MATERIALS Whenever possible, all or part of the existing fence materials shall be used in constructing the relocated fence. Any materials damaged or destroyed as a result of removal of the fence from its existing location shall be replaced with materials of equal or better quality at the expense of the contractor. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS It is the intent of this specification that fences be reconstructed to original condition (condition at time just prior to commencement of construction on this project). Unless otherwise specified, no fence shall be replaced until the area surrounding its new location has been worked to its finished grade. Any fence that is damaged while being removed shall be repaired prior to being reset or replaced with like kind. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, fence relocation shall be measured by the linear foot of relocated fence (not fence removed from original location). Payment shall constitute full compensation for removal, replacement, necessary repairs, and all other work related to the relocation of fences. 028300 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 028320 CHAIN LINK FENCE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification governs for the design, construction, and the requirements of the component parts and accessories for chain link fence. 2. MATERIALS All materials shall meet the requirements as indicated below or as otherwise specified on the plans. 1. Fabric - The fabric width shall be as shown on the plans. The fabric shall be 9 gage wire woven into 2-inch mesh hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Fabric 48 inches and under shall be furnished with knuckling at one selvage and twisting and barbing at the other. Fabric 60 inches high and over shall have twisting and barbing on both selvages. Except as herein provided, chain link fence fabric shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A392, Class I. 2. Barbed Wire - Barbed wire shall conform to ASTM A121, unless specified otherwise. Barbed wire shall consist of three strands of 12%2 gage wire with 14 gage point barbs spaced approximately 5 inches apart. Galvanizing for barbed wire shall conform to ASTM Designation: A121, Class 2. 3. Posts, Braces and Gates - Steel pipe used for posts, braces and gate frames shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A120. Steel sections shall be of good commercial quality weldable steel. Posts, frames and braces shall be as specified below or as otherwise specified. (a) Line Posts 1. 2-inch nominal diameter steel pipe. 2. 17/8-inch 21/4-inch "H" section of high carbon steel; minimum weight 4.1 pounds per linear foot. (b) End and Corner Posts 1. 2'/z" nominal diameter steel pipe. 2. 2'/z" square tubular steel;minimum weight 5.79 pounds per linear foot. 028320 Page 1 of 4 Rev.10-30-2014 (c) Swing Gate Posts Swing and gate posts shall conform to ASTM Designation: A120 and shall be in the following sizes: Pipe Size Square (O.D.Nominal) Tubular Gate Length 2.875 in. 2.5 in. Up to 6 feet 4.0 in. 3.0 in. 7 feet to 12 feet 6.625 in. - 13 feet and above (d) Gate Frames Gate frames shall be standard heavy type, welded, watertight, rigid frame with adequate internal bracing and tension members to prevent sagging. Furnish hinges, latches, stops, keepers and similar items as approved. Gates to swing open 180 degrees with keepers to hold gates in open position. Furnish latches with provisions for padlocking. On gates of 4-foot length or less, provide latches that automatically engage when gate is swung shut. The size of gate frame members shall be as follows unless otherwise specified. Gates shall be provided with a positive means of maintaining the gate in the closed position. O. D. or Dimensions,Nominal Use and Section Round Square Frame for fabric 6' and less, and leaf widths not exceeding 8' 1.66" 1.5" Frame for fabric over 6' or gate leafs over 8'width I YI 2.0" Internal braces 1.66" 1.5" Top rails and post braces 1.66" - 4. Top Rails - Top rails shall be 1.66 inches O.D. nominal tubular; lengths of not less than 18 feet conforming to ASTM Designation: A120 and shall be fitted with couplings for connecting the lengths into a continuous run. The couplings shall be not less than 6 inches long, with 0.070 inch minimum wall thickness, and shall allow for expansion and contraction of the rail. The top rail shall pass through the base of line post barbed wire extension arm and fasten securely to terminal posts. 028320 Page 2 of 4 Rev.10-30-2014 5. Bracing - Bracing shall be provided for each gate, corner, pull and end post for use when top rail is omitted or with fabric over 6 feet, and shall consist of round tubular steel, 1.66 inches O.D. nominal conforming to ASTM Designation: A120. Bracing shall extend to each adjacent line post at approximately mid-height of the fabric. A truss consisting of a rod not less than 3/8 inch nominal diameter from the line post back to the gate, corner, pull or end post with a turnbuckle or other approved method of adjustment shall also be included. 6. Barbed Wire Extension Arm - Use standard 45 degree, 3 wire, barbed wire extension arms on posts, except end and gate posts on which use standard post top. Provide hole for top rail. Barbed wire extension arms shall conform to ASTM Designation: A153. 7. Tension Wire - If top rail is not specified, a top tension wire shall be provided. Spiraled or crimped tension wire shall be not less than #7 gage and shall conform to ASTM Designation: Al 16, Class 3. Ties or clips shall be provided for attaching each wire to the fabric at intervals not exceeding 2 feet. 8. Stretcher Bars - Stretcher bars shall not be less than 3/16 by 3/4 inch steel conforming to ASTM Designation: A153. Stretcher bars shall not be less than 2 inches shorter than the full height of the fabric with which they are used. One stretcher bar shall be provided for each gate and end post and two for each corner and pull post. 9. Ties, Bands or Clips - Ties of 9 gage steel wire shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric to all line posts at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. Bands or clips of adequate strength shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric and stretcher bars to all terminal posts at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. Tension bands and brace bands shall be formed from flat or beveled steel and shall have a minimum thickness of 0.115 inch and a minimum width of 7/8 inch, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A153. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Maximum post spacing shall be 10 feet unless specified otherwise. Concrete footings shall be Class "A" Concrete (see City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete") of the following dimensions: Type Fabric Hole Hole Post of Post Heigh t Diameter Depth Embedment Line 3'-4' 6" 24" 21" Line 5' 8" 30" 27" Line 6'-12' 9" 3811 3 6" Terminal 3'-5' 10" 32" 30" Terminal 6'-12' 12" 3811 36" 028320 Page 3 of 4 Rev.10-30-2014 Erect fencing to follow natural ground surface, but adjust minor irregularities in grade as directed. Construct fence to true alignment. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Forin, chain link fence shall be measured by the linear foot of fence measured at the bottom of the fabric along the centerline of fence from center to center of terminal posts, excluding gates. Gates will be measured per each gate, complete in place. Payment shall be by the linear foot, as measured above, for the height specified unless otherwise specified. Gates will be paid for as measured above and as described in the Bid Form unless otherwise specified. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing all materials, and for all labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to construct the fence as required by the plans and these specifications. 028320 Page 4 of 4 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 028340 CHAIN LINK SECURITY FENCE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials required for providing chain link security fence for this project. 2. MATERIALS Wire Fabric fencing shall be 9 gauge steel with a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 psi. Mesh size shall be 2-inch D 1/16 inch between parallel wires. Top edge of fabric shall be twisted and barbed on 6 foot height fencing and shall be knuckled salvage on 4 foot fencing. Bottom edge of all fencing shall be twisted and barbed. Tie clips of 6-gauge steel shall be furnished in sufficient quantity to fasten fabric to top tension wire or to top rail at 24-inch intervals. Ties shall be furnished to fasten the fabric to bottom tension wire at 24 inch intervals. The fabric shall be tied to line posts at 15-inch intervals. Line Post shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 10 feet and be of the following sizes: Fabric Heig=ht Pipe Size H-Beam Section Embedment Size Wt./Ft. Size Len h 4 ft. 1.90" O.D. 2.72# 1.875" x 1.625" 2.70# 24" 6 ft. 2.375"O.D. 3.65# 2.25" x 1.95" 4.10# 30" Corner Post and End Post shall be of the following sizes: Fabric Height Pibe Section Embedment Length Size Wt./Ft. 4 ft. 2.375" O.D. 3.65# 30" 6 ft. 2.875" O.D. 5.79# 42" 028340 Page 1 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 Gate Post shall be of the following sizes: Gate Leaf Pipe Section Embedment Lend Size Wt./Ft. to 6 ft. 2.875" O.D. 5.79# 36" 6 to 13 ft. 4.0 " O.D. 9.10# 42" 13 to 18 ft. 6.625" O.D. 18.97# 48" Post caps for pipe sections shall be designed to exclude all moisture. Where barbed wire is specified, extension arms shall be integral with post caps. Where top rail is specified, post caps shall have an opening for top rail. All posts caps shall have a 2-inch skirt for rigidity. Top rail, where called for, shall be 1.625 inch O.D. steel pipe weighing 2.27#/foot. Top rail shall be furnished in random lengths not less than 18 feet per section and shall be joined with outside sleeve, steel couplings not less than 6 inches long and having a wall thickness of not less than 0.70 inch. Couplings shall be designed to allow for expansion movement of the top rail. Tension wire for top finish, where no top rail is specified, shall be 7-gauge high carbon steel wire. Tension wire shall be furnished for bottom edge of all fence fabric. Trussed bracing shall be furnished for each panel adjacent to a terminal, pull, corner, or gatepost. Compression member shall be 1.625 inch O.D. pipe as specified for top rail material. Tension members shall be 3/8 inch diameter steel rods with turnbuckles. For 6-foot fences with top tension wire,braced panels shall consist of horizontal pipe brace, located approximately 4 inches below top of fabric, a diagonal pipe brace, attached at the midpoint of the terminal post and at the bottom of the adjacent line post, and a truss rod, attached to the top of the adjacent line post, extending diagonally to the bottom of the terminal post. For 6-foot fences with top rail, braced panels shall consist of a horizontal pipe brace, midway between top and bottom of fence fabric, with a truss rod expending from midpoint of the line post diagonally to bottom of terminal post. Four-foot fences with top rail shall be braced with a truss rod connected to the bottom of the terminal post and extending to top of adjacent line posts. Four-foot fences without top rail shall have a horizontal brace pipe at the top of adjacent line posts. Four-foot fences without top rail shall have a horizontal brace pipe at the top of the fabric and a diagonal truss rod installed as described above. 028340 Page 2 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 Gates shall be fabricated from 1.90 inch O.D. pipe weighing 2.72#/foot. Fabric on gates shall be the same as that specified for fencing. The following accessories shall be furnished for each gate: Corner and tee fittings of malleable iron or pressed steel having means for attaching diagonal bracing members. Hinges of malleable iron providing for full 180 degree swing with bottom hinges to be ball and socket type. Diagonal braces consisting of 3/8 inch diameter truss rods with turnbuckles, two to each gate frame. Vehicle gates shall have vertical 1.90 inch O.D. pipe brace at center of each gate leaf. Latches for single gates shall have a single fork latch with padlock eye; double leaf gates shall have two fork latches mounted on center plunger rod with padlock eye. Hold backs shall be provided for each leaf of vehicular gates, employing a semi- automatic hold back catch to be anchored at least 12 inches into a 12 inch diameter by 24 inch deep concrete footing. A malleable iron center rest, designed to receive the plunger rod, to be anchored at least 12 inches into a 12-inch diameter by 24 inch deep concrete footing, shall be provided for all double leaf gates. The top of all gate frames shall align with the fencing top rail. Vehicular gates shall be 4 inches greater in overall height than the adjacent fencing so as to extend to within 2 inches of pavement between 6-inch curbs, if curbs are designated on the plans. Barbed wire, where specified, shall be 12 ❑ gauge with barbs s 5 inches apart. Three strands of barbed wire will be required where barbed wire top is specified. Barbed wire support arms shall be at an angle of 45 degrees from vertical and shall have clips for attaching 3 strands of barbed wire. Each support arm shall be of sufficient strength to support a 200 lb. weight applied at the outer strand of barbed wire. Stretcher bars shall not be less than 3/16" inch by 3/4" inch flat steel and not more than 2 inches shorter than the fabric height. One stretcher bar shall be provided for each gate and end post. Two stretcher bars shall be provided for each corner and pull posts. Stretcher bars shall be attached to terminal posts with 1 inch x 1/8 inch 028340 Page 3 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 flat steel bands with 3/8 inch carriage bolts at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. Miscellaneous fittings and fasteners shall be furnished in sufficient quantities to erect all fencing materials in a proper manner. Approval of fence materials shall be obtained from the Engineer prior to erection. Galvanizing and Aluminum Coating. All material used in "Chain Link Security Fence" shall be hot dip zinc coated as specified by the following, except that the fabric may be aluminum coated: All posts and pipe: ASTM Designation: A 120 (1.8 oz/sf). All H-beam sections: ASTM Designation: A 123 (2.0 oz/sf). Fence fabric: ASTM Designation: A 392, Class 1 (1.2 oz/sf) or ASTM Designation: A 491 (0.40 oz/sf). Tension wire,barbed wire: ASTM Designation: A 121, Class III(0.80 oz/sf). Post caps, stretcher bars, miscellaneous fittings: ASTM Designation: A 153. Weight of zinc coating for all items shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Test Designation: A 90 except for core wire which shall have a galvanized coating weighing not less than 0.35 ounces of zinc per square foot. Field welds and cuts shall be touched-up with an approved zinc coating. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Clearing and Grading. The Contractor shall perform all clearing of brush, rocks and debris which may be necessary for the installation of this fencing. The Engineer will stake out the locations for corner posts and terminal posts in this installation. The fencing panels between corner and terminal posts shall generally follow the finished ground elevations. However, the Contractor shall grade off minor irregularities in the path of the fencing as necessary to limit the variation of grade under the bottom edge of fence fabric to a distance of not more than six inches and not less than two inches to the ground. Post Spacing. Maximum spacing for line posts shall be 10 feet 0 inches. Pull posts shall be located not more than 500 feet apart and at each change in direction exceeding 20 degrees, both horizontally and vertically. Runs of fencing over 500 feet but less than 1,000 feet shall have a pull post in the center of the run. Postholes. Holes for concrete footings for all posts shall be drilled to the dimensions listed in the following tables: 028340 Page 4 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 Holes for Line and End Posts Tune Post Fabric Height Min.Hole Min.Hole Post Diameter Depth Embedment Line 4' 9" 30" 24" Line 6" 10" 36" 30" End 4' 12" 36" 30" End 6' 12" 48" 42" Holes for Gate Posts Gate Post Size Min. Hole Min. Hole Depth Post Diameter Embedment 2.875" O.D. x 5.79# 12" 42" 36" 4" O.D. x 9.10# 18" 48" 42" 6.625" O.D. x 18.97# 18" 54" 48" Where solid rock is encountered without an overburden of soil, line posts shall be set a minimum depth of 12 inches, and end, corner, gate and pull posts a minimum of 18 inches into the solid rock. The hole shall have a minimum diameter one inch greater than the largest dimension of the post section to be set. After the post is set and plumbed, the hole shall be filled with grout consisting of one part Portland cement and three parts clean, well-graded sand. Other grouting materials may be used if approved or specified by the Engineer. The grout shall be thoroughly worked into the hole so as to leave no voids. The grout shall be crowned to carry water from the post. Where solid rock is covered by an overburden of soil or loose rock, the posts shall be set to the full depth shown in Table above unless the penetration into solid rock reaches the minimum depths specified above, in which case, the depth of penetration may be terminated. Concrete footings shall be constructed from the solid rock to the top of the ground. Grouting will be required on the portion of the post in solid rock. Excavated material from footings shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor. Concrete for Footings. Concrete for footings shall be Class "B" concrete in accordance with Section 030020, unless otherwise specified on plans. All concrete footings shall be cast up to finish grade and crowned 2 inches to shed water. Excess concrete not used in the footings, and any other construction debris, shall be removed from the site. Fabric Erection. The fence fabric shall be erected by securing one end and applying sufficient 028340 Page 5of6 Rev.10-30-2014 tension to the other end to remove all slack before making attachments. The fabric shall be cut and each span shall be attached independently at all corner posts and pull posts. Fastening to end, pull, corner and gateposts shall be with stretcher bars which shall be secured to the posts with stretcher bar bands at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. Fence fabric shall generally follow the finished contour of the site with the bottom edge of fabric located 2 inches above the grade. In uneven areas, the ground shall be graded so that the maximum distance between bottom of fabric and ground in limited to 6 inches. Electric grounds. Grounding rods shall be at least 5/8 inch diameter by 8 feet long "copperweld" rods driven or drilled into the soil so that the top of the rod is approximately 6 inches below grade. A No. 6 solid copper conductor shall be clamped to the ground rod and the bottom tension wire of the fence with cast bronze clamps with bronze or stainless steel bolts and washers. Each 1,000-foot of fence shall be provided with a ground located near the center of the run. At least one electrical ground shall be installed for each fenced closure. A ground shall be provided directly under the point where a power line passes over the fence. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, chain link security fence shall be measured by the linear foot. Measurement shall include but not be limited to furnishing and erecting all fence materials, gates, caps, concrete, ground wires, and cleanup. Payment shall be made at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all materials required, all labor, all tools, all equipment and all other incidentals required to complete the work as shown on the contract drawings and as specified herein. 028340 Page 6of6 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 030020 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts, manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water,proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and 11 cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram(Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 030020 Page 1 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as 5O4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof, free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. 030020 Page 2 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 2-1/2 2 1-�/z 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 Grade No. Size In. In. In. In. In. In. In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 15 60 to 95 to 20 to 80 100 50 2 (467)* 1?/z in. 0 0 30 to 70 95 to to 65 to 100 5 90 4 (57)* 1 in. 0 0 40 90 to 95 to to to 100 100 5 75 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 35 to 90 to 5 80 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A) plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex-408-A), it shall not show a color darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-D. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-612-J. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. 030020 Page 3 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0 to 5 0 to 20 15 to 50 35 to 75 70 to 90 90 to 100 97 to 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex-203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. For concrete Classes `A' and `C', the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a 030020 Page 4 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 given consistency. (a) Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494,modified as follows: (1) The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. (2) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (3) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b) Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: (1) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (2) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 030020 Page 5 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be by weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed separately, but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that 030020 Page 6 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection. When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. 030020 Page 7 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Desi ng ation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete: (1) Thin-Walled Sections (9" or less) 4 inches 5 inches (2) Slabs, Caps, Columns,Piers, Wall Sections over 9", etc. 3 inches 4 inches Underwater or Seal Concrete 5 inches 6 inches Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other Miscellaneous Concrete 2.5 inches 4 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing lab within 24 hours. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens, beams or cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. "Design Strength"beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70°F and 90°F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests, job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight-day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the 030020 Page 8 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Minimum Class Compressive Min. Beam Maximum Coarse of Sacks Cement Strength(fc) Strength Water-Cement Aggregate Concrete per C.Y. (min.) 28-Day(psi) 7-Day(psi) Ratio (gal/sack) No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** B* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 *Entrained Air(slabs,piers and bent concrete). **Grade 1 Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only(except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type 11 Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7-day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete, the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ""Permission**Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform 030020 Page 9 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced with new blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not 030020 Page 10 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: (a) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. (b) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment. (1) Batching Plan . The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2) Mixers and Agitators. (a) General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in 030020 Page 11 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b) Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. (c) Truck Mixers: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute (rpm)will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d) Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. 030020 Page 12 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one- fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard, per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 030020 Page 13 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 032020 REINFORCING STEEL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 615, Grades 60 or 75, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, will be permitted for straight bars only. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grade 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not defonned) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (references to ASTM Designation: A 29 is voided). Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded. 032020 Page 1 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification are as follows: Nominal Weight per Bar Size Diameter, Nominal Area, Linear Foot, Number In. Sq. In. Pounds 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.6 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars larger than No. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between gauge number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: Equivalent Equivalent Gauge Diameter, Gauge Diameter, Number Inches Number Inches 0 0.3065 8 0.1620 1 0.2830 9 0.1483 2 0.2625 10 0.1350 3 0.2437 11 0.1205 4 0.2253 12 0.1055 5 0.2070 13 0.0915 6 0.1920 14 0.0800 7 0.1770 032020 Page 2 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 3. BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter(d), shall be as follows: Bends of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend: Grade 60 #3, #4, #5 4d #6, #7, #8 5d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above: Grade 60 Grade 75 #3 thru#8 6d -- #9, #10 8d -- #11 8d 8d #14, #18 10d -- 032020 Page 3 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 4. TOLERANCES Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be within 3 percent of specified or as follows: Plan Diemen. = 3/4" _1 7/8" Bar or Smollar--Plan- Dimon. ; 1/27 h 1" Bar or Larger--Plan. Mmen. ; 1� 3✓ 1-1= over 6"--aemen.+ Zero or -I/Z7 H = 6 a-`nd less-Dimon. • Zero or 14 7/8" Bar or Smaller--Pion Dimon_ ; 1/20 r- l" Bar or 1_arger—Place Diemen. s I" piral or Circular Tie Tie: or Stirstap gPIonDimon;-*-IY Plan Cm-=.=1/2 5. STORING Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports, and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection,provided the minimum dimensions, cross- sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 6. SPLICES No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. 032020 Page 4of6 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE I Minimum Lap Requirements Lap Uncoated Coated Lap in inches > 40d 60d Where: d=bar diameter in inches Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the drawings and industry standards. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20-diameter lap with the new bars. For box culvert extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inches lap will be required. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 7. PLACING Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch or as otherwise shown on the plans. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on the project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need be tied. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Precast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or 032020 Page 5 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of Article 7 of this specification. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the Bid Form and shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. 032020 Page 6 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 038000 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for construction of all types of structures involving the use of structural concrete, except where the requirements are waived or revised by other governing specifications. All concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with the design requirements and details shown on the plans; in conformity with the pertinent provisions of the items contracted for; the incidental specifications referred to; and in conformity with the requirements herein. 2. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". The class of concrete for each type of structure or unit shall be as specified on the plans or by pertinent governing specifications. (2) Expansion Joint Material. (a) Preformed Fiber Material. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans. The material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the plans: 1. Preformed Bituminous Fiber Materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)". 2. Preformed Non-Bituminous Fiber Material shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D 1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)",except that the requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density and water absorption shall be voided. 3. Redwood. (b) Joint Sealing Materials. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, joint sealing material shall conforin to the following requirements. The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 038000 Page 1 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 1. Class 1-a. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer,Cold-Extruded Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 24 hours. For performance requirements see under 2.(2)(b)2. below. 2. Class 1-b. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Pourable, Self-Leveling Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 3 hours. Performance Requirements: Class 1-a and Class 1-b joint materials,when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and the following requirements: It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60 degrees F. Penetration, 77'F.: 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max., cm.................. 0.90 Bond and Extension 75%, O°F, 5 cycles: Dry Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Wet Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Steel Blocks...(Primed if specified by manu£). Pass Flow at 200' F................................. None Water Content %by weight, max................. 5.0 Resilience: Original sample min. % (cured)................. 50 Oven aged at 158'F min. % .................... 50 For Class 1-a Material Only: Cold Flow (10 min.)............................ None (c) Asphalt Board. Asphalt Board shall consist of two liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper,filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. Boards shall be smooth,flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-524-C,the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch in three and one-half inches (1" in 3'/2"). (d) Rebonded Neoprene Filler. Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed- cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness, of the dimensions shown on plans. Filler material shall have the following physical properties and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D 1752"Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction", Type 1, where applicable: 038000 Page 2 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 PROPERTY METHOD REQUIREMENT Color ASTM D1752, Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752, Type 1 40 lb./ft' Min. Recovery ASTM D1752, Type 1 90% Min. Compression ASTM D1752, Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752, Type 1 0.25 inch Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752, Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75% Min. The manufacturers shall furnish the Engineer with certified test results as to compliance with the above requirements and a 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample from the shipment for approval. (3) Curing Materials. (a) Membrane curing materials shall comply with ASTM Designation: C 309 "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete",Type 1 clear or translucent, or Type 2 white-pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash-point of 80 degrees F when tested by the "Pensky-Martin Closed Cup Method". It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40 degrees F. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application. The compound shall produce a firm,continuous,uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. It shall,when applied to the damp concrete surface at the rate of coverage specified herein,be dry to the touch in not more than 4 hours, and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. The water retention test shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-219-F. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the 038000 Page 3 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 following: 24 hours after application............2 percent 72 hours after application............4 percent Type 1 (Resin Base Only)curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. (b) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 1 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the plans. All open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint material, shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. The j oint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. Where preformed fiber joint material is used,it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out. The top one inch (I") of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 4. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. The teen "monolithic placement" shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Engineer, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similar locations. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the plans. The 038000 Page 4 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 material will be specified on the plans without referenced to joint type. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material, and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 5. FORMS (1) General. Except where otherwise specified, forms may be of either timber or metal. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Engineer. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as specified. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete shall be taken into consideration in detennining the depth of the equivalent liquid. For j ob fabricated fonns,an additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used by the Texas Department of Transportation for the design of structures. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment, shear or end reaction. The maximum working load shall include a live load of 35 pounds per square foot of horizontal form surface, and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight,rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports, and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Forms shall be maintained in a manner that will prevent warping and shrinkage. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch(1/16"). Deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram shall be taken into account in the setting of slab forms. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such work is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, at any stage of the work, the fonns show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately,if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 038000 Page 5 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (2) Timber Forms. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one side and two edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch in thickness,with no form lining required. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. Plywood used for forming surfaces that remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II Exterior, of the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards and Technology, latest edition. Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. Any lumber which is split, warped, bulged, marred, or has defects that will produce inferior work, shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. Studs and joists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. Wales shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least 4 feet on each side of joints to provide continuity. A row of wales shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical,i.e.,long dimensions set in the same direction. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-quarter inch (3/4") on the sides. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. All moldings,panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. 038000 Page 6 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forins in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2") from the concrete surface. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling,and when removed,shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch (1/2") from the face of the concrete. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. Prior to placing concrete, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. Care shall be exercised to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. (3) Metal Forms. The foregoing requirements for timber forms regarding design,mortar-tightness, filleted corners,beveled projections,bracing,alignment,removal,reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps,pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 6. PLACING REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be placed carefully and accurately and rigidly supported as provided in the City Standard Specification Section 032020 'Reinforcing Steel". Reinforcing steel supports shall not be welded to I-beams or girders. 7. PLACING CONCRETE-GENERAL The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 50 degrees F. 038000 Page 7 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for finishing,the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only,and shall be held to a minimum amount. Fog spray for this purpose may be applied with hand operated fogging equipment. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete: Above 80 degrees F 15 minutes Up to 80 degrees F 30 minutes A,itated Concrete: Above 90 degrees F 45 minutes 75 degrees F to 90 degrees F 60 minutes 35 degrees F to 74 degrees F 90 minutes The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the above temperature-time maximums by 30 minutes for direct traffic culverts, and one hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed 30 minutes for non-agitated concrete. Before starting work,the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms,reinforcing steel placement,and other preparations. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done during daylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. Concrete placement will not be pei7nitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finished work. If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started,the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. In case of drop in temperature,the provisions set forth in Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. The placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. 038000 Page 8 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than 5 feet,except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Engineer. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies,belt conveyors,pumps or other acceptable methods. When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind,if necessary,to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. Chutes, troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. Open troughs and chutes shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clear of the concrete. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than 36 inches in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold j oint. Not more than one hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placements of concrete. Unauthorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one continuous operation. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold joints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. Openings in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. At least one stand-by vibrator shall be 038000 Page 9 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 provided for emergency use in addition to those required for placement. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and thorough working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically,at points 18 to 30 inches apart, and slowly withdrawn. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation,and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced,but not long enough to cause segregation. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding, if necessary,to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a plant located off the structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four(4)full curing days. If carts are used,timber planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. After concrete has attained its initial set,at least one(1)curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, when permitted, shall be limited to quantities and distribution that will not induce excessive stresses. 8. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (1) Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 35 degrees F. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32 degrees F. Aggregates shall be free from ice, frost and frozen lumps. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature,the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: The water temperature shall not exceed 180 degrees F,and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F before introduction of the cement. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: (a) The temperature of slab concrete of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40 degrees F for an additional 72 hours. 038000 Page 10 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (b) The temperature at the surface of all concrete in piers, culverts walls,retaining walls,parapets,wingwalls,bottoms of slabs,and other similar formed concrete shall be maintained at 40 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. (c) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. Curing as specified under Article "Curing Concrete"of this specification shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before permission is granted to begin placement. Sufficient extra test specimens will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed, prior to form removal and acceptance. (2) Precast Concrete. A fabricating plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities,may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: (a) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one hour after the concrete is placed. This shall not be construed to be one hour after the last concrete is placed,but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one hour. (b) Steam heat shall keep the air surrounding the concrete between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F for a minimum of three hours prior to beginning the temperature rise which is required for steam curing. (c) For fabricating plants without the above facilities and for job site precast products,the requirements of the Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall apply. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission given by the Engineer for placing concrete during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under nonnal conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory,it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 038000 Page 11 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 9. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the plans or with written permission by the Engineer. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing, nor until it has set for at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method, and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. The concrete surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. The tremie shall consist of a water-tight tube 14 inches or less in diameter. It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel; the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. 10. PLACING CONCRETE IN BOX CULVERTS In general, construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the plans. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than 4 feet in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1) nor more than two (2)hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Article"Finish of Roadway Slabs". Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonably smooth float finish. 11. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS AND SUBSTRUCTURE Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and permission has been given to proceed. Placing of concrete footings upon seal concrete courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal concrete course cleaned. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 038000 Page 12 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 When footings can be placed in a diy excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted,if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer,and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing; in which case,measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions shown on the plans. 12. TREATMENT AND FINISHING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES EXCEPT ROADWAY SLABS All unformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. After the concrete has been struck off, the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. Sidewalks shall be given a wood float or broom finish, or may be striped with a brush, as specified by the Engineer. Other surfaces shall be wood float finished and striped with a fine brush leaving a fine- grained texture. 13. FINISH OF ROADWAY SLABS As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working,the surface shall be approximately leveled,struck off and screeded,carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. The screeds shall be provided with a metal edge. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. The surface of the concrete shall be screeded a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface, true to grade and free of voids. If necessary, the screeded surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size, or hand floated from bridges over the slab. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled 10-foot straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. All high spots shall be removed and all depressions over one-sixteenth inch(1/16")in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids or rough spots. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. Surface Texturing. Perform surface texturing using a either carpet drag or metal tining as indicated on the drawings. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag 038000 Page 13 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. A metal-tine texture finish is required using a tining machine unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal-tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal-tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 in. deep, with a minimum depth of 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on ramps and other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen, the surface shall be given a broom or burlap drag finish. The grooves of these finishes shall be parallel to the structure centerline. It is the intent that the average texture depth resulting from the number of tests directed by the Engineer be not less than 0.035 inch with a minimum texture depth of 0.030 inch for anyone test when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-436-A. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. After the concrete has attained its final set, the roadway surface shall be tested with a standard 10- foot straightedge. The straightedge shall be placed parallel to the centerline of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch high spots. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch(1/8"),making proper allowances for camber,vertical curvature and surface texture. Occasional variations,not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch (3/16") will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Engineer it will not affect the riding qualities. When directed by the Engineer, irregularities exceeding the above requirements shall be corrected. In all roadway slab finishing operations,camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 14. CURING CONCRETE The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts; and shall have the proposed methods, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. Inadequate curing and/or facilities, therefore,shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken. All concrete shall be cured for a period of four(4) curing days except as noted herein. 038000 Page 14 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 EXCEPTIONS TO 4-DAY CURING Description Required Curing Upper Surfaces of Bridge Slabs and 8 curing days (Type I or III) cement Top Slabs of Direct Traffic Culverts 10 curing days (Type II cement) Concrete Piling (non-prestressed) 6 curing days When the air temperature is expected to drop below 35 degrees F,the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature of all surfaces of the concrete above 40 degrees F for the entire 24 hours). The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 1 and the following requirements for each method of curing. (1) Form Curing. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. (2) Water Curing. All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. The water used for curing shall meet the requirements for concrete mixing water as specified in the specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Seawater will not be permitted. Water which stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. (a) Wet Mat. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. (See Article, 'Placing Concrete" of this specification.) Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock may be placed on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection prior to the application of the cotton mats which may be placed dry and wetted down after placement. The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats and anchored positively to the forms or to the ground so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. (b) Water Spray. This curing method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keep all unformed surfaces continuously wet. (c) Pondin . This curing method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two inches (2") of clean granular material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch 038000 Page 15 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (1") depth of water. Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated granular material. (3) Membrane Curing. This consists of curing concrete pavement,concrete pavement(base),curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement-stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the plans by impervious membrane method. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the plans, either Type 1-D or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1-D (Resin Base Only) will be required for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. TABLE 1 REQUIRED PERMITTED MEMBRANE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE UNIT WATER FOR WATER FOR DESCRIPTION FOR INTERIM FOR INTERIM CURING CURING CURING CURING 1 Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X 2 Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.). X Other superstructure concrete (wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) 3 Concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, X* X* islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. 4 All substructure concrete, culverts, box sewers, inlets, X* X* manholes, retaining walls *Polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene mats or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing for items 3 and 4. 038000 Page 16 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 Membrane curing shall not be applied to dry surfaces,but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans,the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of curing compound will be permitted on any one structure. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed,and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of application of the compound. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface. If the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects,or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage,an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. To insure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing,curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental 038000 Page 17 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 to the work,the Contractor,when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. 15. REMOVAL OF FORMS Except as herein provided, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one day(24 hours)when Type I and Type II cement is used, and not less than one-half day (12 hours) when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. 16. FINISHING EXPOSED SURFACES Concrete shall be finished as required in the specification Section for the respective item or as otherwise specified on the plans. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: After form removal,all porous or honey-combed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. Feather edges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. If judged repairable by the Engineer, large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Engineer. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch (1/2") and the surface repaired. All fins,runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces which remain exposed. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt,paint or other similar material shall be removed. Repairs shall be dense, well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces which remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. 038000 Page 18 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 17. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,no direct measurement or payment will be made for the work to be done or the equipment to be furnished under this specification,but it shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans and the contract documents. 038000 Page 19 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 055420 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS AND COVERS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the furnishing and installation of frames, grates, rings and covers for inlets, manholes and other structures in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A36 "Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel". 2. MATERIALS Welded steel grates and frames shall conform to the member size, dimensions and details shown on the plans and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A36. Castings, whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron, shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown on the plans and shall be clean substantial castings, free from burnt-on sand or blow holes, and shall be reasonable smooth. Runners, risers, fins, and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. Bearing surfaces between manhole rings and covers or grates and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the perimeter contact area. Pairs of machined castings shall be matchinarked to facilitate subsequent identification at installation. Steel castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A27 "Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application". Grade 70-36 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. Cast Iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings", Class 30. Ductile iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A536 "Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings". Grade 60-40-18 shall be used otherwise specified. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be constructed of the materials as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the plans, and shall be placed carefully to the lines and grades indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the latest American Welding Society Specifications. Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be given one coat of a commercial grade red lead and oil paint and two coats of commercial grade aluminum paint. 055420 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 Painting on gray iron castings will not be required, except when used in conjunction with structural steel shapes. Commercial grade galvanized bolts and nuts shall be used. The zinc coating shall be uniform in thickness, smooth and continuous. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, frames, grates, rings and covers will not be measured for payment,but shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. 055420 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 0126 00- CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 2. Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for forms for contract modifications provided as part of web-based Project management software. 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary,the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes,delivery charges,equipment rental,and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00-1 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 23 10 "Alternates and Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0126 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00-2 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 01 31 00- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. S. Web-based Project management software package. 6. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses, cellular telephone numbers, and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 00-1 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results, where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and scheduled activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 00-2 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. C. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms, showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications,sleeves,anchor bolts, bearing plates,angles,door floor closers,slab depressions for floor finishes,curbs and housekeeping pads,and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing,flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components,such as dampers,valves,diffusers,access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. C. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire- alarm locations. C. Panel board,switchboard,switchgear,transformer, busway,generator,and motor- control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 00-3 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 9. Review:Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that, in general,the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail,or are otherwise deficient,Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit. 10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." C. Coordination Drawing Process: Prepare coordination drawings in the following manner: 1. Schedule submittal and review of Fire Sprinkler, Plumbing, HVAC, and Electrical Shop Drawings to make required changes prior to preparation of coordination drawings. 2. Commence routing of coordination drawing files with HVAC Installer, who will provide drawing plan files denoting approved ductwork. HVAC Installer will locate ductwork and piping on a single layer, using orange color. Forward drawings to Plumbing Installer. 3. Plumbing Installer will locate plumbing and equipment on a single layer, using blue color. 4. Fire Sprinkler Installer will locate piping and equipment, using red color. Fire Sprinkler Installer shall forward drawing files to Electrical Installer. S. Electrical Installer will indicate service and feeder conduit runs and equipment in green color. Electrical Installer shall forward drawing files to Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Installer. 6. Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Installer will indicate cable trays and cabling runs and equipment in purple color. Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Installer shall forward completed drawing files to Contractor. 7. Contractor shall perform the final coordination review. As each coordination drawing is completed, Contractor will meet with Architect to review and resolve conflicts on the coordination drawings. D. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: a. Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital data files will be provided in the software and format that is used to prepare the Contract Documents.Translations to different programs or modifications to the drawing setup will be the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in this Project Manual. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 00-4 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Owner name. 3. Owner's Project number. 4. Name of Architect. 5. Architect's Project number. 6. Date. 7. Name of Contractor. 8. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 9. RFI subject. 10. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 12. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 13. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 14. Contractor's signature. 15. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings,coordination drawings,and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. Architect's Action:Architect will review each RFI,determine action required,and respond.Allow seven days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 0126 00 "Contract Modification Procedures." PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-5 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. D. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain,and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number, including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Web-Based Project Management Software Package: Provide, administer, and use web-based Project management software package for purposes of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion. 1. Web-based Project management software includes, at a minimum, the following features: a. Compilation of Project data, including Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants, Owner, and other entities involved in Project. Include names of individuals and contact information. b. Access control for each entity for each workflow process, to determine entity's digital rights to create, modify,view, and print documents. C. Document workflow planning, allowing customization of workflow between project entities. d. Creation, logging,tracking,and notification for Project communications required in other Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, RFIs, submittals, Minor Changes in the Work, Construction Change Directives, and Change Orders. e. Track status of each Project communication in real time, and log time and date when responses are provided. f. Procedures for handling PDFs or similar file formats, allowing markups by each entity. Provide security features to lock markups against changes once submitted. g. Processing and tracking of payment applications. h. Processing and tracking of contract modifications. i. Creating and distributing meeting minutes. j. Document management for Drawings, Specifications, and coordination drawings, including revision control. k. Management of construction progress photographs. I. Mobile device compatibility, including smartphones and tablets. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 00-6 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 2. Provide up to seven Project management software user licenses for use of Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants. Provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for web-based Project software users. 3. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked format to prevent further changes. B. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file, incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of seven days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. 4. Notification: Inform participants three days prior to meetings not regularly scheduled. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. C. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. h. Procedures for RFls. i. Procedures for processing Submittals. j. Procedures for processing substitution requests. k. Procedures for processing field decisions, proposal requests and Change Orders. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-7 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 I. Procedures for testing and inspecting. M. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. n. Distribution of the Contract Documents. o. Procedures for moisture and mold control. P. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. q. Construction waste management and recycling. r. Office, work and storage areas. S. Preparation of Record Documents. t. Use of the premises. U. Work restrictions. V. Working hours. W. Owner's occupancy requirements. X. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Y. Procedures for moisture and mold control. Z. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. aa. Construction waste management and recycling. bb. Office, work, and storage areas. cc. Equipment deliveries and priorities. dd. First aid. ee. Security. ff. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other Sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. For exterior installations that require TDI Certification, include the TDI Inspector. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. M. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 00-8 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 o. Compatibility of materials. P. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. TDI Certification requirements. U. Testing and inspecting requirements. V. Installation procedures. W. Coordination with other work. X. Required performance results. Y. Protection of adjacent work. Z. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of Record Documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. C. Procedures for completing and archiving web-based Project software site data files. d. Submittal of written warranties. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. g. Requirements for demonstration and training. h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. j. Submittal procedures for closeout documents. k. Coordination of separate contracts. I. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. m. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. n. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 00-9 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 E. Progress Meetings: Contractor will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner , Owner's Commissioning Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,coordination,or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time,ahead of schedule,or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Status of correction of deficient items. 15) Field observations. 16) Status of RFIs. 17) Status of Proposal Requests. 18) Pending changes. 19) Status of Change Orders. 20) Pending claims and disputes. 21) Documentation of information for payment requests. 22) Testing and inspection requirements. 23) Other business relating to the Work. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of the progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Contractor shall revise the construction schedule after each progress meeting, where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-10 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 F. Coordination Meetings: Contractor will conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals corresponding to the Work that needs to be coordinated. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes,such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,coordination,or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting, where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. C. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Proposal Requests. 16) Change Orders. 17) Pending changes. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-11 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-12 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 0133 00- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting coordination drawings and subcontract list and for requirements for web-based Project software. 2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. A FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format(PDF):An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed- layout document format. 1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule:Submit,as an action submittal,a list of submittals,arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule as required to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal Category:Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled date of fabrication. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 5. Architect reserves the right to withhold 10 percent of each payment request, in addition to retainage fee, if any, until the submittal schedule is received and accepted by the Architect. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of Drawings of the Contract Drawings and Project Manual will not be provided by Architect. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all Action and Informational submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. a. Exception:Where samples for initial selection and samples for verification are both required, submit samples for verification after initial selection has been returned by Architect. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.The Architect will document on submittal the date and time of receipt. Submittals received by the Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Delaying submittals to facilitate coordination between submittals shall not constitute a delay of the Work nor shall it be the basis for an extension of time. 2. Sequential Review: Sequential review is a submittal that requires review by more than one design discipline. Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. 3. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. 4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project Name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of Subcontractor. f. Name of Supplier. g. Name of Manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. Submittals shall be numbered with the Section number, followed by a dash, followed by a three-digit number, followed by a dash, and ending in a sequential submission number as indicated below.The numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions. 1) Section Number: Section number where submittal is specified. 2) Two-digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with "01," for each submittal transmitted to Architect for each Section. 3) Submission Number: Use ".0" for initial submittal, "T' for first resubmittal, ".2" for second resubmittal, and so forth. 4) Three-Digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with (001), for each submittal issued to Architect chronologically. a) Example: 061000.01.0 - (001) - (Section 061000, first submission of the Section, initial submittal). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 k. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect or Construction Project Manager observe noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of the submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect and Construction Project Manager. 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals:Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each item. a. Unique identifier, including revision number. Submittals shall be numbered with the Section number, followed by a dash, followed by a three-digit number, followed by a dash, and ending in a sequential submission number as indicated below.The numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions. 1) Section Number: Section number where submittal is specified. 2) Two-digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with "01," for each submittal transmitted to Architect for each Section. 3) Submission Number: Use ".0" for initial submittal, "T' for first resubmittal, ".2" for second resubmittal, and so forth. 4) Three-Digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with (001), for each submittal issued to Architect chronologically. a) Example: 061000.01.0 - (001) - (Section 061000, first submission of the Section, initial submittal). b) Example:061000.01.1-(001.R1)-(Section 061000,first submission of the Section, first resubmittal, third submittal issued in chronological order, but Resubmittal). c) Example: 055000.01.0 - (020) - (Section 055000, first submission of the Section, twentieth submittal issued in chronological order). d) Example: 055000.07.0 - (030) - (Section 055000, seventh submission of the Section, thirtieth submittal issued in chronological order, but Resubmittal). e) Example: 055000.07.1 - (030.111) - (Section 055000, seventh submission of the Section,first resubmittal,fiftieth submittal issued in chronological order, but Resubmittal). 2. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Scanned Copies: Legible scanned PDF files of paper originals are acceptable. Scanned submittals that are not legible will be rejected. 4. Sheet Orientation: Orient PDF sheets to a "Ready-to-Read" orientation with majority of text horizontal to the sheet with no additional adjustments or formatting required by the viewer. 5. File Security: Do not set any permissions on the file. Protected documents will not be accepted. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 6. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software. 7. Metadata: Include the following information in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Title: Project title. b. Author: Contractor's name. C. Subject: Submittal type (product data, shop drawing, report, etc.) d. Keywords: Number and title of appropriate Specification Section; manufacturer name; product name/model number. 8. File Size: Limit file size of each submittal as follows. Break larger PDF files into multiple packages where necessary to meet delivery restrictions. Identify split packages as"1 of#" and "2 of#" in the subject line. a. Email Delivery: 2 Megabytes. b. FTP Delivery: 100 Megabytes. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate document, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same identification information as related submittal. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in the same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are stamped with Architect's action stamp marker "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED," and Project Manager's approval notation. 4. Costs of compensation for Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary for review of submittals exceeding the limits set forth below shall be at the Contractor's expense. a. Reviews of Each Submittal:Two, including initial review. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals with Architect's action stamp marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS AS NOTED." K. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been reviewed by the Architect and returned to Contractor with Architect's action stamp marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or"MAKE CORRECTIONS AS NOTED." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 Police Substation-Far South-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 014100-TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 PROCEDURE A. Testing Laboratory: An independent testing laboratory will be selected and furnished by the Owner to inspect and test the materials and methods of construction as hereinafter specified for compliance with the specification requirements of the Contract Documents and to perform such other specialized technical services as required by the Owner or his representative. All testing lab services shall be paid for by the owner. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING LABORATORY A. The Testing Laboratory selected shall meet the basic requirements of ASTM E329 "Standard of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction", and shall submit to the Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer, a copy of the report of inspection of their facilities made by the Materials Reference Laboratory of the National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of such inspections, and shall submit a memorandum stating steps taken to remedy all deficiencies reported by this inspection. B. The Testing Laboratory selected shall meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", latest edition, as published by the American Council of Independent Laboratories. C. The Testing Laboratory shall be approved by the local Building Official to perform inspection and certification services as an approved inspector of prefabricated construction. D. Testing machines shall be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 12 months by devices of accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. The Testing Laboratory shall submit a copy of certificate of calibration made by an accredited calibration agency. E. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements, and if not specified, in accordance with the applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials or other recognized and accepted authorities in the field. Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.4 AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF THE LABORATORY A. Attending Preconstruction Conferences: The Testing Laboratory shall obtain and review the project plans and specifications with the Architect and Engineer as soon as possible prior to the start of construction. The Laboratory shall attend preconstruction conferences with the Architect, Engineer, Project Manager, General Contractor, and Material Suppliers as required to coordinate materials inspection and testing requirements with the planned construction schedule. The Laboratory will participate in such conferences throughout the course of the project. B. Outline Testing Program: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for outlining a written detailed testing program conforming to the requirements as specified in the Contract Documents and in consultation with the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer. The testing program shall contain an outline of inspections and tests to be performed with reference to applicable sections of the specifications or drawings and a list of personnel assigned to each portion of the work. Such testing program shall be submitted to the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer five weeks in advance of the start of construction so as not to delay the start of construction. It shall be the Testing Laboratory's responsibility that such program conforms to the requirements of the Specifications and drawings and falls within the budget for testing laboratory services. If the allocated budget is not sufficient to cover the services as outlined in the Specifications, it shall be the responsibility of the Laboratory to notify the Contractor, Architect, Engineer, and Owner so that the Laboratory services can be modified accordingly prior to the start of construction. Furthermore, the Testing Laboratory shall monitor its expenditures throughout the course of the job and notify immediately the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer, of any significant deviation from the planned testing program and budget. C. Cost Proposal: The Testing Laboratory's proposal to the Owner shall contain the outlined testing program based on a unit price basis for tests and inspections and on an hourly basis for personnel. A total estimated price shall also be submitted. D. Cooperation with Design Team: The Laboratory shall cooperate with the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor and provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. E. The Laboratory shall perform the required inspections, sampling, and testing of materials as specified under each section and observe methods of construction for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Inspections Required by Government Agencies: Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The Testing Laboratory shall perform all inspections and submit all reports and certifications as required by all government agencies. G. Notification of Deficiencies in the Work: The Laboratory shall notify the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor first by telephone and then in writing of observed irregularities and deficiencies of the work and other conditions not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. H. Reports: 1. Information on Reports: The Laboratory shall submit copies of all reports of inspections and tests promptly and directly to the parties named below. All reports shall contain at least the following information: a. Project Name b. Date report issued C. Testing Laboratory name and address d. Name and signature of inspector e. Date of inspection and sampling f. Date of test g. Identification of product and Specification section h. Location in the project i. Identification of inspection or test j. Record of weather conditions and temperature (if applicable) k. Results of test regarding compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Copies: The Laboratory shall send certified copies of test and inspection reports to the following parties: a. 2 copies to the Owner or his representative b. 2 copies to the General Contractor C. 1 copy to the Architect d. 1 copy to the Engineer of responsibility e. 1 copy to the Supplier of the material tested 3. Certification by Notary Public: Upon completion of the job, the Testing Laboratory shall furnish to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer of responsibility, a statement certified by a Notary Public that all required tests and inspections were made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. I. Accounting: Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for separating and billing costs attributed to the Owner and cost attributed to the Contractor. J. Obtaining Product and Material Certifications: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for obtaining all product and material certifications from manufacturers and suppliers as specified in the Specifications. K. Limitations of Authority: The Testing Laboratory is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge upon, or release any requirements of the Specifications or to approve or accept any portion of the work or to perform any duties of the General Contractor and his Subcontractors. 1.5 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY A. Cooperation with Design Team: The owner shall pay for all testing lab services. The Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to the work, and to manufacturers operations. B. Furnishing Samples: The Contractor shall provide to the laboratory representative, samples of materials proposed for use in the work in quantities sufficient for accurate testing as specified. C. Furnishing Casual Labor, Equipment and Facilities: The Contractor shall furnish casual labor, equipment, and facilities as required for sampling and testing by the Laboratory and otherwise facilitate all required inspections and tests. D. Advance Notice: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Testing Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. E. Payment for Substitution Testing: The Contractor shall arrange with the Testing Laboratory and pay for any additional samples and tests above those required by the Contract Documents as requested by the Contractor for his convenience in performing the work. F. Payment for Retesting: Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The Contractor shall pay for any additional inspections, sampling, testing, and retesting as required when initial tests indicate work does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. G. Payment by Contractor: The Contractor shall furnish and pay for the following items: 1. Soil survey of the locations of borrow soil materials, samples of existing soil materials, and delivery to the Testing Laboratory. 2. Samples of concrete aggregates and delivery to the Testing Laboratory. 3. Concrete mix designs as prepared by his concrete supplier or by his Testing Laboratory. 4. Concrete coring, tests of below strength concrete, and load tests, if ordered by the Owner,Architect, or Engineer. 5. Certification of reinforcing steel mill order. 6. Certification of structural steel mill order. 7. Certification of Portland cement, lime, and flyash. 8. Certification of welders. 9. Tests, samples and mock-ups of substitute material where the substitution is requested by the Contractor and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer to establish equality with specified items. 10. Any other tests when such cost are required by the Contract Documents to be paid by the Contractor. H. Notification of Source Change: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made. I. Tests for Suspected Deficient Work: If in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer any of the work of the Contractor is not satisfactory, the Contractor shall make all tests that the Owner, Architect, or Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Engineer deem advisable to determine its proper construction. The owner shall pay all costs if the tests prove the questioned work to be satisfactory. 1.6 PAYMENT OF TESTING LABORATORY The Owner will pay for all Laboratory services for testing of materials for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor will pay for testing and retesting of materials that do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents and all other items as specified in these Specifications. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SCOPE OF WORK The work to be performed by the Testing Laboratory shall be as specified in this Section of the Specification and the contract drawings, and as determined in meetings with the Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer. 3.2 Foundation: 1. Field Inspection: The Testing Laboratory shall provide inspection of all piers for the project. 2. Drilled Piers a. Concrete Cylinders: Make and test concrete cylinders as specified for Cast-in-Place Concrete. b. Bearing Elevation: Observe that piers are founded in proper bearing strata as defined in the Geotechnical Report and that bottom of hole is clean and properly formed. C. Concrete Quantities: Record quantity of concrete placed in each pier and compare against theoretical quantity required. Report discrepancies to Engineer. d. Placement Method: Observe that piers are placed by approved methods as defined in the Geotechnical Report. Confirm that casings are being used when needed as recommended in the Geotechnical Report. Confirm that concrete is not being contaminated by soil encroaching into pier. e. Reinforcing Steel: Inspect reinforcing steel for proper number and size of bars and confirm dowel or anchor bolt placement into top of pier. 3.3 REINFORCING STEEL Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Visual Inspection: The Testing Laboratory shall inspect the rebar to determine the following: 1. The bars shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workman-like finish. 2. Deformations shall be of the proper sizes, shapes, and spacing as detailed in ASTM A-615. 3. The bars shall not have excessive rust and/or pelting. 4. The bars shall not have any unusual twists or bends. B. Identified Stock: Where job material is taken from bundles as delivered from the mill, is properly identified as to heat number and is accompanied by mill and analysis test reports, provided an affidavit is given from the Supplier to the Testing Laboratory that the materials conform with the requirements of the ASTM specification as listed on the structural drawings. In case of controversy, the procedure as stipulated below for unidentified stock shall be followed. C. Unidentified Stock: For all unidentified stock, the Testing Laboratory shall secure samples of the reinforcing steel bars at the time of inspection.The samples shall confirm to the following: 1. The sample shall include 2 bars for each ten tons or fraction thereof, of each bar size, heat number, and manufacturer being shipped. 2. The sample bars shall be a minimum of 24 inches in length and should be identical to the material being shipped. The Testing Laboratory shall tag each of the steel bundles with the Laboratory identification tag and appropriately mark the samples corresponding to the steel being inspected and shipped. The fabricator will supply shipping lists showing the weight of each bar size in the shipment. 3.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND POURED IN PLACE CONCRETE A. Tests of Portland Cement: Portland Cement shall be tested by the Testing Laboratory for compliance with the requirements of ASTM C150. 1. Mill Certificates: Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Mill certificates certifying that the cement has been tested and meets the requirements of the Specifications will be acceptable as test results, provided the cement proposed for use can be identified with test lots. Mill certificates shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to use of any such material. 2. Retesting: Retesting of cement will be required if: a. In the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, the cement has been damaged in storage or transit or is any way defective. b. The cement has been in storage at the mixing site for over 30 days. B. Test of Aggregates: 1. The Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall verify that concrete aggregates proposed for use conform to the following specification: a. ASTM C33 "Specification for Concrete Aggregates" Suppliers record of tests run on the proposed materials will be adequate provided a written affidavit is furnished as a shop drawing submittal. C. Concrete Mix Designs: The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer and Testing Laboratory at least 15 days prior to the start of construction, concrete mix designs for each class of concrete indicated on the structural drawings and in the Specifications. The Contractor shall not begin work until the applicable mix design has been approved. 1. The Contractor acting in conjunction with his Concrete Supplier and the Testing Laboratory shall submit in writing with his mix designs, whether the concrete is to be proportioned by either of the following methods as outlined in ACI 318: a. Field Experience Method b. Laboratory Trial Batch Method When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301 and ACI 211. When Laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, the procedure as outlined in ACI 318 shall be followed. Prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C39. 2. Required types of concrete and compressive strengths shall be as indicated on the Structural Drawings and as specified in the various sections of the Specifications. 3. All mix designs shall state the following information: Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Mix design number or code designation by which the Contractor shall order the concrete from the Supplier b. Structural member for which the concrete is designed (i.e. columns, piers, etc.) C. Type of concrete (normal weight). d. 28 day compressive strength e. Aggregate type, source, size, gradation,fineness modulus f. Cement type and brand g. Fly ash type and brand (if any) h. Admixtures including air entrainment, water reducers, accelerators, and retarders i. Slump j. Proportions of each material used k. Water cement ratio and maximum allowable water content I. Method by which the concrete is intended to be placed (bucket, chute, or pump) 4. Concrete Suppliers Record of Quality Control: The concrete supplier's past record of quality control shall be used in the design of the concrete mixes to determine the amount by which the average concrete strength fcr should exceed the specified strength f'c as outlined in ACI 318. If a suitable record of test results is not available, the average strength must exceed the design strength by 1200 PSI as specified in ACI 318. After sufficient data becomes available from the job, the statistical methods of ACI 214 may be used to reduce the amount by which the average strength must exceed fc as outlined in ACI 318. 5. Admixtures: a. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and Testing Laboratory. b. Quantities of admixtures to be used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. C. Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in concrete containing galvanized or aluminum embedments. d. Air entraining admixtures shall conform to "Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete" ASTM C260. e. Water reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, water reducing and retarding admixtures, and water reducing and accelerating admixtures shall conform to "Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete" ASTM C494. Testing Laboratory Services 0141 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 f. Fly ash or other pozzolons, used as admixtures, shall conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolons for use in Portland Cement Concrete" ASTM C618. Obtain mill test reports for approval. Maximum flyash content shall be 20%. g. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 6. Slump Limits: Unless shown otherwise on the structural drawings, proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: a. Ramps and Sloping surfaces-3" ± 1" b. Foundation concrete -4-1/2" ± 1-1/2" C. All other concrete -4" ± 1" When increased workability, pumpability, lower water-cement ratio, shrinkage reduction, or permeability reduction is required, then a superplasticizer admixture shall be considered for use. The maximum slump with the use of superplasticizers shall be 8 inches unless approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer and Testing Laboratory. Any deviation from these values (such as concrete design to be pumped) shall be submitted to the Engineer and Testing Laboratory for approval. 7. Adjustments of Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Such mix design adjustments shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Any adjustments in approved mix designs including changes in admixtures shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer and Testing Laboratory for approval prior to field use. 8. Shrinkage: All concrete shall be proportioned for a maximum allowable unit shrinkage of 0.03%at 28 days as determined by ASTM C 157. 9. Chloride Ion Content: A written submittal shall be made with each mix design proposed for use on the project that the chloride ion content from all ingredients including admixtures will not exceed the limits specified in the Cast-In-Place section of the Specifications. D. Concrete Test Cylinders by the Testing Laboratory: Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Molding and Testing: Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and Laboratory cured in accordance with ASTM C31 "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Cylinders in the Field" and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 "Method of Testing for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens". 2. Field Samples: Field samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172 "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete". 3. Frequency of Testing: Each set of test cylinders shall consist of a minimum of four standard test cylinders. A set of test cylinders shall be made according to the following frequency guidelines: a. One set for each class of concrete taken not less than once a day. b. Mat Foundation: One set for each 250 cubic yards or fraction thereof. C. All Other Concrete: A minimum of one set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof. d. No more than one set of cylinders at a time shall be made from any single truck. e. If the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing as specified above would provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used. f. Frequencies assume one batch plant will be used for each pour. If more than one batch plant is used, the frequencies cited above shall apply for each plant used. The cylinders shall be numbered, dated, and the point of concrete placement in the building recorded. Of the four cylinders per set break one at seven days, two at 28 days, and one automatically at 56 days only if either 28 day cylinder break is below required strength. 4. Cylinder Storage Box: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a protected concrete cylinder storage box at a point on the jobsite mutually agreeable with the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of storing concrete cylinders until they are transported to the Laboratory. 5. Transporting Cylinders: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for transporting the cylinders to the Laboratory in a protected environment such that no damage or ill effect will occur to the concrete cylinders. Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Information on Concrete Test Reports: The Testing Laboratory shall make and distribute concrete test reports after each job cylinder is broken. Such reports shall contain the following information: a. Truck number and ticket number b. Concrete Batch Plant C. Mix design number d. Accurate location of pour in the structure e. Strength requirement f. Date cylinders made and broken g. Technician making cylinders h. Concrete temperature at placing i. Air temperature at point of placement in the structure j. Amount of water added to the truck at the batch plant and at the site and whether it exceeds the amount allowed by the mix design k. Slump I. Unit weight M. Air content n. Cylinder compressive strengths with type of failure if concrete does not meet Specification requirements. Seven day breaks are to be flagged if they are less than 60% of the required 28 day strength. 28 day breaks are to be flagged if either cylinder fails to meet Specification requirements. E. Other Required Tests of Concrete by the Testing Laboratory(unless noted otherwise): 1. Slump Tests: Slump Tests (ASTM C143) shall be made at the beginning of concrete placement for each batch plant and for each set of test cylinders made. 2. Air Entrainment: Air entrainment (ASTM C233) tests shall be made at the same time slump tests are made as cited above. 3. Concrete Temperature: Concrete temperature at placement shall be measured at the same time slump tests are made as cited above. 4. Chloride Ions: The Contractor shall have the laboratory verify in a written submittal with the mix designs that the chloride ion concentration will not exceed the limits specified. Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Tests shall be run for each class of concrete according to AASHTO Designation T 260-82 Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials to determine that the maximum chloride ion content does not exceed the limits stated in the concrete section of the specifications. One test shall be run for each set of cylinders specified to be taken for each class of concrete. F. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete: 1. Strength Test: A strength test shall be defined as the average strength of two 28 day cylinder breaks from each set of cylinders. 2. Quality Control Charts and Logs: The Testing Laboratory shall keep the following quality control logs and charts for each class of concrete containing more than 2,000 cubic yards. The records shall be kept for each batch plant and submitted on a weekly basis with cylinder test reports: a. Number of 28 day strength tests made to date. b. 28 day strength test results containing the average of all strength tests to date, the high test result, the low test result, the standard deviation, and the coefficient of variation. C. Number of tests under specified 28 day strength. d. A histogram plotting the number of 28 day cylinders versus compressive strength. e. Quality control chart plotting compressive strength test results for each test. f. Quality control chart plotting moving average for strength where each point plotted is the average strength of three previous test results. g. Quality control chart plotting moving average for range where each point plotted is the average of 10 previous ranges. 3. Acceptance Criteria: The strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: a. The average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required f'c. b. No individual strength test (average of two 28 day cylinder breaks) falls below the required f'c by more than 500 PSI. Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 If either of the above requirements is not met, the Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Engineer by telephone. Steps shall immediately be taken to increase the average of subsequent strength tests. G. Investigation of Low Strength Concrete Test Results: 1. Contractor Responsibility for Low Strength Concrete: If any strength test of Laboratory cured cylinders falls below the required f'c by more than 500 psi, the Contractor shall take steps immediately to assure that the load carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. 2. Nondestructive Field Tests: The Testing Laboratory shall under the direction of the Engineer perform nondestructive field tests of the concrete in question using Swiss Hammer, Windsor Probe, or other appropriate methods as approved by the Engineer and report the results in the same manner as for cylinder test reports. 3. Core Tests: If the likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed and computations indicate that the load carrying capacity of the structure has been significantly reduced, tests of cores by the Testing Laboratory, drilled from the area in question under the direction of the Engineer, will be required in accordance with ASTM C42 "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete". In such case, three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 PSI below required f'c. If concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, cores shall be air dried (temperature 60° to 80°F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, cores shall be immersed in water for at least 48 hours and tested wet. The Contractor shall fill all holes made by drilling cores with an approved drypack concrete. 4. Acceptance Criteria for Core Tests: Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85% of f'c and if no single core is less than 75% of f'c. If approved by the Engineer, locations of erratic core strengths may be retested to check testing accuracy. 5. Load Test: Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-14 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 If the above criteria are not met and the structural adequacy remains in doubt, the Engineer may order a load test as specified in ACI 318 for the questionable portion of the structure. 6. Strengthening of the Structure or Demolition: If the structural adequacy of the affected portion of the structure remains in doubt, the Engineer may order the structure to be strengthened by an appropriate means or demolished and rebuilt. 7. Cost of Investigations for Low Strength Concrete: The costs of all investigations of low strength concrete shall be borne by the Contractor. H. Jobsite Inspection: The scope of the work to be performed by the inspector on the jobsite shall be as follows: 1. Verify that air temperatures at the point of placement in the structure are within acceptable limits defined above prior to ordering of concrete by the Contractor. 2. Inspect concrete upon arrival to verify that the proper concrete mix number, type of concrete, and concrete strength is being placed at the proper location. 3. Inspect plastic concrete upon arrival at the jobsite to verify proper batching. Observe mix consistency and adding of water as required to achieve target slumps in mix designs. Record the amount of water added and note if it exceeds that allowed in the mix design. The responsibility for adding water to trucks at the jobsite shall rest only with the Contractor's designated representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents. 4. Obtain concrete test cylinders. 5. Perform slump tests and air entrainment tests. 6. Record information for concrete test reports. 7. Verify that all concrete being placed meets job Specifications. Report concrete not meeting the specified requirements and immediately notify the Contractor, Batch Plant Inspector, Contractor, Architect, Engineer, and Owner. 8. Pick up and transport to Laboratory, cylinders cast the previous day. 9. Check concrete placing techniques to determine that concrete deposited is uniform and that vertical drop does not exceed six feet. Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-15 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 10. The jobsite inspector shall report any irregularities that occur in the concrete at the jobsite or test results to the Contractor,Architect, Owner, and Engineer. I. Causes for Rejection of Concrete: The Contractor shall reject all concrete delivered to the site for any of the following reasons: 1. Wrong class of concrete (incorrect mix design number). 2. Air temperature: Air temperature limits shall be as follows: a. Cold Weather: Air temperature must be 40°F and rising b. Hot Weather: Air temperature must be cooler than 100°. Concrete may be placed at other air temperature ranges only with approval of the job inspector for the Testing Laboratory or other duly appointed representative. 3. Concrete with temperatures exceeding 95°F may not be placed in the structure. 4. Air contents outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 5. Slumps outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 6. Excessive Age: Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of plant departure or before it begins to set if sooner than 90 minutes unless approved by the Laboratory job inspector or other duly appointed representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents. J. Concrete Batch Trip Tickets: All concrete batch trip tickets shall be collected and retained by the Contractor. Compressive strength, slump, air, and temperature tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. All tickets shall contain the information specified in ASTM C 94. Each ticket shall also show the amount of water that may be added in the field for the entire batch that will not exceed the specified water cement ratio for the design mix. The Contractor and Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer and each other of tickets not meeting the criteria specified. 3.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Contract Obligations: Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-16 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Owner Responsibility: The Owner shall pay for all initial field inspections and tests as required during the fabrication and erection of the structural steel. 2. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall arrange with the Testing Laboratory for the certification of all shop and field welders. Each bolting crew and welder shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and all shop and field connections shall be so identified so that the inspector can refer back to the person or crew performing the work. The costs of all retesting of material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor. The Fabricator and Erector shall provide the Laboratory inspector with access to all places where work is being done. A minimum of 24 hours notification shall be given prior to commencement of work. The Contractor shall provide the Testing Laboratory with the following: a. A complete set of Architect/Engineer reviewed shop and erection drawings including all revisions and addenda. b. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, shipping bills, and mill test reports. C. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops. d. Representative sample pieces requested for testing. e. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material. f. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, hoisting facilities, etc., for inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field. 3. Testing Laboratory Responsibility: Inspection of field work shall be completed promptly so that corrections can be made without delaying the progress of the work. Inspections shall be performed by qualified technicians with a minimum of two years experience in structural steel testing and inspection. All inspection personnel shall be certified in accordance with AWS QC-1. The Testing Laboratory shall provide test reports of all shop and field inspections. Shop test reports shall include shop welders certifications. All test reports shall indicate types and locations of all defects found during inspection, the measures required and performed to correct such defects, statements of final approval of all welding and bolting of shop and field connections, and other fabrication and erection data pertinent to the safe and proper welding and bolting of shop and field connections. In addition to the parties listed in this Specification the Fabricator and Erector shall receive copies of all test reports. 4. Rejection of Material or Workmanship: Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-17 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory reserve the right to reject any material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents at any time during the progress of the work. However, this provision does not allow waiving the obligation for timely, in sequence inspections. B. Mill Tests of Structural Steel: 1. Mill Order Steel: The Fabricator shall furnish certified mill test reports and an affidavit stating that the structural steel furnished meets the requirements of the grade specified on the structural drawings for all mill order steel. In case of controversy, test of the material according to ASTM A6 or A568 as applicable made by the Contractor's Testing Laboratory with certified test reports paid for by the Contractor shall be made to verify conformity with ASTM standards. Tests shall be made for each 10 tons of material used unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 2. Local Stock Steel: Materials taken from stock by a Fabricator for use for structural purposes must be of a quality at least equal to that required by the ASTM specifications applicable to the classification covering the intended use. Certified mill test reports shall be accepted as sufficient record of the quality of materials carried in stock by the fabricator provided the stock steel can be identified by heat or melt numbers. In case of controversy, tests by the Contractor's Testing Laboratory with certified reports as specified for mill order steel shall be required. 3. If tests are required, test specimens shall be taken by the Contractor under the direction of the Testing Laboratory and shall be machined by the Testing Laboratory to dimensions as required by the applicable ASTM standards. C. Field Inspections and Tests: The Testing Laboratory shall provide inspection in the field for a period of time as determined in consultation with the Architect, Owner, and Engineer prior to the start of erection in a timely manner so as to not delay the start of erection. The following tests and inspections shall be made: 1. Obtain the planned erection procedure, and review with the Erectors supervisory personnel. 2. Verify field welding procedures and obtain welder certificates. (Including welding of cold formed framing.) Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-18 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Check steel as received in the field for possible shipping damage, workmanship, and piece marking. 4. Check plumbness and frame alignment as erection progresses. 5. Check joint preparation and fit up, backing strips, and runout plates for welded moment connections and column splices. 6. Check preheating to assure proper temperature, uniformity, and thoroughness through the full material thickness. 7. Review welding sequence. 8. Visually inspect all field welding for size, length, and quality. 9. Perform nondestructive examination services for various weldments of field erection determined in consultation with the Structural Engineer prior to the start of erection. The Laboratory shall furnish a qualified technician with the necessary equipment to perform radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant inspection as required for the item being tested and other duties as outlined for shop inspection in the previous Section. Unless specified otherwise, check all partial and complete penetration welds in connections of beams, girders, columns, and braces. Check 10% of connections with fillet welds. Visual inspection is required for all welds. 10. Check calibration of impact wrenches used in field bolted connections. 11. Visually inspect the welding of metal deck to the structure. 12. Perform field tests on 10% of completed shear connectors in each beam according to inspection procedures outlined in AWS D1.1 The costs of repairing all defective welds and the costs of retesting by the Testing Laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor. If removal of a backing strip is required by the Testing Laboratory to investigate a suspected weld defect, such cost shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.6 MASONRY: A. Prism Tests 1. Scope: Prism tests shall be made for each class of masonry (hollow masonry, grouted masonry) on the project using an assembly of actual masonry units, mortar, and grout as planned in the work. 2. Compressive Strength Test: Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-19 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Test shall be run according to the requirements of ASTM E447 "Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms." Each strength test shall be defined as the average of three test prisms from the same class of masonry. 3. Frequency of Testing: a. Interior Walls: One strength test shall be run for each 5,000 square feet of wall or fraction thereof. b. Exterior Walls: One strength test shall be run for each 5,000 square feet of wall area but not less than one strength test for each day's operation for each class of wall. An additional test should be run whenever there is a change in mortar or grout proportions. B. Mortar Test: 1. Scope: Mortar cube test shall be required only for loadbearing masonry construction (hollow or grouted)for the purpose of measuring uniformity of field batching. 2. Compressive Strength Test: Tests shall be run according to the requirements of ASTM C780 "Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry." Each strength test shall be defined as the average of three cube specimens two inches in dimension tests at 28 days. 3. Frequency of Testing: One strength test shall be run for each 5,000 square feet of wall but not less than one strength test for each day's operation for each class of wall. An additional test should be run whenever there is a change in mix proportions. C. Grout Tests: 1. Scope: Grout prism tests shall be required for all grout used in masonry construction. 2. Compressive Strength Test: Specimens shall be 3%"x3%"x7" or 3"x3"x6" cast in molds with a flat nonabsorbent base and masonry units having the same moisture condition as those being laid forming the sides of the specimens. Specimens shall be capped according to ASTM C617 and tested according to ASTM C39. Each strength test shall be defined as the average of two 28 day prisms. Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-20 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Frequency of Testing: Four grout prisms shall e made for each 30 cubic yards of grout but not less than one set for each day's operation. An additional set should be made whenever the grout mix is changed. One prism shall be tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one at 56 days only if either 28 day test is low. D. Experience Requirement: Field inspection of masonry construction by the Testing Laboratory as herein described shall be performed by qualified technicians with a minimum of ten years experience in masonry testing and inspection. E. Field Inspection Requirements: The duties and responsibilities of the Testing Laboratory Inspector in the field shall be as follows: 1. Review and become familiar with project drawings and specifications. 2. Review all masonry materials used in the field for conformance to project specifications. This shall include masonry units, mortar, grout, portland cement, masonry cement, sand, lime, horizontal joint reinforcement, ties, masonry anchoring devices,to the structure, and control joint strips. 3. Review proper horizontal joint reinforcement size and spacing. Review size and spacing of wall ties. 4. Review proper masonry construction practices for mortar including requirements for high and low lift grouting. Check conformance with hot and cold weather construction requirements. 5. Verify proper mortar batching proportions. 6. Confirm clean outs for high lift grouting. 7. Verify construction tolerances. 8. Review and confirm installation of reinforcing steel size, spacing, and splices in all walls, lintels, pilasters, and columns. 9. Confirm number and size of dowels in the foundation to walls and columns. 10. Take mortar,grout, and prism samples as specified. 3.7 OPEN WEB STEEL JOISTS A. Scope: Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-21 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The Testing Laboratory shall perform inspection of open web steel joists in the field as herein described. B. Obtaining Manufacturer's Product Certification: The Testing Laboratory shall obtain product certification for open web steel joists as required by the Specifications. C. Inspection in the Field: The duties of Field Inspector shall be as follows: 1. Inspect joists for damage during shipment. 2. Verify proper bearing of joist supports. 3. Verify camber requirements of joists arriving in the field. 4. Confirm bridging size and location. 5. Confirm attachment of joists to supports (welding or bolting). 6. Confirm bolting of joists to supports at column lines as required by OSHA requirements. 7. Verify that no joists have been damaged during erection. END OF SECTION 01 41 00 Testing Laboratory Services 01 41 00-22 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 014119 -WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. All components and cladding must meet or exceed the wind load requirements as specified in this section. B. Exterior wall and roof openings shall be protected with impact resistant covers or designed to meet impact resistance requirements. C. Exterior mechanical and electrical equipment shall be secured against indicated windstorm loads. D. Owner shall pay for Texas Department of Insurance Inspection services for Windstorm Certification on the exterior components and the structure. Contractor is responsible for all other costs related to Windstorm Certification. E. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling the site inspections of the Owner's Windstorm Engineer. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Components and Cladding: Elements assembled to form the exterior wall and roof systems that are either directly loaded by the wind or receive wind loads originating at relatively close locations, and that transfer those loads to the main wind force resisting system. Examples: Curtain walls, exterior glass windows and panels, roof sheathing, studs, soffits, etc. B. Exterior Wall and Roof Openings: Openings that are likely to be breached during high winds. Examples: skylights, smoke vents, HVAC equipment,windows, doors, roof hatches, louvers, etc. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Wind loads shall be determined from the pressures developed by a 160-mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category IV, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". B. Impact resistance shall be as determined by the Texas Windstorm Code. 1. Impact Cyclic Wind Pressure Criteria. Impact protective systems and exterior opening products must be tested for windborne debris resistance under ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996 or other windborne debris standards or procedures that are recognized by the Texas Department of Insurance.The missile criteria must be as follows: WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 0141 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Products located within 30 feet of grade must be tested to resist large, and if required small missile. If ASTM E 1996 is the test standard used, then missile level D from Table 2, Applicable Missiles, must be used. b. Products located above 30 feet of grade must be tested to resist a small missile. If ASTM E 1996 is the test standard used,then missile level D from Table 2,Applicable Missiles, must be used. 2. Impact Protective Systems. Impact protective systems must be installed under the manufacturer's installation instructions and in the manner in which they were tested for uniform static wind pressure resistance and for windborne debris resistance. 3. Exterior Opening Products. a. If the exterior opening products are not protected from windborne debris by an impact protective system, then they must be manufactured to resist windborne debris under Section 1.4.13.1. b. Exterior opening products must be installed under the manufacturer's installation instructions and under the manner in which they were tested for uniform static wind pressure resistance and for windborne debris resistance. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. All components and cladding listed in the Texas Windstorm Approved Materials catalog shall have the appropriate product evaluation number indicated on the submittal. B. Components and cladding not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the design requirements of this section by the manufacturer. C. Installation instructions indicating fasteners, minimum attachment requirements, and other necessary pertinent information for installation shall be submitted. D. Forms:The following Texas Department of Insurance may be found on the TWIA website: 1. TWIA Insurability Requirements. 2. WPI-1 Application for Certificate of Compliance. 3. WPI-2-BC-7 Inspection Verification. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify the Architect not less than 72 hours in advance of a requested windstorm inspection.The Contractor shall provide,and have available at the job site,all necessary installation instructions during construction. It is incumbent upon the Contractor to have the project superintendent and knowledgeable representatives of the trades/craftwork being inspected in attendance with documentation to illustrate compliance of installation to TDI requirements. B. Prior to covering or concealing the fasteners or connectors, the contractor shall notify the architect/engineer in time to allow visual structural inspections by the Architect/Engineer for the multiple inspections required for Windstorm Certification by the Architect/Engineer. DO NOT COVER UP FASTENERS WITHOUT HAVING THEM REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE WINDSTORM ENGINEER. WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 0141 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Contractor shall furnish, upon completion, written confirmation that the installation and materials used for all components and cladding is in conformance with requirements of this section to the Windstorm Engineer. D. Re-inspection:The Windstorm Engineer will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the inspection list items from earlier inspections have been completed. 1. Upon completion of windstorm re-inspection, the Windstorm Engineer will notify the Contractor that the work being inspected complies with windstorm requirements. If the Work is incomplete, the Windstorm Engineer will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated one time for a total of three (3) inspections of the work in question. Additional re-inspections required due to Contractor's failure to complete the list of incomplete windstorm items will be billed to the Contractor at the Windstorm Engineer's customary billing rates for the personnel involved. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01 41 19 WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 0141 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 0142 00- REFERENCES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension,finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. 1. For standards referenced by applicable building codes,comply with dates of standards as listed in building codes. REFERENCES 0142 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Abbreviations and acronyms not included in this list shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."The information in this list is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC-Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA-American Architectural Manufacturers Association; (See FGIA). 3. AAPFCO-Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC-American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA-American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA-American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI -American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org. 9. ACPA-American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 10. AEIC-Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 11. AF&PA-American Forest& Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 12. AGA-American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 13. AHAM -Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 14. AHRI -Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 15. Al -Asphalt Institute;www.asphaltinstitute.org. 16. AIA-American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 17. AISC-American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 18. AISI -American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 19. AITC-American Institute of Timber Construction; www.plib.org. 20. AMCA-Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 21. ANSI -American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 22. AOSA-Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 23. APA-APA-The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 24. APA-Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 25. API -American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 26. ARI -Air-Conditioning& Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARI -American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 28. ARMA-Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASCE-American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). REFERENCES 0142 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 32. ASME-ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);www.asme.org. 33. ASSE-American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 34. ASSP-American Society of Safety Professionals (The); www.assp.org. 35. ASTM -ASTM International; www.astm.org. 36. ATIS-Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 37. AVIXA - Audiovisual and Integrated Experience Association; (Formerly: Infocomm International); www.avixa.org. 38. AWEA-American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 39. AWI -Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 40. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 41. AWPA-American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 42. AWS-American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 43. AWWA-American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 44. BHMA- Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 45. BIA- Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 46. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 47. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.org. 48. BISSC- Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 49. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bissc.org. 50. CDA-Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 51. CE -Conformite Europeenne; www.ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/ce-marking. 52. CEA-Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 53. CFFA-Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 54. CFSEI -Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 55. CGA-Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 56. CIMA-Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 57. CISCA-Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 58. CISPI -Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 59. CLFMI -Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 60. CPA-Composite Panel Association; www.compositepanel.org. 61. CRI -Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 62. CRRC-Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 63. CRSI -Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 64. CSA-CSA Group; www.csa-group.org. 65. CSI -Cast Stone Institute; www.caststone.org. 66. CSI -Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csiresources.org. 67. CSSB-Cedar Shake &Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 68. CTA-Consumer Technology Association; www.cta.tech. 69. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.coolingtechnology.org. 70. CWC- Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 71. DASMA- Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. REFERENCES 0142 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 72. DHA - Decorative Hardwoods Association; (Formerly: Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association); www.decorativehardwoods.org. 73. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 74. ECA- Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 75. ECAMA- Electronic Components Assemblies& Materials Association; (See ECIA). 76. ECIA- Electronic Components Industry Association; www.ecianow.org. 77. EIA- Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 78. EIMA- EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 79. EJMA- Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.eima.org. 80. EOS/ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 81. ESTA- Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 82. ETL- Intertek(See Intertek); www.intertek.com. 83. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 84. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 85. FGIA- Fenestration and Glazing Industry Alliance; https://fgiaonline.org. 86. FIBA- Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 87. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 88. FM Approvals- FM Approvals LLC; www.fmapprovals.com. 89. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 90. FRSA- Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 91. FSA- Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 92. FSC- Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 93. GA-Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 94. GANA-Glass Association of North America; (See NGA). 95. GS-Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 96. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 97. HI/GAMA- Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 98. HMMA- Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 99. HPVA- Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association; (See DHA). 100. IAPSC- International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 101. IAS- International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 102. ICBO- International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 103. ICC- International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 104. ICEA- Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 105. ICPA- International Cast Polymer Association; www.theicpa.com. 106. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 107. IEC- International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 108. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 109. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 110. IESNA- Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 111. IEST- Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 112. IGMA- Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; (See FGIA). 113. IGSHPA- International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.org. 114. II - Infocomm International; (See AVIXA). 115. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.;www.iliai.com. REFERENCES 0142 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 116. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 117. ISA-International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation,Systems,and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 118. ISAS- Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society(The); (See ISA). 119. ISFA-International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 120. ISO- International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 121. ISSFA- International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 122. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int. 123. KCMA- Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.l<cma.org. 124. LMA- Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 125. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 126. MBMA- Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 127. MCA- Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 128. MFMA- Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 129. MFMA- Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metaIframingmfg.org. 130. MHI - Material Handling Industry; www.mhi.org. 131. MIA- Marble Institute of America; (See NSI). 132. MMPA- Moulding& Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 133. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 134. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 135. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 136. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 137. NADCA- National Air Duct Cleaners Association;www.nadca.com. 138. NAIMA- North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.nadca.com. 139. NALP - National Association of Landscape Professionals; www.landscapeprofessionals.org. 140. NBGQA- National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgga.com. 141. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 142. NCAA- National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 143. NCMA- National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 144. NEBB- National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 145. NECA- National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 146. NeLMA- Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 147. NEMA- National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 148. NETA- International Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 149. NFHS- National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 150. NFPA- National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 151. NFPA- NFPA International; (See NFPA). 152. NFRC- National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 153. NGA - National Glass Association (The); (Formerly: Glass Association of North America); www.glass.org. 154. NHLA- National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 155. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 156. NOFMA- National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). REFERENCES 0142 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 157. NOMMA- National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 158. NRCA- National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 159. NRMCA- National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 160. NSF- NSF International; www.nsf.org. 161. NSI - National Stone Institute; (Formerly: Marble Institute of America); www.naturalstoneinstitute.org. 162. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 163. NSSGA- National Stone, Sand &Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 164. NTMA- National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 165. NWFA- National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 166. NWRA- National Waste & Recycling Association; www.wasterecVcling.org. 167. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 168. PDI - Plumbing& Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 169. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. 170. RCSC- Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 171. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 172. RIS- Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 173. SAE-SAE International; www.sae.org. 174. SCTE-Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 175. SDI -Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 176. SDI -Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 177. SEFA-Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 178. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 179. SIA-Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 180. SJI -Steel Joist Institute; www.steelioist.org. 181. SMA-Screen Manufacturers Association;www.smainfo.org. 182. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 183. SMPTE -Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 184. SPFA-Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.spraVfoam.org. 185. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 186. SPRI -Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 187. SRCC-Solar Rating& Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 188. SSINA-Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 189. SSPC-SSPC:The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 190. STI -Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 191. SWI -Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 192. SWPA-Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 193. TCA-Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 194. TCNA-Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 195. TEMA-Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 196. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 197. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). REFERENCES 0142 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 198. TMS-The Masonry Society; www.masonrVsociety.org. 199. TPI -Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 200. TPI -Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 201. TRI -Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 202. UL- Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 203. UL LLC- UL LLC; www.ul.com. 204. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 205. USAV- USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 206. USGBC- U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 207. USITT- United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 208. WA-Wallcoverings Association; www.wallcoverings.org. 209. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 210. WCMA-Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 211. WDMA-Window& Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 212. WI -Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org. 213. WSRCA-Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 214. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. IAPMO-International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC- International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICC-ES- ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE-Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC- Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD- Department of Defense; www.guicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE- Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA- Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA- Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA-General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD- Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA-Occupational Safety& Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD- Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB -Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies;www.trb.org. 15. USDA- Department of Agriculture;Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.a rs.usda.gov. 16. USDA- Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. REFERENCES 0142 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.oip.usdoi.gov. 18. USP- U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 19. USPS- United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.govinfo.gov. 2. DOD- Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.guicksearch.dla.mil. 3. DSCC- Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD- Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.guicksearch.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. C. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org. 6. MILSPEC- Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. TAS-Texas Accessibility Standards; https://www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/abtas.htm 8. USAB- United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 9. USATBCB- U.S.Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0142 00 REFERENCES 0142 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 0143 39 - MOCKUPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Integrated exterior mockups. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for quality assurance requirements for aesthetic and workmanship mockups specified in other Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope constructed on-site as freestanding temporary built elements, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting attachment and support details. 2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components, subassemblies, and assemblies. 3. Include site location drawing indicating orientation of mockup. 4. Revise and resubmit Shop Drawings to reflect approved modifications in details and component interfaces resulting from changes made during testing procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Build mockups to do the following: 1. Verify selections made under Sample submittals. 2. Demonstrate aesthetic effects. 3. Demonstrate the qualities of products and workmanship. 4. Demonstrate acceptable coordination between components and systems. 5. Perform preconstruction testing, such as window air-and water-leakage testing. B. Fabrication: Before fabricating or installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required. Use materials and installation methods as required for the Work. 1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers who will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction of the Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. MOCKUPS 0143 39-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. C. Notifications: 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 2. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be tested. 3. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. D. Approval: Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting fabrication or construction of corresponding Work. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate schedule for construction of mockups, so construction, testing, and review of mockups do not impact Project schedule. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INTEGRATED EXTERIOR MOCKUPS A. Construct integrated exterior mockups according to approved mockup Shop Drawings. Construct mockups to demonstrate constructability, coordination of trades, and sequencing of Work; and to ensure materials, components, subassemblies, assemblies, and interfaces integrate into a system complying with indicated performance and aesthetic requirements. B. Design and construct foundation and superstructure to support free-standing integrated exterior mockups. C. Build integrated exterior mockups using installers and construction methods that will be used in completed construction. D. Use specified products that have been approved by Architect. Coordinate installation of materials and products specified in individual Specification Sections that include Work included in integrated exterior mockups. E. The Work of integrated exterior mockups includes, but is not limited to,the following: 1. Masonry veneer. 2. Air and weather barriers. 3. Thermal insulation. 4. Through-wall flashing. 5. Flashing and sheet metal trim. 6. Joint sealants. 7. Metal wall panels. MOCKUPS 0143 39-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 8. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefront. F. Photographic Documentation: Document construction of integrated exterior mockups with photographs in accordance with Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." Provide photographs showing details of interface of different materials and assemblies. 1. Document testing procedures, including water leakage and other deficiencies. Photograph modifications to component interfaces intended to correct deficiencies. G. Provide and document modifications to construction details and interfaces between components and systems required to properly sequence the Work, or to pass performance testing requirements. Obtain Architect's approval for modifications. H. Retain approved mockups constructed in place. Incorporate fully into the Work. PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0143 39 MOCKUPS 0143 39-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 0160 00- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011100 "Summary of Work" for Contractor requirements related to Owner- furnished products. 2. Section 0123 10 "Alternates and Allowances" for products selected under an alternate and products selected under an allowance. 3. Section 00 72 00 "General Conditions" for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 0142 00 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 5. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Salvaged items or items reused from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured orfabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Comparable Product: Product by named manufacturer that is demonstrated and approved through the comparable product submittal process described in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. Published attributes and characteristics of basis-of-design product establish salient characteristics of products. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. D. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights to Owner. E. Action Submittals 1. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. a. Include data indicating compliance with the requirements specified in Part 2 "Comparable Products"Article. b. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 1S days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. 1) Form of Approval:As specified in Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." 2) Use of product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. 2. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: An action submittal complying with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Resolution of Compatibility Disputes between Multiple Contractors: a. Contractors are responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. b. If a dispute arises between the multiple contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products,Architect will determine which products shall be used. B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. C. Capacity. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 d. Speed. e. Ratings. 3. See individual identification Sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional equipment identification requirements. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of approved comparable products and approved substitutions. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment. 2. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 3. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 4. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation and with adequate protection from wind. 5. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to the extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written standard warranty form furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included in the Project Manual, prepare a written document, using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Components, materials or parts required to be supplied in quantity within a Section shall be of the same manufacturer,shall be interchangeable,and shall be the same with regard to function, texture, pattern and color. B. Except for building equipment in service area, no manufacturers' labels or name plates shall be visible on any component, unless required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Sole Product:Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for the Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for the Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or a product by an unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase"Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following." b. Provision of products of an unnamed manufacturer is not considered a substitution, if the product complies with requirements. 4. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications may additionally indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers,comply with requirements in Article 25 of 00 72 00 "General Conditions" for substitutions for convenience. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require the phrase "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. The Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: 1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 2. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 0173 00- EXECUTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner's portion of the Work. 6. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 7. Progress cleaning. 8. Starting and adjusting. 9. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011100 "Summary of Work" for coordination of Owner-furnished products, and limits on use of Project site. 2. Article 24 of 00 72 00 General Conditions for submitting surveys. 3. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning. 4. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. C. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor, certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. EXECUTION 0173 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, or when encountering the need for cutting and patching of elements whose structural function is not known, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.Shore,brace,and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire-suppression systems. C. Plumbing piping systems. d. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. e. Control systems. f. Communication systems. g. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. h. Electrical wiring systems. i. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. C. Equipment supports. d. Piping, ductwork,vessels, and equipment. e. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of specified products and equipment. EXECUTION 0173 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used,use materials that,when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. Use materials that are not considered hazardous. B. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas service piping, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work, including Specification Section number and paragraph, and Drawing sheet number and detail,where applicable. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. EXECUTION 0173 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Architect that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect in accordance with requirements in the Project Manual. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks and existing conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Engage a land surveyor experienced in laying out the Work, using the following accepted surveying practices: 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,grading,fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and EXECUTION 0173 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys,weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor,that principal metes, bounds, lines,and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording:At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." EXECUTION 0173 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated to remain exposed, arrange overhead systems in an orderly manner. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure satisfactory results as judged by Architect. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations, so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy of type expected for Project. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on-site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for Work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions with manufacturer. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings,templates,and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,concrete inserts, anchor bolts,and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed Work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect,as judged by Architect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. EXECUTION 0173 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. K. Protect adjacent property and adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of coatings, paints, sprayed fire-resistive material, and other spray-applied products. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces, including live plants and grass, if there is a possibility of spray-applied products being deposited on surfaces. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. E. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable,as judged by Architect. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections,where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even EXECUTION 0173 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 surface of uniform finish, color,texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch,corner to corner of wall and edge to edge of ceiling. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 COORDINATION OF OWNER'S PORTION OF THE WORK A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work.Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials for more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where Work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. EXECUTION 0173 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period.Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace them with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements." EXECUTION 0173 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 0173 00 EXECUTION 01 73 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 0177 00- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Related Requirements: 1. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Division 02 through 33. 2. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for project closeout meeting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. List of Incomplete Items: Contractor-prepared list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared for the Architect's use prior to Architect's inspection, to determine if the Work is substantially complete. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items required by other Sections. 1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's "punch list"), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 why the Work is incomplete. Comply with the General Conditions 9.8.2 Contractor (Punch List) comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. B. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. C. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction, permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including Project Record Documents,operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. D. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct the Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings as needed to fully explain each item or procedure. 6. Advise the Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with the Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. E. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests.On receipt of request,Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request the Architect's reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.8 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final, updated Application for Payment in accordance with Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements for the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 7. Submit Final Completion photographic documentation. B. Re-inspection: The Architect will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items that show completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated one time for a total of three (3) punch-list inspections, including the Substantial Completion punch-list. Additional re-inspections required due to Contractor's failure to complete the punch-list will be billed to the Contractor at the Architect's customary billing rates for the personnel involved. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.9 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1.10 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately.Where Shop Drawing are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Include with the Project Manual one (1) copy of other written construction document, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Not related record drawing information and Product Data. 4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one (1) copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Upon completion of the markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for Owner's records. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2 inch, 3-ring, vinyl- covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Submit a preliminary maintenance manual for review by the Architect before or with the 50%application for payment.Submit three (3)copies of the final maintenance manual prior to final acceptance of the project. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn-around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Contact names, addresses and telephone numbers for service and supplies. F. Electronic Submission Requirements: Provide 2 USB flash drives with electronic copies (PDF format) of all final submittals, shop drawings, product data, record drawings, record specifications and maintenance manuals. Organize electronic files to match submitted paper documents. 1.11 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion,or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 1. Submit to Architect on 2 USB flash drives. E. Warranties in Paper Form: 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning.Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Clean flooring, removing debris, dirt, and staining; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations. i. Vacuum and mop concrete. j. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. k. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. I. Remove labels that are not permanent. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. P. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA ACR. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. q. Clean luminaires, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. r. Clean strainers. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements of local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste-disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations required by Section 01 73 00 "Execution" before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 02 37 60- DRILLED FOOTINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Information concerning a sub-surface soil investigation by an independent testing laboratory is available and will be furnished by the Owner upon request. The data included therein may be used by the contractor for his general information only. The Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for the accuracy or applicability of the data therein. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Drilling Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment (including temporary casings where required) and shall install all piers at the locations and depths shown on the drawings or as otherwise directed by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. B. The Drilling Contractor shall furnish and place all reinforcing steel, dowels, and anchor bolts as shown on the drawings. C. The General Contractor shall provide all necessary excavation, sheeting and bracing or other adequate maintenance of excavation banks, suitable runways and ramps as necessary for access of pier drilling, control of ground and surface water as necessary to keep the work area sufficiently dry, suitable access roads for movement of equipment and materials to and from pier locations, field layout required for pier work including setting and maintaining a location stake for each pier and giving cut-off grades on all piers, removal and replacement of all overhead and underground obstructions as required, and coordination of all concrete ordering and delivery. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Drilled piers shall be installed by a specialty Drilling Contractor with suitable equipment, competent personnel, and a reputation of satisfactorily performing the work. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience and a minimum of 5 successful installations on projects of a similar size and scope to this project. Evidence of compliance with this section shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer prior to entering into a contract for the work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. Drilled Footings 02 37 60-1/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Codes and Specifications: The Drilling Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the following specifications: 1. "Standard Specification for End Bearing Drilled Piers", ACI 336.1, as published by the American Concrete Institute. 2. "Standards and Specifications for the Foundation Drilling Industry", as published by the Association of Drilled Shaft Contractors. In addition, all applicable building code and local regulations shall be followed. In case of conflict,the strictest interpretation shall govern. B. Survey Work: 1. The General Contractor shall employ a qualified surveyor to perform all surveys, layouts and measurements for drilled pier work. The surveyor shall conduct the layout work for each drilled pier to the lines and levels required prior to beginning excavation and shall make actual in-place measurements of each drilled pier plan location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations and deviations from specified tolerances. 2. The surveyor shall record and submit all information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with other testing and inspection personnel to provide data for all required reports. C. Testing Laboratory Requirements: The Drilling Contractor shall cooperate with all testing and inspection personnel employed to perform field quality control tests and inspections. See Testing Laboratory section of the specifications for required tests and inspections to be performed by the Testing Laboratory and Geotechnical Engineer. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Site Information: 1. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of continuity of such conditions. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. The data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 2. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Drilled Footings 02 37 60-2/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Contact Engineer immediately, if after demolition of existing building foundation, existing piers are found to conflict with new pier locations. B. Protection of Existing Structures: Protect structures, underground utilities and other construction from damage caused by drilling operations. C. Survey of Existing Structures: Record and report to Architect/Engineer surveyed elevation bench marks on structures where directed by Architect/Engineer before commencing work, when structures are adjacent to drilling operations. Record and report elevation of each bench mark at least twice a day while drilling is in progress. Should bench mark readings indicate displacement, halt drilling operations until corrective action has been provided and is acceptable to Architect/Engineer and Owner. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Concrete Mix Design: Submit concrete mix designs suitable for method of concrete placement for Engineer and Testing Laboratory approval prior to pier installation. B. Drilling Records: The Drilling Contractor and the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer or other authorized inspector shall each submit copies of the drilling record for each pier to the Architect/Engineer immediately after drilling. The reports shall indicate the name of the job, name of Drilling Contractor, and name of drilling superintendent. For each pier installed,the report shall indicate the following information: 1. Pier number and location 2. Pier shaft diameter 3. Bottom elevation 4. Top elevation 5. Pier length 6. Theoretical volume of concrete in pier 7. Actual volume of concrete placed 8. Reinforcing steel size and depth actually placed 9. Drilling start and finish time 10. Concreting start and finish time 11. Variation from specified tolerances including location and plumbness 12. Construction method (dry method or casing method) 13. Groundwater conditions (rate of water infiltration and depth of water in hole prior to concreting for dry piers; water elevation in hole for wet piers) Drilled Footings 02 37 60-3/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 14. Description and elevation of any obstructions encountered and whether removal was obtained 15. Description of pier bottom including amount and extent of loose material 16. Method of concrete placement 17. Any difficulties encountered in drilling or concreting operations 18. Any deviations from specifications Reports prepared by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer or authorized inspector shall be compiled and signed by a registered Texas professional engineer. Reports prepared by the Drilling Contractor shall be compiled and signed by the drilling superintendent. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Submit shop drawings for all drilled pier reinforcing steel. 2. Installation Method: Submit detailed procedures of the installation method, including (where applicable) type and number of drilling rigs and equipment, casing size and length, casing removal method, drilling fluid type, dewatering method, concrete placement, and reinforcing steel securing and placement. D. Post Construction Survey: After completion of pier construction, the Contractor shall provide the Architect/Engineer with an as-built survey showing the actual locations of the piers at cut-off elevations. This survey shall show the plumbness of vertical piers and all abandoned piers and their replacements. No construction of superstructures shall commence until this survey has been reviewed and accepted by the Architect/Engineer. In order to facilitate the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall submit partial pier surveys for approval as the Work proceeds. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE Concrete shall be as specified in the "Cast-in-Place Concrete" section of the specifications and on the drawings, with the additional requirements specified below: A. Maximum Aggregate Size: Provide maximum aggregate size of three quarters of minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars, with 1-1/2 inch maximum. B. Air Entraining Admixture: Drilled Footings 02 37 60-4/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Use air entraining admixtures in concrete at manufacturers prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having 4%to 6%air content. C. Water Reducing Admixtures: Where required by mix design, use water reducing admixtures in strict compliance with manufacturers directions. Admixtures to increase cement dispersion, or provide increased workability for low-slump concrete may be used at contractor's option. Use admixtures in the amounts as recommended by manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at time of placing concrete. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. D. Slump Limits: Proportion concrete to have a slump that is suitable for the placement process used. Provide a minimum 7-inch slump concrete with retarder for cased piers at time of pulling casing. 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL See "Concrete Reinforcing Steel" section of the specifications. 2.3 STEEL CASING A. Steel casing shall conform to ASTM A 252, Grade 2 or A 36. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94. B. Hot Weather Concreting: The maximum acceptable concrete temperature at the truck discharge point shall be 95°F. Refer to Hot Weather Concreting Practices specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete" section of the specifications for required hot weather concreting practices. C. Cold Weather Concreting Practices: Concrete should not be placed on any day when the outside air temperature is 40°F or less and falling unless cold weather concreting practices are followed as specified in the "Cast-in-Place Concrete" section of the specifications. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION Drilled Footings 02 37 60-5/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Requirements: Excavate holes for drilled piers to the required bearing strata or elevation as shown on the drawings unless directed otherwise in the field by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. Excavate holes for closely spaced piers and those occurring in fragile or sand stratas only after adjacent holes are filled with concrete and allowed to set a minimum of 6 hours or longer as required for concrete to harden. Drilled pier design dimensions and depths shown on the drawings shall be considered minimums. The design of drilled piers is based on bearing and/or friction in assumed strata. If bearing stratum is not capable of maintaining capacity assumed, foundation system shall be revised as directed by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer and Architect/Engineer. Revisions will be paid for in accordance with contract conditions relative to changes in the work. B. Equipment: 1. Provide adequate equipment so work is expedited to the fullest extent possible. Use equipment fully capable of excavating shafts to depths, diameters, and sizes indicated, and within the specified tolerances. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and provide sufficient quantity of equipment to maintain the projected schedule of the Work. 2. Using bits or augers with a power-driven rotary-type rig, a shaft of a diameter specified on the drawings shall be excavated from the ground surface to a depth as specified on the drawings or as ordered by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. C. Obstructions: 1. If rocks, boulders, or other unforeseen obstructions are encountered which cannot be removed by standard drilled pier excavation methods, and if such obstructions are not indicated by available sub-surface data, removal of such obstructions will be paid for in accordance with the terms of the Contract relative to changes in the Work. 2. Remove such obstructions by hand labor using air-powered tools or by other safe methods recognized in the construction industry. Standard drilled pier excavation methods include the use of core barrels with pier drilling equipment. 3. The work of this Section includes demolition and removal of rock, boulders, concrete, masonry, and other subsurface obstructions which are indicated by the Contract Documents, or by the available subsurface exploration data, and such work will not be considered a change in the Work. Drilled Footings 02 37 60-6/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Overexcavation: No payment will be made for extra length of drilled piers when they are installed to a greater depth than required or as authorized by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. Overexcavated drilled piers will be measured and paid for in accordance with the original design or authorized depth. E. Excavated Material: 1. Remove excavated material and dispose of it off site. 3.2 DRILLING METHOD The following drilling methods may be considered for use on this project: A. Dry Method: The excavation shall be made using bits or augers without the use of water or drilling mud. Unless rock or obstructions are encountered,the excavation shall be completed in a continuous operation and the concrete shall be placed immediately prior to completing the day's work. When casing conditions are encountered or where excess water begins seeping into the hole at a rate greater than 1/4 inch rise per minute in the bottom of the shaft, no further drilling will be allowed until the Drilling Contractor selects a method of placement to prevent ground movement and/or water flow. B. Casing Method: Where caving conditions are encountered or excess water seeps into the excavation greater than acceptable for a dry pier as specified above, the Drilling Contractor shall use a temporary casing placed by an appropriate means. The casing shall be sealed in a stratum of soil that will not cave or admit excessive water. The pier excavation shall then be completed in the approved soil stratum. Vibratory methods of casing placement and removal shall not damage surrounding structures or previously placed piers. C. Dewatering Method: When ground water conditions are encountered such that a temporary casing can not be installed in an impervious stratum to cut off water infiltration, a dewatering system shall be installed which will permit proper excavation, inspection, and concreting of the shaft. Should the dewatering system employed involve pumping inside the pier, extreme caution shall be used to prevent an unbalanced water head from causing a "blowout", Drilled Footings 02 37 60-7/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 bottom heave, or "quick" condition that could disturb the proposed bearing stratum or surrounding soil strata. The dewatering method shall be submitted for review and approval of the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. The Drilling Contractor's bid price shall include installation of all drilled piers as shown on the drawings by whatever method is required to obtain the final result intended. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Plan Location: The tolerance on plan location for the top of the drilled pier shall not be more than 1/24 of the pier diameter or 3" in any direction, whichever is less. B. Plumbness: Permissible tolerance for plumbness shall be 1.0% of the length, 123 of the shaft diameter, or 15" at the bottom, whichever is less. C. Bottom Area: The bottom of the pier shall be essentially horizontal with the area of the bottom bearing not less than 98%of that specified on the drawings. D. Top Area: The Contractor shall remove excess concrete at the top of the pier beyond the limits of the pier diameter. The pier top diameter shall be the same diameter as the shaft below. Piers extending above the ground surface shall be formed. E. Concrete Cut-Off Elevation: Concrete cut-off elevation at the pier top shall be plus one inch to minus three inches. F. If any of the above tolerances are exceeded, the Engineer shall immediately be notified to evaluate the eccentricity in the pier and recommend corrective measures. The cost of re-engineering and corrective construction shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.4 INFILTRATION OF GROUNDWATER A. Dry Pier: Water rise at a rate of less than 1/4 inch per minute at the bottom of the pier shall be considered a dry pier and concrete may be placed by buckets, chutes, or trunks in such a Drilled Footings 02 37 60-8/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 manner so as not to cause segregation. The total height of water in the bottom of the pier shall not exceed two inches at the time of concrete placement. B. Wet Pier: Infiltration of groundwater exceeding 1/4 inch per minute at the bottom of the shaft shall be considered a wet pier and concrete shall be placed by an approved tremie method. C. Dewatering: Provide and maintain pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water before placing concrete. If excessive water is encountered and drilling operations must be halted, consult with Architect/Engineer before using alternate methods of construction. Conduct water to general site run-off ditches and disposal areas with discharge lines. Provide ditching as required to conduct water to site drainage facilities. 3.5 TEMPORARY STEEL CASINGS A. Requirement: Temporary casings will be required at locations where the soil will not stand without support or where, because of ground water subsurface conditions, sloughing of the sides of shafts may seriously delay or endanger the satisfactory completion of excavation and placement of concrete. The Contractor shall have immediately available for use on the job an ample supply of casing for each size which will be required for use in the shafts and shall provide additional amounts, if required, to ensure orderly progress of the job. Such casing may be in short pieces but with jointing devices of sufficient strength that assembled sections of casing may be pulled complete as concrete is placed, or immediately thereafter. Provide casing of sufficient strength to withstand handling stresses, concrete pressure, and surrounding earth and/or fluid pressures. Make diameter of excavation in relation to diameter of casing such as to create a minimum of void space outside of casing. Provide casing with a minimum outside diameter equal to nominal outside diameter of drilled foundations. B. All temporary casing shall be removed from shafts as concrete is placed or immediately thereafter, and in such a manner as to prevent sloughing material from dropping to the bottoms of shafts or falling on top of freshly placed concrete. 3.6 REINFORCING STEEL PLACEMENT A. Before placing, clean reinforcing steel and dowels of loose rust, scale, dirt, grease and other material which could reduce or destroy bond. B. Fabricate and erect reinforcing cages in shafts as one continuous unit using inner ring reinforcing guide. Place reinforcement accurately and symmetrically about axis of hole and hold securely in position during concrete placement. The Contractor shall verify depths of drilled piers prior to cutting and tying reinforcing steel cages. Reinforcing Drilled Footings 02 37 60-9/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 steel shall be delivered to the site in standard 60 foot lengths and cut as required. Splice no more than 50% of the bars at any one location alternating spliced and unspliced bars in a symmetrical pattern. Splices shall be 30 bar diameter compression splices for bars #11 and smaller unless noted otherwise on the drawings. See drawings for additional splice information. The Contractor shall be responsible for adding additional reinforcing steel ties or spirals as required to ensure stability of cage and maintenance of shape and configuration as required for proper lifting, handling, and placement. C. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates and other accessories furnished under work of other sections. Provide spacers (capable of sliding on any temporary casings required), blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during concrete placement. D. The General Contractor shall protect exposed ends of dowels and anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather by wrapping and taping with polyethylene or other suitable material. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Fill drilled piers with concrete immediately after inspection and approval by the Geotechnical Engineer or other authorized inspector. Use protection sheets (cut out to receive concrete) over excavation openings, extending at least 12" beyond edge. 2. Place concrete continuously and in a smooth flow without segregating the mixed materials. Provide mechanical vibration for consolidation of at least top five feet of each shaft but only after any temporary casing is pulled or when casing is permanent. 3. Place concrete by means of bottom discharge bucket, flexible drop chute, elephant trunk hopper, or tremie. Free fall of concrete may be used if provided for in concrete mix design and provided it is directed through a hopper or chute such that fall is down center of shaft without hitting sides or reinforcing steel. 4. Place concrete in-the-dry unless placing underwater is acceptable to Architect/Engineer. If water occurs, and it is impracticable to dewater drilled pier excavation, and reasonable attempts to seal off water flow have failed, allow water level to attain its normal level and place concrete by tremie method. Control placement operations to ensure that tremie is not broken during continuous placing from bottom to top. Other methods of depositing concrete underwater may be used, if approved by Architect/Engineer. 5. Maintain a sufficient head of concrete to prevent reduction in diameter of drilled pier shaft by earth pressure and to prevent extraneous material from Drilled Footings 02 37 60-10/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 mixing with fresh concrete. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement operations to maintain a head of concrete approximately five feet above casing bottom. During casing extraction upward movement of the reinforcing steel should not exceed 6". Downward movement should not exceed 6" per 20 feet of shaft length. When casing is left in place, fill void space between casing and shaft excavation with fluid grout by means of grout pipe and pump pressure as required. 6. Casings shall be pulled in a single continuous smooth operation without sudden jerks or impact. No casing shall be vibrated after concrete is installed. 7. Stop concrete placement at cut-off elevation shown, screed level, and apply a scoured, rough finish. Where cut-off elevation is above ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation. 8. Interrupted placing operations of over one hour duration will require a cold joint installation as follows. Leave resulting shaft surface approximately level. At resumption of concrete placing, clean off surface laitance, roughen as required, and slush with a 1-to-1 cement grout or commercial bonding agent before remainder of concrete is placed. Intentional cold joints will not be permitted. 9. Concrete shall not be placed in piers located within three center to center shaft diameters of each other until concrete has cured minimum of 6 hours. B. Hot and Cold Weather Placement: Refer to Part II. 3.8 APPROVAL BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER Approval by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer is required on all pier installation criteria and his decision and judgment on pier length, rejection of piers, additional piers required, and all other pier installation and capacity questions shall be final. 3.9 CONTRACT BASIS A. Basis of Bids: Bids shall be based on number of drilled piers, design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft (extended through the bell, if applicable), and diameter of shaft and bell, as shown on drawings. The bid price shall include cost for temporary casing of excavation that may be required. B. Basis for Payment: Payment for drilled piers will be made on actual net volume of drilled piers in place and accepted. The actual length and shaft diameter, and bell diameter (if applicable) may Drilled Footings 02 37 60-11/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 vary to coincide with elevation where satisfactory bearing strata is encountered, and with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by testing services, and with stability and characteristics of soil strata. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts. 1. There will be no additional compensation for excavation, concrete fill, reinforcing, casings, or other costs due to unauthorized overexcavating shafts. Overexcavated piers will be measured and paid for in accordance with required design or authorized depth. No payment will be made for rejected drilled piers. 2. Prices quoted shall include full compensation for labor, temporary casing, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete, and other items for complete installation. C. Unit Prices: Unit prices for the following items, as set forth in contract conditions, will apply in event additions to or deductions from work are required and authorized by written order from Architect/Engineer to Contractor. Soil excavation (including temporary casing if required) per cu. yd. Rock excavation per cu.yd. Temporary steel casings, installed per lin.ft. Reinforcing steel and dowels, installed per lb. Concrete per cu.yd. END OF SECTION 02 37 60 Drilled Footings 02 37 60-12/12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected landscape areas, plantings and irrigation. 2. Demolition and removal of designated areas of concrete curbs and gutters, concrete sidewalks and asphalt pavement. 3. Demolition and removal of wood and chain link fencing and stone fence posts. 4. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Commemorative dedication plaques and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner or incorporate into the new work as indicated on the drawings. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings,that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property,for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity. C. Predemolition photographs or video. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. F. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSP A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. B. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 1 hours after flame-cutting operations. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 03 10 00-CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work of this section includes all labor, materials and equipment required to form all cast-in- place concrete shown on the drawings including but not limited to all slabs,joists, beams, walls, stairs, and equipment pads. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS Comply with the provision of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: A. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" B. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice" D. ACI SP-4"Formwork for Concrete" In addition, all formwork shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained as a minimum according to ACI Standard 347 "Guide to Formwork". 1.4 RESPONSIBILITY The design, construction and safety of all formwork shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. The Contractor shall also be responsible for determining when temporary supports, shores, backshores, and other bracing may be safely removed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS FOR EXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Unless otherwise specified, formwork for exposed concrete surfaces shall consist of plywood, metal, metal framed plywood, or other acceptable surface. Formwork shall provide a continuous straight and smooth surface conforming to the joint system as specified on the Architect's drawings. Form material shall have sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of concrete without bow or deflection. Plywood shall be overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Concrete Formwork 03 10 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form", Class I, or plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. 2.2 FORMS FOR UNEXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Unless otherwise specified, formwork for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.3 FORMWORK COATINGS Formwork coatings shall be a commercial formulation that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces or impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede curing with water or curing compounds. Provide a product that has a maximum VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) of 350 mg/I but not greater than permitted by the local government agency having jurisdiction in the area where the project is located. 2.4 NAILS AND FASTENERS Use only galvanized nails and fasteners for securing formwork in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces such as garages, canopies and porte-cocheres. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in- place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast Concrete Formwork 03 10 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and patch forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is 1 1/2" inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. Provide only galvanized form ties in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces. H. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 3.2 CLEANING AND TIGHTENING Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and all other debris just prior to concrete placement. Retighten forms and bracing prior to concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 CLEANING AND RE-USE OF FORMS Forms reused in the work shall be repaired and cleaned. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Forms intended for successive concrete placement shall have surfaces cleaned, fins and laitance removed, and joints tightened to avoid surface offsets. New form coating compound shall be applied to reused forms. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.4 TOLERANCES Concrete Formwork 03 10 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Unless specified otherwise, all tolerances for concrete formwork shall conform to ACI Standard 117, "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials". Before concrete placement the Contractor shall check lines and levels of erected formwork and make any corrections and adjustments as required to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems. During concrete placement the Contractor shall check formwork and supports to ensure that forms have not displaced and that completed work will be within specified tolerances. 3.5 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. Definitions 1. Shores: Vertical or inclined support members designed to carry the weight of formwork, concrete, and construction loads above. 2. Reshores: Shores placed snugly under a stripped concrete structural member after the original forms and shores have been removed from the member, thus requiring the member to carry its own weight and superimposed construction loads at the time of installation. Reshores are assumed to carry no load at the time of installation. After the installation of reshores, superimposed construction loads are assumed to be distributed among all members connected by reshores. 3. Backshores: Shores placed snugly under a stripped concrete structural member after the original formwork and shores have been removed from a small area without allowing the structural member to deflect or support its own weight or superimposed construction loads. It is assumed that backshores carry the same load as that carried by the original shores they replace. Comply with ACI 347 for shoring, reshoring and backshoring in concrete construction and as herein specified where more stringent: B. Structures with Three Supported Levels or Less: Extend shoring from soil supported slab or suitable subgrade to uppermost level for structures with three structurally supported levels or less. 3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS A. Curing and Stripping Concrete Cylinders: The General Contractor shall be responsible for making and curing stripping concrete cylinders, cured under field conditions, for the purpose of determining concrete strength at time of form and shore removal. Such cylinders shall be made by the Contractor and tested by his testing laboratory. Concrete Formwork 03 10 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Formwork Not Supporting Concrete: Formwork not supporting concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the structure, may be removed after cumulatively (not necessarily consecutively) curing at not less than 507 for 12 hours after placing concrete, provided the concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. If ambient air temperatures remain below 507 or if retarding agents are used, then this specified minimum period should be increased as required to safely remove the forms without damage to the concrete. Where such forms also support formwork for slab or beam soffits,the removal times of the latter shall govern. END OF SECTION 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 03 10 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 03 20 00-CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work of this section includes labor, materials, hardware, equipment, transportation and services required to fabricate and place all reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete including bars, welded wire fabric,ties and supports shown on the drawings and as specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with all provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 315, "ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice". 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Placing Reinforcing Bars." 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings and samples for all reinforcing steel and related accessories shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. B. Shop Drawings shall show layout, bending and assembly diagrams, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, splicing and laps of bars and shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315. 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION Perform all tests and inspections specified in Laboratory Testing Section of these specifications. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Reinforcement: 1. Reinforcing Steel: All reinforcing steel shall conform to the " Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement," ASTM A615 Grade 60 unless noted otherwise on the drawings. All reinforcing steel required to be welded shall conform to ASTM A 706 "Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". 2. Tie Wire: Tie wire shall be annealed steel tie wire, minimum 16 gauge. Provide only plastic coated or stainless steel tie wire in exposed concrete structures and all architectural concrete. B. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners. 2.2 SPLICES A. Splice Type and Lap Lengths: Required splice type and lap lengths are defined on the drawings. Lap splice lengths for unscheduled bars not shown otherwise on the drawings shall be 40 bar diameters minimum. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND DELIVERY A. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated sizes and accurately form to shapes and lengths indicated and required, by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bars with kinks or bends not scheduled will be rejected. B. Marking and Shipping: Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting and placing. Transport and store at site so as not to damage material. Keep sufficient supply of tested, approved and proper reinforcement at the site to avoid delays. Maintain reinforcing bars free of mud, dirt, grease, or other coating. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Before placing and again before concrete is placed, clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Exercise particular care to maintain proper distance and clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Provide metal spreaders and spacers to hold steel in position. Support steel at proper height upon approved chairs. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Coordinate with other trades and expedite materials and labor to avoid omissions and delay. F. Install waterproof membrane or moisture barrier as specified prior to placing steel for concrete slabs-on-grade. G. Extend reinforcement continuous through construction joints or, if approved on the shop drawings, provide dowels of sufficient length to develop the full tension or compression strength of the bar as applicable. H. Provide and place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings in beams, slabs and walls as specified on the drawings. Where reinforcement is interrupted by sleeves or openings not shown on the drawings, consult with Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars. Provide required additional reinforcing steel at no additional cost to the Owners. 3.3 REINFORCING STEEL SPACING AND COVERAGE A. Reinforcing Steel Coverage Reinforcing steel coverage should conform to the requirements specified in the General Notes. Cover specified shall be considered minimums that may require increasing where reinforcing steel intersects for different member types. Cover in structural members not specified in the General Notes shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318-08 Section 7.7 unless specified otherwise on the drawings. B. Reinforcing Steel Spacing: Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The clear distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be not less than the bar diameter nor 1". Where parallel reinforcement is placed in 2 or more layers, bars in the upper layer shall be placed directly above bars in the lower layer with clear distance between layers of not less than 1". 3.4 SPLICING REINFORCING STEEL A. All lap splices in reinforcing steel shall be contact lap splices unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. B. Maintain proper cover between reinforcing bars at splices. C. Lap unscheduled reinforcing bars not otherwise specified a minimum of 40 bar diameters at splices. Lap welded wire fabric a minimum of one full wire mesh plus two inches. 3.5 SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE REINFORCEMENT Provide shrinkage and temperature reinforcement at right angles to main top and bottom bars for all structural slabs unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. See drawings for sizes and spacings. 3.6 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Refer to Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings for formed concrete requiring reinforcing steel. Such reinforcement shall be furnished as part of the work of this section. 3.7 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION See Testing Laboratory Services section of these specifications for concrete reinforcement inspection and test requirements. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 03 30 00-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of concrete work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and details which show size and location of members and type of concrete to be poured. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and hardware required in conjunction with or related to the forming, delivery and pouring of all poured-in-place concrete work. B. Architectural Concrete is specified in other Division-3 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 - "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 302 - "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction". 3. ACI 304 - "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 4. ACI 305 - "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 5. ACI 306- "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 6. ACI 318- "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". B. Document Precedence: In case of conflict among documents, including architectural and structural drawings and specifications, notify the Architect prior to submitting proposal. In case of conflict between the structural drawings and specifications, the strictest interpretation shall govern. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at any time during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. See Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-1 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, hardeners, sealers and others as requested by Architect/Engineer. B. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified if requested by Architect/ Engineer, including names, sources and descriptions. C. Laboratory Test Reports and Mix Designs: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix designs as specified in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. D. Material and Mill Certificates: Provide material and mill certificates as specified herein and in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. Material and mill certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements. E. Construction Joints: There shall be no construction joints for slab on grade, structural floors or columns where they are not indicated on the drawings. 1.5 PROVISION FOR OTHER WORK Provide for installation of inserts, hangers, metal ties, anchors, bolts, angle guards, dowels, thimbles, slots, nailing strips, blocking, grounds and other fastening devices required for attachment of work. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is poured. Do not install sleeves in any concrete slabs, beams or columns except where shown on the drawings or upon written approval of the Architect/Engineer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS Refer to the drawings for classes and strengths of concrete required. A. Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, unless otherwise approved by the Architect/Engineer. Use one brand of cement, for each class of concrete, throughout the project, unless approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer and the Testing Laboratory. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. C. Water: Clean,fresh, drinkable, free of oils, acids or organic matter. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-2 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 260. Provide air entrainment in all concrete used for vehicular traffic and parking or concrete permanently exposed to the weather as specified in Table 4.5.1 of ACI 318. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 494, Type A. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. F. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. G. Water-Reducing, Accelerator Admixture (Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride): ASTM C 494, Type C or E. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. H. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. I. Specification for Pozzolan Admixtures: Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures may be used provided they conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and/or Calcined Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement Concrete", ASTM C 618 Class C or F. Fly ash replacement of cement shall not exceed 20% (one part fly ash max. to four parts cement) by weight. Fly ash may not be used in architecturally exposed concrete. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. J. Admixtures containing Chloride Ions: Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in concrete containing galvanized or aluminum embedments, concrete containing high early strength cement (Type III), or concrete exposed to sulfate containing solutions such as soils with a water soluble sulfate content more than 0.20 percent by weight and all water with a sulfate content more than 1500 parts per million. Admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions shall not be permitted. The maximum chloride ion content in concrete for corrosion protection shall be as follows: Max. Water Soluble Chloride Ion in Concrete Type of Member of Cement at 28 Days, % by weight Reinforced Concrete and other structures, which may be exposed to chloride in service 0.15 Reinforced Concrete in buildings and other structures that will Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-3 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 be dry or protected from moisture in service 1.00 All other reinforced concrete construction 0.30 The Contractor shall have the Concrete Supplier verify in a written submittal to the Architect/Engineer and Testing Laboratory that the chloride ion content in all concrete mix designs used on the project will not exceed limits stated above. K. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05%chloride ions are not permitted. L. Certification: Written conformance to the above mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of the admixture will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Engineer. 2.2 RELATED MATERIALS A. Waterstops: Provide waterstops at all construction joints and other joints in all foundation walls below grade and where shown on the drawings. Size to suit joints. 1. Rubber waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513. 2. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 3. Preformed Plastic Waterstops: Federal Specifications SS-S-210A "Sealing Compound for Expansion Joints". B. Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where indicated. Use only materials, which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 154. C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Complying with ANSI/ASTM C 171: E. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory- graded, packaged, rust-proof and non-glazing, and is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. F. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Packaged, dry, combination of materials, consisting of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments (if required) and plasticizing admixtures. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, non-fading mineral oxides, interground with cement. Color, as selected by Architect, unless Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-4 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 otherwise indicated. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. G. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane forming curing compound complying with ANSI/ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. H. Chemical Curing/Floor Hardener Compound: A clear liquid chemically acting compound of sodium silicate that performs as a curing agent with a penetrating compound that changes the free lime in the concrete to calcium silicate, resulting in a surface having a maximum abrasion coefficient of 0.25 cm3/cm2 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 118. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. I. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lb. of fluosilicates per gal. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. J. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type for use in cosmetic nonstructural repairs. K. Epoxy Products: Two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surface, complying with ASTM C 881, for use in all structural concrete repairs. L. Self-Leveling Mortars for Slab Fill Repair: M. Expansion Bolts in Concrete: 1. ICBO Approval: Only concrete anchors approved by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) with a published Research Report shall be approved for use. 2. Type: All expansion bolts in concrete shall be only wedge type expansion bolts. 3. Interior Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in interior conditioned environments free of potential moisture shall be manufactured from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z- 325C,Type II, Class 3. 4. Exterior or Exposed Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in exposed or potentially wet environments, or for attachment of exterior cladding materials shall be galvanized or stainless steel. Galvanized bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A 153. Stainless steel bolts shall be manufactured from 300 series stainless steel and nuts and washers from 300 series or Type 18-8 stainless steel. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-5 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 5. Nuts and Washers: Nuts and washers shall be furnished from the manufacturer and used with the bolts. N. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Type: Grout for base plates and bearing plates shall be a non-metallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing Portland cement, silica sands, shrinkage compensating agents and fluidity improving compounds. 2. Specifications: Non-shrink grout shall conform to Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout, CRD-C621-83. 3. Compressive Strength: Twenty-eight day compressive strength as determined by grout cube tests, shall be: a. 6,000 PSI for supporting concrete 3000 psi and less. b. 8,000 PSI for supporting concrete greater than 3000 psi and less than or equal to 4000 psi. C. 10,000 PSI for supporting concrete greater than 4000 psi. 2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Refer to Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXES A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, "Ready Mixed Concrete" and Testing Laboratory section of the specifications. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTS IN CONCRETE A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the drawings or if not shown on drawings, located so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer. 1. Place construction joints in the center one third of spans unless specified otherwise. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. Submit construction joint locations not shown on the drawings for Engineer's approval. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-6 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 2. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated on the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.3 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean reused forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. C. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. C. Comply with ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete, and as herein specified. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-7 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation. 2. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 3. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309 recommended practices. 4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. 5. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 6. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 7. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use highway straightedges, bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 8. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 3.5 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: Provide rough form finish for formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: Provide smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces exposed- to-view or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-8 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Grout Cleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix with water to consistency of thick paint. Proprietary additives may be used at Contractor's option. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerance specified below. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. After screeding, consolidating and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power- driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance as specified below. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-9 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a level surface to a tolerance as specified below. Grind smooth surface defects, which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin- set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified above, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. E. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to ramps less than 6% exterior concrete platforms, steps and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. F. Rake Finish: Provide a rake finish to all ramps exceeding a 6% slope. Finish shall be applied perpendicular to direction of traffic. G. Chemical-Hardener Finish: Apply chemical-hardener finish to interior concrete floors where indicated. Apply liquid chemical-hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water (parts of hardener/water as follows), and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3-strength; second coat, 1/2-strength; third coat, 2/3-strength. Evenly apply each coat and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. Apply proprietary chemical hardeners, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. After final coat of chemical-hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water. H. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Apply non-slip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps and elsewhere as indicated on the Architect's or Structural Drawings. After completion of float finishing, and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lb. of dampened non-slip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose non-slip aggregate. I. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Provide colored wear-resistant finish to monolithic slab surface indicated. Apply dry shake materials for colored wear-resistant finish at rate of not less than 60 lbs. per 100 sq. ft., unless greater amount is recommended by material manufacturer. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-10 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 Immediately following first floating operation, uniformly distribute approximately 2/3 of required weight of dry shake material over concrete surface, and embed by means of power floating. Follow floating operation with second shake application, uniformly distributing remainder of dry shake material at right angles to first application, and embed by power floating. After completion of broadcasting and floating, apply trowel finish as herein specified. Cure slab surface with curing compound recommended by dry shake hardener manufacturer, waiting up to time period as required by the manufacturer(depending on humidity and drying) before application. Do not use moisture-cover or moisture curing methods. 3.7 CONCRETE FINISH MEASUREMENT AND TOLERANCES A. Definitions: 1. Flatness-A measure of a concrete surfaces curvature or deviation from a planar surface. Concrete surfaces that are not flat are wavy or bumpy. 2. Levelness -A measure of a concrete surfaces tilt or inclination from a horizontal plane. Concrete surfaces that are not level are sloped or tilted. B. Construction Requirements to Achieve Specified Floor Finish Tolerances: 1. Forms shall be properly leveled, in good condition and securely anchored including special attention to ends and transitions. 2. Bearing surfaces for straightedges such as form edges or previously poured slabs shall be kept clean of laitance, sand, gravel, or other foreign elements. 3. Screeds shall be maintained in good condition with true round rolling wheels and level cutting edges. The use of optical sighting equipment such as lasers is recommended for checking levelness and straightness. The Contractor shall promptly adjust or replace equipment when test results indicate substandard work. C. Concrete Floor Finish Tolerance for Slab-on-Grade Construction: 1. Concrete Placement: Concrete shall be placed and screeded to predetermined marks set to elevations prescribed on the drawings. 2. Tolerance: Finished floor elevation shall not vary more than % inch in 10 feet, non cumulative. D. Remedial Measures for Slab Finish Construction Not Meeting Specified Tolerances: 1. Modification of Existing Surface: Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-11 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 a. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, all or any portion of the substandard work can be repaired without sacrifice to the appearance or serviceability of the area, then the Contractor shall immediately undertake the approved repair method. b. The Contractor shall submit for review and approval a detailed work plan of the proposed repair showing areas to be repaired, method of repair and time to effect the repair. C. Repair method(s), at the sole discretion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, may include grinding (floor stoning), planing, retopping with self leveling grout or polymer concrete, or any combination of the above. d. The Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative maintains the right to require a test repair section using the approved method of repair for review and approval to demonstrate a satisfactory end product. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, the repair is not satisfactory an alternate method of repair shall be submitted or the defective area shall be replaced. e. The judgment of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative on the appropriateness of a repair method and its ability to achieve the desired end product shall be final. f. All repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner and with no extension to the construction schedule. 2. Removal and Replacement: a. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, all or any portion of the substandard work cannot be satisfactorily repaired without sacrifice to the appearance or serviceability of the area, then the Contractor shall immediately commence to remove and replace the defective work. b. Replacement section boundaries shall be made to coincide with the test section boundaries as previously defined. C. Sections requiring replacement shall be removed by sawcutting along the section boundary lines to provide a neat clean joint between new replacement floor and existing floor. d. The new section shall be reinforced the same as the removed section and doweled into the existing floor as required by the Engineer. No existing removed reinforcing steel may be used. All reinforcing steel shall be new steel. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-12 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 e. Replacement sections may be retested for compliance at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative. f. The judgment of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative on the need for replacement shall be final. g. All replacement work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner and with no extension to the construction schedule. 3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of concrete. 2. Curing shall commence as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. The curing period shall be 7 days for all concrete except high early strength concrete, which shall be cured for 3 days minimum, unless test cylinders, made and kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods, are tested with the average compressive strength equal to 70% of the specified 28 day strength. Curing may also be terminated when the temperature of the concrete is maintained at least 507 for the same length of time that laboratory cured cylinders, representative of the concrete in place, require to achieve 85% of the 28 day compressive strength. 3. Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of all concrete horizontal and vertical surfaces (including columns, shear walls and basement walls) by one of the methods specified or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. The Contractor shall choose a curing method that is compatible with the requirements for subsequent material usage on the concrete surface. Parking garages shall be cured using only methods 1 or 2 below. 1. Provide moisture curing by one of the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-13 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing/hardener or liquid membrane forming curing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over cushion, or left exposed; and to exterior slabs,walks and curbs, as follows: Apply specified compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Do not allow to puddle. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue down carpet), painting and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Use only clear curing compounds for exposed interior slabs and all exterior concrete. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Where wooden forms are used, cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. When forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing compound. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.9 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: 1. Conditions warranting hot weather concreting practices are defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair the quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise result in abnormal properties. 2. The maximum acceptable concrete temperature at the truck discharge point shall be 95°F. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-14 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 B. Specification: Hot weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperature at the truck discharge point to 95°F or lower shall be followed according to ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting." C. Records: Under hot weather conditions,the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature at truck discharge and general weather conditions. D. Hot Weather Concreting Requirements: The following items, all or in part as required, should be followed to limit the concrete temperature to 95°F or lower: 1. Design the concrete mixes specifically for hot weather conditions replacing some cement with fly ash or other pozzolan and using a water reducing retarding admixture (ASTM C 494 Type D). 2. Use the largest size and amount of coarse aggregate compatible with the job. 3. Use sunshades and/or windbreaks. 4. Delay construction of indoor slabs-on-grade until the walls and roof are constructed. 5. Cool and shade aggregate stockpiles. 6. Use ice as part of the mixing water or cool the water with liquid nitrogen. 7. Limit the number of revolutions at mixing speed to 125 maximum. 8. Paint mixers and storage bins or silos white to minimize heat absorption. 9. Reduce time between mixing and placing as much as possible. 10. Do not add water to ready-mixed concrete at the job site unless it is part of the amount required initially for the specified water-cement ratio and the specified slump. 11. Schedule concrete placement for early morning, late afternoon, or night. 12. Have all forms, equipment and workers ready to receive and handle concrete. 13. Maintain one standby vibrator for every three vibrators used. 14. Keep all equipment cool by spraying with water including chutes, conveyors, pump lines, tremies, reinforcement and buggies. 15. Dampen the subgrade and side forms with cool water. 16. Protect slab concrete at all stages against undue evaporation by applying a fog spray or mist above the surface or applying a monomolecular film. Where high temperatures and/or placing conditions dictate, use water-reducing retarding admixture (Type D) in lieu of the water-reducing admixture (Type A) as directed by the Owner's Testing Laboratory. 17. Provide continuous curing, preferably with water, during the first 24 hours using wet burlap, cotton mats, continuous spray mist, or by applying a curing compound meeting ASTM C 309. Continue curing for 3 days minimum. 18. Spray exteriors of forms to keep them cool. 19. As soon as possible, loosen forms and run water down the inside. When forms are removed, provide a wet cover to newly exposed surfaces. 3.10 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-15 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 1. Concrete shall not be placed on any day when the outside air temperature is 40°F or less and falling unless cold weather concreting practices are followed as specified below. 2. Cold weather concreting practices should be followed whenever the mean daily temperature drops below 407 for more than three successive days. 3. The temperature of concrete mixed and delivered to the job site shall conform to the following requirements: Air Temperature Min. Concrete Temperature Above 30°F 607 0°F to 307 65°F Below 0°F 70°F 4. The minimum temperature of concrete during placement and curing shall be 55°F. The maximum concrete temperature heated by artificial means at point of placement shall not exceed 90°F. B. Specification: Cold weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperatures as specified above shall be followed according to ACI 306R-78 "Cold Weather Concreting". C. Records: Under cold weather conditions, the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature as placed and general weather conditions. D. Cold Weather Concreting Requirements: The following items, all or in part as required, should be followed to assure acceptable concrete in cold weather conditions: 1. Design the concrete mix suitable for cold weather. Use air entrainment and obtain high early strength by using a higher cement content, a high early strength cement (Type III), or an accelerator(ASTM C 494 Type C and E). 2. Protect the concrete during curing period using insulating blankets, insulated forms, enclosures and/or heaters. 3. Concrete cured in heated enclosures shall have heaters vented to prevent exposure of concrete and workmen to noxious gases. 4. Frozen subgrade shall be thawed prior to concrete placement and snow and ice shall be removed from forms. 5. Concrete shall be protected and cured at 55°F for three days minimum if normal concrete (Type I cement) is used and for two days minimum if high early strength concrete (concrete with Type III cement, 100 pounds cement added per cubic yard concrete, or an accelerator added). 6. Concrete not loaded during construction shall be protected a minimum of 3 days for normal concrete and 2 days for high early strength concrete to obtain safe form stripping strength. Concrete fully loaded during construction shall be protected for whatever time period is required to obtain the required strength as determined by nondestructive strength tests (Windsor probe, Swiss Hammer Test) on the in-place concrete. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-16 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 7. Heat the mixing water and then blend hot and cold water to obtain concrete no more than 10°F above the required temperature. 8. Heat the aggregates by circulating steam in pipes placed in the storage bins for air temperatures consistently below 32°F. When either water or aggregate is heated to over 140°F combine them in the mixer first to obtain a maximum temperature of the mixture not to exceed 1407 in order to prevent flash set of the concrete. 9. Uniformly thaw aggregates far in advance of batching to prevent moisture variations in the stockpile. 10. Cover warmed stockpiles with tarps to retain heat. 11. Place air entraining admixture in the batch after the water temperature has been reduced by mixing with cooler solid materials. 12. Use wind screens to protect concrete from rapid cooling. 13. Place vertical pump lines inside the building, if possible, for concrete being pumped. 14. Maintain artificial heat as low as possible to reduce temperature stresses during cooling. 1S. Avoid water curing of concrete. Apply the required curing compound to unformed surfaces as soon as possible to prevent drying of concrete from heated enclosures. 16. Delay form stripping as long as possible to help prevent drying from heated enclosures and to reduce damage to formed surfaces caused by premature stripping. 17. Provide triple thickness of insulating materials at corners and edges vulnerable to freezing. 18. Wrap protruding reinforcing bars with insulation to avoid heat drain from the warm concrete. 19. Gradually reduce the heat at the end of the heating period to reduce likelihood of thermal shock. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-17 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 A. Definition - Defective Areas: 1. Formed Surfaces: Concrete surfaces requiring repairs shall include all honeycombs, rock pockets and voids exceeding 1/4" in any dimension, holes left by tie rods or bolts, cracks in excess of 0.01" and any other defects that affect the durability or structural integrity of the concrete. 2. Unformed Surfaces: Concrete surfaces requiring repair shall include all surface defects such as crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or cracks which penetrate to reinforcement or through the member, popouts, spalling and honeycombs. B. Classification: 1. Structural Concrete Repair: Major defective areas in concrete members that are load carrying (such as shear walls, beams, joists and slabs), are highly stressed, and are vital to the structural integrity of the structure shall require structural repairs. Structural concrete repairs shall be made using a two part epoxy bonder and/or epoxy mortar. Location of structural concrete repairs shall be determined by the Engineer. 2. Cosmetic Concrete Repair: Defective areas in concrete members that are non- load carrying and minor defective areas in load carrying concrete members shall require cosmetic concrete repair. Cosmetic concrete repairs may be made using a non-epoxy non-shrink patching mortar and bonding agent. The location of cosmetic concrete repair required shall be determined by the Engineer. Cosmetic concrete repair in exposed-to-view surfaces will require Architect's approval prior to patching operation. 3. Slab Repairs: High areas in concrete slabs shall be repaired by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. Low areas shall be filled using self-leveling mortars. Repair of slab spalls and other surface defects shall be made using epoxy products as specified above and as determined by the Engineer. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION See Testing Laboratory Services section of these Specifications for concrete materials and cast- in-place concrete inspection and test requirements. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-18 Far South Police Substation—23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 03 3100- EPDXY RELATED WORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Installation of epoxy grouted dowels or reinforcing steel, and bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete. Such work shall be done by the Contractor in strict conformance to these specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 503 R Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete ACI 503.1 Standard Specification for Bonding, Hardened Concrete, Steel, Wood, Brick, and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive ACI 503.2 Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive ACI 503.3 Standard Specification for Producing a Skid-Resistant Surface on Concrete by the Use of Multi-Component Epoxy System ACI 503.4 Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars B. Manufacturer's Qualifications Companies furnishing the epoxy materials shall have a proven track record of at least five years. Furthermore, they shall have in existence a program of training, certifying and supporting a nationally organized program of approved contractors. Evidence of this shall be made available to the Engineer/Architect upon request. Epoxy Related Work 03 31 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Contractor's Qualifications: Contractor performing the work shall be an approved contractor by the manufacturer furnishing the epoxy materials, and shall have no less than five years experience in the various types of epoxy related work required in this project. A notarized certification from the manufacturer attesting to the training shall be submitted to the Engineer/Architect along with the proposal to do the work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPDXY MATERIALS: A. All epoxy material shall be new and manufactured within the shelf life limitations set forth by the manufacturer. B. Epoxy shall be a two-part epoxy adhesive material, and shall be of epichlorohydrin/amine type. Polysulphide epoxies are not acceptable. C. Epoxy used shall be insensitive to the presence of water and moisture, and shall be capable of application and of strength development even when applied to damp surfaces having a temperature of 40' or above. D. Epoxy used shall develop a minimum strength of 6310 psi in tension and 12000 psi in compression at the end of seven days. E. Epoxies used shall not deteriorate under approximately 200 freeze thaw cycles. F. Epoxies used shall be 100%solids without solvents. G. Bonding and strength characteristics of epoxies shall be stable when exposed to ultraviolet rays. 2.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPDXY MORTARS A. Epoxy mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing, shall have the following additional properties: 1. Epoxy mortar shall be non-sagging. 2. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite and furnished in bags. 3. The epoxy mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the average mortar patch to be used on the project. Epoxy Related Work 03 31 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS MORTARS: A. Mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing in exposed or exterior environmental conditions with large cyclic temperature changes shall have the following properties: 1. Mortar shall be non-sagging. 2. Coefficient of thermal expansion shall be comparable with that of concrete (5.5 x 10- 6 in/in/°F). 3. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite furnished in bags. 4. The mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the average mortar patch to be used on the project. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EPDXY MORTAR: A. Applicator's Qualifications 1. Epoxy mortar repair work shall only be performed by contractors who have successfully used this process on at least three similar structural repairs of equal scope which have performed successfully for a minimum period of five years. 2. Only adequately trained and experienced personnel shall be used on the job. B. Surface Preparation 1. Concrete surface to which the epoxy mortar is to be applied shall be exposed parent concrete free of loose and unsound materials. Surface preparation shall be done by abrasive blasting,waterblasting or as otherwise required by the manufacturer. 2. Necessary approvals shall be obtained by the Contractor from authorizing governmental or other agencies prior to abrasive blasting. Abrasive blasting operations shall comply with the requirements of OSHA and NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health) Standard P13-246-697. 3. Surfaces shall be free of any deleterious materials such as laitance, dust, dirt, and oil. 4. Any exposed reinforcing steel shall also be cleaned and be free of rust and other contaminants. Cleaning shall be accomplished by mechanical means. Use powered wire brushes in locations where reinforcing steel cannot be cleaned by abrasive- blasting or water-blasting. All exposed reinforcing steel shall be coated with a Epoxy Related Work 03 31 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 corrosion inhibiting product specified elsewhere in this specification prior to mortar application. 5. Prime the cleaned surface with primer as required by the manufacturer. C. Concrete Surface Inspection 1. Ensure that the surface temperature is at least 40°F to permit wetting of concrete surface by epoxy coating. 2. The Contractor shall evaluate the moisture content of concrete surface receiving epoxy mortar. This shall be done by determining if moisture will collect at bond lines between concrete and epoxy mortar before epoxy has cured. Evaluate this by taping a piece of polyethylene sheet to the concrete. If moisture collects on underside of the polyethylene sheet before epoxy would cure, then allow concrete to dry sufficiently to prevent the possibility of moisture between old concrete and new epoxy. D. Mortar Application 1. Condition epoxy compound components to a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be used. 2. Stir each of the two parts of epoxy separately before mixing. Then mix in a clean container free of contaminants. 3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components and sand with Jiffy mixers (made by The Jiffy Mixer Co., Irvine, California)to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Small batches of one quart or less may be mixed by spatulas, palette knives or similar devices. 4. Mixing should be accomplished well within the pot life of epoxy (three minutes when using Jiffy mixer or five minutes when mixed by hand) after allowing for time required for application. 5. Apply mortar by trowel or other means suitable for the consistency of the epoxy-sand mortar mix. 6. Build up the repair area in layers with mortar thicknesses within those specified by the manufacturer (1/4" maximum per layer). 7. Consolidate the mortar thoroughly to remove entrapped air. 8. Finish surface of mortar to match the texture and contours of existing concrete. 9. Allow mortar to cure in accordance to manufacturers recommendations. E. Cleanup Epoxy Related Work 03 31 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work areas against spillage. 2. Epoxy and epoxy mortar spillages shall be cleaned before they set. 3. Cleanup all portions of the existing structure that are soiled or stained in the process of epoxy mortar repair work. 3.2 EPDXY GROUTED BOLTS, DOWELS OR REINFORCING STEEL: A. Applicator's Qualifications 1. Epoxy grouting of bolts, dowels or reinforcing steel shall only be performed by contractors who have had successful experience on a minimum of three projects of similar scope. 2. Only adequately trained epoxy applicators shall be used on the job. Furnish current certificate of training on request. B. Surface Preparation 1. All bolts, dowels and reinforcing bars shall be abrasive blasted no more than eight hours before the grouting. If evidence of oxidation exists on the surface, the bolts, reinforcing bars and dowels shall be recleaned. Blast-clean surfaces using Steel Structures Painting Council, Surface Preparation No. 6, to give a surface condition corresponding to ASa2, BSa2, CSa2 of SSPC Vis 1, depending on the initial surface condition of the steel surface. Prior to blast-cleaning, clean surfaces to conform to SSPC SP1, SP2, and SP3, as required. 2. All holes shall be clean of dust, debris, and contaminants. Use compressed air from an oil-and-water-free compressed air source prior to epoxy application. C. Drilling Holes for Embedment 1. Use only rotary-percussion type drills for drilling holes. 2. Drills shall be fitted with bits having single tooth that produce large cuttings, and hollow stem drill rods that permit simultaneous blowing of compressed air providing immediate expulsion of the cuttings from the hole. 3. Do not cut through any reinforcing steel unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Use small diameter exploratory holes to detect presence of reinforcing steel prior to drilling holes for grouting. 4. Core drilling equipment, and electric impact hammers or other tools which do not provide for immediate expulsion of the drill cuttings shall not be used. 5. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, depth of hole used for embedding the bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least fifteen times their diameter. Epoxy Related Work 03 31 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the center to center distance between the embedded bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least twelve times their diameter. 7. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the edge distance shall be at least six times the diameter of the bolt, bar or dowel. 8. Hole diameter shall normally be 1/4" larger than the outside diameter of the embedded item. In no case shall the hole diameter be 3/8" larger than the diameter of the embedded item. D. Epoxy Application 1. Condition epoxy compound materials at a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be used. 2. Mix epoxy materials in a clean container free of contaminants. 3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components with mechanical mixers to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Mix small batches (up to 1 quart) by use of spatulas, palette knives, or similar devices. Take care to use proper proportions of the epoxy components when using small batches. 4. Mixing shall be accomplished well within the pot life of the epoxy after allowing for time required for application. 5. Partially fill the hole with epoxy. Then insert the bolt, dowel or reinforcing bar into the hole such that the resin material oozes out around the embedded item, ensuring complete contact. Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact. 6. As an alternative to inserting the embedded item after the epoxy is poured in the hole,the bolt, dowel, or bar may be positioned in the hole and filled up with epoxy by hand caulking guns or injected with an in-head mixing equipment. In either case, the nozzle shall be provided with a hose or tube of sufficient length to reach the bottom of the hole being filled. 7. Where the holes are horizontal or overhead, the opening shall be covered by a masking or a duct tape. Make a split in the tape and insert the epoxy injection tube through the split. Fill hole completely with epoxy and then insert the embedded item through the split tape. Amount of epoxy should be such that a small amount of material oozes through the split. Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact. 8. Do not apply epoxy in the rain or in the presence of standing water. E. Cleanup 1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work area against spillage. Epoxy Related Work 03 31 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Epoxy oozed out from the holes and spillages shall be cleaned before they become difficult to remove. 3. Cleanup whatever portions of the existing structure are soiled or stained in the process of grouting the bolts, dowels or reinforcing bars. END OF SECTION 03 3100 Epoxy Related Work 03 31 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 04 20 00- UNIT MASONRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Lintels. 3. Brick. 4. Mortar and grout materials. 5. Reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Accessories. 8. Mortar and grout mixes. B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry. 2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry. 3. Cavity wall insulation adhered to masonry backup. 4. Embedded flashing. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 41 19 "Windstorm Construction Requirements." 2. Section 0143 39 "Mockups" for integrated exterior mockup requirements. 3. Section 07 19 17 "Anti-Graffiti Coatings" for anti-graffiti coatings surface-applied to unit masonry assemblies. 4. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation. 5. Section 07 27 20 "Fluid-Applied Air Barrier." 6. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Indicate sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Reinforcing Steel: Indicate bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315R. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Face Brick. 2. Colored mortar. 3. Weep/cavity vents. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face Brick. 2. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. 3. Weep/cavity vents. 4. Cavity drainage material. S. Accessories embedded in masonry. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. B. Material Certificates: For each type of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. C. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Preblended,dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 7. Reinforcing bars. 8. Joint reinforcement. 9. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. C. Qualification Statements: For testing agency. D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.Test in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content. 2. Include test reports, in accordance with ASTM C1019,for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type,and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined in accordance with TMS 602. F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: All masonry flashing installers must complete the International Masonry Institute Flashing Upgrade training course. 2. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM C1093 for testing indicated. 1.7 MOCKUPS A. Sample Panel Mockups: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 0143 39 "Mockups" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 2. Build sample panels facing south. 3. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. B. Wall Mockups: Build mockups. 1. Build mockup. 2. Build mockups for in sizes approximately long by high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). d. Include veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup. e. Include on one face of interior unit masonry wall mockup. 3. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations by Change Order. 6. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting,securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items,to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. For exposed masonry units and cementitious mortar components, obtain each color and grade from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. 1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units are listed by UL or a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Windstorm Construction Requirements: Comply with Specification Section 01 41 19 "Windstorm Construction Requirements" and the requirements of the Texas Windstorm Code including elements assembled to form the exterior wall and roof systems that are either directly loaded by the wind or receive wind loads originating at relatively close locations, and that transfer those loads to the main wind force resisting system. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.3 LINTELS A. Offset Angle Supports: Steel plate brackets anchored to structure, allowing continuous insulation behind shelf angle supporting veneer. Component and anchor size and spacing engineered by manufacturer. 1. Carbon Steel, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B coating. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBS. 1. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM C67/C67M. 2. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested in accordance with ASTM C67/C67M and is rated "not effloresced." 3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-5/16 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 4. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. 5. Color and Texture: single color, wire-cut texture as selected by Architect, manufactured by Meridian Brick,Athens,Texas. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement:ASTM C150/C150M,Type I or 11,except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content will not be more than 0.1 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207,Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329/C1329M. F. Preblended Dry Mortar Mix: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime, sand, mortar pigments, water repellents, and admixtures and complying with ASTM C1714/C1714M. 1. Preblended Dry Portland Cement Mortar Mix: UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Amerimix is a trademark of Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Preblended Colored Mortar AMX 405 C or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Quikrete;The QUIKRETE Companies, LLC. 2) Sakrete; CRH Americas, Oldcastle APG. 3) SPEC MIX, LLC. 4) Amerimix is a trademark of Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. G. Aggregate for Mortar:ASTM C144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. J. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from the same manufacturer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide W.R. Grace& Co., Construction Products Division; Dry-Block or comparable product by one of the following: a. ACM Chemistries. b. Euclid Chemical Company(The); an RPM company. C. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. d. Master Builders Solutions. e. W.R. Grace &Co., Construction Products Division. K. Water: Potable. L. Mortar Color: 1. Face Brick: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60. B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in the center of cells. Units are formed from 9-gauge steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Stainless steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9-gauge diameter. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9-gauge diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 9-gauge diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods,Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 ft. D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Blok-Lok Limited. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. C. Wire-Bond. E. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Blok-Lok Limited. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. C. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Wire-Bond. 2. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of 1- 1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 1- inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General:Ties and anchors extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least 1-inch cover on outside face. B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire:ASTM A1064/A1064M,with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Stainless Steel Wire: ASTM A580/A580M,Type 304. 3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B coating. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. C. Corrugated-Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch. D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100 Ibf load in both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming or developing play in excess of 1/16 inch. 2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.0781-inch- thick, stainless steel sheet. 3. Fabricate wire ties from 9-gauge diameter,stainless steel wire unless otherwise indicated. 4. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the adjustable masonry- veneer anchors specified. 5. Masonry-Veneer Anchors; Double-Pintle Plate: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal anchor section with screw holes at top and bottom, projecting horizontal leg with slots for vertical legs of double pintle wire tie. 2.8 DRAINAGE PLANE FLASHING A. Refer to Specification Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing" for through-wall flashing and Section 07 27 20 "Fluid-Applied Air Barrier" for flexible base flashing. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. B. Weep/Cavity Vents: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches long. 2. Basis of Design: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; QV-Quadro-Vent. C. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Basis of Design: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Mortar Trap. D. Proprietary Acidic Masonry Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions,to ensure that mortar color is consistent. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions,and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing, nonload-bearing walls, and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 3. For interior nonload-bearing partitions,Type O may be used instead of Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)that will comply with TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.1.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 3. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond. B. Before installation,examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 unchipped edges.Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM C67/C67M. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4-inch in a story height or 1/2-inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints,do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,jambs,and,where possible,at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work:As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition.Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors, and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping." 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. E. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive cavity wall insulation unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together as follows: 1. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties. b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable-type(two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. 2. Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings. C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. D. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Refer to Specification Section 07 2100"Thermal Insulation"for installation of cavity wall insulation. 1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry. 3.7 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete,to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c.vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in- plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in the direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-14 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.10 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry or offset angle support lintels where indicated and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are indicated without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide a minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FLASHING,WEEP HOLES,AND CAVITY VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing. 1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. C. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Accessories" Article. 3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Placing Reinforcement: Refer to Structural Drawings. Comply with requirements in TMS 602. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until the entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 3.13 CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-15 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic masonry cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. END OF SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-16 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 04 23 00- REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedules. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for and incidental to the installation of all reinforced masonry construction as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Reinforced unit masonry construction includes reinforced concrete masonry including concrete filled masonry beams, pilasters, lintels, and soffits. Accessories include, but are not necessarily limited to ties, horizontal and vertical reinforcement, anchors to the structure, and control joints. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement bars and for steel templates for layout of dowels. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide Grade 60 for No. 3 bars, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Grade 60 for bars No. 4 to No. 11, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A 675, Grade 80. 4. Shop fabricate reinforcement bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. PART 3- EXECUTION Reinforced Unit Masonry 04 23 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.1 GENERAL Refer to Section "Masonry Mortaring and Grouting" for general installation requirements of unit masonry. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Vertical bars shall be held in position at the top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 8'-0" with a minimum clearance of 1/4" from the face of the masonry and not less than one bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater) between adjacent bars. C. All dowels shall be grouted into a cell even if the dowel is in an adjacent cell to the vertical steel. Unless detailed otherwise on the drawings, dowels shall be the same size and number as the vertical steel. Unless noted otherwise provide a lap length of dowels to vertical reinforcement equal to 50 times the nominal dowel diameter. Dowels for columns and pilasters shall be set using 1/8" thick steel plate templates. Templates shall be detailed and submitted with reinforcing steel shop drawings. D. All horizontal reinforcing steel shall be placed in continuous bond beam or lintel block units and shall be solidly grouted in place. Maintain a minimum of one bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater) clearance between adjacent bars and a minimum of 1/4" clearance from the face of the masonry. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. E. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Engineer. Where splices occur, adjacent splices shall be staggered so that no more than 25% of the total number of bars are spliced at any one point with a minimum stagger between splices in adjacent bars of at least the lap length. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. F. Where reinforcement is prefabricated into cage units before placing, fabricate units with vertical reinforcement bars and lateral ties of the size and spacing indicated. 3.3 FORMWORK A. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Reinforced Unit Masonry 04 23 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. C. Formwork shall be designed and shop drawings prepared by a registered professional engineer in the state where the project is located. D. Formwork shall not be removed until the reinforced masonry member has cured sufficiently to carry its own weight and any other loads that may be placed on it during construction. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the member before removing shores or forms provided adequate curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period: 1. Lintels and beams- 10 days. 2. Reinforced masonry soffits-7 days. 3. Allow 16 hours to elapse after completion of masonry columns and walls before placing floor or roof construction loads. Allow an additional 48 hours before applying concentrated loads such as girders, beams, or trusses. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. General: 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8"joints. B. Walls: 1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. 2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities which are to be reinforced and grouted to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. 3. Provide #4 at 48" on center horizontal reinforcing in addition to joint reinforcing specified. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special Reinforced Unit Masonry 04 23 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 units or modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non-reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. C. Grouting: 1. General a. Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces less than 4" in one or both horizontal directions. (2,000 psi) b. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. (2,000 psi) C. Use 3000 PSI normal-weight concrete for filling spaces 10" and larger in both directions. d. Grouting Technique: At the Contractor's option, use either low-lift or high-lift grouting techniques subject to requirements which follow. 2. Low-Lift Grouting: a. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 square inches in vertical cores to be grouted. b. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. C. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 feet height stop pour at course below bond beam. d. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2" below top course of pour. e. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. 3. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. 4. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 5. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces. Reinforced Unit Masonry 04 23 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour. 7. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 8. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1-1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. D. Anchoring: 1. Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated. 2. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non-reinforced masonry where they intersect, unless shown otherwise. 3.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Masonry Prisms shall be made and tested in accordance with Section "Unit Masonry". B. Prism Strength 1. Compressive Strength, f'm. The compressive strength of reinforced concrete masonry,f'm, as determined by prism tests shall be as indicated below: Class of Reinforced Masonry 28 Day Compressive Strength,Pm = 1500 PSI C. Grout Tests 1. Grout shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 1019 for every 1,000 square feet of masonry. Grout strength = 2,000 PSI minimum. END OF SECTION 04 23 00 Reinforced Unit Masonry 04 23 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 05 12 00-STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on drawings including schedules, notes and details which show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of steel required. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with or related to the furnishing, fabrication, delivery, and erection of all structural steel defined below. Include all supplementary parts, members and connections necessary to complete the structural steel work, regardless of whether all such items are specifically shown or specified on the drawings. B. Structural steel shall be defined as that work prescribed in Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice and the following items: angle frames for openings in roofs, miscellaneous metal deck support and edge angles, shop welded metal studs, all connection material, temporary construction bracing, and all other structural steel shown or specified on the drawings to be part of the work. Labor shall include shop painting as specified, field touch-up painting, and grouting of base plates and bearing plates. C. Miscellaneous metal fabrications, architecturally exposed structural steel, metal stairs, steel joists, and metal deck are specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS 1. Fabricator: The structural steel fabricator shall have not less than 10 years experience in the successful fabrication of structural steel similar to this project. Evidence of compliance with this section shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer. 2. Erector: The structural steel erector shall have not less than 5 years successful experience in the erection of structural steel of a similar nature to this project. Evidence of compliance with this section shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. A. Codes and Standards: Structural Steel 05 12 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated: 1. All federal (OSHA), state and local laws which govern safety requirements for steel erection and other requirements if more stringent than the codes and standards enumerated below. 2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". 3. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", including Commentary. 4. AISC "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation (Research Council on Structural Connections). 5. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel". 6. "Steel Structures Painting Manual", Volumes 1 and 2, Steel Structures Painting Council. B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code-Steel". 1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. 2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility. C. Source Quality Control: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field by the Owner's testing laboratory. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. The Contractor shall promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Question about Contract Documents: The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated or when other questions exist about the Contract Documents. Such questions shall be resolved prior to the submission of shop drawings. E. Testing Laboratory Services: See Structural Drawings required testing. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.5 SUBMITTALS Structural Steel 05 12 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Shop Drawings: 1. General Requirements: Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing sequence of erection. Shop drawings not complying with the above requirements will not be reviewed. Structural steel shop drawings shall include the following minimum information: a. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Holes, flange cuts, slots and openings shall be made as required by the structural drawings, all of which shall be properly located by means of templates. 2. The fabricator alone shall be responsible for all errors of detailing, fabrication, and for the correct fitting of the structural members. 3. All fabricated material and connections shall fit within architectural constraints. 4. Structural steel members for which shop drawings have not been reviewed and approved shall not be fabricated. 5. The omission from the shop drawings of any materials required by the Contract Documents shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials, even though the shop drawings may have been reviewed and approved. B. Test Reports: Submit copies of reports of tests conducted on all field-welded connections that are inspected. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time so as not to delay work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might exceed allowable loads on or cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed by Architect/Engineer. D. Furnish all fuel, maintenance, and equipment required for hoisting and placement of materials under this contract. Structural Steel 05 12 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Process, pay for and maintain all permits and certificates of on-site inspection required for derricks, cranes and hoisting equipment. No derrick, crane or hoisting equipment shall be operated without a certificate of operation and a certificate of on-site inspection, as required by governing authorities. 1. Wherever the erection equipment is supported by the structure, the Contractor shall be responsible for the retention of a licensed professional engineer to determine the adequacy of the member supporting the erection equipment in relation to the loads imposed thereon. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer, for review, the loads which will be imposed by the erection equipment on the building structure. Where the imposed load exceeds the allowable stresses, the Contractor shall be responsible for any additional materials, supports, bracing, connections and similar measures required to support the imposed load of the equipment while in use, subject to review by the Architect/Engineer. 2. In addition to the above, all hoisting equipment shall be installed, operated and maintained in accordance with all applicable regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Street storage and sidewalk crossing permits shall be furnished by the Contractor. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS The Contractor shall coordinate the fabrication and erection of all structural steel work with the work of other trades. The contractor shall verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. The contractor shall verify all dimensions shown on the drawings with existing job conditions prior to beginning work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: All hot rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet piling, and bars shall be new steel conforming to ASTM Specification A6 "Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use". Structural steel shall comply with the provisions of the following ASTM Specifications as appropriate for the grades and types, and at the locations as specified on the drawings: 1. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars - Carbon Steel, ASTM A992 GR50 "Standard Specification for Structural Steel." 2. Pipe Columns-ASTM A53 (Type E or S) Grade B, or ASTM A501. 3. Tube Sections-ASTM A500 Grade B. FY=46 KSI Structural Steel 05 12 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. Connection Material: All connection material except as noted otherwise on the drawings including bearing plates, gusset plates, stiffener plates, filler plates, angles, etc. shall be A36 steel unless a higher or matching grade of steel with the members connected is required by strength or stiffness calculations and provided the resulting sizes are compatible with the members connected. B. Structural Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: Structural bolts and threaded fasteners shall comply with the following ASTM Specifications as appropriate for the types and at the locations as specified on the drawings: 1. ASTM A307 Grade A, "Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners". 2. ASTM A325 Type 1, "High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints". 3. Bolts and Nuts, High Strength Bolts: Bolts and nuts for all high strength bolts shall be heavy hex head conforming to ANSI Standards B18.2.1 and B18.2.2 respectively. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A563, "Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts". 4. Washers: All washers shall be circular, flat and smooth and shall conform to the requirements of Type A washers in ANSI Standard B23.1. Washers for high strength bolts shall be hardened and conform to ASTM F436, Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. Beveled washers for American Standard Beams and channels shall be square or rectangular, shall taper in thickness (16 2/3% slope) with an average thickness of 5/16". When an outer face of a bolted part has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis, a beveled washer shall be used. 5. Bolt Lubrication: All bolts shall be well lubricated at time of installation. Dry, rusty bolts will not be allowed. Bolts or nuts shall be wax dipped by the bolt supplier or "Johnson's Stick Wax 140" shall be used with all bolts in the shop or field. 6. New Bolts: All bolts shall be new and shall not be reused. C. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel". Electrodes for various welding processes shall be as specified below: 1. SMAW: E70XX low hydrogen 2. SAW: F7X-EXXX 3. GMAW: ER70S-X 4. FCAW: E7XT-X 5. Weathering Steel Electrodes shall conform to Table 4.1.4 of the AWS D1.1 Manual. Electrodes shall be compatible with parent metal joined. D. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Primer paint shall be one of the following types with the indicated surface preparation: Structural Steel 05 12 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. SSPC-Paint 1, 100% red lead and linseed oil, TT-P-86 Type I, surface prepared according to SSPC-SP-2 (Hand Tool Cleaning). All materials shall be lead and chromate free. 2. SSPC-Paint 2, red lead-iron oxide and oil-alkyd, surface prepared according to SSPC-SP-2 (Hand Tool Cleaning). All materials shall be lead and chromate free. 3. TT-P-86, Type II, red lead-iron oxide and oil-alkyd, surface prepared according to SSPC-SP-3 (Power Tool Cleaning). All materials shall be lead and chromate free. 4. TT-P-86, Type III, 100% red lead and alkyd varnish, surface prepared according to SSPC-SP-6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP-8 (Pickling). 5. Alkyd Zinc Chromate Metal Primer 0239 Gray as manufactured by Devoe Napko (SSPL-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning). 6. Alkyd Fast Dry Primer 298 as manufactured by Porter Paints (SSPL-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning). 7. Modified Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Primer 4-56 as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc. (SSPL-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning). Refer to Architect's drawings and specifications for final paint finish requirements of structural steel. Primer paint shall be compatible with final paint requirements. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specification and as indicated on approved final shop drawings. Fabricator shall coordinate joint fit-up procedures with erector. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. The General Contractor shall coordinate provision of all erection bolts, lifting lugs or other devices required for erection with the fabricator and the erector. 2. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 3. Clearly mark the grade of steel on each piece, distinguishable in the field from floor surfaces,for purpose of field inspection and confirmation of grade of steel. B. Dimensional Tolerances: Dimensional tolerances of fabricated structural steel shall conform to Section 6.4 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. Structural Steel 05 12 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Splices in Structural Steel: Splicing of structural steel members in the shop or the field is prohibited without prior approval of the Engineer. Any member having a splice not shown and detailed on approved shop drawings will be rejected. D. Cutting: Manual oxygen cutting shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch. An unguided torch may be used provided the cut is not within 1/8 inch of the finished dimension and final removal is completed by means such as chipping or grinding to produce a smooth surface quality free of notches or jagged edges. All corners shall be smooth and rounded to a minimum 1/2" radius. 2.3 WELDING A. Code: All shop and field welding shall conform to all requirements in the "Structural Welding Code - Steel", ANSI/AWS D1.1, as published by the American Welding Society (AWS). B. Welder Certification: All shop and field welders shall be certified according to AWS procedures for the welding process and welding position used. Submit certification certificates to the Architect for record purposes. C. Minimum Size and Strength: 1. Fillet Welds: Minimum size of fillet welds shall be as specified in Table 1.17.2A in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction. 2. Minimum Strength of Welded Connections: Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, all shop and field welds shall develop the full tensile strength of the member or element joined. All members with moment connections, noted on the drawings with "MC", shall be welded to develop the full flexural capacity of the member, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. D. Filler Metal Requirements: Weld metal shall be as specified in AISC Manual of Steel Construction Table 1.5.3. E. Welding Procedures: 1. Welds not specified shall, if possible, be continuous fillet welds developing the minimum strength, as specified above, using not less than the minimum fillet welds as specified by AISC. 2.4 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING A. Specification: Surface preparation, paint, and painting practices shall conform to the "Steel Structures Painting Manual", Volumes 1 and 2, as published by the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). B. Scope: Shop paint all steel. Structural Steel 05 12 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Surface Preparation and Primer Paint - Shop Painted Steel: All structural steel specified to be shop primed shall have paint applied in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions using prescribed surface preparation but not less than specified. Paint shall be applied immediately after surface preparation at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Painting methods shall be used which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and all exposed surfaces. Two coats shall be applied to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. The color of the second coat shall be changed to distinguish it from the first coat. Coordinate shop primer paint requirements with Architectural drawings and specifications. PART 3- ERECTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Inspection: Erector shall examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed and notify the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. B. Erection Tolerances: Erection tolerances of anchor bolts, embedded items, and all structural steel shall conform to the AISC Code of Standard Practice. C. Field Assembly of Structural Steel: 1. As erection of the steel progresses, the work shall be fastened securely to take care of all dead load, wind and erection stresses. Particular care shall be exercised to ensure straightness and tautness of bracing immediately upon raising a steel column. 2. Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. 3. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. The Contractor shall coordinate with Erector and Fabricator regarding possible discrepancies in member lengths between temperature at time of fabrication and temperatures during erection, and shall make necessary adjustments to ensure plumbness within AISC tolerances at 60°F. Compensate for cumulative welding draw, construction loadings, sequential applications of dead loads, or any other predictable conditions that could cause distortions to exceed tolerance limitations. Structural Steel 05 12 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds or filler and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. 5. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces receiving field welds. 6. Comply with all bolting and welding requirements of Part 2 of this specification section. 7. Remove and replace existing finish materials as required to accomplish all work. The contractor shall comply with all fire codes when performing welding of steel or metal studs. D. Field Modifications to Structural Steel: Errors in shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and transportation that prevent the proper assembly and structural fitting of parts shall be reported immediately to the Architect/Engineer, and approval of the method of correction shall be obtained. Approved corrections shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Do not use cutting torches, reamers, or other devices in the field for unauthorized correction of fabrication errors. E. Miscellaneous Framing: Provide supplemental structural steel support framing for metal deck where normal deck bearing is interrupted by column flange plates or other framing members and other floor openings whether shown or not on either the architectural, mechanical, or structural drawings. F. Removal of Erection Aids and Devices: The erector shall remove all erection aids and devices that interfere with architectural finish or MEP requirements. G. Touch-Up Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas that have been shop painted. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material and surface preparation as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 2. All field welded galvanized connections shall have welds protected with "Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound" as manufactured by Z.R.C. Products Company. H. Clean Up: Clean up all debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping the premises neat and clean at all times. Replace and repair to like new condition, all damaged areas of the interior and exterior of the building. END OF SECTION 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 12 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 05 20 00-STEEL JOISTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Extent of steel joists is shown on drawings, including basic layout and type of joists required. B. Quantity of joists required shall be determined from the contract drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. A. Design and Fabrication: Provide joists designed and fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein specified. 1. Steel Joist Institute (SJI) Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for K, LH, and DLH Series Steel Joists. 2. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 3. Local fabrication requirements of governing authorities such as the city, county and state having jurisdiction over the site where the project is located. 4. American Welding Society AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel or SJI Technical Digest#8 "Welding of Open Web Steel Joists" with successful passage of load tests as defined in this specification section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, connections, jointing and accessories. Include length, camber, mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging. Submit details for member splices. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Steel Joists 05 20 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI specifications. Handle and store these in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI specifications. B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel. C. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 325 or A 490 heavy hexagon structural bolts with nuts and hardened washers. D. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI specifications. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with all documents listed in "Quality Assurance", except as noted below. B. Splices in Chord Members: All splices shall be designed and provided in accordance with SJI Specifications. The splices in each of the two angles or bars of all members shall not be at the same location, but shall be staggered a minimum of 6 inches. C. Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown in contract drawings for securing other work to steel joists; however, deduct area of holes from the area of chord when calculating strength of member. D. Joists shall be cambered for dead loads: Provide all joists with SJI standard camber unless specified otherwise on the drawings. Review the Structural Drawings and Specifications for information concerning dead loads for joists requiring other than standard camber. Joist camber must be shown on shop drawings submitted for review. Camber not shown on shop drawings shall be cause for rejection of shop drawings. E. Joist Bearing: Provide minimum end bearing of joists as required by SJI specifications but subject to requirements below: Joists Less than 60-Foot Span: a. If two joists do not abut each other at a support, provide required joist bearing centered on the supporting member unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. Steel Joists 05 20 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 b. If two joists abut each other at a support and sufficient minimum bearing for each joist exists, provide 1/4" space between joist ends centered over the support unless details otherwise on the drawings. C. If two joists abut each other at a support and sufficient minimum bearing for each joist does not exist at the support, offset the ends of each joist and center joist bearing on the center of the support. F. Top Chord Extensions and Extended Ends: Provide top chord extensions and extended ends on joists where shown in contract drawings complying with the requirements of SJI specification and load tables. Top chord extensions shall extend back to the first interior panel point from the joist exterior panel point as a minimum. G. Ceiling Extensions: Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached directly to joist bottom chord. Provide either an extended bottom chord element or a separate unit, to suit manufacturer's standards, of sufficient strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2" of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated. H. Bridging: Provide horizontal and/or diagonal type bridging for all joists, complying with SJI specifications. 1. Examine the drawings carefully for special bridging requirements. 2. Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams. I. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI specifications, unless otherwise indicated. J. Header Units: Any situation requiring heading of joists not shown on the structural drawings shall be referred to the manufacturer's engineer for framing. K. Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, grease, oil and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by rotary wire brushes and/or solvents before application of shop paint. Apply one shop coat of primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Place and secure steel joists strictly in accordance with SJI code of standard practice, SJI specifications,final shop drawings, and as herein specified. Steel Joists 05 20 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Placing Joists: Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. 1. Provide required bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. Remove as required for architectural, structural, and mechanical clearances after erection. 2. Where members support joists from both sides, and the supporting width does not meet the SJI recommendations for bearing lengths of both joists,then offset joists to provide recommended bearing lengths. Such offsets shall be subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer. C. Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams. 3.2 FASTENING JOISTS A. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are secured to supporting members, and are properly braced. B. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI specifications for type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists. C. Joists where shown with bottom chord extensions shall not have the bottom chords connected to the supporting members until the full dead load is applied. D. Secure joists resting on masonry or concrete bearing surfaces by bedding in grout and anchoring to masonry or concrete construction as specified in SJI specifications for type of steel joist used. E. Touch-Up Painting: After joist installation, paint field bolt heads and nuts,welded areas, and abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting. 3.3 ATTACHMENTS TO JOISTS A. The Contractor shall ensure that no cuts or holes are made in the members of the erected joists for attachment of ceiling, ducts, pipes, or any other items not specifically shown in the contract drawings. Use of power driven fasteners in the diagonal and bottom chord members of the joists is prohibited. Steel Joists 05 20 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. The Contractor shall not hang any elements from the top or bottom chords of joists except ceiling, ducts, pipes or other items specifically shown on the Contract Documents, without the written authorization of the Engineer. All pipes, ducts, and other mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment suspended from the joists shall have the hanger attached at a joist panel point only. No mechanical, electrical, or plumbing equipment shall be hung along the top or bottom chord between panel points except as approved otherwise in writing by the Architect/Engineer. All ceilings weighing 3 PSF or less may have the grid hung anywhere along the bottom chord. Ceilings weighing more than 3 PSF shall have the grid hung only at joist panel points. Heavy pipes, ducts, or other equipment hung from bar joists may require additional joist reinforcement and shall be referred to the Engineer for framing. 3.4 FIELD INSPECTION Joists welded in place are also subject to inspection and testing. Remove and replace work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work at no cost to Owner. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of the steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. END OF SECTION 05 20 00 Steel Joists 05 20 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 05 3100-STEEL ROOF DECK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SCOPE OF WORK A. Supplier: The metal deck supplier shall furnish all metal deck materials and accessories indicated on the Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings required to produce a complete job including but not necessarily limited to deck units, cover plates, pour stops, metal deck edge closures, cell closures, cant strips, sump pans, and all related accessories. B. Erector: The Subcontractor responsible for erecting the metal deck shall provide all labor and equipment as required to place all metal deck components and accessories as described above. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS The metal deck supplier shall be a manufacturer with a minimum of two years successful experience and with a minimum of two successful jobs of a comparable size and scope to this project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards except as otherwise indicated or specified: 1. "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks", as published by the Steel Deck Institute (SDI). 2. "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members", as published by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. "Structural Welding Code-Steel", as published by the American Welding Society (AWS). B. Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS procedures. Steel Roof Deck 05 31 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Certification: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of deck specified. Also submit a certificate of product compliance with SDI Standards as specified. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings showing type of deck, complete layout, attachment details, closures, edge strips, supplementary framing, and all other accessories. C. Insurance Certification: Assist Architect and Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire, windstorm, and extended coverage insurance. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. See General Notes on the drawings for the location, depth, design thickness, section properties, and suggested manufacturer for all required roof decks. 2.2 GRADES OF STEEL Steel deck shall be manufactured from steel conforming to ASTM Designation A611 Grades C, D, or E for painted deck or A446 Grades A, B, C, D, E or F for galvanized deck or Engineer approved equal, having a minimum yield strength of 33,000 PSI. 2.3 FINISH A. Galvanizing: Steel deck shall be galvanized with a protective zinc coating conforming to ASTM A525 G60 class. 2.4 ROOF DECK ACCESSORIES Provide minimum 20 gauge ridge and valley plates, minimum 20 gauge cant strips, minimum 14 gauge sump pans, minimum 20 gauge inside or outside closure channels, minimum 20 gauge butt strips at change of deck directions, minimum 20 gauge filler sheets, and rubber closures as required to provide a finished surface for the application of insulation and roofing. 2.5 FABRICATION Steel Roof Deck 05 31 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Metal Deck Spans: Metal deck spans shall not exceed the maximum center-to-center spans as required by SDI criteria. Where possible, all metal deck shall extend over three or more supports. B. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips of not less than 0.071" minimum (14 gage) cold-formed sheet steel. Form to provide tight fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. Provide sheet metal closures at all slab edges, columns, walls, and openings unless steel angles or bent plates are specified in details on the drawings. Also, provide wherever deck stops or changes direction. Weld closures at edge supports with 1" long weld at 12" maximum centers unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Provide minimum 2" bearing over steel support. Closures and support welds shall be designed to support a 200 pound concentrated load at the roof edge without exceeding a stress of 0.8 Fy. 2.6 ROOF OPENINGS Roof openings less than 6" square or diameter require no reinforcement. Openings 6" to 10" inclusive shall be reinforced with a 20 gauge galvanized plate welded to the deck at each corner and 6" maximum centers with a 5/8" diameter puddle weld or sheet metal screws. Larger openings shall be referred to the Engineer for framing. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units as accessories in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and approved shop drawings, and as specified herein: 1. Place deck units on supporting framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing 2" minimum on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. 2. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. 3. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. 4. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry. 5. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. 6. Do not use roof deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. B. Attachment of Roof Deck: Steel Roof Deck 05 31 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Welding: a. Typical Requirements: Roof deck units shall be welded to each structural support member using 5/8" diameter puddle welds at spacing shown on Typical Detail on plans. Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material at end laps and side joints and shall have good fusion to the supporting members. b. Side Laps: Side laps of adjacent units shall be fastened by sheet metal screws at spacing shown on Typical Detail on plans. C. Welding Washers: Welding washers shall be used only when welding steel deck less than 0.028" thickness. 2. Minimum Bearing: Provide a minimum end bearing of 3" over supports. 3. End Laps: End laps of sheets shall be a minimum of two inches and shall occur over supports. Roofs having a slope of 1/4 inch or more in 12 inches shall be erected beginning at the low side to insure that end laps are shingle fashion. C. Welding Requirements: Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking. E. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength continuity of decking and support of other work shown on the drawings. F. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide UL approved punched hanger slots between cells or flutes of lower element where roof deck units are to receive hangers for support of ceiling construction, air ducts, diffusers, or lighting fixtures. 1. Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of roof deck units may be used instead of hanger slots. 2. Locate slots or clips at not more than 14" o.c. in both directions, not over 9" from walls at ends, and not more than 12" from walls at sides, unless otherwise shown. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment devices. 4. Loads hanging from metal deck slabs shall not exceed 100 pounds unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings. Steel Roof Deck 05 31 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 G. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of deck units, except where taped joints are specified. 3.2 TOUCH-UP PAINTING After deck installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. In areas where shop-painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply touch-up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces. 3.3 INSPECTION Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing by the Owner's Testing Laboratory. Expense of removing and replacing portions of decking for testing purposes will be borne by Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work. Cost of such removal and replacement shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 05 3100 Steel Roof Deck 05 31 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 05 40 00-COLDFORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of coldformed metal framing used as structural support for exterior cladding is shown on the drawings. B. Types of coldformed metal framing units include the following: 1. Non-load bearing studs 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information for each item of coldformed framing and accessories. 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENT With each type of metal framing indicated on the Architectural or Structural Drawings, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. 2.2 GRADES OF STEEL A. For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi and conform to ASTM A 446 and/or A 570. Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. For 18-gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi and conform to ASTM A 446 and/or A 570. 2.3 FINISH A. Provide galvanized finish to all metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525 for minimum G60 coating. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project site with installers of other work including door and window frames and mechanical and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or powder-driven fasteners, or 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Abutting pieces of track shall be securely spliced together. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. Splices in axially loaded and non-loaded bearing exterior cladding stud systems shall not be permitted. D. Provide four(4) studs at each intersecting wall and three (3) studs at each corner. E. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. F. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. G. Installation of Wall Stud System: Studs shall be seated firmly against the track webs allowing load transfer by direct bearing without complete dependence on the connection to the track. Connect studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening as indicated on the drawings at both inside and outside flanges. H. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" square with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated. I. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, with separate studs; do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. J. Horizontal Bridging: 1. Install horizontal bridging in all stud systems, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 4'-0" o.c. 2. Provide stud bracing during construction as required for studs to carry construction loads. END OF SECTION 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 05 50 00- METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Metal ladders. 5. Collapsable metal bollards. 6. Steel pipe fabricated gate. 7. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts,steel pipe sleeves,slotted-channel inserts,and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry"for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. 2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing"for steel framing, supports, elevator machine beams, hoist beams, divider beams, door frames, and other steel items attached to the structural steel framing. 3. Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches, roof fall through protection and aluminum roof ladders. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturer's written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Fasteners. 3. Shop primers. 4. Shrinkage-resisting grout. 5. Manufactured metal ladders. 6. Collapsable metal bollards. B. Shop Drawings:Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans,elevations,sections,and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Shelf angles. 5. Metal ladders. 6. Collapsable metal bollards. 7. Loose steel lintels. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor slabs, decks, and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. C. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes:ASTM A276/A276M,Type 304. D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate:ASTM A786/A786M,rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D. E. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel. F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing. G. Steel Pipe:ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. H. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A741. 1. Wire Rope Fittings: Hot-dip galvanized-steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. I. Stainless Steel Wire Rope: Wire rope manufactured from stainless steel wire complying with ASTM A492,Type 316. 1. Wire Rope Fittings: Stainless steel connectors, Type 316, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. J. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated. K. Aluminum Extrusions:ASTM B221,Alloy 6063-T6. L. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate:ASTM 13632/13632M,Alloy 6061-T6. M. Aluminum Castings: ASTM 1326/626M, Alloy 443.0-F. N. Bronze Extrusions:ASTM B455,Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). O. Bronze Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or UNS No. C84400 (leaded semired brass). P. Nickel Silver Castings:ASTM B584,Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum, stainless steel or nickel silver. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated,flat washers. C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325,Type 3, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH3, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and where indicated,flat washers. D. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts,ASTM F593; with hex nuts,ASTM F594; and,where indicated,flat washers; Alloy Group 1. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated,flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329/F2329M. G. Post-Installed Anchors:Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594. H. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9113 "Painting." B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.5 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercutting or overlapping. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated and coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches,with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes,shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer specified in Section 09 91 13 "Painting." 2.7 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. After fabrication galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. 2.8 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8 by 2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4-inch diameter, steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. 6. Provide OSHA approved ladder cages where required by applicable codes. 7. Source Limitations: Obtain nonslip surfaces from single source from single manufacturer. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 9. Galvanize and prime exterior ladders, including brackets. C. Aluminum Roof Ladders: Refer to Specification Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories". 2.9 METAL BOLLARDS A. Furnish and install 4-inch diameter, 42-inch high, Schedule 80, collapsible steel pipe bollards, with HDPE bollard covers. 1. Bollard Basis of Design: Ideal Shield 4-inch collapsible locking bollard. 2. Collapsible bollards shall have U.S. Steel Collapsible Plate (pad lock not included). B. Furnish and install bollard covers manufactured using a 1/8" thick High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) at each bollard. 1. Basis of Design: Ideal Shield Smooth Bollard Post Sleeve with HDPE Dome Top, Yellow. Diameter as required for bollard. C. Prime steel bollards with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize bearing and leveling plates. C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 2.11 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. After fabrication, galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. 2.12 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.13 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Other Steel Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 4. Galvanized-Steel Items: SSPC-SP 16, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2.15 ALUMINUM FINISHES a. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12. b. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I,AA-M12C22A41. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting,and Placement: Perform cutting,drilling,and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level,plumb,true,and free of rack;and measured from established lines and levels. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercutting or overlapping. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum:Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor shelf angles securely to construction with anchor bolts. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL LADDERS a. Secure ladders to adjacent construction with the clip angles attached to the stringer. b. Install brackets as required for securing of ladders welded or bolted to structural steel or built into masonry or concrete. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL BOLLARDS A. Do not fill collapsable bollards with concrete. B. Anchor collapsable bollards with anchor bolts as directed by bollard manufacturer. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Install plastic bollard covers. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with shrinkage-resistant grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.6 REPAIRS A. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Wood furring and grounds. 5. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following,from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp from the grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at anytime during the test. 1. Exterior Type:Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6841. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. D. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing. 3. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet accessories, wall cabinets and miscellaneous wall-mounted items and equipment. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Grounds. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior,A-C,fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. General Requirements: 1. All types of "powder-actuated" fastening systems, "hammer drive" fastening systems, "ram-set" systems and similar type fastening systems are strictly prohibited from use on the project for permanent or temporary fasteners into permanent building components, except as indicated on Drawings or as specifically approved by the Architect. 2. All types of permanent or temporary fastening systems or components which are not removable without damage to permanent building components are strictly prohibited from use, except as indicated (example: concrete nails, clinched double nails in concrete pilot holes, rawl spikes, zemac nailins, etc.) 3. Wedge type expansion anchors are prohibited at all locations where wedging action would cause spalling or damage to permanent building components. 4. Plastic or nylon sleeves, nailins, plugs, cores, etc. are not acceptable as fastener components where exposed to weather. 5. All fasteners and other components exposed to weather or in exterior locations must be stainless steel, Monel or other approved corrosion-resistant material or finish. Cadmium- plated or electro-galvanized finishes are not acceptable. 6. All fasteners installed in or in contact with type ACQ treated lumber(Yellawood) must be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel or be specifically approved for installation in ACQ treated materials. 7. Regardless of the fastening system utilized, the Contractor is responsible for sizing, frequency and spacing of fasteners according to substrate,load conditions and acceptable engineering practices and Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325, galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components, stainless steel for stainless steel components. C. Hardened Steel Self-Threading Screw Anchor("Tapcon"Anchors): Anchorage to solid or hollow masonry and concrete, stainless steel at exterior locations. D. Epoxy Resin Adhesive Type: Threaded studs in concrete, brick or concrete masonry, stainless steel. E. Buildex TEKS self-drilling screws or type required for anchorage to steel. F. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing, corrosion-resistant coating. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized- asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb,true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accuratelyto other construction. Locate furring, nailers,blocking,grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. C. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 06 16 00- SHEATHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Parapet sheathing. 3. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL AND PARAPET SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall and Parapet Sheathing: ASTM C1177/C1177M. 1. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Certainteed; GlasRoc. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. C. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP. d. USG Corporation; Securock. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. 2.2 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. General Requirements: 1. All types of "powder-actuated" fastening systems, "hammer drive" fastening systems, "ram-set" systems and similar type fastening systems are strictly prohibited from use on the project for permanent or temporary fasteners into permanent building components, except as indicated on Drawings or as specifically approved by the Architect. 2. All types of permanent or temporary fastening systems or components which are not removable without damage to permanent building components are strictly prohibited from use, except as indicated (example: concrete nails, clinched double nails in concrete pilot holes, rawl spikes, zemac nailins, etc.) 3. Wedge type expansion anchors are prohibited at all locations where wedging action would cause spalling or damage to permanent building components. 4. Plastic or nylon sleeves, nailins, plugs, cores, etc. are not acceptable as fastener components where exposed to weather. 5. All fasteners and other components exposed to weather or in exterior locations must be stainless steel, Monel or other approved corrosion-resistant material or finish. Cadmium- plated or electro-galvanized finishes are not acceptable. SHEATHING 06 16 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. All fasteners installed in or in contact with type ACQ treated lumber(Yellawood) must be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel or be specifically approved for installation in ACQ treated materials. 7. Regardless of the fastening system utilized, the Contractor is responsible for sizing, frequency and spacing of fasteners according to substrate,load conditions and acceptable engineering practices and Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325, galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components, stainless steel for stainless steel components. C. Hardened Steel Self-Threading Screw Anchor("Tapcon"Anchors): Anchorage to solid or hollow masonry and concrete, stainless steel at exterior locations. D. Epoxy Resin Adhesive Type: Threaded studs in concrete, brick or concrete masonry, stainless steel. E. Buildex TEKS self-drilling screws or type required for anchorage to steel. F. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing, corrosion-resistant coating. 2.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch,of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. D. Coordinate wall parapet and sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. SHEATHING 06 16 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday when rain is forecast. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture,to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. D. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat.Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant.Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered.Seal other penetrations and openings. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING 06 16 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 06 4116- PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 12 36 61.16 "Solid Surfacing Countertops". 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic Laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Thermoset decorative panels. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations with Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurement on Shop Drawings. 2. Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay. 1. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LID 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart LLC. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: PVC edge banding, 3.0 mm thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. G. Materials for Semi-Exposed Surfaces: PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS. a. Edges of Plastic Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12-inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern and finish. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs:Thermoset decorative panels with PVC edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. I. Countertops 1. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Where indicated on drawings. Refer to 12 36 61.16 "Solid Surfacing Countertops". J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated on the Room Finish Schedule. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL,for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8 and 3.10. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening. C. Back-Mounted Pulls:ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B02011. 1. Amerock BP36571G10 Monument 5-1/16 inch Center to Center Pull PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Finish: Satin Nickel. D. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches,ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B03131. E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports:ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04071;with shelf rests, B04081. F. Shelf Rests:ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal with rubber anti-slip pads. G. Work Station Brackets: A&M Hardware, Inc. 18"x 24" Brackets, black 909-58. H. Concealed Support Arm Brackets: A&M Hardware, Inc., C-9 Concealed Brackets, Model C(1.0)9, black 909-59. I. Drawer Slides:ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 1. Heavy-Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mount. a. Type: Full extension. b. Material: Zinc-plated ball bearing slides. J. Door Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07121. K. Double Door Latch: CompX Timberline DL Series. L. Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07041. M. Door and Drawer Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L03011. N. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage where indicated on the drawings, 3'-0" o.c. minimum. 1. Color: as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full line of colors. O. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for ANSI/BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: ANSI/BHMA 630. P. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors:Select material,type,size,and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous- metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify the Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware,appliances,electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;where not possible to repair, replace woodwork.Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 06 4116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 06 64 00- PLASTIC PANELING (FRP1) PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Factory-laminated wall plastic sheet paneling. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency:Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and FM Approvals. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. FM 4880 approved. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling (FRP1): Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D5319. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marlite Standard FRP Panels or comparable product by one of the following: a. Crane Composites, Inc. PLASTIC PANELING (FRP1) 06 64 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 b. Glasteel. C. Marlite. d. Newcourt, Inc. e. Nudo Products, Inc. f. Parkland Plastics, Inc. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency in accordance with ASTM E84. Identify products with appropriate markings from an applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 4. Wall Panel Size:As indicated on Drawings. 5. Surface Finish: P199, Pebbled. 6. Color: "Bright White". 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels. B. Moldings: PVC pattern-matched to panel. C. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. D. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Corners: Plumb and straight. 2. Surfaces: Smooth, sound, and uniform. 3. Nails or Screw Fasteners: Countersunk. 4. Joints and Cracks: Filled flush and smooth with adjoining surfaces. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing them in installation space before installation in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. PLASTIC PANELING (FRP1) 06 64 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches wide. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Do all cutting with carbide-tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with snips. 2. Install panels plumb, level, square, flat, and in proper alignment. 3. Install panels to be water resistant and washable. 4. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and cornerjoints. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. G. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING (FRP1) 06 64 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 07 19 17 -ANTI-GRAFFITI COATINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface applied anti-graffiti coatings. 2. Extended written warranty. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 0125 00—Substitution Procedures. B. Product Data: including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Statement of qualifications. 2. Statement of compliance with Regulatory Requirements. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals as specified in Part 3. 4. Manufacturer's field reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Not less than 5 years' experience in the actual production of specified products. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, plus the following: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. C. Product Qualifications:The anti-graffiti coating shall meet the following requirements: 1. Active Content: Organofluorosilane. 2. Solvent: None, water-borne. 3. VOC Content: less than 50 grams per liter. 4. Cleaning Cycles: ASTM D 6578 "Standard Practice for Determination of Graffiti Resistance" minimum 25 cycles without loss of repellency. 5. Breathability:ASTM D1653 greater than 95%water vapor transmission. 6. Surface Appearance: No appreciable difference compared to non-coated surface. 7. Excellent Ultraviolet light stability. D. Regulatory and Safety Requirements: Products must have an independent laboratory analysis to verify that material does not contain any known carcinogens. Materials shall comply with State and local regulations concerning AIM (Architectural, Industrial and Maintenance) coatings ANTI-GRAFFITI COATINGS 07 19 17-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 regarding Volatile Organic Content (VOC). If used indoors the material must comply with the following safety requirements: 1. Flammability, Smoke Spread and Toxic Fume Emission During Burning(BS 6853) a. Toxic gases below IDLH level. b. Flame Propagation: Does not propagate flame. C. Smoke emission: No change. 1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain ambient temperature above 40 degrees F during and 24 hours after installation. 2. Do not proceed with application on materials if ice or frost is covering the substrate. 3. Do not proceed with application if ambient temperature of surface exceeds 100-degree F. 4. Do not proceed with the application of materials in rainy conditions or if heavy rain is anticipated within 4 hours after application. B. Sealer Coordination: 1. Verify compatibility with curing compounds, patching materials, repair mortar, paints, sealants, to be used on masonry surfaces to ensure compatibility with the anti-graffiti coating. 1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. The system manufacture shall furnish the Owner a written single source performance warranty that the Anti-Graffiti Coating System will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency for a five(5)year period from the date of completion of the work provided under this section. 1. All defective areas shall be retreated by the system manufacture as determined by the Engineer. 2. The Anti-Graffiti manufacturer shall be responsible for providing labor and material to reseal area where coating effectiveness does not meet the specified limits. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products of the following anti-graffiti manufacturer listed below will be acceptable for use on this project, provided that they meet the performance requirements of these specifications. Product substitution of materials or manufacturers must comply with Section 1.02. 1. Basis of Design: Protectosil ANTIGRAFFITI®, Evonil<Corporation 1-800-828-0919. ANTI-GRAFFITI COATINGS 07 19 17-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: Install coverings to protect adjacent surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Surfaces to receive sealer shall be cleaned of dirt, oil, graffiti, grease, laitance, and other contaminants. All other surfaces shall be cleaned by mid-pressure water (1500 psi) and commercial paint strippers. Pressure washing is the minimum cleaning that will be accepted other methods,such as blast racking, mobile power scrubbing and sandblasting may be submitted. 2. Remove dirt, dust and materials that will interfere with the proper and effective application of the anti-graffiti coating. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare the surfaces of the concrete as recommended by the Anti-graffiti Manufacturer and acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Check the compatibility of all caulking and patching material to be used with the anti- graffiti coating. 4. Sealants, patching materials,and expansion joints shall have been installed and approved. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before an anti-graffiti coating will be accepted a field test evaluation will be done. The cost of the field testing will be the responsibility of the contractor. The owner's representative will approve the test area prior to starting the project. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Product shall be applied as per manufacturer's application instructions and recommendations for this specific project. Provide a written copy of manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply at temperature and weather conditions recommended by the manufacture or written in this specification. C. Surface residue shall be brushed out thoroughly until they completely penetrate into the surface. D. Protect treated areas from rain and other surface water for a period of not less than four hours after application. E. Provide adequate ventilation and follow all safety regulations for the City, County and State. ANTI-GRAFFITI COATINGS 07 19 17-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.5 CLEANING A. As Work Progresses: Clean spillage from adjacent surfaces using materials and methods as recommended by anti-graffiti manufacturer. B. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces when no longer needed. 3.6 COMPLETION A. Work that does not conform to specified requirements shall be corrected and/or replaced as directed by the Owners Representative at contractor's expense without extension of time. END OF SECTION 07 19 17 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATINGS 07 19 17-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 07 2100-THERMAL INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extruded polystyrene (XPS) rigid foam insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. (For use in interior and exterior Metal Stud Wall Cavities.) 3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. (For use in fire stopping details, where indicated in drawings.) 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Extruded polystyrene (XPS) rigid foam insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer's Certification: Listing type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed in each element of the building thermal envelope. 1. Sign, date, and post the certification in a conspicuous location on Project site. B. Product test reports. C. Research reports. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (XPS) FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, Type IV: ASTM C578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch. Width as indicated on drawings. 1. Basis of Design: Owens Corning Foamular 250. 2. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DuPont de Nemours, Inc. b. Owens Corning. C. The Dow Chemical Company. 3. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, Unfaced:ASTM C665,Type I; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.Thickness and width as indicated in drawings. 1. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Certainteed; SAINT-GOBAIN. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. 2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION A. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. Thickness and width as indicated on drawings. 1. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Owens Corning. C. ROCKWOOL. 2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. 2. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DAP Touch 'n Seal: 1.75 PCF FR Spray Foam Insulation. 1) Available in multiple, different sized Disposable Spray Foam Kits. 2) DAP Products, Inc.: 1645 Manufacturer Dr., Fenton, MO 63026. Toll Free: (800) 325-6180. Direct: (636) 349-5855. Fax: (636) 349-5335. www.touch-n- seal.com b. Dow FROTH-PAK Foam Sealant 1) Available in multiple, different sized Disposable Spray Foam Kits. 2) Dow Chemical Company; Dow Building Solutions, 200 Larkin Center, 1605 Joseph Drive, Midland, MI 48674. (866) 583-2583. www.dowbuildingsolutions.com THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Ignition Barrier/Thermal Barrier: Intumescent coating applied over Spray Polyurethane Foam (SPF)to achieve a "15 Minute Alternative to Thermal Barrier"and "5 Minute Ignition Barrier" in compliance with ICC IBC. a. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or equivalent manufacturer: 1) DC315 Thermal Barrier Paint for Spray Foam (SPF). a) International Fireproof Technology, Inc. 17528 Von Karman Ave., Irvine, CA 92614. (949) 975-8588.www.painttoprotect.com B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer. C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry,and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed. D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths.Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Fit courses of insulation between obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions, and with faces flush. 2. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 3. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry." 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.S lb/cu. ft. 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation:Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 07 27 20- FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Materials and installation methods supplementing a one-component vapour permeable, liquid applied elastic air and water barrier, vapour retarder materials and assemblies, located in the non-accessible part of the wall. B. Materials and installation to bridge and seal air leakage pathways and gaps, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Connections of the walls to the roof air barrier. 2. Connections of the walls to the foundations. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Openings and penetrations of window frames, store front, curtain wall. 5. Door frames. 6. Piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations. 7. Masonry ties, screws, bolts and similar penetrations. 8. All other air leakage pathways in the building envelope. 1.3 Related Sections A. Section 04 20 00— Unit Masonry: Flexible through wall flashing membrane. Sealing flashing to wall surface. B. Section 06 10 53— Miscellaneous Carpentry: Covering preservative-treated materials with self- adhering membranes. C. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing. D. Section 07 9000—Joint Protection: Sealants. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REFERENCES A. ASTM E 2178-01: Standard Test for Determining the Air Permeability of Building Materials. B. ASTM E 2357, Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assembly (Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System). Ensure tests were conducted on steel stud frame walls with penetrations (Specimen 2) as some air barrier assembly are not tested in that critical mode. C. ASTM E283-91:Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. CODE MANDATED ASTM E331: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. ASTM E96: Water Vapor Transmission of Materials, Procedure B F. AATCC 127 Water Resistance G. ASTM D 1970, Self Sealability H. ICC-ES AC212, Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging I. CODE MANDATED Fire Testing:Air Barrier,as a component of a wall assembly,shall have passed a NFPA 285 complete wall fire test. J. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning K. Listed as an evaluated system by Air Barrier Association of America at www.airbarriers.org. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air Barrier Membrane Continuity: The application of the Air Barrier products and methods, when complete,shall provide a continuous and unbroken membrane"enclosure"on all exterior walls, soffits and other surfaces enclosing conditioned space. Special attention shall be paid to all door, window and louver penetrations and proper membrane continuity between the exterior cavity wall membrane and the specified roof system. (See attached details in this specification section and the Drawings for indications on Floor Plan & Wall Sections and their associated enlarge details.) B. Provide an air barrier system constructed to perform as a continuous elastic air barrier, and as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior any incidental condensation or water penetration. Membrane shall accommodate movements of building materials by providing expansion and control joints as required, with accessory air seal materials at such locations, changes in substrate and perimeter conditions. 1. The air barrier shall have the following characteristics: a. It must be continuous, with all joints made air-tight. b. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind,fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent assembly, allowing for the relative movement of assembly due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: 1) Foundation and walls. 2) Walls and the windows,curtain walls,storefronts, louvers and doors in those walls. 3) Different wall assemblies. 4) Wall and roof. 5) Wall and soffits below conditioned space 6) Wall and roof over conditioned and unconditioned space. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 7) Walls,floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. 8) Walls,floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. 9) Flashing to wall surface. 2. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made air-tight. 3. Air Permeability: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq.ft. @ 10.5 psf per ASTM E283. 4. Air Permeability: @ delta P of 0.3 inches water...0.002 CFM/ft2 per ASTM E 2178 5. ASTM E 2357, Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System a. System Air Leakage, Requirement—0.0008 CFM/ft2 maximum b. Penetration Check, Requirement—0.00088 CFM/ft2 maximum 6. ASTM E96 Water Vapor Permeance:10-20 Perms per Procedure B 7. ASTM E331, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference- 10 psf for 2 hours. 8. Elongation: Minimum 50% per ASTM D412. 9. AATC 127 Water Resistance— Pass 10. ASTM D 1970 Self Sealability—Pass 11. ICC-ES AC212, Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging—Pass 12. Fire Testing:Air Barrier, as a component of a wall assembly,shall have passed a NFPA 285 complete wall fire test. 13. ASTM E84 Class A Fire Resistant 14. Listed as an evaluated assembly by the Air Barrier Association at www.airbarriers.org. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: Submit per Section 0133 00—Submittal Procedures. B. Quality Assurance Program: Submit evidence of current Contractor accreditation and Installer certification under the Air Barrier Association of America's (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP). Submit accreditation number of the Contractor and certification number(s) of the ABAA Certified Installer(s). C. Product Data: Submit material Manufacturer's Product Data, material manufacturer's instructions for evaluating, preparing,and treating substrate,temperature and other limitations of installation conditions,Technical Data, and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Submit letter from primary air barrier material manufacturer indicating approval of materials that are proposed to be used that are not currently listed in the accessories section of this specification for that manufacturer's material. 2. Include statement from the primary air barrier material manufacturer that the materials used in their air barrier assembly which will be used to adhere to the underlying substrate are chemically compatible to the substrate material. D. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of air barrier assemblies and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope assemblies and materials, membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in the construction will be bridged, how inside and outside corners are negotiated, how materials that cover the materials are secured with air-tight condition maintained, and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes, electric boxes and similar items are sealed. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Include VOC content of each material, and applicable legal limit in the jurisdiction of the project. 2. Include statement that materials are compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. 3. Include required values for field adhesion test on each substrate in accordance with ASTM D4541 (modified), using a type II pull tester. E. Samples: Submit clearly labelled samples, three (3) inch by four (4) inch minimum size of each material specified. F. Prior to commencing the Work, submit manufacturer's independent Laboratory Report for the Air Barrier Assembly testing on ASTM E 2357 tested on a steel stud frame wall, results are to be based on Specimen 2 testing only. G. Prior to commencing the Work, submit documentation certifying that the air barrier system has been tested independently, indicating compliance with the performance requirements of the Air Barrier Association of Association. H. Prior to commencing the Work, submit copies of manufacturers' literature for the system, membrane, primers, sealants, adhesives and associated auxiliary materials shall be included as parts of the system that is listed by the Air Barrier Association of America evaluation. I. Prior to commencing the Work,submit references clearly indicating that the materials proposed have been installed for not less than three years on projects of similar scope and nature. J. Prior to commencing the Work, submit manufacturers' complete set of standard details for air barrier/vapor retarders. The manufacturer's representative shall review the contract drawings and note any modifications required to make the system air and water tight. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance Program:The Contractor shall implement and comply with the requirements of the Air Barrier Association of America's (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP) for the project, including audits of the project by an ABAA Certified Auditor. All deficiencies identified by the auditor shall be corrected prior to proceeding with any work that will necessitate removal and replacement to correct deficiencies in the air barrier system. B. Installers Qualifications:All work shall be performed by ABAA Certified Installers. C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide primary products, including each component of the air barrier membrane system,which has been commercially available for a minimum of 3 years. D. Submit in writing, a document stating that the applicator of the primary air barrier membrane specified in this section is recognized by the manufacturer as suitable for the execution of the Work. E. Perform Work in accordance with the printed requirements of the air barrier manufacturer and this specification. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 F. Maintain one copy of manufacturer instructions on site. G. At the beginning of the Work and at all times during the execution of the Work, allow access to Work site by the air barrier membrane manufacturer's representative. H. Compatibility: Submit letter from primary material manufacturer stating that materials proposed for use are permanently chemically compatible and adhesively compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. Submit letter from manufacturer stating that cleaning materials used during installation are chemically compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. I. Manufacturer: Components used in this section shall be sourced from one manufacturer, including sheet membrane, air barrier sealants, primers, mastics, tapes and adhesives as listed as an evaluated air barrier assembly by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA). 1.8 MOCK-UP A. Construct mockup in accordance with Section 0140 00—Quality Requirements: Requirements for a mock-up. B. Location: Where indicated in the Drawings. C. Coordination: Coordinate with masonry veneer wall mock-up as noted in Section 04 20 00- Unit Masonry, Part 1-General; Article 1.7; Paragraph A- "Sample Panel Mockups." D. Construct typical exterior wall panel: Items to be incorporated in mock-up include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. For metal stud wall system: Masonry veneer system,through wall flexible flashing,glass- faced gypsum sheathing, wall ties, board insulation, metal studs, aluminum curtain wall frame, aluminum window frame, vinyl window Frame, showing air barrier membrane application details and transition membranes to foundation, roofing system and adjacent masonry Wall system. 2. For masonry wall system: Masonry veneer system, concrete masonry backup, wall ties, through wall flexible flashing, board insulation, aluminum window frame, showing air barrier membrane application details and transition membranes to foundation, roofing system and adjacent metal stud Wall system. E. Allow 72 hours for inspection of mock-up by Architect before proceeding with air barrier work. 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a minimum of four weeks prior to commencing work of this section,Agenda shall include, as a minimum, construction and testing of mock-up, sequence of construction, coordination with substrate preparation, air barrier materials approved for use, compatibility of materials,coordination with installation of adjacent and covering materials,and details of construction and chemical/fire safety plans.Attendance is required by representatives of related trades including covering materials, substrate materials and adjacent materials. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE AND THE THROUGH WALL FLASHING MEMBRANE PRIOR TO THE PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original packaging with seals unbroken, labelled with Material Manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacturer and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by material manufacturer. C. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight and other sources of ultra-violet light. D. Handle materials in accordance with material manufacturer's recommendations. E. All pail goods shall bear the ABAA Evaluated Air Barrier label. F. Do not double stack pail goods. G. Store roll materials on end in original packaging. H. Keep all products stored at above 40°F.Apply to a substrate with a surface T°F of 40°F and rising. DO NOT ALLOW PRODUCT TO FREEZE. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Install fluid-applied air barrier material within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by material manufacturer. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate. B. Field Conditions: Do not install air barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist. Do not install air barrier when the temperature of substrate surfaces and surrounding air temperatures are below those recommended by the manufacturer. C. Compatibility: Do not allow air barrier materials to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials D. Ultra Violet Light Exposure: Do not expose air barrier materials to sunlight longer than as recommended by the material manufacturer. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Ensure continuity of the air seal throughout the scope of this section. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Material Warranty: Provide material manufacturer's standard product warranty,for a minimum three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer Warranty: FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Applicator must be approved by ABAA and Manufacturer 2. Provide a two (2) year installation warranty from date of Substantial Completion, including all accessories and materials of the air barrier assembly, against failures, including loss of air tight seal, loss of watertight seal, loss of attachment, loss of adhesion and failure to cure properly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR BARRIER MATERIAL A. Liquid air barrier: One component elastomeric membrane, spray, trowel or brush applied, having the following characteristics and have passed all evaluations by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) and be listed on their web site as having passed all the following evaluations: 1. Air permeability: a. Air Leakage Thru Cured Films: <0.04 cfm/ft2 @ 10.5 Ibs/ft2 or<0.005 L/sm2 @ 75 Pa to ASTM E283 (Modified) 24 hours, +/- 10%. b. Air Leakage per ASTM E 2178,dry film,delta P of 0.3 inches of water,0.002+/- 10% 2. Air Barrier System Test on Full Scale Wall Assembly, ASTM E 2357 a. System Air Leakage, 0.0008 CFM/ft2+/- 10% b. Penetrations Check, MUST PASS ASTM E 2357 requirements. 3. Water Vapor permeance: (704 ng/Pa.m2.s.) 10 to 20 perms, ASTM E96 Method B. Note: The material specified is VAPOR PERMEABLE. 4. Elongation (ASTM D412: >50%) 5. Low temperature flexibility and crack bridging: Pass—ICC-ES AC212 6. ASTM D 1970, Self Sealability—Pass 7. AATCC 127 Water Resistance—Pass 8. ASTM E84, Class A Fire Resistant 9. Recycle content>20% B. Basis of Design Product: 1. Wall Guardian FW-100A(a non-asphaltic product) 2. Other products/assemblies meeting all requirements of Paragraph 2.1, A(Above) C. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. STS Coatings, Wall Guardian, 830-995-5177, www.wallguardian.com, a Certified Texas HUB 2. Other manufacturers with products/assemblies meeting all requirements of Paragraph 2.01,A(Above) 2.2 AIR BARRIER ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Transition Membrane,Self-Adhering: Polymer-based,sheet membrane complete with polyester facing, and having the following physical properties: 1. Thickness: 35 mils (0.5 mm) min. 2. Vapor permeance: <0.1 3. Low temperature flexibility: -20 F to CGSB 37-GP-56M. 4. Elongation: >90%to ASTM D412-modifed 5. ASTM E331, 10 psf for 2 hours FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Acceptable material: 1) UT-40 by STS Coatings for use with the FW-100 system. 2) Others as recommended by manufacturer. B. Primer for self-adhering membranes: Synthetic polymer-based adhesive type, quick setting, having the following characteristics: 1. Acceptable material: As manufactured and/or recommended by the Air Barrier System manufacturer. Note: Primer shall be compatible with specified glass faced gypsum sheathing. 2. Verify compatibility of self-adhering membranes with preservative treated materials specified in Section 06 10 53. Prime preservative treated materials as required using primer recommended by self-adhering membrane manufacturer or use the non-chemical thermally modified wood known as EcoPrem. 3. Other Primers as recommended by manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. C. Flexible Base Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Self-Adhering, Stainless Steel Fabric Flashing: Composite,flashing product consisting of 2 mil of Type 304 stainless steel sheet, bonded to a layer of polymeric fabric with a butyl adhesive,to produce an overall thickness of 40 mil. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide York Manufacturing, Inc; 304 Self-Adhering Stainless Steel or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2) STS Coatings, Inc. 3) VaproShield LLC. 4) Wire-Bond. 5) York Manufacturing, Inc. b. Applications: Use 40-mil-thick flashing at base of walls. Use 10-mil- thick flashing at windows, doors, and small wall penetrations; not at base of walls. D. Transition Strip: 1. Basis of Design: UT-40 Universal Tape, By STS Coatings 2. Others as recommended by manufacturer. E. Sealants: Shall be compatible with air barrier assembly and shall be approved by the air barrier manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design for Concealed Applications: LT-100 Liquid Tape, By STS Coatings. 2. Basis of Design for Concealed & Exposed Applications: Great Seal PE-ISO 3. Others as recommended by manufacturer. F. Backer Rods: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. G. Other Products as recommended by manufacturer. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The ABAA Certified installer shall examine substrates, areas and conditions under which the Air Barrier assembly will be installed, in the Presence of the General Contractor to confirm suitability of substrate and underlying work to accept Air Barrier B. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section. Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. Fill spalled areas in substrates to provide an even plane. B. Mortar joints in concrete block and form tie holes/voids in poured concrete shall be filled flush and smooth and allowed to be cured for a minimum of 24 hours. C. All joints between gypsum sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and other substrate joints up to 1/4" wide shall be treated: 1. STS Coatings LT-100 Liquid Tape, www.stscoatings.com. 2. York Manufacturing, US-100, www.yorkmfg.com. 3. Others as recommended by manufacturer. D. All joints between gypsum sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and other substrates wider than 1/4" shall be sealed with: 1. UT-40, overlapping each side of joint a minimum of 3 inches. 2. Others as recommended by manufacturer. E. Install backer rod and sealant at the following joints: 1. All expansion/control/erection joints between concrete wall panels. 2. All expansion/control joints in concrete block back-up. 3. All joints between concrete wall panels and concrete block back-up. 3.3 PRIMER FOR TRANSITION MEMBRANE(SELF-ADHERING TYPE ONLY) A. Apply primer for self-adhering membranes at rate recommended by manufacturer. B. Apply primer to all areas to receive transition sheet membrane as indicated in Drawings by roller or spray and allow minimum 30-minute open time. Primed surfaces not covered by transition membrane during the same working day must be re-primed. 3.4 TRANSITION MEMBRANE (SELF-ADHERING TYPE) A. Align and position self-adhering transition membrane, remove protective film and press firmly into place. Ensure minimum 2-inch overlap at all end and side laps unless otherwise noted. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Tie-in to roofing system and at the interface of dissimilar materials as indicated in Drawings. C. Promptly roll all laps and membrane with a counter top roller to affect seal. D. Ensure all preparatory work is complete prior to applying liquid membrane. 3.5 PRIMARY AIR BARRIER A. Apply by spray or roller,a complete and continuous unbroken film at a temperature of 40°F and rising with less than a 30% chance of rain in the next 18 hours and apply at the same rate as listed in the Air Barrier Association of America evaluation 1. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing, Plywood or OSB a. Wall Guardian FW-100A at a minimum of 2.5 gallons per 100 ft2(40 ft2/gallon) (40 wet mils) b. Others meeting stated requirements. C. Spray around all projections, including masonry veneer anchors, ensuring a complete and continuous air seal. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU), Concrete a. Wall Guardian FW-100A at a minimum of 2.5 gallons per 100 ft2 (40 ft2/gallon) (equal to 40 wet mils on a smooth surface) B. Others meeting stated requirements. C. Spray around all projections including masonry veneer anchors ensuring a complete and continuous air seal. 3.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE/ INSPECTION A. Quality Assurance Program: 1. (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP) Audits: a. Contractor shall verify the total#of audits required for the project and schedule all audits in accordance with the requirements of the QAP to insure eligibility for Certification under the QAP b. As multiple audits will be required, all deficiencies identified by the auditor, for each audit shall be corrected prior to proceeding with any work that will necessitate removal and replacement to correct deficiencies in the air barrier system. B. Notify Architect when sections of work are complete so as to allow for review prior to installing insulation. The manufacturer's representative shall be on site to review the installation along with the Architect. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Liquid membranes are not designed for permanent exposure. Cover the liquid membrane, as recommended by the manufacturer, within the following time frames. Contractor shall verify the number of calendar days with the air barrier manufacturer: 1. Cover the Wall Guardian material within 180 calendar days after installation. The nature of this product is such that some surface weathering may become apparent during FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 exposure. This is a surface effect only and does not impact air barrier system performance. 2. Transition membranes shall be covered within 180 days after installation. B. Prepare, treat and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through the air barrier and at protrusions according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 INSTALLATION A. Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier: Install air barrier accessories and fluid-applied membrane air barrier material to provide continuity throughout the building envelope in a shingle fashion. Install materials in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions and the following (unless manufacturer recommends other procedures in writing based on project conditions or particular requirements of their recommended materials): 1. Install veneer anchors as per air barrier manufacturer installation sequencing. 2. Apply treatment to exterior gypsum joints and screw heads as per air barrier material manufacturer. 3. Apply primer for transition material at the rate instructed by the air barrier material manufacturer for 1 inch beyond terminating edge of transition membrane. Allow primer to set/cure completely before transition strip application. 4. Position subsequent sheets of transition material so that membrane overlaps the membrane sheet below by a minimum of 2 inches, unless greater overlap is recommended by the material manufacturer. Ensure transition membrane is securely sealed onto substrate with roller. 5. Overlap horizontally adjacent pieces of transition material a minimum of 2 inches, unless greater overlap is recommended by the material manufacturer. Roll all areas of transition strip including seams with roller. 6. Seal around all penetrations with termination mastic/sealant, membrane counter- flashing or other procedure in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions, ensuring chemical compatibility amongst adjoining materials. 7. Connect air barrier in exterior wall assembly continuously to the air barrier of the roof,to concrete below-grade structures, to windows, curtain wall, storefront, louvers, exterior doors,other intersection conditions and transitions from wet cavity to dry cavity and seal penetrations using accessory materials in accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions. 8. Provide transition material at changes in substrate plane (with bead of sealant/mastic, membrane counter-flashing or other material recommended by material manufacturer) under membrane to eliminate all sharp 90 degree inside corners and to make a smooth transition from one plane to another. 9. Provide mechanically fastened non-corrosive metal sheet or other manufacturer approved transition material to span gaps greater than 1 inch in substrate plane and to make a smooth transition from one plane to the other. Transition membrane shall be installed continuously from air barrier material onto sheet metal maintaining 2-inch overlap on both edges. 10. For through-wall flashing and head-flashing, lap transition material over top edge of it. 11. Provide backup for the membrane to accommodate anticipated movement or use other manufacturer approved transition material at deflection and control joints. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 12. Provide transition to the joint assemblies at expansion and seismic joints. 13. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along membrane seams at reverse lapped seams, rough cuts, and as recommended by the material manufacturer. 14. Seal top edge of the self-adhered membrane to substrate with termination mastic at end of each working day. 15. Inspect installation prior to enclosing assembly and repair punctures, damaged areas and inadequately lapped seams with a patch of membrane lapped as recommended by material manufacturer. 16. Install primer for fluid-applied air barrier if instructed by material manufacturer. 17. Install fluid-applied membrane using equipment and methods recommended by manufacturer,to achieve a dry film thickness as required by the material manufacturer. 18. Install flexible base flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.9 SCHEDULE A. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the glass-faced sheathing in the following area. Seal any masonry anchor penetrations air tight. 1. In the masonry cavity wall. B. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the outer surface of the inner wythe of masonry. Seal any masonry anchor penetrations air tight. C. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the glass faced gypsum sheathing and/or roof board in the following area: 1. Behind the metal parapet panels. 2. Behind the metal wall and soffit panels. D. Hollow Metal Door Frames: Seal door frame to wall surface with transition membrane. E. Wall and Roof Junction: Seal wall to roof with transition membrane. F. Seal the top of sheathing to the underside of the roof assembly with foam or LT-100. G. Openings: Seal around the perimeter of all openings with transition membrane. H. Perimeter wood nailers at wall openings: Cover all exposed surfaces of wood nailers with transition membrane. Extend membrane over sheathing, masonry and metal framing as shown. I. Aluminum storefront frames: Seal frames to the wall surface with transition membrane. J. Aluminum curtain wall frames: Seal frames to wall surface with transition membrane. 3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect air barrier materials from damage during installation and the remainder of the construction period, according to material manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate with installation of materials which cover the air barrier assemblies,to ensure exposure period does not exceed that recommended by the air barrier manufacturer. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction and acceptable to the primary material manufacturer. END OF SECTION 07 27 20 FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 07 42 13.79 - INSULATED METAL WINDOW AND WALL PANELS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The Panels required are as manufactured by Mapes Industries, Lincoln, NE. Panels consist of metal skins laminated to stabilizer substrates with an insulating core material. Panels are designed to be glazed into a window system or curtain wall system and also installed as wall veneer panels. B. Related Work 1. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 2. Section 08 5113 Aluminum Windows 3. Section 08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Panel manufacturer shall have a minimum of 25 years' experience. B. Field measurements shall be taken prior to completion of manufacturing and cutting. C. Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of installed panels is 1/8" (3mm) in 20' (6m) non-commutative. D. Product shall comply with TAS 201,TAS 202,TAS 203 testing in accordance with Florida Building Code for High Velocity Hurricane Zone and/or Miami-Dade County requirements on the MapeShield HBD/STY;Aluminum Skinned Spandrel Panels installed within an Aluminum Curtain Wall. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) C. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The materials and products specified in this section establish a minimum standard of required function, design, appearance quality and warranty to be met by any proposed substitution. B. No substitutions will be considered unless a written request for approval has been submitted by the bidder and received by the architect 10 days prior to the bid date. INSULATED METAL WINDOW AND WALL PANELS 07 42 13.79-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in conformance with Section 0133 00—Submittal Procedures. Include Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B. Samples: 1. Panel Makeup: 2 samples- 10 x 10 inches. 2. Two samples of each color and finish texture-3 x 5 inches. C. Submission Drawings: Indicate thickness, dimensions, and components of parts. Detail glazing methods, framing and tolerances to accommodate thermal movement. D. Affidavit certifying materials meet all requirements as specified. E. 2 copies of manufacturers standard literature for specified material. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect finish and edge in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. B. Store materials in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELS- LAMINATED A. Laminated metal faced panels "MapeShield HBD/STY" as manufactured by Mapes Industries, Inc. B. Acceptable alternatives: Panels having similar composite construction and finish providing manufacturer has a minimum of 25 years panel laminating experience and comparable published warranties and meet the project windstorm requirements. C. Manufacturer shall produce the skin and laminate the panel in the same controlled manufacturing environment. 2.2 FINISH A. Kynar/Hylar-AAMA 665.2-92- resin based -70%. B. Multiple colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.3 WINDOW PANEL FABRICATION A. Glazed Window Panel Composition: Two sheets of aluminum bonded to stabilizer substrates with an insulative core. Panel shall have the following makeup: 1. Exterior Skin: 26 Gauge Aluminum. 2. Substrate: 1/8 inch High Density Tempered Hardboard. 3. Impact Resistant Layer: 24 Gauge Galvanized Steel. 4. Insulating Core: % inch, 2 lb. Density Isocyanurate or Polystyrene. INSULATED METAL WINDOW AND WALL PANELS 07 42 13.79-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 5. Substrate: 1/8 inch High Density Tempered Hardboard. 6. Interior Skin: 26 Gauge Aluminum. 7. Panel Thickness: 1.06 inches. 2.4 WALL(VENEER) PANEL FABRICATION A. Wall (Veneer) Panel Composition: Two sheets of aluminum bonded to stabilizer substrate and anchored to wall furring framing, including perimeter and joint moldings in matching color. Panels shall have the following makeup: 1. Exterior Skin: 26 Gage Aluminum. 2. Substrate (Core):Tempered Hardboard 3. Interior Skin: 26 Gage Aluminum, Mill Finish 4. Panel Thickness: 0.25 inches. 2.5 EXTRUDED VENEER MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Extruded aluminum moldings to suit application as recommended by Manufacturer. B. Kynar finish to match veneer panels. 2.6 WINDOW PANEL ACCESSORIES A. Recommended for use as an infill panel component in window and curtain wall systems. Related material to complete installation as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Seals against moisture intrusion as recommended by the manufacturer. Polyurethane and silicone-based sealant with a 20-year life as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Panel surfaces shall be free from defects prior to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Erect panels plumb, level and true. B. Anchor wall (veneer) panels as required by applicable codes and as required to comply with Windstorm code. C. Glaze panels securely and in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions to allow for necessary thermal movement and structural support. D. Do not install panels that are observed to be defective including warped, bowed, dented, scratched and delaminating components. E. Weather seal all joints as required using methods and materials as previously specified. INSULATED METAL WINDOW AND WALL PANELS 07 42 13.79-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 F. Separate dissimilar metals using gasketed fasteners and blocking to eliminate the possibility of electrolytic reaction. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove masking film as soon as possible after installation. Masking intentionally left in place after panel installation will be the responsibility of the contractor. B. Weep holes and drainage channels must be unobstructed and free from dirt and sealant. END OF SECTION 07 42 13.19 INSULATED METAL WINDOW AND WALL PANELS 07 42 13.79-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 07 42 43 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Exterior, panelized fiber cement cladding system and accessories to complete a drained and back- ventilated rainscreen, vertical-oriented. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 40 00-Cold-Formed Metal Framing B. Section 07 2100-Thermal Insulation C. Section 07 27 20- Fluid Applied Air Barrier D. Section 07 62 00—Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim E. Section 07 92 00-Joint Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 509-14—Voluntary Test and Classification Method of Drained and Back Ventilated Rain Screen Wall Cladding Systems B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 2. ASTM C 1185-Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non-Asbestos Fiber Cement. 3. ASTM C 1186—Standard Specification for Flat Fiber-Cement Sheets. 4. ASTM E-84-Standard Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. ASTM E 119-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 6. ASTM E 228 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. 7. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8.ASTM E 331-Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. C. Florida Building Code-Test Protocol HVHZ 1.Testing Application Standard (TAS) 202, 203—HVHZ Test Procedures D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 268—Ignition Resistance of Exterior Wall Assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0133 01. B. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's product description,storage and handling requirements,and installation instructions. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07 42 43-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Product Test Reports and Code Compliance: Documents demonstrating product compliance with local building code, such as test reports or Evaluation Reports from qualified, independent testing agencies. D. LEED Credits: Provide documentation of LEED Credits for project certification under USGBC LEED 2009 (Version 3.0) or 2012 v.4. E. Manufacturer's Details:Submit drawings,including plans,sections,showing installation details that demonstrate product dimensions, edge/termination conditions/treatments,compression and control joints, corners, openings, and penetrations. F. Samples: Submit samples of each product type proposed for use, including trim. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. All fiber cement panels specified in this section must be supplied by a manufacturer with a minimum of 10 years of experience in fabricating and supplying fiber cement cladding systems. a. Products covered under this section are to be manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified facility. 2. Provide technical and design support as needed regarding installation requirements and warranty compliance provisions. B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer trained by manufacturer or representative. C. Mock-Up Wall: Provide a mock-up wall as evaluation tool for product and installation workmanship. D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Prior to beginning installation, conduct conference to verify and discuss substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements,and project requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Panels must be stored flat and kept dry before installation. A waterproof cover over panels and accessories should be used at all times prior to installation. Do not stack pallets more than two high. Refer to the information included on each pallet. B. If panels are exposed to water or water vapor prior to installation, allow to completely dry before installing. Failure to do so may result in panel shrinkage at ship lap joints, and such action may void warranty. C. Panels MUST be carried on edge. Do not carry or lift panels flat. Improper handling may cause cracking or panel damage. D. Direct contact between the panels and the ground should be avoided at all times. It is necessary to keep panels clean during installation process. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07 42 43-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 15-year warranty against manufactured defects in fiber cement panels. Additional 5-year extension available when refinished in year 14-15. B. Provide manufacturer's 15-year warranty against manufactured defects in panel finish. C. Warranty provides for the original purchaser. See warranty for detailed information on terms, conditions and limitations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Nichiha USA, Inc., 3150 Avondale Mill Rd, Macon, GA 301216, USA 2. Nichiha Corporation, 18-19 Nishiki 2-chome Naka-ku, Nagoya,Aichi 460-8610,Japan. B. Acceptable Manufacturer's Representative: Nichiha USA, Inc., 6465 E. Johns Crossing, Suite 250, Johns Creek, GA 30097. Toll free: 1.866.424.4421, Office: 770.805.9466, Fax: 770.805.9467, www.nichiha.com. 1. Basis of Design Product: Nichiha VintageWood. a. Profile colors: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. b. Profiles: Wood plank texture with three, 3/8" grooves running lengthwise, spaced 5- 5/8" apart. c.Accessory/Component Options: 1) Manufactured Corners with 3-1/2" returns for each profile color. 2)Aluminum trim options: Corner Key, Open Outside Corner, H-Mold, J-Mold, Compression Joint, Inside Corner d. Finish: Bark, Cedar, Clear Anodized, or Primed. e. Essential Flashing System: Starter, Overhang. 1) Finish: Matte black. f. Dimensions: 1. AWP-1818: 455mm (17-7/8") (h)x 1,818 mm (71-9/16") (1). 2. AWP-3030: 455mm (17-7/8") (h)x 3,030 mm (119-5/16") (1). g. Panel Thickness: 16 mm (5/8"). h. Weight: AWP-1818: 35.27 lbs. per panel,AWP-3030: 57.32 lbs. per panel. i. Coverage: 8.88 sq. ft. per panel (1818), 14.81 sq.ft. per panel (3030). j. Factory sealed on six [6) sides. C. Substitutions: Not permitted. D. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 0160 00. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiber cement panels manufactured from a pressed, stamped, and autoclaved mix of Portland cement, fly ash, silica, recycled rejects, and wood fiber bundles. B. Panel surface pre-finished and machine applied. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07 42 43-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Panels profiled along 3030mm edges so that the long joints between the installed panels are ship- lapped. D. Factory-applied sealant gasket added to top panel edge; all 3030mm edge joints contain a factory sealant. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Fiber Cement Cladding—Must comply with ASTM C-1186,Type A, Grade II requirements: 1. Wet Flexural Strength: Result: 1418 psi, Lower Limit: 1015 psi. 2. Water Tightness: No water droplets observed on any specimen. 3. Freeze-thaw: No damage or defects observed. 4. Warm Water: No evidence of cracking, delamination, swelling, or other defects observed. 5. Heat-Rain: No crazing, cracking, or other deleterious effects, surface or joint changes observed in any specimen. B. Mean Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (ASTM E-228): Max 1.0*10"-5 in./in. F. C. Surface Burning (CAN-ULC S102/ASTM E-84): Flame Spread: 0, Smoke Developed: 0. D. Wind Load (ASTM E-330): Contact manufacturer for ultimate test pressure data corresponding to framing type, dimensions, fastener type, and attachment clips. Project engineer(s) must determine Zone 4 and 5 design pressures based on project specifics. 1. Minimum lateral deflection: L/120. E. Water Penetration (ASTM E-331): No water leakage observed into wall cavity. F. Steady-State Heat Flux and Thermal Transmission Properties Test(ASTM C-518): 16mm thick panel thermal resistance R Value of 0.47. G. Fire Resistant (ASTM E-119): The wall assembly must successfully endure 60-minute fire exposure without developing excessive unexposed surface temperature or allowing flaming on the unexposed side of the assembly. H. Ignition Resistance (NFPA 268): No sustained flaming of panels, assembly when subjected to a minimum radiant heat flux of 12.5 kW/m2 ± 5% in the presence of a pilot ignition source for a 20- minute period. K. Drained and Back Ventilated Rainscreen (AAMA 509-14): System classifications: W1,V1. L. Florida Building Code -Test Protocol HVHZ (TAS 202, 203): Horizontal Application Design Pressure: 95 psf,Vertical Application Design Pressure: 85 psf. 2.4 INSTALLATION COMPONENTS B. Ultimate Clip System: 1. Starter Track: a. Vertical Panel Installations (AWP-3030 only) — FA 710T—3,030mm (1) galvalume coated steel. 2. Panel Clips: JEL 778 "Ultimate Clip II" (10mm rainscreen for 16mm AWP) — Zinc- Aluminum-Magnesium alloy coated steel. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07 42 43-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Joint Tab Attachments (included) — used at all AWP-1818 panel to panel vertical joints, NOT used with AWP-3030 installations. 3. Corner Clips: JE 777C (10mm rainscreen for 5/8" AWP Manufactured Corners) -- Zinc- Aluminum-Magnesium alloy coated steel. 4. Single Flange Sealant Backer—FHK 1015 R (10mm)—6.5' (1) fluorine coated galvalume. 5. Double Flange Sealant Backer—FH 1015 R (10mm)— 10' (1)fluorine coated galvalume. 6. Corrugated Spacer—FS 1005 (5mm), FS 1010 (10mm)—4' (1). C. Aluminum Trim (optional): Finish as noted in details. D. Essential Flashing System (optional): 1. Starter—main segments (3,030mm), inside corners, outside corners 2. Overhang—main segments (3,030mm), inside corners, outside corners,joint clips. E. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners, such as hot-dipped galvanized screws appropriate to local building codes and practices must be used. Use Stainless Steel fasteners in high humidity and high-moisture regions. Panel manufacturer is not liable for corrosion resistance of fasteners. Do not use aluminum fasteners,staples or fasteners that are not rated or designed for intended use. See manufacturer's instructions for appropriate fasteners for construction method used. F. Flashing: Flash all areas specified in manufacturer's instructions. Do not use raw aluminum flashing. Flashing must be galvanized, anodized, or PVC coated. G. Sealant: Sealant shall comply with ASTM C920, Class 35. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verification of Conditions: 1. Fiber cement panels shall be installed over Concrete Masonry Units(CMU's)with furring strips. 2. Allowable furring spacing: 16" o.c. maximum. 3. A weather resistive barrier is required when installing fiber cement panels. Use an approved weather resistive barrier (WRB) as defined by the 2015 IBC or IRC. Refer to local building codes. 4. Appropriate metal flashing should be used to prevent moisture penetration around all doors, windows, wall bottoms, material transitions and penetrations. Refer to local building codes for best practices. B. Examine site to ensure substrate conditions are within alignment tolerances for proper installation. C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. D. Do not install panels or components that appear to be damaged or defective. Do not install wet panels. 3.2 TOLERANCE A. Wall surface plane must be plumb and level within +/-% inch in 20 feet in any direction. 1. One layer of Nichiha 5mm (3/16") Spacer may be used as shim. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07 42 43-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install products in accordance with the latest installation guidelines of the manufacturer and all applicable building codes and other laws, rules, regulations and ordinances. Review all manufacturer installation, maintenance instructions, and other applicable documents before installation. 1. Consult with your local dealer or Nichiha Technical Department before installing any Nichiha fiber cement product on a building higher than 45 feet or three stories or for conditions not matching prescribed standard installation guide requirements and methods. A Technical Design Review (TDR) process is available to evaluate project feasibility. 2. Vertical Control/Expansion Joints are required with AWP-1818, for walls wider than 30 feet, within 2-12 feet of outside corners finished with metal trim and approximately every 30 feet thereafter. a. Vertical Control/Expansion Joints are required at each AWP-3030 vertical joint, or H- Mold trim may be used instead. 3. Horizontal/Compression Joints are required for multi-story installations of AWP. Locate joints at floor lines.Joints are flashed minimum %2" breaks. Do not caulk. Refer to installation guide(s). a. Wood framed buildings of three or more floors require a compression joint at each floor. b. Steel framed buildings(including reinforced concrete core with LGMF exterior walls)of more than three floors (or 45 feet) require a compression joint every 25 feet at a floor line. B. Panel Cutting 1. Always cut fiber cement panels outside or in a well ventilated area. Do not cut the products in an enclosed area. 2. Always wear safety glasses and NIOSH/OSHA approved respirator whenever cutting, drilling, sawing, sanding or abrading the products. Refer to manufacturer SIDS for more information. 3. Use a dust-reducing circular saw with a diamond-tipped or carbide-tipped blade. a. Recommended circular saw: Makita 7-1/4"Circular Saw with Dust Collector(#5057KB). b. Recommended blade:Tenryu Board-Pro Plus PCD Blade (#BP-18505). c. Shears (electric or pneumatic) or jig saw can be used for complicated cuttings, such as service openings, curves, radii and scrollwork. 4. Silica Dust Warning: Fiber cement products may contain some amounts of crystalline silica, a naturally occurring, potentially hazardous mineral when airborne in dust form. Consult product SIDS or visit https://www.osha.gov/dsg/topics/silicacrVstaI line/. S. Immediately clean dust from cut panels as it may bind to the finish. 3.4 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE A. Review manufacturer guidelines for detailed care instructions. END OF SECTION 07 42 43 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07 42 43-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 07 52 16 -STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Modified bituminous membrane torch applied (heat welded) roofing. B. Modified bituminous membrane Self adhered roofing. C. Roof Insulation. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 3100—Steel Roof Deck. B. Section 06 10 53—Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. C. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. D. Section 07 72 00- Roof Accessories. 1.3 CODE AND TEST REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Fire Test Exposure: Roofing system achieving a UL Class rating for roof slopes indicated on the Contract Drawings. 1. UL Class A rating. B. Windstorm Construction Requirements: Comply with Specification Section 01 41 19 "Windstorm Construction Requirements" and the requirements of the Texas Windstorm Code including elements assembled to form the exterior wall and roof systems that are either directly loaded by the wind or receive wind loads originating at relatively close locations,and that transfer those loads to the main wind force resisting system. 1. Texas Department of Insurance (TDI) Product Evaluation RC-647, Assembly No. S-17. C. Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) Reflectivity/Thermal Emittance: Minimum requirements when tested according to CRRC-1 1. Initial Solar Reflectance Index(SRI): Not less than 96. 2. Thermal Emittance: Not less than 0.90. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation instructions. SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Shop Drawings:Shop drawings including installation details of roofing,flashing,fastening and insulation, including notation of roof slopes and fastening patterns of insulation and base modified bitumen membrane, prior to job start. D. Design Pressure Calculations: Design pressure calculations for the roof area in accordance with ASCE 7 and local Building Code requirements. Include a roof system attachment analysis report, certifying the system's compliance with applicable wind load requirements before Work begins. Report shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of the Project who has provided roof system attachment analysis for not less than 5 consecutive years. E. Verification Samples: For each modified bituminous membrane ply product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports:As required. G. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. H. Closeout Submittals: Manufacturer's maintenance instructions including recommendations for periodic checking and adjustment of cable tension and periodic cleaning and maintenance of all railing and infill components. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified products specified with ten years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section and approved as a Polyglass Preferred or Quantum Contractor by Polyglass USA, Inc. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section. B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work. C. Inspect and make notes of job conditions prior to installation: 1. Record minutes of the conference and provide copies to all parties present. 2. Identify outstanding issues in writing designating the responsible party for follow-up action and the timetable for completion. 3. Installation of roofing system shall not begin until all outstanding issues are resolved to the satisfaction of the Architect. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels intact until ready for installation. SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Store all roofing materials in a dry place,on pallets or raised platforms,out of direct exposure to the elements until time of application. Store materials at least 4 inches (102 mm) above ground level and covered with "breathable"tarpaulins. C. Stored in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer prior to their application or installation.Store roll goods on end on a clean flat surface. No wet or damaged materials will be used in the application. D. Store at room temperature wherever possible, until immediately prior to installing the roll. During winter,store materials in a heated location with a 50-degree F(10 degree C)minimum temperature, removed only as needed for immediate use. Keep materials away from open flame or welding sparks. E. Avoid stockpiling of materials on roofs without first obtaining acceptance from the Architect/Engineer. F. Adhesive storage shall be between the range of above 40-degree F (4 degree C) and below 80-degree F (27 degree C). Area of storage shall be constructed for flammable storage. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with installing associated metal flashings as work of this section proceeds. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Roofing System Warranty: Upon completion of Work. Written and signed,warranting that, if a leak develops in the roof during the term of this warranty, due either to defective material or defective workmanship by the installing contractor, the manufacturer shall provide the Owner, at Manufacturer's expense, with no dollar limit,the labor and material necessary to return the defective area to a watertight condition. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of acceptance. B. Contractor is to guarantee all work against defects in materials and workmanship for a period indicated following final acceptance of the Work. 1. Warranty Period: minimum of 2 years. 1.11 PROGRESS INSPECTIONS A. The roofing system manufacturer, at no cost to Owner shall provide, when the project is in progress,the following services: 1. Keep the Architect informed after field inspections of work being performed with photographic records and written reports of each inspection, as to the progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. The minimum quantity of manufacturer's inspections required for this Project is as follows: SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Pre-Installation: One inspection. b. Work-In-Progress: 1) Insulation,coverboard and base ply sheet membrane prior to installation of modified bitumen cap sheet membrane: One inspection per roof section. 2) Modified cap sheet field membrane prior to installation of flashing and trim: One inspection per roof section. C. Final Inspection: One inspection. d. Follow-up Inspections: Number as required to verify that Roofing Contractor has complied with manufacturer's requirements. 3. Written field inspection reports are due no later than seven days after the date of the inspection.The format of the report must be acceptable to the Architect. 4. Report to the Architect in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention. 5. Confirm, in writing, after completion of the project and based on manufacturer's observations and tests, that manufacturer has observed no application procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported. 6. Final inspection shall be made of the roof area when it is completed.Architect shall be given seven days prior notification of date and time of manufacturer's final inspection. Following the final inspection, acceptance will be made in writing by the material manufacturer. Acceptance date of entire project by the Owner will mark the commencement of the warranty period. B. All inspections shall be made by a qualified employee or agent of the manufacturer other than the roofing contractor. Inspector must be acceptable to the Architect. C. Monthly payment requests by the Contractor for roofing work will not be approved by the Architect until all currently due written field inspection reports have been submitted to the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Polyglass USA, Inc., which is located at: 1111 W. Newport Center Dr.; Deerfield Beach, FL 33442;Toll Free Tel:888-410-1375;Tel:954-233-1330; Fax:954-418- 4453; Email: arcat@polyglass.com; Web: https://polyglass.us B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. 2.2 INSULATION A. Polyglass Polytherm: Closed-cell polyisocya nu rate; polyiso, foam core integrally bonded to non-asphaltic, fiber-reinforced organic felt facers. Polytherm is offered in a variety of thicknesses, providing long-term thermal resistance (LTTR)values from 5.7 to 26.8.Available in 4 by 8-foot (1220 by 2440 mm) and 4 by 4 foot (1220 by 1220 mm) panels. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi), or Grade 3 (25 psi) and SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 CAN/ULC-S704 type 2, Class 3 or Type 3, Class 3. 1. Board Thickness: 2-1/2-inches, laid in two layers. 2. Thermal Resistance: 14.4 each layer. B. Polyglass Tapered Polytherm: Closed-cell polyisocya n u rate; polyiso, foam core integrally bonded to non-asphaltic, fiber- reinforced organic felt facers. Tapered Polytherm is offered in a variety of slopes, to achieve positive drainage as well as long-term thermal resistance (LTTR). Available in 4 by 4-foot (1220 by 1220 mm) panels with 1/8 inch (3 mm), 1/4 inch (6 mm) and 1/2 inch (12 mm) per foot slope. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi) 3, or Grade 3 (25 psi) and CAN/ULC-S704 type 2, Class 3 or Type 3, Class 3. 1. Minimum Slope Required: 1/4-inch inches per foot. 2.3 ROOF COVER BOARD A. DensDeck Prime Roof Board: Enhanced to provide a broader compatibility for adhered, self- adhered, hot-mopped, cold adhesive, and torch-applied modified bitumen membranes conforming to ASTM C1177. 1. Board Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2.4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Base Sheet: 1. Application Method: Self-Adhered. 2. SA(Self-Adhered) Membranes: a. SBS (Syrene-Butadiene-Styrene) Membranes: 1) Elastoflex SA V:Grade:Smooth;ASTM D6163 Type I;Self Adhered; UL/FM Classified;Available in FR. Nom.Thickness: 80 mils (2.0 mm). B. Cap Sheet: 1. Application Method: Heat Welded. 2. SBS (Syrene-Butadiene-Styrene) Membranes: a. Polyfresko G SBS: Grade: Highly Reflective Granules; ASTM D6164 Type I; Torch; UL/FM Classified; Available in FR; SRI 96. Nom. Thickness: 165 mils (4.2 mm). 3. Color for Granulated Cap Sheet: White. 2.5 FLASHING MEMBRANE A. Metal Flashing Conditions: Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". B. Roof to Wall Flashings: Minimum of 1 ply of base/interply as reinforcement and cap sheet for all flashing systems. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General Requirements: 1. All types of"Powder-actuated"fastening systems, "Hammer drive"fastening systems, "Ram-Set" systems and similar type fastening systems are strictly prohibited from use on the project for permanent or temporary fasteners into permanent building SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 components,except as indicated on Drawings or as specifically approved by Architect. 2. All types of permanent or temporary fastening systems or components which are not removable without damage to permanent building components are strictly prohibited from use, except as indicated (example: concrete nails, clinched double nails in concrete pilot holes, rawl spikes, zemac nailins, etc.) 3. Wedge type expansion anchors are prohibited at all locations where wedging action would cause spalling or damage to permanent building components. 4. Plastic or nylon sleeves, nailins, plugs, cores, etc. are not acceptable as fastener components where exposed to weather. 5. All fasteners, and other components exposed to weather or in exterior locations must be stainless steel, Monel or other approved corrosion - resistant material or finish. Cadmium - plated or electro-galvanized finishes are not acceptable. 6. All fasteners installed in or in contact with type ACQ treated lumber(Yellawood) must be type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel or be specifically approved for installation in ACQ treated materials. 7. Regardless of fastening system utilized, the Contractor is responsible for sizing, frequency and spacing of fasteners according to substrate, load conditions and acceptable engineering practices and Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. B. Bolts, Nuts,and Washers:ASTM A325,galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components, stainless steel for stainless steel components. C. Hardened Steel Self-Threading Screw Anchor ("Tapcon" Anchors): Anchorage to solid or hollow masonry and concrete, stainless steel at exterior locations. D. Epoxy Resin Adhesive Type:Threaded studs in concrete, brick or concrete masonry,stainless steel. E. Buildex TEKS self-drilling screws or type required for anchorage to steel. F. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing, corrosion-resistant coating. G. Fasteners and Plates: Provide FM Approved fasteners and plates and other devices as required to suit the system specified. H. Insulation: Mechanical fasteners for securing of insulation to decking shall be approved by the insulation manufacturer for the system specified and shall be FM Approved and be in compliance with Appendix "E" of FM 4470 for corrosion resistance. 1. Use the same brand fastener throughout the work. 2. Provide the number of fasteners and layout as recommended by the manufacturer and per FM Approvals. 3. Determine length of fastener by the thickness of the decking and any fill and the thickness of the insulation. Fasteners shall be of sufficient length to achieve a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) penetration. I. Pre-Assembled Fastener/Plate Combination: Case hardened carbon steel and use specific head, shank and thread diameters, point types and head styles meeting building code and SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 FM approvals for corrosion and simulated wind uplift criteria requirements. 1. Fasteners are designed for the attachment of insulation and membrane to steel (18- 24 gauge), wood, and structural concrete. 2. Provide to meet FM requirements,fastener shall penetrate the steel deck 3/4 inch (19 mm). Minimum penetration is 1 inch (25 mm) in wood, 3/4 inch (19 mm) through wood that is less than 3/4 inch (19 mm)thick and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in concrete. 2.7 PRIMER A. Asphalt Primer: Polyglass PG100 Asphalt Primer conforming to ASTM D41. 1. Applied on all dissimilar materials except insulation. 2. General purpose penetrating asphalt primer used to promote adhesion prior to the application of hot-mopped,cold-applied,and self-adhesive membrane systems as well as roof cements, mastics, and asphalt-based adhesives. B. Water-Based Acrylic Primer: Polyglass WB-3000 Water-Based Acrylic Primer: 1. Low-VOC water-based acrylic primer that enhances the adhesion of self-adhered roof membranes to a variety of porous and non-porous substrates. 2.8 ASPHALT A. Certified in full compliance with requirements of Type III or IV asphalt listed in Table 1,ASTM D312. Each container, or bulk, shipping ticket shall indicate the equiviscous temperature (EVT),the finished blowing temperature (FBT), and the flash point. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS A. Adhesive/Sealant: 1. Polyglass PG 500 Modified Cement. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D4586 Asphalt Roof Cement Type I. 2. Polyglass PolyPlus 50 Premium MB Flashing Cement. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D4586 Asphalt Roof Cement Type I. 3. Polyglass PolyPlus 35 or PG 350 Modified Adhesive. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D3019 Type III Lap Adhesion. B. Insulation Adhesive: 1. Approved low-rise foam adhesive. C. Termination bar: Hot dipped galvanized steel; 1/8-inch x 1-inch bar stock, pre-drilled,slotted holes. D. Ceramic Granules: mineral granules of color scheme matching the granule surfacing of the finish ply. E. Perlite Cant Strips: A cant strip composed of expanded volcanic minerals combined with waterproofing binders. The top surface shall be pre-treated with an asphalt-based coating. The face of the cant shall have a nominal 4-inch dimension and a minimum thickness of 1- 1/2 inches. F. Walktread: Cut from a roll, puncture resistant polyester core reinforced, polymer modified SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 bitumen sheet material topped with a ceramic-coated granule wearing surface in contrasting color to cap sheet. G. Size: Roll Width x 30-inch length. H. Acceptable Product: Polyglass Elastoflex V G. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Inspect and approve the deck condition, slopes and fastener backing if applicable, parapet walls, expansion joints, roof drains, stack vents, vent outlets, nailers and surfaces and elements. C. Verify that work penetrating the roof deck, or which may otherwise affect the roofing, has been properly completed. D. If substrate preparation and other conditions are the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 SUBSTRATE/PREPARATION A. General: Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 1. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturerforachievingthe best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 2. Fill substrate surface voids that are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide with an acceptable fill material. 3. Roof surface to receive roofing system to be smooth,clean,free from loose gravel,dirt and debris, dry and structurally sound. 4. Wherever necessary, surfaces to receive roofing materials are to be power broomed and vacuumed to remove debris and loose matter prior to starting work. 5. Do not apply roofing during inclement weather. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp,frozen, dirty, or dusty surfaces. 6. Fasteners and plates for fastening components mechanically to the substrate shall provide a minimum pull-out capacity of 300 lb. (1334 N) per fastener. Base or ply sheets attached with cap nails require a minimum pullout capacity of 40 lb. (178 N) per nail. 7. Prime decks where required, in accordance with requirements and recommendations of the primer and deck manufacturer. B. Steel Deck: Installed as specified in Section 05 3100—Steel Roof Deck. Comply with current requirements of FM Approvals in constructing and attaching the decking. 1. Minimum 22 gauge cold-formed steel decking with G-90 galvanized or minimum finish coat of primer paint on both sides. Galvanized steel decking where appropriate to project design criteria is recommended. 2. Deck panels to be anchored to supporting members by welding or mechanically fastening. Requirements as established by Factory Mutual for gauge and span should SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 be in compliance with Factory Mutual LPDS 1-28 and 1-29. 3. Decks to be clean,free of moisture, and debris as well as free of corrosion. 4. Damaged or deflected panels as well as deteriorated portions must be removed and replaced. C. Insulation: 1. All joints between layers should be staggered when multiple layers of insulation are installed. Insulation greater than 2.5 inches (64 mm)to be installed in multiple layers. 2. Insulation to be kept dry at all times. Install only as much insulation as can be covered with completed roofing membrane before end of the day's work or prior to onset of inclement weather. 3. Edges must butt tightly and cuts must fit neatly against adjoining surfaces providing a smooth overall surface. Fill gaps greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm)with insulation. 4. Install tapered insulation around roof drains and penetrations to provide adequate slope for proper drainage. 5. Mechanically attached insulation to be fastened in accordance with TDI Approvals requirements for applicable geographic zone with required number and type of fasteners and plates. a. Where Polyglass requirements are more stringent than TDI Approvals or third- party manufacturers, follow Polyglass requirements unless otherwise required by applicable Code or Approval agency. 6. When asphalt or cold adhesive attachment is specified, the proposed insulation shall be compatible with the roof substrate, the proposed bitumen and the requirements of the specific Polyglass membrane. 7. Hot Asphalt Application: a. Maximum 4 by 4 foot (1220 x 1220 mm) insulation boards to be attached with hot asphalt. b. Asphalt for insulation attachment to meet ASTM D312 Type III or IV criteria, as dictated by roof slope or other design conditions. C. Expanded polystyrene (EPS) materials must not be installed with hot bitumen products. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install modified bitumen membranes and flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and with the recommendations provided by the National Roofing Contractors Association's Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association, and applicable codes. B. General: Do not install modified bitumen membranes at temperatures lower than 40 to 45 degrees F (4 to 7 degrees C) wherever practicable. Where work is unavoidable at such temperatures the following precautions be taken: 1. Take extra care during cold weather installation at ambient temperatures of 40 to 45 degrees F (4 to 7 degrees C) or below and when ambient temperatures are affected by wind or humidity,to ensure adequate bonding is achieved between the surfaces to be joined. This applies to both material seam welds and adhesion of the applied product to the appropriately prepared substrate as the substrate can be affected by such temperature constraints as well. SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. In addition, unrolling of cold materials, under very low ambient conditions must be avoided to prevent the likelihood of unnecessary stress cracking. Rolls must be at least 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) at the time of application. Should the membrane roll become stiff or difficult to install, it should be replaced with a new roll from the heated storage area. C. Commence installation of the roofing system at the lowest point of the roof (or roof area), working up the slope toward the highest point. Lap sheets shingle fashion so as to constantly shed water. D. Base and Ply Sheet Installation: 1. Install in a manner approved for the specific product. 2. Base or Inter-ply side laps are to be 3-inch (76 mm) minimum and usually delineated by a "lay line" for mopped, torch or mechanically attached application. End laps are typically 6 inches (152 mm) in all cases. E. Self-Adhered Application: Base or ply sheet shall be installed per Polyglass specifications and installation guidelines appropriate for the specific substrate type and thickness. F. Torch Application:The use of shielded "Dragon-wagons", or moveable,flame-resistant wind shields are recommended to keep all surfaces and materials at a suitably warm temperature during torch application. G. Fibrous Cant Strips: Provide non-combustible perlite or glass fiber cant strips at all wall/curb detail treatments where angle changes are greater than 45 degrees. Cant may be set in approved cold adhesives, hot asphalt or mechanically attached with approved plates and fasteners. H. Wood Blocking, Nailers and Cant Strips: Provide wood blocking, nailers and cant strips as specified in Section 06 10 53— Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 1. Provide nailers at all roof perimeters and penetrations for fastening membrane flashings and sheet metal components. 2. Wood nailers should match the height of any insulation, providing a smooth and even transition between flashing and insulation areas. 3. Nailer lengths should be spaced with a minimum 1/8-inch (3 mm) gap for expansion and contraction between each length or change of direction. 4. Nailers and flashings should be fastened in accordance with Factory Mutual "Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, Perimeter Flashing" and be designed to be capable of resisting a minimum force of 200 Ibs/lineal foot (298 kg per m) in any direction. I. Metal Work: Provide metal flashings, counter flashings, parapet coping caps and thru-wall flashings as specified in Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Install in accordance with the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or the NRCA Roofing Waterproofing manual. J. Termination Bar: Metal termination bar or approved top edge securement at the terminus of all flashing sheets at walls and curbs. Fasten the bar a minimum of 8 inches (203 mm) o/c to achieve constant compression. Provide suitable sealant at the top edge if required. K. Flashing: Use Polyglass flashing sheets and minimum 6 inch (152 mm) wide Polyglass SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 stripping sheets. Install stripping sheet with a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) in both horizontal and vertical surfaces. Install flashing sheets with a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) on horizontal surface and extended a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm) above finished roof surface. 1. Install flashing sheets by the same application method used for the roof membranes. In hot mop applications the flashing sheets may be installed by heat weld application provided the proper flashing materials are utilized. 2. Heat and scrape granules when welding or adhering at cut areas and seams to granular surfaces at all flashings. 3. Secure the top edge of the flashing sheet using a termination bar only when the wall surface above is waterproofed, or nailed 4 inches (102 mm) on center and covered with an acceptable counter flashing. 4. Items related to re-roofing operations such as sheet metal gravel stops, roof vents, and similar items shall be incorporated into the new roof system in accordance with the recommendations described in the current issue of the POLYGLASS"Specifications and Details" manual. L. Roof Walkways: Walkways shall consist of an additional layer of similar Polyglass membrane of contrasting color granule surface. Provide walkways in areas indicated on the Drawings. M. Surface Coatings: Apply roof coatings in strict conformance with the specific manufacturer's recommended procedures. N. Granule Embedment: Broadcast coating material over all bitumen overruns on the finish ply surface, while the bitumen is still hot or the adhesive is soft, to ensure a monolithic surface color. O. Provide any corrections to bring the roofing installation into conformance with Polyglass USA, Inc. requirements. 3.4 DAILY WATERSTOPS AND TIE-IN A. Mop in two felt sheets.Adhere envelope to deck with steep asphalt. B. Do not permit for any voids in felts or bitumen. C. Extend roofing felts at least twelve inches onto prepared area of adjacent roofing. Embed felts into asphalt. Strip edges with twelve-inch-wide ply sheet embedded completely in alternate courses of steep asphalt. D. At beginning of next day's work, remove temporary connection by cutting felts evenly along edge of existing roof system. E. Do not allow remnants or residue of waterstops to impede drainage of the completed roof surface. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall correct any deficiencies observed by Polyglass Technical Services to bring the roofing installation into specification conformance with Polyglass USA, Inc. warranty SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean-up and remove daily from the site all wrappings, empty containers, paper, loose particles and other debris resulting from these operations. B. Remove asphalt markings from finished surfaces. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this section. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide traffic ways, erect barriers, fences, guards, rails, enclosures, chutes and the like to protect personnel, roofs and structures,vehicles and utilities. B. Protect exposed surfaces of finished walls with tarps to prevent damage. C. Plywood for traffic ways required for material movement over existing roofs shall be not less than 5/8 inch (16 mm)thick. D. In addition to the plywood listed above, an underlayment of minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) recover board is required on new roofing. E. Special permission shall be obtained from the Manufacturer before any traffic shall be permitted over new roofing. END OF SECTION 07 52 16 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 07 62 00-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. C. Formed equipment support flashing. d. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. e. Embedded metal thru-wall flashing. f. Precast concrete splash blocks. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing. 3. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches,vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. A 153-Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. A 240 - Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 3. A 653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process. 4. A 666-Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-Steel Sheet,Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 5. A 755 - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil- Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 6. A 792-Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 7. B 32B-Solder Metal. 8. B 749- Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet,and Plate Products. 9. C 920-Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 10. C 1311B-Solvent Release Sealants. 11. D 226-Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 12. D 1187-Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 13. D 4397- Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial,and Agricultural Applications. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 14. D 4586-Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free. 15. D 4601-Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated to withstand wind loads, structural movement,thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak,or loosen,and shall remain watertight. B. Edge Design: Fabricate and install parapet Copings that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist roof edge design pressure (P)as identified in ANSI/SPRI-ES-1,as calculated according to ASCE 7. 1. Design Pressures: As per Engineer of Record calculations provided in the Construction Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F,ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit list of proposed Products and manufacturers, including all items specified in Part 2—Products or otherwise required by the Work. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field- assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identification of material,thickness,weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 6. Details of special conditions. 7. Details of connections to adjoining work. 8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. B. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. C. Warranty:Sample of special warranty. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Work of this Section to physically protect membrane roofing, base flashings, and expansion joints from damage that would permit water leakage to building interior. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance,with three years minimum experience. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner,Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights,and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending,warping,twisting, and surface damage. C. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. D. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Coordinate installation of flanged metal components, including gravel guards, pitch pans, and accessories to ensure strip-in with hot bitumen (where applicable) on same day they are installed. C. Schedule work to avoid storage on,and traffic over finished work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated (Galvalume) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation,Grade 40; structural quality. 3. Thickness: 24 Gauge. 4. Surface: Smooth,flat. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot- dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755, 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated (Galvalume) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation,Grade 40; structural quality. 2. Thickness: 24 Gauge. 3. Surface: Smooth,flat. 4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. b. Minimum Exposure Tests: 1) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours. 2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours. 5. Color: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. D. Lead Sheet:ASTM B 749,Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. "Dry"Sheet Membrane: Polystick MTS Plus High Temp Self-adhesive. B. Separation Sheet for Preservative Treated Wood: Polystick MTS Plus High Temp Self-adhesive. C. Felts:ASTM D 226,Type II (No. 30),asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. D. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-Ib/100 sq.ft. minimum, rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws,gasketed,with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory- applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet:Series 300 stainless steel. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153 or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Rust-resistant and compatible with materials to be joined. 5. Length:As required for thickness of material to penetrate substrate 1/2-inch minimum. C. Fasteners And Anchors 1. General Requirements: a. All types of "powder-actuated" fastening systems, "hammer drive" fastening systems, "ram-set" systems and similar type fastening systems are strictly prohibited from use on the project for permanent or temporary fasteners into permanent building components, except as indicated on Drawings or as specifically approved by the Architect. b. All types of permanent or temporary fastening systems or components which are not removable without damage to permanent building components are strictly prohibited from use, except as indicated (example: concrete nails, clinched double nails in concrete pilot holes, rawl spikes, zemac nailins,etc.) C. Wedge type expansion anchors are prohibited at all locations where wedging action would cause spalling or damage to permanent building components. d. Plastic or nylon sleeves, nailins, plugs, cores, etc. are not acceptable as fastener components where exposed to weather. e. All fasteners and other components exposed to weather or in exterior locations must be stainless steel, Monel or other approved corrosion-resistant material or finish. Cadmium-plated or electro-galvanized finishes are not acceptable. f. All fasteners installed in or in contact with type ACQ treated lumber (Yellawood) must be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel or be specifically approved for installation in ACQtreated materials. g. Regardless of the fastening system utilized, the Contractor is responsible for sizing, frequency and spacing of fasteners according to substrate, load conditions and acceptable engineering practices and Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. 2. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325, galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components, stainless steel for stainless steel components. 3. Hardened Steel Self-Threading Screw Anchor ("Tapcon" Anchors): Anchorage to solid or hollow masonry and concrete, stainless steel at exterior locations. 4. Epoxy Resin Adhesive Type: Threaded studs in concrete, brick or concrete masonry, stainless steel. 5. Buildex TEKS self-drilling screws or type required for anchorage to steel. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing,corrosion-resistant coating. D. Roofing Nails: Stainless steel (for fastening into ACQ treated lumber), hot-dipped galvanized or non- ferrous type for fastening into non-treated lumber); with annular rings, size as required to suit application; minimum 11-gage with 3/8-inch diameter head. E. Mechanical Fasteners for Sheet Metal to Metal Fabrications (Support Framing) Anchorage: Appropriate for purpose intended, size as required to suit application and achieve positive anchorage to substrate material. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 F. Solder: 1, For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. For Lead:ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50,50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 3. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. G. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2- inch-wide and 1/8 inch thick. H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus, as specified in Division 07 Section "Sealants (for Roofing)"; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. J. Asphalt Roofing Cement:ASTM D 4586,asbestos free, of consistency required for application. K. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete of size and profile indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment; suitable for downspouts discharging at grade level or onto roof surface. 2.4 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. C. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. D. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. F. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than linch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Fabricate all components with allowance for expansion at joints. Provide enlarged or oval holes at all piercing fasteners. G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. H. Form all sheet metal components (except corners) in longest practical length up to 10-feet maximum; true to shape, square, accurate in size, and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. I. Fabricate corners on all sheet metal components (gravel guards, copings, cap flashings, etc.)to form one piece with minimum 18-inch and maximum 36-inch long legs. J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. K. Soldered Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. L. Unsoldered Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. M. Hem exposed edges of metal 1/2-inch; miter and seam corners. N. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 3/4-inch at 30 degrees and hemmed to form drip. 1. Where vertical height exceeds 8-inches, fabricate with stiffing grooves in accordance with SMACNA, unless specifically approved otherwise. 0. Form all sheet metal material to provide watertight joints: 1. Unprotected Horizontal Surfaces (expansion joint covers, etc.): Standing seam or drive cleat joints. 2. Vertical Surfaces (copings, cap flashings, gravel guards, etc.): Flat lock or cover and backer plate seams. P. Miter all sheet metal corners and solder,weld, or fasten and seal all joints watertight: 1. Prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet: Apply minimum 1/4-inch bead of sealant between connecting metal flanges and drill and fasten with rivets at 2-inches o.c. 2. Stainless Steel: Solder joints watertight. 3. Unfinished Galvanized Steel:Solder joints watertight. 4. After soldering, remove flux.Wipe and wash solder joints clean. 5. Install sealant so it will not be visible on outside of joints. Q. Fabricate elements complete with required connection pieces. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 R. Fabricate all components with horizontal (flat) surfaces with built-in slope for drainage toward roof unless indicated otherwise. S. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.5 EMBEDDED METAL THRU-WALL FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel:ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666,Type 304,0.016 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 ft. Provide splice plates at joints of formed,smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterf lashing. 4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 5. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall,with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 6. Solder metal items at the corners. 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof and Roof to Wall Transition; Roof to Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) Transition; Parapet Caps; and Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Galvalume Steel:0.022 inch (24-gage)thick. B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Galvalume Steel:0.022 inch (24-gage)thick. C. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (26-gage)thick. D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (26-gage)thick. E. Soil Pipe Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead:4.0 lb/sq.ft., hard tempered. F. Concealed Continuous Cleats: Galvanized Steel Sheet: 20-gage thick. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Prepainted Metallic Coated Galvalume Steel:0.022 inch (24-gage)thick. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.8 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Exposed to View (Unfinished) Galvanized Steel Components: Paint to match prepainted metallic- coated steel prior to installation: 1. Clean: Comply with SSPC-1-Solvent Wipe. 2. Primer: Apply specified or finish paint manufacturer's recommended primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Finish Coat: Apply powder coating or approved urethane enamel in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry,smooth, clean,sloped for drainage,and securely anchored. 3. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. 4. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place,sealed, and secure. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as recommended by SMACNA and as indicated on Drawings. B. Underlayment: Install underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,solder,welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds,and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Provide continuous cleats fastened not more than 12-inches on center. Anchor cleats with a minimum two fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of stainless-steel and lead sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. a. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 15-mils. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10-feet. Provide joints within 18- to 36inches of all corners or intersections. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than linch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. E. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws; and metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance: 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. F. Seal joints as shown and as required with elastomeric sealant for watertight construction. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than linch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants(for Roofing)." G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder pre-painted metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. H. Rivets: Rivet joints where indicated and where necessary for strength. I. Protect all membrane penetrations as indicated and as recommended in SMACNA and NRCA manuals. 3.4 EMBEDDED THRU-WALL FLASHING A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges,and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are indicated to be built into masonry. C. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,sealant,or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe. Form 1/4-inch hook in edge of flashing embedded in inner wythe. 3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches;with upper edge tucked under water-resistive barrier or air barrier, lapping at least 4 inches. Fasten upper edge of flexible flashing to sheathing through termination bar. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing 6 inches minimum, to edge of next full unit at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches minimum, to edge of next full unit and turn ends up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 5. Interlock end joints of sawtooth sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00"Joint Sealants"for application indicated. 6. Install metal drip edges with sawtooth sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00"Joint Sealants"for application indicated. 7. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 8. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. D. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. 3.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Splash Blocks: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs or onto grade. 1. Roof Discharge:Set on traffic pads compatible with roofing membrane. 2. Grade Discharge: Set on a bed of compacted fill. 3.6 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 2. Strip in all sheet metal flanges the same day they are installed. B. Roof Edge Flashing:Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces specified in Part 1 and as indicated. 1. Backer Plates:Secure with fasteners suitable for substrate, 6-inches o.c. each face. 2. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 12-inch centers. 3. Apply 1/4-inch bead of sealant between each layer of metal at each edge. 4. Cover Plates: Hook front or exposed face of cover plate over drip edge. 5. Do not use mastic between sheet metal components. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4inches over base flashing. Install stainless- steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. 1. Sawcut new reglets where required. a. Provide bayonet style lap joints, minimum 4-inch overlap. b. Fill voids between wedges with backer rod. C. Seal receiver to vertical face of wall. 2. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or plastic wedges and sealant. 3. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. a. Seal top of reglets with sealant. b. Secure in place with neoprene head screws at maximum 12-inches on center. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Install lead flashings at all soil pipe penetrations. Turn lead flashing down inside piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Provide Penetration Seal System at all small penetrations not otherwise detailed. a. Clean roof surfaces to receive Penetration Seal Systems. b. Clean pipes and penetrating elements to remove plastic cement, bitumen, and other contaminants by wire brushing and scraping. C. Caulk around penetrating elements with curb adhesive. d. Apply beads of curb adhesive to flat side of first precast curb component. Place caulked curb onto roof surface to form half circle around penetrating element. e. Apply beads of curb adhesive to flat side and to scarf joints of second precast curb component. Place second section of curb onto roof surface to form circle with first section. Press scarf joints together firmly and press both sections down. f. Apply continuous bead of curb adhesive around outside edge of curb at roof. g. Fill around penetrating element with pourable sealant to top of curb. 3. Pitch pans are not desired. Install only where specifically indicated, or approved by Architect. Provide flanged umbrellas at all pitch pans. a. Fill with non-shrink grout to 1-inch from top of flange. b. Top with Pitch Pan Filler-Sealant Type ES-2. 4. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. F. Protect all membrane penetrations as indicated and as recommended in SMACNA and NRCA manuals. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-14 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.10 SCHEDULE-MATERIALS A. Exposed to View Components: 1. One-Piece Flashing and Expansion Joint Terminations: Metallic coated steel sheet, powder coated to match adjacent prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet components. 2. All Other Components: Metallic coated steel sheet, powder coated to match adjacent prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet components. B. Concealed from View Components, (Counterflashings, Expansion Joint Covers, Etc.): Stainless steel sheet. C. Roof Penetration Flashings:Stainless steel sheet. D. Rain Hoods and Umbrellas: Stainless steel sheet. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-15 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 07 72 00- ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Equipment supports. 3. Roof hatches. 4. Pipe Supports/Hangers. 5. Aluminum Roof Ladders. 6. Fall Through Protection (for Roof Hatches). B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 41 19 "Windstorm Construction Requirements". 2. Section 06 10 53 "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing,wood cants, and wood nailers. 3. Section 07 52 16 "SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing for roofing accessories. 4. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): Specifications for Aluminum Structures. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 36: Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A 53: Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A 123: Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. A 153: Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip) Steel and Iron Hardware. 5. A 167: Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 6. A 240: Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless-Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 7. A 500: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 8. A 653: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process, Structural (Physical) Quality Property. 9. A 666: Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 10. A 755: Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil- Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 11. A 780: Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 12. A 792: Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 13. A 924: Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated, (galvanized) by the Hot-Dip process. 14. A 1011: Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 15. B 209:Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 16. B 221:Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 17. C 726: Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board. 18. C 920: Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 19. C 1289: Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanu rate Thermal Insulation Board. 20. C 1311: Solvent Release Sealants. 21. D 638:Tensile Properties of Rigid Plastic. 22. D 226: Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 23. D 785: Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 24. D 2240: Rubber Property— Durometer Hardness. 25. D 2244: Color Tolerance and Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 26. D 4214: Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 27, D 4586: Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free. C. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS): 1. SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials, Design and Manufacture. 2. SP-59 Pipe Hangers and Supports, Selection and Application. D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. F. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications. 2. UL 793 -Standard for Safety Automatically Operated Roof Vents for Smoke and Heat. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Manufactured Curbs: Engineered, prefabricated structural box curb assembly designed for installation onto roof deck or structural framing, capable of supporting weight of roof-mounted equipment without deformation. Include integral base plate,treated wood nailer and insulation. B. Pipe Supports:Support all roof mounted piping with engineered, prefabricated, portable system designed for installation on roof without roof penetrations, flashings, or damage to roofing materials. Include bases,structural steel frames,and adjustable height pipe hangers or supports suitable for existing and proposed piping and conduits. 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate and install Roof Accessories to comply with NRCA recommendation that top of curb to top of roofing membrane be a minimum of 8-inches. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. All Rooftop equipment and supports shall comply with specification Section 01 41 19 — Windstorm Construction Requirements. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit list of proposed Products and manufacturers, including all items specified in Part 2—Products or otherwise required by the Work. B. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions,weights,loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof- mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. B. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied finish required and for each type of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation sequence, special instructions and precautions, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). D. Certification: Provide current letter(s) on Company's letterhead, signed by an authorized employee or corporate officer attesting to all following items: 1. Qualifications: Certify and document items in Article on Quality Assurance, and; 2. Products: Certify that selected products meet or exceed specified requirements: a. Quality Assurance/Control Data: Provide Design Data, Test Reports, Certificates, Manufacturer's Installation Instructions, and Manufacturer's Field Reports. b. Test Reports: Certified test reports or labeling agency file numbers indicating compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. C. Manufacturer's Certification: Each product meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents:Accurately record exact location of roof penetrations and any items installed but not visible after installation of roofing system or other Products. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Include complete instructions for normal maintenance and local contacts for service and spare parts. 2. Include cleaning and stain removal methods and recommended cleaning materials, polishes, and waxes. C. Warranty: Executed special warranty. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacturer of products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in installing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by the manufacturer. C. Supervisor/Foreman: Individual that is a direct employee of Applicator Company experienced in using selected manufacturer's Products. D. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. E. Perform work in accordance with MSS SP-59. F. Maintain one copy of each document accessible to site. G. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Convene two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section. 3. Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, and coordination with related work. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1. Protect from damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Regulatory Requirements: ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Conform to International Building Code as amended by the City of Corpus Christi code for fire and wind loading requirements. 2. Comply with Specification Section 014119 "Windstorm Construction Requirements." 3. Provide certification of inspection confirming approval of by authority having jurisdiction. C. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install Roof Accessories when chances for inclement weather exist, or might occur before installation can be completed and accessories made weatherproof. 2. Maintain waterproof integrity of building during and after installation of Roof Accessories. D. Existing Conditions: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. 1. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 2. Allow for field tolerances if taking field measurements before fabrication is not possible. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1. With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt roof drainage routes, roof expansion joints or other construction elements. B. Sequence work to allow installation of Roof Accessories that are mounted directly on roof deck during installation of new roofing system. Do not cut into new roofing system to retrofit Roofing Accessories unless specifically permitted by Architect. C. Coordinate with installation of mechanical and electrical equipment, hardware, and assemblies to ensure Roof Accessories are properly located and in place to receive equipment installed by others. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Cover damage to Roof Accessories and substrates resulting from failure of Roof Accessories to perform as intended, including resist penetration of water. Include replacement of defective materials and labor. 1. Manufactured Curbs and Equipment Supports: Provide warranty on curbs against structural failure. 2. Pipe Support System: Provide warranty covering pipe bases against deterioration for same time period as roofing warranty. 3. Warranty Period: a. Pipe Support System: Same duration as Roofing System Warranty. b. Other Items: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,the following: ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide roof accessories that have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to withstand design loads from and to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure. 2.3 METAL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653,G90 coated and mill phosphatized for field painting. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792,AZ50 coated. B. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coated. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coated. 3. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements in AAMA 2605, except as modified below: 1) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours. 2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 1000 hours. C. Aluminum Sheet:ASTM B 209,alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and mill finish. 1. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: Conversion coating; Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: A STM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use, mill finished. E. Stainless-Steel Shapes or Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316, No. 2D finish. F. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated. G. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished. H. Galvanized Steel Tube:ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. I. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208,Type II, Grade 1, not less than 1 inch thick. B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation:ASTM C 726, not less than 1 inch thick. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, not less than 1 inch thick. D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. E. Bituminous Coating:Cold-applied asphalt mastic,SSPC-Paint 12,compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. F. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil thick, polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. G. Felt:ASTM D 226,Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 Ib/100 sq.ft. H. Fasteners And Anchors 1. General Requirements: a. All types of "powder-actuated" fastening systems, "hammer drive" fastening systems, "ram-set" systems and similar type fastening systems are strictly prohibited from use on the project for permanent or temporary fasteners into permanent building components,except as indicated on Drawings or as specifically approved by the Architect. b. All types of permanent or temporary fastening systems or components which are not removable without damage to permanent building components are strictly ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 prohibited from use, except as indicated (example: concrete nails, clinched double nails in concrete pilot holes, rawl spikes, zemac nailins, etc.) C. Wedge type expansion anchors are prohibited at all locations where wedging action would cause spalling or damage to permanent building components. d. Plastic or nylon sleeves, nailins, plugs, cores, etc. are not acceptable as fastener components where exposed to weather. e. All fasteners and other components exposed to weather or in exterior locations must be stainless steel, Monel or other approved corrosion-resistant material or finish. Cadmium-plated or electro-galvanized finishes are not acceptable. f. All fasteners installed in or in contact with type ACQ treated lumber (Yellawood) must be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel or be specifically approved for installation in ACQ treated materials. g. Regardless of the fastening system utilized,the Contractor is responsible for sizing, frequency and spacing of fasteners according to substrate, load conditions and acceptable engineering practices and Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. 2. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325, galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components, stainless steel for stainless steel components. 3. Hardened Steel Self-Threading Screw Anchor ("Tapcon" Anchors): Anchorage to solid or hollow masonry and concrete, stainless steel at exterior locations. 4. Epoxy Resin Adhesive Type: Threaded studs in concrete, brick or concrete masonry, stainless steel. 5. Buildex TEKS self-drilling screws or type required for anchorage to steel. 6. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing, corrosion-resistant coating. I. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM,or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. J. Sealant: of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. K. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. L. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non-asbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads, windstorm requirements and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Available Manufacturers: ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Custom Curb, Inc. b. LM Curbs. C. Pate Company (The). d. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. e. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. 2. Load Requirements:As required to support equipment weight. Comply with specification Section 01 41 19—Windstorm Construction Requirements. 3. Material: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. 4. Factory-install continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 wide at tops of equipment supports. 5. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard removable counterflashing, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support. 6. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 7. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches above the new roof surface unless otherwise indicated. 8. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 2.6 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated single wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company. b. Bilco Company (The). C. Custom Curb, Inc. d. Nystrom, Inc. e. ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation. f. Wasco Products, Inc. 2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-Ibf/sq.ft.external and 20-Ibf/sq.ft. internal loads. 3. Comply with windstorm requirements by the Texas Department of Insurance. 4. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, size as indicated on drawings. S. Curb and Lid Material: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. 6. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 7. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. 8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 9. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 Inches above finished roofing, unless otherwise indicated. 10. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 11. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Provide 2-point latch on covers larger than 84-inches. 12. Refer to specification Section 05 50 00—Metal Fabrications for metal ladders. 2.7 FALL THROUGH PROTECTION (FOR ROOF HATCHES) A. Roof Hatch Fall protection Safety Rail and Ladder Extension System: Manufacturer's standard Complete system, including rails,gate and Labels. B. Manufacturer: SafePro L.P., 1355 N. Walton Walker, Dallas, TX 75211; Phone: 1-877-723-3570; Fax: 214-330-5435; Website: www.safeprosafety.com 1. Provide system complete, sized for individual Roof Hatches (Field Verify). Verify required gate swing before ordering. 2. Install as per manufacturer's instructions. 2.8 ALUMINUM ROOF LADDERS A. Access Ladders: All welded construction with feet fabricated to accept lag bolting to roof surface. Refer to Plans for sizes and locations. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. P. W. Platforms, Inc.;fixed ladder& platform. 800-231-9936 www.pwplatforms.com b. O'Keefee's Inc.Architectural Building Products; Model 503. www.okeeffes.com 888-653-3333 2. Loads: 500 lb. capacity 3. Size: 24"wide stair treads and platform. Platform size (Refer to Drawings). Refer to Plans for sizes and locations. Field measurements and Shop drawings required for Architect Approval. 4. Frame Material: aluminum. a. Finish: Mill finish 5. Standards: Meet or exceed all applicable OSHA,ANSI and IBC Standards. 2.9 MOUNTING CLAMPS A. Mounting Clips: To be used for the attachment of rooftop equipment and ladders. Refer to Drawings for locations. 1. Available Manufacturers: B. S-51 Attachment Solutions Metal Roof Innovations, LTD.8655 Table Butte Road, Colorado Springs, CO 80908(888) 825-3432(719) 495-0045 (fax). C. www.s-5.com ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. 2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces, including roofing system from damage during installation of Roofing Accessories. B. Clean surfaces of roof to receive pipe support bases. Remove loose gravel, dirt, dust, oils, and other foreign materials from all roofs. Prime existing substrate or membrane with primer that is compatible with and acceptable roofing membrane manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Coordinate installation with adjacent Work such as roofing, sheet metal and other work to ensure creation of a complete weatherproof assembly. Anchor work securely to supporting structure, but allow for differential and thermal movement. C. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating acceptable to roofing membrane manufacturer or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment:Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. E. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 F. Equipment Support Installation: 1. Locate curbs and support framing where indicated or instructed by Owner's Representative. 2. Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level. G. Roof Hatch Installation: 1. Locate new roof hatches where indicated on drawings. 2. Orient roof hatch and install access ladder to avoid opening toward a roof edge, change in roof elevation, or other obstacles that might impair safe access onto roof. 3. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. 4. Anchor to roof deck with fasteners suitable for substrate. 5. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb. 6. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. After installation, remove shipping clips from components. Do not remove "risk-of-fall" labels from units. 8. Paint Roof hatch as per Paint Schedule. H. Roof Hatch Fall protection Safety Rail and Ladder Extension System Installation: 1. Manufacturer's standard Complete system, including rails, gate and Labels. 2. Verify required gate swing before Installing. I. Roof Mounted Pipe/Equipment Support Installation: 1. Locate bases and support framing as indicated on shop drawings or as required for existing conditions. Completely support all piping, conduit, ducts, and equipment whether indicated or not. a. Do not use wood or wire to support items. b. Maximum Deflection: 1/240th of span. C. Maximum Load on Membrane:Two and one-half(2.5) pounds per square inch. 2. Set bases with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and as acceptable to membrane manufacturer.Accurately locate and align bases. 3. Install support devices at spacings to support weight of piping and conduit, but in no case exceeding 10-feet on center. 4. Set framing posts into bases and assemble framing structure as indicated. 5. Use galvanized fasteners for galvanized framing and stainless-steel fasteners for stainless steel framing. J. Seal joints with sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements". B. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements". C. Request site attendance of Roof Accessory manufacturers during installation of the work if required to confirm compliance with instructions or for special or unusual conditions. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.5 TOUCH UP A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance with Section 09 9113 "Painting." B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. 2. Clean metal and glazing using non-abrasive materials and methods. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned. 3. Remove adhesive from supports, pipes and bases, and leave work in clean condition. B. Remove all construction debris, packaging, unused fasteners, adhesives, and other installation materials from project site and dispose of legally. C. Reclean as necessary to prevent damage. Protect completed work from damage and deterioration and inspect immediately before final acceptance of project. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surfaces. END OF SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 07 92 00-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Urethane joint sealants. 2. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples: Manufacturer's standard color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Joint-sealant schedule. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty Documentation: 1. Manufacturers' special warranties. 2. Installer's special warranties. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS,GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. B. Urethane, M, NS, 25, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2.4 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C1311 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex:Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex,ASTM C834,Type OP, Grade NF. 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers,and otherjoint fillers;and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints:Clean outjoints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints(except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing outjoints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Other porous joint substrates. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. e. Other nonporous joint substrates. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately aftertooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile in accordance with Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated. G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. H. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces:JS-1 1. Joint Locations (Joint sealants in paved roads, parking lots, walkways and curbing are specified in Division 32 of the specifications): a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50,T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:JS-2 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between metal panels. C. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeterjoints between materials listed above and frames of doors,windows and louvers. e. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 12, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces:JS-3 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25,T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:JS-4 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry walls and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:JS-5 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors, and counters. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. C. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F. Setting bed for thresholds:JS-6 1. Joint Locations: a. Set door thresholds in full bed of sealant. 2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealant. 3. Joint Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 08 11 13- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical-and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirement for All Exterior Doors and Frames and Hardware: 1. Comply with International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. Wind loads shall be determined from the pressures developed by a 160-mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category IV, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". 2. Utilize only door, frame and hardware assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Ceco Door;AADG, Inc.;ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries,AADG, Inc.;ASSA ABLOY Group. 3. Republic Doors and Frames;a Allegion brand. 4. Steelcraft;Allegion plc. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with R-value of not less than 2.1 deg.F x h x sq.ft./BTU (0.370K x sq. m/W)when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement,tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Doors: a. Type:As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. C. Construction: Knocked down. 2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement,tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Doors: a. Type:As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness required to meet the requirements of Section 014119-Windstorm Construction Requirements,with minimum A60 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets.Seal joints against water penetration. f. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. g. Core: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness required to meet the requirements of Section 01 41 19 - Windstorm Construction Requirements, with minimum A60 coating. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 b. Construction: Face welded. C. Interior of frames shall be field-coated with bituminous coating. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. a. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 41 19 - Windstorm Construction Requirements. 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet. 3. Post-installed Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts,with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment.Terminate bottom of frames at top of underlayment. C. Material:ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS),04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:ASTM A653/A653M,Commercial Steel (CS),Type B. D. Inserts, Bolts,and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint,fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.6,the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install windstorm-rated units in accordance with the 2021 International Building Code and the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm requirements. These requirements take precedence over the requirements of NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with NAAMM-HMMA 840. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Floor Anchors:Secure with post-installed expansion anchors. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 4. Installation Tolerances:Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines,and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 3.3 REPAIR A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 08 1116- INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING (LITESPACE) PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. LiteSpaceT"^ Interior Aluminum Framing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 80 00—Glazing. 1.03 REFRENCES A. AAMA 607.1—Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. B. ASTM-13209—Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. C. ASTM-13221 —Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Must comply with Section 0133 00—Submittal Procedures. B. Action Submittals/ Informational Submittals. 1. Product Data. a. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets, catalog pages illustrating the products, description of materials, components, fabrication, finishes, installation instructions, and applicable test reports. 2. Shop Drawings. a. Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials,fabrication, framing, and finish. 3. Samples. a. Submit manufacturer's sample of standard colors for frames. C. Closeout Submittals. 1. Operation and Maintenance Manual. a. Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions for frames. 2. Warranty Documentation. a. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery. 1. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened, containers and packaging. 2. Labels clearly identifying elevations. 3. Inspect frames upon delivery for damage. a. Replace frames that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. B. Storage. INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING (LITESPACE) 08 11 16-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Store materials in a clean, dry area, indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Handling. 1. Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Interior Aluminum Framing products to be manufactured free from defective material and faulty workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of shipment, when the product is installed and used in accordance with the company's published instructions. Other Manufacturer's Products & Hardware used within an Installation. 1. Standard Period: Five years starting on date of shipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 LITESPACETM INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: 1. Special-Lite, Inc. a. PO Box 6, Decatur, Michigan 49045. b. Toll Free (800) 821-6531, Phone (269)423-7068, Fax(800) 423-7610. c. Web Site www.special-lite.com. d. E-Mail info@special-lite.com. 2.02 DESCRIPTION A. Model. 1. LiteSpace Interior Aluminum Framing. B. Materials. 1. See 2.02- Materials. C. Perimeter Frame Members. 1. Rectilinear design with 1-3/4"face. 2. Overall depth of 2-3/8". 3. Vertical aluminum mullions. D. Frame Member to Member Connections. 1. Secure joints with fasteners. 2. Provide hairline butt joint appearance. 3. No exposed clips for member-to-member connections. E. Glazing. 1. Thickness as scheduled in the drawings and Specification Section 08 80 00-Glazing. 2. Vinyl glazing bulb; color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full color line. INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING (LITESPACE) 08 11 16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Glazing system designed to allow replacement of glass. 4. Glazing vinyl internal to extrusion to provide clean sight line. F. Anchors: 1. Anchors appropriate for wall conditions to anchor framing to wall materials. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members. 1. Aluminum extrusions made 6061 or 6063 aluminum alloys. 2. Sheet and plate to conform to ASTM-13209. 3. Alloy and temper to be selected by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, and control of color. B. Fasteners. 1. All exposed fasteners will have a finish to match material being fastened. 2. Type 304 stainless steel or other non-corrosive metal. 3. Must be compatible with items being fastened. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Factory Assembly. 1. All components from the same manufacturer. 2. Required size for frame units shall be as indicated on the drawings. 3. All cut edges to be free of burs. 4. Welding of frames is not acceptable. 5. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. B. Shop Fabrication 1. All shop fabrication to be completed in accordance with manufactures process work instructions. 2. Quality control to be performed before leaving each department. 2.04 FINISHES A. Frame 1. Clear Anodized Aluminum. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Notify architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. B. Do no proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING (LITESPACE) 08 11 16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install plumb, level, square,true to line, and without warp or rack. C. Anchor frames securely in place. D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by architect. E. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by architect. F. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by architect. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish. C. Clean once a year or as needed with a non-acidic or alkaline cleaning product. D. Light scratches may be removed with a light abrasive, such as ground pumice. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect to ensure that frames will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08 1116 INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING (LITESPACE) 08 11 16-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 08 14 16- FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core flush wood doors with plastic-laminate-faces. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Factory-machining criteria. 5. Factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door location,type, size,fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. 4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 6. Clearances and undercuts. 7. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. B. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS,GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with "Architectural Woodwork Standards." FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.2 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS WITH PLASTIC-LAMINATE FACES A. Interior Doors, Solid Core: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. ABS-American Building Supply- Doormerica. b. Haley Brothers, Inc. C. Masonite Architectural. d. Oshkosh Door Company. e. Poncraft Door Company. f. VT Industries, Inc. 2. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Heavy Duty. 3. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. 4. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 5. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: shall be Wilsonart D92-60 "Dove Grey'. 6. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Paint shall match color of faces. 7. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: a. ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 particleboard. 1) Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows: a) 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b) 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. c) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. b. Glued wood stave. C. WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber. 1) Screw Withdrawal, Face: 475 lb. 2) Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 475 lb. d. Either glued wood stave or WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Install frames level, plumb,true, and straight. 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1) For factory-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. D. Job-Fitted Doors: 1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below. a. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. 2. Machine doors for hardware. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Clearances: a. Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. 5. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. E. Factory-Fitted Doors:Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 08 3113 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ACUDOR Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. C. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Milcor; Hart& Cooley, Inc. f. Nystrom, Inc. g. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). 2. Description: 24 x 24 inches unless noted otherwise on drawings, face of door flush with frame,with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling as indicated on drawings and as required by applicable building codes for access to MEP equipment& controls. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory primed. 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, key operated. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A879/A879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.3 FABRICATION A. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. B. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. C. Latch and Lock Hardware: 1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2.4 FINISHES A. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation,for proper operation. END OF SECTION 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 08 33 23 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-Fire-rated, Insulated service doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 014119 "Windstorm Construction Requirements". 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports, door-opening framing, corner guards, and bollards. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. 2. Show locations of controls, locking devices detectors or replaceable fusible links, and other accessories. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by the manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 and the "Texas Accessibility Standards". B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the following design wind loads: 1. Design Wind Load: Comply with 2021 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements 160 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category IV, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". 2. Utilize only door,frame and hardware assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. C. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide overhead coiling doors that pass ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests according to for protection. 1. Large-Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within of grade. 2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Insulated Service Door (Door Panel Type E): Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Overhead Door Corporation; Model 625 or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amarr; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Cookson; a CornellCookson company. C. Cornell; a CornellCookson company. d. Wayne Dalton; a division of Overhead Door Corporation. e. Overhead Door Corporation. B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000. C. Insulated Door Curtain R-Value: 7.7. D. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2-5/8-inch center-to-center height. 1. Provide High Windload option with Slat Gauge as required to meet TDI Windstorm requirements. 2. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. F. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door. G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 H. Hood: Galvanized steel. 1. Mounting:As indicated on Drawings. I. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. J. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day. 2. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or industrial use. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior. 4. Motor Electrical Characteristics: a. Horsepower: 1 hp. b. Voltage: 480 V ac,three phase, 60 Hz. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Crank type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor electric sensor edge on bottom bar. 7. Control Station(s): Interior mounted Where indicated on Drawings. K. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals astragal. L. Door Finish: 1. Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Powder-Coated Finish. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with minimum thickness required by applicable codes. B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated,with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain,to allow curtain to operate smoothly,and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.5 HOODS A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 2.6 LOCKING DEVICES A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Lock Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware" and keyed to building keying system. 2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise indicated. B. Pole Hooks: Provide pole hooks and poles for doors more than 84 inches high. 2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.9 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified,with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than the number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller(disconnect switch)for motor exposure indicated for each door assembly. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each door assembly. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. D. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors,activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Forfire-rated doors, activation delays closing. 1. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire-configured device designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge. E. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push- button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close." 1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general- purpose NEMA ICS 6,Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6,Type 4 enclosure, key operated. F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 Ibf. G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. I. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with the accessibility standard. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Comply with 2021 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. C. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and to furnish reports to Architect. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Test door release, closing, and alarm operations when activated by smoke detector or building's fire-alarm system. Test manual operation of closed door. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test. 2. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door in accordance with NFPA 80, Section 5.2. C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements. E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 08 4113 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum-framed storefront systems. 2. Aluminum-framed entrance door systems. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Submit manufacturer's product specifications, technical product data, standard details, and installation recommendations for each type of entrance and storefront product required. Include the following information: 1. Fabrication methods. 2. Finishing. 3. Hardware. 4. Accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. 2. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing details. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. Submit pairs of samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6- inch square sheets. Where color or texture variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of variations. D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. E. Delegated Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Structural-Test & Impact-Test Performance: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests according to ASTM E 330 and ASTM E 1886, performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type assembly indicating the following: a. Structural-Test Performance Results: ASTM E 330 performance data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 including test and design wind pressures for approved test assembly as described above (test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted). b. Impact-Test Performance Results: ASTM E 1996 performance data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, including test and design wind pressures for approved test assembly as described above (test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted). F. Windstorm Debris Impact Resistance Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996. 1. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located more than 30 feet above grade. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer. B. Product test reports. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Sample warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide entrance and storefront produced by a single manufacturer capable of showing prior production of units similar to those required. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide entrances and storefront produced by a single manufacturer with not less than 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of assemblies of the type and quality required. C. Installers Qualifications: Entrances and storefront shall be installed by a firm that has not less than 5 years successful experience in the installation of systems similar to those required. D. Delegated Design Engineer: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in state where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the type indicated. E. Design Criteria: Drawings indicate sizes, spacings of members, profiles and dimensional requirements of entrance and storefront work. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in the Architect's sole judgement, such deviations do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Design Criteria: Drawings are based on one manufacturer's entrance and storefront system. Another manufacturer's system of a similar and equivalent nature will be acceptable when, in the Architect's sole judgement, differences do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance. F. Requirement for all Exterior Storefront Frames, Doors and Hardware: 1. Comply with 2021 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements (160 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category IV and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". 2. Utilize only assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. 3. Comply with Specification Section 014119-Windstorm Construction Requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units (including reglazing) of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration, faulty operation, and deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurement, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. C. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads:As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: At design wind load, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing members and operable units. E. Structural:Test in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure:Test in accordance with ASTM E331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested in accordance with a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 I bf/sq.ft. G. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: U-factor for the system of not more than 0.29 as determined in accordance with NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: SHGC for the system of not more than 0.25 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200. H. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 1. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located between 30 feet and above grade. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Trifab 451 Framing system or comparable product approved by Architect. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Interior Framing Construction: Nonthermal. a. System Dimensions: 2" x 4-1/2" b. Glass: Center Pane 2. Glazing Systems a. Glazing:As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing". b. Glazing Gaskets; Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. d. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. e. Glazing Sealants: as recommended by Manufacturer. 3. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel. 2.3 EXTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Type IR-501T or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope (OBE); CRH Americas, Inc. 2. YKK AP America Inc. 3. Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Exterior Framing Construction:Thermally broken. a. System Dimensions: 2-1/2"x 5" 2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Type IR-500 Stile and Rail Type Aluminum Doors or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope (OBE); CRH Americas, Inc. 2. Vistawall Architectural Products. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 4. Kawneer Company, Inc.;Arconic Corporation. B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: as indicated on Drawings. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch and not more than 30 Ibf to set the door in motion. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 Ibf to fully open door. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. C. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel,with stainless steel pin. 3. Quantities: a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per leaf. D. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. E. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing in accordance with UL 305. F. Cylinders: 1. As specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." G. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. H. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. I. Surface-Mounted Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force. J. Concealed Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. K. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper. L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D2287 molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. N. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 O. Removable Mullion: Furnish and install where indicated on drawings or where required by windstorm code. 2.6 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants:As recommended by manufacturer. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221. C. Structural Profiles:ASTM 8308/13308M. D. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A10081M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M. E. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods in accordance with recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces in accordance with applicable SSPC standard. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project in accordance with Shop Drawings. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. G. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation. I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORS A. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware in accordance with entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3. Comply with specification Section 014119—Windstorm Construction Requirements. 3.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS: A. Refer to Specification Section 08 7100—DOOR HARDWARE. END OF SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 08 7100- DOOR HARDWARE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work under this section comprises of furnishing and installing hardware specified herein and noted on drawings for a complete and operational system, including any electrified hardware components,systems,controls and hardware for aluminum entrance doors.Any door shown on the drawing and not specifically referenced in the hardware sets shall be provided with identical hardware as specified on other similar openings and shall be included in the General Contractor's base bid. All Windstorm-rated doors shall be provided with hardware as part of a tested system with that door. The hardware supplier shall verify all cylinder types specified for locking devices supplied as part of the door system with the door manufacturer and/or door supplies. B. The General Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies (five (S) days prior to bid date) that could and/or would result in hardware being supplied that is none functional, hardware specified and/or hardware that has not been specified that will result in any code violations and any door that is not covered in this specification. Failure of the General Contractor to address any such issue shall be considered acceptance of the hardware specified and all discrepancies shall be corrected at the General Contractor's expense and considered a part of their base bid. Change orders shall not be issued if deemed by the Architect and/or Owner to fall under and/or be covered as a part of the General Contractor base bid, due to failure to comply with this instruction notification. C. Items include but are not limited to the following: 1. Hinges 2. Flush Bolts 3. Exit Devices 4. Locksets and Cylinders 5. Push Plates- Pulls 6. Closers 7. Kick, Mop and Protection Plates 8. Stops, Wall Bumpers, Overhead Controls 9. Thresholds, Seals and Door Bottoms 10. Silencers 11. Miscellaneous Trim and Accessories 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.3 RELATED WORK specified elsewhere that should be examined for its effect upon this section: A. Section 08 1113—Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Section 08 14 16—Flush Wood Doors DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-1 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 C. Sections within 08 3113—Access Doors D. Section within 08 4113—Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts E. Sections within 08 80 00—Glazing F. Sections within 09 9113 - Painting G. Division 26—Electrical H. Division 28—Access Control 1.4 REFERENCES SPECIFIED in this section subject to compliance as directed: A. NFPA-80-Standard for Fire Doors and Windows B. NFPA-101- Life Safety Code C. ADA-The Americans with Disabilities Act-Title III - Public Accommodations D. ANSI-A 117.1 - American National Standards Institute - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities E. ANSI-A 156.5 -American National Standards institute-Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products F. UFAS- Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards G. UL—Under-writer's Laboratories H. WHI -Warnock Hersey International,Testing Services I. State and Local Codes including Authority Having Jurisdiction J. Positive PressureUL10C K. IBC-2018—International Building Code L. NFPA-70—International Electrical Code 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. HARDWARE SCHEDULES 1. Submit copies of schedule in accordance with Division 1,General Requirements.Schedule to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, including: handing of opening, all hardware scheduled for opening or otherwise required to allow for proper function of door opening as intended, and finish of hardware. At doors with door closers or door controls include degree of door opening. Supply the schedules all Finish Hardware within two (2)weeks from date purchase order is received by the hardware supplier. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-2 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 B. Submit manufacturer's cut/catalog sheets on all hardware items and any required special mounting instructions with the hardware schedule. C. Certification of Compliance: 1. Submit any information necessary to indicate compliance to all of these specifications as required. 2. Submit a statement from the manufacturer that electronic hardware and systems being supplied comply with the operational descriptions exactly as specified. D. Submit any samples necessary as required by the Architect. E. Templates for finish hardware items to be sent to related door and frame suppliers within three (3) working days of receipt of approved hardware schedule. F. Doors and Frames used in positive pressure opening assemblies shall meet UL10C in areas where this specification includes Seals for smoke door. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware supplier to be a qualified, Factory Authorized, direct distributor of the products to be furnished. In addition, the supplier to have in their regular employment an AHC or AHC /CDC and/or a person of equivalent experience (minimum fifteen (15)years in the industry) who will be made available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect/Contractor and/or Owner regarding any matters affecting the finish hardware on this project. B. All hardware used in labeled fire or smoke rated openings to be listed for those types of openings and bear the identifying label or mark indicating UL. (Underwriter's Laboratories) approved for fire. Exit devices in non-labeled openings to be listed for panic. 1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND PACKAGING A. Furnish all hardware with each unit clearly marked and numbered in accordance with the hardware schedule. Include door and item number for each. B. Pack each item of hardware completes with all necessary parts and fasteners. C. Properly wrap and cushion each item to prevent scratches and dents during delivery and storage. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Any part of the finish hardware required by the frame or door manufacturers or other suppliers that is needed in order to produce doors or frames is to be sent to those suppliers in a timely manner, so as not to interrupt job progress. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-3 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 1.9 WARRANTY A. All finish hardware shall be supplied (By the Hardware Supplier) with a Two- (2) year written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, commencing with substantial completion of the project except as follows: 1. All Closers are to have a thirty- (30)year written warranty. 2. All Exit Devices are to have a three- (3)year written warranty. 3. All Locksets are to have a ten- (10)year written warranty. 4. All Continuous are to have a ten- (10)year written warranty. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FASTENERS A. Furnish with finish hardware all necessary screws, bolts and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for a long life under hard use. B. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts and other anchors designated by the Architect according to the material to which the hardware is to be applied and the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer.All closers and exit devices on labeled wood doors shall be through-bolted if required be the door manufacturer. All thresholds shall be fastened with wood screws and plastic anchors. Where specified in the hardware sets, security type fasteners of the type called for are to be supplied. C. Design of all fastenings shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. D. All hardware shall be installed with the Manufacturers standard screws as provided. The use of any other type of fasteners shall not be permitted. The general contractor shall provide wood blocking in all stud walls specified and/or scheduled to receive wall stops, No Exception. 2.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERN FOR PACKAGING A. Hardware shipped to the project jobsite shall be packaged in biodegradable packs such as paper or cardboard boxes and wrapping. 2.3 HINGES A. All hinges to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed for continuity and consideration of warranty. Provide one of the following manufacturers Ives, Bommer or Stanley. B. Unless otherwise specified provide five-knuckle, heavy-duty, button tip, full mortise template type hinges with non-rising loose pins. Provide non-removable pins for out swinging doors at secured areas or as called for in this specification (Refer to 3.02 Hardware Sets). C. Exterior Five Knuckle Door Hinges shall be manufactured from solid stainless steel,aluminum or bronze base metal and provide all out-swinging doors with non-removable pins or security studs as called for in 3.02 Hardware Sets. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-4 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 D. Interior Five Knuckle Door Hinges shall be manufactured from a steel base metal. Furnish three (3) hinges up to 90 inches high and one (1) additional hinge for every 30 inches or fraction thereof. E. Provide all exterior&interior hinges in a size 4%"x 4%"for all 1%"thick doors up to and including 36 inches wide. Doors over 1%"through 2%"thick, use 5"x 5" hinges. Doors over 36 inches use 5" x 4%" unless otherwise noted in 3.02 Hardware Sets. F. Were exterior or interior door hinges are required to clear the trim and/or to permit the doors to swing 180 degrees furnish hinges of sufficient throw. G. Provide heavy weight hinges on all exterior or interior doors over 36 inches in width. H. At exterior or interior labeled door's ball-bearing type hinges shall be provided. For all doors equipped with closers provide ball-bearing-type hinges. I. Finishes at all Interior and Exterior door hinges shall be provided as specified in 3.02 Hardware Sets. 2.4 LOCK AND LOCK TRIM A. All of the locksets, latch sets, and trim to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. Locksets specified are Sargent 10 line with "L" lever as specified. B. Provide metal wrought box strike boxes and curved lip strikes with proper lip length to protect trim of the frame, but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond frame trim or the inactive leaf of a pair of doors. C. Mechanical Locks shall meet ANSI Operational Grade 1, Series 4000 as specified. 1. Hand of lock is to be field reversible or non-handed. 2. All lever trim is to be through-bolted through the door. 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Provide all Interior locks and Exit devices requiring cylinders with Sargent Cores keyed to a New Master Key System and complies with performance requirements of ANSI A156.5. All keys shall be of nickel silver material only.The hardware supplier shall meet with the General Contractor, the Architect and Owner at the project site to determine all permanent keying requirements. The hardware supplier shall provide One (1) Knox Box if required by the local Fire Marshall.The contractor shall, as required by the local Fire Marshall and Owner mount the Knox Box. B. Furnish all exterior and interior locks, cylinders and Exit devices with temporary keyed construction cores feature for the duration of construction. Provide ten (10) construction keys and two (2) construction Control keys total. C. Cores shall be factory keyed and factory maintained as directed by owner & the Architect. Provide four- (4) keys per cylinder and ten- (10) master keys per master used. Provide a bitting DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-5 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 list for changes used and include additional bittings for future expansion as instructed by owner during the project keying meeting. Signature for all deliveries to owner shall be required. D. Factory stamp all keys "Do not duplicate" and with key symbol as directed by owner. 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. All exit devices and trim, including electrified items, to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed and in the hardware sets for continuity of design and consideration of warranty;electrified devices and trim to be the same series and design as mechanical devices and trim. B. Exit Devices to be "UL" listed for life safety. All exit devices for labeled doors shall have "UL" label for "Fire Exit Hardware". All devices mounted on labeled wood doors are to be through- bolted or per the manufacturer's listing requirements.All devices shall conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 101 requirements. C. All exit devices to be of a heavy duty,chassis mounted design,with one-piece removable covers, eliminating necessity of removing the device from the door for standard maintenance and keying requirements. D. All trims to be through-bolted to the lock stile case. Lever design to be the same as specified with the lock sets. E. Exit Devices shall be the modern push rail design. All exit devices shall be mounted with sex bolts. F. All devices shall carry a three- (3) year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship. Exit devices shall be certified by an independent testing lab for a minimum of 1,000,000 cycles. G. Exit Devices for this project shall be the products of a single manufacturer for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. 2.7 SURFACE MOUNTED DOOR CLOSERS A. All closers for this project shall be the products of a single manufacturer for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. All door closers shall be mounted as to achieve the maximum degree of opening (trim permitting). B. All closers to be heavy duty, surface-mounted, fully hydraulic, rack and pinion action with high strength cast iron cylinder to provide control throughout the entire door opening cycle. C. Size all closers in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations at the factory. D. All closers to have adjustable spring power sizes 1 or 2 through 4 or 6 and separate tamper resistant, brass, non-critical regulating screw valves for closing speed, latching speed and back- check control as a standard feature unless specified otherwise. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-6 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 E. All closer covers to be rectangular,full cover type of non-ferrous,non-corrosive material painted to match closer. Provide closer covers only if provided as a standard part of the door closer package. F. Closers shall have heavy-duty arms.All closer arms shall be of sufficient length to accommodate the reveal depth and to insure proper installation.The hardware supplier shall provide any and all required brackets, spacers or filler plates as required by the manufacturer for a proper and functional installation as part of their base bid. G. Supply appropriate arm assembly for each closer so that closer body and arm are mounted on non-public side of door opening and on the interior side of exterior openings, except where required otherwise in the hardware sets. 1. All parallel arm mounted closers to be factory indexed to insure proper installation. 2. Furnish heavy-duty cold forged parallel arms for all parallel arm mounted closers. H. Provide closers with special application and heavy-duty arms as specified in the hardware sets or as otherwise called for to insure a proper operating, long-lasting opening. Drop plates and any additional brackets required for the proper installation of the door closer shall be included in the hardware supplier's base bid. I. Finish: Finish shall be compatible with other hardware. J. Provide and mount all door closers with sex bolts as provided by the manufacturer. 2.8 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Door stops are to be furnished for every door leaf. Every door shall have a floor, wall, or an overhead stop. B. Place doorstops in such a position that they permit maximum door swing, but do not present a hazard of obstruction. Furnish floor strikes for floor holders of proper height to engage holders of doors. C. Where overhead stops and holders are specified, or otherwise required for proper door operation, they are to be heavy duty and of extruded brass, bronze or stainless steel with no plastic parts as specified. The General Contractor shall provide wood blocking in all stud walls specified and scheduled to receive wall stops. D. Finish: Same as other hardware where available. E. Acceptable Products 1. Floor and wall stops as listed in hardware sets. Equivalent products manufactured by Ives, Rockwood, Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-7 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 2.9 PUSH PLATES, DOOR PULLS,AND KICKPLATES A. All push plates, door pull, kick plates and other miscellaneous hardware as listed in hardware sets. Equivalent products manufactured by Ives, Rockwood, Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable. B. Kick plates to be 10 inches high and Mop plates to be 6 inches high, both by 2 inches or 1 inch less than door width (LDW) as specified. They are to be of 16-gauge thick stainless steel. For door with louvers or narrow bottom rails, kick plate height to be 1 inch less dimension shown from the bottom of the door to the bottom of the louver or glass. C. Where required armor plates, edge guards and other protective hardware shall be supplied in sizes as scheduled in the hardware sets. D. Finish: Same as other hardware where available. 2.10 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS A. Provide Flush bolts with Dust Proof Strikes as indicated in the individual hardware sets by Ives, Rockwood,Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable. Finish shall match the adjacent hardware. 2.11 THRESHOLDS AND SEALS A. Provide materials and finishes as listed in hardware sets. Equivalent product by National Guard Products, Zero, and Reese are acceptable. All thresholds must be in accordance with the requirements of the ADA and ANSI A117.1. B. Provide thresholds with wood screws and plastic anchors. Supply all necessary anchoring devices for weather strip and sound seal. C. Seals shall comply with requirements of UL10C. All thresholds, door bottoms and weather strip inserts shall be a silicone-based product as specified in 3.02 Hardware Sets.Other materials used shall be rejected, unless originally specified. D. Seals shall comply with the requirements of the Wood Door Manufacturer's certification requirements. 2.12 FINISHES A. Finishes for all hardware are as required in this specification and the hardware sets. B. Special care is to be taken to make uniform the finish of all various manufactured items. 2.13 DOOR SILENCERS A. Provide door silencers at all openings without gasket. Provide two-(2)each at each pair of doors and three- (3) or four- (4) each for each single door(coordinate with the frame manufacturer). DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-8 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 2.14 KEY CABINET A. Provide a key cabinet Lund 1200 series for installation by the contractor as instructed by the Architect and owner. Key Cabinet shall be of such size as to hold 150% of the total number of keys supplied for this project. Verify with owner if key cabinets are in fact required. 2.15 PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS A. References to specific products are used to establish quality standards of utility and performance. Unless otherwise approved provide only the specified product. B. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper finish hardware installation, are to be selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect and Owner. C. Architect and Owner reserve the right to approve all the substitutions proposed for this specification.All requests for substitution to be made prior to bid in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, and are to be in writing, hand delivered to the Architect. Two (2) copies of the manufacturer's brochures and a physical sample of each item in the appropriate design and finish shall accompany requests for substitution. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE ITEMS OF FINISH HARDWARE A. All finish hardware shall be installed by an experienced finish hardware installer with at least ten (10) years of experience after a pre-installation meeting between the contractor, hardware Manufacturers representative, the hardware supplier, hollow metal supplier and wood door supplier. The finish hardware installer shall be responsible for the proper installation and function of all doors and hardware. B. The hardware supplier's office and/or warehouse shall be located within a one hundred (100) mile radius of the project site as to better service the general contractor and Owner during this project. C. Check hardware against the reviewed hardware schedule upon delivery. Store the hardware in a dry and secure location to protect against loss and damage. D. Install finish hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule and manufacturers' printed instructions. Pre-fit hardware before finish is applied to door; remove and reinstall after finish is complete and dry. Install and adjust hardware so that parts operate smoothly, close tightly, and do not rattle. E. Mortise and cutting to be done neatly, and evidence of cutting to be concealed in the finished work. Protect all Finish hardware from scratching or other damage. F. The hardware supplier, general contractor, hardware installer, representatives of the lock, exit device and closer manufacturers shall after one(1)months of Owner acceptance of the facilities, perform an onsite survey of the finish hardware installation. Any item of finish hardware found DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-9 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 to be defective or out of adjustment shall be replaced or adjusted for the proper function and operation of the door assembly at the contractor's, supplier's and/or installer's expense. The hardware supplier shall provide a written report of any and all affected items to the Architect and Owner (No Exceptions). The scheduled inspection date for the onsite inspection and adjustment of finish hardware shall be provided to the Architect as a part of the general contractor and hardware supplies close-out documentation for this project. 3.2 HARDWARE SETS Manufacturer Abbreviations: HA= Harger/ Roton RO = Rockwood SU =Securitron CR= Corbin Russwin Ml<= McKinney RF= Rixon SA=Sargent PE = Pemko Hardware Set 1 Windstorm Rated A100A Each to receive: 2 EA Continuous Hinge 1200-600 HA 1 EA Keyed Mullion CR907BKM CR 2 EA Rim Exit Device ED5200S(A)N9M57 US32D CR 1 EA Cylinder 980C1 US26D SA 2 EA Surface Closer 351 CPS EN SA 2 EA Drop Plate 351 D EN SA 1 EA Threshold 2005AT x 72" PE 2 EA Sweep 315CN x 36" PE Hardware Set 2 Access Controlled A100B Each to receive: 2 EA Continuous Hinge CFM83HD1 PT Tek MxM PE 2 EA Electric Power EL-EPT SU Transfer 1 EA Mullion L980 86"PC SA 2 EA Rim Exit Device 53 55 56 8804 ETL US32D SA 1 EA Cylinder 980C1 US26D SA 2 EA Surface Closer 351 CPS EN SA 2 EA Drop Plate 351 D EN SA 2 EA Sweep 315CN x 36" PE 2 EA ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 2 EA ElectroLynx Harness QC-0003P MK 1 EA BY SECURITY CARD READER CONTRACTOR 1 EA BY SECURITY POWER SUPPLY CONTRACTOR DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-10 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 Hardware Set 3 Windstorm Rated,Access Controlled All A122 A126B Each to receive: 1 EA Continuous Hinge 1200-600 EPT HA 1 EA Electric Power EL-EPT SU Transfer 1 EA Rim Exit Device ED5200S(A)N9M57 US32D MLER CR 1 EA Surface Closer 351 CPS EN SA 1 EA Drop Plate 351 D EN SA 1 EA Threshold 2005AT x 36" PE 1 EA Sweep 315CN x 36" PE 1 EA Door Stop 466-RKW RO 1 EA ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 1 EA ElectroLynx Harness QC-0003P MK 1 EA BY SECURITY CARD READER CONTRACTOR 1 EA BY SECURITY POWER SUPPLY CONTRACTOR Hardware Set 4 Windstorm Rated,Access Controlled A128A Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2314 NRP 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"US32D MK 1 EA Electric Power EL-EPT SU Transfer 1 EA Fail Secure Lock AUR3 8897-2FL LC 630 REX YA 1 EA Mortise Cylinder 41 US32D SA 1 EA Surface Closer 351 CPS EN SA 1 EA Threshold 2005AT x 36" PE 1 EA Gasketing 303AV x 36"x 84" PE 1 EA Rain Guard 346C x 40" PE 1 EA Sweep 315CN x 36" PE 1 EA Door Stop 466-RKW RO 1 EA ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 1 EA ElectroLynx Harness QC-0003P MK 1 EA BY SECURITY CARD READER CONTRACTOR 1 EA BY SECURITY POWER SUPPLY CONTRACTOR DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-11 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 Hardware Set 5 A101 A104 A105 A120 A125 Each to receive: Access Controlled 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 EA Storeroom/Closet Lock10XG04 LL US26D SA 1 EA Electric Strike 8300C 630 HS 1 EA SMART Pac Bridge 2005M3 HS Rectifier 1 EA Surface Closer 1431 UO EN SA 1 EA Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer 307D HA 1 EA BY SECURITY CARD READER CONTRACTOR 1 EA BY SECURITY POWER SUPPLY CONTRACTOR Hardware Set 6 Access Controlled A123 Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 NRP 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 EA Storeroom/Closet Lock 10XG04 LL US26D SA 1 EA Electric Strike 8300C 630 HS 1 EA SMART Pac Bridge 2005M3 HS Rectifier 1 EA Surface Closer 1431 UO CPSH EN SA 3 EA Silencer 307D HA 1 EA BY SECURITY CARD READER CONTRACTOR 1 EA BY SECURITY POWER SUPPLY CONTRACTOR A103 A106 A108A A108B A110C A121A Hardware Set 7 A121B Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"US26D MK 1 EA Entry/Office Lock 10XG05 LL US26D SA 1 EA Wall Stop 409 US32D SA 3 EA Silencer 307D HA DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 12 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 Per Addendum No. 01 Hardware Set 8 A126A Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"US26D MK 1 EA Rim Exit 8813-ETL US26D SA 1 EA Surface Closer 1431 UO CPSH EN SA 1 EA Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer 307D HA Hardware Set 9 A110A A110B Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 EA Passage Latch 10XU15 LL US26D SA 1 EA Surface Closer 1431 UO CPSH EN SA 3 EA Silencer 307D HA Hardware Set 10 A107 A109 A112 A113 Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 EA Storeroom/Closet Lock 1OXG04 LL US26D SA 1 EA Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer 307D HA Hardware Set 11 A114 Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 EA Storeroom/Closet Lock 1OXG04 LL US26D SA 1 EA Surf Overhead Stop 10-336 630 RF 3 EA Silencer 307D HA DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 13 Northwest Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 Hardware Set 12 A119 Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"US26D MK 1 EA Pull Plate 107X70C US32D RO 1 EA Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D RO 1 EA Surface Closer 1431 UO CPSH EN SA 1 EA Kick Plate K1050 10"X 34"US32D BEV CSK RO 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer 307D HA Hardware Set 13 A102 A115 A116 A117 A118 A124 Each to receive: 3 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"US26D MK 1 EA Privacy Lock 1OXU65 VSLL V33 US26D SA 1 EA Surface Closer 1431 UO EN SA 1 EA Kick Plate K1050 10"x 34" US32D BEV CSK RO 1 EA Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer 307D HA Hardware Set 14 A127 Each to receive: 6 EA Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"US26D MK 1 EA Flush Bolt 555 US26D SA 1 EA Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D SA 1 EA Storeroom/Closet Lock 1OXG04 LL US26D SA 2 EA Surf Overhead Stop 10-336 630 RF 3 EA Silencer 307D HA Hardware Set 15 Overhead Coiling Door A128B Each to receive: 1 EA By Door Manufacturer ALL HARDWARE END OF SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-14 Police Substation-Northwest-23176 08/05/2024 SECTION 08 80 00-GLAZING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass products. 2. Laminated glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Glazing sealants. 5. Miscellaneous glazing materials. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination,and service condition. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Delegated Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For glass. B. Product test reports. C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. D. Sample warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. GLAZING 08 80 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture,or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements,"to design glazing. B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300: 1. Design Wind Pressures:As indicated on Drawings. 2. Thermal Loads: Design glazing to resist thermal stress breakage induced by differential temperature conditions and limited air circulation within individual glass lites and insulated glazing units. C. Wind borne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall pass ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic- pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 1. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located between 30 feet and 60 feet above grade. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. GLAZING 08 80 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on most current non- beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program,expressed as 2. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance:Center-of-glazing values,in accordance with NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. NGA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual"and "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMATM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the IGCC. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated. E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout the Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance GLAZING 08 80 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Wind borne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in the same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet above grade. 3. Large-Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass liter, properties are based on units with lites 3/16 inch thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulation-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW S.2 computer program,expressed as Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F. S. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance:Center-of-glazing values,according to NFRC 300. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass:ASTM C1036,Type I,Class 1(clear),Quality-Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated,Type I,Class 1 (clear)or Class 2(tinted)as indicated,Quality-Q3. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor,or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or cast-in-place and cured- transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color:Clear unless otherwise indicated. B. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: Comply with requirements specified above for laminated glass except laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions: GLAZING 08 80 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Construction: Laminate heat strengthened glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color:Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace,qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal,with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel,or a blend of both. 2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers,and Sealers:Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: 1. Elastomeric with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. C. Spacers: 1. Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. D. Edge Blocks: 1. Elastomeric with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. GLAZING 08 80 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING,GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,when installed,could weaken glass, impair performance,or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants,as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 GASKET GLAZING(DRY)FOR INTERIOR OPENINGS A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. GLAZING 08 80 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.3 SEALANT GLAZING(WET)FOR EXTERIOR OPENINGS A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove non-permanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month,for buildup of dirt,scum,alkaline deposits,or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damaging coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. 3.5 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE(Windstorm Impact Resistant) A. Low-E-Coated,Tinted, Insulating Laminated Glass Type GL1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Double Glazed Tinted Solar Control Laminated Insulating Glass Unit, Solarban 90 on Solargray 1/4 inch (6mm), surface #2 1 Air 1/2" (12.7mm) 1 1/4 inch (6mm)Clear_090SG_1/4 inch (6mm)Clear. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-5/16 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 1/4 inch. 4. Outdoor Lite: Solargray Tinted with second surface Solarban 90 low-E coating, heat-strengthened float glass. 5. Interspace Content:Air: 1/2 inch. 6. Indoor Lite:Clear laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass. a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 1/4 inch. b. Interlayer Thickness:0.090 inch, Eastman Saflex or Kuraray Butacite PVB. 7. Low-E Coating: Magnetic sputter coating on second surface. 8. Safety glazing label required. 9. Performance Requirements: a. Visible Light Transmittance:24 percent minimum. b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor:0.28(Btu/hr*ft2*'F) maximum. C. Summer daytime U-Factor:0.26(Btu/hr*ft2*'F) maximum. GLAZING 08 80 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 d. Shading Coefficient:0.19 maximum. e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient:0.16 maximum. f. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance:6 percent maximum. B. Low-E-Coated,Tinted, Insulating Laminated Glass Type GL2: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Double Glazed Tinted Solar Control Laminated Insulating Glass Unit, Solarban 90 on Clear 3/16 inch (5mm), surface #2 1 Air 3/8" (9.5mm) 1 3/16 inch(5mm)SB60(4)Solargray_090PVB_3/16 inch (5mm)Clear. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite:3/16 inch. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass with second surface Solarban 90 low-E coating. 5. Interspace Content:Air: 3/8 inch. 6. Indoor Lite: Laminated a. Laminate Outboard Lite: Solargray Tinted with fourth surface Solarban 90 low-E coating, heat-strengthened float glass. b. Interlayer Thickness:0.090 inch, Eastman Saflex or Kuraray Butacite PVB. C. Laminate Inboard Lite: Clear laminated heat-strengthened float glass. d. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3/16 inch. 7. Low-E Coating: Magnetic sputter coating on fourth surface. 8. Performance Requirements: a. Visible Light Transmittance:24 percent minimum. b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor:0.31 (Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum. C. Summer daytime U-Factor:0.31 (Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum. d. Shading Coefficient:0.25 maximum. e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient:0.21 maximum. f. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 12 percent maximum. 9. Safety glazing label required. 3.6 LAMINATED(SAFETY)GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Laminated Glass Type GL3:Two plies of fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 1/4 inch. 2. Interlayer Thickness:0.060 inch. 3. Overall Unit Thickness: Nominal 9/16 inch. 4. Safety glazing label required. 3.7 NON-LAMINATED(SAFETY)GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Glass Type GL4:Single ply of fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness of Glass Ply:3/8 inch. 2. Safety glazing label required. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 80 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 08 9119 - FIXED LOUVERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes Miami-Dade approved wind driven rain resistant fixed formed-metal louvers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 20 00- Unit Masonry. 2. Section 07 42 43 -Composite Wall Panels. 3. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim. 4. Section 07 92 00-Joint Sealants. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. C. Windstorm Product Approval documentation with installation instructions. D. Samples: Submit actual metal color samples of louver to show finish and color. E. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Finish Warranty, Factory-Applied Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of baked enamel, powder coat, or organic finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Louvers withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or FIXED LOUVERS 08 91 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures are considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: a. Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. b. Design Wind Load: Comply with 2021 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements (160 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category IV and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". C. Use only louver assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance or Miami Dade. B. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. 2.2 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal Louver, Extruded Aluminum: 1. Basis-of-Design Product- Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ruskin HZ70OMD Extreme Performance Louver or comparable product approved by the Architect. a. Miami Dade Approval NOA#20-1201.01 2. Sizes: as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Frame: Double frame design produced from 6063T6 extruded aluminum with .080-inch nominal wall thickness. Front frame depth is 4 inches and rear frame depth is 3 inches. Combined frame depth is 7 inches. 4. Blade:6063T6 extruded aluminum with 0.080-inch and 0.050-inch nominal wall thickness. Blades are spaced approximately at 3.8 inches center to center. 5. Extended sills: a. Formed Aluminum, Alloy 3003. Minimum nominal thickness 0.081 inch (2.1 mm). 6. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: 53%free area. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 803 fpm. 7. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.3 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening:5/8-inch x 0.040 inch expanded,flattened aluminum bird screen in removeable frame. B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions:ASTM B221,Alloy 6063-T5,T-52, or T6. FIXED LOUVERS 08 91 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. General Requirements: a. All types of "powder-actuated" fastening systems, "hammer drive" fastening systems, "ram-set" systems and similar type fastening systems are strictly prohibited from use on the project for permanent or temporary fasteners into permanent building components,except as indicated on Drawings or as specifically approved by the Architect. b. All types of permanent or temporary fastening systems or components which are not removable without damage to permanent building components are strictly prohibited from use, except as indicated (example: concrete nails, clinched double nails in concrete pilot holes, rawl spikes, zemac nailins, etc.) C. Wedge type expansion anchors are prohibited at all locations where wedging action would cause spalling or damage to permanent building components. d. Plastic or nylon sleeves, nailins, plugs, cores, etc. are not acceptable as fastener components where exposed to weather. e. All fasteners and other components exposed to weather or in exterior locations must be stainless steel, Monel or other approved corrosion-resistant material or finish. Cadmium-plated or electro-galvanized finishes are not acceptable. f. All fasteners installed in or in contact with type ACQ treated lumber (Yellawood) must be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel or be specifically approved for installation in ACQ treated materials. g. Regardless of the fastening system utilized,the Contractor is responsible for sizing, frequency and spacing of fasteners according to substrate, load conditions and acceptable engineering practices and Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. 2. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325, galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components, stainless steel for stainless steel components. 3. Hardened Steel Self-Threading Screw Anchor ("Tapcon" Anchors): Anchorage to solid or hollow masonry and concrete, stainless steel at exterior locations. 4. Epoxy Resin Adhesive Type: Threaded studs in concrete, brick or concrete masonry, stainless steel. S. Buildex TEKS self-drilling screws or type required for anchorage to steel. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing, corrosion-resistant coating. 6. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. D. Post-installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless steel components, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. FIXED LOUVERS 08 91 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish, Two-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions for seacoast and severe environments. 2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Protect unpainted galvanized-and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. E. Louvers shall be secured to a structural substrate in accordance with Miami Dade County Product Approval Drawings. F. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00. Set sill pan and sheet metal trim in butyl sealant as detailed. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. END OF SECTION 08 9119 FIXED LOUVERS 08 91 19-4 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 SECTION 09 22 16- NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with AISI S220 and ASTM C645, Section 10 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with AISI S220 and ASTM C645, Section 10 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Comply with AISI S220; ASTM A653/A653M, or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance. Galvannealed products are unacceptable. a. Coating demonstrates equivalent corrosion resistance with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Studs and Track:AISI S220 and ASTM C645,Section 10. 1. Manufacturers; Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ClarkDietrich. b. Marino\WARE. C. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection, 25 Gauge minimum typical. Provide 20 Gauge minimum at all locations with ceramic tile finish. 3. Depth:As indicated on Drawings. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Slip-Type Head Joints:Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Double-Track System: ASTM C645 top outer tracks, inside track with deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track. D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-steel thickness,with minimum inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick,galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:ASTM C645. 1. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers:ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper,0.16 inch in diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or embossed, high-strength steel studs and tracks. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.033 inches or as indicated on drawings. b. Depth:As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:ASTM C645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.024 inches. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration:Asymmetrical. 2.4 GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Grid Suspension Systems for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc. FrameAll Suspension System Framing and Furring for Gypsum Board Assemblies or comparable product by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 b. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN C. USG Corporation 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Installation Standard:ASTM C754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line,with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,toilet accessories,furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. Install the drywall suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, in compliance with ASTM installation standard, and with applicable codes as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 22 26.23 - DRYWALL CEILING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grid suspension systems for drywall ceilings and furring. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Grid suspension systems. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installation. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required by AISI S202, "Code of Standard Practice for Cold- Formed Steel Structural Framing." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Grid Suspension Systems for Gypsum Board Ceilings:ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Basis of Design: FRAMEALL Flat Drywall Grid as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., 877-276-7876, www.armstrongceilings.com/drywall. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Armstrong Ceiling &Wall Solutions b. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN C. USG Corporation 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Where recommended by the manufacturer, provide one of the following: DRYWALL CEILING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 09 22 26.23-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226/D226M,Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket:Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates,with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing,for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Installation Standard:ASTM C754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies:Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,grab bars, toilet accessories,furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. B. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. DRYWALL CEILING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 09 22 26.23-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 26.23 DRYWALL CEILING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 09 22 26.23-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 29 00-GYPSUM BOARD PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Texture finishes. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Gypsum wallboard. 2. Mold-resistant gypsum board. 3. Glass-mat,water-resistant backing board. 4. Cementitious backer units. S. Interior trim. 6. Joint treatment materials. 7. Sound-attenuation blankets. 8. Acoustical sealant. 9. Textured finishes. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples for each texture finish indicated on the same backing indicated for Work. 2. Submit full size samples in 12-inch-long lengths for each exposed trim accessory indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completions. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Installation of gypsum board joint treatments shall not start until the space to receive gypsum board joint treatments is heated to maintain a continuous and uniform temperature of not less than 55 deg. F, from one week prior to beginning of joint treatment until joint treatment is completed and thoroughly dry. Ventilation, either natural or supplied by fans, circulators or air conditioning systems shall be provided to remove excess moisture during joint treatment. Temperature requirements may be waived only on recommendation of gypsum board manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. 1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations form GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD,GENERAL A. General: Provide materials, including accessories and fasteners produced by one manufacturer. B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard:ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. American Gypsum. b. Certainteed;SAINT-GOBAIN. C. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. National Gypsum Company. e. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness at Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch,Type X. 3. Thickness at Interior Ceiling Surfaces: 1/2 inch. 4. Long Edges:Tapered. B. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C13961M. With moisture- and mold- resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. Certainteed;SAINT-GOBAIN. C. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. National Gypsum Company. e. USG Corporation. 2. Core:5/8 inch,Type X. 3. Long Edges:Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance:ASTM D3273,score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C1178/C1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.: Dens-Shield Tile Backer. b. National Gypsum Company:GOLD BOND Brand E22P. C. USG Corporation:Securock Glass Mat Sheathing. 2. Core:5/8 inch,Type X. 3. Mold Resistance:ASTM D3273,score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or ASTM C1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manu acturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. C-Cure. b. Certainteed;SAINT-GOBAIN. C. Custom Building Products. d. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 f. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Mold Resistance:ASTM D3273,score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274. C. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim:ASTM C1047;formed metal sheet steel zinc coated by hot-dipped process. 1. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig.1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Cornerbead, Impact-resistant (PR1): Pittcon SO-HSN-90, Fry DMCT-1250 or equivalent: Use at outside corners. b. Channel Reveal: Pittcon SWR Series, Fry DCS,or equivalent. C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound: Use where indicated. e. Expansion (control) joint: One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removeable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead:With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M and with the recommendations of both the manufacturers of the products and joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels:As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling:At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type,sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Cementitious Backer Units:As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws:ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool,or rock wool. 1. Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Roxul AFB; Roxul Inc. b. Rockwool Acoustic Slabs; Rockwool Ltd. C. SAFB Blankets;Thermafiber LLC. D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpard D(EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and opening in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.One of the following: 1. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; U.S. Gypsum. 2. AC-20 FTR; Pecora. 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer:As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Textured finish as directed by Architect. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed door frames and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and the gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, where standards conflict,the more stringent shall apply. Install specialty gypsum board as specified below except where manufacturer's instructions conflict; follow manufacturer's instructions for specialty performance board to maintain warranty coverage. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling.Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated and minimize end joints or avoid them entirely. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated. D. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply base layers in the same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face- layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated.Stagger joints on opposite side of partitions. E. Single-Layer Fastening Methods:Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. F. Multi-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. G. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. H. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Unit Application:ANSI A108.11 at showers,where substrates are indicated to receive Tile Units having a face dimension greater than 8 by 8 inches, and where otherwise indicated. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 I. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force it into place. J. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.Stagger vertical joints on opposite side of partitions. K. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. L. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. M. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes and conduits. 2. Where partitions intersect open exterior and interior wall kickers, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by the wall kickers and other structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. 3. Where chase walls are shown, provide bracing between parallel rows of studs. Unless otherwise shown, provide gypsum board braces no less than 1/2 inch thick by 12 inches wide and cut to width of chase. Locate at quarter points in wall height between each pair of parallel studs. Fasten with not less than 3 screws at each stud. N. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 0. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. P. Cut openings in gypsum board for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close tolerances so that edges will be covered by plates and escutcheons. Cut both face and back paper. Do not install electrical outlets back-to-back on opposing sides of partitions. Q. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c.for vertical applications. 2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 3. Install fasteners not less than 3/8 inch from ends or edges of gypsum board sheets, spacing fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges. 4. Begin fastening from center of gypsum board and proceed toward edges and corners. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 5. Apply pressure on surface of gypsum board adjacent to fasteners being driven to insure that gypsum board will be secured tightly to supporting members. a. Drive fastener with shank perpendicular to face of board. b. Drive screws with a power screwdriver as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.Set heads of screws slightly below surface of paper without cutting paper. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Fasten trim accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install interior trim accessories where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi- exposed. Provide interior trim accessories with face flange formed to receive joint compound. D. Install aluminum trim accessories where indicated. E. Install control joints in locations indicated and where directed by the Architect for visual effect, or if not indicated or directed by the Architect, provide control joints in accordance with ASTM C 840 which is as follows: 1. Where a partition, wall or ceiling traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic or building control element) in the base building structure. 2. Where a wall or a partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet. 3. Control joints in interior ceilings with a perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 feet and total area between control joints does not exceed 2500 square feet. 4. Control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between controls joints do not exceed 30 feet and total area between control joints does not exceed 900 square feet. 5. A control joint or intermediate blocking shall be installed where ceiling framing members change direction. 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints, flanges of interior trim and aluminum trim accessories, interior angles, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of type indicated. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Do not use paper tape and joint compound. Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape,fasteners and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated. 3. Level 3:Typically not used. 4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. S. Level S: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface where gypsum board is indicated to receive wall coverings,semi-gloss and high gloss paints, and Italian plaster. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean floors of all gypsum board debris and leave broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools and equipment are to be removed upon completion of the Work. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction,and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged,and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 3013-CERAMIC TILING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Transition strips for floors. 4. Edge protection for tiled edges and outside corners. 5. Tile backing panels. 6. Waterproof membranes. 7. Crack isolation membranes. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles,ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Porcelain Floor and Wall Tile-Type TL1: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Basis of Design: Milestone Tiles+One 2. Tile Color:Greige 1101131 Matte CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-1 Far South-23177 08/30/2024 3. Face Size: 12 by 24 inches, Rectified. 4. Thickness:8 mm. 5. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 6. Installation Method:Stacked. 7. Grout and Mortar Color: Mapei 5227"Castle Wall". B. Porcelain Floor and Wall Tile-Type TL2: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Basis of Design: Milestone Tiles+One 2. Tile Color:Greige 1101149 Matte 3. Face Size: 2 by 2 inches, Mosaic,furnished in 12"x 12" sheets. 4. Thickness:8 mm. 5. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 6. Installation Method:Stacked. 7. Grout and Mortar Color: Mapei 5227"Castle Wall". C. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile-Type TL3: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Basis of Design: Daltile Color Wheel Mosaic. 2. Module Size: 1 by 6 inches,Straight Joint. 3. Thickness:5/16 inch. 4. Tile Color and Pattern:Sea Breeze, 1174. 5. Grout Color: Mapei 5227 "Castle Wall". 6. Installation Method:Vertically Stacked. D. Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for installing by same method as used for adjoining wall tile. 1. One soap holder for each shower and tub indicated. 2. Color and Finish: Match adjoining glazed wall tile. 2.3 FINISHING AND EDGE PROTECTION A. General: Furnish and install edge protection profiles for tiled edges and outside corners of tiled surfaces where indicated on drawings. B. Edge Protection Profiles: 1/2" high,Satin anodized aluminum. 1. Basis of Design: Schluter Systems QUADEC Finishing and edge protection profiles with a squared reveal surface. 2. Finish: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors and textures. 3. Profiles: End cap, outside or inside corner as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full selection of profile types. 2.4 THRESHOLD TRANSITION STRIPS A. General: Furnish and install transition strips as required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-2 Far South-23177 08/30/2024 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units:ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325,Type A. 1. Thickness:5/8 inch. 2.6 WATERPROOF MEMBRANES A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Waterproof Membrane, Fluid-Applied: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 2.7 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANES A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Crack Isolation Membrane, Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement. 2.8 SETTING MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable,Tile-Setting Epoxy:ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. ARDEX Americas. b. Atlas Minerals&Chemicals, Inc. C. Bostik;Arkema. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Parex USA, Inc. j. Sakrete; CRH Americas, Oldcastle APG. k. Southern Grouts& Mortars, Inc. I. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.9 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout:ANSI A118.3,with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. ARDEX Americas. b. Atlas Minerals&Chemicals, Inc. CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-3 Far South-23177 08/30/2024 C. Bostik;Arkema. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Parex USA, Inc. j. Sakrete; CRH Americas, Oldcastle APG. k. Sika Corporation. I. Southern Grouts& Mortars, Inc. M. Summitville Tiles, Inc. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile- setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations,verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-4 Far South-23177 08/30/2024 installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. C. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Provide aluminum finishing and edge protection where indicated on the drawings. F. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile,vary setting bed thickness so that tiles are flush. G. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. H. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Porcelain Tile: 3/16 inch. I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. J. Threshold transition strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. 1. Sloped transition strips shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards. K. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-5 Far South-23177 08/30/2024 L. Install tile backing panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. M. Install waterproof membrane to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. N. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. 3.4 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations,Concrete Subfloor: 1. TCNA F115:Thinset mortar; epoxy grout. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-1 &CT-2. b. Thinset Mortar:Standard dry-set Modified dry-set Improved modified dry-set mortar. C. Grout:Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 2. TCNA F131:Water-cleanable,tile-setting epoxy; epoxy grout. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-1 &CT-2. b. Grout:Water-cleanable epoxy grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete: 1. TCNA W202:Thinset mortar. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-3, CT-4,CT-5. b. Thinset Mortar:Standard dry-set Modified dry-set Improved modified dry-set mortar. C. Grout:Water-cleanable epoxy grout. C. Interior Wall Installations,Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. TCNA W242: Organic adhesive on gypsum board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-3, CT-4,CT-5. b. Grout:Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 2. TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F: Thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board over vapor-retarder membrane. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-3, CT-4,CT-5. b. Thinset Mortar:Standard dry-set Modified dry-set Improved modified dry-set mortar. C. Grout:Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 3. TCNA W245 or TCNA W248: Thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-3, CT-4,CT-5. b. Thinset Mortar:Standard dry-set Modified dry-set mortar. C. Grout:Water-cleanable epoxy grout. D. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations: CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-6 Far South-23177 08/30/2024 1. TCNA B415: Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy on waterproof membrane over cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-3, CT-4,CT-5. b. Grout:Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 2. TCNA B420: Thinset mortar on waterproof membrane over coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-3, CT-4,CT-5. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set Improved modified dry-set mortar. C. Grout:Water-cleanable epoxy grout. END OF SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-7 Far South-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 5113 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Research reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings from an applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 3. ASTM E1264 Classification:Type III, Form2, Pattern C E; Fire Class A. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS-ACT1 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Armstrong Ceiling&Wall Solutions; "Canyon", Item No. 1490. 2. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. 3. USG Corporation. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard wet-formed mineral fiber panels according to ASTM E 1264. C. Classification: Fine Fissured Texture, acoustically transparent membrane with factory-applied latex paint. D. Color: White. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Light Reflectance (LR): 0.80. F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35. G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRQ 0.65. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. I. Thickness: 5/8 inch. J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS—ACT2 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Armstrong Ceiling&Wall Solutions;Optima, Item No. 3251. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264. C. Classification: Fiberglass with Durabrite acoustically transparent membrane. D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): 0.88. F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.95. G. Articulation Class (AC): 190. H. Fire Performance: Class A, ASTM E84 surface burning characteristics. Flame spread index 25 or less. Smoke Developed Index 50 or less (UL Labeled). I. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Tegular. J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS—ACT3 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Armstrong Ceiling&Wall Solutions;Optima, Item No. 3261. 2. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. 3. USG Corporation. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264. C. Classification: Fiberglass with Durabrite acoustically transparent membrane. D. Color: White. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Light Reflectance (LR): 0.88. F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.95. G. Articulation Class (AC): 190. H. Fire Performance: Class A, ASTM E84 surface burning characteristics. Flame spread index 25 or less. Smoke Developed Index 50 or less (UL Labeled). I. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Tegular. J. Modular Size: 24 by 72 inches. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (FOR USE WITH ACT2 AND ACT3) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design:Armstrong Ceiling&Wall Solutions:9/16-inch Suprafine XL Exposed Tee Suspension System. 2. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. 3. USG Corporation. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. Narrow-Face Dimensional 9/16-inch Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled sheet steel; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished dimensional 9/16-inch caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel. 3. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (FOR USE WITH ACT1) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design:Armstrong Ceiling&Wall Solutions; 15/16 inch Prelude XL Exposed Tee Suspension System. 2. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. 3. USG Corporation. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web,Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: butt-edge type. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. B. Lighting Connector Bracket 1. Composition: Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel 2. Color: Gray 3. Dimensions: 4"Wide x 2" high 4. Edge Profile: XL Clips for interface with Armstrong Suspension Systems. 5. Acceptable Product: Lighting Connector Bracket (item number LCB4) as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. C. TechZone Yoke 1. Composition: Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel 2. Color: Gray 3. Dimensions: 4"wide x 8" high 4. Acceptable Product: TechZone Yoke (item number TZYK)as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURES(REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS) A. XAL LENO 1. Product Manufacturer: XAL 2. Product Name: LENO 3. Size: nominal 4"wide LED linear light 4. Ceiling Grid Compatibility: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 5. Color: Finished Trim in White B. Axis Click 1. Product Manufacturer: Axis Lighting 2. Product Name: Click 3. Size: nominal 4"wide LED linear light 4. Ceiling Grid Compatibility: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 5. Color: Finished Trim in White 2.9 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 3. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 5114-ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Acoustical metal ceiling panels 2. Exposed grid suspension system 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings 4. Perimeter Trim. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Research reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings from an applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 3. ASTM E1264 Classification:Type III, Form2, Pattern C E; Fire Class A. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING—CL1 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Armstrong World Industries; METALWORKS Linear Classics, 7160. B. Surface Texture: Smooth C. Composition: Metal D. Color: As noted in Finish Schedule ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 09 51 14-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Size: 6" x 96" F. Edge Profile: Square with extended flange G. Perforation Option: Unperforated H. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): I. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): J. Sabin: N/A K. Articulation Class (AC): L. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A. M. Light Reflectance (LR) White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.73. N. Dimensional Stability: Standard O. Recycle Content: Post-Consumer- Pre-Consumer 24 inches. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design:Armstrong World Industries; Carrier Molding Suspension System. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. The Main Beam Carriers used to suspend the planks are directional and have hanging features at 2" increments. All plank widths can be installed on the same carrier system which allows for design and installation flexibility. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. B. Lighting Connector Bracket 1. Composition: Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel 2. Color: Gray 3. Dimensions: 4" Wide x 2" high 4. Edge Profile: XL Clips for interface with Armstrong Suspension Systems. 5. Acceptable Product: Lighting Connector Bracket (item number LCB4) as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. C. TechZone Yoke 1. Composition: Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel 2. Color: Gray ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 09 51 14-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Dimensions: 4"wide x 8" high 4. Acceptable Product: TechZone Yoke (item number TZYK)as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal. Exposed trim shall be the same material,finish, and color as that used for metal panels. 1. Provide all splices, supports, pressure springs, end caps, etc. for a complete system. B. Provide all required components to fabricate removeable access panels per manufacturer's installation instructions where directed by Architect. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of metal planks to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 1. Provide panel trim at perimeter edges of penetrations, including light fixtures. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Support light fixtures and other ceiling-mounted equipment independently of the ceiling. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 3. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION 09 5114 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 09 51 14-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl base. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL BASE(VWB-1) A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite; a Tarkett company Vinyl Base or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Flexco. 3. Roppe Corporation. 4. VPI Corporation. 5. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. B. Product Standard:ASTM F 1861,Type TV(vinyl,thermoplastic). 1. Style and Location: a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings or concrete flooring. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.080 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners:Job formed or preformed. H. Color: "Gray Haze" 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.3 THRESHOLD TRANSITION STRIPS A. General: Furnish and install transition strips as required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. B. Transition Strips: Satin anodized aluminum. 1. Basis of Design: Schluter Systems Transition Strips for Floors. 2. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors and textures. 3. Profiles: Same-height transition or sloped transition strips as required by adjacent floor surfaces. a. Profile type as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full selection of profile types. b. Comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. G. Job-Formed Corners: RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 THRESHOLD TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION A. Install where exposed edge of floor finish meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of floor finish and no threshold is indicated. B. Secure to subfloor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Sloped transition strips shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standard. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0965 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 6519-RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid vinyl floor tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and pattern specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification:Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq.cm. B. Slip Resistance: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM D2047 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Recommended static coefficient of friction for ADA walking surfaces and accessible routes: not less than 0.6. 2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE—TYPE RT1 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Tarkett USA, Event + Stone Collection,Luxury Vinyl Tile or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Mohawk Group, Inc. 2. Armstrong Flooring, Inc. B. Tile Standard:ASTM F 1700,Class III,Type B-Embossed. C. Overall Thickness: 0.12 inches(3,0 mm). D. Size: 12 inches W x 24 inches L. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6519-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Collection: Event+Stone. F. Product Name and Number: Urban Stone 251317004. G. Color: 11199"Avenue". 1. Installation Method:Ashlar. 2.3 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE—TYPE RT2 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Tarkett USA, Event + Wood Collection,Luxury Vinyl Tile or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Mohawk Group, Inc. 2. Armstrong Flooring, Inc. B. Tile Standard:ASTM F 1700,Class III,Type B-Embossed. C. Overall Thickness: 0.12 inches(3.0 mm). D. Size:6 inches W x 48 inches L. E. Collection: Event+Wood. F. Product Name and Number:Crafted Plank 251309010. G. Color: 11216"Coriander". H. Installation Method: Undirectional. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic- cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives:Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds,sealers,and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Test concrete substrate for moisture as recommended by manufacturer. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6519-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation,sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. 3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width.Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern as directed by Architect. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged,if so numbered. Discard broken,cracked,chipped,or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated by Architect. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture,cabinets, pipes,outlets,and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles.Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections. I. Floor Polish: Remove soil,adhesive,and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply number of coats as recommended by Manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 6519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6519-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 68 13 -TILE CARPETING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modular carpet tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture required. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILES:TYPES CPT1 &CPT2 A. Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Mohawk Group, Inc. B. Color and Pattern 1. CPT1: Mohawk Group, Optic Reset Collection, GT448 Shifted Focus Tile, 959 Moonlit, 12 x 36 inches. 2. CPT2: Mohawk Group, Optic Reset Collection, GT448 Shifted Focus Tile, 979 Silhouette, 12 x 36 inches. C. Fiber Content: 100% Nylon. D. Fiber Type: Duracolor Tricor Premium Nylon. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Pile Characteristic: textured patterned multi-colored loop. F. Density: 6,056. G. Pile Thickness: 0.254 inches for finished carpet tile. H. Stitches: 12.4 per inch. I. Gage: 1/12 (47 rows per 10 cm). J. Tufted Weight: 18 oz/yd2 for finished carpet tile. K. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite materials. L. Size: 12 by 36 inches. M. Applied Treatments: 1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: EcoSentry Soil Treatment. N. Performance Characteristics: 1. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2. Flammability: ASTM E 648 Class I (Glue Down) 3. Smoke Density: ASTM E 662 Less than 450 4. Foot Traffic Recommendation TARR: Heavy 5. GSA Stain Release Rating: Pass O. Warranties: Lifetime Limited Carpet Tile Warranty, Lifetime Limited Duracolor Stain Warranty, Lifetime Static Warranty. P. Installation Method:Ashlar. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Concrete Slabs: 1. Test concrete substrate for moisture in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104 and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. D. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces,to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 10, "Carpet Tile," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings. Ashlar installation pattern or as directed by Architect. E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 I. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 09 9113 - PAINTING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting,and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Light fixtures. d. Switchgear. e. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. f. Brass. PAINTING 09 91 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections:The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. B. Standard coating terms in accordance with ASTM D523. 1. Gloss Level 1 (Flat): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D523. 2. Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D523. 3. Gloss Level 4(Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D523. 4. Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D523. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. VOC content. B. Samples for verification purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 1. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 2. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: PAINTING 09 91 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry,with mortarjoint in the center, for each finish and color. C. Painted Wood: Provide two 12- by 12-inch samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch- long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full- coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples. 2. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface in accordance with the schedule or as specified. After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used for evaluation of coating systems of a similar nature. D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 2. Federal Specifications establish a minimum quality level for paint materials,except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria. 3. Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. E. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. PAINTING 09 91 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers:420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. S. Contents by volume,for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg Q. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg Q. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg Q. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain,fog, or mist,when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PAINTING 09 91 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 2. PPG Paints. (PPG). 3. Pratt and Lambert (P & Q. 4. The Sherwin-Williams Company(S-W). 2.2 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER A. High-Performance Latex Block Filler: Heavy-duty latex block fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior concrete masonry block before application of top coats: 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Hi fill Latex Block Filler 6-15X1. 2. S-W: Prep Rite Block Filler B25W25. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Exterior Primer Coating: Exterior latex wood primer used for priming mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels under a flat acrylic emulsion finish: 1. PPG: Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921XI 2. S-W: Exterior Latex Primer B. Interior Masonry Latex-Based Paint: Alkali-resistant paint used as a primer over concrete and masonry under flat and semigloss enamel: 1. PPG: Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921XI 2. S-W: Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer,A24W8300. C. Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or an alkyd semigloss enamel. 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer 6-2 2. S-W: Pro Green 200 Latex Wall Primer. D. Synthetic, Rust-Inhibiting Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on the exterior under full-gloss and semi-gloss enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or water-based alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus EP Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 90-1908 Series 2. S-W: Pro Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66W310. E. Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus EP Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 90-1908 Series 2. S-W: Pro Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66W310. PAINTING 09 91 13-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Exterior Gloss Level 5 Enamel: Full-Gloss Alkyd enamel for use over prime-coated ferrous metal: 1. PPG: HPC Urethane Alkyd Enamel Semi-Gloss 4336H Series. Applied Dry Film Thickness: 2.0 mils min. 2. S-W: Industrial Alkyd Urethane B54W150. 2.5 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Latex-Based Interior Semi-Gloss Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for use as a semi-gloss finish over prime-coated gypsum drywall. 1. PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 6-5510 Series 2. S-W: Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Semigloss Wall Paint. B. Interior Egg-Shell Odorless Acrylic Paint: Ready-mixed, low-odor interior egg-shell acrylic enamel for use over concrete, hardwood, gypsum drywall: 1. PPG: Speedhide Zero VOC Interior Acrylic Latex Egg-Shell 6-5310 Series 2. S-W: Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic Egg-Shell. C. Interior Satin Acrylic Topcoat: Ready-mixed, interior satin acrylic enamel for use on galvanized and ferrous metal. 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus HP Waterborne Acrylic Satin 90-1710 2. S-W: Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic Egg-Shell. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning.Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. PAINTING 09 91 13-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If C. surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. d. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a S percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming,fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends,faces,undersides,and backsides of wood,including cabinets,counters,cases, and paneling. C. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.Test adhesion prior to full application. PAINTING 09 91 13-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied.Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field- finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. PAINTING 09 91 13-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Minimum Coating Thickness:Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Supports. 7. Motors and mechanical equipment. 8. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. H. Block Fillers:Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. PAINTING 09 91 13-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. M. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements,the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are noncompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether to be painted or not,against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. PAINTING 09 91 13-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. B. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Refer to Specification Section 09 96 00—HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS. C. Ferrous Metal:Touch up. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer. b. First Coat: Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel. C. Second Coat: Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel. D. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer. b. First Coat: Alkyd Semi-gloss Enamel. C. Second Coat:Alkyd Semi-gloss Enamel. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel Finish (Walls): 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer. b. First Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel 2. Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish (Restrooms, Wet Areas, Metal Doors & Frames): 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer. b. First Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel. 3. Flat Acrylic Enamel Finish (Drywall Ceilings): 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer. b. First Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Enamel. C. Woodwork and Hardboard: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats. a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer. b. First Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Acrylic Enamel. PAINTING 09 91 13-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Ferrous Metal: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer. b. First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Satin Paint. C. Second Coat: Latex-Based Interior Satin Paint. 2. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer. b. First Coat: Interior semigloss Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior semigloss Acrylic Enamel. E. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer. b. First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Satin Paint. C. Second Coat: Latex-Based Interior Satin Paint. 2. Semigloss Finish: 2 coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer. b. First Coat: Interior semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel. END OF SECTION 09 9113 PAINTING 09 91 13-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 09 96 00- HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS (EPDXY) PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Label each coat of each Sample. 3. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. VOC content. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups:Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS(EPDXY) 09 96 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacture's label with the following information: 1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain,fog, or mist. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG Architectural Coatings; products indicated or comparable product from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Sherwin Williams Company HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS(EPDXY) 09 96 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Tnemec Inc. B. Comparable Products: Comparable products of approved manufacturers will be considered in accordance with Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements," and the following: 1. Products are approved by manufacturer in writing for application specified. 2. Products meet performance and physical characteristics of basis of design product including published ratio of solids by volume, plus or minus two percent. C. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval. 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. 3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC content limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates,including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application. 1. Report in writing conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint. HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS(EPDXY) 09 96 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Substrate Conditions: 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Concrete Masonry: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, or alkalinity of surfaces or if alkalinity of mortarjoints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS(EPDXY) 09 96 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. CMU Substrates: 1. Epoxy-Modified Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior: 1) PPG Interior/Exterior Masonry Hi Fill Latex Block Filler 6-15XI b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, semi-gloss, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, semi-gloss: 1) PPG Pitt-Glaze Interior Semi-Gloss Pre-Catalyzed Acrylic Waterborne Epoxy, 16-510, 1.5 mils DFT. END OF SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS(EPDXY) 09 96 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 10 1100-VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modular markerboard/tackboard assemblies. 2. Visual display board assemblies. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints 3. Include sections of typical trim members. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factory-applied color finishes, and as follows: 1. Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet tackboard assembly. 2. Include accessory samples to verify color selected. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated. 1. Trim: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile. 2. Accessories: Full-size sample of each type of accessory. E. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified installer. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics. C. Sample of special warranties. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance data: For visual display surfaces and operating units to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking or flaking. 2. Warranty Period: Marker Boards - 50 years from date of Substantial Completion or for the Life of the Building. 3. Warranty Period:Tack Boards-5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to those indicated as Basis of Design. 1. Basis of Design: Claridge Series 1 B. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display surfaces from single source and from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Hardboard:ANSI A135.4,tempered. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1, that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Fiberboard:ASTM C 208. D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063. E. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.4 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY A. Visual Display Board Assembly: Field or factory fabricated. 1. Assembly: markerboard and tackboard. 2. Corners: Square. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Width:As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height:As indicated on Drawings. B. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. C. Tackboard Panel: Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard panel on core indicated. 1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- thick, extruded aluminum; manufacturer's standard. 1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints. 2. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish. E. Combination Assemblies: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed trim between abutting sections of visual display panels. F. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard blade-type aluminum tray; continuous. 2.5 MARKERBOARD PANELS A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard,flexible waterproof adhesive. 1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.013-inch uncoated base metal thickness. 2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4-inch- thick, with manufacturer's standard moisture-barrier backing. 3. Fiberboard Core: 7/16 inch thick; with 0.001-inch- thick, aluminum foil or 0.015-inch- thick, aluminum sheet backing. 4. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type. 2.6 TACKBOARD PANELS A. Tackboard Panels: 1. Facing: plastic-impregnated cork. 2. Core: Manufacturer's standard. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-coat process. B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout; with surface- burning characteristics indicated. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Hardboard:ANSI A135.4,tempered. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1. E. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. F. Fiberboard:ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board. G. Extruded Aluminum:ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. H. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. END OF SECTION 10 1100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 10 14 16- PLAQUES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal plaques. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For plaques. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show plaque mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each plaque at least half size. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranty. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of plaques that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PLAQUES A. Cast Plaque: Cast-metal plaque with background texture, border,and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Plaque Material: Cast brushed aluminum. 2. Plaque Thickness: 0.50 inch. 3. Finishes: a. Brushed Aluminum Text and Borders - Integral Metal Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry finishes. b. Painted Background: Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating. 4. Background Texture:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Integrally Cast Border Style: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Mounting: Concealed studs. PLAQUES 10 14 16-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of plaques, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard plaques according to requirements indicated. 1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 4. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match plaque finish. 5. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing. B. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine-engrave characters and other graphic devices into indicated plaque surface to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. 1. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard baked enamel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL PLAQUES A. General: Install plaques using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install plaques level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with plaque surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install plaques so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that plaque surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection:Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of plaque. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. PLAQUES 10 14 16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place plaque in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support plaque in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place plaque in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface,and tighten. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as plaques are installed. END OF SECTION 10 14 16 PLAQUES 10 14 16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 10 14 19- DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dimensional characters. a. Fabricated cast dimensional letters. b. Face Illuminated, fabricated channel dimensional letters. C. Face Illuminated, fabricated channel dimensional characters. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list,typestyles,graphic elements,and layout for each sign at least half size. 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranty. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of gravity and other loads within limits and under conditions indicated. B. Thermal Movements: For exterior, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS(LETTERS) A. Fabricated Channel Characters: Acrylic face and metal side returns formed free from warp and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners; and as follows. 1. Illuminated Characters: Backlighted character construction with LED lighting, including transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with provision for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Use tight or sealed joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each other and away from character surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly. a. Power:As indicated on electrical Drawings. 2. Character Material: Integral-Colored non-yellowing acrylic, color as selected from full color line. 3. Side Return Material:Sheet or plate aluminum. 4. Character Height:As indicated on Drawings. 5. Character Depth:4". 6. Character Font:As selected by Architect. 7. Finishes: a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized. 8. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. a. Hold characters at manufacturer's recommended distance from wall surface. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS(SHIELD SIGNAGE) A. Fabricated C.C.P.D. Shield and City Logo Signage: Translucent face with metal side returns, formed free from warp and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners; and as follows. 1. Backlighted character construction with LED lighting, including transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with provision for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Use tight or sealed joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each other and away from character surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly. a. Power:As indicated on electrical Drawings. b. Weeps: Provide weep holes to drain water at lowest part of exterior characters. Equip weeps with permanent baffles to block light leakage without inhibiting drainage. 2. Character Material—Metal Side Returns: Sheet or plate aluminum. 3. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. 4. Translucent Face Sheet:Acrylic sheet with applied C.C.P.D.Shield/City Logo Signage. Owner will furnish an electronic copy of shield Signage to sign contractor. a. Sheet Thickness: 0.25 inch. 5. Character Height:As indicated on Drawings. 6. Character Depth: 2". 7. Finishes: Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized. DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 8. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. 2.4 CAST DIMENSIONAL LETTERS 1. Cast aluminum; stud (concealed) mounted;flush mounting. 2. Height: As indicated in Drawings. 3. Font: As selected. 4. Finish: Shop finished acrylic polyurethane; UV resistant; colors and sheen as selected; Matthews Paint Finish. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 4. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners. 5. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals,with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes.Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface,and tighten. 2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten. 3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. 4. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in position, so that signage is correctly located and aligned. 5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. END OF SECTION 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 10 14 23.16- ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes room-identification signs that are directly attached to the building. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For room-identification signs. 1. Provide a sign with a name and room number for each room as directed by Owner and at other locations as required by applicable building codes. Verify room names and numbers with Owner. The names and numbers used in the construction documents may not be the same as those desired by the Owner for the final installation. 2. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 3. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 4. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOYs "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design",Texas Accessibility Standards and ICC A117.1. ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23.16- 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Polymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet. a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied "tactile" signage,with letters raised minimum of 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. C. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth. a. Edge Condition:As indicated on Drawings. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Backing Plate: Furnish and install a plain acrylic backing plate at all signage mounted to glazing. Color to match sign. 4. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall or glazing with two-face tape. 2.3 SIGN MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering). 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges. C. Subsurface-Etched Graphics: Reverse etch back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23.16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive. END OF SECTION 10 14 23.16 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23.16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 10 26 00-WALL CORNER PROTECTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in each color and texture specified. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well- ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. a. Store corner-guard covers as directed by Manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door- protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. WALL CORNER PROTECTION 10 26 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics:Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723;testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted, Opaque Flexible Vinyl Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece; with formed edges; fabricated with 90-or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Tarkett Johnsonite Flexible Vinyl Corner Guards, Model VBG-XX-A or a comparable product. 2. Wing Size: Nominal 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch. 3. Height:As indicated on Drawings. 4. Mounting: Adhesive. 5. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Flexible Vinyl. B. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. 2.6 FINISHES A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. WALL CORNER PROTECTION 10 26 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection. B. Before installation, clean the substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality: Install corner protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks,voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10 26 00 WALL CORNER PROTECTION 10 26 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 10 28 00-TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Hand dryers. 4. Baby changing stations. 5. Custodial accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified,full size. 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranties. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Hand Dryers: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace hand dryers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Structural Performance: Design accessories and fasteners to comply with the following requirements: 1. Grab Bars: Installed units are able to resist 250 Ibf concentrated load applied in any direction and at any point. TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Shower Seats: Installed units are able to resist 360 Ibf applied in any direction and at any point. 3. Baby Changing Stations: Installed units are able to support a static load of 300 lbs. and be tested in excess of 350 lbs. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories. 2. ASI American Specialties, Inc.;ASI Group. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. Gamco Commercial Restroom Accessories; Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2.3 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bar TA-1,TA-2 and TA-10: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-6806 Series. a. TA-1: Bobrick B-6806 x 36". b. TA-2: Bobrick B-6806 x 42". TA-10 Bobrick c B-6806 x 18" Vertical 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Grab Bar. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser TA-3: 1. OFCI: Owner-Furnished, Contractor Installed. C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit TA-4: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-270. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). D. Paper Towel Dispenser TA-S: 1. OFCI: Owner-Furnished, Contractor Installed. E. Soap Dispenser TA-6: 1. OFCI: Owner-Furnished, Contractor Installed. F. Mirror Unit TA-7: 1. Frame:Type 430 Stainless steel channel, 1/2" x 1/2"x 3/8" with bright polished finish. a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hangers: Manufacturer's standard rigid, tamper and theft resistant. TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.4 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod TA-12: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-6047. 2. Description: 1-1/4-inch-outside diameter, straight rod. 3. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings 4. Mounting Flanges: Exposed fasteners; in material and finish matching rod. 5. Rod Material and Finish: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). B. Shower Curtain Liner TA-12: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick 204. 2. Size: Minimum 12 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high. 3. Material: Vinyl, minimum 0.008 inch thick, opaque, matte. 4. Color: White. 5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. 6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet. C. Folding Shower Seat TA-11: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-5181. 2. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access. 3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by Architect. 4. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). D. Robe Hook(Towel Pin)TA-13: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-677. 2. Description: 3-3/8 inch long, Single-prong unit. at ri I a d in hh: to nl ss to I, S 48 / 48 M No. 7 ini h o sh ci). E. Grab Bar TA-1 6: Bobrick B-6806 x 32"; TA-17: Bobrick B-6806 x 26" A. Warm-Air Dryer TA-8: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mediclinics; Speedflow Plus M17AC S-UL or comparable product by one of the following: a. ASI-American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradley Corporation. d. Excel Dryer Inc. e. Gamco Commercial Restroom Accessories; Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. f. World Dryer Corporation. g. Mediclinics. 2. Description: Fast (maximum air velocity - 250 mph) and quiet (57-65 dBA). Dries hands in 10 to 12 seconds. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. a. Protrusion Limit: Installed unit protrudes maximum 4 inches from wall surface. 4. Operation: Infrared-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch. TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Automatic Shutoff:At 30 seconds. 5. Maximum Sound Level: 65 dB. 6. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Electrical Requirements: 120 V, 50/60 Hz, 675-850 W (Heating Element On), 180-350 W (Heating Element Off). 2.6 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Diaper-Changing Station TA-15: 1. Basis of Design: American Specialties, Inc., Model 9012. 2. Description: unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child- protection strap. a. Engineered to support minimum of static load when opened. 3. Mounting: Surface-mounted as directed by Manufacturer. Install in accordance with the Texas Accessibility Standards. 4. Operation: By damped gas spring mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: non-porous plastic (FDA approved HPDE). 6. Liner Dispenser: Provide dispenser for disposable sanitary liners. 2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Custodial Mop and Broom Holder TA-14: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-239. 2. Description: Utility Shelf with Mop/Broom Holders and Rag Hooks. 3. Length: 34 inches. 4. Hooks: Four. 5. Mop/Broom Holders:Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Install all accessories in accordance with the Texas Accessibility Standards. 2. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. B. Grab Bars: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements. C. Shower Seats: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements. TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Baby Changing Station: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements. END OF SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 10 44 00- FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 2. Portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers. 3. Accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for MP5 fire extinguisher. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a. Babcock-Davis. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc.; Cosmopolitan. C. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International. 2. Basis of Design: Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Model AL-R-2409, Semi-recessed, non-fire-rated cabinet. B. Cabinet Construction: 1. Construct cabinets with white baked enamel cold-rolled steel. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. C. Semi-recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 1-1/2-inch. D. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless steel sheet. E. Door Material: Stainless steel sheet. F. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame and "Larson-Loc" security feature. G. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. 1. Clear transparent acrylic sheet. H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. I. Cabinet Accessories: 1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. J. Materials: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666,Type 304. a. Finish: ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 directional satin finish. K. Locations: Where indicated or scheduled on drawings. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.3 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a. Babcock-Davis. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. C. Kidde; Carrier Global Corporation. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International. 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. MPS Series Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type A:B:C. UL-rated 5 lbs. nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 1. Basis of Design: Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Model MP5. C. CD10 Series Liquid Carbon Dioxide Type B:C. UL-rated 10 lbs. nominal capacity in manufacturer's standard enameled container. Located in Electrical and IT rooms. 1. Basis of Design: Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Model CD10. 2.4 MOUNTING BRACKETS — Suitable for CD10 Series fire extinguisher. Where indicated on Drawings and as scheduled. A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. Provide strap to secure extinguisher to bracket. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. 2.5 CABINET FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box(tub)with trim,frame,door,and hardware to suit cabinet type,trim style, and door style indicated. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or,if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Top of fire extinguisher to be located above finished floor at height required by the Texas Accessibility Standards. C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. F. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. G. Install fire extinguishers in fire protection cabinets and mounting brackets at locations indicated on the drawings and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. 1. Mounting Height: Top of fire extinguisher to be located above finished floor at height required by the Texas Accessibility Standards. END OF SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 10 5113 - METAL LOCKERS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Knocked-down Corridor Lockers. 2. Locker Benches. 3. Narcotics Locker. 4. Evidence Lockers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker and bench. B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show locker trim and accessories. 3. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available. D. Product Schedule: For lockers. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing,and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation. B. Deliver combination control charts to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware. 2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. 3. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain metal lockers, locker benches, and accessories from single source from single locker manufacturer. 1. Obtain locks from single lock manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: For lockers and locker benches indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in Texas Accessibility Standards. 2.3 KNOCKED-DOWN CORRIDOR LOCKERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ASI American Specialties, Inc.; ASI Group: Traditional Collection or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Art Metal Products 2. ASI Storage Solutions 3. GSS Lockers 4. Hadrian Inc.; Zurn Industries, LLC METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 5. List Industries Inc. 6. LockersMFG 7. Lyon LLC 8. Olympus Lockers &Storage Products, Inc. 9. Penco Products, Inc. 10. Republic Storage Systems, LLC 11. Top Tier Storage Products 12. WEC Manufacturing LLC B. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. 2. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. 3. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard,designed to stiffen doors and reduce sound levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full perimeter flange and sound-dampening material; welded to inner face of doors. 4. Door Style: Vented panel as follows: a. Louvered Vents: No fewer than three louver openings at top and bottom for double-tier lockers. C. Body:Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel sheet with thicknesses as follows: 1. Tops, Bottoms,and Intermediate Dividers:0.024-inch nominal thickness,with single bend at sides. 2. Backs and Sides: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with full-height, double-flanged connections. 3. Shelves:0.024-inch nominal thickness,with double bend at front and single bend at sides and back. D. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral,full-height door strikes on vertical main frames. 1. Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material as main frames; welded to vertical main frames. 2. Frame Vents: Fabricate face frames with vents. E. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, continuous or knuckle type. F. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant. METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in combination locks, built-in key locks, or padlocks; positive automatic latching and prelocking. a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches and higher with three latch hooks and doors less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks;fabricated from 0.105-inch nominal- thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook. b. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard,rattle-free latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact,and incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism. G. Locks: Built-in combination locks. H. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard,etched,embossed,or stamped aluminum plates, with numbers at least 3/8 inch high. I. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed hooks, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. J. Coat Rods: Manufacturer's standard. K. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 1. Height: 4 inches. L. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 1. Closures:Vertical-end type. 2. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered. M. Filler Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. N. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet to cover unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of non-recessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. O. Materials: 1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications. P. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 LOCKS A. Built-in Combination Lock: Key-controlled, three-number dialing combination locks; capable of METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 at least five combination changes made automatically with a control key. 1. Bolt Operation: automatically locking spring bolt. 2.5 FABRICATION (CORRIDOR LOCKERS) A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs. 1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation. B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom,and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment: 1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks. 2. Coat Rods: For each compartment of each locker. D. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers by assembling them at the Project site, using manufacturer's nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets. E. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: 1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor. 2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches above the floor. F. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends; finished to match lockers. G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations;finished to match lockers. 1. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered. H. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip- joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel. I. Finished End Panels: Fabricated to conceal unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of non-recessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 2.6 NARCOTICS LOCKER A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a Large Depository Safe as manufactured by Barska,855 Towne Center Drive, Pomona,CA 91767. www.barska.com B. Provide and install a Barska Large Keypad Depository Safe, Model Number AX11930. METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Color: Black. 2. Lock Type: Electronic Keypad. 3. Dimensions: 19" High x 15.38" Wide x 13.5" Deep. 4. Weight: 71 pounds. 5. Manufacturer's Warranty, Parts and Labor: 1-year. 2.7 EVIDENCE LOCKERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Spacesaver Corporation; DSM Evidence Lockers. Local distributor is Southwest Solutions Group Inc, 15002 Tradesman Drive, San Antonio, Texas 78249. 210-336-5086, Attn: Jeff Rosaasen, jrosaasen@southwestsolutions.com; or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Dasco Storage Solutions 2. Fasco Security Products 3. Patterson Pope B. Non pass-thru evidence lockers, Configuration#10 with Doors "E" and "F". C. Welded Frame: 1. The welded frame is structural and shall consist of top, bottom, back and sides constructed of a minimum of 18 gage (1.21MM) steel. D. Welded Bases: 1. Each welded base shall be permanently affixed to each locker using modern Inert Gas Metal Arc Welding techniques for lateral unit stability. The base shall be a minimum of 14 gage (1.98MM) steel 4 inches (101MM) high with a 1.5 inch (38MM) return on the bottom for support. 2. Provide four 0.375 inch (9.5MM) mounting holes and four 0.375 inch (9.5MM) nuts welded in place for the mounting of floor levelers. Provide four appliance levelers per locker. E. Shelves: 1. Shall be a single-piece formed from a minimum of 18-gage (1.21MM) cold rolled steel with a double 90-degree bend on the rear of the shelf and a double 90-degree bend on the front of the shelf. 2. Shelves shall be welded into place. F. Locks: 1. Patent Pending. Lock shall be push button locking with a stainless steel push button and alignment bezel. Locks shall be a one-piece removable design. Locks will secure the door with the single push of a button with no other action required by the user. 2. Locks will be deadbolt type locks with multi-point engagement. Rotary latches or cam locks will not be tolerated. 3. Non Pass-thru locks will be reset from the front of the locker using tube type locks keyed to differ. METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 G. One Piece Welded Doors: 1. Shall be formed from two pieces of minimum 18-gauge (1.2MM) cold rolled steel box formed and welded together using modern GMAW techniques.The one piece door with inner and outer door skins shall have a combined steel thickness of no less than 0.096 inches (2.4MM)thick. Provide with silencers and nickel plated flush-mounted handles. 2. Provide stainless steel spring loaded hinges that are welded to prevent pin removal. Spring loaded hinges shall be capable of holding the door closed and flush with the door frame. H. Finish: Powder coat. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.8 LOCKER BENCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Art Metal Products 2. ASI Storage Solutions 3. Hadrian Inc.; Zurn Industries, LLC 4. List Industries Inc. 5. Lyon LLC 6. Penco Products, Inc. 7. Top Tier Storage Products B. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches. C. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges. 1. Size: Minimum 9-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick except provide 20- to 24-inch- wide tops where accessible benches are indicated. 2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of clear lacquer on top and sides. D. Fixed-Bench Pedestals(for accessible bench): Manufacturer's standard supports,with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows: 1. Tubular Steel: a. 1-1/2-inch-diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends,with standard pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Movable-Bench Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top, complete with fasteners, and as follows: 1. Aluminum: 1/8-inch-thick by 3-inch-wide channel or 1/4-inch-thick by 3-inch-wide bar stock, shaped into a trapezoidal or inverted-T form; with nonskid pads at bottom. METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Finish: Black anodic finish. F. Materials: 1. Extruded Aluminum:ASTM B221,alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 2. Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, cold rolled. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. B. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated,for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and floors or support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion. 2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers. Wedge-type or insert-type anchors are not acceptable. "Tapcon" type anchors into masonry or appropriate screw anchors into wood blocking concealed in drywall partitions. B. Knocked-Down Lockers: Assemble with manufacturer's standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames. C. Equipment: 1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings. a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets. b. Attach plates to upper shelf of each open-front metal locker,centered,with a least two aluminum rivets. D. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. 2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on Drawings. 3. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers,with closures at exposed ends. 4. Attach finished end panels using fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers. E. Narcotics and Evidence Lockers: Install and anchor into place in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. F. Fixed Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more than 72 inches apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and anchor bases to floor. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction. B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 105113 METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 10 7113 - EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provision,fabrication and installation of Extruded Aluminum Cantilevered Canopies and Soffits, as shown on drawings and specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim B. Section 07 92 00-Joint Sealants C. Section 03 30 00-Concrete D. Section 05 12 00-Structural Steel E. Section 0145 34-Windstorm Construction Requirements 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. The Aluminum Association—Aluminum Design Manual 2010 B. American Welding Society-AWS D1.2/D1.2M: 2008 C. ASTM B 209 Aluminum &Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate D. ASTM B 221 Aluminum &Aluminum Ally Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes 1.4 SAMPLES: A. Submit samples in accordance with Section 0133 00-Submittal Procedures. B. Product data: Submit Manufacturer's brochures, manuals and literature. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Includes the complete layout, sections, details, components,finishes, sizing, spacing, and fasteners specific to the project. The site-specific shop drawings shall show reactions at surface attachment points and bear the seal of a Registered Structural Engineer, licensed in Texas. 2. Submit shop drawings for approval by the Architect prior to fabrication of any materials. 3. Verify all dimensions and elevations prior to submittal to Architect. 4. Manufacturer shall field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. D. Finishes: samples of canopy finishes. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Canopy shall be designed to comply with state and local building codes. B. Comply with the requirements of Specification Section 01 45 34 - Windstorm Construction Requirements. C. Canopy manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in designing and installing the specified system. D. The installation of the canopy shall be performed by the manufacturer to assure single source responsibility. 1.6 MATERIALS: A. Delivery,Storage,and Handling: protect components from one another during shipping,storage and handling. Exercise care when unloading, storing, and erecting to prevent damage. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Provide manufacturer's 1-year warranty against defects in material and workmanship. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: A. Acceptable manufacturer for Extruded Aluminum Sun Control Devices: Subject to strict compliance with the specified requirements and the plans, including cantilever spans, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. AVAdek Walkway Cover Systems &Canopies 12130 Galveston Road, Building 1 Webster,Texas 77598-1539 (713) 944-0988 or(800) 777-4031 2. Bowman Architectural Metals 2100 JB Drive San Benito,Texas 78583 (956) 361-5200 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Components: all components shall be 6063, 6061, or 6005 alloy extruded aluminum. B. Design Criteria: all components shall be sized to comply with live load and wind load requirements of the project and shall not be less than the dimensions shown on the plan. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.3 COMPONENTS: A. Configuration: as shown on the drawings. B. Sizes: minimum sizing as shown on the drawings. C. Beams: as indicated in the drawings. D. Deck: thickness shall be at least .078"thick. E. Soffit:thickness shall be at least .032"thick. F. Trim: same material and color as canopy components. G. Flashing: Refer to 07 62 00. 2.4 STRUCTURE A. Extruded Aluminum 6063-T6 (min. 30,000 psi yield strength). B. Concealed Drainage: Water shall drain from the roof deck to the aluminum fascia/beams, spouting at designated locations through shaped holes fitted with aluminum drainage deflector plates and trim rings. C. Aluminum structural beams (min. 4" wide x depth required). 2.5 DECKING,SOFFIT AND FASCIA A. Cantilevered Wall Supported Canopy Deck: Shall be 2-3/4" high minimum x 6" wide fluted x minimum .078" thickness corrugated extruded aluminum panels. The panel shall be furnished with an interlocking design to provide a weather resistant deck. B. Aluminum Soffit: Shall be 1" high x 6" wide self-mating with flat soffit profile, aluminum. Fastener locations shall be concealed within the mating joints. C. Aluminum Fascia: Shall be 10" vertical faced x 2"width x minimum .125"thickness; "C" shape. 2.6 FASTENERS,CONNECTIONS,AND FITTINGS: A. Bolted Connections: All bolts, nuts, washers, and screws used in joining the members shall be stainless steel up to 3/8" diameter. Over 3/8" diameter may be Hot Dipped Galvanized. B. All bolts, nuts, washers, and screws used in joining the members shall be stainless steel. Trim pop rivets are to be aluminum or stainless steel. Finish Color: Match exposed finish color. C. Provide all structural attachment points flush with the outside surface of the building. D. Provide design and installation of all clip angles, bushings, spacers and plates required for installation. Carbon steel components shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Deck is mechanically fastened to structure with Stainless Steel grommeted screws, concealed where able. F. Soffit is mechanically attached directly to beams with Stainless Steel screws, concealed in the spline of the self-mating soffit panels. 2.7 FINISH: A. AAMA 607.5 Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer Based Painted 2 Coat: Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's Full Color Line, including wood grain finish for soffit panels. 1. Wood Grain Powder Coating: a. Contract Documents are based on products by Quality Powder Coating. b. Meet or exceed requirements of AAMA 2605. C. Surface Preparation: Pretreat surfaces to receive coatings using applicator's proprietary wash coat process including chemical conversion and five stage wash. d. Application: 1) Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to uniform surface free from blemishes. 2) Electrostatically apply powder coating base coat to 2 to 4 mil thickness. 3) After application polymerize coatings at 400 degrees F for 20 minutes. 4) Completely wrap preprinted transfer film with organic photosensitive pigments and cellulose resin around components, with airtight seal. 5) Place components on moveable trolley or large membrane frame. 6) Remove air using vacuum suction system, bringing printed film into contact with coated surface. 7) Place components into integrated curing oven, turning ink pigments from solid to gas and back to solid inside initial layer of powder. 8) Remove from oven after substrate reaches designated temperature. 9) Force air into paper to release from substrate. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. The components and accessories are to be supplied and installed by the manufacturer. B. Install canopy in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Erect canopy after concrete and masonry work in the vicinity is completed and washed down. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP: A. Take extreme care to prevent damage or scratching. Replace damaged components prior to installation. All workmanship must be top quality with meat miters and fitted joints. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.3 CLEANING: A. Just prior to completion of project, strip protective coatings of covering from aluminum and clean all parts. Repair to new condition to replace any materials damaged during installation. END OF SECTION 10 7113 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 10 75 16- GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics,fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations:Obtain flagpoles as complete units,including fittings,accessories, bases,and anchorage devices,from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, to withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. Comply with 2021 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. 2.3 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Cone -tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM 13241/13241M,Alloy 6063,with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Flagpole. b. Concord American Flagpole. C. US Flag& Flagpole Supply, LLC. B. Exposed Height: 30 feet. C. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0.060-inch wall thickness with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- diameter, steel GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES 10 75 16-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize foundation tube after assembly. Furnish loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. D. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole:foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole,for casting into concrete foundation. 2.4 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole. B. External Halyard: Ball-bearing, non-fouling, revolving truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 5/16-inch- diameter, braided polypropylene halyard and 9-inch cast-metal cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. Halyards and Cleats: Two at each flagpole. 2. Halyard Flag Snaps:Stainless steel swivel snap hooks. Furnish four per halyard (two flags). 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate. B. Sand: ASTM C33/C33M, fine aggregate. C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Joint sealant as recommended by flagpole manufacturer, complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A41. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom. C. Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure. D. Sleeves: Locate and secure sleeves in forms by bracing to reinforcement and forms. GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES 10 75 16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Place concrete, as specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for no fewer than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound. F. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish,free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where indicated and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal the top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. END OF SECTION 10 75 16 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES 10 75 16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Manual Operated Roller Shades B. Related Work includes the following: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. C. Product Schedule: For roller shades. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Hunter Douglas Architectural Window Coverings — 13915 Danielson Street, Suite 100, Poway, CA 92064; Phone 800.727.8953 x1; Fax 800.205.9819; Website www.hunterdouglasarchitectural.com/windowcoverings. B. Request for substitutions must be approved by architect in accordance with provisions of Section 0125 00—Submittal Procedures. 2.2 MANUAL RB 500 ROLLER SHADE A. Fabrics: 1. Solar Shades: Light Filtering Fabric—3% Open. a. Hunter Douglas "E Screen 7503. b. Fabric Weight: 11.6 oz/yd2 C. Composition: 36% Fiberglass, 64%Vinyl. 2. Blackout Shades: 0% Open. a. Hunter Douglas "SheerWeave 7100" b. Fabric Weight: 21.6 oz/yd2 C. Composition: PVC Coated Fiberglass Laminated with 2-ply 100% PVC Blackout Film, White Backing. 3. Horizontal stabilizing battens are not required, nor will they be accepted. B. Control Systems: 1. Clutch Operated: Chain-driven operator capable of lifting up to 20 pounds of weight with a maximum allowable pull force of 10 pounds. Utilization of adjustment-free continuous qualified T304 stainless ball chain with 110 lbs. breaking strength for precise control, smooth operation, and ensures a uniform look. Components must be maintenance-free from adjustments or lubrication for trouble-free lifetime operation. a. 90-pound breaking strength chains will not be accepted. b. Chain anchor device to be compliant with WCMA safety standard A100.1.1-2010 and must prevent the clutch system from moving the roller shade through lowering and raising if not properly installed as specified in ANSI Standard Section 6.5.2. 2. Dual Roller Shades: Universal mount steel brackets with 2 separate solar and room darkening blackout roller shades operating independently of each other. 3. Roller Tube: Circular-shaped aluminum tube extruded from alloy and temper 6063 T-6. Extruded tube to have a .063" wall thickness (2.5" outside diameter to have a 0.79" wall thickness). Heavily reinforced with minimum of six internal ribs and flutes providing additional tensile strength and allows for secure placement of clutch and end plug. 4. Spring-Loaded Idle End: Reinforced idler assembly containing spring loaded end plug with positive locking wheel allowing for up to 7/8" adjustment and provides for a secure installation and removal of shade. Locking tube bearing plug contains minimum 6 ribs and flutes and inserted a minimum of 2 3/8" into roller tube on heavy duty systems. 5. Bottom Bar: Hunter Douglas RB500 Bottom Bar. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer's heavy-duty bracket constructed of hardened 1/8" thick steel to support full weight of shade with bracket and screw hole covers to provide uniform look. Locking mechanism on bracket adapter provides for a secure installation and removal of the shade. a. Cradle-seated hardware without a locking mechanism will not be accepted. 7. Integrated Leveling Device: Built into the idle-end bracket (or intermediate bracket of a coupled shade) allowing for the vertical height adjustment of+/- one-half inch direction up or down, allowing the easy leveling of a fabric panel on its mounting surface. This assists to keep the fabric rolling square to the tube, minimizing the chance of the fabric rolling into its hardware causing creases and damage to the ends of the fabric. a. Adjusting fabric skewing through means of tape, paper, or cardboard tucked up inside the fabric at the tube is not acceptable. 8. Fascia: 7-inch profile, removable aluminum extrusion valance for dual shade bracket that attaches to brackets and conceals roller shade. Fascia at the bottom enclosure must allow a maximum of 1" gap to allow fabric to come through. Exposure underneath greater than 1" is not to be accepted. 9. Blackout System: Extruded aluminum side channel with concealed mounting brackets. Bottom bar with Nylon wool pile to prevent light leakage. C. Fabrication 1. Shade measurements shall be accurate to within +/- 1/8" or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Fabrics: Colors as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full line of colors. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Subcontractor shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surface, installation conditions, and field measurement for this work. B. Other interacting trades shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions, assembly, and installation methods from subcontractor upon request. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall comply with manufacturer's specifications, standard and procedures as detailed on contract drawings. B. Adequate clearance shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and hardware. C. Clean finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the roller shades. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Reference Composite Floor Plan and Finish Schedule. END OF SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 12 36 61.16-SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material back and end splashes. 3. Solid surface material apron fronts. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature indicating physical properties and performance criteria for solid surface materials and related components. B. Shop Drawings: Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, anchorages and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Provide templates and rough-in measurements. C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view, submit two, 2 x 2 inch samples representative of colors, patterns, textures, finishes and edge treatments. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for the work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's recommended cleaning and maintenance procedures. Include in project closeout documents. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Load: Deflection limited to 1/360. B. Design items with sufficient strength for handling stresses. C. Accessible Design: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and with the Texas Accessibility Standards. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA 2. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation; Everform Solid Surface countertops. b. Wilsonart LLC; Solid Surface countertops. 2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Fire-Test-Response Characteristice: Provide solid surface fabrications with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL 723 or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 4. Colors and Pattern: Wilsonart 9223SS "Angel Falls". 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Custom. B. Countertops: 1. 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material. D. Joints: 1. Fabricate countertops with hairline joints that are tight, held rigidly in place. E. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and approved Submittals. B. Set items plumb, level, rigid and solidly adhered to substrate. C. Prefit items:Adjust supports to make fit. Align joints over support framing. D. Fasten countertops as recommended by manufacturer. E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." 3.2 CLEANING: A. Clean and polish fabrications in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly remove excessive mastic and seam adhesive. END OF SECTION 12 36 61.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 12 56 33 - FIXED SEMINAR TABLES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included in this section: Provision of floor-mounted fixed seminar tables including attachment, or other work required for installation unless otherwise noted. B. Related Sections 1. Division 26- Electrical 2. Floor mounted anchors are included for installation on standard floor conditions. 3. Data/Communications cabling and jacks not included. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. A. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in each color and texture specified. C. Field Verification-Shop drawings incorporate building information compiled from various sources associated with this project and deemed as reliable. Conditions directly affecting the product or its installation must be field verified by the Contractor. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store delivered in clean, safe, dry area. 1.4 SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation of items to occur after application of exposed finishes wherever installation will not damage exposed finish surfaces and completion of finishes will not impede installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: KI B. Product: Fixed Seminar Tables C. Alternates or substitutes not accepted. "As Equal" products must be approved by the Architect prior to bidding. FIXED SEMINAR TABLES 12 56 33-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Seating shall be the "Fixed Seminar Tables" as manufactured by KI, Green Bay, WI., or as approved by architect. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Floor-mounted steel bases which support continuous or non-continuous solid core table tops, including but not limited to: 1. Table tops shall be 1-1/4"thick,warp-resistant construction with a center core of 1-1/8" thick particleboard, a minimum of 45 pounds PCF density to prevent warping. Top surface to be a minimum of .040" thick high-pressure laminate meeting NEMA standards with a .040" phenolic backer. 2. Continuous tops shall have two K &V Tite Joint fasteners, hardwood spline, and steel splice plates at each table joint to provide a virtual "seamless top". Non- continuous taps shall have edging on all four sides and shall be joined together with splice plates. 3. Edge options shall be 74P. 4. Base style shall be manufacturer's "Basic=Square". 5. PowerUp power and data distribution system provides surface-mounted power and data access for laptop users. The 8-wire harness of flexible conduit shall distribute power between the power/data modules and the power infeed. The harness shall be enclosed in a plastic trough with a divider to separate power and communication or data cables. 6. Under-surface power and data provides a duplex receptacle and two data ports concealed in a plastic protective shroud and mounted underneath the surface between seats, opposite the base location. It shall utilize the same 8-wire distribution system as PowerUp. 7. Modesty panels shall be steel. 8. Steel frames shall be Powder-coated. 9. UL Classified for electrical hazards only. B. Frames: Standard fixed rectangular basic pedestal bases for Seminar tables are furnished in a standard 27-3/4" height to be used with 1-1/4"thick table tops for a 29" overall table height. Bases shall be cantilever-type pedestal, rectangular fabricated steel column, 14- gauge, 2" x 4" tubular steel, welded to an 11-gauge, 6" x 8" stamped steel floor flange to accommodate slope floors from 0-8 degrees. Bases are welded to a support arm, 14- gauge 13-3/4" x 1-1/2" to support the top. Each arm shall have four tabs pierced with holes to secure the top to the base with four screws (furnished) and shall have a notched section on both sides to allow for electrical components and data wires to pass through. Designated power or data bases, as shown in the space plan, shall be specified with a 2" x 4" cutout on the back side of the base at the bottom to allow for power or communication/data cable access. Clear opening space within the base is 1-13/16" x 3- 13/16"to allow for power or communication/data cables.Cutout shall have a metal cover painted to match the base. Four 1/2" holes are provided in the floor plate for anchoring to the floor. FIXED SEMINAR TABLES 12 56 33-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Escutcheon covers constructed of molded plastic are furnished on all table pedestal bases and conceal anchor bolts. C. Table Tops:Table tops shall be 24-inch-deep curved laminate, nominal 1-1/4"thick,warp- resistant construction and have a center core of 1-1/8" thick particleboard, minimum of 45 lbs. PCF density. The top surface shall be a minimum of .040" thick high-pressure laminate meeting NEMA standards and the bottom surface, a balanced .040" thick phenolic backer. Laminate and backing sheet shall be permanently bonded to particleboard core using cross-linking poly vinyl acetate(PVA) adhesive under continuous pressure in a hot press. Continuous table top joints shall be secured with a minimum of two mechanical fasteners equal to Knape & Voight #516, hardwood spline and heavy- gauge steel plate under joint. Non-continuous tops will have a base support near each end and will be joined by a heavy-gauge steel plate at each seam.Tops shall have cutouts to accept PowerUp modules when PowerUp is specified. 1. Molded Edge Finishes: a. 74P: 1-1/4" PVC Free Flat Edge. D. Modesty Panels 1. 14" high, perforated steel modesty panels shall be constructed of 14-gauge steel with .75" hems on horizontal edges. Perforated steel panels shall have .25" holes on .75" spacing. Dimpled steel panels shall have .08" deep dimples recessed on 1.5" spacing. When end panels are required, the steel panels shall be curved to follow the 90-degree corner. Steel modesty panels used with continuous worksurfaces are segmented with 1/2" space between panels. E. End panels: End panels shall be nominal .810" thick warp-resistant construction. Center core shall be .75"thick particleboard, minimum of 45 PCF density.The front surface shall be a minimum of.040" thick high- pressure laminate meeting NEMA standards. F. Electrical Components 1. PowerUp Module: PowerUp modules shall be 7" long x 3-1/2" wide x 2-1/2" high and fit securely into a 6-1/4" x 3" cutout. The module shall be constructed of polycarbonate with a textured finish, meeting UL-VO minimum requirements. The module shall have one duplex receptacle (rated at 15 amps/125 volts) and two locations for data connectors. Snap-in data plates hold data connectors and will accommodate most data manufacturers.The module shall have a dampened spring-loaded mechanism to allow the unit to smoothly open for use and shall be able to close when not in use.The power receptacles shall be located on a vertical plane and above the worksurface when in use to avoid accidental spills into the receptacle. The data jacks shall remain stationary to avoid excess wear and tear on the data wire connections.A cord with a three-prong plug, 22" long,shall plug into the 8-wire harness. Data jacks and wires are not included. PowerUp is UL Listed as a relocatable power tap. 2. Under-Surface Power/Data: Under-surface power and data provides a duplex receptacle and two data ports concealed in a plastic protective shroud and mounted underneath the table top between seats, opposite the base location. FIXED SEMINAR TABLES 12 56 33-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The shroud cover shall be made of PVC meeting UL 94-HB, 14" wide x 16-1/8" deep x 2-1/4" high, vacuum- formed to house the connection of the 8-wire harnesses. It shall utilize the same 8-wire distribution system as PowerUp. Data jacks and wires are not included. 3. 8-Wire Harness: The 8-wire, 4 circuit harness of flexible conduit shall distribute power between the power/data modules and the power infeed.The harness will be enclosed in a plastic trough with a divider to separate power and communication or data cables. The trough shall be constructed of rigid PVC approximately .06" thick. The trough shall be attached to the underside of the worksurface (by the installer) with wood screws provided. The trough shall measure 1.34" deep x 6.2" wide overall with an interior dimension of 5.5 cubic inches. The trough shall include a .060" thick, L-shaped divider measuring 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" and shall be attached to a groove in the trough. 4. Receptacle Shroud Cover: The receptacle shroud cover shall be made of PVC meeting UL 94-HB, 12"x 14"x 2"to house the connection of the 8-wire harnesses and the cord from the PowerUp module. A 1-13/16" x 3" opening in the shroud shall allow access to the duplex receptacle. A 1-1/4" radiused slot shall allow access for removal of the PowerUp module. a. All electrical components shall be installed on site with hardware provided. A licensed electrician is required to connect the power infeed to the building power source.Wiring diagrams are available in the printed Specifications booklet or in the Seminar Table Assembly Instructions. b. All PowerUp and undersurface power components are UL listed for use on Seminar tables. The listing covers table tops, bases, modesty panels, and electrical components. Curved modesty panels are not UL Listed. 1.9 FINISHES A. Frame finishes - Powder-coated finish. All finishes and colors to be selected by architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. 1.10 TEST REQUIREMENTS A. KI "Seminar Tables" shall be designed and manufactured in compliance with the intent of ANSI/BIFMA X5.4-1997. Seminar Tables shall be listed to applicable UL standards and requirements by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Seminar table systems are evaluated to standards U11286 Office Furnishings and UL723 Standard Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Seminar Tables are Greenguard Indoor Air Quality certified and Greenguard Children and Schools certified. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordination details with other work supporting, adjoining, or otherwise contracting items as required to insure proper installation. FIXED SEMINAR TABLES 12 56 33-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Examine construction to verify that: 1. Dimensions are correct to manufacturer's specifications. C. Do not install items until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items in strict accordance to manufacturer's Assembly Instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Floor Mounting Requirements 1. Minimum Floor Construction Required for Upright Installation (Concrete Floors) a. 3000 psi concrete compressive strength b. 3" thick free of obstructions for 1-1/2" C. 4" thick free of obstructions for 2-1/2" for riser mount d. Riser to be plumb within 1/8 degree. 2. Floor Fastener Requirements (Concrete Floors) a. 1/4" x 2-5/8" Hilti KH-EZ b. Max. torque: 18 ft. lbs. C. Four anchor assemblies required per base. END OF SECTION 12 56 33 FIXED SEMINAR TABLES 12 56 33-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 22 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. B. Related SECTIONS: 1. SECTION 01 91 00-GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. The commissioning of the plumbing system and associated controls shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner.The commissioning provider shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: 1. CxA—Certified Commissioning Authority—ACG 2. CBCP—Certified Building Commissioning Professional—AEE 3. CCP—Certified Commissioning Professional—BCA 4. CPMP—Certified Process Management Professional—ASHRAE 5. BSC—Building System Commissioning Certification— NEBB B. The commissioning provider(Commissioning authority) shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.3 RESPONIBILITIES A. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as related to the Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate coordination of Commissioning work by Commissioning authority. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by Commissioning authority to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Performance Test procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact on warranty, and provide Commissioning authority with written comment on same. 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 performance testing of equipment and systems. 5. Provide Operations & Maintenance data to Commissioning authority for preparation of checklists and training manuals. 6. Provide As-built drawings and documentation to facilitate Testing. 7. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of Sub Contractors and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 8. Certify to Commissioning authority that installation work listed in Pre-Functional Checklists has been completed. 9. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and Pre-Functional Checklists. 10. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 11. Provide copy of manufacturers filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 12. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Testing with Commissioning authority. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Pre-Functional Checklists. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by Commissioning authority. 13. Coordinate with Commissioning authority to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 14. Provide qualified personnel to assist and participate in Commissioning. 15. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by Commissioning authority, required for carrying out Testing of systems. 16. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not,shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment,demonstrate its use,and assist in the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of commissioning. 17. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Issues Log are corrected within the time schedule shown in the Commissioning Plan. 18. Provide Commissioning authority with all submittals, start-up instructions manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Commissioning Process.This information shall be routed through Architect. 19. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Training Program outline for each system. 20. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. 21. Prepare Operation & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings in accordance with specifications; submit copy to Commissioning authority in addition to other contractually required submissions. Revise and resubmit manuals in accordance with Design Professionals and Commissioning authority comments. 22. Commissioning requires participation of this Division Subcontractors to ensure that systems are operating in manner consistent with Contract Documents. All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub-Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included as part of the Construction Contract. B. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Startup procedures to demonstrate proper installation of systems, according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning authority 1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: 1. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. 2. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. 3. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. 4. Functional testing:Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. Testing shall include all modes and sequence of operation, including under full-load, part-load and emergency conditions (including all alarms). Controls system shall be tested to document that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated and adjusted and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications. Sequences shall be functionally tested to document they operate in accordance with plans and specifications. S. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. 7. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Equipment to be tested 1. Energy Management and Control System interface with applicable plumbing system equipment. 2. Service water heating systems(100%). 3. Service water circulation equipment(100%). 4. Domestic water booster pumps (100%). C. Testing functions and conditions 1. Verify shutdown of systems when scheduled. 2. Calibration of sensors 3. Confirm functionality of all specified sequences of operations. 4. Verify the functionality of all alarms. D. Performance criteria 1. Water temperatures shall be within tolerances specified in the contract documents. 2. Water heating system "recovery" rates shall be within specified time frame. 3. Booster pump shall maintain system pressure within specified tolerance. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 NO PRODUCTS SUPPLIED PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This Division has startup responsibilities and are required to complete sub-systems so COMPLETE SYSTEMS are fully functional. Insuring they meet design requirements of Contract Documents. Commissioning procedures and testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift this responsibility, in whole or in part, to Commissioning Agent or Owner. B. Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors and equipment vendors to set aside adequate time to address Pre-Functional Checklists, Functional Performance Tests, Operations& COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Maintenance Manual creation, Owner Training,and associated coordination meetings. C. Commissioning authority will also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.2 WORK PRIOR TO COMMSSIONING A. Complete all phases of the work so the systems can be started, adjusted, balanced, tested, and otherwise tested. B. See pertinent specification sections in this Division, which outline responsibilities for start- up of equipment with obligations to complete systems, including all sub-systems so that they are fully functional. C. Assist commissioning authority with all information pertaining to actual equipment and installation as required complete the full commissioning scope. D. Contractor shall prepare startup procedures to demonstrate compliance with pre- functional checklists, and coordinate scheduling for completion of these checklists. E. A minimum of 7 days prior to date of system startup, submit to Commissioning authority for review, detailed description of equipment start-up procedures which contractor proposes to perform to demonstrate conformance of systems to specifications and Checklists. 3.3 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Attend meetings related to the Commissioning Process; arrange for attendance by personnel and vendors directly involved in the project, prior to testing of theirsystems. B. Provide skilled technicians to startup and test all systems, and place systems in complete and fully functioning service in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Provide skilled technicians, experienced and familiar with systems being commissioned,to assist Commissioning authority in commissioning process. 3.4 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. Complete corrective work in a timely manner to allow expeditious completion of Commissioning Process. If deadlines pass without resolution of identified problems, Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs thus incurred will be Contractor's responsibility. COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.5 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFC) A. Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to validate compliance with Contract Documents installation and start-up requirements,for this Division's systems. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. 3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) A. Contractor, in cooperation with Commissioning Agent, shall conduct Functional Performance Testing to validate compliance with Contract Documents. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. C. Assist Commissioning authority in Functional Testing by removing equipment covers, opening access panels, etc. Furnish ladders, flashlights, meters, gauges, or other inspection equipment as necessary. 3.7 TRAINING A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations& Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling,and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. C. The training agenda (plan) shall include, at a minimum,the following elements: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. D. Commissioning authority shall be responsible for overseeing and approving content and adequacy of training of Owner personnel for all installed systems. Provide Commissioning authority with training plan two weeks before planned training. 3.8 OPERATIONS& MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations& Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Sub-Contractor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems specified in this Division, and shall deliver documentation to Contractor for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 01, prior to training Owner personnel. C. Provide Commissioning authority with a single, electronic copy of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review.Commissioning authority copy of O&M manuals shall be submitted through Architect. D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include,service agency contact information, maintenance requirements, controls system settings and a narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including set points. 3.9 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: 1. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. 2. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing,disposition of deficiencies discovered during testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures used for repeatability of testing in the future. END OF SECTION 22 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 03 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 22 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore,shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material,fixture,form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect,expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets,apparatus,etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid;the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances,conflicts or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services,and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division. 1.06 PERMITS,TESTS,INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating,ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of,shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges,connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving&Conditioning Association,AMCA. 2. American Standards Association,ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers,ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers,ASPE. 6. American Society of Testing Materials,ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association,AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association,SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install",complete and ready for intended use,as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities(Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance,the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances),or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 2004 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 37 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that "OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26. J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted,will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review),it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the substitutions. N. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the equipment and/or electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit,wiring, motor starting equipment,etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor, prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight(8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 or mylar in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = V-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the 0&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the 0&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to,the following items: 1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. Variable Air Volume Boxes. 5. Air Handling Units. 6. Cooling Towers. 7. Chillers. 8. Air Cooled Condensing Units. 9. Water Treatment. 10. Expansion Compensation. 11. Variable Frequency Drives. 12. Noise and Vibration Controls. 13. Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties. 14. Plumbing Equipment. 15, Sanitary DWV Fittings, Pipe and Accessories. 16, Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Fittings and Accessories. 17. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 18. Hydronic and Plumbing Valves. 19. Hydronic Piping and Accessories. 20. Hydronic Pumps. 21. Roof-Top A/C Units. 22. Heating Water Boiler. 23. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 24. Duct Specialties. 25. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 26. Air Distribution Devices. 27. Fan Coil Units. 28. Filters. 29. Fans. 30. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 31. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 32. Test,Adjust and Balance Reports. 33, Testing,Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 34, Coordination Drawings. I. Refer to other Division 22 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with equipment submittal for all AHU's, ACCU's, and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including(but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor,wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 22, indicate the following installed conditions: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers, fire dampers, duct access panels, and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. S. Contract Modifications,actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings,the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducible is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair,and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 22. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-14 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow %" of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 22 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 22, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number,type,color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment and motor name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-15 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 22 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.20 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 22 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. 1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start,except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to Sections in Division 22 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-16 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty(60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. It is agreed that "MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner. If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for "record purposes", then an AutoCAD based compact disc ("CD") will be prepared. The "Cl)" will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot"format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "CD" of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the "CD" to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the "CD" will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars($500.00) per"CD". BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-17 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The"CD"will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The"CD"will be prepared in a ".dwg"format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors:shall be as follows: 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 28 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials,and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-18 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases,slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction,to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components,as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-19 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self- tapping screws,or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the"as-built" drawings. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting,fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS"for definition of"Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-20 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE,TIMING,COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. END OF SECTION 22 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-21 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Plumbing/Elec.Equipment Coordination Sheet Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm.Fuse Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm.Fuse Type Size(MOCP) T e Size MOCP) BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 05 00-22 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 07 00 INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes general requirements, products,and methods of execution relating to excavation, backfill and compaction of inside trenches for mechanical work. Inside trenches are those which occur within an arbitrary, imaginary boundary five feet beyond the outside perimeter of the structure. B. Scope: Provide all trench work for mechanical work of every description and of whatever substance encountered to the depth indicated,or to provide pipe slopes and elevations shown on the drawing. Excavate and backfill utility trenches. Place and compact bedding material on compact backfill material. C. SPECIAL NOTE:All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications.The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work.The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications,determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 APPLICABE CODES A. Local Codes and Ordinances B. Texas Safety Standards C. OSHA—Section 1926.650 1.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696, 29 U.S.C.Secs. 651 et.seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA)and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with all of these provisions of this Act. IN ADDITION,ON PROJECTS IN WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET,THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653,OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. PART 2—BEDDING MATERIAL 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 07 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use clean sand. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material compatible with structural backfill is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size four inches(4"). PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner,and in conformance with safety codes. B. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling. C. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If trenches are below specified grade, backfill to required depth with select granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on drawings B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the sides of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DEWATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent the flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not backfill until underground mechanical system has been properly tested, inspected and approved. INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 07 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Coordinate with the work of others,and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under,around, and over the pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods,taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe,and to provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to building subgrade or to a minimum 12" depth before adding other backfill. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to building subgrade, or as shown on drawings. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95%of maximum density,taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact all backfill under footings,slabs, and other structures to 95%of maximum density or more, if required by the Architect. C. Compact other areas to preclude future settlements, or at least 85%of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface of grade. B. Do not allow heavy equipment to be used over backfilled work that does not have sufficient cover to prevent pipe damage. 3.09 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS A. Avoid unauthorized and unnecessary excavations. B. Minimize number and size of excavations under footings or bearing walls. C. Support footings,foundations, and walls with timbers and jacks if there appears to be any possible chance of damage,and keep such precautions in place to eliminate possible damage. INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 07 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Backfill under footings and bearing walls, using maximum compaction or concrete or proportions as specified for footings. E. Avoid damage to all existing underground services,foundations,cables, conduit lines or foundations. Repair any existing underground work accidentally damaged at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 UNDER EXISTING SLAB INSTALLATION A. When breaking out an existing floor slab, make a saw cut and remove concrete.When repouring concrete,compact the fill to the same specifications as the building fill. Re: Architectural/Structural. Make necessary saw cuts and patching as required. END OF SECTION 22 07 00 INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 07 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 08 00 OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Section 220500—Basic Materials and Methods 2. Division 2—Site Work B. Description:This section described general requirements, products, and methods of execution relating excavation, backfill,and compaction of utility trenches outside of buildings.The arbitrary line of demarcation between inside and outside of buildings occurs 5 feet outside the building perimeters. C. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696, 29 U.S.C.Secs. 651 et.seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA)and all amendments thereto, and to WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET,THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653,OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. D. SPECIAL NOTE:All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications.The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work.The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications,determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maximum aggregate size passing a 2"sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 08 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders, and debris. Maintain moisture content within range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size shall be 4 inches. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavate trenches to depth and grades as shown on drawings. B. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner and in conformance with safety codes. C. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfill. D. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If ground surface is below specified pipe grade,fill to required depth with granular materials free from debris and rock,and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings. B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the side of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DE-WATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not complete backfill until utility system has been properly tested, inspected,and approved. B. Coordinate with the work of others and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under,around, and over pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth. OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 08 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Work material around pipe by hand methods,taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe,and provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to a minimum 6"depth before adding other backfill. D. Cover water line with 18" bedding material before backfilling. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to finished grade,or as shown on the drawing. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to al least 95%of maximum density,taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact backfill material to preclude future settlement or at least to 90%of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade. B. Restore all surface areas to original conditions,or improve as shown on the drawings. C. Replace all paving, base course,gravel surfacing,sub-base,topsoil or other existing finished surface shown or not shown on the drawings. D. Clean up and finish all construction areas to original condition or better. END OF SECTION 22 08 00 OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION 22 08 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING VOID FORM SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. All piping installed under the structural foundation shall be supported by the overhead slab using an approved suspension system. B. Requirements for utility isolation should be harmonized between the Geotechnical, Structural,and MEP Engineers. C. The standard void system shall be designed for trench depths down to 6 feet. The manufacture shall provide versions of the system for depths down to 10feet when necessary. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Project Geotechnical Report B. Project Specification C. Project Plumbing Drawing D. Project Structural Drawing 1.03 SUMMARY A. Provides a dimensionally stable underground void space that is independent of the overhead structural slab. The overhead slab shall support the weight of suspended pipes, including all imposed loads. B. The system shall be designed to temporarily position and suspend the pipes to the specified height and slope until permanently anchored to the overhead structural slab via the utility hanger system. C. The open bottom of the system is designed to receive the infill of vertical expansion from the underlying non-cohesive backfill. If vertical pressure is applied to the side panels of the system in contact with the soil, the uplifting soil pressure may lift the Void assembly causing the support washer on the hanger to deform and separate from the crossbar support, resulting in the pipe being totally independent of the Void system. 1.04 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION A. The system shall have waterproof components. B. The system must have industry-proven performance in inclement conditions. C. Thesystern shall be ableto perform if submerged inwaterand maintain itsstructural integrity. D. All independent components not included/supplied with the PlumbingVoid System should comply withtheprojectspecifications,independentofthe Plum bingVoidSystem. E. All vertical threaded rods must have an embed component secured toward the top end and be permanently affixed to the concrete slab to maintain the specified elevations. The embed component shall be approved bythe structural engineer. F. All System components shall be furnished bythe system manufacturer. G. The system shall be installed perthe manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. H. Acceptable Manufacturer:PlumbingVoid System orapproved equal. I. Designed for pipe diameters up to 12"in PVC orCast Iron and depths of 6'maximum for standard assembly and 10'maximum for deep bury assembly. PLUMBING VOID SYSTEMS 22 10 00- 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 [ADDENDUM NO.002,Attachment No. 1] 11/21/2024 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for the Void System B. PlumbingTakeoff. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. System to be installed per manufacturer's requirements. B. System to be installed by experienced personnel or under the supervision of a person with experience withthe manufacturer's system. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The product isconfigured in 4-foot sections and detailed based on pipesize,pipetype,bury depth,and soil conditions. B. The void system shall be assembled using basic hand tools. C. The void system shall be easily modified to accommodate different transitions and changes in elevation. D. The bottom of the trench should be lined with a minimum 6"approved non-cohesive fill. E. Proper hanger support washer selection is essential fordecoupling and to prevent uplift damage. F. Assemblies are currently available in thefollowing sizes: a. 18x18(1/2"or 3/4"thick side panels) b. 24x18, 32x18, 32x24 and 36x24. (3/4"thick side panels) c. Other sizes available upon request G. Manufacturers a. PlumbingVoid Utility Isolation System available from: VoidForm Products,LLC 6151 Cowley Rd. Fort Worth,TX 76119 817-429-0888(main) www.voidform.com (website)sales@voidform.com (email) b. SuperVoid Systems, LLC 1172 County Rd 24 Prattville,AL 36067 334-730-3614 Iprimm@supervoid.com PART 3—INSTALLATION 3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Verify trench dimensions, grading lines, slopes, levels, and centers. Ensure that dimensions correlatewith drawings. B. Insert 6-inch non-cohesive fill atthe bottom ofthetrench. PLUMBING VOID SYSTEMS 22 10 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 [ADDENDUM NO.002,Attachment No. 1] 11/21/2024 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Shall be assembled inaccordancewith Void Form Products installation instructions. B. Connect a pair of 4-foot side panels with appropriate rod-connector assembly on both the top and bottom. Ensure that a double rod-connector assembly, with proper spacing for application,is installed on the top to support the was her/hangerassembly. C. Install hanger assembly onto supporting double crossbar assembly. D. Install rod-spacer bracket assemblies at am in imum of PVR above the gravel base and spaced V on center. E. Install double-rod spacer bracket assemblies at a minimum of PVR above the gravel base and at both ends of the 4-foot section which will allow adjoining 4-foot sections to be connectedtoeach other. F. Install connectors at both the top and bottom ends,on both sides,to connect adjoining sections. G. Once adjoining sections have been connected, each with its own hanger assembly, insert pipe throughhangers. H. Connect sections throughout the trench tofollowthe pipe layout and design. I. Adjustthe slope of pipes usingthe adjustabilityof the nut located abovethe washer. J. Install TopCaps. K. Seal all gaps between connecting side panels,bulkheads,top caps and corners. L. Backfilltrenchuptosubgrade with non-cohesive fill. END OF SECTION 22 1100 PLUMBING VOID SYSTEMS 22 10 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 [ADDENDUM NO.002,Attachment No. 1] 11/21/2024 SECTION 22 14 00 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 232400-Vibration Isolation. B. Section 222600- Piping Insulation. C. Section 232800- Equipment Insulation. D. Section 211300- Fire Protection System. E. Section 224100- Plumbing System. F. Section 235100- Hydronic Piping. G. Section 235300— Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME 1331.1- Power Piping. B. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. HANGERS,SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. All hangers, supports and rods in areas exposed to the outdoors, such as but not limited to crawl spaces, service bays, wash bays, open shops and warehouses shall be hot dipped galvanized. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. K. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller— Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3"through 8"—Type PS For multiple pipes—Type PSE -Custom L. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions, Unistrut "Cush-A-Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. M. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 231400-3.03. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. O. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief"Pipe Titan" or equal. HANGERS,SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel unless noted otherwise. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed. G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted, two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding HANGERS,SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" HANGERS,SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch T-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. HANGERS,SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions. 3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 & 6 18 0.060 8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075 16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105 D. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork HANGERS,SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 penetrate weather or waterproofed walls,floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. END OF SECTION 22 14 00 HANGERS,SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 14 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 19 00 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job. 2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion. 3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal. 4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or trade grouped together. B. Pipe Marking: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, 431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 22 19 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton nameplate company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal. 3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows. 4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed. 5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards: SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Sanitary Sewer Green Vent Sanitary Sewer Domestic Water Green Domestic Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Supply Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Re-circulating Water Return Fire Protection Red Fire Protection Automatic Red Fire Sprinkler Sprinkler C. Pipe Painting: 1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation. 2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red. 3. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as indicated below: SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 22 19 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 System Color Storm Sewer White Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Light Gray Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Orange Compressed Air Green Chilled Water Supply and Return Light Blue PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor's price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe. END OF SECTION 22 19 00 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING 22 19 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 26 00 PIPING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. C. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. 2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. 2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. 2.04 All insulation shall have composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 2.05 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. 2.06 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong. PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by PolyPhen 2500 Insulation. F. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be as manufactured by Dow"Trymer 2000 XP". G. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products. 2.08 MATERIALS A. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers,thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies. B. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: provide fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jackets with self sealing lap joint. C. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide elastomeric cellular thermal, or preformed phenolic foam pipe insulation with secured metal jacketing. D. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWN SPOUTS: Insulate all horizontal roof drain down spouts, underside of all roof drain bodies, chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction with main waste stacks, and branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as water piping where exposed to building occupant view. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external duct wrap. E. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. F. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers "Strap-On" jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 Pipes located outdoors or in crawl spaces shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. 3.04 All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.05 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket. 3.06 FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 4-SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Exposed exterior domestic water pipe: 1% inch ****Select B for projects with ALL domestic water pipe insulated SELECT THIS OPTION WHEN PIPES ARE RUN IN EXPOSED CEILINGS TO PROVIDE A UNIFORM LOOK**** ****Select C for projects with ONLY domestic HOT water pipe insulated**** B. Interior domestic cold water pipe: 1 inch C. Interior domestic cold water pipe exposed to freezing temperatures: 1 inch D. Condensate drain lines: % inch E. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 F. Concealed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1% inch blanket wrap Exposed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1 inch thick rigid (phenolic) with all service jackets 4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS A. Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Circulating Piping 1 inch END OF SECTION 22 26 00 PIPING INSULATION 22 26 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 4100 PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Storm sewer piping system. E. Domestic water piping system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 022220- Excavating. B. Section 022230- Backfilling. C. Section 022250-Trenching. D. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. E. Section 221900—System Identification and Pipe Marking. F. Section 232420-Vibration Isolation. G. Section 222600- Piping Insulation. H. Section 224400- Plumbing Fixtures. I. Section 224500- Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI B31.1- Power Piping. B. ANSI B31.9- Building Service Piping. C. ASME- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. D. ASME Sec. 9-Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ASME B16.1-Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 F. ASME B16.3- Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. G. ASME B16.4-Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. H. ASME B16.22-Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings I. ASTM A47- Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. J. ASTM A53- Pipe,Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated,Welded and Seamless. K. ASTM A74-Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. L. ASTM B32-Solder Metal. M. ASTM B42-Seamless Copper Pipe. N. ASTM B306-Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 0. ASTM D1785- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120. P. ASTM D2241- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). Q. ASTM D2466- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. R. ASTM D2564-Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. S. ASTM D2729- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. T. ASTM D2846 - Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems. U. ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. V. AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. W. AWWA C651- Disinfecting Water Mains. X. CISPI 301-Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. Y. CISPI 310-Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, Pipe fittings,valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Record actual locations of valves. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating cast or marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. D. Foreign pipe,fittings or valves are unacceptable. E. Piping shall be labeled along entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturers name and country of origin. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction. B. Conform to applicable codes for the provision and installation of all required backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is to penetrate a fire rated assembly or to be installed in a return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. 1.10 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2729 schedule 40; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, installed per the requirements of ASTM D 285S. ***OR*** B. PVC pipe: ASTM D 3034,SDR 35; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings: ASTM F 1336 PVC, drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: ASTM F 477 or F 913, elastomeric gaskets or solvent weld. 2.02 SANITARY SOIL,WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40 PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, clear, medium bodied, for sizes 3" and smaller and gray, heavy bodied,for sizes 4" and larger, mating surfaces shall be prepared with ASTM F 656 purple primer immediately prior to cement application. 2.03 SANITARY SOIL,WASTE AND VENT PIPING,WITHIN BUILDING,ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron,ASTM A 74 drainage pattern. 2. Joints: Hub and spigot,ASTM C 564 neoprene, compression type gaskets. ***OR*** B. Cast Iron Pipe:ASTM A 888, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron,ASTM A 888 drainage pattern. 2. Joints: No hub, ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets and heavy duty four band stainless steel clamps and solid shield assemblies constructed of type 300 series stainless steel. Clamp assemblies shall conform to FM 1680. C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, DWV, sizes 2" and smaller. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.23 cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder, Grade 50B. D. Brass Pipe: ASTM B 43, chrome plated. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.23 cast bronze, chrome plated. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder, Grade 50B. 2.04 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OFBUILDING A. Pipe and fittings shall be same as specified for the sanitary soil,waste and vent piping system. 2.05 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOWGRADE A Pipe and fittings shall be same as specified for the sanitary soil, waste and vent piping system. 2.06 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING,WITHIN BUILDING,ABOVEGRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron,ASTM A74 drainage pattern. 2. Joints: Hub and spigot,ASTM C564 neoprene, compression type gaskets. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe:ASTM D 1785 schedule 80. 1. Fittings:ASTM D 2467 PVC. 2. Joints:ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.08 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE A. Copper Tubing:ASTM B88,Type K,soft annealed. Provide for pipe sizes up to and including 2-1/2". 1. Fittings:ASTM B16.22 wrought copper pressure fittings. 2. Joints shall be as follows: a. No joints shall be permitted for pipe sizes 2" and smaller.All such piping must be run continuous below slab on grade and brought up to no less than 12"above the finished floor before any joint is provided. b. For sizes larger than 2", joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be brazed and shall be made in accordance with all the applicable portions of ASTM B828, manufacturer's recommendations, and AWS requirements. Brazing filler metal shall be in accordance with AWS A5.8 and any required flux shall meet AWS A5.31,Type F63-A or F133-C. 3. Beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building, all piping buried or in contact with concrete shall be provided with one of the following, which shall also extend to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor: a. AWWA C209 cold-applied, integrated primer type, elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent. b. Continuous polyethylene lining, minimum 60 mil nominal thickness. B. Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum pressure class 150,ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. Provide for pipe sizes 3"and larger. 1. Fittings: Standard ductile iron,ANSI/AWWAC110/A21.10. 2. Joints: Rubber-gasketed and bolted mechanical joints, ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Installation shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600 and approved pipe lubricant shall be used for optimum gasket sealing and long-term performance. 3. Note: A single fitting may be installed below slab on grade to facilitate underground pipe entry up to above floor from an immediately adiacent exterior building wall. 4. Provide continuous polyethylene encasement for all piping buried or in contact with concrete in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building and to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Stainless Steel Pre-Fabricated In-Building Riser(acceptable for sizes 2"through 10") 1. Corrosion resistant Type 304 stainless steel construction single, extended 90 degree fitting. 2. UL listed, FM approved and NFPA 24 compliant. 3. Lead free and NSF/ANSI 61 (372)certified. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Ames Fire&Waterworks Series IBR (4"through 10")and IBR2 (2", 2- 1/2", and 3") b. Zurn Wilkins Model WBR(4"through 10") 5. Note: For this application, the inlet joint for larger diameter (4" through 10") piping (which shall not be located below a building slab or foundation) can be rubber gasketed push-on type, ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Installation shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600. 6. Provide continuous polyethylene encasement for all piping buried or in contact with concrete in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building and to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor. 2.09 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING,WITHIN BUILDING,ABOVE GRADE: A. Copper Tubing:ASTM B 88,Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings:ASME B 16.18,cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy. 2. Joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with ASTM B828 using ASTM B32 Alloy HB lead-free solder. 3. Fittings and joints for pipe sizes 1/2"through 4" may be mechanical press-connect system joints with ASME B16.51 lead-free copper bodied fittings with integral ethylene-propylene diene monomer rubber (EPDM) sealing gaskets. All fittings, couplings, and adapters shall be the product of a single system manufacturer and only that manufacturer's approved press tools, kits, and jaws shall be used. a. EPDM o-rings shall be pre-installed and lubricated with ANSI/NSF 61 listed lubricant. b. All installers of copper press-connect fittings shall be trained by the fitting manufacturer's appointed representative and carry such credentials for the duration of the project. C. The fitting manufacturer's representative shall conduct periodic inspections of the installation and shall provide written reports of such inspections to the Contractor and Engineer, including any observed deviations from the manufacturer's recommended installation practices. d. Acceptable system manufacturers: Viega, Merit Brass, or pre-approved equal. 2.10 FLANGES AND UNIONS A. Drainage Applications: PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Provide approved listed adapter and transition fittings appropriate to the specific pipe transition and in accordance with code requirements. 2. For piping above ground, provide stainless steel shielded, molded elastomeric couplings and adapters meeting ASTM C564 and FM 1680. No-hub couplings shall be heavy duty type with four band stainless steel bands clamps and solid shield assembly constructed of type 300 series stainless steel. 3. For dissimilar piping above ground, provide heavy duty stainless steel shielded, molded elastomeric couplings and adapters meeting ASTM C564 and ASTM C1460. Applies to installations including cast iron to PVC transitions immediately adjacent to building slabs on grade. 4. For dissimilar underground piping not below building slab, provide shear resistant .012"thick 300 series stainless steel shielded, PVC gasketed flexible couplings and adapters meeting ASTM D5926 and ASTM C1173. For direct-bury applications, provide AWWA C209 cold-applied, integrated primer type, elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines, to completely wrap the shield, banding, and screws. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent. S. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Anaco-Husky/Cremco b. Mission Rubber Company LLC C. Fernco, Inc. d. Fernco, Inc. Strong Back RC 1000 Series (underground piping, notbelow building slab; or readily accessible underground piping transitions in backwater valve pits,etc.) 6. Adapters, couplings, bushings for copper DWV pipe shall be cast bronze or wrought copper,ASME 1316.23/616.29. B. Domestic Water Applications: 1. Provide joints between various materials with approved adapter and transition fittings appropriate to the specific pipe transition and in accordance with code requirements and the manufacturer's instructions. 2. For copper tube and pipe: adapters, bushings, plugs, caps, and couplings shall be wrought copper or cast bronze; flanges (minimum class 150) and unions shall be cast bronze. Provide with solder or threaded connections as necessary and as produced to applicable ASME standards B16.15, B16.18, B16.22, B16.24, B16.50, 131.20.1. All such appurtenances shall be for use in above ground potable water systems. 3. Above slab transitions for water service entries: a. 100% fusion bonded epoxy coated ASTM A536 cast ductile iron construction coupling with acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) gaskets and EPDM insulating boot for water service. 5/8 inch high strength stainless steel bolts and nuts. Coupling shall meet AWWA C219. Romac Industries, Inc. IC501 or pre-approved equivalent. b. 100%fusion bonded 14 mil epoxy coated coupling with ASTM A536 cast PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 ductile iron rings. Complete with acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) gaskets and type 304 stainless steel bridge, spacers, nuts, and bolts. Coupling shall meet AWWA C219, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Krausz USA Hymax Grip Coupling Restraint or pre-approved equivalent. 4. Dielectric connections: a. For pipe sizes 2 inch and smaller, provide lead-free dielectric unions, rated to 180 F at 250 psi and compliant to ASSE 1079. b. For pipe sizes larger than 2 inches, provide lead-free dielectric flanged pipe fittings, rated to 180 F at 175 psi and meeting ASME B16.1. C. For grooved copper joining systems, provide grooved end dielectric transition fitting from system manufacturer, with virgin polypropylene internal lining, meeting NSF 61. C. General: 1. Unions for ferrous pipe shall be ASTM B16.39 galvanized malleable iron, threaded, minimum pressure class 150. 2. Plugs and bushings for ferrous pipe shall be ASME B16.14 galvanized malleable iron,threaded. 3. Nipples for ferrous pipe shall be schedule 40, galvanized,ASTM A53 welded steel pipe nipples,threaded, meeting ASTM A733. 4. Couplings for ferrous pipe shall be galvanized steel, threaded, manufactured in accordance with ASTM A865. 5. Flanges for ferrous pipe shall be galvanized forged steel construction,either socket weld or slip-on weld type, minimum pressure class 150, manufactured to ASME B16.5. 6. Bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged connections shall be appropriate to the pipe material, fluid type, temperature, and pressure. 1/16" thick pre-formed neoprene,typical. 7. Provide flexible stainless steel connectors at pumps and other such equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Connectors shall have corrugated hose and braided 300 series stainless steel jacketing. Carbon steel flanged or grooved ends as appropriate. NSF 372 lead-free for all potable water applications. Metraflex Company or pre-approved equivalent. 2.11 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No.T-111 up to 2-1/2"; F-617-0 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 428 up to 2-1/2";465-1/2 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-100 up to 2-1/2"; G-623 3" and over. C. Grinnell No. 3010 up to 2-1/2"; 6020A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2" Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge threaded ends. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 4100-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Over 3" Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged ends. D. Provide bronze tee or cast iron square nut operator for all valves installed below ground. 1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be equipped with ASTM B62 solid red bronze tee securely affixed to the valve stem. 2. Valves 3" and larger shall be equipped with a standard 2" square combination nut/socket securely affixed to the valve stem. 3. Provide owner with two extended tee handle operating wrenches for each type of valve head installed. 2.12 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No.T-585-66-LF (full port)for all sizes up through 2" 2. Nibco No.T-580-66-LF (conventional port)for sizes 2-1/2"and 3" 3. Valves 4" and larger shall be split body stainless steel construction, 275psi cold working pressure, blow-out proof stem, PTFE seated, type 316 stainless steel trimmed, class 150 full port desing with manual gear operator. Nibco F-515-S6-F- 66-FS 4. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Apollo 70LF-140 series(full port)for all sizes up through 2". b. Milwaukee UPBA-400S(full port)for all sizes up through 2". C. Apollo 70LF-140 series(full port)for size 2-1/2" and Apollo 70LF-140 series (standard port)for 3". d. Milwaukee UPBA-100S(standard port)for sizes 2-1/2" and 3". B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two 600 PSI piece body full port, lead-free, stainless steel ball and stem, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union. C. Ball valves used for balancing shall have memory stops. 2.13 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No.T-413-Y-LF up to 2"; F-918-B-LF 2-1/2" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 37 up to 2-1/2"; 372 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-319; up to 2-1/2"; G9313" and over. C. Grinnell No. 3300 up to 2-1/2"; 6300A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Over 2-1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. Include outside lever and adjustable weight where required for quiet operation. 2.14 SPRING LOADED(SILENT)CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No.W-910 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Grinnell No.402 B. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends. 2.15 SOLDER A. 95.5%tin,4%copper, 0.5%silver. B. Lead free, antimony free, zinc-free. C. Silvabrite 100, by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate and verify excavations under provisions of Division 2. B. Verify that all excavations are to the required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Install, clean bank sand backfill in trench to a minimum of 6 inches below pipe, and to cover all piping a minimum of 12 inches above pipe. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. All exposed sewer and water pipe in toilet rooms or other finished areas of the building shall be chromium plated. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and maintain gradients. E. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with intended use of space. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Valves installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with chain operator. I. Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not exposed. Access doors shall be of approved types set in locations pre-approved by submittal to the Architect. J. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 feet of cover, or maximum depth of frost penetration,which ever is the greater. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Provide encasement for and support of utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. M. Gate valves installed below grade shall be covered with an adjustable cast iron roadway box extended to grade. Cover shall be cast iron with 'water' cast on top and set flush to finished paving or 2" above finished earthen grade. Box shall be supported from undisturbed soil or concrete base and shall not introduce any stress to piping under all traffic conditions. N. Prepare pipe,fittings,supports,and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. O. Excavate in accordance with Division 2. P. Backfill in accordance with Division 2. Q. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. R. Maintain uniformity in the installation of piping materials and joining methods. Do not mix materials types. S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. T. Solder joints shall be wiped clean at each joint, remove excess metal while molten and flux residue when cooled. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 U. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is installed in return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. V. Installations of thermoplastic piping systems shall be in strict conformity to the manufacturers published instructions. Under ground drainage pipe installations shall be in conformity to ASTM D 2321. W. Installation of solvent cement joints for PVC piping shall be in strict conformity to the requirements outlined in ASTM D 2855. X. Waste nipple from wall to tapped tee shall be schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe or brass or copper with threaded adapter. Y. Provide approved PVC slip by cast iron no hub adaptor at each transition from underground PVC piping to above ground cast iron pipe using standard or wide bodied no hub couplings for as specified elsewhere in this section. Transition shall be made as close as possible to floor for sanitary DWV piping systems and at test tee for storm drainage piping. Support vertical cast iron pipe from floor anchors with using riser clamp and galvanized all thread rod as specified in section 231400. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections. C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate all equipment items, distinct parts of systems, or vertical risers. D. Each plumbing fixture shall have a shut-off valve on each hot water and cold water supply line. E. Each plumbing water rough-in stub out shall be fitted with a shut off valve. F. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or balancing (manual flow control)services. G. Ball valves installed in insulated piping shall be fitted with extended lever operators of sufficient length to raise handle above the insulation jacket material. Where valve is used for throttling service valve handle shall be equipped with adjustable memory stop device. H. Provide spring loaded, non-slam,check valves on discharge of water pumps. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. All drainage lines in the building shall have 1/4 inch to the foot fall where possible and not less than 1/8 inch to the foot fall toward the main sewer. Pipe must be so laid that the slope will be uniform and continuous. Permission shall be secured from the Architect and Engineer before proceeding with any Work where existing conditions prevent the installation at minimum grade specified. B. Slope all water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Provide loose key operated, polished chrome, sill cock flush to wall where fixture stop will not suffice for this requirement. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, all domestic water systems shall be complete, thoroughly flushed clean and free of all foreign matter or erection residue. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. On building side of the main shut off valve, provide a 3/4" connection through which chlorine can be introduced into the water piping D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, in sufficient quantity to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual free chlorine solution throughout the entire domestic water piping systems. E. Bleed water from outlets as required to ensure complete distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum 15 percent of total outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on the drawings. B. Before commencing work, field verify invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover as required. PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-14 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Provide new domestic water service connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on plans. Assure connections are in compliance with requirements of the jurisdiction having authority. D. Extension of services to the building shall be fabricated from the same materials as the utility service lines or those materials specified herein. E. Should points of connection vary from those indicated on the drawings contractor shall properly allow for this in the actual connections field fabricated. 3.08 RODDING SEWERS A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after completion of the installation. B. This Work shall be done, as part of the contract, to make certain that all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter,which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned. 3.09 TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred-in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested with water and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24 hours. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-15 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. G. Domestic Water: 1. Provide hydrostatic pressure test at one and one half times the normal working pressure or 125 psig, which ever is the greater,for 24 hours. H. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vents and Storm Sewer: 1. After the rough-in soil, waste and vent and other parts of the sanitary sewer including branch laterals have been set from the lowest level, at point of connection to existing utility lines, to above the floor line, all outlets shall be temporarily plugged or capped, except as are required for testing as described herein. Ground work shall not permit the backfill of trenches to cover any joints until the completion of testing. Back fill shall be limited to mid sections of full joints of piping only. For pipe in ground the piping shall be readied as described herein and filled with water to a verifiable and visible level to 10' above the lowest portions of the system being tested. 2. On multi-level buildings only one floor level shall be tested at a time. Each floor shall be tested from a level below the structure of the floor, or the outlet of the building in the case of the lowest level, to a level of 12 inches above the floor immediately above the floor being tested, or the top of the highest vent in the case of the highest building level. The pipes for the level being tested shall be filled with water to a verifiable and visible level as described above and be allowed to remain so for 24 hours. If after 24 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped, and the water level shall again be raised to the level described, and the test repeated until, after a 24 hour retention period,there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested. 3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question or doubt of the integrity of the installation, additional tests including peppermint smoke, or other measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Such tests shall be conducted and completed before any joints in plumbing are concealed or made inaccessible. 3.10 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the systems shown on the Drawings and Specification shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specification to establish the type and function of systems but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of any system. In case of doubt as to the work intended or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for Supplementary Instructions and Drawings, etc. END OF SECTION 22 4100 PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES 22 41 00-16 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 4110 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing, complete installation and testing of the gas piping system,with all metering,valves, piping and auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Coordinate with the gas company and pay all fees and permits required for a complete and operating gas service to the project. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 All gas piping above ground shall be Schedule 40 black steel as manufactured by National Tube, Republic,Youngstown, or approved equal domestic manufacturer. 2.02 All gas piping larger than 2" shall be of welded construction. Screwed fittings will only be permitted for size 2" and smaller. Unions and valves will not be permitted above furred ceiling areas or in walls or chases. 2.03 All pipe fittings shall be of materials as follows: 1. All welding fittings shall be factory-made and shall be full line size, for each tee, branch, elbow, etc.,with reducers after fittings, if required. 2. All screwed fittings shall be Crane, or approved equal, Class 150 malleable iron. Screw joints shall be made up with graphite and oil or Teflon tape. Screwed threads shall be in accordance with American Pipe Thread Standards. 3. All piping and fittings shall be from a domestic manufacturer. 2.04 All underground gas piping with 5 pound working pressure or less shall be as follows: A. The pipe shall be yellow polyethylene with socket heat fusion joints and fittings. Pipe sizes 1-1/2" and 2" shall be SDR 11, (PE 2406) and pipe sizes 3" and 4" shall be SDR 11.5 (PE 2406). B. All socket heat fusion fittings shall be D.O.T. approved and meet ASTM D-2513 and ANSI B31.8 codes. NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 22 41 10-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. All gas valves shall be polyethylene ball type, doubled union, rated for natural gas use. All valves shall be placed in a cast-iron valve box of an adequate size for accessibility and maintenance. 4. All transition meter risers shall be D.O.T. approved anode-less service type, fusion coupled and PE 2406 rated. E. The contractor shall take thermal expansion under consideration during installation. The contractor shall follow all requirements set by the manufacturer to protect the system from damage due to thermal expansion. F. The contractor shall provide detector tape approximately 12" above all gas piping. G. Wrap pipe with 18 gauge minimum copper tracer wire. 2.05 Gas piping installed in unventilated spaces shall be routed in properly vented continuous sleeve where required by the building code. 2.06 Gas valves shall be U.L. listed as follows: A. Ball Valves: Nibco T585-70-UL for%"to 1" and T580-70-UL for 1-%"to 3". B. Plug Valves: DeZurick Series 425 or 435 Eccentric valves with IRS 49 plug seals. 2.07 Gas pressure regulators shall be capable of reducing 75 psi pressure gas to 0.5 psi gas at capacities required by Gas Demand. Install per A.G.A. Bulletin 90. Regulators shall be as manufactured by Rockwell, Fisher-Governor or approved equal. 2.08 All gas regulators located inside the building shall be vented to atmosphere with schedule 40 black steel pipe. This includes all regulators provided with mechanical and plumbing equipment and all other regulators provided under this contract. Vent piping shall be the full size of regulatory port opening, or as recommended by regulator manufacturer, and shall run independent of any other regulator vent through to point of termination. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. 3.03 All underground gas piping shall be laid on 6" of wet compact banksand approximately 24" below grade. Backfill trench with wet compacted banksand to 6" above pipe. The remainder of backfill shall be selected backfill and shall meet all compaction requirements set forth by the general trenching and backfill requirements. NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 22 41 10-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.04 Provide lever handle gas valve, drip leg and union to each piece of equipment and where indicated. 3.05 All gas lines entering building shall be valved on the exterior of the building above grade. PART 4-TESTING 4.01 TESTING OF GAS PIPING SYSTEMS A. All gas system testing shall be in compliance with local codes or as required in NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code whichever is the more stringent requirement. B. All work shall be performed by a Journeyman Plumber holding current State and local licenses. C. All tests shall be accomplished during normal working hours and after having given due notification to building owner, construction manager or designee, of tests to be performed. All tests shall be performed in the presence of and witnessed by the building owners representative or designee D. All gas system piping shall be subjected to a pneumatic test pressure of 60 psig for not less than 2 hours upon completion of all rough-in work and prior to covering. While the systems are subjected to this air pressure test, all joints shall have a soapy water solution applied and shall be observed for leaks. During test period there shall be no perceptible drop in test gage pressure E. A final test shall be performed after all portions of the piping system are completely installed and covered. The entire system shall be tested, with all system outlets plugged or capped, before any equipment or appliances are connected to the piping. 1. Final test shall be with mercury, measured with a manometer or slope gage. Test pressures shall in no case be less than one and one half times the normal operating pressure or as listed below; which ever is the greater: a. 10.5 inches mercury(5 psig)for 4 ounce system. b. 21.0 inches mercury(10 psig)for 8 ounce system. 2. Tests shall be for a period of not less than 30 minutes and shall prove absolutely tight, showing no perceptible drop,for the entire test period. F. Purge air from test piping before connecting equipment or appliances. Purge air to outdoors or to ventilated space of sufficient volume to prevent accumulation of flammable mixtures. END OF SECTION NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 22 41 10-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 43 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Roof and floor drains B. Cleanouts. C. Backflow preventers. D. Water hammer arrestors. E. Thermostatic mixing valves. F. Hose bibbs hydrants. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. B. Section 224100- Plumbing Piping. C. Section 224400- Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. B. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. C. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ANSI/ASSE 1019 -Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. E. ANSI A112.21.1- Floor Drains. F. ANSI A112.26.1-Water Hammer Arresters. G. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters H. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and backflow preventers. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two loose keys for hose bibbs and spare hose end vacuum breakers. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLOOR DRAINS A. Zurn B. Watts PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Jay R.Smith D. MiFab E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. F. Floor Drains 1. Lacquered cast iron floor drain with anchor flange, standard satin finish nickel bronze strainer with vandal proof stainless steel allen key screws. Provide floor drains with trap guard insert. G. Shower Drains 1. Galvanized cast iron floor drain body with anchor flange, membrane clamp, stainless steel strainer with vandal proof stainless steel allen key screws. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-ROOF DRAINS A. Jay R.Smith B. Watts C. Zurn D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. Roof Drains 1. Roof Drains: ANSI A112.21.2; Galvanized cast iron body with sump, removable cast aluminum dome strainer, membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop, with adjustable underdeck clamp roof sump receiver waterproofing flange controlled flow weir leveling frame adjustable extension sleeve (for insulation) perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof. 2. Roof Overflow Drains (OD): Galvanized cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring; pipe extended to 2 inches above flood elevation. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-OIL INTERCEPTORS A. Park USA B. Comal Concrete C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. D. Oil Interceptors 1. Construction: Precast concrete for in ground applications and non-skid stainless steel cover with gasket and securing handle. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-CLEANOUTS A. Zurn B. Watts PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Jay R. Smith D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. Cleanouts 1. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Square cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover; 2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover; 3. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scored cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas; 4. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and 6" round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; S. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS A. Woodford B. Zurn C. Jay R. Smith D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS 1. Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed to interior with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011; 2. Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with rough chrome plated lockable recessed box hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker; 3. Floor Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; chrome plated lockable recessed box, hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker; 2.06 RECESSED VALVE BOX A. Manufacturers: 1. Oatey. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 3. Sioux Chief 4. Guy Gray. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 5. Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass quarter turn ball valves and water hammer arrestors on both hot and cold connections, socket for waste, slip in finishing cover; 6. Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with quarter turn brass ball valve, slip in finishing cover; 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Watts B. Wilkins C. Febco D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks; 2. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent; 2.08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Sioux Chief B. Wilkins C. Zurn D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS 1. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psig (1700 kPa) working pressure; 2.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Powers PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Bradley C. Leonard D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 1. Provide thermostatic mixing valve, with check valve, volume control shut-off valve on outlet, stem type thermometer on outlet, strainer stop check on inlet, mounted in lockable cabinet of 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting, forming of roof and/or floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain. END OF SECTION 22 43 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 43 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 22 44 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section,with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. A. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Drains and cleanouts. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Piping systems. 2. Pipe valves, and fittings. 3. Plumbing systems testing. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Noisy operation. 2. Noticeable deterioration of finish. 3. Leakage of water. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Provide pre-printed operating and maintenance instructions for each item specified. Instruct and demonstrate the proper operation and maintenance to the Owner's designated representative. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Confirm and field coordinate that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. PLUMBING FIXTURES: 1. GENERAL: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on drawings. The approved equal products manufacturers are as follows: a. Water closet, urinals, lavatories, bath tubs and showers: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer. b. Stainless steel sinks: Elkay,Just and Moen. C. Mop sinks: Stern-Williams, Fiat d. Faucets:American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, e. Faucets: Chicago,T&S Brass, Zurn,Sloan f. Faucets: Moen Commercial,Speakman g. Shower valves: Leonard, Powers, Symmons, Chicago h. Shower Systems: Bradley,Acorn, Willoughby i. Flush Valves: Sloan "Royal", Zurn "AguaVantage" j. Drinking fountains: Halsey Taylor, Elkay, Haws,Acorn Aqua. k. Floor drains and roof drains: Zurn,J.R. Smith,Josam and Watts. I. Emergency Fixtures: Bradley, Chicago, Haws, Speakman and Encon 2. CHAIR CARRIERS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1.; Adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment,threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or Watts. 3. DRINKING FOUNTAIN & URINAL WALL SUPPORTS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1; cast iron PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith,Josam or Watts. 4. TRAPS, STOPS AND RISERS: Heavy pattern as manufactured by McGuire, Chicago or Zurn. B. CLEANOUTS: 1. GENERAL: Provide cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by the city building code. 2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Zurn J. R. Smith,Josam and Watts. 3. TYPES: a. FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable floor level assembly with round nickel bronze top and gasket cover. b. RESILIENT OR TILE FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable assembly with round nickel-bronze top with gasketed water tight cover and depressed top to receive flooring finish material. C. DRY WALL CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron tee and counter sink bronze plug with square nickel bronze frame and stainless steel cover. d. Provide membrane clamp rings for slab on grade cleanouts. e. All cleanouts shall have tapered bronze plugs. f. All cleanouts outside of building on grade shall be set in a 18" x 18" x 4" thick concrete pad. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine conditions affecting this Work. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the proper authority and do not proceed until those conditions have been corrected. Commencing Work implies acceptance of existing conditions as satisfactory to the outcome of this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures in locations and heights as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Architect. B. Install materials plumb, level, securely, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. All rough-in pipe openings,for final connections with all supply waste soil and vent systems shall be closed with caps or plugs during early stages of construction and installation. Tape shall not be considered sufficient protection. D. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Provide gate valves in piping serving batteries of fixtures. Label stops "Hot" and "Cold." Valves to be located above accessible ceiling. If ceiling are not accessible, provide access panels of adequate size to make valves fully accessible. F. Plumbing fixtures shall be supported by a concealed chair carrier where required to properly support the fixture specified. All carriers to be securely mounted, bolted and checked prior to concealment. G. Caulk around fixtures with best grade white silicone caulking. Do not use grout. H. All handles on supply and drainage fittings or other brass items shall be properly lined up and adjusted. Fittings shall not be left in any haphazard manner. I. All fixtures shall have individual chrome plated loose key cutoff stops on supply lines. Where same are not specified as a part of the fixture trim, they shall be installed as close to fixtures as possible in the hot and cold water supply. J. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. K. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. L. Hot and cold water riser air chambers: Provide air chambers for hot and/or cold water riser located at the rough-in tee at all fixtures. The air chamber shall be of the same materials and the next larger diameter than the required rough-in supply pipe and a minimum of 24"tall. The contractor may install water hammer arrestors in lieu of air chambers. Water hammer arrestors shall be PDI Certified and sized and placed as recommended by manufacture. Provide an accessible isolation valve and proper access to arrestor for replacement. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 1. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1. PLUMBING FIXTURES 224400-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Do not permit use of fixtures. 3.07 ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES A. Install fixtures to heights, indicated on architectural drawings. B. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed to required heights, shall be of types suitable for, and supplied with controls properly installed, to comply with requirements as directed by ADA Accessibility of Federal Registry, Part III, Department of Justice 28 CFR 36 and comply with all state and local ADA Code requirements. C. Exposed accessible sink or lavatory p-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated with the fully molded, Truebro, Handi Lav-guard insulation kit. Provide the proper model for fixtures specified. All kits shall be White or as selected by Architect. D. Wall mounted drinking fountains and coolers which protrude into passages or corridor space, whether single or paired with adjacent accessible fixture, shall be supplied with skirt or apron to lower the underside clearance of non-accessible fixture equal to that required for accessible fixture. END OF SECTION 22 44 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 44 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 22 45 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters. B. In-line circulator pumps. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. B. Section 232400—Sound &Vibration Control. C. Section 224100- Plumbing Piping&Valves. D. Section 224300- Plumbing Specialties. E. Section 261800 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A- Energy Conservation in New Building Design. B. ASME Section VIIID- Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. C. ANSI/NFPA 54- National Fuel Gas Code. D. ANSI/NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. E. ANSI/UL 1453- Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include heat exchanger dimensions. size of tappings, and performance data. 2. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, and drains. C. Product Data: PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent construction. 3. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 ANSI/NFPA 70 ANSI/UL 1453 requirements for water heaters. B. Conform to ASME Section VIIID for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section Division 1. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division 1. B. Warranty: Include coverage of domestic water heaters, water storage tanks, and packaged water heating systems. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two sets of electric heater elements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. State Industries. b. Bradford White. B. Type: Factory-assembled and wired, electric,vertical storage. C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel; 4 inch diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches glass fiber encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish. D. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from 60 to 180 degrees F (16 to 82 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nickle-chrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat. E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high-density magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. 2.02 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED DIRECT VENT WATER HEATER A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. State. b. Bradford White. C. Lochinvar. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired,vertical storage direct vent water heater. C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel ASME labeled; maximum hydrostatic working pressure of 160 psi, 4 inch diameter inspection port, down fired power burner, spiral shaped heat exchanger, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inch insulation, encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish;floor shield and legs. D. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, maintenance free powered anode or a minimum of two high-density magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. E. Approval: By AGA as automatic storage water heater and automatic circulating tank water heater for operation at 180 degrees F. Meets or exceeds the thermal efficiency and standby loss requirements of the U.S. Dept. of Energy and current ASHRAE 90.1. Water heater must comply with SCAQMD Rule 1146.2 for low NOx emissions F. Controls: Automatic direct immersion thermostat with temperature range adjustable minimum 175 degrees F (97 degrees C) differential, automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat, factory set at 205 degrees F (96 degrees C), gas pressure regulator, multi-ribbon or tubular burner, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple, intermittent electronic ignition monitoring pilot and main flame, trial for re-ignition for momentary loss of flame, shut down of pilot and main burner in 2-4 seconds after loss of flame, and power burner and vent. 2.03 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS A. Manufacturer: 1. Amtrol. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Bell & Gossett. b. Armstrong. C. Taco. B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME Code; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles. C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting,tank drain; pre-charge to 12 psig. 2.04 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. TACO. b. Grundfos PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Armstrong B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure. C. Impeller: Bronze. D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. F. Drive: Flexible coupling. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 UL requirements. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related work to achieve operating system. C. Provide secondary drain pan and route secondary drain pipe to outside the building or as indicated on the construction documents. D. Route TPR drain line to the exterior of the building and terminate 6 inches above grade. E. Provide 18 inch high galvanized stand manufactured for supporting water heaters. 3.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION A. Install tanks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide steel pipe support for tanks, independent of building structural framing members. C. Clean and flush tank after installation. Seal until pipe connections are made. 3.03 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit. C. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. D. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 valve and balancing valve on discharge. E. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. F. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. G. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. END OF SECTION 22 45 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 45 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. B. Related SECTIONS: 1. SECTION 01 91 00-GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. The commissioning of the HVAC system and associated controls shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner.The commissioning provider shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: 1. CxA—Certified Commissioning Authority—ACG 2. CBCP—Certified Building Commissioning Professional—AEE 3. CCP—Certified Commissioning Professional—BCA 4. CPMP—Certified Process Management Professional —ASHRAE 5. BSC—Building System Commissioning Certification—NEBB B. The commissioning provider(Commissioning authority) shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.3 RESPONIBILITIES A. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as related to the Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate coordination of Commissioning work by Commissioning authority. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by Commissioning authority to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Performance Test procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact on warranty, and provide Commissioning authority with written comment on same. 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended performance testing of equipment and systems. 5. Provide Operations & Maintenance data to Commissioning authority for preparation of checklists and training manuals. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Provide Testing and Balancing Report before Functional Testing begins. 7. Provide As-built drawings and documentation to facilitate Testing. 8. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of Sub Contractors and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 9. Certify to Commissioning authority that installation work listed in Pre- Functional Checklists has been completed. 10. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and Pre-Functional Checklists. 11. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 12. Provide copy of manufacturers filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 13. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Testing with Commissioning authority. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Pre-Functional Checklists. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by Commissioning authority. 14. Coordinate with Commissioning authority to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 15. Provide qualified personnel to assist and participate in Commissioning. 16. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by Commissioning authority, required for carrying out Testing of systems. 17. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist the Test Engineer in the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of commissioning. 18. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Issues Log are corrected within the time schedule shown in the Commissioning Plan. 19. Provide Commissioning authority with all submittals, start-up instructions manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to Commissioning Process. This information shall be routed through Architect. 20. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Training Program outline for each system. 21. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. 22. Prepare Operation & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings in accordance with specifications; submit copy to Commissioning authority in addition to other contractually required submissions. Revise and resubmit COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 manuals in accordance with Design Professionals and Commissioning authority comments. 23. Commissioning requires participation of this Division Subcontractors to ensure that systems are operating in manner consistent with Contract Documents. All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub- Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included as part of the Construction Contract. B. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Startup procedures to demonstrate proper installation of systems, according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning authority 1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: 1. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. 2. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. 3. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. 4. Functional testing: Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. Testing shall include all modes and sequence of operation, including under full-load, part-load and emergency conditions (including all alarms). Controls system shall be tested to document that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated and adjusted and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications. Sequences shall be functionally tested to document they operate in accordance with plans and specifications. 5. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. 6. Air and hydronic system balancing: Air and water flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within the tolerances provided in the contract documents. System balancing shall be performed by T.A.B. contractor as specified in the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing specification section 23 99 00. 7. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. 8. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Equipment to be tested 1. Energy Management and Control System: 1. Graphical User Interface 2. Automation Software 3. Field Level Controllers 4. Field Level Devices 5. Control Sequences 2. Condensing Systems 3. Air Handling Systems (All AHU) 4. Exhaust Fan Systems(100%) 5. Service water heating systems(100%) C. Testing functions and conditions 1. Energy conservation programs (economizer, optimal start, etc) 2. Verify shutdown of systems when scheduled. 3. Calibration of sensors 4. Testing shall affirm winter and summer design conditions. 5. Test under full outside air conditions. 6. Confirm functionality of all specified sequences of operations. 7. Verify the functionality of all alarms. D. Performance criteria 1. Air and water temperatures shall be within tolerances specified in the contract documents. 2. Space temperatures shall be maintained within 1 degree of specified set points. 3. Space humidity shall be maintained within 5%of specified levels. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 NO PRODUCTS SUPPLIED PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This Division has startup responsibilities and are required to complete sub-systems so COMPLETE SYSTEMS are fully functional. Insuring they meet design requirements of Contract Documents. Commissioning procedures and testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift this responsibility, in whole or in part, to Commissioning Agent or Owner. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors and equipment vendors to set aside adequate time to address Pre-Functional Checklists, Functional Performance Tests, Operations & Maintenance Manual creation, Owner Training, and associated coordination meetings. C. Commissioning authority will also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.2 WORK PRIOR TO COMMSSIONING A. Complete all phases of the work so the systems can be started, adjusted, balanced, tested, and otherwise tested. B. See pertinent specification sections in this Division, which outline responsibilities for start- up of equipment with obligations to complete systems, including all sub- systems so that they are fully functional. C. Assist commissioning authority with all information pertaining to actual equipment and installation as required complete the full commissioning scope. D. Contractor shall prepare startup procedures to demonstrate compliance with pre- functional checklists, and coordinate scheduling for completion of these checklists. E. A minimum of 7 days prior to date of system startup, submit to Commissioning authority for review, detailed description of equipment start-up procedures which contractor proposes to perform to demonstrate conformance of systems to specifications and Checklists. 3.3 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Attend meetings related to the Commissioning Process; arrange for attendance by personnel and vendors directly involved in the project, prior to testing of their systems. B. Provide skilled technicians to startup and test all systems, and place systems in complete and fully functioning service in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Provide skilled technicians, experienced and familiar with systems being commissioned,to assist Commissioning authority in commissioning process. 3.4 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. Complete corrective work in a timely manner to allow expeditious completion of Commissioning Process. If deadlines pass without resolution of identified problems, Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs thus incurred will be Contractor's responsibility. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.5 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS(PFC) A. Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to validate compliance with Contract Documents installation and start-up requirements, for this Division's systems. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. 3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) A. Contractor, in cooperation with Commissioning Agent, shall conduct Functional Performance Testing to validate compliance with Contract Documents. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. C. Assist Commissioning authority in Functional Testing by removing equipment covers, opening access panels, etc. Furnish ladders, flashlights, meters, gauges, or other inspection equipment as necessary. 3.7 TRAINING A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling, and ultimatelyto ensure that training is completed. C. The training agenda (plan) shall include, at a minimum,the following elements: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. D. Commissioning authority shall be responsible for overseeing and approving content and adequacy of training of Owner personnel for all installed systems. Provide Commissioning authority with training plan two weeks before planned training. 3.8 OPERATIONS& MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Sub-Contractor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 specified in this Division, and shall deliver documentation to Contractor for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 01, prior to training Owner personnel. C. Provide Commissioning authority with a single, electronic copy of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review. Commissioning authority copy of O&M manuals shall be submitted through Architect. D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include, service agency contact information, maintenance requirements, controls system settings and a narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including set points. 3.9 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: 1. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. 2. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing, disposition of deficiencies discovered during testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures used for repeatability of testing in the future. END OF SECTION 23 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 03 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore,shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material,fixture,form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect,expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets,apparatus,etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid;the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances,conflicts or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services,and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division. 1.06 PERMITS,TESTS,INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating,ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of,shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges,connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving&Conditioning Association,AMCA. 2. American Standards Association,ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers,ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers,ASPE. 6. American Society of Testing Materials,ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association,AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association,SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install",complete and ready for intended use,as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities(Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance,the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances),or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that "OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 16. J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted,will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the substitutions. N. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the equipment and/or electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor, prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight(8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 or mylar in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = V-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the 0&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the 0&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to,the following items: 1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. Variable Air Volume Boxes. 5. Air Handling Units. 6. Cooling Towers. 7. Chillers. 8. Air Cooled Condensing Units. 9. Water Treatment. 10. Expansion Compensation. 11. Variable Frequency Drives. 12. Noise and Vibration Controls. 13. Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties. 14. Plumbing Equipment. 15, Sanitary DWV Fittings, Pipe and Accessories. 16, Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Fittings and Accessories. 17. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 18. Hydronic and Plumbing Valves. 19. Hydronic Piping and Accessories. 20. Hydronic Pumps. 21. Roof-Top A/C Units. 22. Heating Water Boiler. 23. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 24. Duct Specialties. 25. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 26. Air Distribution Devices. 27. Fan Coil Units. 28. Filters. 29. Fans. 30. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 31. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 32. Test,Adjust and Balance Reports. 33, Testing,Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 34, Coordination Drawings. I. Refer to other Division 23 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with equipment submittal for all AHU's, ACCU's, and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including(but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor,wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, indicate the following installed conditions: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers, fire dampers, duct access panels, and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. S. Contract Modifications,actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings,the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair,and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 23. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-14 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow %" of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 23 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number,type,color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment and motor name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-15 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.20 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 23 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. 1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start,except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to Sections in Division 23 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-16 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty(60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. It is agreed that "MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner. If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for "record purposes", then an AutoCAD based compact disc ("CD") will be prepared. The "Cl)" will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot"format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "CD" of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the "CD" to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the "CD" will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars($500.00) per"CD". BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-17 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The"CD"will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The"CD"will be prepared in a ".dwg"format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors:shall be as follows: 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials,and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-18 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Arrange for chases,slots,and openings in other building components during progress of construction,to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components,as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-19 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self- tapping screws,or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the"as-built" drawings. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting,fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS"for definition of"Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE,TIMING,COORDINATION WITH OWNER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-20 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-21 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Mech/Elec. Equipment Coordination Sheet Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Fuse Type Fuse Size MOCP Type Size MOCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00-22 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 05 10 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing,adjusting,and balancing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 014000-Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 017000- Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Section 239900-Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect, Engineer and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Adjust electrical amp draw on motors to within 80%of rated amp draw. F. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. H. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. I. Adjust return air to 500 fpm at each air unit inlet. Replace drive packages as necessary to achieve design airflows. STARTING OF SYSTEMS 23 05 10-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 J. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 014000 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. Demonstrate Project equipment and provide instruction by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.05 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A. Mechanical Division will secure the services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting,and balancing. B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 239900. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 23 05 10 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 23 05 10-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 07 19 DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS Part 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems. 1. Refrigerant suction (low pressure gas) piping. 2. Refrigerant hot gas (discharge or high pressure gas) piping. 3. Refrigerant liquid piping,for VRF/VRV and Heat Pump systems. 4. Condensate drainage piping. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include thermal conductivity, water vapor permeance,thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualification: Only trained installers that are familiar with the products should be used. 1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Material to be delivered in new condition,free of defects and stored in a clean, dry space that provides protection against damage and contamination. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 231400 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment". B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and space required for maintenance. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing and leak testing of systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. Part 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Flexible Elastomeric Foam: EPDM -Closed cell expanded rubber. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I for tubular materials for refrigeration pipe sizes 1/4" and greater. 1. Outdoor Use, Basis of Design Product: Provide Reftekk AC-SSPT(EPDM pre-split with lap seal and field applied Aeroflex Aerocoat) or comparable product by one of the following. a. Aeroflex, EPDM SSPT with field applied Aerocel Aerocoat b. Armacell, LLC, EPDM UT Solaflex, Pre-split with lap seal and with field applied Black PVC jacket 2. Indoor Use, Basis of Design Product: Provide Reftekk AC-SSPT(EPDM pre-split with lap seal) or comparable product by one of the following. a. Aeroflex, EPDM SSPT b. Armacell, LLC, EPDM UT Solaflex, Pre-split with lap seal 3. Applied to Annealed Coiled Tubing (Line Sets), Basis of Design Product: EPDM continuous tube. B. Elastomeric insulation shall not use CFC's or HFC's in the manufacturing process. C. Elastomeric insulation shall have a flame spread-index of 25 or less and a smoke-developed index of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for all products through 2" thickness. D. Elastomeric insulation and elastomeric joining system shall be suitable of use from -70°F to 257°F continuous service temperature, per ASTM C 411. E. Elastomeric insulation shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.235 Btu-in/h-ftz-°F at a mean temperature of 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518. F. Elastomeric insulation shall have a maximum water vapor transmission of<_0.03 perm-inch when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Procedure A, latest revision. G. Elastomeric insulation must exhibit long-term UV resistance in outdoor installation per ASTM G 7 and ASTM G 90. H. Elastomeric insulation must not contribute to external stress corrosion cracking when tested per ASTM C 692. 2.02 ADHESIVES,AND TAPES A. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive for Indoor and Outdoor Application: 1. Basis of Design Product: Provide Aeroflex AeroSeal contact adhesive or comparable product by one of the following. a. Armacell, LLC HT 625 contact adhesive B. Flexible Elastomeric for LEED low VOC Application: 1. Basis of Design Product: Provide Aeroflex AeroSeal LVOC C. Seaming tape to be 15-mil EPDM rubber with acrylic adhesive. DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.03 INSULATING PIPE HANGER SUPPORTS A. Support the piping system using high density rigid foam insulating pipe hanger supports with an inner lining of EPDM rubber insulating tape and 15-mil exterior EPDM rubber jacket. Insulation density to be a minimum of 10 lb./cu. ft. with a compressive strength of 284 PSI or greater, and a k-value of 0.312 or lower. Continuous use temperature range to be-70°F to 257°F with water absorption of 5% or less. 1. Basis of Design Product: Provide Reftekk"Cush-A-Therm", model UX insulated pipe support complete with steel channel insulation OD clamp or comparable product by one of the following. a. Aeroflex USA,Aerofix-U with matching steel channel insulation OD clamp. b. Armaflex LLC,Armafix IPH with matching steel channel insulation OD clamp. 2.04 METAL JACKETING A. Childers "Strap-On"jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers on all elbows and tees. Part 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and free of leaks and defects 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean, dry and free of dirt, dust, grease,frost, and moisture. 3. Work shall be performed at the installation temperatures recommended by the product manufacturer. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B.Tape seams and lap seam tape overlaps shall be clean dry,fan free of dirt, dust,grease, frost and moisture. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. All piping,valves and fittings scheduled to be insulated to have all insulation applied in strict accordance with the insulation manufacturers installation instructions and practices described in the National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards Manual. In case of conflict,the manufacturers installation guidelines and instruction will be used. B. Install insulation materials, accessories and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids,throughout the length of the piping including supports, fittings, valves and specialties. DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Pipes located outdoors or in crawl spaces shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. D. Install insulation materials,vapor barriers,vapor dams,jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of the pipe system as required. E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams oriented per the insulation manufacturers installation instructions for all horizontal runs. F. Keep insulation dry and clean during application and finishing. Do not apply insulation to operating systems. G. Install insulation with the least number of joints practical. H. Piping to be insulated with tubular preformed pipe insulation. I. Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations, wall penetrations and floor penetrations. J. Install insulation continuously through fire rated wall and fire rated floor penetrations complying with Penetration Fire-stopping details. K. Insulating Pipe Hanger Supports are to be installed at all pipe support and clamp locations. Insulating Pipe Hanger Supports are to be installed at the time of piping installation such that the pipe insulation system is installed in a continuous manner through the pipe support system. L. All insulation terminations, butt joints, longitudinal joints, and access points to be properly glued or sealed with the insulation manufacturers sealant system. M. Vapor dams to be installed every 12'to 18' per insulation manufacturers installation instructions, high point of piping run and at all insulation terminations (supports,valves, flanges and end of pipe runs) N. Provide sufficient clearance between insulated pipes to allow air circulation. O. Provide mitered insulation fittings at elbows to prevent compression of the insulation at the throat of the elbow and stretching on the outside of the bend. P. Do not compress the insulation at penetrations or structural members, such as joists or studs. Do not allow the insulation to be compressed by ceiling hanger wires. Q. Do not allow attachment of anything to the insulated piping that will reduce the effective thickness of the insulation, such as control wiring, cabling,telephone wiring, etc. When using insulation manufacturers recommended tape on joints, do not compress the insulation. R. Insulation should be installed such that butt joints are in slight compression. This prevents separation of the insulation joints over time or due to changes in temperature. Do NOT apply the insulation in a stretched condition. S. Insulation thickness to be the most restrictive of the following options. 1. Liquid, suction, and discharge lines per state energy codes. 2. In accordance with the thickness tables for piping insulation in the latest version of ASH RAE 90.1. 3. In accordance with local building code requirements and Authority Having DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Jurisdiction. 4. In accordance with the requirements of the manufacturers of the equipment being served by the insulated refrigerant piping system. 5. Sufficient thickness to prevent condensation on the surface of the insulation under all operating conditions. PART 4-SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Condensate drain lines: % inch B. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch C. Refrigerant Piping (1) 1%"and smaller 1 inch (2) Larger than 1% inch 1 inch END OF SECTION 230719 DIRECT EXPANSION PIPING SYSTEM INSULATIONS 23 07 19-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 23 24 00—Sound and Vibration Control. B. Section 23 26 00- Piping Insulation. C. Section 23 28 00- Equipment Insulation. D. Section 22 4100- Plumbing System. E. Section 23 55 10- Hydronic Piping Above Grade. F. Section 23 55 11—Hydronic Piping Below Grade. G. Section 23 53 00—Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASIVE B31.1- Power Piping. B. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over:Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. All hangers, supports and rods in areas exposed to the outdoors, such as but not limited to crawl spaces, service bays, wash bays, open shops and warehouses shall be hot dipped galvanized. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. K. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller— Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3" through 8"—Type PS For multiple pipes—Type PSE -Custom L. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions; Unistrut "Cush-A-Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. M. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 231400-3.03. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. O. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief"Pipe Titan" or equal. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods:Threaded both ends,threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq.ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel unless noted otherwise. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed. G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted,two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations,flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 6'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch T-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger;tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions. 3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any),to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 & 6 18 0.060 8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075 16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105 D. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls,floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls,turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. END OF SECTION 23 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 14 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 17 00 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Painting 2. Automatic temperature controls. 3. Power control wiring to motors and equipment. 1.03 WARRANTY Warrant the Work specified herein for one year and motors for five years beginning on data of substantial completion against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures variations, and accessories. C. MOTOR NAMEPLATE INFORMATION: Manufacturer's name, address, utility and operating data. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional information. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. TIME AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide motors by a single manufacturer as much as possible. 1. Baldur 2. Marathon 3. Siemens-Allis 4. General Electric 5. U.S. Motor B. TEMPERATURE RATING: Provide insulation as follows: 1. CLASS B: 40 degrees C maximum. 2. CLASS F: a. Between 40 degrees C and 65 degrees C maximum. b. Totally enclosed motors. C. STARTING CAPABILITY: As required for service indicated five starts minimum per hour. D. PHASES AND CURRENT: Verify electrical service compatibility with motors to be used. 1. UP TO 1/2 HP: Provide permanent split, capacitor-start single phase with inherent overload protection. 2. 3/4 HP AND LARGER: Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphone. 3. Provide two separate windings on 2-speed polyphone motors. 4. Name plate voltage shall be the same as the circuit's normal voltage, serving the motor. E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15 for multiphase; 1.35 for single phase. F. FRAMES: U-frames 1.5 hp. and larger. G. BEARINGS: Provide sealed re-graspable ball bearings; with top mounted ale mite lubrication fittings and bottom side drains minimum average life 100,000 hours typically, and others as follows: 1. Design for thrust where applicable. 2. PERMANENTLY SEALED: Where not accessible for greasing. 3. SLEEVE-TYPE WITH OIL CUPS: Light duty fractional hp. motors or polyphone requiring minimum noise level. MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 H. ENCLOSURE TYPE: Provide enclosures as follows: 1. CONCEALED INDOOR: Open drip proof. 2. EXPOSED INDOOR: Guarded. 3. OUTDOOR TYPICAL: Type II. TEC. 4. OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTED: Type I. TEA. I. OVERLOAD PROTECTION: Built-in sensing device for stopping motor in all phase legs and signaling where indicated for fractional horse power motors. J. NOISE RATING: "Quiet" except where otherwise indicated. K. EFFICIENCY: Minimum full load efficiency listed in the following table, when tested in accordance with IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B, including stray load loss measure. NEMA Efficiency Motor Horsepower INDEX Letter Minimum Efficiency 1800 RPM Synchronous Speed 7.5-10 F 89.5 15-20 E 91.0 25-30 E 92.4 40 D 93.0 50 C 93.0 60 C 93.6 75 C 94.1 100-125 B 94.5 150-200 B 95.0 1200 RPM Synchronous Speed 3-5 G 87.5 7.5 G 89.5 10 F 89.5 15 F 90.2 20 E 90.2 25-30 E 91.7 40-50 D 93.0 60 D 93.6 75 C 93.6 100-125 C 94.1 150-200 B 95.0 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS(STARTERS) A. All motor controllers (for equipment furnished under Division 23) shall be furnished under Division 23 and installed under Division 26 unless otherwise noted on the plans. B. Motor starters shall be furnished as follows. MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. GENERAL: Motor starters shall be Square D Company Class 8536 across-the-line magnetic type, full-voltage, non-reversing (FAVOR) starter. All starters shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the latest NEMA standards, sizes and horsepower. ICE sizes are not acceptable. Starters shall be mounted in a general purpose dead front, painted steel enclosure and surface-mounted. Provide size and number of poles as shown and required by equipment served. Provide two speed, two winding or two speed, single winding motor starter as required for two speed motors. 2. CONTACTS: Magnetic starter contacts shall be double break solid silver alloy. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. The starter shall have straight-through wiring. 3. OPERATING COILS: Operating coils shall be 120 volts and shall be of molded construction. When the coil fails, the starter shall open and shall not lock in the closed position. 4. OVERLOAD RELAYS: Provide manual reset, trip-free Class 20 overload relays in each phase conductor in of all starters. Overload relays shall be melting alloy type with visual trip indication. All 3 phase and single phase starters shall have one overload relay in each underground conductor. Relay shall not be field adjustable from manual to automatic reset. Provide 6 overload relays for two speed motor starters. 5. PILOT LIGHTS: Provide a red running pilot light for all motor starters. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor starter and shall not be wired across the operating coil. 6. CONTROLS: Provide starters with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches. Coordinate additional motor starter controls with the requirements of Division 23. Motor starter controls shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. 7. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER: Provide a single-phase 480 volt control power transformer with each starter for 120 volt control power. Connect the primary side to the line side of the motor starter. The primary side shall be protected by a fuse for each conductor. The secondary side shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals will not be located above the transformer. 8. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: Each starter shall have one normally open and one normally closed convertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the "holding interlock", remote monitoring, and control wiring. In addition, it shall be possible to field-install three more additional auxiliary contacts without removing existing wiring or removing the starter from its enclosure. 9. UNIT WIRING: Unit shall be completely pre-wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for line and load power wiring and HVAC control wiring. 10. ENCLOSURES: All motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures or NEMA-3R if mounted exposed to high moisture conditions. Provide NEMA 4X when located by cooling towers. 11. POWER MONITOR: Provide a square "D" 8430 MPS phase failure and under- voltage relay, base and wiring required for starters serving motors 5 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 horsepower and larger. Set the under-voltage setting according to minimum voltage required for the motor to operate within its range. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. 4. Cerus. 2.03 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. GENERAL: Combination motor starters shall consist of a magnetic starter and a fusible or non-fusible disconnect switch in a dead front, painted steel NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted and shall be surface-mounted. Size and number of poles shall as shown and required by equipment served. Combination motor starters shall be as specified for motor starters in Paragraph 2.01/13, except as modified herein. B. DISCONNECT SWITCH: Disconnect switches shall be as specified in Section 264900. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. 4. Franklin-Cerus. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractors' price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner. B. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance. C. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration transmission within the building. D. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily as determined by the Engineer. MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 END OF SECTION 23 17 00 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 17 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 24 00 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Vibration and sound control products. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division One specification sections, apply to work of this section B. This section is Division 23 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to vibration control products specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Vibration and sound control products shall conform to ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load conditions. C. Except as otherwise indicated, sound and vibration control products shall be provided by a single manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. B. Mason Industries, Inc. C. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2.02 GENERAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 23 24 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Provide vibration isolation supports for equipment, piping and ductwork, to prevent transmission of vibration and noise to the building structures that may cause discomfort to the occupants. B. Model numbers of Amber/Booth products are included for identification. Products of the additional manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with all of the requirements of this specification. 2.03 FLOOR MOUNTED AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth CAL-2, style C aluminum housed isolators sized for 2" static deflection. Cast iron or steel housings may be used provided they are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication B. If floor mounted air handling units are furnished with internal vibration isolation option, provide 2" thick Amber/Booth type NRC ribbed neoprene pads to address high frequency breakout and afford additional unit elevation for condensate drains. Ribbed neoprene pads shall be located in accordance with the air handling unit manufacturer's recommendations. 2.04 SUSPENDED AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth type BSWR-2 combination spring and rubber-in-shear isolation hanger sized for 2" static deflection. B. If suspended air handling units are furnished with internal vibration isolation option, furnish Amber/Booth type BIRD rubber-in-shear or NR AMPAD 3/8" thick neoprene pad isolation hangers sized for approximately %" deflection to address high frequency break- out. 2.05 SUSPENDED FANS AND FAN COIL UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth type HS spring hangers sized for 1" static deflection. 2.06 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS AND CHILLERS A. Amber/Booth type SP-NR style E flexplate pad isolators consisting of two layers of 3/8" thick alternate ribbed neoprene pad bonded to a 16 gage galvanized steel separator plate. B. Pads shall be sized for approximately 40 PSI loading and 1/8" deflection. C. Provide Amber/Booth CPF, 8" concrete inertia base. The base shall be welded steel construction with concrete in-fill supplied by the contractor on site and shall incorporate standard rebar reinforcement, spaced a maximum of 12" on center. Provide Amber/Booth AWH,floor mounted spring isolators sized for 1" static deflection. D. Provide inertia bases for all base mounted pump applications in which the pumps are to be installed on any floor level other than the ground floor or grade level. Inertia bases SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 23 24 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 shall also be provided for base mounted pump applications in which the associated mechanical room where they are housed is in a noise sensitive location, regardless of floor level. 2.07 PIPING A. Provide spring and rubber-in-shear hangers, Amber/Booth type HRS in mechanical equipment rooms, for a minimum distance of 30 feet from isolated equipment for all chilled water and hot water piping 1-1/2" diameter and larger. Springs shall be sized for 1" deflection. B. Floor supported piping is required to be isolated with Amber/Booth type AW-1 open springs sized for 1" deflection. C. Furnish line size flexible connectors at supply and return of pumps, Amber/Booth style 2800 single sphere EPDM construction, connector shall include 150 lb. cadmium plated carbon steel floating flanges. 2.08 CORROSION PROTECTION A. All vibration isolators shall be designed and treated for resistance to corrosion. B. Steel components: PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts, and washers: zinc-electroplated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 If internal isolation option is used on air handling units, the mechanical contractor shall verify proper adjustment and operation of isolators prior to start-up. All shipping brackets and temporary restraint devices shall be removed. 3.04 The vibration isolation supplier shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all external isolation materials and devices are installed correctly and functioning properly. END OF SECTION SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 23 24 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 26 00 PIPING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. C. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. PIPING INSULATION 23 26 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. 2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. 2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. 2.04 All insulation shall have composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 2.05 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. 2.06 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong. PIPING INSULATION 23 26 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Kooltherm Insulation (Koolphen). F. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be as manufactured by Dow"Trymer 2000 XP". G. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products. 2.08 MATERIALS A. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers,thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies. B. CHILLED WATER AND HEATING HOT WATER PIPE: Provide fiberglass pipe insulation with ASJ-SSL jacket or phenolic foam with ASJ and all joints sealed. Piping located outdoors shall be Polyisocyanurate with metal jacket cover. C. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. D. REFRIGERANT PIPING: Refrigerant pipe insulation shall be model "AP-2000", fire rated for use in environmental air plenums. Apply manufacturers recommended finish and sealant for exterior applications. E. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers "Strap-On" jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 Pipes located outdoors or in crawl spaces shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. 3.04 All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. 3.05 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. PIPING INSULATION 23 26 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket. 3.06 FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 4-SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Condensate drain lines: % inch B. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch C. Chilled Water Piping: (1) Located outdoors 6 inches and smaller: 2 inch a. 8 inches and larger: 2-1/2 inch (2) Located indoors: (a) 4 inch and smaller: 1% inch (b) Larger than 4 inch: 2 inch D. Refrigerant Piping (1) 1%"and smaller 1 inch (2) Larger than 1% inch 1 inch 4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS PIPING INSULATION 23 26 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Hot(Heating)Water Piping: (1) Operating temperature 105°F or less: 1 inch (2) Operating temperature higher than 105°F 1 inch and pipe size 1'/2 inch or smaller (3) Operating temperature higher than 105°F 2 inch and pipe size larger than 1'/2 inch END OF SECTION PIPING INSULATION 23 26 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 29 00 DUCT INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork system insulation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500- Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 231700- Motors and Motor Controllers 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. C. Duct and plenum insulation shall comply with minimum R-value requirements of 2015 International Energy Conservation Code. D. Adhesive and other material shall comply with NFPA and NBFU Standards No. 90A and 90B. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. Provide 8x11 sample of product along with submittal. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer's stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not DUCT INSULATION 23 29 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed. B. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type of application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf, Certain-Teed,Johns-Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. B. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Minnesota Mining, Arabol, Benjamin-Foster, Armstrong or Insulmastic, Inc., and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Ceramic fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Primer Refractories, A.P. Green Refractories or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION A. Fasten all longitudinal and circumferential laps with outward clinching staples 3" on center. On rectangular ducts over 24" wide apply as above and hold insulation in place on bottom side with mechanical pins and clips on 12" centers. B. Seal all seams and joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of white glass fabric embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic, Childers CP-30 or approved equal. DUCT INSULATION 23 29 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. All external duct insulation shall be Knauf Insulation Atmosphere Duct Wrap with ECOSE Technology, Johns Manville Microlite EQ duct wrap insulation with reinforced aluminum facing or approved equal. D. External duct wrap is required on all outside air ducts, supply and return air ducts that are not internally insulated. External duct wrap is also required on all exhaust and relief air ducts that are used in airside energy recovery systems. Any exhaust ductwork located in an unconditioned space shall also be provided with external duct wrap. Duct wrap shall be provided as follows: 1. A minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in conditioned and unconditioned spaces, such as ceiling plenum space. 2. A minimum installed R-value of 8 when ducts are located outside of the building. E. Any ductwork located in an air plenum that is comprised of materials that do not comply with the 25/50 flame and smoke rating per ASTM E 84 testing requirements shall be provided with a single layer of duct wrap to establish a noncombustible rating per ASTM E 136. Duct wrap products which are approved for such non-compliant combustible duct materials located in air plenums shall be 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A+ or Unifrax FyreWrap 0.5 Plenum. Insulation products for this application shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 DUCT LINER A. Duct liner shall be kept clean and dry during transportation, storage, installation, and throughout the construction process care should be taken to protect the liner from exposure to the elements or damage from mechanical abuse. B. All portions of duct designed to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with liner as specified. The smooth, black, mat facing or acrylic-coated surfaces with flexible glass cloth reinforcement shall face the airstream. All duct liner shall be cut to assure tight, overlapped corner joints. The top pieces shall be supported by the sidepieces. Duct liner shall be installed following the guidelines in the NAIMA "Duct Liner Installation Standard". C. The duct liner shall be tested according to erosion test method in ASTM C 1071 and shall be guaranteed to withstand velocities in the duct system up to 6000 fpm without surface erosion. D. Duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with full coverage of an approved adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916, and all exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be coated with Permacote factory-applied or field-applied edge coating and shall be neatly butted without gaps. Shop or field cuts shall be liberally coated with Johns Manville SuperSeal® duct butter and Edge Treatment or approved adhesive. DUCT INSULATION 23 29 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Metal nosings shall be securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream at forward discharge and at any point where lined duct is preceded by unlined duct. F. When velocity exceeds 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec), use metal nosing on every leading edge. Nosing may be formed on duct or be channel or zee attached by screws, rivets or welds. G. The liner shall further be secured with Graham welding pins and washers on not more than 18 inch centers both vertical and horizontal surfaces, and the pins and washers shall be pointed up with adhesive. H. Duct liner shall be Knauf Insulation Atmosphere Duct Liner with ECOSE Technology, Johns Manville Linacoustic RC duct liner with factory-applied edge coating and acrylic coating on the mat surface of airstream side or approved equal. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 9013, FHC 25/50 and Limited Combustibility and the air stream surface coating should contain an immobilized, EPA- registered, anti-microbial agent so it will not support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and G22. The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, UL 2824, with an NRC not less than .70 as tested per ASTM C 423 using a Type "A" mounting, and a thermal conductivity no higher than 0.24 BTU•in/(hr•ft2.OF) at 750F mean temperature. I. Line supply and return ductwork at connection of HVAC unit to a point of 15 feet upstream and downstream of the equipment and in return air boots. Attach with full cover coat of cement, duct dimensions up to 16 inches; provide stick clips or screws and cap for dimensions over 16 inches, spaced 16 inches o.c. maximum. Provide sheet metal liner cap over all leading edges of internal insulation exposed to air stream. J. Duct liner shall be provided as follows: A. Minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in conditioned spaces. B. Minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in unconditioned spaces, such as ceiling plenum space. C. Minimum installed R-value of 12 or greater when ducts are located outdoors. 3.04 EXPOSED DUCTWORK LOCATED INDOORS A. Round duct routed exposed shall be double wall with solid inner liner and 1-1/2" thick layer of glass mineral wool insulation as manufactured by United McGill Company model no. Acousti-27 or approved equal. Insulation density shall be a minimum of 1.5 PCF. DUCT INSULATION 23 29 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.05 AIR DEVICE AND MISCELLANEOUS DUCT INSULATION A. The backside of all supply air devices shall be insulated with taped and sealed with external duct wrap equivalent to the insulation specified. B. The contractor shall install an additional layer of 2 inch thick external fiberglass duct wrap on any portion of the supply air, return air, outside air, or exhaust air system that has condensation forming during any period of operation. The insulation shall be taped and sealed and located until all evidence of the condensation had been eliminated at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION 23 29 00 DUCT INSULATION 23 29 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 53 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Provide for the systems as shown. Submit shop drawings of piping systems showing all traps, pipe sizes, and accessories; drawing to be marked "Approved", and signed by a representative of the Application Engineering Department of the condensing unit manufacturer. Pipe sizes shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer. Refer to piping schematic on drawings. 2.02 MATERIAL A. PIPE: Copper ACR tubing. B. FITTINGS: Wrought copper streamlined sweat fitting. C. SOLDER: Sil-Fos, except on valves use solder recommended by valve manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES All accessories shall be UL listed and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 710. A. On systems 7-1/2 tons and larger, each separate refrigerant circuit shall have a separate filter dryer. Each filter dryer shall have a replaceable core and a three valve bypass. The filter drier shall be full line size and installed in the refrigerant liquid line. The filter shall have a minimum 4-3/4 inches diameter shell with removable flange and gasket. Flange shall be tapped for 1/4 inch FPT access valve. Size filter-drier for maximum 2.0 psi pressure drop at evaporator operating temperature. Similar to Mueller Brass Company model Drymaster micro-guard refillable filter series SD-485 through SD19217 or Sporlan catch-all. B. On systems less than 7-1/2 tons, the filter dryer shall be the sealed type sizes as above. One drier per refrigerant circuit. REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 53 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Liquid-Moisture Indicator shall be installed in liquid refrigerant line full line size similar to Mueller Brass Company model "Vuemaster" with soldered ends. D. Thermostatic expansion valve shall have adjustable super heat and be as manufactured by Sporlan. 2.04 EVACUATION Evacuate moisture completely by applying a commercial vacuum pump for a minimum of 24 hours. Moisture indicator shall indicate a completely moisture-free condition at time of final inspection. The vacuum pump shall run until the system indicates a maximum of 35 degrees FDB. The system shall be flushed with the operating refrigerant and the vacuum pump connected and rerun to repeat the evacuation. Evaluation shall be performed under supervision of the Engineer. 2.05 FREON AND OIL A. Contractor shall leave the refrigeration system with a full charge of freon and oil and shall be responsible for the maintenance of a full charge of freon and oil in the systems for a period of one year from date of acceptance. B. Should any leaks in the refrigeration system occur during the guarantee period, the Contractor shall eliminate such leaks and recharge system to a full charge of freon and oil at no cost to the Owner. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment and piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. A. All pipe joints and pipe fittings shall be properly cleaned prior to brazing. B. An inert gas purge (e.g. nitrogen) shall be used during brazing to prevent oxides, which can contaminate system. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 53 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 57 60 HVAC ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof curbs for conventional and pre-engineered metal buildings 2. Equipment supports 3. Adapters 4. Structural platforms 5. Isolation roof curbs and rails B. Related Sections 1. Division 23 - Mechanical 2. Division 26 - Electrical C. This section specifies curbs for mechanical equipment specified by Division 23.These curbs are designed and fabricated as welded single piece units that are structurally designed to span structural framing.They require structural calculations from manufacturer. D. Manufactured curbs are designed, engineered, and fabricated for exact mechanical units selected after bid, and can be designed for compound slops and difficult roofing conditions.There are designs to accommodate each type of roofing condition including standing seam metal roofing. E. Field-fabricated curbs except under special conditions are not acceptable. F. Top of roof curb shall be a minimum of 12 inches above the roofing insulation. Provide sloped curbs to match roof slope G. Structural calculations required for work and for production of required submittals shall be signed and sealed by a structural engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 1. Curbs, equipment rails and supports, and similar items shall be designed in compliance with the applicable building code and the latest additions of ASCE 7, by a structural engineer registered in the state of Texas. 2. Curbs shall meet windstorm standards for Inland zone 1 for 120mph winds at a 3 second gust. H. Provide provisions for wind attachment devices, anchorages and equipment shall be designed and included as integral parts of the products. 1. Coordinate with mechanical equipment manufacturers for requirements, and specific items to be supplied with equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES HVAC ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 57 60-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Reference Standards: Most recent edition at time of Bid B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):ASTM A 653—Standard Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned drawings showing overall layout details,jointing connections, and fasteners. Show adjacent construction including roof deck, roofing system, and equipment. C. Product Data: Published data indicating product characteristics. D. Structural Calculations: Signed and sealed by structural engineer. E. Manufacturer Instructions: Include installation instructions, rough-in dimensions, special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Overlay Coordinating Drawing: Show interface between Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings with applicable roof curbs. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: 1. Design, fabricate, and furnish roof curbs and equipment supports to accurate dimensions, configuration, and structural rigidity to meet requirements for watertight systems, and spanning capacity between structural members at openings in roof deck. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: 1. Able to document minimum 10 years continuous experience designing, manufacturing, and supplying work for this Section. 2. Maintain engineering and design capabilities to furnish customized curbs, and equipment supports. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with provisions of Division 01 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Deliver on pallets or protective packaging with manufacturer's identifying labels legible and intact. C. Store on pallets above water, mud, and dirt, protected from soiling and damage. D. Handle to prevent permanent warping and racking of frame. HVAC ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 57 60-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.7 WARRANTY A. Comply with Warranty provisions specified Division 01. B. Manufacturer: Standard 5 year limited Warranty against defects in labor and workmanship. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof Products, Inc. (RPI) Chattanooga,TN and Phoenix, AZ 1. Tel 1-800-262-6669, Fax: (423) 892-2107, Email: rpicurbs@comcast.net 2. Web Site http://www.rpicurbs.com. B. Curb Technologies, LLC 1. Tel1-334-8826-9538 C. ThyCurb 1. Tel1-972-416-6220 2.2 ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPTMENT SUPPORTS AND MISC. ROOF CURBS (for conventional buildings) A. Frame: 1. Material: ASTM A 653 G90 hot-dipped Galvanized steel a. Minimum 18 gauge or as engineered by manufacturer b. Minimum 18 gauge for curbs supporting HVAC units 2. Corners: Mitered and welded (welds are micro-sealed and prime painted after fabrication). Bolted connections not accepted. 3. Internally reinforced with Galvanized 1 inch by 1 inch by 12 gauge angles for curbs exceeding 3 feet in length. Reinforced internal bulkhead at equipment curbs to support lateral loads. 4. Wood Nailers: Factory installed, pressure treated. Size and width as suitable for support of items installed on curbs. B. Insulation: Factory installed 1-1/2 inch thick three-pound density fiberglass insulation. C. Curb Height: minimum 18 inch (12 inches above finished roof surface). D. Construct curbs to match roof slope with plumb and level top surface for mounting mechanical equipment. E. Gasket: 1/4 inch thick, 1" wide at roof top units and exhaust fans. F. Counter Flashing: 18 gauge Galvanized steel. G. Cants: wood or fiber for built-up or modified bitumen roofing systems (not required for single ply roofing) HVAC ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 57 60-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. RPC-1/ RPES-1 (raised cant style) installs on top of metal decks with insulation. 2. RPC-2/ RPES-2 (canted style) installs on wood roofs without insulation. H. Fabricate platform curbs, adapters, pipe curbs, curb covers, square to round, column and tube counter flashings as necessary for complete watertight systems at roof penetrations. I. All roof curbs are structural and shall include calculations signed and sealed by a registered Structural Engineer. Refer to installation drawings for any additional requirements. If curbs do not span a minimum of two bar joists, only two angles will be required. Coordination with Architect's Structural Engineer for mechanical equipment weight loading on the roof structure shall be by the Contractor and Architect based on approved equipment submittals. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Screws: Fasteners as instructed by manufacturer for pre-engineered metal buildings. 2.4 PLATFORM CURBS A. Structural Platform curbs 1. Material: ASTM A 653 G90 hot-dipped Galvanized steel. a. Minimum 18 gauge or as engineered by manufacturer 2. Corners: Mitered and welded. Bolted and connections are not accepted. 3. Internally reinforced with Galvanized 1 inch by 1 inch by 12 gauge angles for curbs exceeding 3 feet in length. Reinforced internal bulkhead at wider curbs to support lateral loads. 4. Wood Nailers: Factory installed, pressure treated. Size and width as suitable for support of items installed on curbs. 5. Provide%" plywood top with support channels as required. B. Insulation: Factory installed 1-1/2 inch thick three-pound density fiberglass insulation. C. Curb Height: Minimum 12 inch above finished roof. D. Construct curbs to match roof slope with plumb and level top surface for mounting mechanical equipment. E. Counter Flashing: 18 gauge Galvanized steel. F. Cants: Wood or fiber for built-up or modified bitumen roofing systems (not required for single ply roofing) 1. RPPF-1 (raised cant) roof curb installs on top of metal decks with installation. 2. RPPF-2 (canted) roof curb installs on roofs without insulations. 2.5 PIPE CURBS HVAC ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 57 60-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Provide 18 gage Galvanized steel shell, base plate, and counter flashing, with internal reinforcement and factory-installed treated-wood perimeter nailer at top; welded construction. B. Design Basis: "Model RPVP-3"; pipe curb with side outlets. C. 90-degree pipe chase: standard model of Roof Products, Inc.; size as required with mounting flange. D. Cant strip shall be provided an installed by roofing Contractor. E. Pleated and bellows-Type boot flashing; manufacturer's standard products of pleated or stepped EPDM rubber or silicone material; one piece construction sized as necessary for the penetrating work.Acceptance manufactures are: 1. "Dektite"; by ITW Buildex 2. "Deckmate"; by Portal Plus 3. "Alumi-Flash"; by Portal Plus F. Miscellaneous work: 1. Provide all manufacturer's additional items, such as but not limited to platforms, adapters, pipe curbs, curb covers, square to round, column and tube counter flashings as required for a complete and weather-tight installation at each roof accessory. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions ready to receive work of this Section. Do not work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Ensure that all curbs, equipment supports and rails are installed prior to the installation of the steel roof deck. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Contract Document provisions and manufacturer's instructions. Where in conflict,follow the requirements that are more stringent, and verify with Architect before beginning work. B. Anchor products securely to structural substrates, as required by structural design, adequate to withstand imposed loading and lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. C. Equipment Supports: Span minimum two structural members. D. Do not apply load to cantilever exceeding 2 foot length, for equipment supports. HVAC ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 57 60-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Coordinate with installation of roof system as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weather- tight. F. Isolation: where metal surfaces of units are installed in contact with dissimilar metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply Bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation as recommended by metal producer. G. Clean up exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Touch up damaged metal coatings. H. Do not apply load to cantilever exceeding 4 foot lengths for roof curbs. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Replace or repair installations not conforming to specified requirements including installations out of level and out of plumb. 3.4 CLEANING A. Leave installation clean, free of debris and residue resulting from work of this Section. END OF SECTION 23 57 60 HVAC ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 57 60-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 58 54 "DX" FAN COIL UNIT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN COIL UNITS Fan coil units shall be factory built, manufactured as scheduled on drawings. Carrier, York, Trane or McQuay shall be considered as equal, if they comply with the specification and schedule. Special Note: Contractor shall field verify exact clearances required for air handling units. Units shall be field located as required and shop drawings shall indicate final location for approval by Architect/Engineer. A. Furnish and install fan coil units of the type, capacities, ratings and drive motor horsepower shown on the drawings. B. Units shall be factory fabricated, draw-thru type, and shall have fan section, cooling coil section, condensate drain pan, adjustable blower drive with motor on resilient mounted base, vee-belts with guard, filter section, and mixing box (if scheduled) assembled as integrated air handling units. C. REQUIREMENTS: 1. Mill-galvanized steel, rigidly framed, braced, and reinforced; access panels each side of unit; minimum panel ga. - 18; minimum weight formed framing member 14 ga. 2. Fan section, cooling coil section, and outlet frame throats shall be internally insulated at the factory with 1" thick, 3/4 PCF density, Neoprene coated fiberglass cemented in place with water-proof adhesive, having fire-retardant characteristics in accordance with NFPA 90A. 3. Drain pan shall be not lighter than 14 ga.; extend completely under the coil section and be all-galvanized,foam insulated pan with drain connections. 4. When the fan coil unit is installed above an accessible ceiling, the unit shall incorporate a secondary drain pan. The secondary pan shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet metal, 16 gauge minimum with cross breaking sloped towards DX" FAN COIL UNIT 23 58 54-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a drain. The sides shall be a minimum 2" tall and the corners shall be soldered watertight. The top edge shall have a 1/4" hem to provide additional rigidity and the secondary pan shall be supported at a minimum of six points. The pan shall extend on all sides a minimum of 3" beyond the sides of the unit casing. Route the secondary drain piping to a conspicuous location or install a float switch at the low point in the secondary pan. The secondary pan should be sloped a minimum of 1/8" per foot and supported so that the unit is not in contact with the bottom of the secondary pan. 5. The fan section, including wheels, shafts, bearings, drive, etc., shall be statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly, and the shaft shall not pass through the first critical speed, while accelerating from rest to operating speed. Submittal data shall state the first critical shaft speed. Shaft bearings shall be of vacuum de-gassed steel, and shall be selected for 200,000 hours average life. 6. Coil shall be as hereinafter specified. 2.02 COILS A. Cooling coils shall be cartridge type and, when mounted in air handling units, shall be removable from either end. Coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins and shall be designed for even distribution of air across the face of the coils; air shall not pass around coil frames: Coils shall have same end connection for DX or chilled water piping. B. DX refrigerant coils shall be counter-flow refrigerant to air, shall have inlet and outlet connections permanently marked shall have thermostatic expansion valves with adjustable super heat. C. Maximum face velocity across cooling coils shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on schedule. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. END OF SECTION DX" FAN COIL UNIT 23 58 54-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 67 10 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. Air-cooled condensing unit shall be designed for use with split system having a remote direct-expansion (DX) cooling coil mounted in evaporator fan unit. Capacity shall be as called for on the drawings when matched to the appropriate evaporator coil. B. Condensing unit shall consist of high-efficiency hermetic compressor, air-cooled condenser with quiet fan, factory wired controls, R-410a refrigerant and refrigeration circuit and valves. C. Cabinet shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel with bonding primer and baked-enamel finish coat. The entire cabinet shall be protected from rust. D. Compressor shall be protected from excessive current and temperatures and shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled crankcase heater to operate only when needed for protection of the compressor. Compressor shall be spring-mounted on rubber isolators. Compressor shall be located in compartment isolated from condenser fan and coil. Provide a high-capacity dryer in the system to remove moisture and dirt. E. Condenser fan shall be directly connected to a weather-protected, quiet, high-efficiency motor. Fan guard shall be provided and shall be protected from rust by PVC finish. Condenser coil shall be aluminum fin with copper tube. F. Connections for refrigerant suction and liquid lines shall be extended outside the cabinet and provided with service valves with gauge connections. G. Power connections shall be made to the connectors located inside the electrical connection box. AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 67 10-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 H. Standard operating and safety controls shall include high-pressure switch, low pressure switch, compressor overload service, and solid-state timed-off control. I. All components (parts and labor) of the sealed refrigeration circuit shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five years. 2.02 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT A. Auxiliary equipment shall consist of refrigerant lines prepared for the unit involved. These lines shall be cleaned, dried, and pressurized at the factory. B. Low ambient kit to allow operation at outside temperature below 35 deg. F (2 deg. C) shall be provided. C. Expansion valve shall be provided with the evaporator coil. D. Provide thermostat to match the requirements of the job. Thermostat shall provide subbase with Heat-Cool-Off and Fan On-Auto switch. See section on controls for other related requirements. E. Provide polyethylene structural base designed for that service and intended to support the unit and eliminate vibration transmission. F. Provide hard-start kit with unit. G. Provide guards for condenser coils. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Condensing unit shall be the make and model number shown on the drawings or acceptable equivalents by Lennox, Carrier,York, or Trane. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the condensing unit on proper foundation as shown on the drawings, and in location that will not restrict the air entry or discharge from the unit. B. Install refrigerant lines as recommended by the manufacturer, taking care not to lose the refrigerant charge contained in the lines, or allow air to enter the lines or equipment. Locate the lines in such a way as to not obstruct access to the condensing unit or other equipment. Lines located under ground or under concrete shall be installed in a PVC pipe conduit for protection. AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 67 10-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Provide electrical connections as required by the applicable codes. Provide control wiring required. All power wiring and control wiring shall be in conduit and located so as not to obstruct access to the unit or other equipment. 3.04 TESTING A. Operate the condensing unit and the system to assure that unit is operating properly and without excessive noise and vibration. B. Read and record the power draw and the refrigeration suction and liquid pressures as required by Balancing and Test, Section 239900. END OF SECTION AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 67 10-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 78 00 ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS ELECTRIC COOLING -GAS HEATING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS A. Rooftop unit shall be packaged and include electric cooling and gas-fired heat, with capacity and steps of cooling and heating as shown on the drawings. B. Unit shall be factory-charged and tested, shall be UL-labeled and ARI-certified by Standard 210 and 270, and shall be AGA-certified. C. Unit casing shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel or heavy-gauge aluminum with protective coat of baked enamel. Weatherproof access panels shall be provided for access to all parts requiring service. D. Compressor(s) shall be sealed or serviceable hermetic type and shall be resiliently mounted to avoid vibration and noise. Compressor shall be provided with antislugging protection, crankcase heater, and time delay on recycling of the compressor. Two internal compressor motor thermal cutouts and a hot gas cutout shall protect the compressor in addition to high-pressure and low-pressure safeties. Standard controls shall permit operation down to 35 deg. F (2 deg. C), and compressor shall be locked out below this temperature. E. Condenser fan(s) shall be direct-driven for the shaft of the slow-speed motor, which shall be designed for operation exposed to the weather. F. Condenser coils shall have a subcooling section. G. Refrigerant circuit shall include filter dryer, moisture indicator, sight glass, and gauge ports. H. Filter rack shall be provided for filters 2 in. thick and shall filter both outdoor air and return air. See Section 15885 of these Specifications for type of filters and the number ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS ELECTRIC COOLING-GAS HEATING 23 78 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 of filter changes to be furnished with the equipment. I. Evaporator fan shall be quiet-type centrifugal blower, directly connected to an adjustable-speed motor or belt driven with an adjustable-pitch pulley on the motor. J. Heat exchanger shall be aluminized steel, designed for long life and quiet operation. Burner shall provide dependable and quiet ignition in the stages as called for. K. Gas burner controls shall provide automatic safety pilot, dual automatic gas valves, manual gas cock, and pressure regulator. Ignition shall be electric for the intermittent pilot with 100%shutoff when the unit is off. L. Induced draft blower shall provide prepurge and shall be provided with a proving switch to prevent burner operation if venter is not in operation. M. Provide fan switch and limit control to delay the fan until heat is available and to continue fan operation until heat is dispersed. Limit switch shall shut the burner down in case of failure of operating controls. 2.01 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT A. Condenser coil guards shall be provided. B. Roof mounting frame shall be provided for all units mounted on the roof. Frame shall be approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association. Provide all necessary flashing and counterflashing. C. Provide economizer dampers and controls to provide "free cooling" from 0 to 100% outdoor air (CIA) when the outside air humidity and temperature are acceptable. Provide CIA, return air, and relief air dampers in a factory-provided enclosure. All air shall be filtered and bird screen shall be installed. A solid state enthalpy changeover control shall determine the capability of the outside air to provide free cooling. The control package shall include a differential enthalpy sensor in the return air duct to compare the enthalpy of the outside air and return air and use the air with the lowest enthalpy for free cooling or assisting the mechanical cooling. The cooling control sequence is as follows: 1. The changeover control determines if the outdoor air is suitable for free cooling. 2. The space thermostat determines if cooling is needed in the building. If so, 3. The actuator modulates the outdoor air and return air dampers to maintain the desired mixed air temperature. 4. The second cooling stage of the space thermostat energizes the compressor to assist the economizer if required. 5. If the outdoor air is not suitable for free cooling, the outdoor air damper remains in the minimum ventilation position and the compressor is energized when space cooling is required. D. Provide a warm-up thermostat to prevent the CIA dampers from opening if the return air temperature is below the set point (65 deg. F) (18 deg. C). ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS ELECTRIC COOLING-GAS HEATING 23 78 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Provide necessary controls for operation of the compressor below the normal temperature of the compressor cutout. Operation shall be permitted down to temperature specified on drawings. F. Provide factory-trained service person to check out the system, calibrate the controls, and see that the RTU is operating properly. The service person making the settings shall make a written report to the engineer and the owner with all set points listed for future reference. G. Rooftop units mounted on slabs or other fixed locations shall be provided with adapters for end discharge and return to the unit. H. Provide thermostat and other controls required to produce the control functions called for. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Roof top unit shall be the make and model number shown on the schedule on the drawings, or acceptable equivalents be Carrier, Lennox,Trane, or York. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the curb as required by the job conditions and as recommended by the manufacturer, and install proper flashing and counterflashing. See details on the drawings. B. Set the unit in place, taking care to protect the adjacent roofing, and connect the supply and return ductwork. C. Make electrical and gas line connections, taking care that these do not block access to any part of the equipment requiring service. D. Have the factory service person check out the unit and make a written report. Place the unit in service. E. Connect full size condensate drain pipe to roof top unit and extend to nearest drain. Pipe shall be schedule 40 galvanized with malleable iron screwed fittings. 3.02 BALANCING AND TEST A. Operate the roof top unit and check for proper supply air quantity, noise, and proper operation. B. Report the airflow, static pressure, voltage and current draw of each item, refrigerant pressure readings, etc., as required by Section 239900 of these Specifications. This ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS ELECTRIC COOLING-GAS HEATING 23 78 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 system is not complete until these readings have been made, submitted to the engineer, and accepted. END OF SECTION ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS ELECTRIC COOLING-GAS HEATING 23 78 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 86 00 POWER VENTILATORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Centrifugal roof ventilators. B. Ceiling and inline ventilators. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500—Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 231700—Motors and Motor Controllers C. Section 232400—Sound and Vibration Control D. Section 239510—Controls E. Section 239900—Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators." B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled. C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." F. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal. G. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51- Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 2. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following: a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan sound power ratings. C. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. d. Materials gages and finishes, include color charts. e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. f. Full color paint samples. 3. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections. 4. Coordination drawings, in accordance with Division 23 Section "Basic Materials and Methods", for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the following: a. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. b. Ceiling suspension members. C. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. d. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. e. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels,and special moldings. 6. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. 7. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer, certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 8. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 23 Section "Basic Materials and Methods". 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Fans shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer's instructions. B. B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions. POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,with protective crating and covering. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ACME, Inc. B. Loren Cook Company C. Greenheck Fan Corporation D. Substitutions under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished with indicated capacities and characteristics. B. Fans and Shafts shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. C. Provide factory baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. Color shall be verified during the submittal process. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Fan shall be a spun aluminum, centrifugal, roof mounted, direct driven or belt driven as indicated. B. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. C. The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. The aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. The discharge baffle conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections. POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. These components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate and shall be shipped in transit tested packaging. D. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA standard 204-96, balance quality and vibration levels for fans. E. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. F. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. G. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing,factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable% inch mesh, 16 gauge,aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base,factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb base. 5. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, 12 inch high, heavy-gauge, galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 2 inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2 inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 2.04 CEILING AND INLINE VENTILATORS A. Ceiling and inline ventilators shall be direct drive or belt drive as indicated, centrifugal blower type. Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically balanced. The housing shall be constructed of minimum 20 gauge corrosion resistant galvanized steel and acoustically insulated for quiet operation. Blower and motor assembly shall be easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork. The motor shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall be factory tested prior to shipment. The ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a powder-painted white steel grille. B. Ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air and Sound Performance. Ventilator performance shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be based on tests and POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 311 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Ventilators shall be UL listed and CSA certified. C. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 1. Dampers: a. Aluminum backdraft damper. b. Motor-operated volume control damper. C. U.L. listed ceiling radiation damper for ceiling fans comply with NFPA Standard 90A rated for 3 hours. 2. Disconnect Switch: Fans less than one horsepower, provide nonfusible type with thermal overload protection. Fans greater than one horsepower, disconnect shall be provided by Division 26. 3. Speed Controls: Fan mounted, solid state speed controller. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION 23 86 00 POWER VENTILATORS 23 86 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 88 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ceiling air diffusers. B. Wall registers and grilles. C. Louvers. D. Other air devices indicated on drawings and schedules. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500— Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 238900— Metal Ductwork C. Section 239100— Ductwork Accessories D. Section 239900—Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution devices of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 5. NFPA Compliance: Install air distribution devices in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air distribution devices including the following: AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 88 10-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Schedule of air distribution devices indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air distribution devices, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air distribution devices furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air distribution devices, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver air distribution devices wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air distribution devices in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warrant the installation of the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from defective or nonconforming workmanship. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 DIFFUSER ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Titus Company B. Price C. Nailor Industries D. Krueger E. Substitutions under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 88 10-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air devices when shown of size, shape, capacity, type and accessories indicated on drawings and schedules, constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation and proper air distribution. B. Provide air devices that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer's current data. C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, the finish shall be#26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100 hour ASTM D117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied. D. Provide air device with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling or wall system, and that are specially manufactured to fit into the wall construction or ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction and ceiling systems. E. Provide integral volume damper with roll formed steel blades where indicated on drawings or schedules. Dampers shall be opposed blade design with a screw driver slot or a concealed lever operator for adjustment through the face of the air device. F. Air devices designated for fire rated systems shall be pre-assembled with UL classified radiation damper and thermal blanket. Fire rated air devices shall be shipped completely assembled; one assembly per carton. Each assembly shall be enclosed in plastic shrink wrap with installation instructions. 2.03 LOUVERS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's rain resistant Hurricane rated louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. B. Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule. C. Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate. D. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 88 10-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin Manufacturing Company 2. Greenheck Company 3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 4. Substitutions under provisions of Division 1. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 All interior surfaces of all air devices shall be painted flat black. 3.02 See floor plans for type, neck size and CFM of air for all air distribution devices. 3.03 Install all air distribution devices as detailed on plans and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 23 88 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 88 10-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 88 85 AIR FILTERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTERS A. The filters shall be AAF Flanders Mini-Pleat Filters or approved equal. B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: The following manufacturers are approved subject to specification compliance. 1. AAF Flanders 2. American Air Filter. 3. Airguard Industries, Inc. 4. Cambridge. 2.02 LOW VELOCITY FILTER SECTION - MERV 8 FILTERS A. Filters shall be of the throwaway cartridge type in 24 inches X 24 inches with 2 inch frames. When installing multiple filters into slide-in frames tape adjacent filters together with duct tape to prevent bypassing of air around the filter. Media shall be rated at 500 feet per minute. B. Filtering media shall be formed of non-woven reinforced cotton fabric type filtering media bonded to 96% open area media support grid folded into a non-creased radial pleat design. The filter pack shall be bonded to the inclosing frame to prevent air bypass. Average efficiency shall be 25-30% on ASHRAE test standard 52.2. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.20 inches water gauge at 350 FPM face velocity. 2.03 LOW VELOCITY RIGID BOX FILTER SECTION - MERV 13 FILTERS A. Filters shall be of the throwaway cartridge type in 24 inches X 24 inches with 4 inch frames. When installing multiple filters into slide-in frames tape adjacent filters together with duct tape to prevent bypassing of air around the filter. Media shall be AIR FILTERS 23 88 85-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 rated at 500 feet per minute. B. Filtering media shall be formed of microglass paper with a water repellent binder type filtering media bonded to an open area media support grid folded into a non-creased radial pleat design. The filter pack shall be bonded to the inclosing frame to prevent air bypass. Average efficiency shall be 85% at 0.5 microns on ASHRAE test standard 52.2. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.15 inches water gauge at 500 FPM face velocity. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install differential pressure switch to activate "Filter Dirty" light when pressure difference across filters reaches 0.5 inch W.G. (adjustable). Locate "filter dirty" lights in mechanical rooms with identifying label B. Install and relocate filters in the mechanical or the storage room in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Refer to Section 230500 for additional filter information. END OF SECTION 23 88 85 AIR FILTERS 23 88 85-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 89 00 METAL DUCTWORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ductwork. B. Medium and high pressure ductwork. C. Casings. D. Duct cleaning. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500- Basic Material and Methods. B. Section 231400-Supports and Anchors. C. Section 232900- Duct Insulation. D. Section 239100- Ductwork Accessories. E. Section 238810-Air Distribution Devices. F. Section 239900-Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with latest SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems", and NFPA 96 Standard. 4. IECC 2015: Comply with the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code. 1.04 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, duct fabrication standards and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work. C. The contract documents are schematic in nature and are to be used only for design intent. The contractor shall prepare sheet metal shop drawings,fully detailed and drawn to scale, indicating all structural conditions, all plumbing pipe and light fixture coordination, and all offsets and transitions as required to permit the duct to fit in the space allocated and built. All duct revisions required as a result of the contractor not preparing fully detailed shop drawings will be performed at no additional cost. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain indicated clear size inside lining. Where offsets or transitions are required, the duct shall be the equivalent size based on constant friction rate. B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: % inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 1,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 1,500 fpm, and 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm. Low pressure ductwork shall be defined as all return, exhaust, and outside air ducts associated with constant volume air handling units with a scheduled external static pressure of less than 1.5", and all supply ductwork downstream of terminal units in variable volume systems. C. Medium Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 3 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm but less than 3,000 fpm, 4 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 3,000 fpm but less than 4,000 fpm, and 6 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 4,000 fpm. Medium pressure ductwork shall be defined as all supply ducts extending from variable volume air handling units to terminal units in variable volume systems with air handling units having a scheduled external static pressure of less than 4". The supply ductwork of Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 constant volume air handling units having scheduled external static pressure greater than 2" and less than 4" shall be rated for medium pressure. D. High Pressure: 10 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 6,000 fpm. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings, use sheet metal end caps on any lined duct exposed to the weather and use 3 mil vinyl wrap with duct tape on end pieces where stored inside. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. B. Sheet Metal.: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A167;Type 316; with No. 4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation. D. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209,Alloy 3003,Temper H14. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: Non combustible and conforming to UL 181, Class 1 air duct materials. B. Flexible Ducts: Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Type 8M or approved equal, corrosive resistant galvanized steel formed and mechanically locked to inner fabric with factory wrapped insulation blanket with aluminum vapor barrier and an R-6 thermal conductance. Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 Flexible duct shall have reinforced metalized outer jacket comply with UL 181, Class 1 air duct. Equivalent manufactures are Thermaflex. C. Sealants: Hard-Cast "iron grip" or approved equal, non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive and shall not be a solvent curing product. Sealants shall be compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape or heavy mastic. D. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials. 2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials. 2.03 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with latest SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by approved shop drawings. Obtain engineer's approval prior to using round duct in lieu of rectangular duct. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Use crimp joints with bead for joining round duct sizes 6 inch smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.04 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1% times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil- turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is required, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. Weld in place. C. Transform duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence and 30 degrees convergence. D. Fabricate continuously welded medium and high pressure round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. 2.05 CASINGS A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and construct for operating pressures indicated. B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields. C. Reinforce doorframes with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. Provide clear wire glass observation ports, minimum 6 X 6 inch size. D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back facing and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cubic foot minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of ductwork at beginning of installation. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. D. Connect terminal units to medium or high pressure ducts with four feet maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 6 feet maximum, 4 feet minimum, length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. G. The interior surface of all ductwork shall be smooth. No sheet metal parts, tabs, angles, or anything else may project into the ducts for any reason, except as specified to be so. All seams and joints shall be external. H. All ductwork located exposed on roof shall be "crowned" to prevent water from ponding. Ref: Insulation for additional requirements. I. Where ducts pass through floors, provide structural angles for duct support. Where ducts pass through walls in exposed areas, install suitable sheet metal escutcheons as closers. J. All angles shall be carried around all four sides of the duct or group of ducts. Angles shall overlap corners and be welded or riveted. K. All ductwork shall be fabricated in a manner to prevent the seams or joints being cut for the installation of grilles, registers, or ceiling outlets. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Determine the minimum length of flexible duct needed for each connection. Excess flex causing tight bends and increased pressure drops are not acceptable. Do not exceed 6'- 0" extended length. B. Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's, "HVAC Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". C. Cut outer vapor barrier and insulation. Fold back insulation and outer vapor barrier to expose inner core. Using sheet metal snips, cut the inner core. D. Connect the inner core to the tap or collar by pulling it a minimum of 1" over the collar. Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 E. Where collars are less than 1" in length, i.e. diffusers, connect a separate collar to the existing collar and proceed as described in 3.02.0 above. F. Wrap the core twice with UL181 Tape over the collar. Secure the connection by placing a clamp over the tap or collar, UL listed Panduit clamps for collars with beads and Stainless Steel clamps for collars without beads are acceptable. G. Roll the insulation and vapor barrier back over the collar or tap as described in 3.02.0 above and wrap twice with UL181 Tape. H. Secure the outer vapor barrier with a clamp as described in 3.02.F above if desired. I. For Medium to High Pressure applications, use duct sealer for 3.02.F and 3.02.G in lieu of UL181 Tape. J. Flexible duct shall be hung with proper support to minimize sagging and snaking between supports. Maximum of 4'-0" between supports. Hanger material will be a minimum of 1 1/2"wide. K. Supports will be used before all vertical 90° bends to prevent sagging and ensure a 1.5 center line turn radius of flexible duct. 3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIT CASINGS A. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. 3.04 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply Steel Return and Relief Steel General Exhaust Steel Outside Air Intake Steel Combustion Air Steel 3.05 3.06 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 A. All ductwork shall be properly suspended or supported from the building structure. Hangers shall be galvanized steel straps or hot-dipped galvanized rod with threads pointed after installation. Strap hanger shall be attached to the bottom of the ductwork, provide a minimum of two screws one at the bottom and one in the side of each strap on metal ductwork. The spacing, size and installation of hangers shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the latest SMACNA edition. B. All duct risers shall be supported by angles or channels secured to the sides of the ducts at each floor with sheet metal screws or rivets. The floor supports may also be secured to ducts by rods, angles or flat bar to the duct joint or reinforcing. Structural steel supports for duct risers shall be provided under this Division. 3.07 DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS A. Seal all non-welded duct joints and seams with duct sealant as indicated. All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections in metallic and non-metallic ducts shall be constructed as per specified in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible. All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections shall be sealed in accordance with the International Energy Conservation Code 2018 edition. 3.08 AIR DUCT LEAKAGE: (From SMACNA Duct Standards 3rd Edition) Test all ductwork (designed to handle over 1000 CFM) as follows: A. Test apparatus The test apparatus shall consist of: 1. A source of high pressure air--a portable rotary blower or a tank type vacuum cleaner. 2. A flow measuring device consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U-tube manometers. B. Test Procedures 1. Test for audible leaks as follows: 2. Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test apparatus to the duct by means of a section of flexible duct. a. Start the blower with its control damper closed. b. Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 1.5 times the standard designed duct operating pressure. C. Survey all joint for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealants have set. 3. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the remaining leakage should be Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows: a. Start blower and open damper until pressure in duct reaches 50% in excess of designed duct operating pressure. b. Read the pressure differential across the orifice on manometer No. 2. If there is no leakage,the pressure differential will be zero. C. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed one (1) percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. d. Even though a system may pass the measured leakage test, a concentration of leakage at one point may result in a noisy leak which, must be corrected. 4. Test Witness a. Air duct leakage test shall be witnessed by Owner/Engineer. b. The Architect or duly authorized construction inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test. END OF SECTION 23 89 00 Metal Ductwork 23 89 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23176 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 9100 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Volume control dampers. B. Round Duct Taps. C. Fire dampers. D. Combination fire and smoke dampers. E. Back draft dampers. F. Air turning devices. G. Flexible duct connections. H. Duct access doors. I. Duct test holes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 232400—Sound &Vibration Control. B. Section 238900— Metal Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A- Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA- Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. C. UL 33- Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers duct access doors duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 91 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300, for fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gauges heavier for sizes over 24 inches. C. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/2 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint, action flanged bushing, with set screw. D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 24 inch. E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. 1. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 2. On outside air, return air, and all other dampers required to be low leakage type, provide galvanized blades and frames, seven inches wide maximum, with replaceable vinyl, EPDM, silicone rubber seals on blade edges and stainless steel side seals. Provide blades in a double sheet corrugated type construction for extra strength. Provide hat channel shape frames for strength and blade linkage enclosure to keep linkage out of the air stream. Construction leakage not to exceed 1/2%, based on 2,000 fpm and 4 inch static pressure. F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 2.02 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. Taps to trunk duct for round flexible duct shall be spin-in fitting with locking quadrant butterfly damper, model no. FLD-1303 by Flexmaster or approved equal. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 91 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 DAMPERS A. Greenheck B. Louvers and Dampers Inc. C. Ruskin. D. Nailor Industries. 2.04 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. B. Provide curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream. C. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers per U.L. with 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. D. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.05 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL555 and UL 555S, and as indicated. B. Provide factory sleeve for each damper. Install damper operator on exterior of sleeve and link to damper operating shaft. C. Fabricate with multiple blades with 16 gauge galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft. 1. Operators shall be spring return electric type suitable to operate on 120 V AC, 60 cycle. 2. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled. D. See smoke dampers for details and accessories to be included 2.06 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 91 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Motorized Smoke Dampers: normally open with power on, close automatically when power is interrupted, UL-listed and labeled damper and damper operator. Unit shall close upon actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally. C. Electro thermal Link: Fusible link which melts when subject to local heat of 165 degrees F and from external electrical impulse; UL listed and labeled. D. Each smoke damper and combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with end position indicators for remote indication of damper blade position. E. Furnish each smoke damper with a duct mounted smoke detector and sensing tube for proper operation of smoke damper. Duct smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectronic type. Sensing tube shall run the entire width of the duct and comply with manufactures instructions. Smoke detector and sensing tube shall be furnished and factory installed by the damper manufacture. 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Greenheck B. American Warming and Vent. C. Louvers and Dampers Inc. D. Ruskin. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.08 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS. A. Gravity back draft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers of 16 gauge galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Young Regulator. B. Titus. C. Tuttle and Bailey. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 91 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.10 AIR TURNING DEVICES A. On duct sizes less than 12 x 12, multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with worm drive mechanism with 18 inch long removable key operator. 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Metaledge. B. Ventglass. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. 2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Greenheck B. Ruskin. C. Titus. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.14 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 91 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 insulation with sheet metal cover. Insulation shall be replaceable without field cutting or patching. D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.15 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Balancing Dampers 1. Provide at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. 2. All regulators mounted on externally insulated ductwork shall have 16 gauge elevated platforms at least 1/8 inch higher than the thickness of the insulation. Damper shaft shall have Ventlock No. 607 bearing mounted on ductwork within elevated platform. If duct is inaccessible the operating handle shall be extended and the regulator installed on the face of the wall or ceiling. Where regulators are exposed in finished parts of the building, they shall be flush type, Ventlock No. 666. All regulators shall be manufactured by Ventlock, or approved equal. 3. All dampers in lined ductwork shall have bushing to prevent damper damage to liner. 4. Provide cable extensions with adjustable regulators and cover plate for dampers located in locations not accessible such as behind sheetrock ceilings. Regulators shall be equivalent to Young's Regulator. C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 91 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. E. Provide back draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. F. Provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Provide at least one inch slack at all flexible duct connections. G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils,fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. H. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. END OF SECTION 23 9100 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 91 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 23 99 00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the contract and general requirements in Division 1 apply to work specified in all section of Division 23. B. All Division 23 specification sections, drawings, and general provisions of the contract apply to work of this section, as do other documents referred to this section. C. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. D. Requirements for submittals, shop drawings, and substitutions, Division 1, Section 013000 and 016000, apply to work specified in all sections of Division 23. E. The basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. The publications listed below from a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE CONCIL(AABC) (2002) National Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems NATIONAL EVROMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB) (1998) National Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems (1994) Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration B. TAB shall be preformed in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e.,AABC or NEBB procedural standards, unless otherwise specifies herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB standard shall be considered mandatory.The provisions of the TAB Standard, including checklists, report forms, etc. Shall, as nearly as practical, be used to satisfy the Contract requirements.The TAB standard shall be used for all aspects of TAB, including qualifications,for the TAB Firm and Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 stringent than those listed in the TAB Standard,the manufacture's recommendations shall be adhered to. All quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the TAB standard TAB procedures shall be developed by the TAB Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc. applicable to the Contact requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC or NEBB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be considered mandatory. C. The TAB contractor shall submit all questions regarding interpretations and questions regarding these standards in writing or as required by documents to the A/E team who shall provide formal reply in ka reasonable time. Decisions of the A/E team shall be final. 1.03 DEFINITIONS AND SIMILAR TERMS A. In some instances,terminology differs between the Contract TAB Standard primarily because the intent of this section is to use the industry standards specified, along with the additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results.The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent the corresponding AABC or NEBB where differences. CONTRACT TERM AABC TERM NEBB TERM TAB Standard National Standard Procedural Standards Testing and Balancing for Testing Adjusting Heating, Ventilating, and Environmental System Air Conditioning System TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor System Readiness Construction Phase Field Readiness Check Inspection Check& Preliminary Field Procedures 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. The TAB of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an independent, impartial technical firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB, and is not a part or subsidiary of any other project contractor or subcontractor,to include, but not limited to General Contractor, and Mechanical; Contractor.The TAB work will be done under the direct supervision of qualified Professional Engineer employed as a full time employee of TAB firm. B. The TAB agency shall be either a member of AABC or certified by the NEBB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR PERSONAL: Submit evidence to show that the people who shall be in charge of correcting deficiencies for balancing the systems are qualified. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to require that the originally approved personal be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in the Owner and Engineer's opinion, the original personnel are not qualified to properly place the system in condition for balancing. D. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of specified herein. If, for any reason,the firm losses subject certification during this period,the Contractor shall immediately execute each certifying agency's applicable Performance Guaranty,then immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB firm for approval, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. Any firm that has been the subject to disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding the contract award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems including TAB. All work specified in this section and in other related sections to be performed by the TAB firm shall be considered invalid if the TAB firm losses its certification prior to contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representative.The TAB firm shall have an occupied office within 100 miles of the project site. E. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM PERSONAL: 1. A minimum of one registered Professional Engineer, licensed in the State the work is performed, is required to be in permanent employment of the firm. 2. The TAB Specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the firm certified by NEBB.The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If,for any reason the Specialist losses subject certification during this period,the Contractor shall immediately execute each certifying agency's applicable Performance Guaranty,then immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Specialist for approval, at no additional cost to Project Owner,Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding the contract award shall not be eligible performed any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this section and other related sections to be performed by the TAB Specialist shall be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist losses certification prior to the contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor, at no additional cost to the Project Owner,Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. 3. Personal used on the job site shall be either Professional Engineers or technicians, who shall have been permanent,full time employees of the firm for a minimum of six months prior to the start of work for that specified project. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4. Evidence shall be submitted to show that the personal who actually balanced the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) shall be required. F. ACCEPTABLE TAB FIRMS SHALL INCLUDE: 1. PHI Service Agency (361-248-4861) 2. Engineering Air Balance Company(210-736-9494) 3. Testing Specialties (210-492-8885) 4. TCx Synergy(361-960-3475) 1.05 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor will contract with a professional TAB firm under the provisions of paragraph 1.04 of this section. B. The TAB firm will be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the data on the performance of fans, dampers in the duct system, and air distribution devices.The Contactor and the various subcontractors of the equipment installed shall cooperate with the TAB firm to furnish necessary data on the design and proper applications of the system components and provide labor ad material required to eliminate deficiencies or poor performance. D. The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, instruments, and tools required in testing, adjusting, and balancing the HVAC systems, as described in these specifications or shown on accompanying drawings. Services shall include checking equipment performance,taking specified measurements, recording and reporting the results.The items requiring testing, adjusting, and balancing include the following(as applicable to contract drawings): AIR SYSTEMS Air Handling Units Packaged Units Exhaust Fans VAV Terminal Units Diffusers, Registers, &Grilles Coils (Air Temperature) DX Refrigerant Systems Refrigerant Pressures Suction/Liquid Refrigerant Temperature Measurements (Sat Suction, Suction Line, SuperHeat, Liquid Sat, Liquid Line TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Subcooling Temp, and Discharge Line Temp) PLUMBING SYSTEMS Recirc Pumps Mixing Valves Circuit Setters 1.06 SUBMITTALS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The name of the selected AABC or NEBB certified firm shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 30 days after contract award. B. Within 30 days after the award of contract,the TAB firm shall submit for approval an organizational chart and proof of current certification which shall identify all AABC or NEBB certified Supervisors or Specialist.The TAB firm shall submit a company resumes listing personal and project experience in air and hydronic system balancing. TAB firm will also provide information showing successful completion for three similar scope projects for which the firm is being contracted. C. Within 30 days after the award of contract,the TAB firm will submit for approval the name of the TAB Specialist and/or Professional Engineer,who will have direct supervision of all TAB related labor through completion of project. D. Within 30 days after the award of contract the TAB firm shall submit TAB procedures and agenda proposed to be used. E. Within 30 days after the award of contract, but prior to TAB field measurements,the TAB firm shall submit sample report forms, sample report forms, which shall include minimum data required by either the AABC or NEBB National Standards. F. Within 15 days of notification of approval of TAB firm and TAB Specialist by engineer,TAB firm shall conduct a Design Review of contract drawings and submit a Design Review report. G. Proposed date and time for execution of Systems Readiness Inspection shall be submitted no later than 7 days prior to inspection. A copy of the Systems Readiness Inspection Report shall be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard. H. Proposed date and time to begin field measurements, making adjusting, ext., for the TAB report, shall be submitted with the Systems Readiness Inspection Report. I. Six (6) copies of the completed TAB Report shall be submitted for approval no later than 7 days after the execution of TAB.All copies of TAB Report shall be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 J. Proposed date and time to begin TAB Completion Verification, shall be submitted with the TAB Report. Six (6) copies of TAB Completion Verification Report shall be submitted no later than 7 days after execution of TAB verification. K. Proposed date and time for execution of Opposite Season Inspection shall be submitted no later than 7 days prior to inspection. 1.07 INSTRUMENTATION A. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibrated.TAB firm shall submit list of all instruments, to include gauges,thermometers, flow measuring hoods, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system.The list will indicate name of equipment,function, model number, serial number, date of the last calibration, and date calibration is due.TAB firm shall submit copies of calibration certificates for all test instruments used showing all devices were properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing.All instruments will be within one year of calibration for duration of the project. If duration of project exceeds the tenure of instrument calibration,then said instrument must be recalibrated, and copy of calibration certificate sent to Engineer, before the instrument is placed into continued use. 1.08 TAB PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. It is the intent of this specification section to provide for a completely tested, adjusted, and balanced (TAB) installation without overlaps or omissions between the installing contractor and the TAB contractor.The installing contractors are those who perform the installation of this work and make all preparations for the TAB contractor who performs the testing, adjusting, and balancing described herein. B. The contactor Manager or General Contractor performing the General construction work shall coordinate the work of the contractors performing the Mechanical, Electrical, Automatic Temperature Control, and TAB work to provide complete properly tested, adjusted, and balanced systems.The Construction Manager or General Manager shall require and provide a start-up report for each piece of equipment furnished. C. The contractor performing the HVAC work shall coordinate all Mechanical work, including Sheet Metal work and Automatic Temperature Controls, to provide a complete, properly tested adjusted and balanced system throughout. He shall furnish progress reports regarding this phase of the work on a regular basis as directed. At such time as the systems are started up,the Contractor performing the Mechanical work shall provide TAB Contractor with documentation that the duct systems have been tested to the satisfaction of the Duct Leak Test Specifications.The Mechanical Contractor shall insure that all comments are installed and operating, and the major components such as fans, pumps, refrigeration machines, and the like are capable of producing the scheduled capacity requirements.The requirement does not relieve the Mechanical Contractor of any other requirements specified elsewhere. Should any of these components or systems not be capable of producing these requirements, he shall make corrections within the limits of his responsibility or as otherwise authorized and shall certify in writing that the systems are ready for final testing and balancing by the Tab contractor. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 D. The contractor performing the Electrical work shall work coordinate all electrical work to provide complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems throughout the project. He shall furnish progress reports on a regular basis as directed. He shall certify in writing when each system is electrically operable, including the check for proper rotation of equipment. E. The Contractor performing the Automatic Temperature Controls work shall coordinate all controls work to provide complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems throughout the project. He shall furnish progress reports on a regular basis as directed. He shall certify in writing when each system is operational from an Automatic Temperature Controls standpoint.This contractor shall also provide to TAB contractor all necessary submittal information, software, and/or personal complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems. F. The TAB contractor shall from the award of contract, begin preparation. PART 2-PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF THE CONTRACTOR A. The drawing and specifications have indicated valves, dampers, and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions, install these devices in a manner that leaves them accessible, provide access as requested by the TAB firm. B. Have systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB firm the project is ready for their services, and certify in writing to the Construction Manager that such a condition exists. C. As a part of the Work of this Section, make changes in the sheaves, belts, and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance of new work as required by TAB firm, at no additional cost to owner. D. Fully examine the existing system to be balanced,to determine, whether or not sufficient volume dampers, balancing valves,thermometers, gauges, pressure in the duct systems, means of determining water flow, and other means of taking data needed for proper water and air balancing are existing. Submit to the Engineer in writing a listing of omitted items considered necessary to balance existing systems. Submit the list and proposal as a cost add item. E. Verify that fresh air louvers are free of blockage, coils are clean and fresh air ducts to each air handling unit has individually adjustable volume regulating dampers. F. Provide correct, repair, or replace deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting, and balancing period. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 G. In order that systems may be properly tested, balanced, and adjusted as specified, operate the systems at no expense for the Owner at the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB period. H. Project Contract completion schedules shall allow time for allowance to permit the successful completion of TAB services to Owner's final inspection and expectance. Complete, operational readiness, prior to commencement of TAB services, shall include the following services of the Contractor: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, window, ceilings, installed and penetrations complete,to obtain project operating conditions. 2. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS: a. Verify installation for conformity to design. Supply, return, and exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as specified. b. Volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside air, return and relief shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation. C. Supply return, exhaust and transfer grilles, registers and diffusers. d. Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, ect., shall be blanked and sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air. e. Fans (supply and exhaust) operating and verified for freedom from vibrations, proper fan rotation and belt tension; overload heater elements shall be of proper size and rating; record motor amperage and voltage and verify that these functions do not exceed nameplate ratings. f. Furnish or revise fan drives or motors as necessary to attain the specified air volumes. 3. WATER CIRCLULATING SYSTEMS a. Position valves pertinent to system design and require operation to permit full flow of water through system components. Operate systems under full flow conditions until circulating water is clean. Remove and clean strainers as required during this cycle of operation. b. Record each pump motor amperage and voltage. Readings shall not exceed nameplate rating. C. Verify, on new equipment, electrical starter overload heater elements to be of proper size and rating. d. Ensure that water circulating systems shall be full of water and free of air; expansion tanks set for proper water level, and air vents installed at high points of systems and operating freely. Advise Owner of deficiencies. e. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements. 4. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS a. Verify that control components are installed in accordance with project documents and functional, electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire and freeze stats. b. Controlling instruments shall be functional and set for design operating conditions. Factory pre-calibration of room thermostats and pneumatic equipment will not be acceptable. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. The temperature shall be regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between the controlling instruments and calibrated by the TAB Contractor. Advise Owner of deficiencies or malfunctions. 3.02 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM A. The TAB firm will act as liaison between the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor and inspect the installation of mechanical piping system, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems being retrofitted, repaired, or added under this Contract.The re-inspection of the Work will cover that part related to proper arrangement and adequate provision for the testing and balancing and will be done when the Work is 80 percent complete. B. Upon completion of the installation and start—up of the mechanical equipment,to check, adjust, and balance system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. Prepare and submit to the Owner complete reports on the balance and operations of the systems. C. Measurements and recorded readings of air, water and electricity that appear in the TAB reports will be done by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB firm. D. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. At the time, make necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of system components to effect the proper conditions as indicated on the Drawings. At time of opposite season check-out,the Owner's representative will be notified before readings and adjustments are made. E. In fan systems,the air quantities indicated on the Drawings may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of two degrees with each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drive and motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner,to attain the specified air volumes. F. The various existing water circulating systems shall be cleaned,filled, purged, of air, and put into operation before hydronic balancing. 3.03 PROFESSIONAL REPORT A. Before the final acceptance of the report is made the TAB will furnish the Owner the following data to be approved by the Owner and Engineer. 1. Summary of main supply, return and exhaust duct pilot tube traverses and fan settings indicating minimum value required to achieve specified air volumes. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation as developed by the Engineer and TAB firm. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply fan exhaust fan,filter, coil, balancing dampers and other components of the systems included in the retrofit TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 Work.These readings will be related to performance curves in terms of the CFM handled if available, 5. Motor current readings at each equipment motor on load side of capacitors.The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. 6. The final report shall certify test methods and instrumentation used,final velocity reading obtained, temperatures, pressure drops, RPM of equipment, amperage of motors, air balancing problems encountered, recommendations and uncompleted punch list items.The test results will be recorded on standard forms. 7. A summary of actual operating conditions shall be included with each system outlining normal and ventilation cycles of operation.The final report will act as a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operating personal. 3.03 BALANCING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM A. GENERAL 1. Place all equipment into full operation, and shall continue the operating during each working day of balancing and testing. If the air conditioning system is balanced during OFF-Peak cooling seasons Balancing Contractor shall return to rebalance air side system as required to put system in proper balance at that time. 2. The contractor shall submit detailed balancing and recording forms for approval. After the approval by the Architect, prepare complete set of forms for recording test data on each system. All Work shall be done under the supervision of Registered Professional Engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated to within 1%of scale and maintained in good working order. 3. Upon completion of the balancing and testing,the Balancing Contractor shall compile the test data in report forms, and forward five copies to the Architect for evaluation 4. The final report shall contain logged results of all tests, including such data as a. Tabulation of air volume at each outlet. b. Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. c. Inside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature in each conditioned space room or area. d. Actual fan capacities and static pressures. Motor current and voltage readings at each fan. B. AIR SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test: 1. Check fan rotation. 2. Check filters (balancing shall be done with clean filters). 3. Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. 4. Test and record motor full load amperes. 5. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. 6. Test and adjust system for design cfm, return air and outside air (+2%). Change out fan sheaves as required to balance system. 7. Test and record entering air temperatures, db and wb. 8. Test and record leaving air temperature, db and wb 9. Adjust all zones to design cfm (+2%). 10. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5%of design. TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. WATER SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test: 1. Check pump operation 2. Check operation of all mixing valves. 3. Test water flow rate at all pumps. Adjust balancing valves as required. 4. Record water temperature entering and leaving the pump and water heater. 5. Record pump suction and discharge pressures. D. DX SYSTEMS: 1. Test and record suction and discharge pressures at each compressor and record ambient air temperature entering the condensing coils. 2. Test and record unit full load amps and voltage. 3. Test and record staging and unloading of unit required by sequence of operation or drawing schedule. E. Automatic temperature controls shall be calibrated and all thermostats and dampers, adjusted so that the control system is in proper operating condition, subject to approval of the Architect. F. The Air Balance Contractor shall report to Engineer all air distribution devices or other equipment that operate noisily so that corrective measures may be implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION 23 99 00 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 23 99 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 260100 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The Contractor shall execute all work as hereinafter specified, as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide complete and functioning systems. All items of labor, material or equipment not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to or necessary for the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings. 1.02 LAWS AND ORDINANCES: A. All work and materials shall conform to the requirements of the federal, state, and local laws and ordinances having jurisdiction at the jobsite. The installation shall be in strict accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The Contractor at no increase in contract price shall make all modifications to the work,which may be required by an authority having legal jurisdiction over the work. 1.03 LICENSES, FEES AND PERMITS: A. The Contractor shall have a Master Electrician license issued by or acceptable to the city in which the work is to be performed. Additionally, and at all times while work is being performed,for every five or less craftsman working on the project site, at least one craftsman shall have a Journeyman Electrician license issued by or acceptable to the city in which the work is to be performed.A city electrical construction permit will be required for this project. 1.04 THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. The drawings and specifications shall be interpreted together, and any and all work included in either,though not in both, shall be part of the contracted work. The drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the project and existing job site conditions will permit. Any changes due to equipment supplied, conflict with the work of other trades or to make this work conform to the National Electrical Code shall be made by the Contractor at no increase in contract price. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS: A. Before submitting his bid,the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize himself with all existing conditions and his bid shall be based on accepting conditions as they exist. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.06 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such materials and equipment. Where two or more units of the same item are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall unload and properly store all electrical materials and equipment delivered to the jobsite. 1.07 UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE: A. The Contractor shall make arrangements for connection with the electrical utility company that will serve the jobsite and shall comply with all the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility company. The Contractor shall examine the site, confer with the utility company and verify the requirements for connections prior to bidding the work. The Contractor shall verify with the utility company the exact location of service tie-in points, cable routes, etc. Failure of the Contractor to contact the utility company and obtain such information prior to bidding the work shall not be considered as a basis for additional compensation. Where outages to existing electrical service are required,the Contractor shall coordinate the timing and duration of such outages with Owner's representative. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install a meter enclosure for the utility company meter.The enclosure and installation shall be in accordance with utility company requirements. 1.08 SAFETY: A. It shall be the responsibility of the electrical Contractor to initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety precautions required by local, state, and federal laws, including OSHA. 1.09 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals for Approval: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 013000 except as otherwise stated herein. 2. Within 30 calendar days after award of contract,the Contractor shall furnish seven (7) sets of drawings and data as described herein for Engineer approval. No item of equipment or material shall be ordered or shipped to the job site until the Engineer has given written approval of the submittal data. 3. The submittal data shall be bound in a 3-ring binder with dividers. The binder shall include a cover and a table of contents with the contractors name as well as the name of the project. All data shall be divided by specification section. 4. The submittal data for each item shall include descriptive literature, performance data, shop drawings technical literature and any other ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 necessary data to readily identify that the equipment will meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. 5. One complete submittal of drawings and data shall be made for all required items. Partial or incomplete submittals will be returned without comment. All copies furnished shall be manufacturer's original copies of good quality, legible photocopies or blue line prints. Copies transmitted by facsimile machine are not acceptable. 6. Submittal documents shall be job specific. Where manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog sheets are provided,they shall be marked to show specifically what is being furnished. Drawings shall be marked to show Owner's name, plant location, project description and equipment designation. 7. Substitutions for specified products shall be in compliance with Paragraph 1.10. 8. The Contractor shall review all manufacturers' submittals for completeness, accuracy and compliance with project specifications before submitting to Engineer. 9. The Engineer will review the complete submittal package and return five (5) sets to the Contractor with individual items marked in one of the following three forms: Reviewed as submitted Reviewed with comments Disapproved Items that are disapproved shall be corrected as required and shall be resubmitted to the Engineer for approval. B. Approval of submittals, etc. shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from further responsibility, but rather as a means to coordinate the work and to aid in the proper selection and installation of the materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of the project. C. Submittal of Record Data: 1. Record Data: Provide seven (7) sets of record data books containing information listed below. The material shall be bound into appropriately sized 3 ring binders, organized with dividers and index sheets. The binders shall be appropriately labeled with the Owner's name, project name and location. The data books shall include: a. Certified as-built shop drawings for all fabricated equipment. b. Approved product data for all items required in Paragraph 1.09A. c. Spare parts lists d. Test records. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Record Drawings: Provide one (1) set of project drawings marked neatly and legibly in colored pencil to show any significant deviation between actual conditions and original design layout. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide seven (7) sets of manufacturer's operation and maintenance data on equipment and components.The data shall be organized into loose-leaf binders with dividers and master index. 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Requirements for Substitutions: It is the intention of the drawings and specifications to establish a definite standard when a particular manufacturer's product is mentioned. Written request for substitutions of equivalent products will be considered provided all the following conditions are met. Substitutions for specified products will not be permitted unless all of the following conditions are met: 1. Written request shall be received in the Engineer's office ten (10) days prior to the day of bid opening. Requests after ten days prior to the day of bid opening will not be considered. 2. Request shall include complete technical data, i.e. product data sheets, curve, ratings, etc. 3. Request shall include a complete written comparison of differences and similarities between the proposed and specified product. Provide a written comparison for each substitution being requested. 4. Space and clearance requirements are adequate for products mentioned. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify space and clearance requirements for products proposed for substitution. 5. If modifications to the drawings and specifications are necessary for the proper installation of a product proposed for substitution,the request shall explain such in detail, accompanied by drawings if necessary. B. Approval: If the above has been complied with, and in the Engineer's opinion the product proposed for substitution is equivalent to that mentioned, the product will be approved for substitution and all prospective bidders will be so notified. 1.11 PROTECTION: A. All new work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times to prevent damage or breakage, either in transit, storage, installation or testing. All openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All materials and equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt,water, chemical or mechanical injury. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters, cribbing of any apparatus above floor construction and covering of apparatus in incomplete buildings with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Temporary electric heaters ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 shall be installed to keep apparatus dry. All rotating equipment and/or machinery shall be properly lubricated and rotated on a regular basis. All electrical materials and equipment damaged during handling, storage, and installation, until the Owner has accepted the project, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor with no increase in contract price. 1.12 COORDINATION: A. The Contractor shall not hinder and/or delay any work being accomplished by other construction companies at or near the general construction site; nor shall the Contractor impede normal operation of the Owner at any time except as otherwise indicated. 1.13 WORKMANSHIP: A. All labor shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their particular trades. All installations shall be complete in both effectiveness and appearance whether finally enclosed or left exposed. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal or replacement of any item which, in his opinion, does not present a reasonably neat or workmanlike appearance, providing that same can be properly installed in an orderly way by usual methods for such work. All specialties and appurtenances shall be installed to conform to the manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise specified. 1.14 EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS: A. This Contractor shall make electrical connections to equipment installed by other trades. The mechanical contractor shall install all motor driven equipment and motors furnished under this contract. 1. The Contractor shall verify the electrical requirements of equipment and appliances furnished by others with data provided by the successful vendor or vendors. The Contractor shall provide the proper sized circuits, circuit breakers, starters, disconnect switches, receptacles, etc. as required to connect this equipment. If changes are required to electrical systems shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall make these changes at no additional cost to Owner. 1.15 CUTTING AND REPAIRING: A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work to eliminate cutting of the construction except as specified. Where it becomes necessary to cut through the construction to permit the installation of work or the repair of defective work, it shall be done by mechanics skilled in the trade of erecting the type of work involved. The Contractor without additional compensation shall pay the cost of cutting and repairing. No cutting shall be done to any structural members unless the Engineer grants specific permission, in writing. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.16 SLEEVES, INSERTS,SUPPORTS,ANCHOR BOLTS, FLASHING AND FOUNDATIONS: A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, supports, anchor bolts,flashing, counter flashing and foundations required for the proper installation of the proposed work. 1.17 CLEANING: A. All debris resulting from the construction shall be removed from the project site daily. Upon completion of the project, unused materials and equipment shall be removed from the project site. All visible labels, dirt overspray, paint, grease, and stains shall be removed from all electrical equipment. Labels indicating testing laboratory approval or giving parts numbers shall be left in place. 1.18 TESTING: A. The Contractor shall test the entire wiring system for proper voltage level and balance, and for short circuits and grounds in accordance with established methods upon completion of work. The system shall operate satisfactorily in every respect. This Contractor shall make all corrections to accomplish such. 1.19 INSPECTIONS: A. The Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance to the Engineer or the Engineer's Inspector in making periodic and final inspections of the work. This assistance shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the furnishing of labor, tools, etc.to operate equipment and demonstrate its proper functioning. Also included shall be the removal of outlet,junction box and panel covers, etc. as necessary for the Engineer to inspect the work. 1.20 GUARANTEE: A. Any defects from imperfect or improper materials or faults arising from improper workmanship that may appear within a period of twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance of the system shall be amended and made good by the Contractor at his own cost. Any defects or faults shall be attended to within ten (10) days after receiving written notice from the Engineer. Failure to promptly attend to said defects or faults shall be sufficient cause for the Owner to correct the problem with the Owner's forces or the forces of others and invoice the Contractor for any and all charges, including management and overhead, related to correcting said problem. END OF SECTION 26 0100 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 02 01 COORDINATION DRAWINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions 013100 and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. 1.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall take the lead in coordinating the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems within the building. B. The General Contractor shall coordinate a three-dimensional(31))model of the building which includes the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems. The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection Contractors shall prepare their work and generate 3D models which will be given to the General Contractor for coordination. The Contractor will be provided with the REVIT model that was used to generate the contract documents, this file may be used as the background file. The Contractor shall replace the systems drawn with the actual shop drawing models. The Contractor is not limited to using REVIT, but may use any 3-D software in generating and combining the coordination model. C. Submitting the contract drawings as coordination drawings will not be acceptable. D. The model shall include detailed and accurate representations of all equipment to be installed based upon the reviewed equipment submittals. E. The Contractor shall hold a 3-D coordination meeting with all sub-contractors present to reviewthe model and discuss coordination of the installation of the building systems. F. Upon completion of the coordination meeting, the Contractor shall submit the 3-D model and %" scale drawings for review. G. The model shall detail major elements, components, and systems in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. COORDINATION DRAWINGS 26 02 01-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 d. Panel and transformer locations. e. Conduits 1-1/2" and larger. f. Fire Alarm Panels and Devices. g. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. h. Equipment connections and support details. i. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. j. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. k. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. I. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. m. Valve stem movement. n. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. H. Sequence of Coordination Below is hierarchy of model elements and the sequencing by which the models will be coordinated. 1. Structural and Architectural model 2. Miscellaneous steel 3. Perform preliminary space allocation 4. Identify hard constraints (locations of access panels, lights,A/V space requirements, etc.) 5. Main and medium pressure ducts from the shaft out 6. Main graded plumbing lines and vents 7. Sprinkler mains and branches 8. Cold and hot water mains and branches 9. Lighting fixtures and plumbing fixtures COORDINATION DRAWINGS 26 02 01-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 10. Smaller sized ducts and flex ducts 11. Smaller size cold water and hot water piping,flex ducts, etc. I. The Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall not install any item until the coordination has been completed and reviewed by the Construction Manager, Owner, and A/E team. J. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements,sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. K. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. END OF SECTION COORDINATION DRAWINGS 26 02 01-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 06 00 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Solid grounding of electrical systems, equipment, machine frames, enclosures, appliances and structures. 2. Basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. 3. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft. 3. B33 Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code 2. 78 Lightning Protection Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 467 UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS—FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for grounding conductors, ground rods, clamps, connectors, wells and insulating materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS—RECORD DATA: GROUNDING 26 06 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. C. Test Reports 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this Section shall be listed or labeled by UL. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Provide components and installation as required by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)70,Article 250. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Provide products in quantities, sizes and ratings to comply with the NEC or the design drawings, whichever requirements are more stringent. B. Conductor Materials: Copper C. Connector Materials:Copper or bronze,tin-plated where required for corrosion resistance. 2.02 CONDUCTORS: A. Grounding Electrode Conductor:Soft drawn copper,Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, 600 volt TW, THW or THWN insulation. Size per NEC 250. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8 except that conductor sizes Nos. 12 and 10 AWG used in lighting and receptacle branch circuits may be solid conductor. All conductors shall have 600 volt,TW,THW or THWN insulation. C. Grounding Grid Conductor: Medium hard drawn bare copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, No. 2/0 AWG or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. D. Color Code: Insulation color shall be green, except that sizes No. 2 AWG and larger may be black with green colored tape spirally applied over all visible surfaces within enclosures. 2.03 WIRE CONNECTORS: GROUNDING 26 06 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Terminal Lugs: Copper alloy, tin-plated, compression type, Burndy type, YA, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 6 through No. 1/0 AWG. Burndy type YGHA, NEMA 2 hole pad for sizes No. 2/0 AWG and larger. B. Split Bolt Connectors: Burndy SERVIT,type KS C. Taps and Splices: 1. Grounding Grid below Grade: Exothermic type (Cadweld) or compression type (Burndy Hyground). 2. Above Grade: Compression type. 2.04 CONDUIT CONNECTORS: A. Conduit Clamps: Burndy type GAR or GD. B. Grounding Bushings:0-Z/GEDNEY 2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: A. Ground Rods: % inch diameter, 10 feet long, copper clad steel with high strength sheath, molten welded to core. B. Rod Connectors: 1. Exothermic type: Cadweld 2. Mechanical type: Burndy type GAR or GD C. Test Wells: (Not Required) 2.06 INSULATING MATERIALS: A. Tape: Scotch 33+vinyl plastic. B. Mastic Pads: Scotch EZ—Seal PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Provide grounding of systems, equipment and structures in accordance with NEC Article 250,the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and the design drawings. B: Service Entrance: GROUNDING 26 06 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Provide a main bonding jumper between the service neutral conductor, the service equipment ground bus and the service equipment enclosure. 2. Provide a grounding electrode conductor to connect the service neutral conductor to the main grounding electrode. C: Building Steel and Piping: 1. Provide bonding jumper from the service neutral to the building steel and metallic piping systems. D: Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide a green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuits and feeder conduits. Size conductor in accordance with NEC 250 unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Connect the equipment grounding conductor to panelboard or switchgear ground bus and to all metallic raceways, outlet boxes, lighting fixtures, equipment enclosures, appliances and motor frames. 3. Where metallic raceways are installed, both the raceway and the internal equipment grounding conductor shall be utilized for equipment grounding. E: Grounding Grid: 1) Excavate and backfill for main grounding grid conductor. Locate conductors at least 3 feet away from foundation. Conductor depth shall be 18 to 24 inches below finished grade. 2) Install ground rods vertically in undisturbed soil so that the top of the rod is 18 to 24 inches below finished grade, except that in test wells the top of rods shall be 6 to 8 inches below grade. Space rods a minimum of 10 feet apart. 3) Make underground cable to cable connections using either exothermic or compression type connections. 4) Provide test wells where indicated on the drawings. Install top of test well flush with finished grade or pavement. Use only bolted type rod connectors in test wells. 5) In addition to equipment grounding conductor connections, make connections from the grounding grid to the following items using green, insulated conductors: i) Electrical equipment ground busses ii) Electrical equipment enclosures GROUNDING 26 06 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 iii) Motor frames iv) Steel support frames for electrical equipment v) Building steel frame 6) Grounding conductors stubbed up from below grade shall be enclosed in a 1 inch Schedule 40 PVC protective sleeve. F. Conduit: 1. Provide grounding bushings where metallic conduits connect to non-metallic enclosures or stub-up into open-bottom,floor-mounted enclosures. 2. Provide conduit grounding clamps where metallic conduit stub-ups are connected to non-metallic underground conduits. END OF SECTION 26 06 00 GROUNDING 26 06 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 07 50 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment nameplates and labels 2. Warning and caution signs 3. Operational instruction signs 4. Identification labeling of conduits, cables B. Related Sections: 1. Additional identification requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 26. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1. 29CFR1910.145 Specification for Accident Prevention Signs B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 70 National Electrical Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product used on project. C. Schedules: Nameplate engraving schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS: A. Engraved Nameplates and Signs: 1. Material: 3 ply plastic laminate, matte-finish, 0.125 inch thickness,white with black center core except that material used for warning signs shall be red with white center core. Provide punched mounting holes for mechanical fasteners. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Size: Minimum size to be 1 inch by 2.5 inches, rectangular shape with square corners. 3. Engraving: Accurately align lettering and engrave into center core. Lettering shall be normal block style. Character size shall be 3/8 inch high for grouped equipment and load designation and % inch for individual equipment, loads and devices. B. Warning Signs: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, non-adhesive backed, indoor-outdoor with punched mounting holes, Brady B-120. 2. Polyester overlaminated with plastic coating, adhesive-backed, indoor-outdoor, Brady B-302. 3. High Voltage warning signs to read "Danger-High Voltage-Keep Out." 4. Provide identical signs for each application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Provide labels and signs in accordance with NEC requirements. 2. Install labels and signs at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 3. All nameplates and signs used on the project shall be of similar size, style and appearance. B. Equipment Nameplates: 1. Provide engraved identification nameplates for each of the following: a. Panelboards b. Circuit breakers C. Switches d. Contactors e. Pull and junction boxes 2. Nameplate legends shall include the equipment identification number as indicated on the design drawings and an appropriate service description. 3. Nameplates for switchgear assemblies, panelboards, and separately enclosed breakers, switches, starters and contactors shall include the operating voltage. 4. Attach engraved nameplates to equipment with self-tapping, stainless steel, round head screws. Use adhesive attachment only where the substrate material is not suitable for screw attachment. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 C. Warning Signs: 1. Voltage warning signs where required by the NEC, where indicated on drawing and as follows: a. Equipment Rooms: On all doors to equipment rooms containing equipment or circuits over 600 volts or containing exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 7 inches x 10 inches. b. Pull Boxes: On removable covers for all pull and junction boxes containing circuits over 600 volts. C. Equipment: On front and rear compartment access doors and covers enclosing live parts. Signs provided as part of equipment that meet these requirements are acceptable. d. Fences: On each gate and on each side of fences that enclose equipment or circuits over 600 volts or exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 10 inches by 14 inches. Locate at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. 2. Multiple Source Signs: a. Where enclosures contain voltages from more than one source which are not interrupted by opening the local unit disconnecting means, provide an engraved nameplate bearing the following (or similar) legend: "WARNING—MULTIPLE ELECTRICAL SOURCES EXIST WITHIN THIS ENCLOSURE" OR "WARNING—VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH OPEN" 3. Hazardous Operation: a. Where operation of an electric switch or control device may create an unsafe or undesirable operating condition, provide an engraved plastic sign with appropriate warning statement. D. Multiple Services: 1. Where multiple services exist, provide each service disconnect with an additional sign which states the name and location of other service disconnects. E. Conduits: 1. Identify conduits at each termination and at all transitions from exposed to concealed or underground installation. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Mark conduits legibly with a permanent marker pen to indicate conduit per circuit number. F. Cables: 1. Identify cables in pull and junction boxes,vaults, manholes and where entering switchgear panelboard assembly. 2. Provide an engraved plastic nameplate or other suitable permanent tag for each cable or cable assembly. Attach with self-locking nylon cable tie. 3. Cable identification shall include circuit number and phase as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 26 07 50 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 261230 WIRE &CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section includes copper wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware used on systems operating at 600 volts or less. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. 138 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductor, Hard, Medium Hard,Or Soft. B. National Electrical Contractor Association (NECA) 1. Standard of Installation C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables 2. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 3. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors 4. 486C Splicing Wire Connectors 5. 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape 6. 1569 Metal-Clad Cables 1.03 SUBMITTALS—FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of wire and cable, terminal lugs, connectors, and cable fittings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS—RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Furnish wire,cable,associated connectors,and termination hardware bearing UL label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE: A. Single conductor, soft drawn, annealed copper conductor, Class B stranded except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller used for lighting and power branch circuits may be solid. Insulation shall be 600 volt,type THHN/THWN per UL 83 or type XHHW per UL 44. 2.02 TYPE MC CABLE: Metal Clad Cable type MC multi-conductor cabling as manufactured by AFC Cable Systems or equivalent having the following construction features: A. Conductor: Bare,soft annealed copper,Class B stranded per ASTM B-8. B. Insulation: Polypropylene tape assembly with 600 volt, 90°C (dry) type THHN insulation with printed number and color identification. C. Neutral conductor:White—120v circuits;Gray—480Y277v circuits D. Grounding conductor:Green insulated copper ground conductor. E. Assembly: Three insulated conductors with grounding conductor, non-hygroscopic fillers and overall binder tape per UL 1569. F. Sheath: High strength, lightweight galvanized interlocking steel strip and color coded on the out side for easy identification. G. U.L rated 1569 2.03 CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS: A. Insulated Crimp Type Connectors and Terminals: Nylon insulated, Burndy INSULINK and INSULUG,or Thomas&Betts Sta-Kon. B. Split Bolts: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy SERVIT or Thomas&Betts Split-Bolt. C. Two Bolt Connectors: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy OKLIP,Type KVS or Blackburn 261.1. D. Compression Terminals: Copper, long barrel, Burndy HYLUG or Thomas& Betts Color-Keyed. E. Bolted Terminals: Cast copper alloy, Burndy QIKLUG or Thomas& Betts Locktite. F. Spring Wire Connectors: Insulated, twist-on type, Ideal Wire Nut or 3M Scotchlok. Push-in type connectors are prohibited. 2.04 CABLE TERMINATIONS: WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Type MC Cable: Steel set screw connectors 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS: A. Tape: UL 510 1. Vinyl Plastic:3M Scotch 33+or Scotch 88. 2. Varnished Cambric(VC):3M Irvington 2920. 3. Friction: Black friction tape. B. Pulling Lubricants: Ideal Yellow 77 or Polywater Type J. C. Wire Markers: 1. Individual Wires: Heat shrink, machine printed, Raychem. 2. Multi-Conductor Cables or Groups of Wires as a Cable: Nylon tie on marker, Thomas & Betts Nylon I.D.Ties,Ty-Raps. D. Wire and Cable Ties: Thomas& Betts Ty-Raps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. Wire and Cable: 1. THWN-THHN for power wiring through No. 250 AWG and control wiring in conduit. XHHW for sizes above No. 250 AWG in conduit. 2. TW or THW for equipment grounding conductor. 3. Type MC cable ONLY for fixture wipes no longer than 6' and in accordance with NEC Article 334. 4. No. 12 AWG minimum for power circuits and No. 14 AWG minimum for control circuits unless noted otherwise on drawings. B. Splices and Taps: 1. Use insulated spring wire connectors for lighting and receptacle branch circuits No. 10 AWG and smaller. Push-in type connectors are prohibited. 2. Use solderless pressure connectors for branch circuit conductors No.8 AWG and larger. 3. Do not make splices or taps in feeder circuits or control circuits. C. Terminals: 1. Use copper compression terminals, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 4 AWG and smaller, NEMA 2 hole for sizes No.2 AWG and larger. 2. Use insulated, ring tongue terminals for signal and control conductors. WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. B. Installation in Conduit: 1. Swab conduits completely and thoroughly before pulling in conductors. 2. Pull all conductors into conduit at same time. 3. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire No.4 AWG and larger. 4. Do not pull in conductors until conduit system is completed. Do not pull through boxes, fittings or enclosures where a change of conduit alignment or direction occurs. 5. Limit pulling tension to maximum values as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Do not combine circuits into a common conduit other than as indicated on the drawings. C. Direct Burial Cable: 1. Trench and backfill for direct burial cables. Minimum depth of installation shall be 24 inches. 2. Terminate and ground metallic cable sheath with suitable fittings. D. Compression Connectors and Terminals: 1. Install on wire and cable with approved tool and die to recommended compression pressure. Do not cut strands from conductors to fit lugs or terminals. E. Bolted Connectors and Terminals: 1. Torque to manufacturer's recommended foot-pounds for size and class of connector. 2. Where manufacturer's published torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with UL 486A torque values. 3. Use galvanized steel bolts, nuts, split-lock washers and flat washers on terminal connections. F. Wiring in Enclosures: 1. Form and tie conductors in panelboards, cabinets, control panels, motor controllers, wireways,and wiring troughs in a neat and orderly manner. 2. Use Thomas& Betts wire and cable ties of appropriate size and type. 3. Limit spacing between ties to not more than 6 inches. G. Taping: WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Above Ground and Dry Locations: Fill voids and irregularities with half-lapped layers of VC (two minimum) or electrical insulation putty. Insulate with three half-lapped layers of vinyl plastic and one half-layer of friction tape. 2. In damp or wet locations, wrap insulated spring wire connectors with 2 layers of vinyl plastic tape. 3.03 COLOR CODING: A. Power Wiring: Provide color coding for single and multi-conductor power circuits as follows: Voltage (DA OB mC Neutral 240 volts and below Black Red Blue White 250—600 volts Brown Purple Yellow Gray 1. For specified insulation and jackets not manufactured with integral colors, use conductors with black insulation or jacket and color-coding tape. 2. Color code conductors entering boxes,troughs,cabinets,and other enclosures. 3. Color code conductors in wireways,trenches, and other locations where conductors are continuously accessible at intervals not exceeding 5 feet. B. Insulated Equipment Ground: Green. C. Isolated Ground conductor: Green with Yellow tracer. 3.04 WIRING IDENTIFICATION A. Control Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall match approved schematic and wiring diagrams. B. Feeder and Branch Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall include source panel designation and circuit number. 3.05 FIELD TESTS: A. Test conductors after installation is complete and prior to connection to equipment. B. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor phase-to-ground with adjacent conductors grounded and test conductor disconnected from equipment. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts do for one minute. Minimum acceptable test values shall be 50 megohms. Investigate deviations in test values between adjacent phases. C. Verify tightness of bolted connections with a calibrated torque wrench. Torque values shall be terminal lug manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 2612 30 WIRE&CABLE 26 12 30-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 13 60 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: I.Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS) 2.PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (CRGS) 3.Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) 4.Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 5.PVC Conduit (PVC) 6.Flexible Conduit 7.Associated Fittings 8.Wireways 9.Pull and Junction Boxes 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit—Zinc Coated 2. C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing—Zinc Coated 3. C80.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) 2. TC 3 PVC Fitting for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 3. TC 13 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT) 4. TC 14 Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 1 Flexible Metal Conduit 2. 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings 3. 5A Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings 4. 6 Rigid Metal Conduit 5. 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 6. 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes 7. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing RACEWAYS 26 13 60-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 8. 870 Wireways,Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings 9. 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 10. 1660 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 1.03 SUBMITTALS—FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of conduit,fitting, connector, pull and junction box, and wireway used on the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS—RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL(RGS): A. Conduit: Conduit including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be standard weight zinc- coated steel, rigid threaded conduit; shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1; and shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside, outside and over threads and lacquered inside. B. Fittings: Conduit fittings and accessories for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Fittings shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds,Appleton or Gedney or an equal. C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Boxes shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Boxes shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds,Appleton, Gedney or equal. D. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps,framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated fasteners and hardware will not be acceptable. 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC-SCHEDULE 40): A. Conduit: Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit per NEMA TC 2 with a 900 UL rating, and shall be the standard product of Krayloy or Carlon or approved equal. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Fittings: Fittings and accessories for use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 3 and shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the conduit. 2.03 PVC COATED STEEL CONDUIT(CRGS): A. Conduit: Prior to coating, all conduits, elbows, couplings, nipples etc. shall be standard weight rigid, threaded steel and shall be hot dipped galvanized inside and out and over the ends. The conduit shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1, UL 6, and NEMA RN-1, 1980. B. Fittings: Prior to coating, fittings shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized, Appleton Form 35 or Crouse-Hinds or equivalent with cast cover and neoprene gasket. C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with PVC coated conduit shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized with threaded hubs and gasketed cast covers or device plates. Boxes shall be the product of Appleton or Crouse-Hinds. D. PVC Coating: Conduit,fittings, boxes and accessories shall be Plasti-Bond 2 coated, as produced by Robroy Industries Inc. or an approved equal. Before coating, the galvanized surfaces shall be coated with an epoxy-acrylic primer. Exterior surfaces shall have a 40 mil PVC coating applied by dip method. Interior surfaces of conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. shall have a fusion bonded phenolic coating with a thickness of 4-6 mils. E. Fasteners and Supports: U-bolts, conduit clamps, straps, modular framing channels shall be 1-5/80 0 1-5/80 minimum section dimensions,Type 304 stainless steel, and shall be the product of Unistrut. Fasteners and attachment hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2.04 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings and nipples shall be standard weight,threaded, rigid aluminum 6063 alloy, with a copper content not to exceed 0.20%. The conduit shall have a silicon or lacquer coating inside. B. Fittings: Fittings, accessories and device boxes for aluminum conduit systems shall be the standard threaded type as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds,Appleton, or equal. Both fittings and covers shall be aluminum containing less than 0.4 of 1%copper. All screws shall be stainless steel. Covers shall be gasketed. C. Fasteners: All straps and clamps used to support aluminum conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron, with a 40 mil fused PVC coating, Plastibond, Ocal or equivalent. Strut type framing channels shall be either PVC coated galvanized steel or fiberglass. D. Hardware: Nuts, bolts, screws,washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Galvanized or cadmium- plated hardware will not be acceptable for use with aluminum conduit. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT): RACEWAYS 26 13 60-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be hot dipped galvanized steel inside and out with an organic corrosion resistant coating applied to the inside. B. Fittings and Boxes: Conduit fittings, boxes, and accessories for use with EMT conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Fittings shall be compression type. Setscrew fittings are not acceptable. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds,Appleton, OZ Gedney or an equal. C. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps,framing and supporting materials shall be hot- dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. 2.06 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: A. Flexible Conduit: Flexible conduit shall have a spiraled, flexible, galvanized steel inner core and an outer jacket of neoprene. Sizes 3/8"through 4" shall have a continuous, internal copper ground. Liquid-tight connectors shall be galvanized steel or malleable iron with neoprene sealing gaskets, external ground lugs and insulated throats. Connectors shall be Appleton type STB or Gedney or equal. 2.07 WIREWAYS: A. Sheet Metal: 1. Indoor, dry locations: NEMA 1, sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. Finish being manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2. Outdoor and damp locations: NEMA 3R,galvanized sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. B. Non-Metallic: 1. NEMA 4X, Robroy Industries fiberglass trough with gasketed cover attached with non- metallic fasteners. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, hubs, elbows, adapters, end caps and other fittings to match and mate with type of wireway furnished as required for a complete system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. General: 1. All field wiring shall be installed in conduit except as otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2-inch nominal diameter. B. Exposed: 1. Conduit installed outdoors exposed shall be rigid galvanized steel. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Conduit installed indoors exposed and below 7 feet shall be rigid galvanized steel. Exposed conduit above 7 feet installed indoors may be EMT. C. Underground: 1. Conduit installed underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC. See section 3.02-E for additional requirements. 2. Elbows used for underground conduit stub-ups from below grade shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, non-metallic Schedule 80 PVC, or Rigid Galvanized Steel completely taped with non-corrosive protective tape. D. Concealed: 1. Conduit installed concealed above lay-in ceilings and in dry wall construction shall be EMT. E. Flexible Connections: 1. Indoor-dry areas: Flexible metal conduit. 2. Indoor-wet, damp areas: Liquid-tight,flexible metal conduit. 3. Outdoors: Liquid-tight,flexible metal conduit. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Installation Methods: Conduit shall be installed concealed in walls or above ceiling or underground as indicated on the drawings. 2. Cleaning: All conduit systems shall be completed and shall be swabbed clean before conductors are pulled in. 3. Field cuts: Do not cut conduit with pipe cutters. 4. Bends: Field made bends and offsets shall be made with a hickey or conduit bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. The maximum number of 900 bends, or equivalent between pulling points in any conduit run shall be three. Pull and junction fittings and/or boxes shall be provided as necessary to satisfy this requirement. 5. Protection: The ends of all conduit runs shall be closed immediately after installation to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign material. 6. Locknuts: Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into the wall of metal enclosures. Bushings shall be installed on the ends of all conduits and shall be the insulating type. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 7. Conduit couplings shall be threaded type for RGS or RA conduit and compression type for EMT conduit. Set-screw couplings are not acceptable. 8. Spare conduits: Spare conduits shall have a pull cord installed. The pull cord shall be plastic with a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds. Not less that 12 inches of slack shall be left at each end of the pull cord. 9. Supports: Supports shall be provided a minimum of every 10' and within 3' of all enclosures. In addition, conduits shall be rigidly supported between couplings, on either side of bends and at terminations and fittings. 10. Boxes: Boxes shall be provided in the raceway system as indicated on the drawings and also wherever required for pulling of wires or making connections. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, boxes installed in normally wet locations or on the outside of exterior surfaces shall be NEMA 3R, stainless steel sheet construction. Boxes shall be furnished with hinged and gasketed doors and stainless steel back panels. Each box shall have the volume required by the NEC for the number of conductors enclosed in the box. All boxes shall be securely anchored in place. 11. Flexible Connections: Flexible connections of short length shall be provided for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission or movement. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across all flexible connections. Flexible conduit connections shall be rigidly and securely supported in an approved manner at intervals not exceeding 24 inches in length and within 12 inches of each conduit termination. Lengths of not more than 36 inches may be installed without such supports where flexibility is required. 12. Identification: Identify conduits in accordance with Section 260750. 13. PVC: PVC conduit joints shall be solvent cement welded and shall be watertight. All PVC conduits shall have a separate grounding conductor installed. Where transition is made to the metallic conduit or enclosures,the grounding conductor shall be bonded to the metal conduit or enclosure. 14. Penetrations through walls,floors, and roof: All penetrations shall be sealed with a UL listed fire sealant equal to Dow Corning#3-6548. B. Exposed Conduit: 1. Routing: Exposed conduit shall be run straight and true to structure lines. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with fittings or symmetrical bends. Conduit in damp locations or outdoors shall be exposed to the air on all sides and shall not be installed tight against walls, ceilings and structural members, etc. Clamp backs and/or offsets shall be used as necessary to maintain uniform clearances. 2. Supports: Acceptable supporting and clamping materials for exposed conduit include one-hole straps and clamp back, "U" bolts, parallel or right angle conduit clamps, hot- dipped galvanized structural steel frames or modular stainless steel channel as RACEWAYS 26 13 60-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 manufactured by Unistrut or equal. Perforated steel tape, stamped steel one-and two-hole straps shall not be used. Conduits shall be supported in accordance with NEC 346-12. 3. Obstructions: Conduit shall be routed so as not to create any tripping or head banging hazard and so as not to create any obstruction to Owner's operation and maintenance activities. 4. Hubs: Watertight conduit hubs shall be installed where conduits enter the tops or sides of sheet metal or non-metallic enclosures. 5. Drains: Drain fittings shall be installed at low points throughout the conduit system where condensation is likely to occur. C. PVC Coated Conduit: 1. PVC coated conduit requires special care to minimize damage to the PVC coating during cutting, threading, bending and installation. Contractor shall install conduit in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for providing strap wrenches, cutting dies, vises, and other special tools required to install PVC coated conduit. Standard pipe wrenches, chain wrenches or channel locks shall not be used. Conduit bending equipment shall have the proper diameter shoes or dies to allow for the thickness of the PVC coating. 3. PVC coated conduit shall be supported with Type 304 stainless steel clamps, straps, hangers and supports.Attachment hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 4. All PVC coated conduit and fittings that have teeth marks, cuts, nicks or are otherwise damaged shall be repaired by coating damaged area with a liquid PVC touch-up compound. Spray-type compound is not acceptable. 5. Unistrut channel supports and related accessories for use with PVC coated conduit shall be Type 304 stainless steel. D. Aluminum: 1. Aluminum conduit shall not be installed in direct contact with earth, concrete, steel, copper, brass or bronze. Where aluminum conduit comes into contact with dissimilar metals or passes through concrete walls or floors, it shall be wrapped with 2 layers, half-lapped, of corrosion preventative pipe tape, Scotch 50 or equal. 2. Aluminum conduit threads shall have a Penetrox, No-Ox-Id or equal, applied when installed. E. Underground Conduit: 1. Under Landscaping (i.e. sod or grass): RACEWAYS 26 13 60-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a. Underground conduits 2" and larger shall be laid in sand and covered with a 4" red concrete cap. The conduit shall be surrounded by a minimum of 3- inches of virgin sand (top, bottom, and sides). b. The top of concrete cap shall be a minimum of 24 inches below grade. C. Communication conduits shall be buried a minimum of 36"to top of conduit. d. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade over all conduits. e. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical conduits must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the minimum depth cannot be met. Backfill for all trenches shall be compacted to original density. 2. Under Paved Areas (i.e. Parking Lot, Driveways, and Roads): a. Underground communication conduit runs shall be buried a minimum 36" below grade to top of conduit. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade over all conduits. b. Underground power conduit runs shall be buried the minimum depth per the National Electric Code. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade over all conduits. C. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical conduits must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the minimum depth cannot be met. Backfill for all trenches shall be compacted to original density. 3. Separation: Minimum separation between the outside edges of adjacent conduits shall be 3 inches. 4. Elbows: All elbows shall be long radius type. S. Spacers: Conduit spacers shall be installed at S feet on centers. 6. Expansion Fittings: Provide expansion fittings in aboveground, vertical portion of each underground conduit stub-up. END OF SECTION 26 13 60 RACEWAYS 26 13 60-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 14 00 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 3. Snap Switches 4. Wall Plates 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WD1-83 General Requirements for Wiring Devices B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 20-86 Standard for Safety General Use Snap Switches 2. 94-91 Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances 3. 498091 Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit for approval and record purposes in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of device used on project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in National Electrical Code,Article 100. WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICES: A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics,grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA Standards. B: Receptacles, General Use Duplex Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy duty, grounding type, by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. Devices shall be Tamper Resistant in spaces as required by National Electrical Code. C: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI) Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy duty, grounding type "non feed-through" conforming to UL 498 and UL 943 by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. D: Snap Switches: 120/277-volt, 20 ampere, quiet rated, heavy duty, complying with UL 20 and NEMA WD1 by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: A. Wall Plates: 1. Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as required by devices. 2. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. 3. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. 4. Provide plates possessing following additional construction features. a. Device plates: Stainless steel. b. Device plates for surface mounted, 4 inch sq boxes: 1/2 inch stainless steel covers. C. Weatherproof covers for exterior devices or devices in damp locations: Raintight while in use, UL listed, die-cast metal, extra duty,with stainless steel screws and mounting gaskets. Tay Mac Corporation safety outlet enclosure, or equal. WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from building materials, dirt and debris. D. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated or directed, boxes for wiring devices shall be mounted so that the centerline of the device is at the following height above finished floor (AFF) or above finished grade (AFG). DEVICE FINISHED AREAS UNFINISHED AREAS Snap switches 46" 46" Convenience Receptacles 18" 18" E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated,tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. H. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral)for feed-through connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections via wire connectors and pigtails. I. Ground receptacles with insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to bolted outlet box connection. 3.02 PROTECTION: A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance. WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits,test wiring for electrical continuity and for short circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six (6)times. B. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal for correct polarity, proper ground connection and wiring faults. C. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 14 00 WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 262416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install panelboards as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. B. Panelboard types included in this Section are: 1. Power distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 1. Standard of Installation B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. PB 1 Panelboards 3. P131.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 50 Cabinets and Boxes 2. 67 Panelboards 1.03 SUBMITTALS- FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000, 260100, and as stated herein. B. Product Data: 1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Enclosure outline drawing with complete dimensions 3. Breaker layout drawing 4. Component list 5. Conduit entry/exit locations 6. Assembly ratings including: a. Short circuit current b. Voltage C. Continuous current 7. Cable terminal sizes. 8. Installation Instructions PANELBOARDS 26 24 16- 1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.04 SUBMITTALS—RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final (as-built) drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.03 2. Installation, operation and maintenance instruction 3. Spare parts list 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: A. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly, including circuit breakers. B. For the equipment specified herein,the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING: A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens D. ABB 2.02 RATINGS: A. Panelboards rated 240 Vac or less shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. B. Panelboards rated 480 Vac shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. All panelboards shall be fully rated. Series ratings shall not be used. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION: PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices.They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors. B. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door covering all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semiflush, cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners. C. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible. D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 inch on all sides. Trims shall be secured to box with concealed clamps. E. A directory card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the inside of each door in a metal frame. F. All locks shall be keyed alike. 2.04 BUS: A. Main bus bars shall be tin-plated copper, sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 651 C above an ambient of 401 C maximum. B. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. C. Full-size (100%-rated) insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards indicated to have a neutral bus. Bus bar taps for panels with single-pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 200%-rated neutrals shall be supplied for panels designated on drawings with oversized neutral conductors. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. Distribution panelboards including circuit breakers contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall have bolt-on, molded case circuit breakers as indicated below. B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated. C. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break, over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free.Automatic PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism. D. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be current limiting. E. Circuit breakers below 600-ampere shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and inverse time-current characteristics. F. Circuit breakers 600-ampere through 1200-ampere shall be provided with microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units. 1. Each molded case circuit breaker microprocessor-based tripping system shall consist of three (3) current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux-transfer shunt trip.The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the adjustable time-current protection functions.True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. 2. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed or adjustable as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. 3. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have thermal memory capabilities to prevent the breaker from being reset following an overload condition until after a preset time delay. 4. When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted,the trip unit shall be provided with an instantaneous override. Internal ground fault protection adjustable pick-up ratings shall not exceed 1200 amperes. Provide neutral ground fault current sensor for four-wire loads. 5. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground fault functions of the breaker, by means of a 120-volt operated test set. Provide one test set capable of testing all breakers 600- ampere and above. 6. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based, time-current curve shaping adjustments: Adjustable long-time pick-up Adjustable short-time pick-up and delay,with selective curve shaping Adjustable instantaneous pick-up Adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay, with selective curve shaping. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 G. Where indicated, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100%of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure. H. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as indicated on the drawings. I. Circuit breakers supplying air conditioning branch circuits shall be UL listed as type HACR. 2.06 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: A. The minimum integrated short circuit rating for branch circuit panelboards shall be indicated on the drawings. B. Bolt-in type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-and multi-pole circuit breakers of the types specified herein, shall be provided for each circuit with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common type handle for all multiple pole circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be minimum 100-ampere frame and through 100-ampere trip sizes shall take up the same pole spacing. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits and HACR for air conditioning branch circuits. 1. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights, energy management and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm panels. 2.07 ENCLOSURE: A. General: Enclosures shall be at least 20 inches wide and made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. Enclosures shall be provided with blank ends. B. Rating: NEMA type 12 enclosure except where other enclosure requirements are indicated. 2.08 FINISH: A. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed, and a finish coat of the manufacturers standard paint color shall be applied. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Provide TVSS system integral to distribution panelboards and appliance panelboards where indicated on drawings. Reference section 266710 for specifications on TVSS units. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Confirm installation space and clearance requirements for panelboards in accordance with NEC requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install panelboards as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and NECA"Standard of Installation". B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6 feet 2 inches above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: 1. Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. 2. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Typed directory indicating final circuit connections. Obtain approval before installing. E. Install filler plates in unused breaker spaces. F. Provisions for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: 1. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. 2. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade. G. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle, and wrap with wire ties after completion of load balancing. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide unit nameplate in accordance with Section 260750. B. Provided one (1) 8-1/2"x11" stainless steel nameplate engraved with one-line diagram and year installed. One-line diagram shall include panel voltages, amps,AIC ratings, and feeder sizes. Nameplate shall be mounted to the exterior door of the main distribution panel—LB. 3.04 GROUNDING: PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as required in Section 260600. B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. C. Provide isolated ground bars for panels serving sensitive electronic equipment and as indicated on panel schedules. 3.05 CONNECTIONS: A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.06 FIELD TESTING: A. Inspect for compliance with drawings and specifications. B. Inspect for defects, damaged or missing parts. C. Operate each breaker a minimum of three (3)times to insure proper operation. D. Perform insulation resistance test on complete assembly at 1000 Vdc. Disconnect any solid-state devices prior to testing. Minimum acceptable test results are 100 megohms. 3.07 CLEANING: A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. B. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. C. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. D. Clean interior of panelboard. 3.08 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS: A. Balancing Loads: Prior to final acceptance, conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows: 1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by Owner. 2. Advise Engineer of load imbalances exceeding 20%or of loads exceeding 80%of circuit ratings. Reconnect branch circuit loads as directed by Engineer. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical circuits. 4. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record load readings before and after changes and submit test records. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 32 00 NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 1. General Description of System&Site 1.1.1.Provide a standby generator to provide power as scheduled in drawings (refer to One- Line Diagram). The generator shall consist of a liquid cooled, rich burn, natural gas engine, a synchronous AC alternator, and system controls with all necessary accessories for a complete operating system, including but not limited to the items as specified hereinafter. 1.1.2.Kohler is basis of design. Equivalent by Cummins is acceptable. 1.1.3.The site is an NEC ordinary location with no specific harsh environment requirements.The genset shall be applied at the listed ambient and elevation. Bidders to submit the generators rated power output at 104 degrees ambient(°F) and 100' elevation (Ft). 1.1.5.The on-site gas pressure is 17 inches of water column. 1.1.6.Bidders are to submit the genset's sound level in dBA at 23 ft based on the configuration specified. 1.2. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1.2.1.An electric generating system, consisting of a prime mover, generator, governor, coupling and all controls, must have been tested, as a complete unit, on a representative engineering prototype model of the equipment to be sold. 1.2.2.The generator set must conform to applicable NFPA requirements. 1.2.3.The generator set must be available with the Underwriters Laboratories listing (UL2200) for a stationary engine generator assembly. The generator set must be pre-certified to meet EPA federal emission requirements for stationary standby. The generator shall utilize a rich burn engine, air fuel ratio control, and a three-way catalytic converter. On-site emission testing&certification will not be acceptable for standby applications. 1.3. Manufacturer Qualifications 1.3.1.This system shall be supplied by an original equipment manufacturer(OEM) who has been regularly engaged in the production of engine-alternator sets, automatic transfer switches, and associated controls for a minimum of 25 years,thereby identifying one source of supply and responsibility.Approved suppliers are Generac Industrial Power or an approved equal. 1.3.2.The manufacturer shall produce the generator in facilities that meet the standards of ISO9001. 1.3.3.The manufacturer shall have printed literature and brochures describing the standard series specified, not a one of a kind fabrication. Custom designed paralleling solutions using site specific PLC programs and site-specific schematics are not acceptable. NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.3.4.Manufacturer's authorized service representative shall meet the following criteria: 1.3.4.1. Certified,factory trained, industrial generator technicians 1.3.4.2. Service support 24/7 1.3.4.3. Service location within 200 miles 1.3.4.4. Response time of 4 hours 1.3.4.5. Service & repair parts in-stock at performance level of 95% 1.4. Submittals 1.4.1.Engine Generator specification sheet 1.4.2.Controls specification sheet(s) 1.4.3.Installation/Layout dimensional drawing 1.4.4.Wiring schematic 1.4.5.Sound data 1.4.6.Emission certification 1.4.7.Manufacturer quality statement 1.4.8.Warranty statement 2. Engine 2.1. Engine Rating and Performance 2.1.1.The prime mover shall be a liquid cooled, rich burn spark-ignited,4-cycle engine. It will have adequate horsepower to achieve rated kW output 2.1.2.The engine shall support a 100% load step per NFPA110 2.1.3.The system shall be sized to allow emergency system loads as defined by NEC 700 to be transferred onto the generator(s)within 10 seconds. 2.2. Engine Oil System 2.2.1.Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have a replaceable oil filter(s) with internal bypass and replaceable element(s). 2.2.2.The engine shall operate on mineral based oil. Synthetic oils shall not be required. 2.2.3.The oil shall be cooled by an oil cooler which is integrated into the engine system. Engine Cooling System 2.3.1.The engine is to be cooled with a unit mounted radiator,fan,water pump, and closed coolant recovery system. The coolant system shall include a coolant fill box,which will provide visual means to determine if the system has adequate coolant level. The radiator shall be designed for operation in 122 degrees F, (50 degrees C) ambient temperature NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.3.2.The engine shall have unit mounted,thermostatically controlled, circulating style water jacket heater to aid in quick starting.The wattage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.3.3.Engine coolant and oil drain extensions, equipped with pipe plugs and shut-off valves, must be provided to the outside of the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine servicing. 2.3.4.A radiator fan guard must be installed for personnel safety that meets UL and OSHA safety requirements. 2.4. Engine Starting System 2.4.1.Starting shall be by a solenoid shift, DC starting system. 2.4.2.The engine's cranking batteries shall be lead acid. The batteries shall be sized per the manufacturer's recommendations. The batteries supplied shall meet NFPA 110 cranking requirements of 90 seconds of total crank time. Battery specifications (type, amp-hour rating, cold cranking amps)to be provided in the submittal. 2.4.3.The genset shall have an engine driven, battery-charging alternator with integrated voltage regulation. 2.4.4.The genset shall have an automatic dual rate, float equalize, 10-amp battery charger. The charger must be protected against a reverse polarity connection. The chargers charging current shall be monitored within the generator controller to support remote monitoring and diagnostics. The battery charger is to be factory installed on the generator set. Due to line voltage drop concerns, a battery charger mounted in the transfer switch will be unacceptable. Engine Fuel System 2.5.1.The engine shall be configured to operate on pipeline grade natural gas. The engine shall utilize a fuel system inclusive of carburetor,gas regulator, air fuel ratio control, low gas pressure switch, and fuel shut-off solenoids. 2.5.3.The engine's internal fuel connections shall be terminated to the generator frame via an NPT fitting for easy installation 2.6. Engine Controls 2.6.1.Engine speed shall be controlled with an integrated isochronous governor function with no change in alternator frequency from no load to full load. Steady state regulation is to be 0.25%. 2.6.2.To support EPA emission requirements,the engine will incorporate an active air-fuel- ratio controller. The air-fuel-ratio controller shall be integrated into the generator controller to ensure security of settings and to support monitoring and remote NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 diagnostics. External air-fuel-ratio controllers are not acceptable. 2.6.3.Engine ignition shall be variable timing based upon load levels to provide maximum transient load performance. 2.6.4.All engine sensor connections shall be sealed to prevent corrosion and improve reliability. 2.7. Engine Exhaust& Intake 2.7.1.Engine Exhaust Emissions, Emergency use only: Comply with 40 CFR Part 60, Subpart JJJJ, Sections 60.4231—60.4232, Emission Standards for Manufacturers, and applicable state and local government requirements.A requirement to test and certify engine emissions in the field, as part of system commissioning, is not acceptable. 2.7.2.The engine shall incorporate a 3-way catalytic converter to meet EPA emission requirements. 2.7.3.The manufacturer shall supply its recommended stainless steel, flexible connector to couple the engine exhaust manifold to the exhaust system. A rain cap will terminate the exhaust pipe after the silencer. All components must be properly sized to assure operation without excessive back pressure when installed. 2.7.4.The manufacturer shall supply a critical grade exhaust silencer/catalyst as standard. 2.7.5.For gensets in a weather or sound attenuated enclosure, all exhaust piping from the turbo-charger discharge to the silencer/catalyst shall be thermally wrapped to minimize heat dissipation inside the enclosure. 2.7.6.The engine intake air is to be filtered with engine mounted, replaceable, dry element filters. 3. Alternator 3.5. The alternator shall be the voltage and phase configuration as specified in section 1.1.1. 3.6. The alternator shall be a 4-pole, revolving field, stationary armature, synchronous machine. The excitation system shall utilize a brushless exciter with a three-phase full wave rectifier assembly protected against abnormal transient conditions by a surge protector. Photo-sensitive components will not be permitted in the rotating exciter. 3.7. The alternator shall include a permanent magnet generator (PMG)for excitation support. The system shall supply a minimum short circuit support current of 300%of the rating(250%for 50Hz operation)for 10 seconds 3.8. The alternator shall be at least a 6 lead design to support option protective relaying. All leads must be extended into a NEMA 1 connection box for easy termination. A fully NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 rated, isolated neutral connection must be included by the generator set manufacturer. 3.9. The alternator shall use a single, sealed bearing design. The rotor shall be connected to the engine flywheel using flexible drive disks. The stator shall be direct connected to the engine to ensure permanent alignment. 3.10. The alternator shall meet temperature rise standards of UL2200 (120 degrees C). The insulation system material shall be class "H" capable of withstanding 150 degrees C temperature rise. 3.11. The alternator shall be protected against overloads and short circuit conditions by advanced control panel protective functions. The control panel is to provide a time current algorithm that protects the alternator against short circuits. To ensure precision protection and repeatable trip characteristics, these functions must be implemented electronically in the generator control panel --thermal magnetic breaker implementation are not acceptable. 3.11.1. The algorithm shall allow the alternator to be protected from thermal damage and the power system to produce 10 seconds of 300%fault current for breaker coordination. 3.12. An alternator strip heater shall be installed to prevent moisture condensation from forming on the alternator windings. A tropical coating shall also be applied to the alternator windings to provide additional protection against the entrance of moisture. 4. Controls&Operating Sequence 4.5. Genset Controller must be certified UL6200. 4.5.1.The generator control system shall be a fully integrated microprocessor-based control system for standby emergency engine generators, meeting all requirements of NFPA 110 level 1. 4.5.1.1. The generator control system shall be a fully integrated control system enabling remote diagnostics and easy building management integration of all generator functions. The generator controller shall provide integrated and digital control over all generator functions including: engine protection, alternator protection, speed governing,voltage regulation, synchronizing, load-sharing (real and reactive) and all related generator operations. The generator controller must also provide seamless digital integration with the engine's electronic engine control module (ECM) if so equipped. 4.5.2.Communications shall be supported with building automation via the Modbus or SNMP protocol. The controller shall provide native Ethernet, Wifi, and Bluetooth connectivity. All interfacing shall be done by via a web browser interface. Solutions that utilize dedicated software for connectivity are not acceptable. Connectivity may be set up to operate internally or externally to the user's network, based on network security preferences. All remote connectivity may be disabled at any time by the user. 4.5.3.Automated Notification: Controller shall be capable of sending multiple automated e- NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 mail and/or text alerts without the need for a third-party intermediate service provider. Users shall be able to individually set up notifications to internal personnel for any selected operational or fault condition, including (but not limited to) automated notification to the generator service provider. 4.5.4.The control system shall provide an environmentally hardened design. The use of open circuit boards, edge cards, and pc ribbon cable connections are considered unacceptable. 4.5.5.Circuit boards shall utilize surface mount technology to provide vibration durability. Circuit boards that utilize large capacitors or heat sinks must utilize encapsulation methods to securely support these components. 4.5.6.AI1 engine,voltage regulator, and accessory unit parameter settings shall be accessible through protected menus on the generator control panel.The following maintenance functionality shall be integral to the generator set controls: 4.5.6.1. Engine running hours (non-resettable). 4.5.6.2. Service maintenance interval (running hours, calendar days). 4.5.6.3. Engine crank attempt counter. 4.5.6.4. Engine successful starts counter. 4.5.6.S. 1,000 events are stored in control panel memory. 4.5.6.6. Control panel shall time and date stamp all alarms and warnings. A snap shot of key parameters shall be saved in the control panel for use in troubleshooting alarms. 4.5.6.7. A predictive maintenance algorithm will determine the optimal time for maintenance service based on the generator loading and operation. 4.5.7.Diagnostic capabilities should include time-stamped event and alarm logs, ability to capture operational parameters during events, simultaneous monitoring of all input or output parameters, email capabilities, support for multi-channel digital strip chart functionality, and pre and post alarm operational data for all measured inputs. 4.5.8.In addition to standard NFPA 110 alarms, the application loads should also be protected through instantaneous and steady state protective settings on system voltage, frequency, and power levels. 4.5.9.The control system shall provide pre-wired customer use 1/0: 4 relay outputs (user definable functions), 4 contact inputs, 2 analog inputs, communications support via Ethernet, WiFi, and Bluetooth. RS485 communications shall be included for communicating to remote annunciator panels. 4.5.10. Generator shall provide the ability to monitor ground fault and trip main output circuit breaker and or annunciate through audible alarm as applicable. 4.5.11. Customer 1/0 shall be software configurable providing full access to all alarm, event, data logging, and shutdown functionality. In addition, custom ladder logic functionality inside the generator controller shall be supported to provide application support flexibility. The ladder logic function shall have access to all the controller inputs and customer assignable outputs. 4.5.12. The control panel shall include a touch screen to display all user pertinent unit parameters including: engine and alternator operating conditions; oil pressure and optional oil temperature; coolant temperature and level alarm; fuel level (where applicable); engine speed; DC battery voltage; run time hours;generator voltages, amps,frequency, kilowatts, and power factor; alarm status and current alarm(s) condition per NFPA 110 level 1. NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 4.5.13. User manuals for the generator controller and generator maintenance shall be available electronically in a library on the generator controller for download to authorized end-user devices. 4.6. Remote Annunciator Panel 4.6.1.The Remote Annunciator Panel must comply with NFPA 110. 4.6.2.Provide remote monitoring and annunciation for up to 21 generator system indications. 4.6.3.Remote Annunciator must include one function capable of starting system test. 5. Engine/Alternator Packaging 5.5. The engine/alternator shall be rigidly mounted to structural steel main frame. This frame shall be supported with spring isolators for vibration dampening. 5.6. A mainline, electronic LSI circuit breaker shall be a factory installed UL1066 power breaker providing robust operation for generator paralleling. The breaker shall be rated as specified in drawings. The line side connections are to be made at the factory. Output lugs shall be provided for load side connections. 5.7. The generator shall include a unit mounted auxiliary power load center. All ancillary AC devices (block heater, battery charger, alternator strip heater, etc) shall have a dedicated breaker within the load center. 6. Enclosure 6.5.1.The genset shall be packaged with a Level 1 sound attenuating enclosure. 6.5.2.The enclosure shall be completely lined with 3" of fiberglass and perforated aluminum for sound deadening. This lining includes the air discharge hood. 6.5.3.The enclosure shall be made of with a minimum thickness of 14 gauge. The enclosure is to have hinged, removable doors to allow access to the engine, alternator and control panel. The hinges shall allow for door fit adjustment. Hinges and all exposed fasteners will be stainless steel or Sermagard coated. The use of pop-rivets weakens the paint system and not allowed on external painted surfaces. Each door will have lockable hardware with identical keys. 6.5.4.The enclosure shall utilize an upward discharging radiator hood. 6.5.5.The enclosure shall be coated with electrostatic applied powder paint, baked and finished to manufacturer's specifications. The color will be manufacturer's standard. 6.5.6.The genset silencer/catalyst shall be mounted on the top of the enclosure. 7. Loose Items 7.5. Supplier to itemize loose parts that require site mounting and installation. Preference will be shown for gensets that factory mount items like mufflers, battery chargers, etc. NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 7.6. Spare Parts: 7.6.1.Fuses: One spare set 7.6.2.Filters One spare set (air, fuel, oil) 8. Additional project requirements 8.5. Factory testing 8.5.1.Before shipment of the equipment,the engine-generator set shall be tested under rated load for performance and proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. Tests shall include: 8.5.1.1. Verify voltage &frequency stability. 8.5.1.2. Verify transient voltage &frequency dip response. 8.5.1.3. Load test the generator for 30 minutes. 8.6. Manuals 8.6.1.Three (3) sets of owner's manuals specific to the product supplied must accompany delivery of the equipment. General operating instruction, preventive maintenance, wiring diagrams, schematics and parts exploded views specific to this model must be included. 8.7. Installation 8.7.1.Contractor shall install the complete electrical generating system including all external fuel connections in accordance with requirements of NEC, NFPA, and the manufacturer's recommendations as reviewed by the Engineer. 8.8. Service 8.8.1.Supplier of the genset and associated items shall have permanent service facilities in this trade area. These facilities shall comprise a permanent force of factory trained service personnel on 24 hour call, experienced in servicing this type of equipment, providing warranty and routine maintenance service to afford the owner maximum protection. Delegation of this service responsibility for any of the equipment listed herein will not be considered fulfillment of these specifications. Service contracts shall also be available. 8.9. Warranty 8.9.1.The standby electric generating system components, complete genset and instrumentation panel shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defective materials and factory workmanship for a period of ten (10) years. Such defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer's option, free of charge for parts, labor and travel. 8.9.2.The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into service. Multiple warranties for individual components (engine, alternator, NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 controls, etc.) will not be acceptable. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. Also, in the judgment of the specifying authority, the manufacturer supplying the warranty for the complete system must have the necessary financial strength and technical expertise with all components supplied to provide adequate warranty support. 8.10. Startup and Commissioning 8.10.1. The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory trained technicians to check out the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include: 8.10.1.1. Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time. 8.10.1.2. Verification of engine parameters within specification. 8.10.1.3. Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required. 8.10.1.4. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator. 8.10.1.5. Perform a load test of the electric plant, ensuring full load frequency and voltage are within specification by using building load. 8.11. Training 8.11.1. Training is to be supplied by the start-up technician for the end-user during commissioning. The training should cover basic generator operation and common generator issues that can be managed by the end-user. 8.11.2. Training is to include manual operation of system. END OF SECTION 26 32 00 NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 00-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 33 00 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Automatic Transfer Switches 1.02 SYSTEM A. Furnish the automatic transfer switches to automatically transfer between the normal and emergency power source. 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The automatic transfer switches covered by these specifications shall be designed, tested, and assembled in strict accordance with all applicable standards of ANSI, U.L., IEEE and NEMA. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings for review,which shall include the following, as a minimum: 1. Descriptive literature 2. Plan, elevation, side, and front view arrangement drawings, including overall dimension,weights and clearances, as well as mounting or anchoring requirements and conduit entrance locations. 3. Schematic diagrams. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Accessory list. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Russelectric B. ASCO 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. General AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished as shown on the drawings. Voltage and continuous current ratings and number of poles shall be as shown. The automatic transfer switch shall be Service Entrance Rated, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On 3 phase, 4 wire systems, utilizing ground fault protection, a true 4-pole switch shall be supplied with all four poles mounted on a common shaft. The continuous current rating and the closing and withstand rating of the fourth pole shall be identical to the rating of the main poles. 3. The transfer switch shall be mounted in a NEMA 3r enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. Enclosures shall be fabricated from 12-gauge steel. The enclosure shall be sized to exceed minimum wire bending space required by UL 1008. 4. The transfer switch shall be equipped with an internal welded steel pocket, housing an operations and maintenance manual. S. The transfer switch shall be top and bottom accessible. 6. The main contacts shall be capable of being replaced without removing the main power cables. 7. The main contacts shall be visible for inspection without any major disassembly of the transfer switch. 8. All bolted bus connections shall have Belleville compression type washers. 9. When a solid neutral is required, a fully rated bus bar with required AL-CU neutral lugs shall be provided. 10. Control components and wiring shall be front accessible. All control wires shall be multiconductor 18 gauge 600-volt SIS switchboard type point to point harness. All control wire terminations shall be identified with tubular sleeve-type markers. 11. The switch shall be equipped with 90 degrees C rated copper/aluminum solderless mechanical type lugs. 12. The complete transfer switch assembly shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation and compliance with the specification requirements. A copy of the factory test report shall be available upon request. B. Automatic Transfer Switch 1. The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by a single electrical operator momentarily energized, and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over center type linkage. Total transfer time shall not exceed one half second AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs, and shall be silver-tungsten alloy. Separate arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts shall be provided on all transfer switches. Interlocked, molded case circuit breakers or contactors are not acceptable. 3. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a safe external manual operator, designed to prevent injury to operating personnel. The manual operator shall provide the same contact to contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to prevent a flashover from switching the main contacts slowly. The external manual operator shall be safely operated from outside of the transfer switch enclosure while the enclosure door is closed. C. Automatic Transfer Switch Controls 1. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control system, to provide all the operational functions of the automatic transfer switch. The controller shall have two asynchronous serial ports. The controller shall have a real time clock with NiCad battery back up. 2. The CPU shall be equipped with self diagnostics which perform periodic checks of the memory 1/0 and communication circuits,with a watchdog/power fail circuit 3. The controller shall use industry standard open architecture communication protocol for high-speed serial communications via multidrop connection to other controllers and to a master terminal with up to 4000 ft of cable, or further, with the addition of a communication repeater. The serial communication port shall be RS422/485 compatible. 4. The serial communication port shall allow interface to either the manufacturers or owner furnished remote supervisory control. 5. The controller shall have password protection required to limit access to qualified and authorized personnel. 6. The controller shall include a 20 character, LCD display, with a keypad, which allows access to the system. 7. The controller shall include three-phase over/under voltage, over/under frequency, phase sequence detection and phase differential monitoring on both normal and emergency sources. 8. The controller shall be capable of storing the following records in memory for access either locally or remotely: a. Number of hours transfer switch is in the emergency position (total since record reset). AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 b. Number of hours emergency power is available(total since record reset). C. Total transfer in either direction (total since record reset). d. Date,time, and description of the last four source failures. e. Date of the last exercise period. f. Date of record reset. D. Sequence of Operation 1. When the voltage on any phase of the normal source drops below 80% or increases to 120%, or frequency drops below 90%, or increase to 110%, or 20% voltage differential between phases occurs, after a programmable time delay period of 0-9999 seconds factory set at 3 seconds to allow for momentary dips,the engine starting contacts shall close to start the generating plant. 2. The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when the generating plant has reached specified voltage and frequency on all phases. 3. After restoration of normal power on all phases to a preset value of at least 90%to 110% of rated voltage, and at least 95% to 105% of rated frequency, and voltage differential is below 20%, an adjustable time delay period of 0-9999 seconds (factory set at 300 seconds) shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time delay period, the switch shall automatically return to the normal source. 4. After retransfer to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for a programmable period of 0-9999 seconds,factory set at 300 seconds. E. Automatic Transfer Switch Accessories 1. Programmable three phase sensing of the normal source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage. Programmable frequency pickup at 95% and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases, set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. 2. Programmable three phase sensing of the emergency source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage programmable frequency pickup at 95% and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Time delay for override of momentary normal source power outages (delays engine start signal and transfer switch operation). Programmable 0-9999 seconds. Factory set at 3 seconds, if not otherwise specified. 4. Time delay on retransfer to normal, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds if not otherwise specified, with overrun to provide programmable 0- 9999 second time delay, factory set at 300 seconds, unloaded engine operation after retransfer to normal. 5. Time delay on transfer to emergency, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds. 6. A maintained type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, keypad initiated. 7. A remote type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, remote switch initiated. 8. A time delay bypass on retransfer to normal shall be included. Keypad initiated. 9. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to close on failure of normal source to initiate engine starting. 10. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to open on failure of normal source for customer functions. 11. Light emitting diodes shall be mounted on the microprocessor panel to indicate: switch is in normal position, switch is in emergency position and controller is running. 12. A plant exerciser shall be provided with (10) 7-day events, programmable for any day of the week and (24) calendar events, programmable for any month/day, to automatically exercise generating plant programmable in one-minute increments. Also include selection of either"no load" (switch will not transfer)or"load" (switch will transfer)exercise period. Keypad initiated. 13. Provision to select either "no commit" or "commit" to transfer operation in the event of a normal power failure shall be included. In the"no commit position,"the load will transfer to the emergency position unless normal power returns before the emergency source has reach 90% of it's rated values (switch will remain in normal). In the "commit position"the load will transfer to the emergency position after any normal power failure. Keypad initiated. 14. Two auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 100 to 800 amps) 15 amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 1000 to 4000 amps), shall be mounted on the main shaft, one closed on normal, the other closed on emergency. Both contacts will be wired to a terminal strip for ease of customer connections. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 15. A three phase digital LCD voltage readout, with 1% accuracy shall display all three separate phase to phase voltages simultaneously, for both the normal and emergency source. 16. A digital LCD frequency readout with 1% accuracy shall display frequency for both normal and emergency source. 17. An LCD readout shall display normal source and emergency source availability. F. The following accessories shall be available by simple activation,via the keypad: 1. Include(2)time delay contacts that open simultaneously just(milliseconds) prior to transfer in either direction. These contacts close after a time delay upon transfer. Programmable 0-9999 seconds after transfer. 2. A block transfer function shall be included,energized from a 24VDC signal from the generator control switchgear,to allow transfer to emergency. 3. A load-shed function shall be included, energized from a 24VDC signal from the generator control switchgear, to disconnect the load from the emergency source when an overload condition occurs. 4. A peak shave function shall be included, energized from a 24VDC signal from the generator control switchgear. This function will start the emergency generator and transfer the ATS to the emergency source reducing the utility supply to the building. After the peak shave signal is removed,the transfer switch will retransfer to the normal supply, bypassing the retransfer time delay. G. Approval 1. As a condition of approval, the manufacturer of the automatic transfer switches shall verify that their switches are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL-1008 with 3 cycle short circuit closing and withstand as follows: RMS Symmetrical Amperes 480 VAC Current Limiting Amperes Closing and Withstand Fuse Rating 100—400 42,000 200,000 600—800 65,000 200,000 1000—1200 85,000 200,000 1600—4000 100,000 200,000 2. During the 3 cycle closing and withstand tests,there shall be no contact welding or damage. The 3 cycle tests shall be performed without the use of current limiting fuses. The test shall verify that contact separation has not occurred, and there is contact continuity across all phases. Test procedures shall be in accordance with UL-1008,and testing shall be certified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. When conducting temperature rise tests to UL-1008,the manufacture shall include post-endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the transfer switch to carry full rated current after completing the overload and endurance tests. 4. The microprocessor controller shall meet the following requirements: • Storage conditions-25 degrees C to 85 degrees C • Operation conditions-20 degrees C to 70 degrees C ambient • Humidity 0 to 99%relative humidity, noncondensing • Capable of withstanding infinite power interruptions • Surge withstand per ANSI/IEEE C-37.90A-1978 5. Manufacturer shall provide copies of test reports upon request. H. Manufacturer 1. The transfer switch manufacturer shall employ a nationwide factory-direct, field service organization,available on a 24-hour a day, 365 days a year, call basis. 2. The manufacture shall include an 800-telephone number, for field service contact, affixed to each enclosure. 3. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each transfer switch, by serial number, for a minimum 20 years. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Automatic Transfer Switches shall be provided with adequate lifting means for ease of installation of wall or floor mounted enclosures. B. Provide access and working space as indicated or as required. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Tighten assembled bolted connections with appropriate tools to manufacturer's torque recommendations prior to first energization. END OF SECTION 26 33 00 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 33 00-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 4119 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Part 1 - GENERAL A. WORK INCLUDED 1. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related work as specified. 2. Any such work included in any other section of these specifications that is not specifically described therein shall comply with the requirements of this section. 3. The following items of work are specifically included in, but not limited to the generality implied by these specifications: a) ESE lightning protection air terminal b) Complete mast, base, and supports. c) Down conductors d) Grounding terminations B. RELATED WORK 1. Form ESE-1-90 a) The completed form ESE-1-90 shall be returned to the ESE manufacturer for certification, verification, archiving, and system documentation. 2. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) Inspection of Completed System a) The completed lightning protection system shall be inspected to the Installation Requirements for ESE Lightning Protection Systems US 17-102. b) An NRTL inspection report shall be submitted for the completed project. 3. IEEE Fall of potential method for ground resistance testing. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit shop drawings showing location of ESE air terminal(s), conductors, bonding connections, and grounding equipment. Shop drawings shall include sizes for conductors, ground electrodes, and connection/termination details. 2. Submit Risk Assessment Per NF C 17-102 annex A; or UTE 17-108; or equivalent risk assessment yielding a protection level 3. Submit detailed product data sheets showing application, dimensions, and material of each component utilized in the lightning protection system installation. 4. Submit proof of installer's approval or certification by the ESE system manufacturer. LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 5. Submit EPA data per AASHTO code for the lightning protection mast(s)to be used on this project. D. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1. Submit project record documents under other provisions. 2. Accurately record actual locations of air terminals, bonding/grounding equipment, and conductors. PART 2- PRODUCTS A. ESE AIR TERMINAL 1. Complete ESE air terminal assembly a) Air terminal shall be certified to NF C 17-102 b) Threaded base for connection to mast. c) Continuous nickel plated copper central air terminal d) 316 grade stainless steel housing. e)The air terminal shall release stored energy based upon rapid variation of ambient field strength in phase with the approaching downward leader. f) The air terminal shall be tested per appendix C of NFC 17-102. Testing shall be witnessed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. g) Air terminal shall have a standard deviation value 40% lower than the requirement in NF C 17-102 section C.3.5.2.5. h) Air terminal shall utilize independent synchronized modules including one module for neutralization of space charge at the tip of the air terminal prior to triggering the upward streamer. Modules shall be replaceable. 2. Air terminals that utilize an internal spark gap or pulsed release based upon hold voltage are not acceptable. 3. Air terminals that utilize a central rod that is isolated from ground are not acceptable. 4. Air terminals that utilized radioactive ionization sources are not acceptable. S. Air terminals that are listed under the UL category OVTZ are not acceptable. 6. Plate indicating name, phone number, NRTL file number of the ESE air terminal manufacturer. 7. Minimum of five (5)year full replacement warranty. B. CONDUCTORS 1. Copper conductors shall be 37 strand copper wire with a minimum net weight of 410 lbs. per 1,000 ft. (187.97kg per 304.8m). Tinned copper strip of equivalent capacity/weight may be substituted. LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. The structural steel may be utilized as the main down conductor. a) Structural steel shall be electrically continuous or made so. b) Perimeter columns shall be grounded or at intervals not exceeding an average of 60 feet(18.2 M) on center. 3. All conductors shall be securely fastened to the structure at every 36" (914.4mm) on center utilizing fasteners with corrosion resistance equal to that of the conductor. 4. All metal objects of induction situated within 15' 0" (4.5 M) of a lightning protection conductor or bonded metal body shall be interconnected to the lightning protection system. a) Grounded metal bodies shall be interconnected to the lightning protection system via a main size conductor. b) Ungrounded metal bodies shall be interconnected to the lightning protection system via a secondary conductor no smaller than#6 AWG (13.3 mm2) copper. 5. No copper materials shall be installed upon a dissimilar metal. Tin coated copper shall be installed where these conditions exist. 6. Tin or lead coated copper and bronze equipment shall be utilized where corrosive atmospheres are present. 7. Lightning protection conductors shall maintain a downward or horizontal path to ground avoiding U and V pockets with the following exception: a) A conductor may rise no more than 3" (76.2mm)for every 12" (304.8 cm) of run. 8. No bend of conductor shall form a final included angle of less than 90 degrees nor shall have a radius of less than 8 inches (203.2 mm). Exceptions are thru roof and thru wall connections. 9. Each ESE air terminal shall be provided with two (2) paths to ground from the base plate of the mast,with the exception of an elevated mast that may have a single conductor run for a maximum of 16 feet (4.8 meters) before two (2) down conductors are implemented. 10. Down conductors shall be installed as widely separated as possible. C. LIGHTNING PROTECTION MAST 1. Aluminum, steel, or galvanized steel masts a) Height as required by application. b) Threaded connection for acceptance of ESE air terminal. c) Bonding plate for cable connection. d) Mast shall be structured as required by wind and safety factors inherent to the geographic location of the installation. 2. Anchor base, direct burial, & side mounted masts shall be designed and manufactured to the AASHTO code. Effective Projected Area (EPA)data based upon the AASHTO code shall be included with the project submittals. LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. As indicated on lightning protection drawing(s) 4. Certified or accepted by the ESE system manufacturer. D. GROUNDING SYSTEM. 1. The ground system shall have no more than 10 ohms of resistance a) Resistance shall be measured using the IEEE fall of potential method. b) Resistance shall be measured at each down conductor. c) Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after precipitation. d) Resistance measurements and testing method shall be documented. 2. Acceptable Ground terminations a) Ground rods: 3/4"x 10' (19.Omm x 304.8mm) copper-clad (3 per down lead) b) Electrolytic ground electrodes(1 per down lead) may be used in lieu of or in combination with ground rods, and plates to achieve the 10-ohm resistance requirement. c) Ground loop conductors shall be a minimum of 2/0 AWG (67.4mm2) stranded bare copper. Each down conductor shall terminate at a ground rod. The ground rod shall be connected to the ground loop. 3. All ground connections shall be accomplished via Burndy HYGROUND fittings or exothermic connections. 4. Connections to ground rods, ground plates, electrolytic ground electrodes, or ground loop conductors shall be made at a point not less than 24 inches (609.6mm) away from foundation walls and 18 inches (457.2 mm) below grade, 5. Ground terminations shall be spaced as evenly as possible around the building perimeter. 6. All grounded systems shall be bonded together via main size conductor to achieve equal potential of all grounded systems. All such connections shall be accomplished via exothermic welding where possible. E. CONNECTORS, FASTENERS,AND HARDWARE 1. Provide all connectors, fittings, fasteners, clamps, guards, lugs, exothermic connections, etc. as required to install all parts of the lightning protection system. All material should be listed where applicable. All equipment shall be fabricated from copper and/or bronze material for the use intended. 2. All connections between dissimilar metals shall be executed with tinned copper or tinned bronze equipment and treated with Penetrox A. PART 3- EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 19-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Verify that all surfaces are ready to receive work. 2. Verify and compare dimensions and measurements shown on shop drawings with field conditions. 3. Verify that all systems that may influence the lightning protection system design are included or referenced on the shop drawings. B. INSTALLATION -GENERAL 1. Install ESE lightning protection system in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Installation shall be accomplished in a neat and orderly manner by an installer approved or certified by the ESE system manufacturer. 3. All work inside the building shall be concealed. 4. All wall, roof, and other penetrations shall be sealed as required and performed by the appropriate trade. 5. All structural applications shall be coordinated with the project structural engineer and all other applicable trades. 6. Protect elements under other sections from damage or disfiguration during work under this section. 7. All adhesive lightning protection components shall be installed with an adhesive approved by the roof manufacturer. 8. All work installed in accessible areas shall be properly guarded and protected from damage. 9. All material shall be installed in a manner to protect against electrolytic couple in the presence of moisture. C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Field inspections will be held and documented. a) For inspection of down conductors prior to being covered by interior, exterior, or other installations. b) For inspection of lightning protection system grounds prior to burial. c) Provide NRTL inspection report for completed lightning protection system. II. ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 19-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. NAMES AND PHONE NUMBERS 1. National Lightning Protection Corp. 800-628-2816 B. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. Written requests for substitution shall be made a minimum of ten (10) days prior to bid date for consideration. a) Risk assessment for facility per UTE C 17-108. b) Effective Projected Area (EPA) calculations for proposed mast to be utilized as specified in section II part C of this specification. c) Submit copy of manufacturer's system warranty. d) Submit a list of twenty (20) verifiable installations utilizing the ESE terminal with names, addresses, and phone numbers of the completed installations. END OF SECTION LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 19-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for surge protective devices (SPD)for the protection of all AC electrical circuits. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Other sections that may relate to the work in this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 262413— Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards 2. Section 262416— Low-Voltage Panelboards 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product information for approval and final documentation in the quantities listed according to the Conditions of the Contract. All transmittals shall be identified by customer name, customer location, and customer order number. B. Submittals shall include UL 1449 4th Edition Listing documentation verifiable by visiting www.UL.com, clicking"Certifications" link, searching using UL Category Code:VZCA. 1. Short Circuit Current Rating(SCCR) 2. Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs)for all modes 3. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV) 4. I-nominal rating (1-n) 5. SPD shall be Type 1 UL listed and labeled C. Upon request, an unencapsulated but complete SPD formally known as TVSS shall be presented for visual inspection. D. Minimum of ten (10)year warranty 1.4 RELATED STANDARDS A. IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits, B. IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits, C. IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low- Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits. D. National Electrical Code: Article 285 E. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters F. UL 1449, Latest Edition—Surge Protective Devices 1.5 LISTING REQUIREMENTS SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. SPD shall bear the UL Mark and shall be Listed to most recent editions of UL 1449 and UL 1283. "Manufactured in accordance with" is not equivalent to UL listing and does not meet the intent of this specification. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least ten (10) years experience in manufacturing transient voltage surge suppressors. B. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store equipment in accordance with manufacturer's Installation and Maintenance Manuals. One (1) copy of this document to be provided with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide an externally mounted transient voltage suppressors by Siemens or pre-approved equal. Approved manufacturers are as follows: 1. SIEMENS 2. APT 3. Eaton 4. Leviton 5. Square D 6. ASCO 2.2 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE FEATURES A. SPD shall be UL 1449 listed and labeled with 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). Fuse ratings shall not be considered in lieu of demonstrated withstand testing of SPD, per NEC 285.6. B. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 intended for use without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls. Every suppression component of every mode, including N-G, shall be protected by internal overcurrent and thermal over-temperature controls. SPDs relying upon external or supplementary installed safety disconnects do not meet the intent of this specification. C. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled with 20kA I-nominal (1-n) (verifiable at UL.com)for compliance to UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780. D. Suppression components shall be heavy duty 'large block' MOVs, each exceeding 30mm diameter. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Standard 7 Mode Protection paths: SPD shall provide surge current paths for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and impedance grounded Wye systems. F. If a dedicated breaker for the SPD is not provided in the switchboard, the service entrance SPD shall include an integral UL Recognized disconnect switch. A dedicated breaker shall serve as a means of disconnect for distribution SPD's. G. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum surge current capability(single pulse rated) per phase shall be: a. Service Entrance applications: 1.) Siemens Model TPS3 12 with Maximum 7-Mode surge current capability shall be 250kA per phase. b. Distribution applications: 1.) Siemens Model TPS3 09 with Maximum surge current capability of 100kA per phase 2. UL 1449 Listed Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) shall not exceed the following: VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G 208Y/120V 700V 700V 700V 480Y/277V 1500V 1500V 1500V I. UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) for L-N, L-G, and N-G modes of protection (verifiable at UL.com): System Voltage Allowable System Voltage MCOV Fluctuation (%) 208Y/120 25% 150V 480Y/277V 20% 320V J. Service Entrance SPD shall be complimentary UL 1283 listed for EMI/RFI filtering with minimum attenuation of-50dB at 1001<Hz. K. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of ten (10) years, incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if they are destroyed by transients during the warranty period. L. Service Entrance SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics: 1. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED. 2. Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function (excluding branch). 3. Form C dry contacts 4. Optional—Surge Counter 5. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before or after installation. M. Distribution Panels SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics: 1. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED. 2. Audible Alarm & Dry Contacts 3. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before or after installation. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.2 INSTALLATION I. The installation shall meet the following criteria: 1. Install per manufacturer's recommendations and contract documents. 2. Install units plumb, level and rigid without distortion 3. One primary suppressor shall be installed external to the service entrance in accordance with manufacturer instructions. 4. Service Entrance SPD shall be installed on the line or load side of the main service disconnect. 5. Service Entrance SPD ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground. 6. At Service Entrance or Transfer Switch, a UL approved disconnect switch shall be provided as a means of servicing disconnect if a 60A breaker is not available. 7. One SPD shall be installed external to each designated distribution panelboard. 8. At Distribution, MCC and Branch, SPD shall have an independent means of servicing disconnect such that the protected panel remains energized. A 30A breaker (or larger) may serve this function. 9. SPD shall be installed per manufacturer's installation instructions with lead lengths as short (less than 24") and straight as possible. Gently twist conductors together. 10. Installer may reasonably rearrange breaker locations to ensure short & straightest possible leads to SPDs. 11. Before energizing, installer shall verify service and separately derived system Neutral to Ground bonding jumpers per NEC. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. Remove debris from SPD and wipe dust and dirt from all components. B. Repaint marred and scratched surface with touch up paint to match original finish. 3.4 TESTING A. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections to assure they are torqued to the minimum acceptable manufacture's recommendations. B. Check all installed panels for proper grounding,fastening and alignment. 3.5 WARRANTY A. Equipment manufacturer warrants that all goods supplied are free of non-conformities in workmanship and materials for one year from date of initial operations, but not more than eighteen months from date of shipment. END OF SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 44 10 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the low-voltage fused and non-fused switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. The switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL. 1.04 SUBMITTALS-- FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000, 260100, and as stated herein. B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Dimensioned outline drawing 3. Conduit entry/exit locations 4. Switch ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 5. Fuse ratings and type 6. Cable terminal sizes. 1.05 SUBMITTALS-- FOR INFORMATION A. When requested by the Engineer the following product information shall be submitted: 1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Product sheets. 1.06 SUBMITTALS--FOR CLOSEOUT A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in section 1.04 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. For the equipment specified herein,the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.08 NOT USED 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.09 Field Measurements A. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions prior to installation. Installation of all switches shall comply with the National Electric Codes clearance and mounting height requirements. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Three (3) copies of these instruction manuals shall be submitted with the closeout documents listed in section 1.06. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens D. ABB 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide switches as shown on drawings, with the following ratings: 1. 30 to 1200 amperes 2. 250 volts AC, DC; 600 volts AC(30A to 200A 600 volts DC) 3. 2, 3,4, and 6 poles 4. Non-Fusible and Fusible 5. Copper/aluminum standard mechanical lugs. B. Construction 1. Switchblades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily pad lockable in the OFF position. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Switches shall have defeat-able door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Fusible switches rated 100A to 1200A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6.Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick-make/quick-break type (except 30A plug fuse-type). 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. All exterior switches shall be heavy-duty type. 11. All interior switches shall be general-duty type unless otherwise noted. C. Enclosures A. Exterior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 311 rainproof unless otherwise noted. B. Interior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted. D. Fuses 1. Fuses shall be dual element, current limiting type such as Bussmann Low-Peak Yellow or equal. 2.04 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers nameplates shall be front cover mounted, contain a permanent record of switch type, ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. All switches shall be cleaned free of debris after installation and prior to final acceptance by the owner. Remove all miscellaneous paint markings, grease and tar. 3.02 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 4410 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 265100 LUMINAIRES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting fixtures 2. Lamps 3. Ballasts 4. Emergency lighting units 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C78 Series Lamps 2. C82.1-97 Electric Lamp Ballast- Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 3. C82.2-84 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts- Methods of Measurements 4. C82.4-92 Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type) 5. C82.11-93 High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.11-93 IEEE Recommended Practice on Metal Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 844-95 Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 2. 924-95 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 3. 935-95 Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 4. 1029-94 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts 5. 1570-95 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures 6. 1571-95 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures 7. 1572-97 High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures 1.03 DEFINITIONS: LUMINAIRES 26 5100-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Emergency Lighting Unit: Fixture with integral emergency battery power supply and means for controlling and charging battery. Emergency units are available with integral lamps only. B. Fixture: Complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power supply. Internal battery powered exit signs and emergency lighting units also include battery and means for controlling and recharging battery. Emergency lighting units are available with and without integral lamp heads and lamps. C. Luminaire: Fixture. D. Average Life: Time after which 50%will have failed and 50%will have survived under normal conditions. E. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic current components divided by total fundamental (60 hz) current. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, 16010, and as stated herein. B. Product Data: 1. Describe fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following information: a. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principal features. b. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and certified results of independent laboratory tests. C. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail nonstandard fixtures indicating dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components,features, and accessories. D. Supplies: 1. Submit sample of fixture if different than specified. E. Miscellaneous: 1. Warranty for rechargeable battery. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Coordination drawings for fixtures that require coordination with other equipment installed in the same space. F. Substitutions to Specified Product 1. Prior approval requests will include the following a. Full submittal data, by type, clearly highlighted and arrowed to identify the specific proposed manufacturer's nomenclature b. Full submittal data of lamps of proposed manufacturer c. Full submittal data of ballast/driver(LED) data of proposed manufacturer d. LED lumen data shall include: i. Lumen output ii. L70 and L90 testing iii. Confirmation of independent test lab data ITL iv. Color temperature and CRI with quantity of McAdam Ellipse steps v. Data shall include sphere and goniometer results for total lumen,total power, luminaire efficacy, CRI and junction temperature for the specified color temperature vi. Make and brand of LED diode should be clearly identified on submittal data vii. LED dimming shall be equal in range and quality to the specified drivers, Quality of dimming to be defined by dimming range,freedom from perceived flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible steps in transitions), natural square law response to control input, and stable when input voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experience in a commercial environment. viii. All substitutions must meet specified fixtures certifications UL,ETL,CE,CSA,RoHS,DLC, Energy Star) 2. Provide lighting calculations with the prior approval request based on reflectance values and light loss factors provided by the engineer and displayed on lighting calculation drawings. (may be unique by area) Calculations shall be shown on one sheet with dimensions as shown on construction set. Data will be submitted electronically in dxf format on a flash drive and with printed calculations on Architectural E size sheets to scale with construction set sheets. a. Discrepancies between prior approval data calculations and the original design calculations will result in immediate disqualification of review due to time based constraints on the bid process 3. Prior approval request may require a sample of both the proposed and specified fixtures provided by the alternate manufacturer at NO additional cost to the LUMINAIRES 26 5100-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 project. Samples of both specified and proposed must be provided within 10 working days of request. 4. Energy calculations (Comcheck) must be provided with specification sheets including lamp and ballast data supporting input wattages highlighted in yellow and clearly identified by type. Input voltages must coincide with panel schedules. This data will be submitted under separate cover with the prior approval request 5. All data will be submitted electronically and in a bound format a. Bound data will be secured in hard binder with 3" rings for ease of review. b. Types will be marked with a tab by type and indexed for ease of reference 6. LED warranty information MUST be included by type and marked in RED to clearly identify the manufacturer's warranty terms. Warranty data MUST meet or exceed the specified manufacturers terms 7. Prior approvals MUST be received and acknowleged to the specifiers office no less than 15 days prior to bid. 8. ALL prior approval data must be submitted in one package with complete information. Information that is incomplete will be rejected without review. 9. The prior approval will be returned marked approved or rejected by type with no explanation. If any specification is deemed not equal the review will be stopped and the type rejected with no explanation. 10. Lumen output for the proposed fixture must be highlighted in yellow for clear identification 11. All inverter systems that supply power to LED fixtures must have pure PWM sine wave function and work with any type of lighting load. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING: A. Deliver lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings,which properly protect fixtures from damage. B. Store lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat and blocked off ground. C. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scarring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Coordinate fixtures mounting hardware and trim with ceiling system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES,GENERAL: A. Comply with requirements specified in Paragraphs below and lighting fixture schedule. 2.02 FIXTURE COMPONENTS,GENERAL: A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support components to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating conditions. Arrange to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors,frames, lenses, diffusers and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85% 2. Specular Surfaces: 83% 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75% 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90% E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100%virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass except as indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat and UV radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch, minimum. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.03 SUSPENDED FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS: A. Single-Stem Hangers: %-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two,%-inch steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount single fixture. Finish same as fixture. C. Rod Hangers: X-inch diameter cadmium plated,threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hanger: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord and locking-type plug. 2.04 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LED LAMPS A. All LED products must be UIL, ETL and/or CSA listed B. All LED products must have LM-79 and LM-80 testing noted on specification sheet by an independent test lab 1. See note P this section C. All LED products should be identified as L70 and/or L90 ratings based on independent test lab data D. All outdoor pole mounted products must have surge suppression within each fixture. 1. See note P this section E. All outdoor and wet location listed products must clearly state the IP rating carried on the fixture based on independent test lab data F. All LED products must be serviceable for accessable for field reapair needs G. All outdoor lighting color rendering should be within a 7 step McAdams Ellipse. All outdoor lighting should be 4000 kelvin unless specifically noted 1. See note P this section H. All indoor lighting color rendering should be within a 3 step McAdams ellipse. All indoor lighting should be 4000-4100 kelvin unless specifically noted 1. See note P this section LUMINAIRES 26 5100-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 I. All control systems that interface with an LED product will be supported by a project "integrator" until project completion. This includes contact with the installer prior to installation, availability during installation, and final checkout and startup after installation. The quantity of days required for startup will be based on the manufacturer/agents discretion and need. 1. The project integrator must be capable of performing low voltage and dmx terminations. High voltage terminations are performed solely by the electrical subcontractor. 2. Reporting of final startup completion of the controls system back to the engineer is mandantory. J. Invitation to attend the training with the owners representative should be made to the engineer no less than 5 days prior to training K. Signature confirmation of training and startup is required within 5 business days after completion back to the engineers office. 1. A follow up call will be made to the owner 30-45 days after the startup and training of the controls system by the manufacturers representative to ensure all systems are operating to design specification. A 3 hour onsite system fine tuning at no additional cost to the owner is inclusive if requested by the owner at that time for additional training and programming. L. All LED drivers should be capable of 0-10 volt controls and DMX control and shall dim to 1%of total lumen output . Where specifically specified the dimming driver may be required to dim to .1%of lumen output, otherwise known as "dim to dark" M. Driver manufacturers must have a 5 year history producing dimmable electronic LED drivers for the North American market. N. Ambient driver tiemperatures must be within -20 degrees to 50 degrees C(-4 degrees to 122 degrees F) O. Driver must limit inrush current. 1. Base specification: meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard of 430 amp per 10 amps load with a maximum of 370 amps/2 seconds 2. Preferred specification : Meet or exceed 30ma's at 277 VAC for up to 50 watts of load and 75A at 240us att 277 VAC for 100 watts of load 3. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A 4. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10% line voltage input. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 5. Total harmonic distortion less than 20%, and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve allow imbalance current to exceed full output THD 6. See note P this section. P. Any exceptions are at the engineers discretion based on project needs and applicability. 2.05 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES: A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570. B. Ballasts: Electronic type. Conform to UL 935,ANSI C82.11 and NFPA 70. 1. Certification: By Electrical Testing Laboratory(ETL). 2. Labeling: By Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Type: Class P, 0.95 P.F. minimum. 4. Sound Rating: "A" rating, except as indicated otherwise. 5. Voltage: Match connected circuits. 6. Temperature: Start and operate at minimum of 501 F. 7. THD: 10 percent maximum. C. Low Temperature Ballast: Start and maintain operation at a minimum of 0°F. D. T-8 Lamp Ballasts: Full-light output type, compatible with energy-saving lamps. Following are required average input wattages when tested according to ANSI C82.2. 1. 39 or less when operating one F32T8 lamp. 2. 62 or less when operating two F32T8 lamps. 3. 95 or less when operating three F32T8 lamps. 4. 114 or less when operating four F32T8 lamps. E. Recessed fluorescent fixtures shall have 100%acrylic prismatic lenses with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES: A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572. B. Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029 and ANSI C82.4. Provide ballasts with following features, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Constant wattage autotransformer(CWA) or regulator, high-power-factor type. 2. Voltage rating matches system voltage. 3. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of-30°C. 4. Normal ambient operating temperature is 400 C. 5. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Noise Suppression: Manufacturer's standard epoxy encapsulated model designed to minimize audible fixture noise. 2.07 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES: A. Conform to UL 1571. 2.08 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS: A. Conform to UL 844 or provide units that have Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM) certification for indicated class and division of hazard. 2.09 EXIT SIGNS: A. Conform to UL 924. 1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code. B. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Backup): Integral automatic high/low trickle charger in self-contained power pack. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel cadmium type 1.5 hour minimum emergency run time. 2.09 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS: A. Conform to UL 924. Provide self-contained units with features and characteristics as indicated on the drawings. 2.10 LAMPS: A. Conform to ANSI C78 series applicable to each type of lamp. B. Fluorescent Lamps: Color temperature of 35001 K. 2.11 FINISH: A. Steel Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish applied over corrosion-resistant primer,free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters and defects. Remove fixtures showing evidence of corrosion during project warranty period and replace with new fixtures. B. Other Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: LUMINAIRES 26 5100-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Set units plumb, square and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent fixtures, and secure according to manufacturer's printed instructions and approved submittals. B. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling- mounted fixtures and to the center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. C. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job prior to commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style and pattern of ceiling being installed. D. Where recessed fixtures are supported by ceiling support grid, install additional support wires near each corner of the fixture. E. Make branch circuit wiring connections with conductors having an insulation temperature rating suitable for the fixture. F. Ground and bond fixtures in accordance with Section 16060. G. Install lamp units according to manufacturer's instructions and fixture schedule. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Give 7-days notice of dates and times for field tests. C. Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. D. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting installation. 1. Duration of supply. 2. Low battery voltage shut-down. 3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 4. Low supply voltage transfer. E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components,then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean fixtures upon completion of installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. C. Set and adjust photocells and/or time switches for proper operation as directed by Owner. 3.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION JOBSITE VISIT: A. Pre-construction On-site Services to be provided by Lighting/Controls vendor/supplier: The project electrical contractor shall contact Lighting vendor/supplier to schedule a jobsite meeting prior to the installation of the lighting control system. Purposeof the meeting is to review submittals and installation documentation provided by the system manufacturer. Discussion should include wiring conventions and specific wiring requirements. Installation of specific devices is also to be addressed. Prior to start-up Lighting manufactures representative shall send a field service technician to visit the jobsite to confirm progress and answer any additional questions. Start-up date is to be confirmed at the time of this visit.Training agenda shall be provided to the contractor/distributor. Contractor/distributor shall confirm with the owner's representative and specifying engineer attendance at lighting system demonstrations and for training. Contractor/distributorshall provide to field service technician programming information as required for start- up such as but not limited to zone assignments,time schedules for operation, presets for all control stations, programming sequences for dynamic LED fixtures, emergency operation, blink-warn, and system override. Programming information is required for system set-up and pre- start-up. B. Lighting Control System Start-up and Training 1. Prior to energizing lighting control system the following must be completed: No component of the lighting control system shall be energized until a factory certified field service engineer has approved the installation of the system by the project electrical contractor.The electrical contractor/distributor shall contact the Lighting vendor/supplier at least 3 weeks prior to the requested start-up date to schedule a field service technician to be at the jobsite. Request shall be in writing and shall include filled out start-up request form and dated jobsite photos of the dimmer and/or relay panels. Lighting Control system is defined as the dimmer/relay panel(s) and all associated control stations and related accessories. The electrical contractor is responsible to install the entire lighting control system, all power feeders, all load wiring, and control wiring. Equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, contract documents, and national and local codes and regulations. Equipment shall be plumb and level to the finished floor. All components of the lighting LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 control system shall be clean,free of dust and paint spatters. Components shall be unmarred or damaged.All cable shall be dressed, neatly routed, and labeled. All conduit shall be securely attached to the dimmer/relay panel. Start-up services are not provided in conjunction or in association with any commissioning of lighting or other related control systems. 2. System Start-up Each dimmer/relay shall be tested by the electrical contractor(with a multi-meter) to confirm what voltage is being passed and to confirm that no voltage is being passed when the circuit is open. A representative of the owner shall be present to observe the testing/demonstration of the dimmer/relay panels. Each individual dimmer/relay panel shall be load tested with all circuits on while under load for a minimum of 1 hour. Where external devices are to be attached to the dimmer/relay panel including photocell, occupancy sensor,time clock, DMX controller, and/or control stations, operation of each device should be verified at the panel and specific circuits that are programmed to be controlled by the external device(s). Where control signals originate from the dimmer/relay panel for control of lighting fixtures,the control signal shall be tested by the electrical contractor to confirm that it is being delivered to each lighting fixture. Proper operation of the lighting fixtures shall beconfirmed as part of the system testing/demonstration. 3. Training Training shall be provided for the owner's representative and contractor. Prior to start- up the owner's representative and electrical contractor/distributor shall acknowledge receipt of training agenda.The electrical contractor/distributor shall confirm that the specifying engineer has been contacted and been invited to attend the system demonstration and/or training.All product and lighting control system documentation and operation'smanuals shall be provided by electrical contractor/distributor at the time of training. Training is to include, but not be limited to: basic operation of lighting control system, set-up of system and control panels, operation of control stations, programming of system, basic de-bugging, and overall system testing.At completion of training session all in attendees shall sign the start-up technician's field service report to confirm participation in the training session. Completed field service report shall be submitted to the electrical contractor/distributor and specifying engineer. 3.05 Follow-up Contact Services Approximately 90 days following the initialization of the lighting control system the Lighting/controls vendor/supplier shall contact the electrical contractor/distributor to LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 confirm that the system is operating correctly and answer any questions that have come-up since system initialization. 3.06 Extended Follow-up Contact On-site Services Approximately 300 days following initialization of the lighting control system the Lighting/controls vendor/supplier shall contact the owner's representative in order to schedule a job site visit.The purpose of the visit shall be to confirm that all lighting control equipment that was initialized by lighting/control vendor/supplier is fully functioning.Any equipment not functioning as originally specified shall be repaired as required. In addition if the end user has adjustments that need to be made to programming or to any of the control of the system these shall be made during the jobsite visit. If further training on the system is required this shall be provided at the time of the visit or scheduled at a time of mutual convenience. A completed field service report shall be submitted to the electrical contractor, specifying engineer, and the owner's representative. END OF SECTION 26 5100 LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 74 00 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS (ROUGH-IN) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions govern work under this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes work required to provide a system of raceways, outlet boxes with covers, terminal boards, and grounding to accommodate the installation of the telephone/data cabling system under this Contract and specified in other sections of specifications. Note that some indicated ceilings are inaccessible and extensions of raceways to accessible ceiling areas will be required. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26—ELECTRICAL 1.04 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. It is the intent of this Specification to provide a system of raceways and outlets to accommodate the installation of telephone and data cabling under this Contract and specified in other sections of specifications. The Contract Documents indicate the location and size of the main telephone service raceway and the location of telephone/data outlets and terminal boards. Routing of raceway system between outlets and terminal points shall be determined in the field by the contractor. Design of the system is based upon the premise that the telephone/data system installer will provide UL listed low smoke producing plenum cabling conforming to NEC requirements, permitting open wiring in plenum areas above accessible ceilings. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Raceways: All raceways shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 261360. B. Outlet Cover Plates: All outlet coverplates shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 261400. Provide for unused outlet boxes. C. Terminal Boards: Specified in other sections. D. Cabling: Specified in other sections. TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS(ROUGH-IN) 26 74 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 E. Jacks: Specified in other sections. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Service entrance conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel or PVC encased in concrete with steel reinforced where it passes through the foundation and for at least 5' beyond the building line. B. Unless otherwise indicated, distribution raceways shall be electrical metallic tubing, except the PVC Schedule 40 may be used where raceway is buried in concrete slabs, columns, or beams. Provide insulating bushings at the ends of all raceways. C. The conduit size for each outlet shall be 1-1/4 inch minimum. D. Boxes shall be steel having the minimum dimensions of 4-11/16"x4-11/16"x2-1/8". E. Provide conduit from each outlet location to an accessible location above a lay-in type ceiling. Terminate conduit with bushing. F. Provide raceways sufficient to accommodate telephone cabling where passing through mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, pipe chases, mechanical chases, areas without ceilings (exposed structure), and nonaccessible areas such as ceiling plenums and crawl spaces. G. Provide %-inch conduit with #6 AWG bare copper ground wire from main terminal location and bond to building grounding system as indicated on drawings. H. Contact local telephone company to coordinate the exact telephone service entrance location and requirements prior to installing the telephone service raceways. I. Refer to construction drawings for additional requirements. END OF SECTION 26 74 00 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS(ROUGH-IN) 26 74 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 26 75 00 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM (ROUGH-IN) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions govern work under this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes work required to provide a system of raceways, outlet boxes and grounding of a cable TV system under this Contract and specified in other sections of specifications. Note that some indicated ceilings are inaccessible and extensions of raceways to accessible ceiling areas will be required. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26—ELECTRICAL 1.04 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. It is the intent of this Specification to provide a system of raceways, outlet boxes and grounding to accommodate a CATV system under this Contract and specified in other sections of specifications. The Contract Documents indicate the location and size of the main Cable service raceway and the location of TV outlets. Routing of raceway system between outlets and terminal points shall be determined in the field by the contractor. Design of the system is based upon the premise that the cable TV system installer will provide UL listed low smoke producing plenum cabling conforming to NEC requirements, permitting open wiring in plenum areas above accessible ceilings. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Raceways: All raceways shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 261360. B. Outlet Cover Plates: Provide outlet cover plates in accordance with the requirements of Section 261400. Provide where outlet boxes are unused. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM (ROUGH-IN) 26 75 00-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 A. Unless otherwise indicated, distribution raceways shall be electrical metallic tubing, except the PVC Schedule 40 may be used where raceway is buried in concrete slabs, columns, or beams. Provide insulating bushings at the ends of all raceways. B. The conduit size for each outlet shall be 3/4-inch minimum. C. Boxes shall be steel having the minimum dimensions of 4-11/16"x4-11/16"x2-1/8". D. Provide conduit from each outlet location to an accessible location above a lay-in type ceiling. Terminate conduit with bushing. E. Provide raceways sufficient to accommodate cabling where passing through mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, pipe chases, mechanical chases, areas without ceilings (exposed structure), and non-accessible areas such as ceiling plenums and crawl spaces. F. Provide %-inch conduit with #6 AWG bare copper ground wire from main terminal location and bond to building grounding system as indicated on drawings. G. Provide pull wire or mylar cord in any empty conduit. H. Coordinate final termination with the Architect, Owner's representative and the Local Cable TV provider. END OF SECTION 26 75 00 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM (ROUGH-IN) 26 75 00-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 27 10 00-STRUCTURED CABLING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. This section identifies the requirements,technical design, and specifications for the structured cabling system at Far South Police Substation, located in City of Corpus Christi, Texas ("Owner"). The structured cabling system as specified is an Industry-Standard Category 6 structured cabling system and includes horizontal cabling and equipment room hardware as specified. B. The Contractor shall provide a minimum Manufacturer's 20-Year Performance Certification for the installed structured cabling system, certified by the manufacturer for fiber and copper. C. Contractor shall include materials, equipment, and labor necessary to provide a complete and functional structured cabling system regardless of any items not listed or described in this specification or associated drawings. 1.02 Requirements Table of Content A. Contractor Experience Requirements B. Submittal Requirements C. Acceptable Manufacturers D. Codes, Standards and Regulations E. General Requirements F. System Requirements G. Testing Requirements H. Project Closeout Documentation I. Attachments 1.03 Related Requirements A. The Drawings, Specifications, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and other requirements of Division 1 apply to the work specified in Division 27 and shall be complied with in every respect. The Contractor shall examine all of the items which make up the Contract Documents and shall coordinate them with the work on the project. B. Contractor Experience Requirements 1. The Contractor shall possess all relevant Manufacturer Certifications (i.e. structured cable systems, testing equipment, etc,)for both the company and individual technicians prior to submitting a bid for the work. 2. The Contractor's Project Manager shall be a Registered Communications Distribution Designer(RCDD) and available for all on-site coordination meetings. 3. The Contractor shall have been in business for a minimum of five (5)years. 4. The Contractor shall have a local office with local technicians and an adequate workforce to complete this project within a 100-mile radius of the project site. Structured Cable 27 10 00- 1 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 5. The Contractor shall have completed a minimum of three (3) projects similar in size and scope to the Owner's installation, where the systems have been in continuous satisfactory operation for at least one (1)year. C. Subcontractors shall be identified at the time of bid and comply with the requirements and intentions of these specifications, associated drawings, and related contract documents. 1.04 Submittal Requirements A. Pre-Installation Submittal 1. Contractor shall not order, purchase, or install any equipment until pre-installation submittals have been accepted in writing by the Architect/Design Consultant. 2. Contractor shall ensure submittals are submitted in a timely manner to ensure all products can be ordered and received on site in order to not cause any delays. If there are any concerns with any products having long lead times, those products shall be clearly identified in writing so the review and approval can be expedited. 3. All submittals shall be submitted in the same sequence as they are listed in the specifications(i.e. product data in the sequence items are listed in the product data section, manufacturer product certifications for company, manufacturer product certifications for installers, etc.). Submittals not in the proper sequence will not be approved. 4. Manufacturer product data sheets for each proposed system component. a. For product data sheets containing more than one (1) part number or product, the Contractor shall clearly identify the specific part number or product being submitted. Product data sheets without the part number clearly identified will not be approved. 5. Manufacturer Product Certifications for Company. 6. Manufacturer Product Certifications for Installers. 7. Manufacturer Certifications for testing equipment technicians. 8. Manufacturer Certifications for testing equipment calibration. 9. RCDD Certificate for Contractor's Project Manager. 10. Manufacturer Warranty letter. 11. Documentation indicating that Contractor has been in business for(3)years. 12. Address of Contractor's local office within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 13. Quantity of full time local technicians within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 14. List of three (3) contractor-installed projects of a similar size and scope that have been in operation for at least (1)year. The Contractor shall provide the following information for each project: Project Name, Project Location, Project Start Date, Project Completion Date, Project Start Cost, Project Completion Cost, Brief Description of Project, Client Point of Contact Name and Phone Number. 15. List of completed and ongoing projects with the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the following information for each project: Project Name, Project Location, Project Start Structured Cable 27 10 00-2 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 Date, Project Completion Date, Project Start Cost, Project Completion Cost, and Brief Description of Project. 16. List of subcontractors performing any work on the project. List shall clearly identify the subcontractor's legal name and address,the scope of work to be performed by the subcontractors and the overall percentage of the project being provided by the subcontractor. If there are no subcontractors performing any work on the project, submit a statement on company letterhead clearly indicating no subcontractors will be performing any work on this project. 17. Contractor shall maintain a set of shop drawings on site at all times and shall update the shop drawings on a weekly basis. Shop drawings shall be made available for inspection at the request of the Architect/Design Consultant. 18. Contractor shall submit a line, by line specification review acknowledging conformance to the contract documents If any variances are taken due to a product being discontinued or factory recommended replacement for product reaching end of life the contractor shall note it on the review as a variance. The specified products will be itemized and listed as an attachment. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The following sections specifically list the acceptable equipment types and items for this project. B. Architect/Design Consultant will have final determination of acceptability of all proposed equipment and must approve submitted equipment prior to purchase or installation. C. Proposed equivalent items must be approved in writing by the Architect/Design Consultant prior to purchase or installation. Proposed equivalent items must meet or exceed these specifications and the specifications of the specified item. D. In the event a manufacturer's specified product or part number has changed or is no longer available, Contractor shall substitute the appropriate equivalent manufacturer's part number and add the required information to the submittal package. E. In the event of a discrepancy between the specifications and the drawings,the greater quantity and/or better quality will be furnished. F. For listed products with no part number specified, Contractor shall provide a product that meets the performance requirements of these specifications, industry standard practices, and intended application. G. All wiring, equipment, and installation materials shall be new and of the highest quality. H. Labels on all cabling, materials, and equipment must indicate a nationally recognized testing laboratory. I. Original Equipment Manufacturer(OEM) documentation must be provided to the Architect/Design Consultant which certifies performance characteristics and compliance with ANSI/TIA 568-D standards. Structured Cable 27 10 00-3 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 J. Contractor shall review all products specified and required for this project to determine if there are any lead times for any products that may cause any delay. Contractor shall clearly identify any concerns with lead times in writing to the Architect/Design Consultant prior to submitting a proposal for this work. If the Contractor does not identify any concerns with products having long lead times, it will be understood there are no long lead time issues and the Contractor will have all products on-site when needed to complete the job as required. 2.02 HORIZONTAL CABLE A. Category 6 (Blue Sheath) (Use Plenum where Applicable) 2.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TERMINATION A. Fiber Enclosure 1. Fiber Enclosure—1RU rack mounted B. Optical Fiber Coupler Panels 1. Fiber bulkhead panels/Blank panels 2.04 CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL RACK MOUNTED PATCH PANELS A. 19-inch rack mounted Cat 6 Modular Patch Panel. Complies with ANSI/TIA-568-2.D Category 6 performance. Complete with horizontal wire management. 2.05 CATEGORY 6 MODULAR JACKS A. Non-keyed 8-pin modular connectors flat front, suitable to terminate UTP 4-pair Category 6 250 MHz cables. Complies with ANSI/TIA-568-2.D Category 6 performance. Outlet wired with standards compliant T568-B pin out. Suitable to be mounted in corresponding faceplate, mounting plate or surface mount box.. 2.06 TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES A. Coordinate color with Architect prior to ordering. 1. Outlet faceplate suitable to be installed over a standard NEMA electrical junction box, capable of mounting approved flat 8-pin modular connectors and coaxial connectors. 2. Outlet box suitable to be surface mounted, capable of mounting approved 8-pin modular connectors and coaxial connectors. 3. 2-Port, QuickPort in-ceiling bracket with clip for drop wire/rod mounting. Compatible with QuickPort Surface-Mount Boxes (fasteners included with bracket, boxes sold separately). Brackets must be installed on a dedicated drop wire/rod per NEC® 300.11. 2.07 PATCH CABLES A. LC to LC 50 micron Multi-mode Fiber Patch Cords 1. Physical Specifications: Duplex multi-mode or single mode optical fiber cable patch cords,terminated with LC connectors on both ends. 2. Performance Characteristics: Superior to the individual characteristics established in ANSI/TIA-568-3.D—Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard optical fiber cable Structured Cable 27 10 00-4 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 performance. Equal to or greater than the performance characteristics of cables specified under this work. B. Copper Patch Cables 1. Equipment Room/Telecommunications Rooms a. Cat 6 6 ft patch cord 2. Workstations a. Cat 6 10 ft patch cord 2.08 EQUIPMENT RACKS, CABINETS, CABLE MANAGEMENT, AND ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Cabinet 1. Chatsworth Products Inc. or approved equivalent, H=48", x 30" deep wall mounted cabinet. a. Chatsworth Part# 11996-736 B. Horizontal Cable Managers (Black) 1. Chatsworth 1RU Rack Cabling Manager- Part Number 12419-748 C. Standard Fan and Filter Kit 1. 2 fans, 2 filter, and 2 vent cover Chatsworth Part#40972-001 (each) D. Horizontal PDU (Black) 1. Chatsworth Horizontal PDU with 5-20 plug and 5-20 receptacles - Part Number 12816- 705. 2.09 J-HOOKS/ HOOK& LOOP STRAPS A. J-Hooks 1. Shall be listed as meeting UL 2239 requirements. 2. Shall be listed/approved for installation in return-air plenum spaces. 3. Shall be designed and equipped with accessories (if needed) to be supported by the following methods: a. Threaded rod from structure b. Wall-mounted to concrete/CMU walls or wood or metal studs c. Beam clamps. d. Optional "multi-tiered" mounting to bottom of J-hook. e. Optional Fastener to raised floor pedestal. 4. Equipped with retainer or strap over top of J-hook once cables are installed. 5. Sized to support quantity of installed cables, plus 25%spare capacity. 6. Manufacturer: a. Erico—Caddy CAT Links Structured Cable 27 10 00-5 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 b. Panduit—J-Mod Cable Supports c. Or Approved Equivalent B. Hook& Loop Straps 1. Plenum-rated 2. Velcro construction with hook/loop strap 3. Color: black 4. Manufacturer: a. Panduit Tak-Ty Plenum Ties b. VELCRO ONE-WRAP c. Or Approved Equal C. Grid Wire Clips 1. Caddy 6Z4S WR RD FLANGE CLIP 2. Or Approved Equal 2.10 TELECOM GROUNDING AND BONDING A. TGB (Telecommunications Grounding Busbar)/SBB (Secondary Bonding Busbar) 1. Copper construction 2. Size: per Drawings 3. UL 467 Listed 4. TIA-607-hole pattern (pairs of lugs at 5/8" hole centers and 1" hole centers) 5. Part of kit that includes busbar,two insulators,two steel stand-off brackets, and mounting accessories 6. Manufacturer: a. 2"x 12" x 1/4" 1) Chatsworth 13622-012 2) Harger GBI14212TGBKT 3) Or equal from Hubbell 4) Or equal from Panduit 5) Or Approved Equal b. 4"x 12"x 1/4" 1) Chatsworth 40153-012 2) Harger GBI14412TMGBKT 3) Or equal from Hubbell 4) Or equal from Panduit Structured Cable 27 10 00-6 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 5) Or Approved Equal B. Two-Hole Lugs 1. UL listed. 2. Two-hole, long barrel, electro tin-plated compression lug with inspection port 3. Manufacturer: a. Chatsworth 40162-XXX b. Harger—GECLBseries c. Burndy d. Or equal from Hubbell e. Or Approved Equal C. Conductors 1. Minimum conductor size shall be#6 AWG; sized based on length per Table on Drawings 2. Green sheath 3. Insulation shall be rated for the environment where it is installed. 4. Manufacturer: a. Chatsworth b. Harger c. Hubbell d. Or Approved Equal e. Or approved conductors listed in Division 26. D. Conduit Clamps 1. Tinned copper with 1-1/2-inches of contact area. 2. Can be connected to conductors via exothermic connection or standard compression lugs. 3. Manufacturer: a. Harger—UPC series b. Or equal from Hubbell c. Or Approved Equal 2.11 LABELING A. Cable Labeling 1. For Horizontal Cables and Inside-Plant Backbone Cables a. Laser/Ink Jet Self Laminating Labels b. Manufacturer: Structured Cable 27 10 00-7 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 1) Panduit—S100X Series 2) Or equal from Brady 3) Or equal from Dymo 4) Or equal from Hellermann Tyton 5) Or Approved Equivalent 2. For Outside-Plant Backbone Cables and Innerduct a. Self-laminating cable marker tag,tie on (with zip ties) b. Manufacturer: 1) Fiber Optic—Panduit PST-FO, Mooseline F1-0095 2) Copper—Mooseline F1-0095 B. Rack and Patch Panel Labeling 1. Vinyl cloth label 2. Lettering/numbering text height 3/8"to 1/2" 3. Manufacturer: a. Brady PTL series b. Panduit PCL037 series c. Or Approved Equivalent 2.12 PLYWOOD BACKBOARD A. Fire-treated,AC grade plywood. B. 6'tall by 6' wide by%"thick C. Locations as noted on Drawings. D. Painted with two-coats of fire-retardant white paint (mask out a minimum of one stamp on each piece of plywood used) 2.13 Firestopping Systems A. Fire-Rated Pathway Device (Sleeve) 1. Steel pathway(sleeve)with integral intumescent firestopping material to facilitate the initial installation -and frequent moves, adds, and changes -of low-voltage voice/data, fiber,video, security, paging, etc cabling. 2. UL System meeting the hourly fire-rating of the wall or floor type 3. Multiple pathways in the same location shall be ganged together. 4. Plenum-rated 5. Manufacturer: a. Specified Technologies Inc—EZ Path Fire-Rated Pathway 1) 2"—Series 22 Structured Cable 27 10 00-8 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 2) 3"—Series 33 3) 4"—Series 44 B. Firestopping for conduit penetrations 1. For metallic conduit or tube to be installed through 1 or 2 hr fire-rated wall or floor. 2. Manufacturer: a. Gypsum board stud walls 1) Specified Technologies- UL System No. W-L-1222 with SpecSeal LCI Sealant b. Concrete floors or walls 1) Specified Technologies—UL System No. C-AJ-1353 with SpecSeal LCI Sealant C. Firestopping for backboxes in fire-or smoke-rated wall 1. For Communications backboxes to be installed in 1 or 2 hr fire-rated or smoke-rated walls. 2. STC sound rating—64 or higher(related to specific construction) 3. Shall meet criteria of UL263 and classified for up to hrs as a Wall Opening Protective Material (Category CLIV) 4. Manufacturer: a. Specified Technologies—SpecSeal Power Shield D. Smoke-Rated or Acoustical Sleeves 1. Metallic or non-metallic pathway(sleeve) with integral self-adjusting smoke and sound sealing system to facilitate the initial installation—and frequent moves, ads, and changes —of low-voltage voice/data, fiber,video, security, paging, etch cabling. 2. L Rating—Air Leakage Test Procedure tested per UL1479 without a Fire Test 3. Less than 1.25 cubic feet per minute for 0%fill (cable) capacity 4. Less than 2.5 cubic feet per minute for 1 to 100%fill (cable) capacity 5. Sound Transmission Classification (STC)—59 or higher(related to specific construction) 6. Plenum-rated 7. Manufacturer: a. Specified Technologies Inc— NEZ Pathway E. Fire-rated Conduit (Circuit Integrity)Wrap 1. Endothermic wrap for EMT and RMC for protection of cable pathways for critical life safety circuits. 2. Tested to ASTM E1725 for circuit integrity. 3. Manufacturer: a. Specified Technologies—E-Wrap Endothermic Wrap 3.00 EXECUTION Structured Cable 27 10 00-9 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 3.01 CODES, STANDARDS, REGULATIONS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM B 1 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire 2. ASTM B 8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft 3. ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3) (2700 I<N-m/m3) 4. ASTM D 709 Laminated Thermosetting Materials C. Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS) D. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) 1. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 14th Edition 2. Outside Plant Design Reference Manual 6th Edition 3. ANSI/BICSI Data Center Design and Implementation Best Practices 4. NECA/BICSI 568-D Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling 5. NECA/BICSI 607-D, Standard for Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings E. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 1. FCC Part 15, Radiated Emissions Limits 2. FCC Part 68, Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network 3. FCC Part 76, Cable Television Service F. Insulated Cable Design Consultants Association (ICEA) 1. ICEA S-87-640 Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable 2. ICEA 5-98-688 Broadband Twisted Pair,Telecommunications Cable Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors 3. ICEA S-99-689 Broadband Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cable Filled, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors G. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) H. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Design Consultants, Inc. (IEEE) 1. IEEE Standard IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistance, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potential of a Ground System 2. IEEE Standard 1100 Recommended for practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive 3. Electronic Equipment in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems(IEEE Emerald Book) 4. IEEE C2 Errata INT National Electrical Safety Code Structured Cable 27 10 00- 10 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 5. IEEE Std 100 The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms I. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 1. International Organization of Standardization/International Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC) 2. ISO/IEC 11801, Information Technology-Generic Cabling for Customer Premises, 3. ISO/IEC 14763-1, Information Technology-Implementation and Operation of Customer Premises Cabling-Administration 4. ISO/IEC 11801, Information Technology-Generic Cabling for Customer Premises 5. ISO/IEC 14763-1, Information Technology-Implementation and Operation of Customer Premises Cabling-Administration J. National Cable Television Association (NCTA) K. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA C62.61 Gas Tube Surge Arresters on Wire Line Telephone Circuits L. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA-70, National Electrical Code 2. NFPA-75, Protection of Electronic Computer Data Processing Equipment. 3. NFPA-101, Life Safety Code 4. NFPA-297, Guide on Principles and Practices for Telecommunications Systems 5. NFPA-780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. M. National Institute Standards and Technology(NIST) N. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) O. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) 1. ANSI/TIA-568-D, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises. 2. ANSI/TIA-568-D, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 3. ANSI/TIA-568-D, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard. 4. ANSI/TIA-S68-D, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. 5. ANSI/TIA-569-E Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 6. ANSI/TIA-606-D,Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure. 7. ANSI/TIA-607-D, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)for Customer Premises. 8. ANSI/TIA-758-B, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard. P. U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) Structured Cable 27 10 00- 11 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 1. RUS 17SS Telecommunications Standards and Specifications for Materials, Equipment and Construction 2. RUS Bull 1751F-643 Underground Plant Design 3. RUS Bull 1751F-815 Electrical Protection of Outside Plant 4. RUS Bull 1753F-201 Acceptance Tests of Telecommunications Plant (PC-4) 5. RUS Bull 1753F-401 Splicing Copper and Fiber Optic Cables (PC-2) 6. RUS Bull 345-65 Shield Bonding Connectors (PE-65) 7. RUS Bull 345-72 Filled Splice Closures (PE-74) 8. RUS Bull 345-83 Gas Tube Surge Arrestors (PE-80) Q. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape 2. UL 910 (NFPA 262)Applicable Flame Test 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. In the event of any conflicts between documents referenced herein and the contents of this specification,the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Design Consultant in writing of any such occurrences before purchasing or installing any equipment or materials. The Architect/Design Consultant will notify the Contractor of any actions required to resolve these conflicts. Such actions may include but are not limited to: design changes, equipment, materials and/or installation changes. In any event Contractor shall not supersede specifications and standards from the latest NFPA and NEC publications. In the event of any conflicts between Standards and Codes the more stringent shall take precedence. B. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), State of Texas,the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), and the National Electrical Code (NEC). If the Contractor identifies any item in the plans or specifications that will not strictly comply with the aforementioned laws, ordinances, and rules,the matter shall be referred to the Architect/Design Consultant for direction before proceeding with that part of the work. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with other trades to ensure any conflicts or potential conflicts are resolved prior to any work beginning on the project. D. The Contractor shall install the materials in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer's installation guidelines. E. No deviations from the plans or specifications shall be made without full consent in writing of the Architect/Design Consultant. The Contractor shall have written approval from the Architect/Design Consultant for any additional work beyond the Contract Documents prior to beginning such work. If the Contractor does not obtain written approval from the Architect/Design Consultant prior to proceeding with the work,the contractor shall not be reimbursed for the work. F. The Contractor shall obtain written permission from the Architect/Design Consultant before proceeding with any work that would necessitate cutting into or through any part of the building structure such as, but not limited to girders, beams, floors, walls, roofs, or ceilings. Structured Cable 27 10 00- 12 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 G. The contractor shall perform onsite coordination with the General Contractor, Structural, MEP, and Civil as required to discuss outside plant and inside plant clash detection with other trades. H. Contractor shall notify the Architect/Design Consultant a minimum of(2) weeks prior to beginning work and will participate in a pre-construction meeting with the Architect/Design Consultant to perform a walkthrough, review the scope of work, schedule, and escalation procedures. I. The Contractor shall maintain a work area free of debris,trash, empty cable reels, scrap cable, etc., and dispose of such items on a daily basis and return the site to the original state of cleanliness.The Contractor shall not use Owner's facilities for the disposal of excess or scrap materials. J. Equipment and materials installed by the Contractor shall be free of defects and damage. K. The contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage caused by the contractor during the installation. L. The contractor shall test all cables prior to installation. By failing to perform this testing operation, the Contractor shall accept the cable as compliant and assume all liability for the replacement of the cable at no cost to the Owner should it be found defective at a later date. M.Contractors shall maintain a set of working specifications, design drawings, and record drawings to be kept on site at all times and shall update the record drawings with any changes on a weekly basis. Record drawings shall be made available for inspection at the request of the Architect/Design Consultant. N. Equipment and materials shall be consistent throughout the installation. Where multiple units of the same type of equipment and materials are required, these units shall be a standard product with the same manufacturer and model number. O. Equipment and materials shall be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines at the Contractor's expense. P. The contractor shall make all stored equipment and materials available for inspection at the request of the Architect/Design Consultant. Q. All equipment and material used in the installation shall be approved by the manufacturer for the environment in which it is being installed. R. Cables shall be properly supported in accordance with industry standards at all times. Improperly supported cables shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. S. Contractor shall be responsible to properly protect information outlets from damage by other trades during construction. T. Cables shall be routed at 90-degree angles to the building structure. At no time shall a diagonal pull be installed. U. The Contractor shall not install cables in conduits or sleeves without nylon bushings. Cables installed through conduits or sleeves without nylon bushings shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Structured Cable 27 10 00- 13 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 A. The contractor is responsible for furnishing materials as required to provide a complete and functioning system. Quantities are not noted, so the information may be obtained from the technology drawings. B. Inter-Building Cable Plant 1. Fiber Optic Cable a. Singlemode 1) Contractor shall furnish and install fiber optic cables as indicated on the Drawings. 2) Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop at the ends of each cable to be coiled, mounted, and stored on the wall above the ladder rack. 3) Cables shall be routed utilizing the pathways as indicated in the technology drawings. 2. Fiber Optic Termination a. Contractor shall terminate all installed fiber optic strands with fusion splice connectors and place them into fiber optic enclosures with splice trays as indicated in the technology drawings. b. Contractor shall furnish fiber optic enclosures and coupler panels for all fiber optic strands and blank panels for all unused slots. 3. Copper Cable a. High Pair Count Cable 1) The Contractor shall furnish and install copper cables as indicated on the Drawings. 2) The Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop at the ends of each cable to be coiled, mounted, and stored on the wall above the ladder rack. 3) Cables shall be routed utilizing the pathways as indicated in the technology drawings. 4. High Pair Count Termination a. Building Entrance Terminals 1) The contractor shall terminate copper cable pairs between the existing communications rooms on contractor furnished and installed building entrance terminals as indicated in the technology drawings. 2) The contractor shall furnish and install all terminals fully populated with surge protection modules. 3) Contractor shall ground and bond all cables and terminals. 5. Wall-mounted Wiring Blocks a. The Contractor shall furnish and install wall mounted 110 wiring blocks and terminate cable whip from Building Entrance Terminal to this 110-block. Structured Cable 27 10 00- 14 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 b. The Contractor shall furnish and install tie cables from the protector block/110 block to contractor furnished and install category 5e patch panels. c. Contractor shall furnish and install tie cables/cross connects from the service provider high pair count copper cable to the owner's equipment rack as required. C. Intra-Building Cable Plant 1. Fiber Optic Cable a. Singlemode 1) Contractor shall furnish and install plenum rated fiber optic cables as indicated on the technology drawings. 2) Each fiber optic cable shall be installed inside a single cell of the fabric innerduct. 3) Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop at the ends of each cable to be coiled, mounted, and stored on the wall above the ladder rack. 4) Cables shall be routed utilizing the pathways as indicated in the technology drawings. 2. Fiber Optic Termination a. Contractor shall terminate all installed fiber optic strands with fusion splice connectors and place them into fiber optic enclosures with splice trays as indicated in the technology drawings. b. Contractor shall furnish fiber optic enclosures and coupler panels for all fiber optic strands and blank panels for all unused slots. 3. Copper Cable a. High Pair Count 1) The Contractor shall furnish and install copper cables as indicated on the Drawings. 2) The Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop at the ends of each cable to be coiled, mounted, and stored on the wall above the ladder rack. 3) Cables shall be routed utilizing the pathways as indicated in the technology drawings. 4. High Pair Count Termination a. Wall-mounted Wiring Blocks 1) The Contractor shall furnish and install wall-mounted 110-blocks to support all copper backbone pairs. Indicate proposed location on Shop Drawings. D. Horizontal Cable 1. No horizontal cable shall be longer than two hundred ninety-five (295)feet. If any station cable will be longer than two hundred ninety-five (295)feet, Contractor shall stop installation of the cable and immediately notify Architect/Design Consultant in Structured Cable 27 10 00- 15 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 writing. If Contractor fails to notify the Architect/Design Consultant in writing, Contractor shall replace cable at no cost to the Owner. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install horizontal cables within each Technology Region from the respective ER or TR to each outlet location as indicated in the technology drawings. 3. The Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop to be coiled, mounted, and stored above the ladder rack in each respective Equipment Room or Telecommunications Room. 4. The Contractor shall provide a 2-foot service loop coiled and supported directly above the workstation outlet. E. Horizontal Cable Termination 1. Contractor shall terminate cables as defined by the ANSI/TIA 568-D Commercial Building Wiring Standard with the EIA-568B sequence. 2. Workstations a. The contractor shall furnish and install modular jacks to terminate UTP horizontal cables. b. The contractor shall furnish and install faceplates, systems furniture faceplates, or surface-mount boxes to house modular jacks as indicated in the technology drawings. 1) Any unused faceplate positions shall have the appropriate number and color of blanks installed. 3. Equipment Rooms/Telecommunications Rooms a. Horizontal Cable for Data 1) Contractor shall furnish and install patch panels and horizontal cable managers to terminate horizontal data cables as indicated in the technology drawings. 2) The Contractor shall provide and install separate modular patch panels for the cabling supporting the following devices: a) Network Access (Blue cabling and jacks) b) Security Camera Access (Yellow cabling and jacks) c) Wireless Access(Blue cabling and jacks) b. Horizontal Cable requiring lightning protection. 1) The contractor shall furnish and install lightning protection on both ends of any cables on the exterior of the building as indicated in the technology drawings. 2) All lightning protection shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions including but not limited to placement and bonding requirements. F. Patch Cables Structured Cable 27 10 00- 16 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 1. Fiber a. Equipment Rooms/Telecommunications Room 1) The Contractor shall furnish and store (1) patch cable in original manufacturer packaging for 75%of the strands terminated per Equipment Room/Telecommunications Room: a) 100% of the patch cables shall be (2) meters in length and stored in the applicable Equipment Room/Telecommunications Room 2. Copper a. Workstations 1) The Contractor shall furnish and store (1) patch cable in original manufacturer packaging for each cable terminated. 2) 100%of the patch cables shall be (15)feet in length and stored in the applicable Equipment Room/Telecommunications Room. b. Equipment Rooms/Telecommunications Rooms 1) The Contractor shall furnish and store (1) patch cable in original manufacturer packaging for each cable terminated per Equipment Room/ Telecommunications Room: 2) 100%of the patch cables shall be (length TBD) foot in length and stored in the applicable Equipment Room/Telecommunications Room G. Cable Support 1. All cables shall be installed and supported in conduit systems, cable trays, cores, sleeves, etc. as indicated in the technology drawings. 2. When cables leave the main pathway systems as indicated on the technology drawings, they shall be installed and supported in Contractor furnished and installed j-hooks or adjustable cable supports. 3. No cable pathway shall exceed 40%fill ratio. 4. The contractor shall furnish a separate j-hook or adjustable cable support pathway for each cable type (data, paging/clock, and security). S. J-hooks and adjustable cable supports shall be installed no more than five-feet (5') apart on center, using only manufacturer-approved installation methods and hardware. 6. J-hooks and adjustable cable supports shall be installed no higher than 3-feet above the accessible ceiling to allow for ease of access for future moves, adds and changes 7. Do not utilize ceiling grid support wire; support j-hooks via wall, structure, or threaded rod support to structure. 8. J-hooks shall be furnished with closure clips. 9. Maximum sag between supports shall not exceed twelve inches (12"). 10. Contractors shall establish j-hook and adjustable cable supports pathways and shall coordinate pathways with all other disciplines. Under no circumstances shall these Structured Cable 27 10 00- 17 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 pathways be used to support other low-voltage applications not included in this specification. 11. The contractor shall provide and install horizontal cabling in unison with the construction process and prior to the gypsum ceiling being installed. 12. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL ZIP TIES BE USED ON ANY HORIZONTAL CABLING. 13. Cable Dressing a. No nylon cable ties shall be used at any time during the installation of the cable. b. Above Ceiling 1) Contractor shall furnish and install plenum-rated hook& loop straps in plenum-rated airspaces. a) The Contractor shall install no more than (1) hook& loop strap between each j-hook or saddle strap or at service loop locations. c. Equipment Rooms/Telecommunications Rooms 1) The Contractor shall bundle all visible cables by type (blue Cat 6 for data, blue Cat 6A for WAPs,yellow for security, white for paging, etc) with Contractor furnished and installed hook& loop straps. a) Hook& loop straps shall be installed twenty-four(24) inches apart in the center. H. Equipment Rooms/Telecommunications Room Build-Out 1. Plywood a. The Contractor shall furnish and install 6' H x 6' W x W D sheets of AC grade fire- rated plywood as indicated in the technology drawings. b. The Contractor shall mount all plywood vertically starting at 24"AFF. c. The Contractor shall cover the plywood with two (2) coats of Contractor furnished white fire-retardant paint leaving exposed (1)fire rating stamp per sheet. I. Cable Runway (Ladder Type) 1. Contractor shall furnish and install cable runway using manufacturer-approved hardware and installation methods as indicated in the technology drawings. 2. Contractor shall furnish and install vertical sections of cable runway using manufacturer- approved hardware and installation methods to provide transition and support where cables enter or exit the room using a vertical pathway. 3. Contractor shall furnish and install radius drops cross member and stringers above each rack using manufacturer-approved hardware and installation methods where cables exit the horizontal section of the ladder rack. 4. Contractor shall ground and bond each cable runway section to the next utilizing ground straps and ensure metal-to-metal contact. J. Equipment Racks and Cabinets Structured Cable 27 10 00- 18 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 1. The contractor shall furnish and install equipment racks with vertical management using manufacturer approved hardware and installation methods as indicated in the technology drawings. 2. Contractor shall secure relay racks to the concrete floor utilizing expandable concrete anchors. 3. Contractor shall secure the equipment racks to the cable runway using cable runway elevation kits and manufacturer approved hardware and installation methods. 4. The contractor shall bolt all equipment racks and vertical cable managers together. 5. Contractors shall individually ground and bond each equipment rack and ensure metal- to-metal contact. K. Patch Panels 1. Horizontal Cabling patch Panels shall be installed as indicated in the Technology Drawings. L. Grounding and Bonding 1. General Requirements: a. Ensure metal-to-metal contact for all terminations. b. All materials shall be UL Listed. c. Cable-to-cable connections and cable-to-building steel connections shall be exothermic welds. All other connections shall be made with UL Listed compression 2-hole lugs with anti-oxidation compound, utilizing both lug openings. d. Only one lug shall occupy a hole on the busbar. No stacking lugs or"double lugging" shall be permitted. e. Bonding conductors shall be sized based on length per table on the Drawings; minimum size#6 AWG and maximum size 750kcmil. f. For Communications Rooms/ Data Centers with a raised floor, provide a supplementary bonding grid (SGB) below the raised floor comprised of the following: 1) Bare copper conductor around the perimeter of the room 2) 12"x4"TGB/SBB, bonded to two points of the perimeter conductor and to the TGB/SBB above the access floor 3) Bond all piping and conduit entering raised floor at the perimeter. 4) Bond floor pedestal to Computer Room Air Conditioning Unit (if located in Communications Room) 5) Bare copper conductor between every four stringers, running the length/width of the room in both directions; bond to every fourth pedestal in both directions and to perimeter bonding conductor. 6) Bond floor pedestal to Power Distribution Unit feeder conduit below raised floor. Structured Cable 27 10 00- 19 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 2. Telecom Bonding System shared with Electrical Ground System—Compliant with BICSI TDMM a. For a building without structural steel,Telecommunications Bonding Backbone is not required. The TMGB/PBB shall be bonded to the Electrical Ground System via a Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications. TGB/SBB shall be bonded to the grounding busbar of the serving electrical panelboard. Bonding conductor routing shall be indicated on Record Drawings. b. Provide label above TGB/SBB shall indicated name of electrical panelboard and the room it is located. Indicate routing on pre-construction Shop Drawings, and update with final installed routing as part of As-Built Drawings. 3. Main Communication Room (MDF/Server Room) requirements a. Install TMGB/PBB at 84-inches above finished floor. b. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) 1) Division 26 Contractor shall provide Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications from the Electrical Ground System to the TMGB/PBB in the MDF Room. 2) BCT conductor size shall be sized based on length per the table on the Drawings and shall be no smaller than the largest TBB conductor. If installed underground, install in dedicated 2-inch diameter conduit. c. Provide bonding conductors to the following equipment within the Communication Room (where available/installed): 1) Structural steel or support beams are located within the room. 2) If the electrical distribution panelboard serving the Communications Room is located within the Communications Room, bond TGB/SBB to ground bus of the panelboard. 3) Overhead ladder rack 4) Equipment racks, cabinets, and enclosures 5) Surge protectors/ building entrance terminals. 6) Exposed cable shields 7) Continuous metallic conduits for low-voltage cabling that stub into the Communication Room 8) Any additional equipment or pathways where bonding/grounding is recommended by the equipment manufacturer or the referenced standards (TIA 607 and NECA/BICSI 607). 4. Secondary Communication Rooms(IDFs/Data Rooms) a. Install TGB/SBB at 84-inches above finished floor. b. Provide bonding conductors to the following equipment within the Communication Room (where available/installed): 1) Structural steel or support beams are located within the room. Structured Cable 27 10 00-20 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 2) If the electrical distribution panelboard serving the Communications Room is located within the Communications Room, bond TGB/SBB to ground bus of the panelboard. 3) Overhead ladder rack 4) Cable trays in corridor 5) Equipment racks, cabinets, and enclosures 6) Surge protectors/ building entrance terminals. 7) Exposed cable shields 8) Continuous metallic conduits for low voltage cabling that stub into the Communication Room 9) Any additional equipment or pathways where bonding/grounding is recommended by the equipment manufacturer or the referenced standards (TIA 607 and NECA/BICSI 607). M.Wire-mesh cable tray 1. Coordinate with all other disciplines to ensure cable tray routing and installation is coordinated with other systems. 2. Coordination with all other disciplines to ensure the 12-inch clearance above the tray is maintained. 3. Any elevation changes shall have radius drops installed to support the cables properly. 4. Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Utilize 45-degree off-sets/routing to change elevation and horizontal routing. 5. Provide support to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction. 6. Where cable trays encounter a non-fire-, smoke-, or acoustically rated wall, cut opening through wall to facilitate continuous cable tray installation through wall. 7. Where cable trays encounter fire, smoke, or acoustically rated wall, stop cable tray and provide Fire-or Smoke-Rated Pathway Devices. Provide a number of devices to match square-inch capacity of cable tray. Devices shall be ganged together with manufacturer- specific accessory. 8. Ground and bond cable tray in accordance with NFPA 70,TIA-607, and NECA/BICSI-607. a. Bond cable tray to the Telecom Ground Bar in each Communications Rooms. Utilize #6 AWG conductor for lengths up 13 feet, a#4 AWG conductor for lengths of 14 to 20 feet, and a#3 AWG conductor for lengths of 21 to 26 feet. Refer to TIA 607 standard for conductor size requirements for lengths longer than 26 feet. b. Provide ground lugs between each section of cable tray to ensure electrical continuity of cable tray installation. Where cable tray sections are separated by conduit or firestopping sleeves, provide#6 AWG bonding jumper between cable tray sections. 9. Cable Tray Supports Structured Cable 27 10 00-21 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 a. Cable tray shall be supported by a trapeze or wall support brackets. No center support brackets shall be allowed. b. A minimum of 3/8-inch all-thread shall be used for trapeze supports. c. Support in accordance with manufacturer recommendations but at not more than 10-foot intervals. d. The cable tray shall be no less than 3-inches above the lay-in ceiling. e. Cable tray shall be rigidly supported and level. f. All thread shall be covered from the attachment to the trapeze system to 3-inches above the tray to protect the cables from being chaffed. g. All supports shall attach to structure or a rigid surface such as a plywood backer in a sheet rock wall. h. Support shall not be shared with any other discipline. N. Firestopping 1. Fire-Rated Pathway Devices a. Provide Fire-Rated Pathway Device(s)wherever Communications cabling routed above accessible ceiling needs to be routed through a fire-rated wall. Quantity and size of devices shall be sized per manufacturer's published cable fill counts, leaving 25%spare capacity. b. Coordinate quantity, size and locations with other Division 27 Subcontractors and indicate quantity, size, location, product make and model number, and UL System number on Pre-Construction Shop Drawings. c. Coordinate quantity, size and locations with other Division 27 Subcontractors and indicate quantity, size, location, product make and model number, and UL System number on Pre-Construction Shop Drawings. d. Affix adhesive wall label immediately adjacent to devices to communicate to future cable technicians, authorities having jurisdiction and others the manufacturer of the device and the corresponding UL System number installed. 2. Firestopping for Conduits a. Provide firestopping components as part of a UL System for all conduit penetrations through fire-rated and smoke-rated walls and floors. b. Coordinate locations and UL System with other Division 27 Subcontractors and indicate locations and UL System number on Pre-Construction Shop Drawings. c. Affix adhesive wall label immediately adjacent to devices to communicate to future cable technicians, authorities having jurisdiction and others the manufacturer of the device and the corresponding UL System number installed. 3. Firestopping for Backboxes a. Provide firestopping component(s) as part of a UL tested/approved solution for backboxes located in fire-rated and smoke-rated walls. Structured Cable 27 10 00-22 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 b. Coordinate locations with other Division 27 Subcontractors and indicate locations on Pre-Construction Shop Drawings. 4. Smoke-Rated/Acoustical Pathway Device a. Provide Smoke-Rated Pathway Device(s) wherever Communications cabling routed above accessible ceiling needs to be routed through a smoke-rated wall or through a wall of a Noise Critical Room. b. Quantity and size of devices shall be sized per manufacturer's published cable fill counts, leaving 40%spare capacity. c. Coordinate quantity, size and locations with other Division 27 Subcontractors and indicate quantity, size, location, product make and model number, and UL System number on Pre-Construction Shop Drawings. d. For smoke-rated partitions:Affix adhesive wall label immediately adjacent to devices to communicate to future cable technicians, authorities having jurisdiction and others the manufacturer of the device and the corresponding UL System number installed. 5. Fire-rated Conduit (Circuit Integrity)Wrap a. Provide Fire-rated Conduit (Circuit Integrity) Wrap for certain Communications conduits for the following systems: 1) Section 275129 Two-Way Communications System 2) Section 275319 Emergency Responder Radio Coverage (ERRC) DAS b. Coordinate conduit size and lengths requiring wrap with Subcontractors of those sections prior to Bid and include cost to provide that wrap in the Bid. O. System Labeling 1. Contractors shall verify room numbers and confirm the final room numbering scheme prior to generating any labels. 2. Horizontal Cables shall be labeled within (12) inches from the termination point inside the Equipment Room/Telecommunications Rooms. 3. Horizontal Cables shall be labeled within (6) inches from the termination point at the workstation end. 4. Backbone Fiber and Copper Cables shall be labeled within (12) inches of the visible end of the jacket and at each pull point location. If passing through an IDF it will be labeled when entering and leaving that IDF. 5. Fiber Innerduct shall be labeled within (12) inches of the point of entry of the fiber optic enclosure and at each pull point location. If passing through an OF it will be labeled when entering and leaving that IDF. 6. Bonding conductors shall be labeled within (12) inches from their termination point. 7. Cables shall be labeled identically at both ends. 8. Equipment Racks Structured Cable 27 10 00-23 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 a. Equipment racks in each Equipment/Telecommunication Room shall be labeled in sequential numeric order. 1) Labels shall be centered on the top front of the equipment rack. 9. Cabinets a. Cabinets in each Equipment/Telecommunication Room shall be labeled in sequential numeric order. 1) Labels shall be centered on the top front of the Cabinet. 10. Fiber Optic Enclosures a. Fiber optic enclosures shall be labeled alpha-numeric starting with the 1st fiber optic enclosure in the top of the 1st equipment rack. b. A label for each terminated strand shall be securely placed inside each fiber optic enclosure. 11. Backbone Cable a. Fiber Optic Cable 1) Fiber optic backbone cable labels shall contain the cable origin room number, the cable destination room number, fiber strand numbers, and type (i.e. B 126-A118/001-012 M M). 2) Fiber optic couplers panels in fiber enclosures shall be labeled at each end by strand denoting building code, Equipment Room and/or Telecommunications Room, enclosure number, and strand number to and from respectively (i.e. B126/01/01-12—A118/01/01-12). b. High Pair Count Copper Cable 1) For high pair count copper backbone cables,the label scheme shall contain, cable origin room number,the cable destination room number, and cable pairs (i.e. B126-A118/001-025). 12. Horizontal Cable a. Inside Equipment Rooms 1) Horizontal cables shall be labeled at each end with the destination end and origin room number, patch panel number, and port number. (i.e. 13126-13127- A01). 2) Patch panels in each closet shall be labeled sequentially starting with the first Patch Panel in the top of the first relay rack(A, B, C, D, E, etc.). 3) All patch panels will indicate the room number along with the patch panel port designation.The labels shall be mechanical labels that are neatly printed with uniform font and evenly spaced across the patch panel. Room numbers will be in sequential order throughout the panels as indicated on the drawings. 4) 110-type blocks shall contain the destination room number, pair numbers, and binder pair number under each pair termination. (example) Structured Cable 27 10 00-24 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 a) 110-type block labels shall be printed on product-specific label strips and placed into label holders. 13. Workstation Faceplates a. Cables and wall plates shall be labeled denoting origin, Equipment Room/Telecommunications Room Number, Patch Panel, 110-type termination block, and Port Number. (i.e. B127-A01). 14. TMGB/PBB and TGB/SBB a. TMGB/PBB and TGB/SBB shall be labeled with a unique identifier(i.e.TMGB/PBB- B126,TGB/SBB-A118). 15. Bonding Conductors a. The following conductors shall be labeled at each end with the destination end and origin room number(i.e. B126—IDFA118). 1) Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications 2) Telecommunications Bonding Backbone 3) Grounding Equalizer 3.04 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Fiber Optic Cable 1. Installed strands shall be tested and certified in accordance with industry standards. 2. Only Manufacturer Certified Technicians shall perform testing. 3. The Contractor shall test and certify all fiber optic cable strands with approved field tester(s)that are within their calibration period.The Contractor shall be liable for all re- testing required in the event tests are performed with non-approved test equipment or tester(s)that are not within their calibration period. 4. The Contractor shall provide calibration results from the manufacturer showing the current calibration of the testers. 5. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Design Consultant a minimum of five (5) days in advance to observe cable testing. 6. The Architect/Design Consultant may randomly select 5%of the installed strands for test verification purposes.The Contractor shall re-test these strands in the presence of the Architect/Design Consultant and the results shall be compared to the previously Contractor submitted test results. In the event that any of the verification tests differ in results from the previously submitted test results, all testing shall be declared a failure and the Contractor shall re-test 100%of the installed strands at no cost to the Owner. B. Copper Backbone Cable 1. Installed pairs shall be tested and certified in accordance with industry standards. 2. Only Manufacturer Certified Technicians shall perform testing. 3. The Contractor shall test and certify all copper pairs with approved field tester(s)that are within their calibration period.The Contractor shall be liable for all re-testing Structured Cable 27 10 00-25 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 required in the event tests are performed with non-approved test equipment or tester(s) that are not within their calibration period. 4. The Contractor shall provide calibration results from the manufacturer showing the current calibration of the testers. 5. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Design Consultant a minimum of five (5) days in advance to observe cable testing. 6. The Architect/Design Consultant may randomly select 5%of the installed pairs for test verification purposes.The Contractor shall re-test these pairs in the presence of the Architect/Design Consultant and the results shall be compared to the previously Contractor submitted test results. In the event that any of the verification tests differ in results from the previously submitted test results, all testing shall be declared a failure, and the Contractor shall re-test 100%of the installed pairs at no cost to the Owner. C. Category 6 and 6A UTP Cable 1. Cable links shall be tested in accordance with industry standards. 2. Only Manufacturer Certified Technicians shall perform testing. 3. The Contractor shall test and certify the structured cable system with approved field tester(s)that are within their calibration period.The Contractor shall be liable for all re- testing required in the event tests are performed with non-approved test equipment or tester(s)that are not within their calibration period. 4. No Fail or *Pass results will be accepted. 5. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Design Consultant a minimum of five (5) days in advance to observe field testing. 6. The Architect/Design Consultant may randomly select 5%of the installed links for test verification purposes. The Contractor shall re-test these links in the presence of the Architect/Design Consultant and the results shall be compared to the previously Contractor submitted test results. In the event that any of the verification tests differ in results from the previously submitted test results, all testing shall be declared a failure and the Contractor shall re-test 100%of the installed links at no cost to the Owner. D. Grounding and Bonding 1. Main Building Ground a. Coordinate with electrical contractor and provide a copy of their test results for the main building ground. The results shall be below 25 Ohms. 2. Two-Point Ground/Continuity Testing a. Prior to the two-point ground testing, a visual inspection shall be performed to verify that the bonding and grounding system is installed according to the drawings and specifications and in compliance with the TIA-607-D Standard. b. All testing shall be conducted prior to any active equipment is installed. c. The Contractor shall use an earth ground resistance tester that is configured for a continuity test. This is also known as a two-point tester or a "dead earth"test. Structured Cable 27 10 00-26 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 d. Prior to the two-point continuity test conduct a voltage test to ensure there is no stray voltage in the system. e. The testing shall include but is not limited to the following points. 1) Building electrical grounding electrode and the TMGB/PBB. 2) TGMB/PBB TGB/SBB to electrical ground in ER/TR. 3) TGMB/PBB TGB/SBB to the building steel (if present). 4) TMGB/PBB to each TGB/SBB. 5) Building steel (if present) to the electrical ground. f. Per the TIA-607-D,the maximum value for resistance between any point in the telecommunications bonding and grounding system and the building's electrical grounding electrode system is 100 milliohms. In the case of long TBB and Grounding Equalizer conductor runs,the resistance of the conductor must be factored into the total resistance. For example, 1 km of a No. 3/0 conductor has a resistance of 0.2028 ohms. (0.06180 ohms per 1000 ft.) g. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Design Consultant a minimum of five (S) days in advance to observe field testing. 3.05 PROJECT CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION A. As-Built Drawings 1. Drawings shall be provided to the Architect/Design Consultant at the time of substantial completion. Final payment will not be recommended until drawings are received and approved by the Architect/Design Consultant. 2. Provide Drawings depicting the condition of the structured cabling system as installed. 3. As-Built drawings shall be produced in AutoCAD 2017 or higher and provided in hardcopy and electronically in .dwg and PDF format. 4. Drawings shall retain the formatting and title block of the original drawings as issued by the Architect/Design Consultant. 5. Drawings shall be provided utilizing the original scale and shall include the exact dimensions and locations of all equipment room/telecommunication room layouts, wall elevations, equipment rack elevations, ladder racks, cable tray, sleeves, backbone and horizontal cable pathways,workstation locations, and labeling scheme. 6. A laminated copy of the telecommunications room service region with the labeled work areas outlet shall be provided and hung in each telecommunications room. Drawing size will be 30"x42". B. Test Documentation 1. Test documentation shall be provided to the Architect/Design Consultant at the time of substantial completion. Final payment will not be recommended until these test results are received and approved by the Architect/Design Consultant. 2. Provide test documentation for the structured cabling system as installed. Structured Cable 27 10 00-27 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 3. Test results shall be provided in original electronic format (i.e., manufacturer's proprietary testing software along with applicable reader software) and PDF electronic format. 4. Test documentation shall be bound, sectioned, and tabbed in the following sequence as applicable: a. Tester(s) Calibration Certificate(s) b. Inter-Building Backbone Fiber Optic Cable c. Inter-Building Backbone Copper Cable d. Intra-Building Backbone Fiber Optic Cable e. Intra-Building Backbone Count Copper f. Horizontal Category 3 Cable g. Horizontal Category 5e Cable h. Horizontal Category 6 Cable i. Horizontal Category 6A Cable j. Main Building Ground k. Two-Point Ground/Continuity Test C. Manufacturer's Performance Certification 1. Certificate shall be provided to the Architect/Design Consultant at the time of final system acceptance. Final payment will not be recommended until the certificate of certification is received and approved by the Architect/Design Consultant. a. The manufacturer of the solution shall furnish a performance certification as per the specifications starting at final system acceptance. b. One original and two copies of the Manufacturer's Certificate shall be provided. D. Manufacturer's Product Warranty 1. Certificate of product warranty shall be provided to the Architect/Design Consultant at the time of final system acceptance. Final payment will not be recommended until this certificate of product warranty is received and approved by the Architect/Design Consultant. a. The manufacturer of the solution shall furnish a product warranty as per the specifications starting at final system acceptance. b. One original and two copies of the Manufacturer's product warranty shall be provided. E. Contactor's Statement of Warranty 1. A statement of warranty shall be provided to the Architect/Design Consultant at the time of substantial completion. Final payment will not be recommended until statement of warranty is received and approved by the Architect/Design Consultant. Structured Cable 27 10 00-28 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 a. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of a one (1)year warranty on all materials, labor and workmanship starting at final system acceptance. b. One original and two copies of Contractor's warranty terms and conditions to include contact information (i.e. Contractor name, Point of Contact, address, phone number and email address) and start and end date for warranty call outs. END OF SECTION 27 10 00 Structured Cable 27 10 00-29 Police Substation—Far South-23177 08-30-2024 SECTION 28 13 00-ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section identifies the requirements, technical design, and specifications for the access control system at the City of Corpus — Calallen Sub-Station, located in Corpus Christi, Texas ("Owner"). The access control system as specified is an expansion of the Owner's Industry-Standard access control system and includes access control server (Owner furnished/Owner installed (OFOI),access control software,control panels,sub- controller panels, card readers, door position sensors, request to exit devices, cabling, power supplies, and any associated software, hardware, or licensing as specified. B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to review this specification and associated project specifications and drawings in their entirety, prior to bidding on the project. By bidding on this project, the contractor acknowledges that they have read and fully understand these specifications, with no exceptions. Contractor shall review the drawings, specifications, and existing conditions prior to bidding on the project.Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect / Design Consultant via request for information (RFI) in writing for evaluation and or clarification. If these items are not brought to the attention of the Architect/Design Consultant the more costly or difficult manner, and the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be provided by the contractor in accordance with the Architect's/ Design Consultant's interpretation at no additional cost to the owner. C. Contractor shall furnish and install all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to provide a complete and functional turn-key access control system regardless of any items not listed or described in this specification or associated drawings. D. Requirement Sections Table of Contents 1. Contractor Experience Requirements 2. Submittal Requirements 3. Products—General Requirements 4. Acceptable Manufacturers 5. Codes, Standards and Regulations 6. Execution -General Requirements 7. Coordination Requirements 8. System Requirements 9. Testing Requirements Access Control 28 13 00- 1/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 10. Training Requirements 11. Substantial Completion 12. Project Closeout Documentation 13. Attachments 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Drawings, Specifications, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and other requirements of Division 1 apply to the work specified in Division 28 and shall be complied with in every respect. The Contractor shall examine all the items which make up the Contract Documents and shall coordinate them with the work on the project. 1.03 CONTRACTOR EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall be a certified Access Control System partner prior to submitting a bid for the work. B. The Contractor shall possess all relevant Manufacturer Certifications (i.e. access control systems, hardware installation, software installation and programming) for both the company and individual technicians prior to submitting a bid for the work. C. The Contractor shall have a manufacturer certified technician onsite throughout the duration of the installation phase of the project. D. The Contractor's Project Manager shall be dedicated to this project for the duration of the project and shall be available for all onsite coordination meetings. E. The Contractor shall have been in business for a minimum of five (5)years. F. The Contractor shall have a local office with local technicians and an adequate workforce to complete this project within a 75-mile radius of the project site. G. The Contractor shall have completed a minimum of five (5) projects similar in size and scope to the Owner's installation, where the systems have been in continuous satisfactory operation for at least one (1)year. H. Subcontractors shall be identified at the time of bid and comply with the requirements and intentions of these specifications, associated drawings, and related contract documents. 1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Submittal 1. Contractor shall not order, purchase,or install any equipment until pre-installation submittals have been accepted in writing by the Architect/Design Consultant. Access Control 28 13 00-2/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 2. The Contractor is responsible for notifying and obtaining written approval via RA from the Architect/Design Consultant/Owner of any proprietary devices, software, and/or installation processes. 3. Contractor is responsible for obtaining permitting as required in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), local, city, state, federal, and/or applicable law requirements. 4. Contractor shall ensure submittals are submitted in 15 business days of award to ensure all products can be ordered and received on site in order to not cause any delays. Any products having long lead times (more than 60 days) that may negatively impact the schedule shall be clearly identified in writing so the review and approval can be expedited. 5. All submittals shall be submitted in the same sequence as they are listed in the specifications(i.e. product data in the sequence items are listed in the product data section, manufacturer product certifications for company, manufacturer product certifications for installers, etc.). Submittals not in the proper sequence will not be approved. 6. Contractor shall provide the following as part of their submittal: a. Manufacturer product data sheets for each proposed system component. 1) For product data sheets containing more than one (1) part number or product, the Contractor shall clearly identify the specific part number or product being submitted. Product data sheets without the part number clearly identified will not be approved. 2) Contractor shall identify any products that are discontinued, end of life, or near end of life, and shall propose equal alternate to the discontinued product in writing. b. Manufacturer Product Certifications for Company. c. Manufacturer Product Certifications for Installers. d. Manufacturer Warranty letters. e. Documentation indicating that Contractor has been in business for(5)years. f. Address of Contractor's local office within a 75-mile radius of the project site. g. Quantity of full-time, local technicians within a 75-mile radius of the project site. h. List of five(5)contractor-installed projects of a similar size and scope that have been in operation for at least (1) year. The Contractor shall provide the following information for each project: Project Name, Project Location, Project Start Date, Project Completion Date, Project Start Cost, Project Access Control 28 13 00-3/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 Completion Cost, Brief Description of Project, Client Point of Contact Name and Phone Number. i. List of completed and ongoing projects with the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the following information for each project: Project Name, Project Location, Project Start Date, Project Completion Date, Project Start Cost, Project Completion Cost, and Brief Description of Project. j. List of subcontractors performing any work on the project. List shall clearly identify the subcontractor's legal name and address, the scope of work to be performed by the subcontractors and the overall percentage of the project being provided by the subcontractor. If there are no subcontractors performing any work on the project, submit a statement on company letterhead clearly indicating no subcontractors will be performing any work on this project. k. Manufacturer's certification letter confirming that the proposed access control system components do not have any known cybersecurity notices, bulletins, or alerts. If a vulnerability is discovered, the contractor shall notify the Architect/Design Consultant within 24 business hours. Provide the make and model of the associated equipment and the vulnerability. I. Manufacturer cybersecurity hardening guide. If one is not available, provide documentation from the manufacturer stating such. m. A complete set of shop drawings to include at minimum but are not limited to: 1) Proposed and/or samples of original contractor security schedules. Schedules are not to be copy/paste of schedules provided within the contract documents. Schedules proposed shall be utilized as part of As- Built drawings with coordination with Div. 27 for additional information as required for network components. a) Device and equipment schedules shall include at a minimum but are not limited to: (1) Device Label (2) Device Type (3) Device Power Requirements (4) Terminating MDF/ IDF/Panel Location b) Additional networking information as required to include: (1) Rack (2) Network switch Access Control 28 13 00-4/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 (3) IP addresses (4) Patch panel (5) Surge/lighting protection (6) Power source 2) Elevation and Topography Drawings to illustrate the associated devices and equipment and the heights at which they will be installed. 3) Signal Flow Diagram including full security topology. n. Supplemental documents to include at a minimum but are not limited to: 1) Contractor Safety Plan detailing steps Contractor will take to ensure a safe work environment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The following sections specifically list the acceptable equipment types and items for this project. B. All software, hardware, and equipment(from the date of RFP) shall be tested,currently available and commercially off the shelf product. (COTS). C. All wiring, equipment, and installation materials shall be Commercial Grade, new, and of the highest quality to meet or exceed the performance and features of the equipment and devices specified herein. D. Written approval must be obtained from the Architect/ Design Consultant/Owner for any proprietary or custom software and/or equipment prior to the beginning of the project. E. All devices shall be installed with the manufacturer recommended mounts and accessories as necessary for the installation locations type as scheduled. F. Unless otherwise stated, all software and licensing shall be for the most current, up to date version of the system provided. For existing systems, Contractor shall obtain written verification of the Owner's most current software version and notify via RFI the Architect/ Design Consultant/Owner if implementation of the most current software / license version will require an upgrade to the Owner's existing system. G. Architect/ Design Consultant/ Owner will have final determination of acceptability of all proposed equipment and must approve submitted equipment prior to purchase or installation. Access Control 28 13 00-5/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 H. Proposed equivalent items must be approved in writing by the Architect / Design Consultant/ Owner prior to purchase or installation. Proposed equivalent items must meet or exceed these specifications and the specifications of the specified item. I. In the event a manufacturer's specified product or part number has changed or is no longer available, Contractor shall submit a formal RFI for an appropriate substitute. J. In the event of a discrepancy between the specifications and the drawings, the greater quantity and/or better quality will be furnished at no additional cost to the owner. K. For listed products with no part number specified, Contractor shall provide a product that meets the performance requirements of these specifications, industry standard practices, and intended application. L. Labels on all cabling, materials, and equipment must indicate a nationally recognized testing laboratory. M. Contractor shall review all products specified and required for this project to determine if there are any lead times for any products that may cause any delay. Contractor shall clearly identify any concerns with lead times in writing to the Architect / Design Consultant / Owner. If the Contractor does not identify any concerns with products having long lead times, it will be understood there are no long lead time issues and the Contractor will have all products on-site when needed to complete the job as per the project schedule. N. Any quantities listed are for reference only, contractor is responsible for furnishing materials as required to provide a fully functional turkey system. Where quantities are not noted, Contractor shall refer to drawings and schedules to determine exact quantities. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Access Control System Manufacturers 1. RS2 Access It! (Existing) B. Access Control System Software 1. RS2 Access It! (Existing) a. Version 9.3.1 C. Access Control System Licensing 1. Unless otherwise noted, all licensing for the specified system and add on components shall be Lifetime, Enterprise level licensing for the system and devices specified herein. Whereas Lifetime licenses are not available, provide documentation listing annual licensing costs for Owner's approval. Access Control 28 13 00-6/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 2. Contractor shall verify with the Owner's existing system for current maximum licensing capacities and notify via RFI if the installation of the project will exceed the current system capacities. D. Access Control System Hardware 1. Access Control Database/ File Server a. Refer to Part 3.3—System Requirements for additional requirements regarding quantity and sizing of server. b. The Access Control Database/ File Server shall consist of one of the following: 1) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (Existing) E. Access Control Application Server(s) a. Refer to Part 3.3—System Requirements for additional requirements regarding quantity and sizing of server(s). b. The Access Control Database/ File Server(s) shall consist of one of the following: 1) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (Existing) 2. Client Workstation(s) a. Refer to Part 3.3 -System Requirements for additional requirements b. The Client Workstation(s) shall consist of one of the following: 1) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed 3. ID Badge Printing Workstation a. Refer to Part 3.3 -System Requirements for additional requirements b. The Badging Workstation(s) shall consist of one of the following: 1) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI) C. Each badging workstation shall be accompanied by the following: 1) Badge Printer with Laminator a) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI) 2) Camera a) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI) 3) Backdrop with Stand Access Control 28 13 00-7/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 a) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI) 4) Slot Hole Punch a) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI) 5) Supplies to print 200 credential cards consisting of: a) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI) 4. Access Control System Controller Boards a. Intelligent Controllers— Enclosed Wall Mounted 1) Refer to Part 3.3—System Requirements for additional requirements for quantity and sizing of enclosed products 2) Enclosure to be contractor provided/contractor installed per manufacturer requirements, unless otherwise noted. a) RS2 LP-1502-53 b. Door Controllers- Enclosed Wall Mounted 1) Refer to Part 3.3—System Requirements for additional requirements for quantity and sizing of enclosed products 2) Enclosure to be contractor provided/contractor installed per manufacturer requirements, unless otherwise noted. a) RS2 MR-52-S3/MR-50-S3 c. Input Board—Enclosed Wall Mounted 1) Refer to Part 3.3—System Requirements for additional requirements for quantity and sizing of enclosed products 2) Enclosure to be contractor provided/contractor installed per manufacturer requirements, unless otherwise noted. a) RS2 MR-16N d. Output Boards- Enclosed Wall Mounted 1) Refer to Part 3.3—System Requirements for additional requirements for quantity and sizing of enclosed products 2) Enclosure to be contractor provided/contractor installed per manufacturer requirements, unless otherwise noted. a) RS2 MR-16OUT Access Control 28 13 00-8/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 5. Access Control System Reader(s) and Credential(s) a. Provided readers shall be OSDP from factory. b. Proximity/Smart Card/Mobile Reader 1) Wall Mount a) HID Signo 40 Reader 2) Mullion Mount a) HID Signo 20 Reader 3) Contractor shall confirm Class (Prox, ect.) with Owner prior to procurement and installation. 6. Access Control System Credentials a. Contactless 1) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI) 7. Door Position Sensor(s) a. Recessed 1) GRI 180-12 Series 2) Or approved equal b. Surface Mount 1) GRI 410P Series 2) Or other approved equivalent c. Weather-Resistant Surface Mount(for Exterior Doors, Hatches, etc.) 1) GRI 4400 Series 2) Or approved equal d. Overhead Door Position Switch 1) GRI 4700-A Series (Track Mounted) 2) GRI 200 Series (Floor Mounted) 3) Or approved equal e. Tamper Switch(es) Access Control 28 13 00-9/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 1) GRI PBF-2020 Series 2) Included with enclosed products 3) Or approved equal 8. Request to Exit Device(s) a. FIR Motion (where required) 1) Bosch DS160 Detector 2) Or Approved Equal b. Integral with Electrified Door Hardware 1) Reference Division 8 Finish Hardware Specifications and schedule for integral request to exit. 9. Push Button—Latching (Duress, Lockdown/Lockout) a. Concealed 1) Honeywell 269R 2) United Security HUB-213 b. Or other approved equivalent 10. Push Button—Momentary(Door Release) a. Under Desk 1) Dynalock 6336 with ILM option a) Use Dynalock 6338 with ILM option for multiple door setups 2) Or other approved equivalent F. Access Control System Power Supplies 1. 12v/24v Enclosed Products a. LifeSafety Power ProWire Series b. Or Approved Equal 2. Or approved equal G. Uninterruptible Power Supplies/Battery Backup 1. UPS Access Control 28 13 00- 10/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 a. Owner Furnished/Owner Installed (OFOI) 2. Battery Backup a. Yuasa NP12-7 b. Or approved equal H. Electrified Locking Mechanism Power Supply 1. Reference Division 8 Finish Hardware Specification and Schedule for electrified lock power hardware. I. Access Control System Cabling 1. Cabling shall be yellow overall jacketed unless otherwise noted. 2. Cabling shall be Un-Shielded unless otherwise noted. 3. Cabling shall be provided with Stranded conductors unless otherwise noted. 4. Cabling shall be rated for the environment for which they are to be installed and as codes require. (Plenum, Riser, OSP, etc.) 5. Typical cable sizes provided. Contractor is responsible for verifying and sizing lock /device power conductors based on power requirements and voltage drop calculations. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Windy City Wire b. Superior Essex C. Lake Cable d. Belden e. Tappan f. Or approved equal 7. Access Control Backbone Cabling a. 18 AWG/4 Conductor 8. Access Control Door Cabling a. 4-Element Composite cable typically consisting of: 1) 18 AWG/4 Conductor(Lock Power) 2) 22 AWG/1 Pair Shielded+ 18 AWG/2 Conductor(OSDP Reader) Access Control 28 13 00- 11/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 3) 22 AWG/2 Conductor(Door Position) 4) 22 AWG/4 Conductor(Request to Exit) 9. Push Button (Door Release/ Duress/ Lockdown Buttons) a. 22 AWG/4 Conductor J. Data Cable 1. Reference Division 27 Specifications K. Pathway Cable Support 1. Panduit J-Mod Cable Support System 2. Erico—CADDY CAT LINKS J-Hook Series 3. Panduit Plenum Rated Velcro Hook& loop (velcro) (Black) L. Labeling 1. Permanent Labels for Copper Cables a. Panduit Self-Laminating Labels b. Or approved equal M. Fire Stop/Sealants 1. Fire stop a. STI Spec Seal b. 3M Products c. Or approved equal 2. Sealants a. Masterseal NP1 b. Or approved equal PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 CODES, STANDARDS, REGULATIONS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Access Control 28 13 00- 12/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 1. ASTM B 1 (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire 2. ASTM B 8 (2004) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft 3. ASTM D 1557 (2007) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3) 4. ASTM D 709 (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting Materials C. Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS) D. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) 1. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 131" Edition 2. Outside Plant Design Reference Manual 5t" Edition 3. ANSI/BICSI 002-2011, Data Center Design and Implementation Best Practices 4. NECA/BICSI 568-2006 — Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling 5. NECA/BICSI 607-2011, Standard for Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings E. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 1. FCC Part 15, Radiated Emissions Limits, revised 1998 2. FCC Part 68,Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network, revised 1998 3. FCC Part 76, Cable Television Service, revised 1998 F. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) 1. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) (FIPS197) 2. FIPS201-2: Open Options DNA Fusion FIPS in conjunction with an E2-SSP-D2-FIPS, NSC-100-FIPS, RSC-2-FIPS and other listed components will provide an access control solution that is fully FIPS 201-2 compliant. 3. Personal Identity Verification (PIV) of Federal Employees and Contractors G. Homeland Security Presidential Directive 12 (HSPD12) H. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 1. ICEA 5-87-640 (2006) Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable Access Control 28 13 00- 13/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 2. ICEA S-98-688 (2006) Broadband Twisted Pair, Telecommunications Cable Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors 3. ICEA S-99-689 (2006) Broadband Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cable Filled, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors I. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) J. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 1. IEEE Standard 81-1983, IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistance, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potential of a Ground System 2. IEEE Standard 1100-1999, Recommended for practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive 3. Electronic Equipment in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (IEEE Emerald Book) 4. IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2007; INT 2008) National Electrical Safety Code 5. IEEE Std 100 (2000)The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms K. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 1. International Organization of Standardization/International Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC) 2. ISO/IEC 11801, Information Technology-Generic Cabling for Customer Premises, 1995 3. ISO/IEC 14443-3:2011— Identification Cards 4. ISO/IEC 14763-1, Information Technology-Implementation and Operation of Customer Premises Cabling-Administration, 1999 L. National Cable Television Association (NCTA) M. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 1. NECA 1-2015 Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction N. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA C62.61 (1993) Gas Tube Surge Arresters on Wire Line Telephone Circuits O. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA-70, National Electrical Code 2. NFPA-75, Protection of Electronic Computer Data Processing Equipment. Access Control 28 13 00- 14/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 3. NFPA-101, Life Safety Code 4. NFPA-297, Guide on Principles and Practices for Telecommunications Systems 5. NFPA-780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. P. National Institute Standards and Technology (NIST) Q. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) R. Security Industry Association (SIA) S. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) 1. ANSI/TIA-568.0-D-1, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises. 2. ANSI/TIA-568.1-D, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 3. ANSI/TIA -568.0-D.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard. 4. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D-1, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. 5. ANSI/TIA-569-E Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 6. ANSI/TIA-606-C, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure. 7. ANSI/TIA-607-D, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises. 8. ANSI/TIA-758-B, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard. T. U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) 1. RUS 1755 Telecommunications Standards and Specifications for Materials, Equipment and Construction 2. RUS Bull 1751F-643 (2002) Underground Plant Design 3. RUS Bull 1751F-815 (1979) Electrical Protection of Outside Plant 4. RUS Bull 1753F-201 (1997)Acceptance Tests of Telecommunications Plant (PC-4) 5. RUS Bull 1753F-401 (1995) Splicing Copper and Fiber Optic Cables(PC-2) 6. RUS Bull 345-65 (1985) Shield Bonding Connectors (PE-65) 7. RUS Bull 345-72 (1985) Filled Splice Closures (PE-74) 8. RUS Bull 345-83 (1979; Rev Oct 1982) Gas Tube Surge Arrestors (PE-80) Access Control 28 13 00- 15/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 U. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. UL 294 Standard for Access Control System Units 2. UL 294B Standard for Power Over Ethernet(PoE) Power Sources for Access Control Systems and Equipment 3. UL 109 Standard Method for Flame Tests of Flame-Resistant Fabrics and Films 4. UL 1076 Standard for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), State of Louisiana, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), and the National Electrical Code (NEC). If the Contractor identifies any item in the plans or specifications that will not strictly comply with the aforementioned laws, ordinances, and rules,the matter shall be referred to the Architect/Design Consultant for direction before proceeding with that part of the work. B. Contractor shall meet the specifications and standards from the latest NFPA and NEC publications. In the event of any conflicts between Standards and Codes the more stringent shall take precedence. C. The Contractor shall install the materials in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer's installation guidelines. Equipment and materials installed by the Contractor shall be free of defects and damage. D. No deviations from the plans,details or specifications shall be made without full consent in writing of the Architect / Design Consultant. The Contractor shall have written approval from the Architect / Design Consultant for any additional work beyond the Contract Documents prior to beginning such work. E. Prior to execution, Contractor shall verify no changes in software, licensing or hardware versions have occurred since the bidding of the project. In the event of any changes, Contractor shall verify system compatibilities with their proposed design, and notify via RFI the Architect/ Design Consultant/ Owner if the newest version(s) will require any upgrades/additional costs to the existing system(s). F. In the event site conditions do not allow the contractor to follow the execution requirements specified herein or in the provided details,the Contractor shall submit via RFI an alternative means and methods that is approved in writing by the Architect / Design Consultant. G. The Contractor shall obtain written permission from the Architect/ Design Consultant before proceeding with any work that would necessitate cutting into or through any part of the building structure such as, but not limited to: girders, beams, floors, walls, roofs, and/or ceilings. Access Control 28 13 00- 16/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 H. If the Contractor does not obtain written approval from the Architect / Design Consultant prior to proceeding with the work, the contractor shall not be reimbursed for the work. I. Contractor shall notify the Architect/ Design Consultant a minimum of(2) weeks prior to beginning work and will participate in a pre-construction meeting with the Architect /Design Consultant to perform a walkthrough, review the scope of work, schedule, and escalation procedures. J. The Contractor shall maintain a work area free of debris,trash, empty cable reels, scrap cable, etc., and dispose of such items on a daily basis and return the site to the original state of cleanliness. The Contractor shall not use Owner's facilities for the disposal of excess or scrap materials. K. Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage caused by the contractor during the installation. L. Contractor shall test all cables prior to and post installation. By failing to perform this testing operation, the Contractor shall accept the cable as compliant and assume all liability for the replacement of the cable at no cost to the Owner should it be found defective at a later date. M. Contractor shall maintain a set of working specifications, design drawings, and record drawings to be kept on site at all times and shall update the record drawings with any changes on a weekly basis. Record drawings shall be made available for inspection at the request of the Architect/ Design Consultant. N. Equipment and materials shall be consistent throughout the installation. Where multiple units of the same type of equipment and materials are required, these units shall be a standard product with the same manufacturer and model number. O. Equipment and materials shall be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines at the Contractor's expense. P. Contractor shall make all stored equipment and materials available for inspection at the request of the Architect/Design Consultant. Q. All equipment and material used in the installation shall be approved by the manufacturer for the environment in which it is being installed. R. All devices shall be installed flush, plumb, and (where required) centered on the wall, ceiling tile or structure for which it is being installed, unless otherwise noted. S. Devices installed in public spaces shall be mounted and secured using tamper-proof security fasteners unless otherwise noted. T. Cables shall be properly supported in accordance with industry standards at all times. Improperly supported cables shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Access Control 28 13 00- 17/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 U. Contractor shall be responsible to properly protect information outlets from damage by other trades during construction. V. Cables shall be routed at 90-degree angles to the building structure. At no time shall a diagonal pull be installed. W. The Contractor shall not install cables in conduits or sleeves without nylon bushings. Cables installed through conduits or sleeves without nylon bushings shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner. X. The manufacturer and contractor shall take positive measures to prevent the introduction of cybersecurity threats to the Owners technology infrastructure.These measures shall include but are not limited to: 1. The contractor shall scan contractor owned equipment for cyber threats such as viruses, malware, ransomware, etc., prior to connecting the contractor owned devices to the Owners network. 2. Ensure all technicians installing or configuring equipment are trained on the prevention of introduction of cyber threats to electronics, i.e. servers, and other associated equipment. 3. All project documents shall be properly securely stored behind encryption and password protection to avoid unauthorized distribution of documents. Y. Labeled Doors and Frames 1. In no instance shall any UL labeled door or frame be drilled, cut, penetrated, or modified in any way. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any labeled door or frame that is modified without written approval from the Architect. 3.03 COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor is responsible for the coordination of the following items and their respective disciplines included but not limited to. B. Coordinate with the Architect to ensure that: 1. Adequate conduit is provided and that equipment backboxes are adequate for system installation. 2. Adequate power has been provided and properly located for the security system equipment. 3. Doors and door frames are properly prepared for electric locking hardware and door position switches. 4. Access hatch locations (when required) shall be submitted in writing via RFI and coordinated with the Architect. Access Control 28 13 00- 18/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 5. Finishes and colors of all equipment visibly installed in public areas. Submit all finish and graphics for all equipment to the Architect for approval prior to installation. C. Coordinate with the Division 8 contractor for the following: 1. Door hardware manufacturer installation and power requirements. 2. Installation, power and requirements for integral request to exit switches. D. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with gate controller installers for controller locations and interfacing terminations. E. Coordinate with the Division 14 (Elevators) contractor for the following: 1. Pathways, installation, cabling, power requirements, media converter, and enclosures within the elevators shaft,wall, and/or elevator control room. 2. Security device cable pathways and terminations to be done by elevator contractor or under direct supervision of elevator contractor. 3. Any drilling or mounting in cab shall be performed by the Elevator Contractor. Security Contractor shall provide all security device mounting/drilling templates to the Elevator Contractor. 4. Interfacing of elevator controls to the Access Control system a. Software integration is preferred b. Coordinate with ACS manufacturer for compatibility and licensing requirements C. If no other method is possible,contractor shall interface via relay cabling from the Access Control System to the designated elevator security interface. 1) Ensure adequate relay signaling cabling is provided for interfacing of each floor F. Coordinate with the Division 26 contractor for the following: 1. Power requirements, conduit sizes/pathways, sleeves, back boxes,grounding, and bonding requirements of security devices in the following locations: a. Interior of the building b. Exterior of the building c. Pole, pedestals, canopies, awnings, building architectural surface, etc. d. Special conditions (clean room, hazardous areas, roof top mounted devices, etc). Access Control 28 13 00- 19/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 2. Coordinate location and termination of earth ground for all device specified herein as required per manufacturer installation requirements. G. Coordinate with the Division 27 contractor for the following: 1. Installation and power requirements of network infrastructure associated to the specified system 2. Associated patch cable lengths and quantities required for the specified system. 3. Location, power, and backup requirements for rack mount equipment. H. Coordinate with the Division 28 (Fire) contractor for the following: 1. Door hardware manufacturer installation and power requirements associated with fire alarm system(s). 2. Door hardware manufacturer installation and power requirements for all ACS electric locking mechanisms with time-delay ("delayed egress") functions as defined by NFPA 101. I. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating ACS locations and mounting preferences of all specified security devices with the Architect / Design Consultant prior to installation. J. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating all ACS programming requirements with the Owner/Architect/ Design Consultant. K. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for the following: 1. Network IP addressing for networked system equipment, controllers, and devices 2. Device labeling scheme 3. Firmware/software updates 4. Client workstations requirements and locations 5. Location of rack mount equipment. 6. Locations, type, programming, configuration, and Owner's final expectations for any Contractor Furnished Contractor Installed (CFCI) equipment and devices. 7. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) requirements. 8. Painting of exposed, publicly visible conduit pathways 9. Credential reader card formats, LED, buzzer and associated visual/audio functionalities. Access Control 28 13 00-20/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 10. When required, credential card ordering, formats, facility codes, barcode and template requirements or standards prior to install. Coordinate timelines for delivery and distribution of the credentials to the Owner prior to procurement. 3.04 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. The Access Control System (ACS) shall consist of server(s), software, licensing, workstations, doors controllers, access control cabling, credentials and all other peripheral components as indicated on the drawing and specified herein. 2. Any devices associated with the installation shall have the latest firmware updates downloads via owner approved secure link from the system software and/or remotely from the manufacturer. 3. All Access Control software, equipment and system requirements shall be installed per their respective Manufacturer Installation Guidelines. 4. Programming and data entry to be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall program the Access Control System to provide the following basic functions included but not limited to: a. Database Importing(Active Directory, CSV file, etc.) b. Graphics Maps c. Time zones d. System Reports e. Threat/Emergency Management Protocols(Lockdown,Severe Weather,etc.) f. Role Based User System Access (Admin, User Privileges, etc.) g. Access levels (Areas, Floor Groups, User Groups, etc.) h. Schedules (Lock/Unlock, Auto Arm/Disarm, etc.) i. Auxiliary 1/0 Devices (Sirens, Strobes, Buzzers etc.) j. Door Configuration Settings to include but not limited to: 1) Anti-Pass Back 2) Door Release via Push Button Input 3) Door Release via Request to Exit (Maglock ONLY) 4) Door Forced/ Door Held Alarms Conditions 5) ADA Door Settings Access Control 28 13 00-21/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 k. Special Conditions (Fire Alarm Relays, Hold Opens, Elevators, Gate / Door Operators, etc.) 5. When programming and data entry for the system is to be completed by Owner, Contractor is responsible for initial programming to ensure the installed field devices, media converters, etc., are communicating to the head-end equipment, so that the Owner can complete the necessary programming and shall assist in troubleshooting in the event they do not. B. Access Control System Licensing 1. Contractor shall be responsible for providing and applying all necessary licensing key(s) for the specified system(s) as required by the manufacturer(s) for a fully functioning access control system. 2. Contractor shall maintain a secured document with all license key(s) information applicable to this project. All license key(s) are property of the owner and shall be kept secured at all times and then surrendered to the Owner at the end of the project. 3. Communications a. Communication between servers, and workstations, networked based controllers/sub-controllers will communicate using the Owner provided data network unless otherwise noted. Coordinate with owner for network configuration requirements. b. The ACS shall also support end to end 128-bit encryption unless otherwise noted. c. Alternative communications means and methods shall be provided by Division 28 where applicable. 4. Access Control System Controller(s) a. Install Controller(s) in designated MDF/IDF room(s) as indicated on drawings 1) The Controller(s) shall be wall mounted in the ACS manufacturer's UL listed enclosure, unless a separate manufacturer enclosed power supply solution is specified that is specifically designed for the controller board(s) specified herein.The enclosure shall consist of the following a) Single cover, hinged, with identical key cylinder lock(s) for all enclosure(s). Hinged double doors will not be accepted. b) Contractor shall furnish, install, and connect tamper switch for all enclosure(s) to the controller(s) as specified. One alarm input is needed per MDF/IDF to alarm via the ACS system when the enclosure is opened. Access Control 28 13 00-22/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 c) Contractor shall furnish, install,and connect Battery Fail/Power Loss alarm inputs to the controller(s) as specified. One alarm input is needed per MDF/IDF to alarm via the ACS system in the event of low battery/power loss conditions. d) Enclosure(s)shall be mounted flush, plumb,and properly secured on fire-rated plywood using appropriate mounting hardware. Pathways to or from the enclosure(s)shall mechanically protected in a conduit or gutter system. Exposed cabling is not permitted. b. Device power shall be provided from a UL listed power supply or PoE powered network switch where required in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. c. Controller(s) shall be installed per the construction documents. d. Controller(s) shall be installed and configured in accordance with the most current manufacturer installation instructions. e. The installation shall be performed or directly supervised by a manufacturer- certified technician. 1) The term "supervised" means the certified technician shall be on-site and supervising the installation. 2) The certified (on-site) technician shall have a copy of the manufacturer certification on-site readily available for review. 3) The manufacturer certification shall be current and valid. f. Provide one spare card reader input point and 20 percent spare alarm input points and output point's after all specified points are initially connected. Sufficient modules shall be provided to accommodate only the number of card readers initially installed, as well as one spare input per control panel at each communications closet or consolidation point. C. Access Control System Credential Readers (Cards, Vehicle Tags, PIN, Biometric) 1. Provide credential reader(s) as indicated on the drawings. 2. Readers shall be securely mounted flush and plumb on the wall/mullion per the manufacturer installation guidelines. 3. Exterior credential readers shall be installed with a weather-proof gasket as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Exterior credential readers mounted on gates or vehicle pedestals shall be securely mounted in a NEMA rated weather-proof enclosure. 5. Where a weather-proof gasket is not sufficient for weather-proof protection, a polyurethane sealant for exterior use shall be applied. Access Control 28 13 00-23/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 6. Readers shall be installed with the manufacturer provided tamper-proof security fasteners, unless otherwise approved in writing by Architect/Design Consultant. If tamper-proof security fasteners are not provided,the contractor is responsible for procuring the requested hardware at no cost to the owner. D. Access Control System Credentials (Cards,Vehicle Tags, PIN, Biometric) 1. All credential cards shall be surrendered to the owner in their original packaging after procurement. 2. Template/Card Format/ PIN numbers a. Security Contractor shall coordinate PIN number assignment with the Owner prior to any programming. b. Security Contractor shall maintain a digital record of all Template/Card Format/PIN numbers to be secured at all times, and then provide to Owner at Project Close-Out. 3. Unless otherwise directed,the contractor is responsible for the mounting of vehicle tags. Contractor shall confirm with the Owner the placement of interior/ exterior vehicle tags in writing. E. Door Position Sensors (Door Contacts,Tamper Switches) 1. Provide magnetic concealed door position switches, surface mount door position switches and overhead door position switches to monitor the open/closed status of doors as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. 2. The contractor shall ensure the circuit of the door position sensor shall match the physical status of the door opening i.e. Normally Closed when the door is closed. 3. Exterior mounted door position sensors shall terminate using the appropriate outdoor-rated weatherproof connections and fasteners based on site conditions. 4. Provide flexible metallic conduit (as required)from the sensor location to the associated junction box as indicated on the drawings. Conduit shall be securely fastened to the structure using proper fasteners based on site conditions. 5. Contractor must ensure adequate spacing between contact and magnets to avoid abrasion/damage to the device. 6. Install end of line resistors for line supervision. Refer to manufacturer for recommended resistance values 7. Tamper shall be mounted inside the enclosure on key switch side. F. Request-to-Exit 1. For doors equipped with electric locking mechanical that are free exiting at all times (i.e. mortise electric locks, electric strikes, etc.),the REX motion sensor shall Access Control 28 13 00-24/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 only shunt the door position sensor from the Access Control System unless otherwise noted. a. Integrated in Electrified Door Hardware 1) Security Contractor shall route cable from door controller to access controlled door as indicated on the drawings and terminate the specified cable to the top of the Division 8 installed Electrified Power Transfer Hinge. a) At the time of installation of the door hardware, The Security Contractor shall provide and install all end of line resistors required by the PACS System Manufacturer. b) Security Contractor shall not remove Division 8 Installed Door Hardware unless otherwise approved in writing by the Architect / Design Consultant. b. Request-to-Exit Motion Sensor 1) Motion sensor shall be mounted flush, plumb, and properly secured on a single gang box or mechanical brace using appropriate mounting hardware and trim plate. 2) Motion sensors shall be positioned close to the door opening and angled to prevent tampering from forced entry. Contractor shall ensure devices mounted in the ceiling space are not obstructed or impacted when servicing in relation to other ceiling mounted devices (Exit signs, smoke detectors, lighting fixtures, etc.) G. Door Release/ Duress/Lockdown 1. Provide desk-mounted or wall mounted personnel duress alarms with normally closed alarm output contacts as indicated on the drawings. 2. Door Release/ Duress buttons/ Lockdown shall be wired to the Access Control System input boards as scheduled. a. The Door Release/Duress/Lockdown button shall be mounted flush, plumb, and properly secured as scheduled. 1) The Door Release button shall be configured as momentary. 2) The Duress button shall be configured as latching. a) Latching keys to be turned over to the Owner via the Construction Manager. 3) The Lockdown button shall be configured as latching. Access Control 28 13 00-25/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 b. Security device cabling installed in the knee space shall be mechanically protected with an armored flex from the rough-in back box to the edge device as scheduled. No exposed cabling is permitted. H. Electrified Door Hardware Mechanical Connections (Division 8) 1. Contractor shall conceal security cabling in door frame, door channels, walls wherever possible. Submit RFI if site conditions do not allow and propose alternative methods of terminations. 2. The Division 28 Contractor shall not make any modifications to fire rated doors without obtaining written permission from the Architect. 3. The Division 28 Contractor is responsible for providing the following: a. Provide relay signal cabling only from the ACS to the Division 8 power supply or relay board(s) located either at the door or centralized location b. Termination of Lock Relay Power for PoE based networked door controllers up to the electrified door hardware C. Device power provided by Owner-provided PoE networked switch. 4. The Division 8 Contractor is responsible for providing the following: a. Final terminations of all internal wiring of electrified door hardware and door power supply connections. b. Final terminations from the door power supply or relay board up the power transfer hinge or similar connection point of the electrified door hardware. I. Access Control System Power Supplies 1. Unless otherwise noted, all power supplies shall be hardwired to the 120VAC circuit. No pigtails/plugs shall be acceptable. 2. Enclosed Wall Mounted Access Control Panel Power Supply a. The Security Contractor shall provide and install devices as indicated on the drawings. b. Security Contractor shall refer to Division 8 Finish Hardware schedules and system requirements for sizing and quantity of boards in the enclosed power supply. c. The Security contractor shall provide dual voltage power supply board as specified. d. The Security Contractor shall provide and install Power Control Modules as specified. Access Control 28 13 00-26/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 1) Each Lock power output cable shall be terminated to a dedicated port on the Power Distribution Module specified. e. The Security Contractor shall provide and install Power Distribution Modules as specified. 1) Each request-to-exit motion (where required) cable shall be terminated on a dedicated port on the Power Distribution Module. f. The Security Contractor shall size each enclosure(s) with dual voltage power supplies as specified to include an additional total amperage of at least for 20% additional maximum amperage output per enclosure for future expansion as required. g. The Security contractor shall provide (2) back up batteries as specified per each enclosure. h. 115VAC hardwired power shall be provided and installed by Division 26 Electrical Contractor. i. 30Amp dedicated circuit shall be provided and installed by the Division 26 Electrical Contractor. j. Provide U.L. Listed power supplies for all Access Control System panels as specified. k. Provide battery chargers and batteries for all power. I. Monitor low battery and power fail alarms for each power supply. m. Tampers shall be wired as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Backup Battery(s) a. The Security Contractor shall provide and install(2)batteries per power supply enclosure. b. The Security Contractor shall label the install date for each battery with printed labels. J. Access Control Cabling 1. Pathways a. Wires shall be routed utilizing the pathways as indicated in the technology drawings. Reference Division 27 specifications for additional requirements. b. Access control cabling shall be routed separate from the network data communication cables specified in Division 27. Contractor shall provide separate pathways and j-hooks for the cables specified herein. Access Control 28 13 00-27/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 2. Wiring Techniques a. All cables shall be pre-tested for shorts prior to final device terminations after cables are installed. b. The Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop to be coiled, mounted, and stored in the provided enclosure(s)as detailed in the drawings. If an enclosure is not provided for the specified devices herein, the service loop shall be installed on a j-hook in the nearest accessible ceiling space closest to the device. c. The Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop to be coiled, mounted, and stored at the access control panel. d. The Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop to be coiled, mounted, and stored on the wall above the ladder rack in the regional MDF/ OF room(s). e. Install code compliant fire proofing techniques for all penetrations of fire rated partitions and slabs, where the penetrations are made by or used for installation of the ACS. f. All wire and cable shall be continuous from device location to the final point of termination ("Home Run"). No mid-run cable splices shall be allowed. g. Wire and cable within control panels, power distribution cabinets and other security enclosures shall be neatly installed, completely terminated, pulled tight with slack removed and routed in such a way as to allow direct, unimpeded access to the equipment within the enclosure. All wire and cable shall be bundled and tied. Velcro cable ties shall be utilized. h. Neatly bundle and wrap all horizontal/vertical runs (above accessible ceilings and not within conduit) wire and cable at intervals as code requires. Provide supports as required. All supports shall be UL listed for the application. i. All system wiring within vertical riser shafts (as required) shall be bundled, wrapped and tied to the structure at one-meter intervals in order to isolate it from other wire and cable within the shaft. Additionally, all wire and cable within the shaft shall be supported at least every two floors using manufacturer approved vertical management hardware and installation methods. Provide all personnel and equipment necessary to install and support the cable. All equipment shall be UL listed for the application. j. Provide grommets and strain relief material where necessary to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable. 3. Splices/Transitions a. Home run cabling is the preferred method of installation for all Access Control System devices and panels. Access Control 28 13 00-28/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 b. In the unlikely event that a splice or transition is required,the Contractor shall identify all splices/transition points required for the completion of the project and confirm, in writing, in advance, via RFI with the Architect / Design Consultant for acceptance of the proposed wiring techniques to be utilized. c. By not submitting an RFI, Contractor acknowledges that no major splicing is required for the completion of this project. Any splices not previously identified that are found to be faulty shall require the Contractor to re-install the affected cable in its entirety at no cost to the Owner. d. Contractor shall clearly mark splices/transition points on the shop drawings and As-Built drawings as part of the project close-out. 4. Cable Dressing a. No excessive cable slack shall be left in enclosures. b. Cables shall be dressed in a professional manor c. Cables shall be routed in 90-degree angles to termination points inside enclosures. d. Ty raps/zip ties are not permitted, hook and loop/Velcro is acceptable. e. Exposed wires are not acceptable f. Enclosures and equipment / Telecommunication room shall be left clean without debris including but not limited to: labels, connectors, screws, etc. g. All spare / unused cables shall be in the enclosure shall be neatly coiled and protected to avoid any shorts to ground. K. Device Labeling 1. Unless otherwise, all installed devices shall be labeled. Contractor shall verify device numbering scheme and Owner's current naming convention standard in writing in advance via RFI prior to generating any labels. 2. All labels shall be machine printed and adhered to the device in a location that is visible and legible to the naked eye. 3. All labeling in the field shall match the same labeling scheme in the closeout documents. 4. Refer to Div. 27 specifications for data network device cabling requirements. 5. Cables overall sheath shall be labeled within (6) inches from the point the cable enters/exits the enclosure inside the Equipment Room/Telecommunications/ Security Control Location Rooms. Access Control 28 13 00-29/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 6. Cables shall be labeled within (1) inch from the termination point inside the Equipment Room/Telecommunications/Security Control Location Rooms. 7. Cables shall be labeled within(1)inch from the termination point at the device end. 8. Cables shall be labeled identically at both ends. L. Fire Stop/Smoke/Sound Sealants 1. Use proper sealant as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application in compliance with per all applicable codes: City, State, Federal, LAHJ. 2. All existing pathways shall be resealed in compliance with per all applicable codes: City, State, Federal, LAHJ. M. Grounding and Bonding 1. All grounding and bonding shall be performed by a licensed electrical contractor to ensure the electrical integrity of the low voltage system and devices specified herein per federal/state/local codes and standards. 2. Contractor shall notify the Architect/Owner/ Design Consultant via written RFI of any site conditions or installations that will require additional coordination. 3. Contractor shall ensure proper grounding of shielded or non-shielded cabling and devices conform to the specified devices manufacturer's installation guidelines. 4. The Division 28 Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the Division 26 Contractor for grounding and bonding security devices per applicable codes and standards. N. Conduit, Boxes and Raceways (For Reference Only- By Division 26) 1. Install all conduit necessary for a complete installation, but not provided for in the Security Drawings, in finished areas concealed in chases, furring's, concrete slabs and/or above suspended ceilings. No exposed conduit shall be installed within public areas. 2. Conduit shall be carefully installed, properly and adequately supported as required to comply with the requirements outlined herein and as required by the NEC to provide a neat, industry-standard installation. Horizontal conduit runs shall be supported by clamps, pipe straps, special brackets or heavy iron tie, tied to the black iron structural members supporting the ceiling. Fastening of conduit to masonry walls, floor or partitions require malleable pipe clips with screws and suitable expansion sleeves. 3. All conduit shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be installed without springing or forcing. Access Control 28 13 00-30/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 4. All required inserts shall be drilled-in and all openings required through concrete or masonry shall be saw cut or core drilled with tools specifically designed for this purpose. 5. Swab out and remove all burrs from conduit before any wires are pulled. 6. Lay out and install conduit runs as to avoid proximity to hot pipes. In no case shall a conduit be run within 75 mm of such pipes, except where crossings are unavoidable and then the conduit shall be kept at least 25 mm from the covering of the pipe crossed. 7. Provide fire stops where conduits penetrate fire rated walls and/or floors. 8. All conduit installation,whether run exposed or concealed,shall be approved prior to installation by the Architect. O. High Voltage (120VAC) Power Requirements (For Reference Only—by Division 26) 1. 120VAC AC power dedicated to security shall be provided by the electrical contractor for the Access control system as indicated on drawings. Coordinate with the Architect to establish locations of security dedicated 120VAC AC circuits. 2. Connect to the AC power (provided by electrical contractor) and provide UL listed power supplies and transformers to distribute low voltage power to the system components as required. 3. Provide all conduit and wiring from the AC power facilities to the Access Control/ Power Supply Enclosures. 4. Provide Mechanical separation to isolate 120VAC wires from other low voltage cabling. Low voltage cabling shall not route over/under/parallel to 120VAC wires. P. Surge Protection/Lightning Arrestors 1. Protect all exterior devices, control, power, signal cables and conductors that are power surges. Each surge protector shall be UL Listed. 2. Unless otherwise noted,surge protection devices shall be installed at both the edge and head end of the cabling run. 3. Surge devices shall be installed as close as accessibly possible to the equipment they are protecting. 4. Surge Protection shall be properly installed in an accessible ceiling or enclosure space to allow for cable removal during troubleshooting. 5. Include surge protection device locations on as-builts and shop drawings. 6. Provide protection against spikes, surges, noise, and other line problems for all system equipment and components. Access Control 28 13 00-31/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 7. Properly ground surge protection devices per the manufacturer installation requirements. 3.05 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. As a prerequisite, the Contractor shall perform a burn-in of the system that is in accordance with the manufacturer's installation guidelines. 1. All devices shall be powered up and tested in a phased approach in a controlled testing environment on or off premise (to be coordinated with the Owner). 2. Update firmware with most up to date version (to be coordinated with the Owner). B. Each system hardware device shall remain operational during the burn-in test for a minimum of eight (8) hours without failure. 1. Contractor shall provide successful burn-in results in writing to the Architect/ Design Consultant prior to final acceptance. C. Security Contractor shall conduct a complete QA/QC test of the entire system and provide a written report of the test results (Punchlist). The tests shall include, but not limited to: 1. Hardware 2. Software 3. Network Connectivity 4. Device Power 5. Configure system device settings D. Identify and remediate any issues and/or system faults E. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that all devices, equipment, software, interfaces, sub-system interfaces and integrations are fully functional and operational. F. Contractor shall rectify all issues discovered during the QA/QC process and shall document these corrections via a Contractor provided punch-list. 1. At a minimum the punch-list shall contain: a. Date of the item identified b. Description of the discrepancy with photographs as necessary. c. Date the item was rectified G. All QA/QC items shall be corrected, and an electronic report surrendered to the Architect/ Design Consultant prior to calling for Substantial Completion. Access Control 28 13 00-32/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 3.06 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide for(8) hours of training for five (5) persons on each system. B. Provide a test report showing the system has been 100%tested and 100% operational prior to training/demonstration. C. Coordinate with the Owner to establish a training outline and schedule. Submit a comprehensive training curriculum to the Owner once all preliminary coordination is complete.The Owner will revise and comment on the curriculum as required. D. Contractor training shall be conducted onsite/virtually with a manufacturer's representative in attendance. E. Operator training shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. All operating procedures and graphic user interface (GUI) 2. System configuration 3. Alarm acknowledgement, alarm response logging, and map graphics functionality 4. Image capture, badge printing, and print ribbon replacement. F. Administrative training shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. All operating system procedures,configuration variables and graphic user interface (GUI) 2. Database functions and setup 3. Cardholder input and deletion procedures 4. Report generation 5. Card format configuration 6. Badge creation and design G. Record, label, and catalog all training on DVD and "user's manual" written specifically for the Owner personnel onsite,for daily routine operations of the systems. Provide the DVD and user's manual to the Owner for future in-house training sessions and / or reviews. Furnish all temporary equipment necessary for recording all training sessions. Maintain accurate and up-to-date time sheets of all training sessions. H. The Owner reserves the right to use any excess training hours, not used by the time of system completion, for future training as requested until the total number of training hours has been completed. 3.07 FIELD OBSERVATIONS Access Control 28 13 00-33/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 A. A minimum of ten business days in advance, Contractor shall notify the Design Consultant and Owner as to the readiness for a Field Observation for the following at a minimum but not limited to: 1. Rough-In Observation — after conduits have been installed, but before walls have been installed. 2. Above Ceiling Observation — after cabling has been installed, but before ceilings have been installed. 3. Final Site Observation—a minimum of two weeks before Substantial Completion. B. During Design Consultant's Final Site Observation of the installed systems, provide a minimum of one factory-trained/certified technician on the operation of all installed systems for up to (1) 8-hour day to assist with Design Consultant's functional testing. C. Non-Conforming Work(Punch-List) 1. After receipt of written notice of deficiencies (Punch-List), Contractor shall correct all defective work within ten business days. If the work has been identified to be corrected by the Architect/Design Consultant, the Contractor shall remediate it in conformance with the contract documents at no cost to the Owner. 3.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all punch list items are 100% complete.The Contractor shall complete an internal Quality Assurance/Quality Control inspection, make all corrections, document the deficiencies and corrections prior to requesting for any further inspections with the Architect/Owner/ Design Consultant. B. Prior to any Substantial Completion,the Contractor shall submit a minimum two sets of preliminary(first draft) Record Drawings(As-Builts)to the Architect/Design Consultant. The preliminary Record Drawings are to be used by the Architect/Design Consultant to conduct the system substantial completion inspection. C. The Contractor shall notify the General Contractor/Architect/ Design Consultant that all the items noted above have been completed and the installation is ready for inspection. D. The Architect / Design Consultant shall schedule an inspection of the installation with the General Contractor and the Installing Contractor(s) present. E. The Substantial Completion Inspection shall consist of the following: 1. The Project Manager/Superintendent and Installation Technician shall be on site with all tools, materials, and equipment ready to resolve any minor issues identified. 2. The Design Consultant or designated representative shall visually inspect the installation in accordance with the official design documents. Access Control 28 13 00-34/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 a. The Contractor shall be prepared to remove and reinstall (minimum 10%) randomly selected security devices to inspect the mounting, cabling, terminations, connectors, labeling,tampers. 3. Punch list items shall be identified and documented in a provided punch list with a date and description of the issue found, and a date the discrepancy was addressed and the resolution. F. Provide all personnel, equipment, and supplies necessary to perform all site testing. All video surveillance cameras shall be pointed and aimed in the views as shown in the drawings and using best practices. Contractor shall provide a minimum two employees to verify all cameras have been pointed and aimed to achieve Owner final approval. A manufacturer's representative may be present on site to answer any questions that may be beyond the technical capability of the Contractor's employees, if the Contractor so elects or by specific request of the Architect or Owner, at no charge to the Architect or Owner. G. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Architect/Design Consultant on security related construction clean-up and patch work requirements. Security equipment closets and similar areas should be free of accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, remove all waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's and its subcontractors' tools, construction equipment, machinery and all surplus materials. H. At their discretion, if the Design Consultant or their designated representative deems the site not ready for inspection/observation, the inspection will be cancelled. The Contractor(s) shall immediately address all issues identified, and shall reschedule the inspection in a timely manner so as not to affect the overall construction schedule. I. Adjustments and Documentation: energizing and testing the systems, make adjustments and document the setting of controls, configurations, as applicable. Tabulate all data along with an inventory of test equipment, a description of testing conditions and a list of test personnel. J. Test Documentation:Create and provide complete test reports documenting the results of the each performed on each device, control panel, power supply, and other elements of the system. Copies of preliminary test data shall accompany copies of performance testing data as part of the Operating and Maintenance submittal. 3.09 PROJECT CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION A. As-Built Drawings 1. Drawings shall be provided to the Architect/Owner/Design Consultant at the time of substantial completion. Final payment will not be recommended until drawings are received and approved by the Architect/Owner/ Design Consultant. 2. Unless otherwise requested, Contractor shall provide digital copies of close-out documents,and deliver to the Architect/Owner/Design Consultant electronically. Access Control 28 13 00-35/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 3. As-Built drawings shall be produced in AutoCAD/Revit in the most current or compatible version and provided electronically in .dwg and/or.pdf format. 4. Drawings shall be provided in the original size as issued by the Architect / Design Consultant. 5. Drawings shall retain the formatting and title block of the original drawings as issued by the Architect/ Design Consultant. 6. Provide a conformed set of Drawings as related to the project, depicting the condition of the access control system as installed to include but not limited to: a. ASI, PR and Addendum items installed throughout the duration of the project. 7. Provide a hard copy of the conformed set of drawings to be physically stored at the end of the project in a designated Access Control System enclosure. Coordinate with Owner for final storage location. 8. Drawings shall be provided utilizing the original scale and shall include the exact dimensions and locations of the following not limited to: a. Access Control System Riser/Signal Flow Diagrams b. Access Control System Backboard Layouts 1) To include access control boards, power supplies, pathways, etc. c. Sleeves, Backbone Cabling and Communication pathways d. Access Control System device locations and labeling scheme. B. Operation & Maintenance Manuals 1. Unless otherwise noted, provide O&M manuals electronically to Owner to include all drawings, product datasheets, hardware manuals as related to the project. 2. Coordinate with the Owner for provisioning of physical storage devices (Hardcopy, Flash Drive, CD/DVDs) C. Spare Parts 1. Contractor to provide spare parts as indicated below: a. (1) Intelligent Controller as specified b. (1) Door Controller as specified C. (1) 1/0 Boards as specified d. (5) Credential Readers as specified e. (100) Credential Cards as specified Access Control 28 13 00-36/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 2. The cost for these spare parts shall be included in the cost of the project. Spare parts are to be turned over to the owner for storage. 3. These parts shall be delivered to the owner at the pre-installation meeting. D. Manufacturer's Product Warranty 1. Certificate of product warranty shall be provided to the Architect/Owner/Design Consultant at the time of final system acceptance. Final payment will not be recommended until this certificate of product warranty is received and approved by the Architect/ Design Consultant. 2. The manufacturer of the solution shall furnish a product warranty as per the specifications starting at final system acceptance. 3. One original and two copies of the Manufacturer's product warranty shall be provided. E. Contactor's Statement of Warranty 1. Statement of warranty shall be provided to the Architect/Design Consultant at the time of substantial completion. Final payment will not be recommended until statement of warranty is received and approved by the Architect / Design Consultant. 2. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of a one (1) year warranty on all materials, labor and workmanship starting at final system acceptance. 3. One original and two copies of Contractor's warranty terms and conditions to include contact information(i.e.Contractor name,Point of Contact,address,phone number and email address) and start and end date for warranty call outs. END OF SECTION 28 13 00 Access Control 28 13 00-37/37 Far South Police Substation-23177 Addendum No. 1, Attachment No. 2 11-21-2024 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1. DESCRIPTION: A. Scope of work shall include new stand-alone system. B. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein. C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification.The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors. D. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994. E. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single U.S. manufacturer(or division thereof). F. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation shall be in compliance with the UL listing. G. The installing company shall employ NICET(minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology)technicians on site to guide the final checkout and to ensure the systems integrity. 1.2. SCOPE: A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings. B. A microprocessor-controlled control panel shall be installed in accordance with the project specifications and drawings. C. Basic Performance: 1. Alarm,trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). 2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style A) as part of an FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 4. On Style 6 or 7 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm. 5. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded. 6. NAC circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one circuit per floor of the building or smoke zone whichever is greater. 7. NAC circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of anyone (1) circuit will not cause the loss of any other circuit in the system. D. BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the systems initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. The system alarm LED on the system display shall flash. 2. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. 3. A backlit LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises. 4. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each new fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence. 5. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent compatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met. 3. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features,functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. B. Shop Drawings: FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts. 3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations. C. Manuals: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. 2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail,the information required to properly operate the equipment and system. D. Software Modifications 1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours. 2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones.The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. E. Certifications: 1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification. 2. Submit copies of State licenses. 1.5. GUARANTY: All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1)year from the date of acceptance.The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one-year period shall be included in the submittal bid. 1.6. POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE: A. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 period of five (5)years after expiration of the guaranty. B. As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance,tests, and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Submittals that do not identify all post contract maintenance costs will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be valid for the period of five (5)years after expiration of the guaranty. C. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semiannual basis or as required by the AHJ. A preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor describing the protocol for preventive maintenance.The schedule shall include: 1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire alarm stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, waterflow switches and all accessories of the fire alarm system. 2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually. 3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 Chapter 7. 1.7. POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS: A. The contractor shall have the ability to provide parts and labor to expand the system specified, if so requested,for a period of five (5)years from the date of acceptance. B. As part of the submittal, include a quotation for all parts and material, and all installation and test labor as needed to increase the number of intelligent or addressable devices by ten percent (10%).This quotation shall include intelligent smoke detectors, intelligent heat detectors, addressable manual stations, addressable monitor modules and addressable modules equal in number to one tenth of the number required to meet this specification (list actual quantity of each type). C. The quotation shall include installation,test labor, and labor to reprogram the system for this 10%expansion. If additional FACP hardware is required, include the material and labor necessary to install this hardware. D. Do not include cost of conduit or wire or the cost to install conduit or wire except for labor to make final connections at the FACP and at each intelligent addressable device. Do not include the cost of conventional peripherals or the cost of initiating devices or notification appliances connected to the addressable monitor/control modules. E. Submittals that do not include this estimate of post contract expansion cost will not be accepted. 1.8. APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification.The system shall FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable. A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)- USA: No. 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems (low and high) No. 12A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems No. 13 Sprinkler Systems No. 15 Water Spray Systems No. 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems No. 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems No. 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems No. 2001 Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code No. 1011-ife Safety Code B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: No. 268Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 864Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 217217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station No. 228 Door Closers- Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 864Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications No. 521Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 464Audible Signaling Appliances No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes No. 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 346Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances No. 2017 Standard for General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems No. 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment C. Local and State Building Codes. D. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.9. APPROVALS: A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies: UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc B. The fire alarm control panel shall meet UL Standard 864 Ninth Edition (Control Units) and UL Standard 1076 (Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems). C. The system shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing release FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 applications. The system shall support release of high and low pressure CO2. PART 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL: A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model.The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code. B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. C. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.2. CONDUIT AND WIRE: A. Conduit: 1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements. 2. Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross-sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit. 3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit,junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760. 4. Wiring for 24-volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits.All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) minimum. B. Wire: 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 than 18 AWG (1.02 mm)for Initiating Device Circuits, Signaling Line Circuits, and Notification Appliance Circuits. 3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR). 5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet.The design of the system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communication circuit. 6. All field wiring shall be electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault. 7. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of t-tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4)Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems that do not allow or have restrictions in, for example, the number of t-taps, length of t-taps etc., are not acceptable. C. Terminal Boxes,Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke,waterflow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices. E. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes.This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG.The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold-water pipe or grounding rod. 2.3. MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE: A. Main FACP or network node shall be manufactured by Silent Knight, Fire-Lite or approved equivalent and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit(CPU) and power supply in an economical space saving single board design.The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system-controlled devices. B. Operator Control 1. Acknowledge Switch: a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition. b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo sounders. FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Alarm Silence Switch: Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition.The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silence able by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards.The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto-silence timers. 3. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch: The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits.The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset. 4. System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. 5. Lamp Test: The Lamp Test switch shall activate all local system LEDs, light each segment of the liquid crystal display and display the panel software revision for service personal. C. System Capacity and General Operation 1. The control panel or each network node shall provide or be capable of 318 intelligent/addressable devices. 2. The control panel or each network node shall include Form-C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and security relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC. 3. It shall also include four Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A(NFPA Style Z) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits. 4. The Notification Appliance Circuits shall be programmable to Synchronize with System Sensor, Gentex and Wheelock Notification Appliances. S. The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display(LCD), individual color coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad with easy touch rubber keys for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system. 6. The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming changes. 7. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. Systems that have limited programming (such as general alarm), have complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop personal computer are not considered suitable substitutes. 8. The FACP shall support up to 20 logic equations, including "and," "or," and "not," or time FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100-8 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 delay equations to be used for advanced programming. Logic equations shall require the use of a PC with a software utility designed for programming. 9. The FACP or each network node shall provide the following features: a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall also include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out. b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72. C. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent),to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation. d. Nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The alarm level range shall be .5 to 2.35 percent per foot for photoelectric detectors and 0.5 to 2.5 percent per foot for ionization detectors. The system shall also support sensitive advanced detection laser detectors with an alarm level range of.02 percent per foot to 2.0 percent per foot. The system shall also include up to nine levels of Prealarm, selected by detector, to indicate impending alarms to maintenance personnel. e. The ability to display or print system reports. f. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel when a detector enters verification 20 times. g. PAS presignal, meeting NFPA 72 requirements. h. Rapid manual station reporting (under 3 seconds) and shall meet NFPA 72 requirements for activation of notification circuits within 10 seconds of initiating device activation. i. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software. j. Self optimizing pre-alarm for advanced fire warning,which allows each detector to learn its particular environment and set its prealarm level to just above normal peaks. k. Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm, two software zones in alarm, or one smoke detector and one thermal detector. I. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address. M. Control-by-time for non-fire operations, with holiday schedules. n. Day/night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity. o. Device blink control for sleeping areas. 10. The FACP shall be capable of coding main panel node notification circuits in March Time (120 PPM) and Temporal (NFPA 72 A-2-2.2.2) activates. The panel shall also provide a coding option that will synchronize specific strobe lights designed to accept a specific "sync pulse." 11. Network Communication a. The FACP shall be capable of communicating on a Local Area Network (LAN), a firmware package that utilizes a peer-to-peer, inherently regenerative communication format and protocol. D. Central Microprocessor 1. The microprocessor shall be a state-of-the-art, high speed, 16-bit RISC device and it shall communicate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include an EPROM FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100-9 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 for system program storage, Flash memory for building-specific program storage, and a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure. 2. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all control-by-event programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Control-by-event equations shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. 3. The microprocessor shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of system displays, printer, and history file.The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail.The real time clock may also be used to control non-fire functions at programmed time-of-day, day-of-week, and day-of-year. 4. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator errors. 5. An auto-program (self-learn)function shall be provided to quickly install initial functions and make the system operational. 6. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based program utility shall be available.This program shall be used to off-line program the system with batch upload/download, and have the ability to upgrade the manufacturers (FLASH) system code changes. This program shall also have a verification utility, which scans the program files, identifying possible errors. It shall also have the ability to compare old program files to new ones, identifying differences in the two files to allow complete testing of any system operating changes.This shall be in incompliance with the NFPA 72 requirements for testing after system modification. E. System Display 1. The system shall support an 80 character display. The display shall include an 80- character backlit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display(LCD) and a full PC style QWERTY keypad. 2. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system operator: a. The 80-character display shall include the following operator control switches: ACKNOWLEDGE,ALARM SILENCE,ALARM ACTIVATE (drill), SYSTEM RESET, and LAMP TEST. 3. The display shall annunciate status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, internal panel circuits, and software zones. 4. The display shall also provide Light-Emitting Diodes. a. The 80-character display shall provide 12 Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs),that indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, PREALARM WARNING, SECURITY ALARM, SUPERVISORY SIGNAL, SYSTEM TROUBLE, DISABLED POINTS,ALARM SILENCED, Controls Active, Pre-Discharge, Discharge and Abort. 5. The display shall provide a QWERTY type keypad a. The 80-character display keypad shall be an easy to use QWERTY type keypad, similar to a PC keyboard.This shall be part of the standard system and have the FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 10 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming.Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming. 6. The system shall support the display of battery charging current and voltage on the 80- character LCD display. F. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) 1. Each FACP or FACP network node shall support one SLC. Each SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 159 intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal) and 159 intelligent modules (monitor or control)for a loop capacity of 318 devices. SLC shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring. 2. CPU shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, prealarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector.The analog information shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements. G. Serial Interfaces 1. The system shall include two serial EIA-232 interfaces. Each interface shall be a means of connecting UL Listed Information Technology Equipment(ITE) peripherals. a. The EIA-485 interface may be used for network connection to a proprietary- receiving unit. H. Enclosures: 1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting.The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected,given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish. 2. The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. 3. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. For convenience,the door may be site configured for either right- or left-hand hinging. I. Power Supply: 1. A high-tech off-line switching power supply shall be available for the fire alarm control panel or network node and provide 6.0 amps of available power for the control panel and peripheral devices. 2. Provisions will be made to allow the audio-visual power to be increased as required by adding modular expansion audio-visual power supplies. FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 11 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Positive-Temperature-Coefficient (PTC)thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over- current protection shall be provided on all power outputs.The power supply shall provide an integral battery charger for use with batteries up to 200 AH or may be used with an external battery and charger system. Battery arrangement may be configured in the field. 4. The power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground conditions, and shall have the following LED indicators: Ground Fault LED AC Power Fail LED NAC on LED (4) 5. The main power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary power for the FACP. 6. The main power supply shall provide a battery charger using dual rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge and be capable of charging batteries up to 200 AH. 7. All circuits shall be power-limited, per UL864 requirements. J. Auxiliary Field Power Supply-Addressable 1. The auxiliary addressable power supply is a remote 24 VDC power supply used to power Notification Devices and field devices that require regulated 24VDC power.The power supply shall also include and charge backup batteries. 2. The addressable power supply for the fire alarm system shall provide up to a minimum of 6.0 amps of 24-volt DC regulated power for Notification Appliance Circuit(NAC) power or 10 amps of 24-volt DC general power.The power supply shall have an additional .5 amp of 24 VDC auxiliary power for use within the same cabinet as the power supply. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 12.0-200.0-amp hour batteries. 3. The addressable power supply shall provide four individually addressable Notification Appliance Circuits that may be configured as two Class "A" and two Class "B" or four Class "B" only circuits. All circuits shall be power limited per UL 864 requirements. 4. The addressable power supply shall provide built-in synchronization for certain Notification Appliances on each circuit without the need for additional synchronization modules.The power supply's output circuits shall be individually selected for synchronization. A single addressable power supply shall be capable of supporting both synchronized and non-synchronized Notification Devices at the same time. S. The addressable power supply shall operate on 120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. 6. The interface to the power supply from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall be via the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) or other multiplexed means Power supplies that do not use an intelligent interface are not suitable substitutes. The required wiring from the FACP to the addressable power supply shall be a single unshielded twisted pair wire. Data on the SLC shall be transmitted between 24 VDC, 5 VDC and 0 VDC at approximately 3.33k baud. 7. The addressable power supply shall supervise for battery charging failure, AC power loss, power brownout, battery failure, NAC loss, and optional ground fault detection. In the event of a trouble condition,the addressable power supply shall report the incident and the applicable address to the FACP via the SLC. 8. The addressable power supply shall have an AC Power Loss Delay option. If this option is FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 12 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 utilized and the addressable power supply experiences an AC power loss, reporting of the incident to the FACP will be delayed. A delay time of zero,two, eight or sixteen hours shall be programmable. 9. The addressable power supply mounts in either the FACP backbox or it's own dedicated surface mounted backbox with cover. 10. Each of the power supply's four output circuits shall be programmed for Notification Appliance Circuit or General Purpose 24 VDC power.Any output circuit shall be able to provide up to 2.5 amps of 24 VDC power. 11. The addressable power supply's output circuits shall be individually supervised when they are selected to be either a Notification Appliance Circuit when wired Class "A" or by the use of and end-of-line resistor. When the power supply's output circuit is selected as General 24VDC power,the circuit shall be individually supervised when an end-of-line relay is used. 12. When selected for Notification Appliance Circuits, the output circuits shall be individually programmable for Steady, March Time, Dual Stage or Temporal. 13. When selected as a Notification Appliance Circuit, the output circuits of the addressable power supply shall have the option to be coded by the use of a universal zone coder. 14. The addressable power supply shall interface and synchronize with other power supplies of the same type.The required wiring to interface multiple addressable power supplies shall be a single unshielded,twisted pair wire. 15. An individual or multiple interfaced addressable power supplies shall have the option to use an external charger for battery charging. Interfaced power supplies shall have the option to share backup battery power. K. Field Charging Power Supply (FCPS) The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote 24-volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances. 1. The FCPS shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24-volt power. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 18.0-amp hour batteries and to support 60-hour standby.The FCPS shall offer up to 8.0 amps (6.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24-volt power. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge up to 18.0- amp hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby. 2. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four outputs (two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be available for connection to the Notification devices. 3. The FCPS shall include an attractive surface mount backbox. 4. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per NFPA requirements. 5. The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per UL standards. L. Specific System Operations 1. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all addressable intelligent detectors in the system from the system FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 13 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window and have a minimum of 9 levels. 2. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector.The alarm verification delay shall be programmable from 0 to 60 seconds and each detector shall be able to be selected for verification.The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands. 3. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be enabled or disabled through the system keypad. 4. Point Read:The system shall be able to display or print the following point status diagnostic functions: a. Device status b. Device type C. Custom device label d. View analog detector values e. Device zone assignments f. All program parameters 5. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report will be generated and printed, listing all system status. 6. System History Recording and Reporting:The fire alarm control panel shall contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 800 events. Up to 200 events shall be dedicated to alarm and the remaining events are general purpose. Systems that do not have dedicated alarm storage,where events are overridden by non-alarm type events, are not suitable substitutes. Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation.The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, or printed in its entirety. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable substitutes. 7. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert:The fire alarm control panel shall automatically interrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is above or below normal limits,then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular detector will be annunciated on the system display and printed on the optional printer.This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform. 8. Pre-Alarm Function:The system shall provide two levels of pre-alarm warning to give advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre-alarm levels shall be fully field adjustable.The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel.The second level shall give an audible indication and may also activate control relays.The system shall also have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the pre-alarm level,to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms. 9. Software Zones:The FACP shall provide 100 software zones, 10 additional special function zones, 10 releasing zones, and 20 logic zones. 10. The fire alarm control panel shall include a walk test feature. It shall include the ability to FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 14 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 test initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the system. Operation shall be as follows: a. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are selected to participate in walk test, for 3 seconds. b. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed outputs for 8 seconds. C. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer. 11. Waterflow Operation An alarm from a waterflow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on the main panel display,turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shall not be affected by the signal silence switch. 12. Supervisory Operation An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the system display, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause the system to enter the trouble mode. 13. Signal Silence Operation The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification, relay, speaker etc) to deactivate upon depression of the signal silence switch. 14. Non-Alarm Input Operation Any addressable initiating device in the system may be used as a non-alarm input to monitor normally open contact type devices. Non-alarm functions are a lower priority than fire alarm initiating devices. 2.4. SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971, be fully synchronized, and shall meet the following criteria: 1. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second 2. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 3. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. B. Horn/Strobes: 1. Operate on 24 VDC 2. Have two selectable tone options of temporal 3 and non-temporal continuous pattern. 3. Have at least 2 audibility options 4. Maximum Pulse Duration: 0.2 second. 5. Strobe Intensity: UL 1971. FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 15 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 6. Flash Rate: UL 1971. 7. Strobe Candela Rating: Determine by positioning selector switch on back of device. C. Alphanumeric LCD Type Annunciator: 1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located back-lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty(80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. 2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system. 3. An audible indication of alarm shall be integral to the alphanumeric display. 4. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application. 5. It shall be possible to connect up to 32 LCD displays and be capable of wiring distances up to 6,000 feet from the control panel. 6. The annunciator shall connect to a separate, dedicated "terminal mode" EIA-485 interface.This is a two-wire loop connection and shall be capable of distances to 6,000 feet. Each terminal mode LCD display shall mimic the main control panel. 7. The system shall allow a minimum of 32 terminal mode LCD annunciators and shall be capable of the following system functions: Acknowledge, Signal Silence and Reset, which shall be protected from unauthorized use by a key switch or password. 8. The LED annunciator shall offer an interface to a graphic style annunciator and provide each of the features listed above. D. All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent with UL standard 864. E. Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter(UDACT).The UDACT is an interface for communicating digital information between a fire alarm control panel and an UL-Listed central station. 1. The UDACT shall be compact in size, mounting in a standard module position of the fire alarm control cabinet. Optionally,the UDACT shall have the ability for remote mounting, up to 6,000 feet from the fire alarm control panel.The wire connections between the UDACT and the control panel shall be supervised with one pair for power and one pair for multiplexed communication of overall system status. Systems that utilize relay contact closures are not acceptable. 2. The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with voltage detect), per UL/NFPA/FCC requirements. It shall include the ability for split reporting of panel events up to three different telephone numbers. 3. The UDACT shall be completely field programmable from a built-in keypad and 4 character red, seven segment display. 4. The UDACT shall be capable of transmitting events in at least 15 different formats.This ensures compatibility with existing and future transmission formats. 5. Communication shall include vital system status such as: - Independent Zone (Alarm,trouble, non-alarm, supervisory) - Independent Addressable Device Status - AC(Mains) Power Loss FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 16 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 - Low Battery and Earth Fault - System Off Normal - 12 and 24 Hour Test Signal - Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements) - EIA-485 Communications Failure - Phone Line Failure 6. The UDACT shall support independent zone/point reporting when used in the Contact ID format. In this format the UDACT shall support transmission of up to 2,040 points.This enables the central station to have exact details concerning the origin of the fire or response emergency. 7. AN IP Communicator option shall be available to interface to the UDACT and be capable of transmitting signals over the internet/intranet to a compatible receiver. F. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks For ease of service all panel 1/0 wiring terminal blocks shall be removable, plug-in types and have sufficient capacity for#18 to#12 AWG wire.Terminal blocks that are permanently fixed are not acceptable. 2.5. SYSTEM COMPONENTS-ADDRESSABLE DEVICES A. Addressable Devices-General 1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal address switches. Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159. 2. Addressable devices,which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP- switch, are not an allowable substitute.Addressable devices that require the address be programmed using a special tool or programming utility are not an allowable substitute. 3. Detectors shall be intelligent(analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits. 4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash green under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady red illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required,the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. 5. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the system.The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjust sensitivity. 6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72. 7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with tamper proof feature. Base options shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 17 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications. 8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself(by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. 9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO,THERMAL). 10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real- time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision,thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector. 11. Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. 12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an indication of an analog value reaching 100%of the alarm threshold. 13. Addressable modules shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box. An optional surface mount Lexan enclosure shall be available. B. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box(manual station) 1. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status.They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. 2. All operated stations shall have a positive,visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset. 3. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover.The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger. C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector 1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. D. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector 1. The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion. E. Intelligent Thermal Detectors FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 18 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit. F. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector 1. The smoke detector housing shall accommodate either an intelligent ionization detector or an intelligent photoelectric detector, of that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel. 2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. G. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device). 2. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation.An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 3. For multiple 2-wire smoke detector circuit monitoring a module shall be available that provides 6 Style B or 3 Style D input circuits. H. Addressable Control Module 1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances. 2. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y(Class A/B)with a current rating of 2 Amps for Style Z and 3 Amps for Style Y. 3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised circuit from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote supply. 4. For multiple circuit control a module shall be available that provides 6 Style B or 3 Style D control circuits. I. Addressable Releasing Control Module 1. An addressable FlashScan releasing module shall be available to supervise and control compatible releasing agent solenoids. 2. The module shall operate on a redundant protocol for added protection. 3. The module shall be configurable for Style Z or Style Y(Class A/B) and support one 24 volt or two 12 volt solenoids. J. Addressable Relay Module FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00- 19 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other network building functions. The module shall provide two form C relays rated at up to 3 Amps resistive and up to 2.0 Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100%of all auxiliary devices energize at the same time on the same pair of wires. 2. For multiple relay control a module shall be available that provides 6 programmable Form- C relays. 2.6. BATTERIES: A. The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure. B. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required. C. If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery and charger systems may be used. PART 3.0- EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All conduit,junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage. All cabling in finished areas with open structure shall be installed in conduit. C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. D. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor. 3.2. TEST: The service of a competent,factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system.All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7. A. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-20 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 ground faults, continuity, and insulation. B. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP. C. Verify activation of all waterflow switches. D. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. E. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. F. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. G. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. H. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. I. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the walk test. J. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points. K. When the system is equipped with optional features,the manufacturer's manual shall be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. 3.3. FINAL INSPECTION: A. At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.4. INSTRUCTION: A. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation." END OF SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION &ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00-21 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 313116-TERMITE CONTROL PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and profiles for termite control products. 2. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of termite control product. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods,volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is accredited by manufacturer. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Soil Treatment: 1. Environmental Limitations:To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16- 1 Far South Police Substation—23177 [ADDENDUM NO.001,Attachment No. 3] November 21, 2024 requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Related Work: Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating,filling, grading, and concreting operations.Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground- supported slabs before construction. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain termite control products from single from a single manufacturer. 2.2 SOILTREATMENT A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Bayer Environmental Science b. Ensystex, Inc C. Master Builders Solutions, brand of MBCC Group, a Sika company d. Syngenta Crop Protection, LLC 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16-2 Far South Police Substation—23177 [ADDENDUM NO.001,Attachment No. 3] November 21, 2024 B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare work areas according to the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and according to manufacturer's written instructions before beginning application and installation of termite control treatment(s). Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings.Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment.Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations.Treat adjacent areas, including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases.Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and below-grade walls will be penetrated. B. Post warning signs in areas of application. C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16-3 Far South Police Substation—23177 [ADDENDUM NO.001,Attachment No. 3] November 21, 2024 B. Protect termiticide solution dispersed in treated soils and fills from being diluted by exposure to water spillage or weather until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. END OF SECTION 313116 TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16-4 Far South Police Substation—23177 [ADDENDUM NO.001,Attachment No. 3] November 21, 2024 SECTION 32 3119 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Decorative aluminum fences. 2. Horizontal-slide gates. 3. Gate operators, including controls. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete bases for gate operators, drives, and controls. 2. Section 28 15 00 "Access Control Hardware Devices" for access control devices installed at gates and provided as part of a security system. 3. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for system disconnect switches and powered devices including, but not limited to, motor operators, controls, and limit switches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For fencing and gates. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate locations, post spacing, and attachment details. 2. Gate Operator: Show locations and details for installing operator components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size,electrical characteristics,drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified. 1. Provide Samples 12 inches in length for linear materials. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind Loading: 1. Fence Height: 2. Wind loads shall be determined from the pressures developed by a 160-mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category IV, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". 2.2 DECORATIVE ALUMINUM FENCES A. Decorative Aluminum Fences: Fences made from aluminum extrusions. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ameristar Perimeter Security; ASSA ABLOY; Echelon II Invincible Design Heavy Industrial Aluminum Ornamental Fence System or comparable product. B. Posts: Square extruded tubes. 1. Line Posts: 3 by 3 inches with 0.125-inch wall thickness. 2. End and Corner Posts: 3 by 3 inches with 0.125-inch wall thickness. 3. Horizontal-Slide Gate Post, Openings 12 Feet and wider: 6 by 6 inches with 0.250-inch wall thickness. C. Post Caps:Aluminum castings that cover entire top of posts. D. Rails: Extruded-aluminum channels, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, with 0.100-inch-thick sidewalls and 0.070-inch-thick top. E. Pickets: Extruded-aluminum tubes, 1 inch square, with 0.062-inch wall thickness. 1. Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated (curve top of pickets out) and press flat and trim to produce spear point shape. 2. Picket Spacing: 4 inches clear, maximum. F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard tamperproof, corrosion-resistant, color-coated fasteners matching fence components. G. Fabrication:Assemble fences into sections by fastening pickets to rails. 1. Fabricate sections with clips welded to rails for field fastening to posts. 2. Drill clips for fasteners before finishing. H. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.3 HORIZONTAL-SLIDE GATES A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ameristar Perimeter Security; ASSA ABLOY, Transport II Invincible Design Ornamental Cantilever Gate System or comparable product. B. Gate Configuration: Single leaf. 1. Type: Cantilever slide, enclosed track. C. Gate Frame Height: As indicated. D. Gate Opening Width: As indicated. E. Automated vehicular gates shall comply with ASTM F 2200, Class II. F. Aluminum Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubing. 1. Sizes as recommended by the manufacturer for this application. G. Frame Corner Construction: 1. Welded frame and 5/16-inch- diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels wide or wider. H. Additional Rails: Provide as indicated, complying with requirements for fence rails. I. Infill: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence. J. Picket Size, Configuration, and Spacing: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence. K. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, locking devices hangers roller assemblies and stops fabricated from mill-finished, Grade 319 aluminum-alloy casting with stainless-steel fasteners. L. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. M. Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating. 2.4 GATE OPERATORS A. Provide factory-assembled automatic operating system designed for gate size,type,weight,and operation frequency. Provide operation control system with characteristics suitable for Project conditions, with remote-control stations, safety devices, and weatherproof enclosures; coordinate electrical requirements with building electrical system. 1. Provide operator designed so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator. 2. Provide operator with UL approval. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Provide electronic components with built-in troubleshooting diagnostic feature. 4. Provide unit designed and wired for both right-hand/left-hand opening, permitting universal installation. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. UL Standard: Manufacturer and label gate operators to comply with UL 325. D. Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic gate operators on gates that must provide emergency access. E. Motor Characteristics:Sufficient to start,accelerate,and operate connected loads at designated speeds, within installed environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate rating or considering service factor. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and the following: 1. Voltage: 120 V., 20 A. Verify with gate manufacturer. 2. Horsepower: As required by gate manufacturer for the gate indicated. 3. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. 5. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors. 6. Phase: One. F. Gate Operators: Concrete base mounted and as follows: 1. Mechanical Slide Gate Operators: a. Duty: Heavy duty, commercial/industrial. b. Operating Type: Wheel-and-rail drive. C. Drive Type: Enclosed worm gear and chain-and-sprocket reducers, roller-chain drive. 2. Furnish and install concrete base for gate operator and card reader as required by gate manufacturer. G. Remote Controls: Electric controls separated from gate and motor and drive mechanism, with manufacturer's standard enclosure for pedestal mounting, and with space for additional optional equipment. Provide the following remote-control device(s): 1. Card Reader: Functions only when an authorized card is presented. Programmable, multiple-code system; face-lighted unit fully visible at night. a. Reader Type: Proximity. H. Vehicle Loop Detector: System includes automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay, timer cutoff switch, and loop detector designed to hold gate open until traffic clears. System includes electronic detector with adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator light designed to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit a signal activating the gate operator.System includes number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of placement, as recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer for function indicated, at location indicated on Drawings. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 I. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop gate at fully retracted and fully extended positions. J. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick-disconnect release of operator drive system of the following type, permitting manual operation if operator fails. Design system so control-circuit power is disconnected during manual operation. 1. Type: Integral fail-safe release, allowing gate to be pushed open without mechanical devices, keys, cranks, or special knowledge. K. Accessories: 1. Equipment Bases/Pads: Precast or cast in place concrete, , dimensioned and reinforced according to gate operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings. 2.5 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form required. B. Extrusions: ASTM B 221,Alloy 6063-T5. C. Tubing:ASTM B 429/13 429M, Alloy 6063-T6. D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247,Alloy 6061-T6. F. Castings:ASTM B 26/13 26M,Alloy A356.0-T6. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welding. 1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Section 03 30 00"Cast-in-Place Concrete"with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and maximum aggregate size. C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 1. Construction layout and field engineering are specified in Section 0173 00 "Execution." 3.3 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts. C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. Cantilever support posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 48 inches. 1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade. Finish and slope top surface to drain water away from post. 3. Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches of specified excavation depth, but not closer than 3 inches to bottom of concrete. 4. Space posts uniformly at 8 feet o.c. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.4 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. 3.5 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION A. General: Install gate operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, aligned and true to fence line and grade. B. Excavation for Support Posts Pedestals Concrete Bases: Hand-excavate holes for bases in firm, undisturbed soil to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. C. Concrete Bases: Cast-in-place or precast concrete, dimensioned and reinforced according to gate operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings. D. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to equipment operated by detector. E. Comply with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions for grounding of electric-powered motors, controls, and other devices. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Automatic Gate Operators: Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Adjust operators, controls, safety devices, alarms, and limit switches. 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls, alarms, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Lubricate hardware,gate operators, and other moving parts. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates. END OF SECTION 32 3119 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 32 84 23 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS PART.1 GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install planting irrigation system as described in Contract Documents complete with accessories necessary for proper function. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 9113: Soil Preparation. 2. Section 32 9223: Sodding. 3. Section 32 9300: Plants. 1.02REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Automated Self Flushing Wye Strainer:A wye strainer located immediately downstream from the point of connection in-lieu of a backflow prevention device for irrigation systems that utilize non-potable,secondary and/or reclaimed water that is automatically self-flushing to control unwanted debris from infiltrating the remaining irrigation system. 2. Dielectric Fittings: Special type of fitting used between dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action from causing corrosion failure. 3. Hydraulic Analysis: A required table that identifies all psi losses in irrigation equipment, psi losses due to elevation differentials and psi required at the spray head, rotor or emitter based on the peak flow requirements.This table shall be prepared and delivered to the Owner for evaluation prior to beginning irrigation design and construction documents. 4. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control,signaling power-limited circuits. 5. Non-Pressure Lateral Line: Downstream from electric control valves to pop-up spray heads and drip valve assemblies to emitters. Piping or tubing is under pressure during flow. In areas where potable or secondary water are used, pressure supply line shall be white. In areas where non-potable or reclaimed water are used, pressure supply line shall be purple. 6. Peak Flow: The maximum required flow for a given month based on a 6 day a week,9 hour a day watering window to be used for irrigation system design and to be used in the hydraulic analysis. 7. Point of Connection: The location where the meter for the irrigation system is located. 8. Pressure Supply Line: Downstream from point of connection to electric control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure when activated by master valve or hydrometer. In areas where potable or secondary water are used, pressure supply line shall be white. In areas where non-potable or reclaimed water are used, pressure supply line shall be purple. 9. Controllers: controllers are irrigation clocks. 10. Static Water Pressure:The pressure at the point of connection when the system is not operable. 11. Working Pressure: The pressure at the point of connection when the system is operable. 1.03ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Provide Coordination for required tests and inspections. a) Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide necessary manufacturer's field service. b) Pressure Test: In the presence of Landscape Architect provide a pressure test. c) Walk Through for Substantial Completion: In the presence of Landscape Architect, plan and provide walk through for Substantial Completion after Contractor has completed all Work. d) Final Walk Through: In the presence of the Landscape Architect, plan and provide final walk through after Contractor has completed all work listed on substantial completion walk through punch list provided by Architect. B. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference before irrigation system installation begins. C. Sequencing: 1. Install sleeves before paving installation 1.04SU BM ITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a) Manufacturer's cut sheets for each element of system. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a) Acceptance certificate of irrigation system. b) Upon acceptance of irrigation system, reviewer will provide signed acceptance certificate. c) Certificate will include name and signature of reviewer, reviewer's company, date of review,and reviewer's telephone number. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: a) Manufacturer's printed literature on operation and maintenance of operating elements of system. b) Instruction Manual c) Includes complete directions for system operation and maintenance, including winterizing,controller program worksheet and annual service and scheduling calendar based on local site specific conditions d) Qualification Submittals 3. Irrigation Installer: a) Provide documentation of the following: 1) Firm experience in irrigation projects(minimum of five years) 2) Financial stability. 3) Comply with specifications and contract documents. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual. a) Operations and Maintenance Data: b) Include one copy in Operations and Maintenance Manual c) Instruction Manual. d) Manufacturer's printed literature. 2. Record Documentation: a) Record drawings: As installation occurs, prepare accurate record drawing to be submitted before final inspection, including DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 b) Detail and dimension changes made during construction. c) Significant details and dimensions not shown in original Contract Documents. d) Field dimensioned locations of valve boxes,quick-coupler valves,control wire runs not in mainline ditch, and both ends of sleeves. e) Take dimensions from permanent constructed surfaces or edges located at or above finish grade. f) Take and record dimensions at time of installation. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Tools: a) Furnish following items before Final Closeout Review: b) One quick coupler keys with brass hose swivel. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Work and materials shall be in accordance with latest rules and regulations,and other applicable state or local laws. 2. Nothing in Contract Documents is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. B. Qualifications: 1. Requirements but not limited to the following: a) Installer Qualifications: 1. General: a) Perform installation under direction of foreman or supervisor with five (5)years minimum experience in sprinkling system installations. 1.06DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Storage and handling during installation: protect materials from damage and prolonged exposure to sunlight 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Standard one-year guarantee shall include: a) Filling and repairing depressions and replacing plantings due to settlement of irrigation system trenches. b) Adjusting system to supply proper coverage of areas to receive water. PART.2 PRODUCTS 2.01SYSTE M A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Hunter a) Hunter manufacturers equipment B. Materials: 1. Rock-Free Soil: a) Backfill soil around PVC pipe. b) Soil having rocks no larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Pea Gravel: a) For use around drains,valves, and quick couplers. b) 1/2-inch maximum dimension,washed rock. c) Native Material: Soil native to project site free of wood and other deleterious materials and rocks over 1-1/2 inches d) Topsoil: Remove rocks, roots,sticks,clods,debris,and other foreign matter over 1 inch's longest dimension encountered during trenching. e) Pipe, Pipe Fittings,And Connections: f) Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with Manufacturer's name, size,schedule,type,and working pressure. g) Pipe sizes shown on Drawings are minimum. Larger sizes may be substituted if at no additional cost to Owner. h) Fittings: Same material as pipe,except were detailed otherwise. i) Sleeves: 1) Under Parking Area,walks and Driveway Paving: Schedule 40 PVC Pipe. j) All Other: Class 200 PVC Pipe. k) Sleeve diameter refer to irrigation plan. 1) Sprinkler Heads:See Irrigation Legend. m) Each type of head shall be product of single manufacturer. n) Spray Heads in Lawn Areas: 1) Hunter:4" pop-up on swing joints o) Gear Driven Rotor Pop-ups: 1) PGP& PGJ C. Sprinklers: 1. Sprinkler Risers: a) All 3/4" inlet rotor pop-up sprinklers shall have a manufacturer's swingjoint assembly.Swing assemblies shall be equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation. Swing assemblies shall be 3/4"x 12". b) Pop-up rotor sprinkler heads shall have swing joints. c) Pop-up sprinkler heads on swing joints. 2. Automatic Irrigation Control Wiring and Controller:Two Wire System a) Waterproof Wire Connectors: b) Control wire connections shall consist of a properly-sized wire nut inserted in a waterproof grease cap. c) Automatic controllers: 1) Refer to Irrigation Legend: d) Automatic Rain Sensors: 1) Hunter wireless 3. Valves: a) Hunter: ICV series. 1) Isolation Valves: 2) PVC ball valves,size to match pipe size 3) Backflow Preventer: Make and Model shown on Drawings or as required by local code. 4. Quick Coupling Valves and Keys: a) Hunter 1"or approved equal with (1) key's&hose swivel. 5. Lid Colors: a) Green & brown/tan: Install in lawn areas(if possible&group together)& brown if in granite. 6. Type Acceptable Products: DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 a) Hunter Industries: 10"&Jumbo. Equal as approved by Architect PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Perform pressure test at stub-out on main water line provided for irrigation system,or at near-by fire hydrant. 2. Notify Architect if pressures are under 45 psi to determine if some re-design of system is necessary before beginning work on system 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: 2. Repair or replace work damaged during course of the Work at no additional cost to Owner. If damaged work is new, installer of original work shall perform repair or replacement. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Layout of Irrigation Heads: a) Location of heads and piping shown on Drawings is approximate. Actual placement may vary slightly as is required to achieve full, even coverage without spraying on to buildings,sidewalks,fences, etc. b) During layout,consult with Landscape Architect to verify proper placement and make recommendations,where revisions are advisable. c) Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to avoid existing fixed obstructions. d) Make certain changes from Contract Documents are shown on record drawings. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Trenching And Backfilling: 1. Pulling of pipe is not permitted. 2. Excavate trenches to specified depth. Remove rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any direction from bottom of trench. Separate out rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any direction uncovered in trenching operation from excavated material and remove from areas to receive landscaping. 3. Cover pipe both top and sides with 12"for laterals for mainline& 15 inches of rock-free soil as specified. 4. Do not cover pressure main, irrigation pipe,or fittings until Architect has inspected and approved system. B. Sleeving: 1. Sleeve water lines and control wires under walks and paving. Extend sleeves 18-24 inches minimum beyond walk or pavement edge. Cover sleeve ends until pipes and wires are installed to keep sleeve clean and free of dirt and debris. 2. Position sleeves with respect to buildings and other obstructions so pipe can be easily removed. C. Installation of Pipe: 1. Install pipe in manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, install main lines and lateral lines connecting pop-up rotor and impact sprinklers with minimum cover of 15 inches based on finished DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 grade. Install remaining lateral lines, including those connecting drip tubing,with minimum of 12 inches of cover based on finish grade. 3. Install pipe and wires under driveways or parking areas in specified sleeves 15 inches below finish grade or as shown on Drawings. 4. Locate no sprinkler head closer than 6" inches from building foundation. Heads immediately adjacent to mow strips,walks, or curbs shall be one inch below top of mow strip,walk,or curb and have one to 3 inches clearance between head and mow strip, walk,or curb. 5. Cut plastic pipe square. Remove burrs at cut ends before installation so unobstructed flow will result. 6. Make solvent weld joints as follows: a) Do not make solvent weld joints if ambient temperature is below 35 deg F b) Clean mating pipe and fitting with clean,dry cloth and apply one coat of P-70 primer to each. 7. Apply solvent to fitting in similar manner. 8. Give pipe or fitting a quarter turn to insure even distribution of solvent and make sure pipe is inserted to full depth of fitting socket. 9. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before applying pressure to PVC pipe. 10. Tape threaded connections with Teflon tape. D. Control Valves And Controller 1. Install valves in plastic boxes with reinforced heavy duty plastic covers. Locate valve boxes within 12 inches of sidewalks and shrub bed edges with tops at finish grade. Do not install more than two valves in single box. 2. Place 3 inches minimum of pea gravel below bricks supporting valve boxes to drain box. Set valve boxes over valve so all parts of valve can be reached for service. Set cover of valve box even with finish grade. Valve box cavity shall be reasonably free from dirt and debris. 3. Wiring: a) Tape control wire to side of main line every 10 feet. Where control wire leaves main or lateral line,enclose it in gray conduit. b) Use waterproof wire connectors consisting of properly-sized wire nut and grease cap at splices and locate all splices within valve boxes. c) Use white or gray color for common wire and other colors for all other wire. Each common wire may serve only one controller. d) Run one spare control wire from panel continuously from valve to valve throughout system similar to common wire for use as a replacement if a wire fails. Spare wire shall be different color than other wires,except use of green wire is not acceptable. Mark spare control wire in control box as an unconnected wire. Extend spare control wires 24 inches and leave coiled in each valve box. E. Backflow Preventer: 1. PVB is 1".Contractor shall certify that it is properly working.Supply and install a 1%" isolation valve for the irrigation connection. F. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Set sprinkler heads and quick-coupling valves perpendicular to finish grade. 2. Do not install sprinklers using side inlets. Install using base inlets only. 3. Set sprinkler heads at a consistent distance from existing walks,curbs,and other paved areas. 4. Before installation of sprinkler heads and drip line,open control valves and use full head of water to flush out system. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-6 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 G. Arrange valve stations to operate in an easy-to-view progressive sequence around building. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust sprinkler heads to proper grade when turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it without appreciable harm. Such lowering and raising of sprinkler heads shall be part of original contract with no additional cost to Owner. B. Adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution and trim so spray does not fall on building or walks. C. Adjust watering time of valves to provide proper amounts of water to plants. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Training: 1. After system is installed and approved, instruct Owner's designated personnel in complete operation and maintenance. END OF SECTION DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-7 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 32 90 01 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common procedures and requirements for landscaping work. 2. Provide maintenance for new landscaping as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 93 00: Plants 2. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. 3. Section 32 84 23: Underground Sprinklers. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference. 2. Schedule planting pre-installation conference after completion of fine grading. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations and Maintenance Manual. a. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) At completion of landscape work,submit two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year after contract maintenance period ends. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a. Use trained personnel familiar with required planting procedures and with Contract Documents. b. Planting shall be performed under direction of foreman or supervisor with minimum five years'experience in landscape installations. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight,analysis,and name of Manufacturer. 2. Deliver sod, plants,trees and shrubs in healthy and vigorous condition. 3. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Store in location on site where they will not be endangered and where they can be adequately watered and kept in healthy and vigorous condition. 2. Protect materials from deterioration while stored at site. PART 2-PRODUCTS: 2.1 POST-EMERGENT WEED CONTROL: A. Type Two Acceptable Products: For all planting beds. 1. Treflan or Surflan by Dow Agrosciences. 2. Eptan by Syngenta. 3. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Acceptable Installers: 1. Landscape contractors that have experience in successful landscape installation in this region. 2. Equal approved by Landscape Architect. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Inspect site and Contract Documents to become thoroughly acquainted with locations of irrigation,ground lighting,and utilities. 2. Repair damage to irrigation,ground lighting,and utilities and other items adjacent to landscaping caused by work of this Section or replace at no additional cost to Owner. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Before proceeding with work,verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and site to Landscape Architect before proceeding with landscape work. 1. Plant totals are for convenience of Contractor only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Drawings. 2. All planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise. B. Protection: 1. Take care in performing landscaping work to avoid conditions that will create hazards. Post signs or barriers as required. 2. Provide adequate means for protection from damage through excessive erosion,flooding, heavy rains,etc. Repair or replace damaged areas. 3. Keep site well drained and landscape excavations dry. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not plant trees or and shrubs until major construction operations are completed. B. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting for each type of plant material required. C. Hand excavate as required. D. Maintain grade stakes until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal. E. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered,such as rubble fill, high water table or adverse drainage conditions, notify Landscape Architect before planting. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: 1. Landscape Architect will inspect landscaping installation approximately two weeks before Substantial Completion. 2. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears dead as directed by Architect within 10 days of notification and before Substantial Completion. 3.6 CLEANING A. Waste Management: 1. Immediately clean up soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of deleterious materials. 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction Of Owner: 1. Replace damaged plantings at no additional cost to Owner. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect planted areas against traffic or other use immediately after planting is completed. B. Provide adequate protection of planted areas against trespassing,erosion,and damage of any kind. Remove this protection after Landscape Architect has accepted planted areas. 3.9 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Plants shall be in at least as sound, healthy,vigorous,and in approved condition as when delivered to site, unless accepted by Architect in writing at final landscape inspection. 2. Maintain landscaping until Substantial Completion and accepted by owner. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 3. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears unhealthy or non-vigorous as directed by Architect. Make replacements within 10 days of notification. Lawn that does not live and has to be replaced shall be guaranteed and maintained an additional 30 days from date of replacement. B. Sodded Lawn: 1. Maintain sodded lawn areas until lawn until acceptance including mowing and weed control. 2. Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at required frequency to maintain sub-soil immediately under sod continuously moist 3 to 4 inches deep. 3. Cut grass when it reaches 3 inches high. Continue to mow until acceptance. 4. Apply weed killer as necessary to maintain weed-free lawn. Apply weed killer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions during calm weather when air temperature is between 50 and 80 deg F C. Trees,Shrubs and Plants: 1. Maintain by pruning,cultivating,trimming and weeding as required for healthy growth. 2. Restore planting basins. 3. Tighten and repair stake and guy support and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical positions as required. 4. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 5. Provide supplemental water by hand as needed in addition to water from sprinkling system. END OF SECTION DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform soil preparation work as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and apply soil amendments as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1557-09, 'Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Product literature and chemical/nutrient analysis of soil amendments and fertilizers. 2. Samples: a. Sample of soil conditioner for approval before delivery to site. Include product analysis list. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit tests on imported and site topsoil by licensed laboratory. 1) Before use,topsoil shall meet minimum specified requirements and be approved by Architect. 2) If necessary,submit proposed amendments and application rates necessary to bring topsoil up to minimum specified requirements. b. Submit report stating location of source of imported topsoil and account of recent use. 2. Installer Reports: a. Delivery slips indicating amount of soil conditioner delivered to Project site. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations and Maintenance Manual. Soil Preparation 32 91 13-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil used in landscaped areas, imported,shall be fertile, brown in color, loose,friable soil meeting following criteria: a. Chemical Characteristics: 1) Acidity/alkalinity range: pH 6.5 to 7.5. 2) Soluble Salts: less than 5.0 mmhos/cm. 3) Sodium Absorption Ratio(SAR): less than 10.0. 4) Organic Matter: greater than twenty percent. b. Physical Characteristics: 1) Gradation as defined by USDA triangle of physical characteristics as measured by hydrometer. a) Sand: 15 to 60 percent. b) Silt: 10 to 60 percent. c) Clay: 5 to 30 percent. 2) Clean and free from toxic minerals and chemicals, noxious weeds, rocks larger than 1- 1/2 inch in any dimension,and other objectionable materials. 3) Soil shall not contain more than 2 percent by volume of rocks measuring over 3/32 inch in largest size. B. Soil Amendments: 1. Incorporate following soil amendments into topsoil used for Project: a. Acceptable Soil Amendments,Soil Conditioners,And Application Rates or approved planting mix: 1) Soil mixture by%sharp sand,%compost,1/4 bark mulch or peat moss and%new top soil. b. Acceptable Fertilizers and Application Rates: 1) Apply a NP and iron fertilizer at label rate(ironite).Submit brand and analysis for approval. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Soil Amendments: 1. Add specified soil amendments at specified rates to the planting areas. 2. Roto-till or otherwise mix amendments evenly into top 4 inches of topsoil.Till to an 8"depth. Sub grade to be approved by LA prior to bed preparation 3. Incorporate and leach soil amendments,such as gypsum,within such time limits that soil is sufficiently dry to allow proper application of fertilizer and soil conditioners. END OF SECTION Soil Preparation 32 91 13-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sodded lawn as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 84 23: Irrigation system. 2. Section 32 90 01: Common Planting Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Written certification confirming the type of grass. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations and Maintenance Manual for the care of the new lawn. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Harvest,deliver,store,and handle sod in accordance with requirements of Turfgrass Producers International (TPI)(formally American Sod Producers Association)Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting/Installing. 2. Schedule deliveries to coincide with topsoil operations and laying. Keep storage at job site to minimum without causing delays. a. Deliver, unload,and store sod on pallets within 24 hours of being lifted. b. Do not deliver small, irregular, or broken pieces of sod. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Cut sod in pieces approximately 3/4 to one inch thick. Roll or fold sod so it may be lifted and handled without breaking or tearing and without loss of soil. 2. During wet weather,allow sod to dry sufficiently to prevent tearing during lifting and handling. 3. During dry weather, protect sod from drying before installation. Water as necessary to ensure vitality and to prevent excess loss of soil in handling. Sod that dries out before installation will be rejected. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Description: DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 1. Superior sod grown from certified, high quality,seed of known origin or from plantings of certified grass seedlings or stolon's: a. Assure satisfactory genetic identity and purity. b. Assure over-all high quality and freedom from noxious weeds or an excessive amount of other crop and weedy plants at time of harvest. 2. Sod shall be 100%'Celebration' Bermuda Certified. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Sections 32 9113 and 32 9300 has been completed and approved. B. Tolerances: 1. Final grade of soil after sodding of lawn areas is complete shall be one inch (3/4" below top of adjacent pavement of any kind.) C. Laying of Sod: 1. Lay sod during growing season and within 48 hours of being lifted. 2. Lay sod while top 6 inches of soil is damp, but not muddy. Lay sod in rows perpendicular to slope with joints staggered. Butt sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife. 3. Lay sod flush with adjoining surfaces and flat work. Finished grade to be%" below top of surface/flatwork prior to sodding. 4. Finished grade prior to sodding to be 1" below to of flatworl<or concrete. D. After Laying of Sod Is Complete: 1. Roll horizontal surface areas in two directions perpendicular to each other. 2. Repair and re-roll areas with depressions, lumps,or other irregularities. Heavy rolling to correct irregularities in grade will not be permitted. 3. Water sodded areas immediately after laying sod to obtain moisture penetration through sod into top 6 inches of topsoil. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: 1. Sodded areas will be accepted at Project closeout if: a. Sodded areas are properly established. b. Sod is free of bare and dead spots and is without weeds. C. No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 2 inches. 2. Sodded areas have been mowed a minimum of 2". 3.3 TOP SOIL A. Quality: 1.All lawn area to have 3"of new top soil.Soil to be brown in color,friable and a Ph. of 6.5-7.5 Submit sample and source prior to any deliveries for approval. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 END OF SECTION DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install landscaping plants as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 84 23: Irrigation system. 2. Section 32 90 01: Common Planting Requirements. 3. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. 4. Section 32 92 23: Sodding. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American Nursery& Landscape Association/American National Standards Institute: a. ANLA/ANSI Z60.1-2004, 'American Standard for Nursery Stock.' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Top dressing mulch &granite for approval before delivery to site. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual a. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) Installer Instructions: a) Provide written instructions covering maintenance requirements by Owner for one year beyond Contract maintenance period. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include final,executed copy of warranty. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver trees,shrubs,ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. 2. Do not prune before delivery,except as approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald,drying,whipping,and other handling and tying damage. 4. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. 5. Provide protective covering during delivery. B. Storage And Handling Requirements; 1. Handle balled stock by root ball or container. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-1 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery,set planting materials in shade and protect from weather and mechanical damage. 3. Set all stock in the shade. . 4. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 5. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with fine spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in moist condition. Do not allow plant foliage to dry out. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide written warranties as follows: a. Guarantee shrubs and ground covers to be alive and remain in strong,vigorous,and healthy condition for one year minimum from date landscape installation is accepted as complete. b. Guarantee tree to live and remain in strong,vigorous,and healthy condition for one year from date landscape installation is accepted as complete. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Plants: 1. Conform to requirements of Plant List and Key on Drawings and to ANLA/ANSI Z60.1. 2. Nomenclature: a. Plant names used in Plant List conform to'Standardized Plant Names' by American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature except in cases not covered. In these instances, follow custom of nursery trade. Plants shall bear a tag showing the genus,species,and variety of at least 10 percent of each species delivered to site. 3. Quality: a. Plants shall be sound, healthy,vigorous,free from plant disease, insect pests or their eggs, noxious weeds,and have healthy, normal root systems. Container stock shall be well established and free of excessive root-bound conditions. b. Do not prune plants or top trees prior to delivery. C. Plant materials shall be subject to approval by Landscape Architect as to size, health, quality,and character. d. Bare root trees are not acceptable. e. Provide plant materials from licensed nursery or grower. 4. Measurements: a. Measure height and spread of specimen plant materials with branches in their normal position as indicated on Drawings or Plant List. b. Measurement should be average of plant, not greatest diameter. C. Plants properly trimmed should be measured same in every direction. d. Four inches from top of root ball for caliper on trees. e. Where caliper or other dimensions of plant materials are omitted from Plant List, plant materials shall be normal stock for type listed. f. Plant materials larger than those specified may be supplied,with prior written approval of Landscape Architect, 5. Shape and Form: a. Plant materials shall be symmetrical or typical for variety and species and conform to measurements specified in Plant List. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-2 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 b. Well grown material will generally have height equal to or greater than spread. However, spread shall not be less than 2/3's of height. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Planting Mix: 1. Mixture of three parts topsoil mix as specified in Section 32 9113 and one part well-rotted composted manure,or approved commercial mix. 'New Earth' is an acceptable supplier. B. Planting Tablets: 1. 21 gram Agriform 20-10-5. C. Tree Stakes and braces: 1. Acceptable Products: a. 8' 'T' post(new)for Oak&Crepe Myrtle trees. D. Tree Guys: 1. Acceptable Products: a. W Arbortie(green), 3/4"green hose for trees. E. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 016200 for definitions of Categories. a. Chipco Dimension Granular by The Andersons Inc, Maumee, IL b. Elanco XL2G granular by Crop Data Management Systems, Marysville,CA C. Ronstar G granular by Bayer Crop Science, Monheim,Germany . d. Surflan AS liquid by United Phosphorous Inc,Trenton, NJ e. Oryzalin 4 A.S. liquid by Farm Saver,Seattle,WA F. Weed Barrier: 1. Type Dewitt Product: a. DeWitt 4.1 oz. Pro 5, 20 year woven polypropylene weed barrier. G. Top Dressing Mulch: 1. Acceptable Products: a. Cypress mulch 4"&4" of compacted decomposed granite thick on a Dewitt Pro 5 landscape Fabric. 2.3 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Before proceeding with work,check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and site to Architect before proceeding with work of this Section. 2. Plant totals are for convenience only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Drawings. All planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise. 2.4 PREPARATION A. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas. Secure Architect's acceptance before planting. Make minor adjustments as may be requested. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-3 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2.5 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Section 32 9113 has been completed and approved. B. Excavation: 1. If underground construction work or obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting holes, Landscape Architect will select alternate locations. 2. Plant Excavation Size: a. Diameter: Twice diameter of root ball or container minimum. b. Depth: Equal to container or root ball depth.See landscape details. 3. Unless excavated material meets topsoil requirements as specified in Section 32 9113, remove from landscape areas and do not use for landscaping purposes. 4. Roughen sides and bottoms of excavations. C. Planting: 1. Removing Binders And Containers: a. Remove top one/third of wire root ball and burlap binders.N/A b. Remove plastic and twine binders from around root ball and tree trunk.N/A C. Remove wood boxes from around root ball. Remove box bottoms before positioning plant in hole. After plant is partially planted, remove remainder of box without injuring root ball. 2. Plant immediately after removing binding material and containers. Place tree and shrub root balls on undisturbed soil. After watering and settling,top of tree root balls shall be approximately one inches higher than finished grade and trunk flare is visible. Shrub root balls shall be approximately one inch higher than finished grade 3. Properly cut off broken or frayed roots. 4. Center plant in hole, remove remaining wire basket,and backfill with specified planting mix. Make ring of mounded soil around hole perimeter to form watering basin. 5. Add planting tablets in plant pit as follows. Place tablets in relation to root ball as recommended by Manufacturer. a. One Gallon Shrub: 1 tablet. b. 3/5 Gallon Shrub: 3 tablets. C. 15 Gallon Tree: 4 tablets. d. 24 inch Box Tree or greater: 6 Tablets. 6. Fill landscape excavations tamped planting mix. Settle by firming and watering to ensure top of ball one inch higher than surrounding soil. 7. Do not use muddy soil for backfilling. 8. Make adjustments in positions of plants as directed by Landscape Architect. 9. Thoroughly water trees and shrubs immediately after planting. 10. At base of each tree, leave 36—48 inch diameter circle free of any grass. D. Supports for New Trees: 1. Provide new supports for trees noted on Drawings to be staked. a. Remove nursery stakes delivered with and attached to trees. b. Support shall consist of at least three tree stakes driven into hole base before backfill so roots are not damaged. Place stakes vertically and run parallel to tree trunk. Install stakes so three feet of stake length is below finish grade. C. Place tree arbortie 6 to 12 inches below crotch of main tree canopy. Second set of tree ties may be required 18 to 24 inches above finish grade, if directed by Architect. d. Adjust tree stakes so top of stake is 6 inches below main tree canopy to prevent damage to tree branches and canopy growth. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-4 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 2. Provide 8' ?"stakes 3 inch caliper and larger trees. E. Ground Covers: 1. Container-grown unless otherwise specified on Drawings. Space evenly to produce a uniform effect,staggered in rows and intervals shown. F. Post Planting Weed Control: 1. Apply specified pre-emergent herbicide to shrub and ground cover planting areas and grass-free areas at tree bases after completion of planting. 2. Areas shall be free of existing weed growth before application of herbicide. 3. Protect existing trees to remain. G. Weed Barrier Fabric: 1. After planting and application or herbicide in shrub beds,apply covering of Dewitt Pro 5 weed barrier fabric. 2. Achieve 100 percent coverage over ground areas. 3. Overlap seams 6 inches minimum. 4. Staple at S feet on center each way and within 3 inches of edge of shrub bed,with two at each corner.Staples to be 6"-8" long. H. Mulching: 1. After application of herbicide, mulch shrub and ground cover planting areas with 4 inches deep layer of specified top dressing mulch.All planting beds get top dressed with mulch 2. Cover grass-free area at tree bases with weed barrier and 4 inches of top dressing mulch or rock mulch. 3. Place mulch to uniform depth and rake to neat finished appearance. F. Decomposed Granite: 1. Granite to be'pink' in color, size'Fine-3/8',compacted in two mechanical lefts and To have'Pathway Stabilizer' applied as manufacturers installation instruction. END OF SECTION DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-5 Far South Police Substation-23177 08/30/2024 • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING •M *x# • MATERIALS ENGINEERING &TESTING °' r"* • SOILS • ASPHALT • CONCRETE ' I A LIES Company GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION YORKTOWN BOULEVARD CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ROCK ENGINEERING REPORT NUMBER: G124022 PREPARED FOR: TURNER RAMIREZ ARCHITECTS 3751 S. ALAMEDA STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78411 FEBRUARY 28, 2024 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, LLC ~' 6817 LEOPARD STREET y k CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 r r = P: (361) 883-4555; F: (361) 883-4711 TBPE FIRM NO. 2101 fo rI • 94w• w'ti s- 1 av t : GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING I CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS <q ENGINEERING &TESTING a aPgro ,�° • SOILS *ASPHALT * CONCRETE qy A UES Company February 28, 2024 Turner Ramirez Architects 3751 S. Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 Attention: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA SUBJECT: SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Yorktown Boulevard, Corpus Christi, Texas Rock Engineering Job No. — G124022 Dear Ms. Bonesteel, In accordance with our agreement, we have conducted a subsurface investigation, laboratory testing program, and geotechnical evaluation for the above referenced project. The results of this investigation, together with our recommendations, are to be found in the accompanying report, one electronic copy of which is being transmitted for your records and for distribution to the project design team. Often, because of design and construction details that occur on a project, questions arise concerning soil conditions and Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LLC (Rock Engineering) (TBPE Firm No. 2101), would be pleased to continue its role as the Geotechnical Engineer during project implementation. Rock Engineering also has great interest in providing materials testing and observation services during the construction phase of this project. If you will advise us of the appropriate time to discuss these engineering services, we will be pleased to meet with you at your convenience. Sincerely, James P. Bauer, P.E. Corpus Christi Branch Manager ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office:512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandate 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION YORKTOWN BOULEVARD, CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ROCK ENGINEERING REPORT NUMBER: G124022 PREPARED FOR: TURNER RAMIREZ ARCHITECTS 3751 S. ALAMEDA STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78411 FEBRUARY 28, 2024 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING AND TESTING LABORATORY, LLC 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 PHONE: (361) 883-4555; FAX: (361) 883-4711 TEXAS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING FIRM REGISTRATION NO. 2101 g�P.tE..........' 11 * . '*,'�/ 0• JAMES�P.�BAUER 129201 %%IONAI.ENG'� James P. Bauer, P.E. Reinaldo Vega-Meyer, MS, EIT Corpus Christi Branch Manager Geotechnical Project Manager 1 I t♦ 4 flO `V A UES Canpony TABLE OF CONTENTS Page INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................................................1 Authorization...................................................................................................................................................................................1 Purposeand Scope........................................................................................................................................................................1 General...........................................................................................................................................................................................1 SITEDESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................................................................................2 FIELDEXPLORATION.......................................................................................................................................................................2 Scope.............................................................................................................................................................................................2 Drillingand Sampling Procedures...................................................................................................................................................3 FieldTests and Observations.........................................................................................................................................................3 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM...............................................................................................................................................4 SUBSURFACECONDITIONS............................................................................................................................................................4 General...........................................................................................................................................................................................4 SoilConditions................................................................................................................................................................................4 GroundwaterObservations.............................................................................................................................................................5 OSHASoil Type Classification........................................................................................................................................................5 SeismicSite Classification..............................................................................................................................................................6 GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION........................................................................................................................................................6 ProjectDescription..........................................................................................................................................................................6 PVRDiscussion..............................................................................................................................................................................7 FOUNDATION TYPES CONSIDERED...............................................................................................................................................8 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS..............................................................................................................................................8 Slab-on-Grade Foundation Recommendations...............................................................................................................................8 Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundation Recommendations..............................................................................................................9 Group Effect on Deep Foundations............................................................................................................................................... 10 LateralPier Analysis..................................................................................................................................................................... 11 Suspended Floor Slabs used with Drilled Piers............................................................................................................................ 11 PAVEMENTCONSIDERATIONS.....................................................................................................................................................11 Flexible Pavement Recommendations.......................................................................................................................................... 12 RigidPavement Recommendations..............................................................................................................................................13 PavementSubgrade Preparation..................................................................................................................................................14 Routine Maintenance of Rigid Pavement Systems....................................................................................................................... 14 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS....................................................................................................................................................14 Concrete Flatwork Construction Considerations........................................................................................................................... 14 CONSTRUCTIONCONSIDERATIONS............................................................................................................................................16 BuildingPad Preparation..............................................................................................................................................................16 SelectFill......................................................................................................................................................................................17 Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction Considerations.............................................................................................................. 17 Earthworkand Acceptance...........................................................................................................................................................18 VaporRetarder.............................................................................................................................................................................19 Utilities..........................................................................................................................................................................................19 Expansionand Control Joints.......................................................................................................................................................19 GENERALCOMMENTS..................................................................................................................................................................20 APPENDIX Site Vicinity Map Boring Location Plan Boring Logs B-1, B-2,and P-1 Key to Soil Classifications and Symbols February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of a soil exploration and geotechnical analysis for the proposed COCC Southside Police Substation planned for a site located on the northside of Yorktown Boulevard approximately 1,400 feet west of its intersection with Bichon Drive in Corpus Christi, Texas. This study was conducted for Turner Ramirez Architects. Authorization The scope of work for this project was performed in accordance with Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LLC (Rock Engineering) Proposal No. CGP102523B dated October 25, 2023. The scope of work was approved by Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA, on January 16, 2024. The signed proposal was delivered to Rock Engineering via email transmission. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this exploration was to evaluate the soil and groundwater conditions at the site and to provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed project. The scope of the exploration and analysis included the subsurface exploration, field and laboratory testing, engineering analysis and evaluation of the subsurface soils, provision of geotechnical recommendations, and preparation of this report. The scope of work for this project was determined by Turner Ramirez Architects. The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment. Any statements in this report, or on the boring logs, regarding odors, colors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the client. General The exploration and analysis of the subsurface conditions reported herein are considered sufficient in detail and scope to provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed project. The information submitted for the proposed project is based on project details provided by Turner Ramirez Architects, as well as the soil information obtained at the boring locations. If the designers require additional soil parameters to complete the design and this information can be obtained from the soil data and laboratory tests performed within the scope of work included in our proposal for this project, then Rock Engineering will provide the additional information requested as a supplement to this report. The Geotechnical Engineer states that the findings, recommendations, specifications or professional advice contained herein have been presented after being prepared in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable members of the Geotechnical Engineer's profession practicing contemporaneously under similar conditions in the locality of the project. Rock Engineering operates in general accordance with, "Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction, (ASTM D3740)." No other representations are expressed or implied, and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended. Page 1 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas This study was conducted for Turner Ramirez Architects and the design team for the specific application to the proposed COCC Southside Police Substation to be located along Yorktown Boulevard in Corpus Christi, Texas. SITE DESCRIPTION The site of the planned COCC Southside Police Substation is located along the northside of Yorktown Boulevard approximately 1,400 feet west of its intersection with Bichon Drive and across the street from Bill Witt City Park in Corpus Christi, Texas. The site is bordered by vacant land to the north, a construction laydown area to the east, Yorktown Boulevard to the south, and a residential home and commercial building to the west. A Site Vicinity Map is presented in the Appendix. The site is relatively flat and level and is covered with grass. The site was previously occupied by a residential structure which was apparently demolished in 2016 based on available Google Earth TM imagery. Additionally, multiple out-buildings were shown to be present north of the residence. At the time of our field investigation the condition of the ground surface was firm and did not pose significant difficulties to the drill crew moving their equipment. FIELD EXPLORATION Scope The field exploration, to evaluate the engineering characteristics of the subsurface soil materials, included reconnaissance of the project site, performing the test boring operations and obtaining relatively undisturbed Shelby tube samples and disturbed split spoon samples. During the sample recovery operations, the soils encountered were classified and recorded on the boring logs in accordance with "Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Exploration of Soil and Rock, (ASTM D5434)." Three (3) borings were performed for the purpose of providing geotechnical recommendations. The table below provides the boring identification, boring depths and GPS coordinates. Summary of Boring Information Boring Boring Identification Depth (ft) GPS Coordinates B-1 35 N 27.65715' W 97.37561° B-2 15 N 27.65699' W 97.37560' P-1 5 N 27.657330 W 97.375200 Turner Ramirez Architects determined the number of borings and locations while Rock Engineering determined the depths, and On Point Geophysical performed the drilling operations. The GPS coordinates were obtained at the boring locations using a Garmin GPS model eTrex and are provided in this report and on the boring logs. Page 2 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas Upon completion of the drilling operations and obtaining the groundwater observations, the borings were backfilled with excess soils obtained during drilling operations. A Boring Location Plan is provided in the Appendix of this report. The borings performed for this project were used to determine the classification, strengths and plasticity of the subgrade soils. The information provided on the boring logs includes boring location, boring depths, soil classification, soil strengths, and laboratory test results. The boring logs are included in the Appendix. Drilling and Sampling Procedures The test borings were performed using a drilling rig equipped with a rotary head turning solid stem augers to advance the boreholes. Relatively undisturbed soil samples were obtained using thin-wall tube sampling procedures in general accordance with, "Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils, (ASTM D1587)." The samples obtained by this procedure were extruded by a hydraulic ram in the field. Disturbed samples were obtained by employing split-barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with the procedures for "Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils, (ASTM D1586)". The samples were visually classified, placed in plastic bags, marked according to boring number, depth and any other pertinent field data, stored in special containers and delivered to the laboratory for testing. Field Tests and Observations Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs)— During the sampling procedures, SPTs were performed to obtain the standard penetration value of the soil at a selected interval. The standard penetration value (N) is defined as the number of blows of a 140-pound hammer, falling 30 inches, required to advance the split-barrel sampler 1 foot into the soil. The sampler is lowered to the bottom of the previously cleaned drill hole and advanced by blows from the hammer. The number of blows is recorded for each of three successive 6-inch penetrations. The "N" value is obtained by adding the second and third 6-inch increment number of blows. An automatic hammer was utilized when performing SPTs. An automatic hammer is usually taken as having an efficiency of one. The results of standard penetration tests indicate the relative density of cohesionless soils and comparative consistency of cohesive soils, thereby providing a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. Water Level Observations — Water level observations were obtained during the test boring operations. Water level observations are noted on the boring logs provided in the Appendix. In relatively pervious soils, such as sandy soils, the indicated depths are usually reliable groundwater levels. In relatively impervious soils, such as clayey soils, a suitable estimate of the groundwater depth may not be possible, even after several days of observation. Seasonal variations, temperature, land-use, proximity to water bodies and recent rainfall conditions may influence the depth to the groundwater. The amount of water in open boreholes largely depends on the permeability of the soils encountered at the boring locations. Ground Surface Elevations — The ground surface elevations at the boring locations were not provided. Therefore, depths referred to in this report are from the ground surface at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation. Page 3 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM In addition to the field investigation, a laboratory testing program was conducted to determine additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the subgrade soils and supported improvements for the proposed project. The laboratory testing program included supplementary visual classification (ASTM D2487) and water content tests (ASTM D2216) on the samples. In addition, selected samples were subjected to Atterberg limits tests (ASTM D4318)and percent material finer than the#200 sieve tests (ASTM D1140), and Unconfined Compressive Strength of cohesive soil (ASTM D2166). The shear strength of selected cohesive soil sample was evaluated from an unconfined compressive strength test (ASTM D2166). The estimated soil strengths of cohesive soils sampled using Shelby tubes were obtained using a hand penetrometer. The laboratory testing program was conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The results of these tests are to be found on the accompanying boring logs provided in the Appendix. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of soil materials encountered in the test borings have been visually classified and are described in detail on the boring logs. The results of the hand penetrometer values, standard penetration tests, water level observations, and laboratory tests are presented on the boring logs. Representative samples of the soils were placed in polyethylene bags and are now stored in the laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, the samples will be disposed of three months after issuance of this report. The stratification of the soil, as shown on the boring logs, represents the soil conditions at the actual boring locations. Variations may occur between, or beyond, the boring locations. Lines of demarcation represent the approximate boundary between different soil types, but the transition may be gradual, or not clearly defined. It should be noted that, whereas the test borings were drilled and sampled by experienced drillers, it is sometimes difficult to record changes in stratification within narrow limits. In the absence of foreign substances, it is also difficult to distinguish between discolored soils and clean soil fill. Soil Conditions The generalized soil conditions encountered at the project site have been summarized and soil properties including soil classification, strength, and plasticity are provided in the following table. Page 4 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas Soil Profile Table D Description LL PI C ye 1 4200 N P/UC 0-8 Fat CLAY with Sand/Fat 55-58 33-39 1,000 -- 120 72-88 -- 1.25-4.5+/-- CLAY 8-23 Fat CLAY/Sandy Lean 35-72 20-50 1,400 -- 120 56-97 -- 2-2.75/2.1 CLAY 23-27 Silty SAND -- -- -- 32 55 22 17 -- 27-35 Silty SAND -- -- -- 36 55 -- 28-30 -- Note: Borings B-2 and P-1 were terminated at depths of 15 feet and 5 feet, respectively. Where: D = Depth in feet below existing grade LL = Liquid limit (%) PI = Plasticity index C = Soil Cohesion, psf(undrained) =Angle of Internal Friction, deg. (undrained) Ye = Effective soil unit weight, pcf 4200 = Material passing #200 sieve, % N = SPT N-value range, bpf P = Hand penetrometer value range, tsf UC = Unconfined Compressive Strength, tsf Exceptions to the above generalized profile do exist. Most notable is the presence of a clayey sand (possible fill) that was encountered to a depth of approximately 3 feet in Boring P-1. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered at the boring locations are provided on the boring logs included in the Appendix. Groundwater Observations Groundwater (GW) was encountered at a depth of 23.5 feet in Boring B-1 during drilling. Groundwater was not observed in the remainder of the borings during or upon completion of drilling. It should be noted that the water level in open boreholes may require several hours to several days to stabilize depending on the permeability of the soils and that groundwater levels at this site may be subject to seasonal conditions, recent rainfall, drought or temperature effects. OSHA Soil Type Classification The table below provides a summary of the OSHA Soil Type Classification based on the soils encountered at the boring locations. Depth OSHA Soil Type (feet) Description Classification Clay Soil Above the Water Table 0- 20 (Average Undrained Shear Strength is greater than 500 psf) Type B It should be noted that the contractor's "competent person" shall make the final determination of the OSHA Soil Type during excavation of the soils at the jobsite. Any soil from which water is freely seeping should be downgraded to Type C soil. Slope protection for excavations greater than 20 feet need to be designed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas. The maximum allowable slopes during construction for soil OSHA soil types are provided in the following table. Page 5 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas Guidelines for Maximum Allowable Slopes Soil or Rock Type Max. Allow. Slopes for Excavations <Than 20' Deep Type B 1 Horizontal : 1 Vertical Type C 1'/2 Horizontal : 1 Vertical Guidelines for maximum allowable slopes were obtained from OSHA documents, but do not take into account any recent revisions or the stability of long-term unprotected slopes. Long term unprotected slopes will likely require much flatter slopes. The guidelines presented herein for slopes do not imply Rock Engineering is taking responsibility for construction site safety; this responsibility falls entirely upon the contractor and his responsible person. The contractor shall comply with all rules, ordinances and other requirements to comply with safe construction practices. Seismic Site Classification As stated on Page 205, Chapter 20, "Site Classification Procedure For Seismic Design" of ASCE/SEI 7-05, "Where the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless authority having jurisdiction or geotechnical data determines Site Class E or F soil are present at the site." Since our field investigations have not included a 100-foot-deep boring, by definition the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail. Site Class D soils should have a Standard Penetration Resistance of 15 to 50 bpf, or an undrained shear strength between 1,000 and 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf). The predominate soil strengths at this site and the soils anticipated below the maximum depth of exploration of our borings, are expected to meet or exceed the typical strength range cited above and therefore the site should be classified as Seismic Site Class D (Stiff Soil). GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION Project Description Based on information provided to Rock Engineering, the project will include the construction of a new COCC Southside Police Sub Station building and associated parking areas and driveway. The new building will have an anticipated footprint on the order of approximately 6,157 square feet. The building will be a single-story structure and will feature concrete construction. Anticipated structural loads nor grading plans were provided to Rock Engineering at the time of this report. Rock Engineering should be provided with this information, once it becomes available, so that we may review and revise our recommendations if warranted. Page 6 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas PVR Discussion The laboratory test results indicate that the subsoils in the active zone at this site are moderate to high in plasticity. The calculated total potential vertical rise (PVR) at this site is estimated to be in the order of 2% to 3 inches. This PVR value represents the vertical rise that can be experienced by dry subsoils if they are subjected to conditions that allow them to become saturated, such as poor drainage. The actual movement of the subsoils is dependent upon their change in moisture content. The PVR was calculated using the Texas Department of Transportation Method TEX-124E and took into account the depth of the active zone, estimated to extend to a depth of approximately 15 feet at this site, and the Atterberg limits test results of the soils encountered within the active zone. Differential vertical movements can potentially be equal to the expected total movements. Differential vertical movements at this site may be equal to the calculated PVR over a distance equal to the depth of the active zone, within the footprint of a slab-on-grade if dry soil conditions exist and a localized water source such as ponding water or a plumbing leak occurs resulting in non-uniform moisture conditions. Undercutting a portion of the existing soils at this site and replacing them with properly compacted select fill soils should reduce the PVR. The resulting reduction in PVR at this site, utilizing undercutting and replacement operations, are included in the table below. The estimated PVR values provided are based on the floor system applying a sustained surcharge load of approximately 1.0 pound per square inch on the subgrade soils resulting in a 6-inch concrete floor slab elevation 1'/2 feet above the average grade elevation at the site. PVR Reduction— Building and Flatwork Areas Required Undercut Minimum Select Fill Approximate PVR Depth ft Thickness ft in 1 2 2.3 2 3 2.0 3 4 1.6 4 5 1.3 5 6 1.0 Based on our calculations, in order to reduce the PVR to approximately 1 inch in the building area, it will be necessary to remove the existing soils to a depth of 5 feet. Upon completion of the excavation, the exposed subgrade soils shall be moisture conditioned and recompacted, and a minimum of 6 feet of compacted "Select Fill" soils shall be properly placed and compacted in the excavation. Additional undercutting and replacement may be required to further reduce the PVR based on architectural or structural design considerations, if the finished concrete slab elevation is something other than approximately 1'/2 feet above the average existing grades, or if proper positive and rapid site drainage is not provided around the structure and/or other measures are not implemented during the design, construction and operation of the structure to ensure that saturation of the subgrade soils does not occur. In any of these cases, Rock Engineering should be contacted and given the opportunity to revisit the recommendations provided herein and provide additional recommendations as warranted. Page 7 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas FOUNDATION TYPES CONSIDERED Various foundation types have been considered for the support of the proposed Police Substation. The foundation types considered include a Slab-on-Grade foundation system and a Drilled Pier foundation system. Slab-on-Grade Foundation — A stiffened grid type beam and slab foundation is used to support relatively light structures where the soil conditions are relatively uniform, and where uplift and settlement can be tolerated. The intent of a stiffened slab-on-grade foundation is to allow the structure and foundation to move up and down freely with soil movements while providing sufficient stiffness to limit differential movements within the superstructure. Drilled Piers — Conventional straight shaft drilled piers were considered for use at this site. Due to the presence of relatively low strength clay soils near the depths where underreamed piers would be founded, underreamed drilled piers will not likely provide the necessary support for a concrete superstructure. Straight-shaft drilled piers may be used for support of the building. If the founding depths of straight shaft piers is located below the groundwater elevation, temporary steel casing and/or the slurry displacement method to properly install piers at this site will likely be required. Recommendations for stiffened slab-on-grade foundations and straight shaft drilled piers are provided in this report. If it is essential to demand the highest level of performance from the foundations, then Rock Engineering recommends the structure be supported on drilled pier foundations in conjunction with a suspended structural floor slab. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Slab-on-Grade Foundation Recommendations A waffle slab foundation is feasible to support the proposed structure. It should be noted that rigid exterior walls and interior partitions are subject to distress with the slightest soil related foundation movements, even differential movements as small as 1 inch. Interior and exterior grade beams should be founded within properly compacted select fill, at a minimum depth of 2 or 2'/2 feet, respectively, below the finished floor slab elevation. Perimeter grade beams should be founded at least 2 feet below the final exterior grade and can be designed for a net allowable unit soil bearing pressure of 2,000 psf. The net allowable unit soil bearing pressure provided utilizes an approximate design safety factor of 3. The beams should be a minimum of 12 inches wide to reduce the potential for localized shear failure and the beams should be spaced at a maximum distance of 18 feet, in both directions. The Structural Engineer may vary beam depths and spacing based on experience designing and constructing similar type structures on sites with similar subsurface soil conditions. The Structural Engineer may vary beam depths and spacing based on experience designing and constructing similar type structures on sites with similar subsurface soil conditions. Page 8 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas The "Design of Slab-On-Ground Foundations,"published by the Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. (Aug., 1981), utilizes the design criteria provided in the table below. WRI Design Criteria Climatic Rating (Cw) 17 Effective Plasticity Index 27 Soil/Climatic Rating Factor(1-C) 0.15 Maximum Beam Spacing, Both Directions (ft) 18 WRI slab design criteria provided above considers that the existing soils, organics and other deleterious materials are undercut (excavated) to a minimum depth of 5 feet from the building area, for a corresponding PVR value of 1 inch as recommended herein. The undercut excavation should extend out laterally beyond the limits of the building foundation a minimum of 5 feet, including all appurtenances. The exposed subgrade soils should then be moisture conditioned and compacted prior to replacing the excavated soils with at least 6 feet of properly compacted non- expansive select fill soils to achieve a finished concrete floor slab elevation approximately 1'/2 feet above the average existing grade at the site. A soil supported floor slab is subject to vertical movements as discussed earlier in this report. Even slight differential movements on the order of 1 inch can cause distress to interior wall partitions and rigid exterior walls or facades supported by a shallow waffle slab foundation, resulting in cosmetic damage. This amount of movement should be understood and addressed during the design phase of the proposed structure planned for construction at this site. Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundation Recommendations The building can be supported by straight shaft drilled pier foundations. The structural designer can utilize the allowable unit skin friction values for the range in depths included in the following table for straight shaft drilled piers to resist the axial loads given the strengths of the subsurface soils encountered. Allowable Unit Skin Friction Values Depth Below Existing Grade Allowable Unit Skin Friction (psf) (ft) 0-5 Neglect 5-8 315 8-23 400 23-27 450 27-30 550 All depths are referenced from the existing ground surface elevations at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation. Page 9 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas The allowable unit skin friction values provided above are based on the strengths of the in-situ soils and utilize a design safety factor of 2 against shear failure. The straight shaft drilled piers should be proportioned to be founded at a depth of no greater than 30 feet. The piers will be subject to swell uplift forces resulting from adhesion of the expansive soils along the perimeter of the shafts. The swell uplift force can be estimated (in kips) by multiplying the diameter of the pier (in feet) by 23. Uplift can be resisted utilizing the dead load on the pier and the weight of the pier itself. If additional resistance to expansive soil induced uplift is required, the allowable skin friction values below a depth of 15 feet may be utilized in the design. Uplift resistance due to structural loading conditions can be calculated by utilizing the allowable skin friction values provided in the table above. Settlement of a properly designed and constructed straight shaft drilled pier is estimated to be on the order of 1 percent of the shaft diameter of the pier and differential settlements of equally loaded same size drilled shafts should experience differential settlements on the order of '/2 percent of the pier shaft diameters. Straight shaft drilled piers should be spaced no closer than three pier diameters apart measured center to center. Drilled piers at this site should be adequately reinforced with a minimum of 1 percent of the cross-sectional area of the pier shaft throughout the depth of the pier to withstand uplift forces. If groups of piers are required to support concentrated loads, an appropriate modification of the estimated capacity must be made on the basis of the group efficiency factor and soil type and strength, as further discussed in the "Group Effect on Deep Foundations" section of this report. Group Effect on Deep Foundations The supporting capacity of a group of deep foundation systems could be considerably less than the sum of the capacities of the individual members comprising the group. The capacity of the group varies as a function of change in size, spacing and stiffness. Axial group capacity may be estimated from the following: P = E * N * Q Where E is the group efficiency, N is the number of piles or piers in the group and Q is the single drilled pile or pier capacity. Values of group efficiency E increase from about 0.65 at a spacings of 2.5 diameters to about 1.0 at a spacing of 5 diameters. Detailed analyses of foundation-soil interaction for a specific group spacing would be necessary to define actual efficiency. Detailed analyses of foundation-soil interaction for a specific group spacing would be necessary to define actual efficiency. Page 10 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas Lateral Pier Analysis Drilled piers supporting the building structures may be subjected to lateral loads. Lateral pier analysis programs such as L-pile will require the following soil parameters for this site: L-Pile Design Criteria D Descripti C K Eso on ye 0-5 CLAY Neglect 5-8 CLAY 1,000 -- 120 500 0.007 8-23 CLAY 1,400 -- 120 500 0.007 23-27 SAND -- 32 55 60 -- 27-35 SAND -- 36 55 60 -- Where: D = depth (ft) y>: = effective unit weight, pcf C = shear strength, psf K= modulus of subgrade reaction (pci) = angle of internal friction, deg. Eso = 50% strain value K and Eso values were estimated from known correlations. Suspended Floor Slabs used with Drilled Piers Slabs used in conjunction with straight-shaft drilled piers shall be structural slabs and have a minimum 6-inch void space below the bottom of the structural slab and grade beams spanning between the piers. Soil retainers shall be used as necessary to ensure that the void space is maintained after construction is complete and during the life of the structure. All beams spanning between piers shall be structurally connected to the piers. Carton forms may be utilized to create the minimum 6-inch void space, or a crawl space can be constructed. A crawl space will allow for hanging of underfloor utilities such that differential movements between the underfloor soils and the relatively fixed floor slab, and the associated differential movements between buried underfloor utilities and the building structure, should not pose potential future issues at utility penetrations. In addition, a crawl space will allow for future maintenance beneath the building, if necessary. If a crawl space is utilized, a mud slab should be used in the underfloor area and provisions should be made to remove any water that enters the crawl space and not allow water to accumulate. PAVEMENT CONSIDERATIONS In designing the proposed parking areas and driveways, the existing subgrade conditions must be considered together with the expected traffic use and loading conditions. The conditions that influence pavement design can be summarized as follows: Page 11 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas • Bearing values of the subgrade. These can be represented by a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) or a Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (K). • Vehicular traffic, in terms of the number and frequency of vehicles and their range of axle loads. • Probable increase in vehicular use over the life of the pavement. • The availability of suitable materials to be used in the construction of the pavement and their relative costs. Specific laboratory testing to define the subgrade strength (i.e. CBR and K value) was not performed for this project. Based upon local experience, the estimated CBR and K values for the controlling clay soils encountered at the planned parking lot area are 3 and 100 pci, respectively. Since traffic counts and design vehicles have not been provided, it is only possible to provide non-engineered pavement sections suitable for light and medium-duty service based on pavement sections that have provided adequate serviceability for similar type facilities and on similar soils. Parking areas and drives can be designed with either a flexible or rigid pavement. Flexible Pavement Recommendations The recommended light and medium-duty flexible pavement sections, using locally available materials, are provided in the following table. Light-duty Medium-duty Flexible Pavement (Passenger Cars & Parking) (Driveways) Option 1 Option 2 Option 1 Option 2 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete 2 inches 2 inches 2'/2 inches 2'/ inches Crushed Limestone Base Material 6 inches 6 inches 10 inches 10 inches (TxDOT Item 247 Type A; Gr. 1-2) Geogrid (TxDOT Type 2) -- Yes -- Yes Lime Stabilized Subgrade (4.5%) 8 inches -- 8 inches -- Compacted Subgrade -- 12 inches -- 12 inches Base materials in flexible pavement areas should meet the requirements set forth in Texas Standard Specifications 2014; Item 247, Type A, Grade 1-2 and should be placed in maximum 8-inch thick loose lifts and compacted to a minimum density of 98 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the modified Proctor test (ASTM D1557) and within ± 1'/2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Page 12 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas Hot mix asphaltic concrete should meet the requirements set forth in TxDOT Item 340; Type D, or C, surface course. Flexible asphaltic pavements subjected to soil-related shrinking and swelling do not perform as well as rigid pavements. As a result, the lifespan of flexible asphaltic pavement can be reduced substantially when compared to rigid pavement. The need for increased maintenance of flexible asphaltic pavements should be considered prior to its selection. Allowances for proper drainage and proper material selection of base materials are most important for the performance of pavements. Ruts, birdbaths and poor site drainage allow for quick deterioration of the pavement primarily due to saturation of the underlying base materials and subgrade soils. Rigid Pavement Recommendations The use of concrete for paving has become more prevalent in recent years due to the long- term maintenance cost benefits of concrete pavement compared to asphaltic pavements. The recommended light and medium-duty rigid pavement sections are provided in the following table. Light-duty Medium-duty Rigid Pavement (Passenger Cars & Parkin (Driveways) Option 1 Option 2 Option 1 Option 2 Reinforced Concrete 6 inches 6 inches 7 inches 7 inches Lime Stabilized Subgrade (4.5%) 8 inches -- 8 inches -- Select Fill -- 12 inches -- 12 inches The concrete pavement should be properly reinforced and jointed, as per ACI, and should have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. Expansion joints should be sealed with an appropriate sealant so that moisture infiltration into the subgrade soils and resultant concrete deterioration at the joints is minimized. The joints should be thoroughly cleaned and sealant should be installed without overfilling before pavement is opened to traffic. Concrete pavement at least 8-inches thick is recommended for the trash dump approach areas due to the high wheel and impact loads that these areas receive. The concrete pads at the location of the trash dumpsters should be large enough to accommodate both the front and rear wheels of the vehicles used to pick up the trash dumpsters. Maintenance or operations managers need to stress the importance of placing the trash dumpsters in their proper locations to reduce the distress trash pickup operations place on the pavement. Page 13 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas Pavement Subgrade Preparation In areas where the pavements will be constructed, after all surface organics and deleterious materials have been removed to the desired subgrade elevation, the subgrade shall be proofrolled using a heavy pneumatic roller. Any soft areas identified shall be removed to firm undisturbed soils, reworked and recompacted in place to obtain a stable and non-yielding subgrade. Upon completion of the proofrolling, and if an Option 2 pavement section, the upper 12 inches of exposed subgrade soils shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry unit weight of the subgrade soils as determined by a standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) and at, or above, the optimum moisture content. Where a pavement section containing geogrid will be used, after proper compaction of the subgrade, a layer of the specified geogrid shall be placed on the properly prepared raw subgrade and shall extend outside the limits of the crushed limestone base material. The geogrid shall be placed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where the pavement section with lime stabilization of the subgrade will be used, then upon completion of proof rolling, the lime stabilization operations shall be performed in accordance with TxDOT Item 260, "LIME TREATMENT FOR MATERIALS USED AS SUBGRADE (ROAD MIXED)" Based on the results of the Atterberg limits testing for the subgrade soils and associated curves provided in TxDOT Test Method 121-E, RETL recommends that the lime be mixed at the rate of 4'/2 percent, based on the maximum dry unit weight of the raw subgrade soils as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698). The lime stabilized soils should be compacted to a minimum density of 98 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by a standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and at or above the optimum moisture content. Routine Maintenance of Rigid Pavement Systems The pavement sections provided in this report are designed based on pavement sections constructed on similar subgrade soils and for facilities similar to those planned for construction at this site. The pavements will require routine maintenance such as joint maintenance in order to achieve a desirable life of pavement. Without proper maintenance, moisture infiltration into the base material and/or subgrade will result in rapid deterioration of the pavement system. Rock Engineering recommends that the owner protect their investment by incorporating an aggressive maintenance program. SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS Concrete Flatwork Construction Considerations The change in moisture content of the plastic clay soils is the primary mechanism resulting in the volumetric changes of the supporting soils. Provisions in the site development should be made in order to maintain relatively uniform moisture contents of the supporting soils. Page 14 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas A number of measures may be used to attain a reduction in subsoil moisture content variations. Some of these measures are outlined below: • During construction, positive drainage schemes should be implemented to prevent ponding of water on the subgrade. • Positive drainage should be maintained around the structure and site flatwork through roof/gutter systems connected to piping or directed to paved surfaces, transmitting water away from the foundation perimeter and site flatwork. In addition, positive grades sloping away from the foundation and site flatwork should be designed and implemented. • We recommend that an effective site drainage plan be devised by others prior to commencement of construction to provide positive drainage away from the site improvements and off the site, both during, and after construction. • The top 2 feet of utility trenches should be backfilled with low plasticity clays to assure the trenches do not serve as aqueducts that could transport water beneath the structures and flatwork due to excessive surface water infiltration. Clay plugs or collars should also be installed in utility trenches, from outside of the building pad and extending several feet beneath the structure, to prevent water from moving laterally into the select fill pad and beneath the building. • Vegetation placed in landscape beds that are adjacent to the structure and site flatwork should be limited to plants and shrubs that will not exceed a mature height of 3 feet. Large bushes and trees should be planted away from the foundation and flatwork at a distance that will exceed their full mature height and canopy width. • Individual concrete panels of site flatwork should be dowelled together to reduce trip hazards as a result of differential movements within the flatwork. • Site flatwork should be designed to drain quickly with a minimum positive slope of 1 percent. • In areas where movement sensitive flatwork is planned for construction, if it is desired or necessary to reduce the PVR movements beneath flatwork, the clay soils should be undercut and replaced with select fill as discussed in the "PVR Discussion" and "Building Pad Preparation" sections of this report. Page 15 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas • In areas where non-movement sensitive flatwork is planned for construction, and extending 5 feet outside the plan area of the flatwork, all surface organics and deleterious materials shall be removed, the upper 12 inches of exposed subgrade soils should be scarified, moisture conditioned to a minimum of 2 percent above the optimum moisture content and then compacted to at least 90 percent and not more than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698). All project features beyond the scope of those discussed above should be planned and designed similarly to attain a region of relatively uniform moisture content within the foundation and flatwork areas. Poor drainage schemes are generally the primary cause of foundation and flatwork problems in South Texas. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Buildinq Pad Preparation If straight-shaft drilled pier foundations are used to support the building structure, a structurally suspended floor slab system is recommended in conjunction with the drilled piers and therefore building pad preparation to reduce the PVR value is not required. Rather, appropriate grading, proof-rolling and ordinary compaction of the subgrade soils should be performed as necessary to properly support formwork and/or carton forms during construction. Additionally, existing foundations remnants shall be removed to a minimum depth of 24 inches below proposed subgrade elevations and located a distance of at least 3 pier diameters from the new drilled piers. Excavations resulting from removal of existing foundation remnants should be backfilled with compacted fill. If a soil-supported slab on grade foundation will be used to support the building, in order to reduce the PVR to approximately 1 inch in the building area, it will be necessary to remove soils, organics and other deleterious materials to a depth of 5 feet as indicated in the "PVR Discussion" section of this report. The excavation should extend outside the building footprint and any appurtenances (including porches, attached sidewalks, stoops, etc.) for a distance of 5 feet. Once the excavation operations in the building area are performed, the upper 1 foot of exposed subgrade soils shall be moisture conditioned and recompacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) and the moisture content shall be maintained at, or above, the optimum moisture content. If any soft areas are identified, the soils should be removed and recompacted in place. Upon completion of the subgrade preparation operations, at least 6 feet of properly compacted select fill material should be placed. Properly compacted "Select Fill" soils shall be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick loose lifts and compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and at, or above, the optimum moisture content. Page 16 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas The select fill shall be placed in such a manner to provide a uniform fill pad thickness supporting the proposed building. Excavation of grade beams may proceed after placement of the select fill is complete. Select Fill Imported select fill material used at this site should be homogenous, free from organics and other deleterious materials and should have a maximum liquid limit of 40 percent and a plasticity index (PI) between 7 and 18. The select fill soils shall have a minimum of 35 percent passing the #200 sieve and no soil particles exceeding 1'/2 inches will be permitted. The fill should be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick loose lifts and then compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and at, or above, the optimum moisture content. Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction Considerations For deep drilled pier construction at this site, the slurry displacement method or a combination of temporary steel casing and slurry displacement will be required in water bearing granular material. The appropriate method or combination of methods should be determined by the pier installation contractor. Proper installation methods will also depend on the final foundation design depths and the site and groundwater conditions at the time of construction. With slurry displacement, it is essential that there is a sufficient slurry head available (or that the slurry density can be increased as needed) so the inside pressure is greater than that from the groundwater table or the tendency of the soil to cave. Bentonite is most commonly used with water to produce the slurry ("bentonite slurry"). Some experimentation may be required to obtain optimum percentage for a site but amounts in the range of 4 to 6 percent by weight are usually adequate. The bentonite should be well mixed with water so that the mixture is not lumpy. The slurry should be capable of forming a filter cake on the shaft wall and to carry the smaller, under 6mm, excavated particles in suspension. With the slurry method it is generally desirable to: • Prevent having the slurry in the shaft too long to prevent an excessively thick filter cake is difficult to displace with concrete during shaft filling. • Pump the slurry and screen out the larger soil particles in suspension then the "conditioned" slurry can be returned to the shaft prior to concreting. • Care should be exercised in excavating clay through the slurry so that pulling a large fragment does not cause sufficient negative pore pressure, or suction, to develop and collapse a part of the shaft. Page 17 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas When the shaft is complete the rebar cage is set in place and a tremie installed (this sequence is usually necessary so that the tremie does not have to be pulled to set the cage and then reinserted-almost certain to produce a slurry film discontinuity in the shaft). Concrete is pumped with great care taken that the tremie is always well submerged in the concrete so a minimum surface area is exposed and contaminated with slurry. Studies have shown that the concrete will adequately displace slurry particles from the rebar cage so a good bond can be obtained, and as previously noted, if the shaft is not open too long the filter cake on the pier wall is reasonably displaced as well. The successful placement of a pier foundation is dependent on the expertise of the drilled pier foundation contractor. It is recommended that a test pier excavation be performed at the site to verify groundwater conditions at the specific location and time, and to ensure that the proper method of pier installation is being performed. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should be present to witness the test pier operations as well as all of the production pier installation activities. Earthwork and Acceptance Exposure to the environment may weaken the soils at the foundation and pavement bearing level if the excavations remain open for long periods of time. Therefore, it is recommended that the foundation and pavement excavations be extended to final grade and that the foundation and pavements be constructed as soon as possible to minimize potential damage to the bearing soils. The foundation and pavement bearing levels should be free of loose soil, ponded water or debris and should be observed prior to concreting or placing pavement constituents by the Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative. Foundation concrete or pavement constituents should not be placed on soils that have been disturbed by rainfall or seepage. If the bearing soils are softened by surface water intrusion, or by desiccation, the unsuitable soils must be removed from the foundation and pavement excavations and be replaced with properly compacted fill prior to placement of concrete or pavement constituents per Engineer's direction. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should monitor subgrade preparation and placement of fill. As a guideline, a minimum of one in-place density test shall be performed on the subgrade soils and each subsequent lift of fill for each 2,000 square feet, or a minimum of three in-place density tests per testing interval, whichever is greater. Any areas not meeting the required compaction should be recompacted and retested until compliance is met. Page 18 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas Vapor Retarder A vapor retarder with a permeance of less than 0.3 US perms (ASTM E96) should be placed under the concrete floor slab on carton forms or prepared building pad materials, as applicable, to reduce the transmission of water vapor from the supporting soil through the concrete slab and to function as a slip sheet to reduce subgrade drag friction. Polyethylene film, or polyolefin, with a minimum thickness of 10 mils (0.25 mm) is typically used for reduced vapor transmission and durability during and after its installation. The vapor retarder should be installed according to the ASTM E1643, "Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs." All penetrations through the vapor retarder should be sealed to ensure its integrity. The vapor retarder should be taped around all openings to ensure the effectiveness of the barrier. Grade stakes should not be driven through the barrier and care should be taken to avoid punctures during reinforcement and concrete placement. Placement of slab concrete directly on the vapor retarder increases the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling making good concrete practice critical. A low water to cement ratio concrete mix design, combined with proper and adequate curing procedures, will help ensure a good quality slab. Where vapor transmission is not a concern, elimination of the vapor retarder may provide improvements in finishing characteristics and reductions in the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling. However, exposure of portions of the subgrade or granular layer, such as at blockouts for columns or utility penetrations to inclement weather during construction may create excessive or deficient moisture conditions beneath portions of the slab that have already been placed. Blockouts for slab penetrations should be protected if a vapor retarder is omitted. ACI 302.1 R-96 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction," recommends that a vapor retarder or vapor barrier be used only when required by the specific application. Utilities Utilities that project through slabs, foundations or walls should be designed with either some degree of flexibility, or with sleeves, in order to prevent damage to these lines should vertical movement occur. Expansion and Control Joints Expansion and control joints should be designed and placed in various portions of the structure. Properly planned placement of these joints will assist in controlling the degree and location of material cracking that normally occurs due to material shrinkage, thermal affects, soil movements and other related structural conditions. Page 19 of 20 February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas GENERAL COMMENTS If significant changes are made in the character or location of the proposed COCC Southside Police Substation, a consultation should be arranged to review any changes with respect to the prevailing soil conditions. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary recommendations. It is recommended that the services of Rock Engineering be engaged to test and evaluate the soils in the foundation and pavement excavations in order to verify that the subgrade soils are consistent with those encountered in the borings. Rock Engineering cannot accept any responsibility for any conditions that deviate from those described in this report, nor for the performance of the foundations or pavements if not engaged to also provide construction observation and testing for this project. If it is required for Rock Engineering to accept any liability, then Rock Engineering must agree with the plans and perform observation during construction as we recommend. All sheeting, shoring and bracing of trenches, pits and excavations should be made the responsibility of the contractor and should comply with all current and applicable local, state and federal safety codes, regulations and practices, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Page 20 of 20 APPENDIX PP`aV � TF �NG�a� Sr,Hc GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING I0 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS <, ENGINEERING &TESTING 00 ° • SOILS •ASPHALT • CONCRETE qy A UES Company SITE VICINITY MAP ^9� �Ap- L m� i,«AI - f S I r •44 - February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office:512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandate 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com PP`aV � TF �NG�a� Sr,Hc GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING I0 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS <, ENGINEERING &TESTING 00 ,.° • SOILS •ASPHALT • CONCRETE qy A UES Company BORING LOCATION PLAN �t Aft {1 e February 28, 2024 COCC SOUTHSIDE POLICE SUBSTATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel, AIA Yorktown Boulevard Rock Engineering Job Number G124022 Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office:512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandate 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects tEP+ s rer Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. PROJECT: COCC Southside Police Substation Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6066 Yorktown Blvd, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 P Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124022 Fax: A UES Company DATE(S) DRILLED: 2/14/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z wQ > Groundwater encountered at 23.5 feet during drilling. Of Z w w J } n L HF O O `�`CO Lu 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0Z - Z a o 0 0 L o a ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A U) o U) uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ST p= 1.25 32 56 23 33 72 8-1 FAT CLAY WITH SAND(CH), dark gray, moist, stiff. ST P= 1.75 26 S_2 Same as above. 5 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P= 1.5 28 55 19 36 88 S-3 FAT CLAY(CH), brown, moist, stiff. ST P=2.75 29 S_4 Same as above, very stiff. 10 ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=2.5 21 38 16 22 59 S-5 SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL), brown and greenish gray, moist, very stiff. ST P=2.5 22 Same as above. 15 S-6 ST P=2 25 22 105 2.1 g_p Same as above with gravel. 20 N ————— ———— ———— —— —— —— —————————————————————————————— ~ SS q: : S-8 N=17 23 22 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, medium dense. W . 25 O: O ' SS N=28 24 S_9 Same as above. a 30 U) U) L: : x o SS X N=30 24 Same as above, dense. o ` 35 S-10 N Boring terminated at 35 feet. c� Er Z o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qe- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by On Point Geophysical LLC,at GPS coordinates p N 27.65715 W 97.37561 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects tEP+ s rer Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. PROJECT: COCC Southside Police Substation Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6066 Yorktown Blvd, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 P Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124022 Fax: A UES Company DATE(S) DRILLED: 2/14/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z Lu 0 > Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Of Z W w Z g in J H F LL O J H } LL O O D F W LL C7 U U t� ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - Z a 0 0 0 L o a ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A U) 0 U) uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ST P= 1.5 29 S-1 FAT CLAY WITH SAND, dark gray, moist, stiff. ST P= 1 25 28 58 19 39 80 S_2 Same as above. (CH) 5 ST P=4.5 23 S-3 Same as above, brown, hard. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=2.0 29 72 22 50 97 S_q FAT CLAY(CH), brown and greenish gray, moist, stiff. 10 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=2.5 15 S-5 SANDY LEAN CLAY, brown and greenish gray, moist,very stiff. ST P=2.0 20 35 15 20 56 s_6 Same as above, stiff. (CL) 15 Boring terminated at 15 feet. N N N (7 J WI 0 a z 0 U) m U) 0 U) T 0 U) N O V N_ 0 Er o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Drilling operations performed by On Point Geophysical LLC,at GPS coordinates Qe- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX p N 27.65699 W 97.37560 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J LOG OF BORING P-1 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects tEP+ s rer Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. PROJECT: COCC Southside Police Substation Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6066 Yorktown Blvd, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 P Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124022 Fax: A UES Company DATE(S) DRILLED: 2/14/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z Lu 0 > Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Of Z W w Z g in J H F LL �G J H } LL O O L L`C7 U ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - Z a 0 0 0 L o a ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A U) 0 U) uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM 1 ST POSSIBLE FILL: CLAYEY SAND(SC), dark brown, moist, S-1 P=4.0 15 32 14 18 37 very stiff. 2 3 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ 4 ST FAT CLAY WITH SAND, dark gray, moist, hard. S-2 P=4.5+ 20 74 5 Boring terminated at 5 feet. N N N (7 J WI 0 a z 0 U) m U) 0 U) T 0 U) Er O V N_ o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qe- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by On Point Geophysical LLC,at GPS coordinates p N 27.65733 W 97.37520 0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J ,a s Rock Engineering&Testing Laboratory 6817 Leopard Street Engineering&Testing Corpus Christi,TX 78409-1703 <, Laboratory, LLC Telephone: 361-883-4555 9a Fax: 361-883-4711 4y A UES Company KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL MAJOR DIVISIONS SYMBOL NAME STRUCTURE GW .'0 Well Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, SLICKENSIDED-having inclined planes of little or no fines weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance GRAVEL GP o 3° Poorly Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, AND o p little or no fines FISSURED-containing shrinkage cracks, GRAVELLY frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually SOILS GM o more or less vertical Silty Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Silt mixtures LAMINATED(VARVED)-composed of thin layers of varying color and texture, usually grading from COARSE GC WE Clayey Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Clay Mixtures sand or silt at the bottom to clay at the top GRAINED CRUMBLY-cohesive soils which break into small SOILS Well Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or no SW fines blocks or crumbs on drying Poorly Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or CALCAREOUS-containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate,generally nodular SAND SP no fines AND SANDY WELL GRADED-having wide range in grain sizes SOILS SM Silty Sands, Sand-Silt Mixtures and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes SC Clayey Sands,Sand-Clay mixtures POORLY GRADED-predominantly of one grain size uniformly graded)or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing(gap or skip ML Inorganic Silts and very fine Sands, Rock Flour, graded) Silty or Clayey fine Sands or Clayey Silts SILTS AND Inorganic Clays of low to medium plasticity, SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA CLAYS CL Gravelly Clays,Sandy Clays,Silty Clays, Lean ILL<50 Clays — Groundwater Level Organic Silts and Organic Silt-Clays of low - (Initial Reading) FINE �L plasticity GRAINED 1 — Groundwater Level SOILS MH Inorganic Silts, Micaceous or Diatomaceous fine (Final Reading) SILTS Sandy or Silty soils, Elastic Silts ' — Shelby Tube Sample AND CLAYS CH Inorganic Clays of high plasticity, Fat Clays ILL>50 — SPT Samples OH Organic Clays of medium to high plasticity, Organic Silts m — Auger Sample HIGHLY ORGANIC PT „ Peat and other Highly Organic soils — Rock Core SOILS TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. UNCONFINED STANDARD PEN. STANDARD PEN. COMPRESSION TERM TEST TERM TEST TONS PER SQ. FT. Very Loose 0-4 Very Soft <2 <0.25 Loose 4-10 Soft 2-4 0.25-0.50 Medium 10-30 Firm 4-8 0.50-1.00 Dense 30-50 Stiff 8-15 1.00-2.00 Very Dense over 50 Very Stiff 15-30 2.00-4.00 Hard over 30 over 4.00 Field Classification for"Consistency"is determined with a 0.25"diameter penetrometer LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects tEP+ s rer Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. PROJECT: COCC Southside Police Substation Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6066 Yorktown Blvd, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 P Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124022 Fax: A UES Company DATE(S) DRILLED: 2/14/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z wQ > Groundwater encountered at 23.5 feet during drilling. Of Z w w J } n L HF O O `�`CO Lu 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0Z - Z a o 0 0 L o a ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A U) o U) uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ST p= 1.25 32 56 23 33 72 8-1 FAT CLAY WITH SAND(CH), dark gray, moist, stiff. ST P= 1.75 26 S_2 Same as above. 5 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P= 1.5 28 55 19 36 88 S-3 FAT CLAY(CH), brown, moist, stiff. ST P=2.75 29 S_4 Same as above, very stiff. 10 ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=2.5 21 38 16 22 59 S-5 SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL), brown and greenish gray, moist, very stiff. ST P=2.5 22 Same as above. 15 S-6 ST P=2 25 22 105 2.1 g_p Same as above with gravel. 20 N ————— ———— ———— —— —— —— —————————————————————————————— ~ SS q: : S-8 N=17 23 22 SILTY SAND, brown, moist, medium dense. W . 25 O: O ' SS N=28 24 S_9 Same as above. a 30 U) U) L: : x o SS X N=30 24 Same as above, dense. o ` 35 S-10 N Boring terminated at 35 feet. c� Er Z o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qe- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by On Point Geophysical LLC,at GPS coordinates p N 27.65715 W 97.37561 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects tEP+ s rer Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. PROJECT: COCC Southside Police Substation Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6066 Yorktown Blvd, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 P Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124022 Fax: A UES Company DATE(S) DRILLED: 2/14/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z Lu 0 > Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Of Z W w Z g in J H F LL O J H } LL O O D F W LL C7 U U t� ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - Z a 0 0 0 L o a ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A U) 0 U) uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ST P= 1.5 29 S-1 FAT CLAY WITH SAND, dark gray, moist, stiff. ST P= 1 25 28 58 19 39 80 S_2 Same as above. (CH) 5 ST P=4.5 23 S-3 Same as above, brown, hard. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=2.0 29 72 22 50 97 S_q FAT CLAY(CH), brown and greenish gray, moist, stiff. 10 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=2.5 15 S-5 SANDY LEAN CLAY, brown and greenish gray, moist,very stiff. ST P=2.0 20 35 15 20 56 s_6 Same as above, stiff. (CL) 15 Boring terminated at 15 feet. N N N (7 J WI 0 a z 0 U) m U) 0 U) T 0 U) N O V N_ 0 Er o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Drilling operations performed by On Point Geophysical LLC,at GPS coordinates Qe- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX p N 27.65699 W 97.37560 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J LOG OF BORING P-1 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects tEP+ s rer Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. PROJECT: COCC Southside Police Substation Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 6066 Yorktown Blvd, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 P Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124022 Fax: A UES Company DATE(S) DRILLED: 2/14/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Solid Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z Lu 0 > Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Of Z W w Z g in J H F LL �G J H } LL O O L L`C7 U ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - Z a 0 0 0 L o a ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A U) 0 U) uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM 1 ST POSSIBLE FILL: CLAYEY SAND(SC), dark brown, moist, S-1 P=4.0 15 32 14 18 37 very stiff. 2 3 ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ 4 ST FAT CLAY WITH SAND, dark gray, moist, hard. S-2 P=4.5+ 20 74 5 Boring terminated at 5 feet. N N N (7 J WI 0 a z 0 U) m U) 0 U) T 0 U) Er O V N_ o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qe- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by On Point Geophysical LLC,at GPS coordinates p N 27.65733 W 97.37520 0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J ,a s Rock Engineering&Testing Laboratory 6817 Leopard Street Engineering&Testing Corpus Christi,TX 78409-1703 <, Laboratory, LLC Telephone: 361-883-4555 9a Fax: 361-883-4711 4y A UES Company KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL MAJOR DIVISIONS SYMBOL NAME STRUCTURE GW .'0 Well Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, SLICKENSIDED-having inclined planes of little or no fines weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance GRAVEL GP o 3° Poorly Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, AND o p little or no fines FISSURED-containing shrinkage cracks, GRAVELLY frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually SOILS GM o more or less vertical Silty Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Silt mixtures LAMINATED(VARVED)-composed of thin layers of varying color and texture, usually grading from COARSE GC WE Clayey Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Clay Mixtures sand or silt at the bottom to clay at the top GRAINED CRUMBLY-cohesive soils which break into small SOILS Well Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or no SW fines blocks or crumbs on drying Poorly Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or CALCAREOUS-containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate,generally nodular SAND SP no fines AND SANDY WELL GRADED-having wide range in grain sizes SOILS SM Silty Sands, Sand-Silt Mixtures and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes SC Clayey Sands,Sand-Clay mixtures POORLY GRADED-predominantly of one grain size uniformly graded)or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing(gap or skip ML Inorganic Silts and very fine Sands, Rock Flour, graded) Silty or Clayey fine Sands or Clayey Silts SILTS AND Inorganic Clays of low to medium plasticity, SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA CLAYS CL Gravelly Clays,Sandy Clays,Silty Clays, Lean ILL<50 Clays — Groundwater Level Organic Silts and Organic Silt-Clays of low - (Initial Reading) FINE �L plasticity GRAINED 1 — Groundwater Level SOILS MH Inorganic Silts, Micaceous or Diatomaceous fine (Final Reading) SILTS Sandy or Silty soils, Elastic Silts ' — Shelby Tube Sample AND CLAYS CH Inorganic Clays of high plasticity, Fat Clays ILL>50 — SPT Samples OH Organic Clays of medium to high plasticity, Organic Silts m — Auger Sample HIGHLY ORGANIC PT „ Peat and other Highly Organic soils — Rock Core SOILS TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. UNCONFINED STANDARD PEN. STANDARD PEN. COMPRESSION TERM TEST TERM TEST TONS PER SQ. FT. Very Loose 0-4 Very Soft <2 <0.25 Loose 4-10 Soft 2-4 0.25-0.50 Medium 10-30 Firm 4-8 0.50-1.00 Dense 30-50 Stiff 8-15 1.00-2.00 Very Dense over 50 Very Stiff 15-30 2.00-4.00 Hard over 30 over 4.00 Field Classification for"Consistency"is determined with a 0.25"diameter penetrometer saawag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawUedad bEIAOO N o CY) o " 5 1 0 3 I I H,0,a d �1 IlSI JHJ S dbOJ! AlIJ Qo Q°g e o g Z3211Wtl21 2J3N21f11 ro��s�sriusiaHosnaaooa�iew��oiraona«s _ NOliViSOPS 30110d Hinos uvi w o CO N011dla J530 19 31tl0 'ON Nq Sl— Will—K A9 —N ON NoIsV,3a 1 Noisin3a aie-aad dnnr o110M o w � K Q � a x w a zv O z Z F as w C7 ¢ U w O o O o w a m z m c7 c7 z z ti W s czi o o ai w z w z o w z w w rn w> �m LL w z _ Z z it _ w K Q W ¢gym Z a o U m N m m °. Z y W N f W w o ob z tea. O �.e w o� w m _w in LL' K N Q p co w ¢`o N p p w 9 o m _ M ' z 6 _ U oc5 ED Iz LLLJ O L LLJ co 20 ca of CO COLLI � M p a M n :::) O Q o o ��OdW LL V v W '3e3 `o o z Q' W ¢ Q 0 X z IV m o / b O J p w a' o LL W 3 UD — w s g LU a J `e� z v J g o LZ VLU a U O ~ � c cc 6o'by Opp b '°H 3NIlH1V O a�QOJ6 CC Q4�b4" ° 0 g G < bbbPoi °y oe J r 3 Z U 2 1SS� OQ� Q ab�s's O U' ®Z o a _ ¢ saawaS6uuaaui6u310luauyjedaa X30NI133HS M oo se+ % �.. ,�,� �,, .,.a.� SVX31 s � CS $ s' I Z3HIMVH I N3 un I1SldH0 snda0010 h110 >�re svxa'usmNosnaaoa ameNM1o�aoeeus N ( o m�g NOI1V1SonS 30110d Hinos aV3 c U NOLL WSM AS atVO 'ON NgSN3tl NOONtlOSiO AB 31V0 'ON NOISN3tl L WSVaH Ue913d dMf 6LOEle 0 imnaNmavj dW ZNBO l gg� �gg��® ��LL�o 3g_FFzg g��I��a��� �a�3 ------ OR 3333 gggg R IN a`xa, w � B asdaaw S;mst ffisa�aaog� oss�a�as a�as� n SGB� a WOR _ a Nod s�{° 3 nnn °mg b o00 R U €ogpgg� ��gn p a gEEe "xsa„ psaaa $ g g gssasra� ga `� r7£ Fgga-F �qqqq �� g g ��ap LL gg$$ oo�x��g O --ng�zs 2ggggooE�f�3eaa� FFSF �ogoaWWON � w 9 €€€ � aF� f 3s 001110. 15a 6aa s m Na � $�� �f ��i p rw �a 000a000anaoo®occc"cacc g�" RaaRR gig a gpzaa`zzaaazaegg'aat as eisases �=-------- €gfg€s € 5 G < ~ :G :SR�CF� gz�FR�Sm�� g3��mSm G g X15t w bro N r�i3 Q' y�yy3y yw y�yyy� ' 2 O wsb t"m as o8 j OuJ o '12 'la 3 iy`8 URai 5< z act " Y 9 a m s » m, 2gmgm@#&a£mo k G�1 2 ; 3 ) \\ ii` ` ) zwn}a»a �pGemaSmUg m= a \ / � : ; : / ` mivl 2g93$iw Hinos uvi ) 8CO RP . o /\ ^ \ ^\ z � ^ ` z LU LU § � §: _\} � k \ ( }§}[§ MH / % � ` [ .� )LU LU • \k? LU }` LU # . § 0( z; §\ i , 7� 7); saoiI6uuaaw8u3 jo juawUeda4 S1d2JIOX3 VLl lV ZIU N o CO *se+ a Z3211�3iH„sae SVX31 0 = O7 Qo o a s 1 WV21 213N21f11 I1sIUHO SndHOO to A110 �easr i'usiaHosnaaoo aaiewo-oiraona«s o r^ MR NOIlV1S8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — NoII ne 3iea oN Nasin3a NoII A Siva oN NoiWu N -- T li li m Nr zr=r � r N — N.�- � I i � III II � � b ---- r NI. os � . *il- r IM �N-iN11111 tom' rN .t CNN. N,v, .�.� 1 j . z , . r r � _ u r = _ r - �� 1 E- a 12— Nw,mNIN — � � A 9 c r -. — NPI IN EE -� � ft JNZ _ I2 —. o _. saowag6uuaaw8u3)ojuawpedaa S1d2110X3 VLllVZM N o CY) tv o *Ss+LL a Z3211�3 i H„sae SUR O a CD Qo v4 o a s 1 WV21 a3N21f11 11s1aHo sndaoo>o u10 tab ZSVx l IsiaHosndaoo aaiewMoirdona«s o r^ WiV1S8nS 30110d H1nos uvi w o CO 'Jdu s L.— — Noudiaos3a ne 3\eaoN Nasin3a No777 ne 1 3\v1 1 oN Noisuv,3a 19 l 4 8 ` Ham M j m e - - - _ ., s 3 �... 1 RIB q 1111 HERn� I 3 - \V d MI M OOOOO� I 10 - ��h,. @..ma d59N NeHdJ lnJ e wmunng ��.. .. INA17011 a F m @q 9 N = W O @n HIM MON it 11 W1 11 THE hil 11H 11 lug Ph » ' HE uw NO- b g2.er ca z of s ill CI 17 - m M bpi 3 _ - _ mug in 1 lot H it to 101 ill iT� ; "_. W11 fit MAN Own k _ Rup,1 Nq 1 im PON SK All Hpi y NIII. NN � y I,Aa V .eo I.,a NIII.et I a � NI„�n NIYI. ,.tl V .Do i�a NII1.9t a saowag6uuaaw8u3)ojuawpedaa S1d2110X3 VLllVZM N o CY) rno *Ss+LLa Z3211�3 iH„sae SVX31 O aCD Qo v4 o a s 1 WV21 213N21f11 LAM SMWO to A110 t��ZSVx l 1S1HHosndaoo GAIGNMoiNdOU«s o r^ NOUV1SOAS 30110d Hinos uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Noudiaos3a ne 3iea oN Nasin3a No7o77 ne —1 oN Noisuv,3a tub I bd! 1 3 HUT jiW � �� ��1 � _ N n tau if i " 1zU2H ASH iF s a — — lull UZ- HHHHo n s _ '. VM - MH_ -� lit ''M I�o_wLL .�d�...� _ P�..;�d.�.o '.�_ � d��1w.. d_.,-. Nil a old oil IL ro.bo �o g WIMIL oil z § -- £ loin g a = m t _ £ r IN Q o gw f n N� o 1 MUM m I - A,l- 011 LL a .. d4f,�4f N�4.Yf — I � 15 it lit P — _ II � I of 0 - W 1 �I _ e — $ — R 7 --i1 — a J _ L J Ya.lf Ur - - o _ in MH1 HE — GNIN d '£ 3 3 lilt Ant My z G"Was HH! 8 NHMum MW -71 ��Y ii'l 5 oilit t__ s§Ell Ese, '. 'xy OH,tl Lddtl ' HE I lam El I 3 � e � �Ntl £ e £ t 2 �y - - g IN £ill W �`x c 1NnOW lI M N 9 93HT'.h. qsit Swi -jZ T-, ad nil 1 ll W _ £ 3 H �lt W 9 .- Fs. - z - a3 saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawUeda4 SNOIlVIA3dS8V 4NV Sl08WAS *se+ a Z3211�3iH„sae SVX31 0 = O7 Q o v4 a s 1 WV21 213N21 f11 o I1sIa HO SndHOO to Adlo t��ZSVx l IISIHHosndaoo a ie wo-oiaaona«s o r^ NOIlV1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Noiidi� ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G A Siva oN NoiWuv _ Z 0 _ `w'o a W m 45 wz _ a-6 1. _ - - _- o - ? oo N - Z - _ o b a J wovl2 w�z4 � N���a����z�oioa� JJ o U f - - - - - - - - - W z��g Ww ��pz�Jrp oo pw W s ssss>.z» H ¢�3�gaz w�¢momoww¢, F w 4 U z d4mW flP U rc m o01 a 3 z rrw¢r—?otr¢roc>>oU'—LLoo�oc>>c>m a aw Ej 300 — oj 3zwQzoK�w � z o000000 00o dddddddddddddaaa ��������a���a� mmmmm����hhhhyhhhhhhhhhh��� ������������� »» s>s»> fN Z O H — LU 75 a - -_ o <�< __ ---- w wwww LLsLLssLLLL----------- LLLLLLLLLLLLLL =____________ _____ r a «<m � _____ ¢o «< w «< «««««« U �w g8 SSE o��__ i`�`��w ��w —w55shaomo�- — ¢¢wa ¢¢¢¢—"."P T mmm mmmmmmmmmmmm c�c�c�c>c>c>c>c>c>c>c>�c�c�c�c�c�c�........c�c�wwwww o00000000000000o wwwwwwwwwwwwww — mCoJcJi ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ mmmmmmmmmmmmm .................c�c�c� o000000000000o wwwwwwwwwwwww CO saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawUeda4 sanls 1H13W(.9/9-0-S3d)ll iwm N o CO SMRHX_31 LO Z1wva a3Nan I1SIaHO SndaO O to A110 tabZSV l IISIHHosndaoo o g a�ie wo-�oiaaona«s 0r MR NOI1H1S8nS 30110d H1nOs uvi w o m Nolidl� ns 3iea 'oN Ml— Widid—G A Siva 'oN NolWuv k k 0 r z e = a m FLU , p a V N Kew V a. 9 2 k� � ggi HK�¢i S w S - ---- y yq ��Vy- 01 �h R p LL UN s w w L 2 2 L7i LL k o,' - -NSz `2p m� y � y apLLLL m o p c I w o K aY o o .o v W d f m s » m, Amgn-qd#SV G , C ® ;m § GH 1 � emaS mUg ��m=�_\a\wl\8 �3 )§mivl2g93$iw Hinos uvi ) \ CO / ) q - - --, LU k( § \\ _ \ 04 ( \\\} ( \\\\\ }§ \\ \\i --L r \ } \ } - - \ »<fz© ®\ «! saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawPeda4 S310N WdIN39 iD o *SO+LL a Z3211�,3, i.H„�,.a-e SHX31 0 = O7 Q o v4 a s 1 WV21 213N21 f11 o I1SIa HO SndHOO to'kilo t� ZSVx I IISIHHosndaoo a ie wo-oiaaona«s o r^ NOI1H1S8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Noiidi� ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G A —I oN NoiWuv 0 3 z4 as � 52 - �N a3 op 4 w W W w, Z W W Ua _ _ - _ 2o�po ? Z - W W C) - to d Z -� p3o 3w in Z Z m o QJ - 8R -z os oy< - W o - � W Z o Z - Ep W a o S W 2 _ 3 - Lu s so ww ogpO- doawa. JE— sg- J a O - o -� �. J LL LU O z t- - _ - - sag s - ao - _ � o- S ___ ZJ - - - - - J p - z, m¢a w a. zo a Q W W W - - �3 - - _"- 2 W o `w o�� �yrc ow4o ��St o z4 �0 40 aim - Z - z4w' J _ _ _ awz�, 1, �q Ww' =3° - O -z - - z3so rc� _ O - _obi" -Gs �k ��� �3a�m a _ 66�= p��o gs oo - o� - N W wSt Z -- _ - _ b - o5z W - - - - - - Z19 W - �a - - off? - - z3o °-°gz _ _ _ _ saawas 6uua8ui6u3 10 juawyedaa NOUNHOd N 13000 LO M �o SVX31 0-) CS z3:o 211 WV21 I N3 un I1SldH0 snda0010 h110 >LreLStlX3lrismN�sndao�ame uo HaoAeus o o a $ 5 g iw NOIltl1SenS 30110d Hinos uvi N U 3tl �+� NOLL WSM AS 3lNO 'ON N°SN3tl NONdINOS30 AB 31tlO 'ON NOISN3tl L NaN3" dw zRmLu L et $ w x d eta n z a zL a asg a Z m s a e weg ® U � � - I �" " � �s$ " y w c U s t a � w ® a `3 is O " aa _ € H i s R � w .. LL �$� H - € w a C :a;�u O Gi o - sa p E a vi N'- 3 �" 7 w m ; g g F 2 3 � g a< .__�� $ __� w _z E z z 85_% O H O m� 9 z m z$ne L.L. ins $ t? g .� _��® LL _S 5 w O a', $ w aI a§ m z- F w LL g $3 w 4€ i r$s "w a O U o w yQ uoi wa' °x �e w �$ g `€ w W O�Jiia� F g1 w 3Q $ z ¢ m $ a-12 a 4s$a s`s4 is z ..s$_ a J m e �g*W w 1�o z igi. g D 2 J "_ x�_= Owe Q ua��aff �� s�tm a6Ama a < y a W o ..a= gsa�wso O w � z _ F $ � e m 8 - a m u a9=4Wg� LL > w§ " w�§ U 3$aa 3� w f® z= yYs =� tl< o :@gBoS. � Q 3 a FM1 w o!f O :a �= = w J soo i rc s C � a w w Ho P :ry g Hu g ggas s s a Ng _ 'z a m z a a�a {r- g=m m w` Q- �y z _ $ �s s af v5 F M Ho "�� �`��G¢�3 Y�ba�a8a�&.b W �=G�m�� �a o LL Q�3�_ � ��� F¢me ~ �_b rV J tlYg�3��� Z�g� �'^ w s :m oa.w :>� N, _ $_�,_ $ea�aW�' z o �� Oao � O p �. �����. x �� x a n�" Q�� J�`� x wz"offs$ J u o tl- � C7 =9= J Q 3 �a gig-g W 9 N u. LL w� [� LLua g $ga a 3 9$'o s K€g $ a g"m"m J boa C7.m 3 °gS�e U € s Cal 0 0 � Esww o F -------------------------- n jig 8 Y sc �W o !$a ova x W Sa--- -- -- - -------------- r w s� e a os HE m o ads a $ apR $ �o � w g T a vi � ;�� e � LL � 3` e - - e �o 3 LU pad€ En $ I a" $ �$�A M ® s z i a w 3 ' mm $ m� o m m -------------------------- za $aoxo _ � $ a w a q " a ff H o 10 :'- _ oaz out`g� ? w o ` z -- e aa� �� gR 3 n LL'e a b O ej��` �'� m tlw$ wg a oLL --- -- ---------------- -- ,�' O w y g3 $ g` w w m 3 € aw2-2 " has= `m m �a " a$ IS�' 8� lli.$i a_ � � F a a 211 � a Ia"$ g$ _ �g ° s3o g Hill zdm tea$ 19wr C7 a ao 2 In a-m HIPIaE 5 $ $ aul z $`an ag F �`m�Y MP w _ Y>„� � s� @e@ 7 @ E#r g H .26 adz �paa R %�= ggas $: � 4 s' a g3 $a $ ���_" f6 go �• °€=�§€ 04 _ @ $ �S,a e$x € � s � �mm a ��� z € �a � c I $ as x A:� o� :!k m 5_--- � Hag Hl H§�w�" �<'g��� x = s $ 6 ' g e @ ss abaaabba€babbaa€abbabaabba s 83333i333S33iS333i333o € gigsF Q sassoaooaaoassassosoosss£�s � , w aaaaaaaa€€€gagaaaaaaaaaaaaa a iE aso a as �x �0000000000000000000000000o a i a 4' �_. DINH " $w w ; aaaaaaaaa>=aaaaaaaaaaaa^^^" as �awo €�o OQmmommo_mommoomommmommmmmoa € � --------------------------- - »ga n is,sw w m yg y ' � �s7G§G® $ sa ® "�' € � a Za 5§3$F=d 394E-�zms mO a kRaxsa� n ?u d- z _ _ _ _ _" __ wm §@ °'n8� Y=s m" ,i m et a co s �-^_ ^^ N - _ 9 m as W.1 z W90 z gmmm"mm"m------------""""" n sm�sno s a sQ asap$�n 8ofl ° E °eaa 9 N a m$ S' �e : y E Q m m0#11 i� Iffl lffil--a-,--�@ m � v€ �� m ro ma n s � gg 19 £soon W Iw$ a - = a=¢aagww .. www ".<;:,. $S se U m s a v u) a 0 o w16 HIS'; Y 9- U s�s Qo ® 9Y ®€ ;� z =ma 12Z a- O m a` z O &gQ =' O �'� gm e _ i "�� z ya,®ao"�e<aa w ss$ $ mE > p �s sp LL m o r ❑ o 0 0 Y aR a. a ° g ' s= O Q - Q gfl'H am z T o s� 9 _ - w€a$ a < �� gsa L= p x U a'as ma = i LL -a m a z"_ $ Y LL e a a p'-w- rM $ a � s " w H fl a w s "s w.o Qom a " a � z 3 d p J o -ae g��yG C =b s, i ❑B❑❑❑❑ ❑❑❑❑❑ �e pN K uyz3Yuk�. ICE 0�' J a ae II m s� 3 � §$ oW� g g e w � U a s o_ a s s z 4 'a dy C $� Q aka �W p a U i"a ., w o V $ g c ads 90 w i�` I mV1169 'o a o z 9€ �s s a-H H $ b <' s e a A a $ e `er w €eta"aka° z � w �� _ q m o p $_ r a s k ��- s s aQ7 a w p" a n S fln N rn € i _ s LL wain as 6uuatlui6u3 10 luawyedaa Wd 1000 N StlX31 o CIO°se 0 = � SIJ 311H�tlV 1 CS .o I Z3HIMVH I N3 un I1S1dH0 snda0010 h110 >Ire svx3'usmHosnaaoa ame uovaoeeus o ( o a $ ,� 5 g iw l NOI1tl1Sam 30110d Hinos atl3 N coU 3tl NOLLdM1S30 A9 3IYL 'ON NgSN3tl NOOdItl0530 AB 31Y0 'ON NOISN3tl 4 RnaN300V dW zWa l y � � U ym VJ g p� F 3 Ig 6 11f. �¢ 4 w "a a 4 F s €s sag H R 4�s 'tlwEa ca g 3 Ses �s > So says O U ffi� a U fly fly �4 �a c W Q Y U • 1 gg o J 88 st H @ o � s VO � • + a � s � � c ffi gk 5a a; w0 oF- MCI of S 4mO� a 0 g� as oil a� e0 "ff eg 0m ssasaaaa�a�4saaaaaaa a�aam �� x gliigillil Jill s � ssss assse�a^•^ecma�r aazp>e a>e � 3 saoinaag 5uuaau16u3�o juawa jedad I S31oN 11A10 �+'> o o '� "s`i 3 3 1 1 H a "< I1a0 S`00 1 AlOU 2321Wtl2 1 23 oeasmai'iisiaHosnaaooanieN oiaoneu c o I NOUViHnS 30110d HinOS HVJ N o m c NOLLdIa0930 AB 31tl0 'oN Naan3a Nwd ls. AA 31b0 'ON N0191n3a ig will m 4 - m w d W >a no - - - _ a ,� N Z mF� > W Mn p -H1 m - wQz� �3z � - :�,� � R -oom a �omoE �,� _I§� m� - - sm _ - = 3 N sit �g oho -- � Qua`^ -xE�~� � _ -_ - 11 - Z O&5p o o LLV _ m5 �g w_1 N _ _ -ni _ Qa z �3 - ik_i °r�rc_ _ Co N Ow m� Gp out - :Q - wkw <� w� �5 3$5 Z �w _ O - -€ 13 .� �� - - Z b€r K`53 - - m5o - �a _ - <w �8I _ - = Ga�Sw - ��h€ �r a GN - - 3 oG�oymoW = w <b= - - __ -opw - �Ye Cam ��m - _ Oo`Gp _ o'erAllow_ 5p�� o5.w Kh (�� >� - "`dew oh - o Q - - - - o� - S - Z - Q €i - Om who o ��awy `� _ 5 a� z to`.L z o� m _ - % _ _ w�p<m a� _ p U� _ o w - �3¢4� - O"�� RIM az oZ'cw11 zzz'g`w - �3zz� _ _w$ z~ - - - - k � _z�o�o pay_Jam a` � oG pG�xoGo i$ Q oZa�sosIdpp - � aab5a Oh _`a�_ u - - o, o - - a� Oz - o O� �$ o���yza m S Sz - HOW p _ veal. NAAW3 o a OWN 8- o WWI INS,; - - a w of I - 3 p� - - - pew _ a� m - p all �E - - - �a� m 1 HH! WWI - - - - �� wa is wm - m w oowo it NUNALIVI 000HI, _ - _' o a _g -�� - NINz - z wmow - _ _ MHO AM=3 _aGm - ��oo=`oQ _ o€ zrm€ WE z�W£wzwwwaw� �Gw oib��Em Quo s��"a5� - -_ -?€� miCm o£mm .�p,.,a„ 03 f"m o�Np on ?go���`oj�`oQ W o - - - F�w���mwo - -gig `G _ - o�� €�" oKc€ �a< ppapypo od - Q �w 'gw - m`dw o`d� Oz - wg m€` pF�� - _ - ��i3wp �zo�z o��poEop _ m�pmpm3pp��=am"=k$`aw$J- a`~a'rc�m�� w 5 ellNm€E��y - Y��i 1i _ w p H E - o _ 11 1 pp it d _ `mod o h on 0 0y `m = p z oW `l €m og 1; - by _ 11 Ga €fir om< 3o _ 4 0 0 1 no -04 � rc 045€ a EZy _ _ � o�p�Q�a` lk o� _ in - - - €p G z�o - -- _ - all G��o�mz __ - �`� m 'x^Smp _ 5 _ _ - - bunt m€_ r�'a iimom� - a -�Gp = - - Q = w Gym_ �� 1�� - �3G€a g m OM o�Zx oo > - - - - as �'sw bw Cp - - ,g - N ON 1 �m if _ _ a - og al -1l lot G BM W m _ - - _ - - awl gal � ow - - _ WWI; H - ><K'o� _ mm IWIT _ _ _ UN - _ $o - _ __ via x�a ?3oww IN is _obi,5 stun o - - - Must eg - _G�� __ - - - �aGN oGow¢ - - -aoz000 -_�- N p€�Ca ora�w oLo=o��gyEm - g_1- oa y _¢€ _po Qoo pwoe€Q��o¢,o�w„apopo�€xtw�o�apowo��€oe„pow Fw O- m _ - _ _ SaovuaS buiaaaul5u3�o juawa jodad C 4 � I II S310N LINO � o Cy) SVX31 001) S 1 3 1 1 H tl tl z'� m I1SIHHO SnddOO to AJO 9LVBL Stlx31'1151i1H�S(Ida 00'0A19 Nh901N210A BLL9 �-ry i "' J o z3aiwna aaNanl o NOIlV1SOnS 30I10d H1nOS UV3 N o m c o � a Noudiaosea ee elvaoN Naan3a Noudiaosaa Ae elwoN Noisv`ea W >a o z mF� zLu o ga- - - - U - 0 G - - - _ _ O C` - - - -3�zY�Vm ps � - o�`oLL - :�p_ _ _ u o Z - Z J a LLG _ �z �2 - oGo�¢a zN _ Groz�o� - _ _ - -o�o� - _ »a as a ya a3- Ei - 3 zw 5 - tio - p --_ oho - ---- - _ - - - - - -�jo - FE gY_ sw -� - y ^'ao- C�___ w,5m a� - _- M�� H 3w - < Haw on 2 s g g wttm - �o oY ��p3 dz iw �g<o �'�2o - o� _ g _ ffoo off"' ww - _ Q� - _ � U saoinaag buiaaaul5u3�o juawa jedad C 4 � I III S310N LINO � o Cy) "N "S`1 0 3 1 1 H a,a v < I1SIaH0 Sf1db001 AllO v <U o Z3UlHV! 213N2lfllL oeasmai'iisiaHosnaaooanieN oiaoneu o ppoE~2o NOUViHnS 30110d HinOS UVJ N o m c NOUIaosea ee eiva ou Naansa rvoudiaosaa we eiw ory Noisv`ea ul - - yffi5 N oils a aj 661 , - _ -s U - - - iv _ € _ - -_ � -- - - i,3 ���zp 0 :gip co w - - - -og� - - - - - �tn w� - �`G oEz - �o �o _ sw oio ap - _ �sm ��ppm o boo mg z�a - aC - -zGp E - a8'^o oLL � �Jw woo�we -«w �50o c�= y9i moo a�«o a�o< � o ZE _o _ o - - E=— T9. w�� w__ Ae _ - �_ _ - __ - �Zw oa�p Y Fina88 Nm o�' V �LLo `p6�o8€oW � o 05 ffi X ME - a� _ - �,K' - - °'� P - _ - z� - - o o _ _ - _ _ - It g oao o _ -- _ - - - .so _ - oso - _ - - -�s�- - - - - - - -ISE, saoinaag BuiaaauiBu3�o�uawuedad �+'> co 1 31n(13HOS SNUS31 WdIN3J N o CO "s`i 0 3 1 1 H a.d < I1SIaH0 Sf1db001 AllO n ~ <U o Z3UlHV! 213N2lfll� oeasmai'iisiaHosnaaooanieN oiaoneu o NOUViHnS 30110d HinOS UVJ N o m c NOUIaosea ee eiva ou Naansa NJUNosaa we eiw ory Noisv`ea Lwy Ul N o= s a s� - �o w = _ --_ - ------ d a d a aEEEEE- o§ 998 EEEE -" - - uj _ - m -;' - - - F3€pg�ooF �o 13 M �'p E3 Li N - oR g.Iz _ �o za N3�o gg saovuaS buuaauisu3�o juawueaa4 I NVId AHdHdOOd01 8 SNOUIGN00 ONUSIX3 N o CM "S 1 0 3 1 H a a d < I1SIaH0 Sf1db001 AllO ~z N m Z3211Wtl2! 213N2lfll 0 VweZSVxai iSNHosndaoo GA]UNmoiAWkRe ca 3 0 NOIlViMS 30I10d HinOS UVJ o m c Noudiaosea ee eivaoN Naansa Noudaosea we eiwoN Noisv`ea W ?a o e3o / o O Z mF� LU O O �� w z 0 w Ha 3 W a W 0 ^2 0 o m N N C a Z 3 Z Y a s z =I° � w 21 cc p ■ — ,. uaiv i ais,os ■ x\ o I I ■ }I I / I I tea + 0 ■ill 4i: oF�Q0 — o �— + J�a ^l— a u ovu 0 ■� 1 I � � mN"OJ>O w —■ W LL LU ■ wu _ I I I I Id la,., �d+ ltl, Id �d twa - Q ■ 2 C x Q O + m W pN f9 m N O ■ wz 0 ■ m�� I LL F g X LL f g 0 W LL 6 N W LL p N O V O yp ■ LL r> LL f g p ■J LL 7 p LL>>O la 70 O , w OO O xa xa 3 ■ SO Ja ■ LL x LL O I �d ld ld �d�ld ld �d ld ld a saovuagbuuaauisu3�ojuawueaa4 II Wd MdVbJOd01'8 SNOUIGNOO JNIlSIX3 CN o CM SVX31 0 z N m S 1 0 3 1 1 H B 8 tl I I1SIaH0 Sf1db001 A110 3 ' w �U o Z3UlHVN 213N21f11 0 �oe�smai'iisiaHosnaaooameH oi�aone�u NOIlV1SOlS 30I10d HinOS UV3 N o m c NOUIaosea ee eiva ou Naan3a NOUNosea we eiw ory NoisNea Z f WLU ?a o Z m X m > LL W I s Q O m — z 2 U W w O O m C f Z — � a C w _ O rn Z U I I ■ I ■ o.V } ■ I } I w L w xz N Q LU WWI \\ \ IU-5 4I OLU 0 — K — ■ o� O N � r z N y I ONujN x x tau$ ■ O m LL ■ cc x x W G F G ■ f0 w ■ saovuag buiaaaul5u3�o juawa joda4 CN C� I NVId 311S NOIlIlOW3a N o CY) .a.� SVX31 0 o M m Z3211Wdil 213 dnl 11s1aHO sndaoO 10 u1O e svxai usladasndaoa arieNmoi aone ce 3 o NOUViMS 30110d H1nOS UV3 N o m e � a NOUIaosea ee eiva ou Naan3a NOUN sea we eiw ory Noisv`ea Ul ��p 2 23 3 ppQ �we Z mFm w o ? o boo $ Z w e o W ho is �" F o a - p° _ g'�° Ziw Z Z 0D t^, — 3 — 661 Z a o i 0 3 - �m3 o (I'dld).00'S4S MS4 JC.2ZS `�' uaiv�a3 ais,os F'd Ll r-- _ p3 1° I c co m 3� > W YI J awl Z I a3 a O - Y d I O it I Ld c*ld �d' 'Id Id �d �d ld Id 1 _ F 2 Q x Q O 2 O W N x 1 0GG W d x f7 N f9 �N O Q�4n a�4a 0 LL F g p V Oyu; OOy�� 3 WJ x J LL6 N IYLLIL LLO O 0i u5>0 LL m>O LL»O a Do O �O p m V x m V xa xa 3 - SO 0w �d ld ld Id ld ld �d ld ld Q saovuag buuaaul5u3�o luawajoda4 NVId 31lS N o CM z F o I s`i 0 3 i 1 H a a d < I1SIHH0 Sndb00 to AJO o� U Z32llHVN H3NHni oe�smai lisladosnaaooameu oiaaonelu' NOIlViMS 30I10d HinOS UVJ w o m c NOUIaosea ee eiva ou Naan3a NOUN sea we eiw ory NoisNea 3p Z n � IW > O ? m F m w F I© z �e 4a a ow ao Z © N 3i ? W mo — ri m Z aU� C N _ III W W �ooF z - F - -w _ ZS Z8 s Lu CC lu JE w oz ld ld ld ld �d z Id Id o ld_ - Id m i - I a I 0 I k m I I I I }� 3 Po� I kc �N m o ma rc I _ - — I G m I p - I I � Ca`I rRr. ♦— aa I wi Y 0 Sq r a a _ J o r a _ I -ice p �m rc I' I I � I i — 3 m3 ZE9E0 0ELOZ#'O00 L09LbOELOZ#'O00 £b•Lb'SOd'V'A Eb•Lb'SOd VA LZ NOIlO35 bL zoi i01fl0$Otl S£'L a x LZ NOIlO35 bL 101 iO 1f10$Otl 99'0 lOtltll NOD Wtli ON3 v iinia unoij L lOVtll NOO WMi ON3 v iime unoia saovuaS buuaauisu3�o luawueaa4 NVId 10d1N001t/NOISN3WI4 31lS N o CM z F o I "s`i 3 i a d < I1SIaH0 Sf1db0010 AllO o H aSVXII U �U Z3UlHVN 213N21f11 oe�smai'lislaHosndaooameu oi�aonelu NOI1H1SOnS 30110d HinOS UVJ w o m c NOUIaosea ee eiva oN NaM NOUNosea we eiw �or�NoisNea a 0! a £ Ul o Z m X m - 5 5 N Zips a j a LL w s 6 z F a N O - Z � > F U l W ld ld ld ld ld Id ld T Id O I I I I p I I I I^ Im I I I .I I I 0 �s esro II �m sp I a° I ,Ly ze os ss L I I o I J I s sro I m 3 I F I I � I I I c o� � � I I n x aL os � I „L — — Y ? sL LOL � I vo I ld ld d �cF xlrl ld Z£9EOOELOZ#'OOO 1 09Lb0£LOZ#1300 Cb•Lb'S0d'V'A £b•Lb'S0d`V'A LZ NOIlO35 n zoi i01fl0 SOV S£'L x LZ N01133S bL zoi i01f10 SOV 99'0 IOVMl NO0 WMi ON3 v iinia MOOR L IOVMl N00 WMi ON3 v iime MOOR saovuag buiaaaul5u3�o 1uawa joda4 CN C� I NHId JNIOH?JJ � o CY) o '� "s`i 0 3 1 H a a d < I1SIaH0 Sf1db001 AllO ~ m Z3UlHV! 213N2lfll 0 veasvxai iisiaHosnaaoo arieNmoi aone cs NOIlViMS 30110d HinOS UVJ o m c NOUIaosea ee eiva ou Naansa NOUN sea we eiw ory Noisv`ea 4 W o Z m X m 3 - z w—e _ LLI Z,= s j NuJ m� - s _ 661 o a F - Z 3 l f _ Id Id Id Id ld Id O - - CC _�a , � 000000 6 �M + x \\\ �x' I as ♦ 'rc ♦ 1 u u r ♦ p 2 + _ + ¢I6 o a� I` �a `Iry /� �♦ 1 mm wm -i ld K1 �id ld z£a£oo£Loz#•Ooa M0 tlo£LOz#'Oo0 £b•Lb'SOd`V'A £b•Lb'S0d`tl'A Lz No11O35 n zol io 1110 SOtl S£'4 LZ N01133S bL zoi i01f10 SOV SS'o IOVUI NOO WHJ ON3 v aame M1101i L x lOVtll N00 WMi ON3 v jame unoia saoinaag buiaaaul5u3�o luawa joda4 CN coI I NHId l�lllllfl � o CY) z m H aNa2lvfll< I1SIaH0 S1db0010 AllO oasai'Iisadosneoo anieN of ane Ns1 0 3 1 ZHINVU 23 o w NOIlH1S8nS 30110d HinOS UVJ N o m c � a NOUIaosea ee eiva ou Naansa NOUN- - W o w�a - Z mx� mio _ g3 0 w w Z� s Q O - W 6W 6 O z F _ > 3 F w O y p3 rns ld ld �d l old ld Id �I • ' an,os� I ■ I - I I I � I 5a ass >9 Ind + + + } n Sao g Wl� a3rc x _ LL -c m + W � N + + LU + + I =Z $ _ ; Az J X m 0)J m o� o O Q PI Y w I w W W �1 ¢ 0 } + �+ 'L ha :dot+Im sHo I + 4 • d. ld ,d, 39 Id lo Z£OEOOE 40Z#'O00 �wmL09Lb0ELOZ#'O00 Eb'LbCSOd b'A �� p Eb•Lb'SOd'V'A LZ NOIlO35 b L 101 i0 lf10 SOtl SE'L �'�'�o LZ NOIL03S b L zoi i0 1fl0 SOtl 99'O pro lOVVI N00 WMi ON3 9 jania unoii ■ IOVUI N09 Wtli ON3 w iinis unoia < Vlli ■ SaOINGS buiaaaul5u3�o juawa joda4 CN co I II NVId l�lllllfl � o CY) N '" SVX31 0 S 1 3 1 1 H �tl tl ■ <� o ; _ z3UlHVN a3Nan1 I1SIaH0 Sf1db0010 A110 BL3Vx311191 M 3 daoD a„aNh,o rao a a o paoE~2o NOIlV1SOnS 30110d HinOS UV3 N o m c � a Noudiaosea ee eiva oN NaanSa Noudia— 1e eiw oN Nmsa`aa Z W o z m X m W Z,I s Q N 0� o — z aLLw � mom a II W W ss o J z III 3 11 oD -lu U) �F D � so so o� _ � 3 3� I a8�ee - e + ° � sd� s ■ w e N N N LLstau�sn LLI LL,W .os� N� -- ■ 2 Z ^we ■ Ox LL � w W> F z O J ■ U ou � w Q� + W 3 3 W O ■ LL C W LL, � x O - K ■ - ZLLbZOBLOZ#'000 ZS'Dd`L9'A _a SOV 69'S x I m L 101 NO■LOOtl M311f19 ■ SaovuaS 5uuaaul5u3)o juaw>aedad NVId NOUNIA3bd en co SVX31 NOiim1 0d?oivM Wa01S S 1 0 3 1 1 H 3 tl tl <v o Z3UlHVN 213N2lfll I1SIaH0 Sf1db0010 AllO BL3Vx311191 M 3 dad NOIlH1SOnS 30110d HinOS UVJ o m c NOUIa0s3a AB 31tl0 'ON NQM Ndill S30 AA 31b0 'ON Nol91�3a iU Z i LU Z \ ' W Z'wo aj a 6W z a ea �wLLI _ ,g wz3 w o CC z — 5 ¢ U o 4 Lao ���= mm��� W O p m�m 9w W 11 m g �' w<» p ,' IL LL a�L `z ao� oLLaw�w H J o a�ow� _oE o�N„cos Lu - a�LL F o o= 6 F yy cm _ " gory ry - K Ui o I `oFJ� W O W I p z I I I I m z W - - O a4 Sao D �y am fr t Wldld ld ld ld � - 3`e:�`awo J =4AME a 9 ------------------- ----� w I LU 2 � - ® 1 - I Nz W 1 I z m z 1 = r 1 o J ''< '< p o 0 1 M o ��8€ W d W W yzj ��{Ii I1F�� mp <�o f V w W O I � < SaovuaS 5uuaaul5u3�o juamuedad Wd 1N3W3JVNVW ,n SVX31 1111VnD H31VM molS S 1 0 3 1 1 H tl tl 1 z m r■ iiSiHHO SnddOO 10 uio VWLSVX3i LSIi HO S(IdbOO 01,19 NMO1Ml0A RL.9 J U o Z3alwda a3Nan1` NOIlMOM 3O11Od H1nOS HVJ o m c � a Noudiaosea 1e 7— roN NJM Noudiaosaa we eiw oN Noisv\ea m L W ¢ of LWU J o LU N Z a aj u s m = = I Z w H � Y Z 9 LEI ®y®` Z 0 a FF W OR 3 •�s 3 EEC„M _ a aboa 3Nllalb bpb�a Opb �° -- t n° - UO o 46 3a- - V 3 N "M HNOM . $" spa ._ V`1 0 - H -V 3 gap w� �o m saoinaaS Buuaaui,Bu3�o juamuedad �+'> I I S11H130 Sf103Nb'1130SIW N o � N oo I1SIaH0 Sf1db001 AllO � w o _ Z3211Wdil 213N21f11 0 �oe�smai'iisiaaosnaaooameN oiaaone�u o v NOIlH1SOnS 30110d HinOS UVJ o m c NOUI= AB 31tl0 GNNJi(.d NOI1.iIa�S30 AA 31Y4 'oN NOISV3a Z a m � mQso a \i LU m z - V w Y! �a Z m=M w CC Ea aLLw LL, \i 3w a G F 3 W �\ Q Z O 6W o a OIV � O _ > 3=o W rv'I G > o< ic N p m O LLI O F cc 7 la _ 6 LU J LU F Z VJFaZV �jtl--- aQ6 OF�JGWW Z ZO F> gswww O W Q OO Lu a r —C WO LL LU I a- W Z �C o JJ IF a v Z O p s Z O LL LL o a v w o cs = a z 9 mo W w \ o C1 O m mo a s 06d a0 o m o w I I o G�a - G w�o �Itll3a aid _z� O a� 7 o N t0 a Z S W f LLI lz z O 6 _ - O W I— co ✓/\ W a F V A W v/ i 0S c a � n Z to vv IIII� 0.4 OmC � m a J vvi/vim U)'A a as v _ ivIL W d .. lx Fa m ^ y 6F 'a saoag Buiaaaui,Bu3�o juamuedad C 4 II S11V130 Sf103NV1130SIW o � vu s l 0.3,1.1,H..�,.a.ti.< SVX31 0 <� m Z3211Wtl2! 213N2lfll IiSIHHO SnddOO 10 AJO we sysai usiaHasnaaoo arieNmoiaaone ce o o NOIlV1S8nS 30110d H1nOS UV3 o m c NOUIa0930 AB 31tl0 'oN NQM NOI1dIa0s30 AA 31b0 'oN N0191�3a Ul Oz — oW�6 w6„ i. e o g _J oaoi �aa` p=—h w a pis _ �•` \ ��w a Qww= � W ion- _ z im - N o onz `s \ w c - O LLI / ¢ ez * o W mgg= � � w W LU J LL W wSz - Q arUA p a O 1 \ \\\lll W L W O W v v JF LU 50 chi l oGoyN o�F�S wat. Z \ Z W F W � �a cc aaosssvoao sroiaa "9 '0 � .5w - N o SaovuaSbuuaaul5u3)o€uawuedad S1 UM GHVGNV1S /n I co ................ ...........< SVX31 AW]ANG 11SNHO SndbOO dO)WO y m S 1 3 1 1 H �tl tl i w Nan1� 1SIHHO SnddOO 10ulO VWLSVx311'1SIaHDSN O' coz3aiwna a3 U Q a NOIlUMS 30110d H1nOS UVd N o m e NOUIaOs3a 19 31tlO 'ONWSYl13H NOI1dItlOS3O AA 31bO 'ON Nol91�3a Wuj ?a o a€ Sb7, @ 5 Z mXm W Z,I s Q a N as W w i w d 9ei o a ee �t I bN . !a a 1a � i!gg i fig I i E a ! fig !!!! ! s $ _ 6 {i'�lgee I 4Fgs y6V1i1°!I81g t /itgg a � ! ! a 1 1 ell 10H i saovuaS buuaaui5u3 Yo Quawueaa4 Sll 130 ONVONV1S b31VM31 VM W 01 I V11SINHO Sndb00 d0 A110S 6 0 =oN si�3ii �av SVX31 0 Aa # <�� m ZHINV! I H3NHni 11SIHHO Sndb0010A110 e sysaiusiaHasnaaooarieNmoiaaonelce o rn U ''�,+ ppoE~2o NOUViHnS 30110d H1nOS UV3 N o m e gl NOI1dIa0930 1 9 31tl0 'oN Naall3a NOI1dIa0s30 AA T5111 'oN N019113a s,n wi t li! g Pg' q Y 4 m — s OHM all ��o Y € �! �.. � Algal 9.ei�giYY K QI lIt Y �.: aigt €i ;$m u I�;1�ll � � lg �Pg, Y a�y! Ills ll! gk gg!gtI ' plp l fi Y Y€E�k I�g�gIpl�l�l 13 lg°l 661 z tt P!l kyY�°g��igi,E INS � el � �l�Ig@�iK��� k�g� Pg l.nP t!tl �� Plil°PilPg:lK�•l€lll�4vE�€ � � gl�l�.gY Vol�I € i I LZ o N yg gi��llg k. Q e €gsl€l gy k@ g Kg ad ggP 6k a egg a yPIP ° 7Pili�e saP@.kaP y al �gl ill 4 "�o elYlYell�s€P i Lle� � i �� €ig � °8P P a � iaP iP 4 g [ eY l 3 w ;eY; sl g �zp�9 33 pp 1 !i\t gg ig g- a P ig l a it iY� ,P � Ilis fig!ell� �! � ° YY Yg YY Yl I�g I iBPP g�y°�Y 111P gar Iitc I S I gl gPYPgiI e�E ` I ��,. aYe gK P lY IP Q l� g Ps g ig�3 a 5 ee m 11 Ka gPPYPPYii�Pl@g Ik EYEPH @.[ =Y k F:! G B fi P p li h l p I s :P 'lt�gg s igg� �g��l � rl l it, I P i g q.HIM Yg PIiYP li i P IQ IPI igilY YQ kYgl�lg6 S31 t§,Ia E pp llY p1.1PKl 6: e a W IYgP,°BSI i� gi "# CYs a I a,l aYY i i lg y ktlQl l@a , AP ; 6 lggl 35 I .g 'I° � yz li Ili �'K Y�a P-IY �kl Qw co o saovuagbuuaaul5u3tojuawuedad SlIUM(I iVaNV1S °n N2lf ll� usiaHasnaaooarieNmoiaaonebce o0 o Cy)HI IISIbHO Sndb00 3011I0 -SVX31 siO3iiH3av ISIHHOSnddOO10,ulO VWLSvsaiZ321Wtl2 23 U # NOIlUMS 30I10d H1nOS UV3 N o m e rvoudiaosea ee eivaory rvaan3a rvoudiaosaa we eiwory rvoisv`ea g � w p W Z ?v O Jiffs a f `fl q 4 S tl t al N o�MLL — 55s y5 66J z a Ir-j���� 5 k s s p9 g fi B p 6 pa 1 g ! 1 s§€g I° ° �l�, ,e ��a ga it �a r. ° 1 ll <t€a INN,li yigg ll 84@I, i PI ¢9 5 g Iv6 q 8 y o t!8 11 Ei q i ai ri t �t ' 69 yl�� ! R g� 9 g d°EI8 q 8 a 1 E1 8 ° 1 : II: 1 .j a �i a! 9�� � _ �� a��� p NNa j pi!g q! a8 �y st tli !� �[• i E �x E� � � �}� 5 1 E �ji 1 11Yg q� ga°@d tt till°ale e Ii IC �aa u IQ ,l,° sal � g t� ll g tt 4tFl5ti d4 �p .yip° it a a lit ! iie 1, i EE ge tla R;°'4 1 Yya is,e{H t t'� 1 2E6 °19 ga911 ae3'sa'g3! 9aa a ��! E,�I s:ll �a Ei€i °n i i181 1 Ff �Y�d eaa E 0s�a 13 qi9 iq it� °e til t�l t ! l r''' tidE $�13 t i It ei °EEI °li 11a`di it it' � c� eggg g ;� aesatlte; '.a�i�•°!��° -- ——la � � � E@0 iEl ii i °' �•.�!!g�@°Biq;! l �89� ` � l88 Y .,,g881i°ge����bi t al�sh 4 1 gtg Y Ei 'id N1 N, l t l q ° t l` 8 g'¢ t( :n i pii ��18 l l ° iilaag�9�'@pEaBgia $t lall s °ll yIy gg°N ttq it @g5i 8@ 11E q$l gy e;@ gl i pa peal { a &g 1 Y tl 3 l� - i! ad°b a 44gi ad �ql� aYte l; lEEey `lpY tl qa° 86id l¢v° §il i la 8 ' l !°f'llK` al`9l8 6 q xt i q i& td€.3Y �EiSE l�3' Y i a" & � § �Y tl a °F 1 � S x a t E qy°° Y�44 tdt EpSga al�li� ql Bx;€te:i l�� it�ts �§�g@g ld€��a tl t � d la� i1, � �a 1 °la���yit�1 5 l tq gg B 3 S 5 ! t °e°R� lea t divas i8q' BY it l i°°a;33ge§ 8 !y �� i° lbley @d,o IE15 a q3 q C a a x° a aQ € tt f a q a !� " EF° 11 fi s da l €lt �°°p� a9t€ a qq gi 2agellllr € g i° t Ell$ — �4,°aeffi ata g ps tY F ie i3 a le qs zaY e Y!a a,@ e 6� R a g E• s ° aEt d,.l t�8txIg Iit l Sg 8 8° lt t a d�i !@ ! q ° a E ikl LE ai �g''tg lq°!l � l a??i sa iyi8 s l ea l ¢18 g €q'l 5t° Be€t 1 s a d i` \ 1 : Ei�l e. °Y�€sag le lq6 �l• �g6 q�t l� �r � l zla K d,€4E@ �ad� :t tis§ikl i a$l :1 d:l is i €l t �"� °s!188E88a811q t ° § lit orai o saovuaSBuuaaul5u3Eoauamuedad SlIVAC(1dVGNV1Salift an I MOTS IlSNHO smjo0 d0)uio c� N m s i o 3 i"i'H a a v I1SIaH0 Sf1db001 A110 w o Z3UlHV! 1213 uni� �� � �oe�smai'ilsiaHosnaaooameN oiaaone�u � � � 3 NOUViHnS 30I10d HinOS UV3 o m c NOLLd18o930 AB 31tl0 'ON NaaA3H NOLLd ls" 11 3111 INN111111a Z 4 siaxa na'ao ui E!!!a w e 1 ymmMLL bid All aL •' '� a p alrf , � � m�LLa a _i'�, i 11oi pl iillr�ipll a = psra z 1 r g s 9 fp r`' gp i plll IMP rfpl la .as p a;S al € = S Y fl :! 9l'�l$ ba pi�lailpi��IF i1�� � —?-_�Y Y1pR9 1 v 13611;Ip 511t fr Il�ale a a 'ya >wj ll it A � frh INN 1.0 li b Ina toil! a i ii 3F v � 1�� $p�Fli�`1813 $,a 1 � s � �� il:n3 di�ppis 4e 11\ , rs� 1111f11Sa: ,teal,a —s a 6 a�axo oaao u� s— a aros �i s�o'W III 1 � n� III afl owl it �l 1;Irp1 + r 10111 a,�fasr p4 flftEi 1� E�1 'a 11i 4a ll a i1�q�1 BAN " td�.a;iillplaiel lli� Ig9 p 1 `I l� �� e8:gi! i iii la E 11 a i ih "ai. 9i8i ° I.° 1 lip it i All! l.ell 6ij l l Ij 1 IL �- ; � l V f 1 g'1 II i ylrp!a�9 is ai 1�1 $1 I(1 �4 �i 1 .,,tpf � I'd Il�ia:lE ptl hi I�plll 1a I i�6 1° pal a.y a;. , as ° a pl'li' pll n!I arggall'ar 'p If fly p a i��� � � 1 ��o ,lIR Ijg�dl9 has 1 Ij I yl 'a �i iislail al.fa !il psl � alv k� II ,is• py a � 1111 g� �, p ��1!i li&¢ �1 o R u6 I I 1 � `�S 1 __ i 9 'll 11 si ig p iip; i a¢ —' fie 1 II li ill l p il=Iv f 1 R i c pa ll 1� !�9 is al !IE lily.. a. loia: 'a 1 saovuagbuuaaui,6u3�ojuawajodad S1IVAG'8 S310N Ailllln a31VM N 6 C o s l 0.3,1.1,H..�,.a.ti.< SVX31 0 Ln� m Z3UlHV! 213N2lfll I1SIaH0 Sndb00 to AlIO e svxai iisiaHosneaoo ar,eNmoiraone cs o o U NOliV1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS UV3 o m c NOUIaosea ee eiva ou Naan3a rvoudiaosaa we eiw ory Noisv`ea 3 a £ Z W sa - � 03 o^ > Z maaj w Z - doom a W w s " F omm=o a=msmm= v a661 Ic - - W ewe§ a - om Z " " N m � LLI a� a� a o� m J - o36p Z d 9 - s� m EQ - Z N m�Y _ � O - a �G�� — o— — �3o V i Y.y✓,✓„`�YY.`ay 8a w� o Aa aE Ese LU 3— asa m . Vo _ w 3a %, ? W goo `za zzo moon€ p m _ _ az J s J Q a o _a � a �a6o�Q LU ap j a Q G sV « s O - o a�ozm� Y M ry i[J N N SPAJOS 6uilaaui6u3 jo ivawuedap w-"iv. � NVId 3dVOSONHI � Sb'X31 g C7� o m 0 9 1 0 3 1n1'H Z'a tl IlSIaHO SNda00 hll0 z a w Z3211Wtl21 213N2Jf11 e sv i'Iislallosndaoo aAielvrmoiaaonelcs o J J o _ a ....�. NOliViSONS 10110d Hinos HvA N o CO NOI1dIb0830 A8 31H0 'CN NOI SY A3a NOI1dIaOS30 A8 31Y0 'ON NOISI— nRa C7 U F u c7CW 5 IIIII���11 �a". 0 O O =0 O O m0 dOK�n J � T z �K 0 2m m0 w p O r e zm m N Z ' w I > z 2 2 z z Oz o _0 zo a m O O .. ------------------------ — —-- o .'. . . Q% ' z O mw �. m m Q, . z o 0 x z a _ O OFF w LU 1N3W35tl3553��tl�IlBnd.OZ �- U Z i W Z Q w J N SpAlaS 5uilaaui6u]jo;uawuedap SWIM W SKON AVOSONT (� w ................ ...a,..,,-.... I SVX31 g C 5 1 0 3 11 H a a v IlSIaHO SNda00 J w Z3211WV21 213N2lfll hll0 tML sv i'usiaHosndaoo'aAieivrmoiAaone cs Ao NOliViSOAS 30110d Hinos Hvj N o m NOI1dIbS$30 A8 31H0 'CNIl015Y A3a NOI1dIa0S30 A8 31Y0 'ON NOISItia U[z]W yp6 W � LL ryJ Q wz w II III 7� "s.,. ,IIIIIIIII zJ do LLJ Z z y Ell z - O o a ` Q oo All Q - - _-- - _is _ eggNsp 'so On I IN _=c - - a Z - Z rc = Q= A J cc,) rr = LL —I o E o - 3 o m m - va 21 - E o gar o msy _ E m m 4 a m E s sly tug _ e d6 HLLLU a szr o3w man', ap hto dE Ead o=o - 0 agN: o ,`4 dQQQo H IIII Z w 3 H Q �� U o f — F all 4 i9 1 mm o-n a din Z \` dmm �,�H �� O N N Q � iO4�d �x ➢3 E '0 3 c J :III�II�II—I W H "o2g_ ��� =s5v� J - a i11i11 ll- m o il m?= o A m 7 d III 0 w llll 11 11 0 i 5 ¢mc4ro 111 m.z as III Z ° llII9III9III--'Rd g va` any,° 1,1 _ O `5 0 IIm II�II=II Jw 1md NOR m � III F w rnE@9 gums' ,1151 Il 11 lllll QC< w WLL sa Imo\ II�II�IIL QQ ��all A � �Z K3oU-"co Niels! _a`3= VIA o -1 IN- o£u11 A 321 ZM" -ur ¢N w' —I_lIlIL= � , z- SSJ Ew --- IlIllIkuI lI 1 zZQJauim7C=Cl fZFn Q O n — II�II�I rq Q_�Ec— ¢ Ko U1 Kz� UE d Pv �3 a�"yam a3mdd ��M a �NM<�� �w tiLL_ co SPAJOS 6uijaaui6u3 jo;uawuedap w NVId NOI1HJIbaI S M ...,. I HX31 g v IlSIaHJ Sf1da0J� hllJ � 1 zMw Z3iIIWtl21 1213N21f11 ecsyx3l'uslaHosndaooaniaNnrolrao sus o NOIld1SGAS 10110d Hinos Hvj o m NOI1dIa�S3O A8 31H0 'CNI�OISA3a NOI1dl—K A8 31Y0 'ON NOISI— UW WWW n.,a �aa C7 G W o yaw aN — `� w O N J nK J 6 i O O = nannN Q ma K d ==2 ro LLO p —�O Qm ? O O 0 p m�� CN m 2 � O p a O mwW Z y O w¢ m J K Oyd W 2 Uz-, o W s _ Y Jt%da p O W O G OF U O?U O v zN a d U — — � ° m ° oci'� _ ry�aaati K1 O pd0 a��— wyo Z 1 h J Nm mrm a�tt w r 2 O Oa y O lz I �I --______---- w y a M �o �o -o ; — a p T � I I Ic ! Y @ I 00 > / 0 Y Y — --- r/X X O O o r } °0 p _ I •am ter- mo z I � >mCL Z 1N3W3SV35S33ovons1d.OZ O w m Q_________________________________________ m� O y O m p n✓ .. � NO LL U z N SPAlaS 6uilaaui6u3 jo;uawuedap w � SlIV130'8 S310N NOIlHJlbbl � SVX31 o m 0 s i a i`i'H�'a v IS1 11jH0 SN00 da hl z a w Z38INVII 213Nuni l0 e sv i'usiaHo sndaoo aAie ivrmoi�aone cs o JJ o _�a ��• NOIlF/1SOAS 30110d Hinos Hvi N o m NOI1dIb0830 A8 31H0 'CNIl015Y A3a N0111Ia0S30 A8 3 3 'ON NUSIAl W n�a c7CW Soy .E. 5 0 w > CD 0 oII IIII O a w U_ —�— - —... Z — Lu _ =l lm _-- a�l l l' U Z R. - z II�IIIo� _ am211a a z -IIIIII I,_I _ - I �� - I lz- ° U Q w_ - Y - J - - - - Fff a_ (IIII IIIIII IIII- ° > LU o —a � 0 Q U rc rc �o rc a W W Wco U U` Q IIIIIII LU ZZ a - --_ — m IIII IIII W ~ �` C - UQ III � a � _ IIIIII WJ ¢d Gfo ¢ = r z gI > MITI— — z w III- _ — w UO Q_ I ur r LL Q - co d'J W - J- � LL. LL �Q -= m - <n_zz lz -, - mg 45 TE moa v vcffQx so 9� N v;L°v - - C6LL a'c WLL' € _ _� _ d — gu° IT a n - - °3 Y >e w3 1 - 03 - - E _ �� or° 'Y�a N - -Ho J m Qo - m _ 09 w o - ffs`o E9 9 E,,, U 'g m`m 16 - - m@' of o = o M L'1`�" - LU w - -�.LL N_..c Z y 9 E d d° E = Z J � O�-a_VzE-amd - P U °3 = 3v FLU Z K DQLU (n L wwz - - - - -=3m 2-:° v�N _ °owtt� r ~ r F¢¢¢o=_ - —IIII = seOwes 6uueeui6u3 JO lueu4edep 119 co Mdld NOIIV:)Ol 2i3Id Cj o M .--1 y ....... ...... .....,. ,,, r "O o s 1 0 3 1 1 H 0 H V \ Sal Q blYBLStlX31'I1SItl1YJ S11da0�'enle NMO1Ntl0A ales 3 o Z3aIWVa I Muni USIHHO sndHOD hll0 NOIltl1S8nS 30I10d H1nos dvi w g a U NOLLdtl]530 Ae 3tM 'ON N05N3e NOIIdIip53a AB 31va 'ON N05Vda C7 .e5 Pb9 A 9-41 ,BIS 1-9z &I s-bz ao - Q".)uZ slss-z1 suss-z1 z � I 1 = tt I z'fl opt .Z/I E`,I I OKI I`6 81111 P6 J10 � u � 1 4 ffi �= 1 a1c1 r- hI izl Nib $ o $ I s m ~ w I a I 3 I , � ,7z1 .31119'ZI mezl N Eu o fi' -2 — •2 pE` �— �E' I E a� [u 6 in — I 151. I = K2 I I Z hh F— M Q 4 I 2 2 M Y Y8 C_ F I I L � � o -9 I �` 1 'Y '�`•` _ L off, I I — I &6 l}8 1P I $ a K Ile _ p/ I '2 WI SIN as r93 ,w11-11 ,wIP ZG� 2e7 91119 1-O9 10 = SeOweS 6uueeui6u3 JO lueuwedep coNV-1d NOIIVC]NnOd o M =ly y r "O s 1 3 3 1 1 H 0 H V \ Q 64YSLSVX31'I1SItl1YJ SOde00'OAIe NMO1Ntl0A SlL9 o z3NIHVa I Mum IlSIaHO Snda00! hll0 Nouvis8nS 30110d H1nOS atl3 w g a U wuaa953a Ae ano _�xasvae rvoudlxs3a Ae 7 �ox rvolsvaa C7 01 5-9I A5♦x Z/1 Sbz a R � a 4F. 12 =al s $ I Y101109 12— I I ao1 saa.l I lr ev I � $ 1-1 11 -- ZA wW I >> > � z1e --I e JI I I I I Ir I I I aol�sauzllrH �� � I � a III �I 1''O �I I gl I gl I s1a -I v1a 019 -I sIe ?y @ b� -I � 21 �I roxg-6Mo.?I IV a d dolau�zllvvv UL HH I , i g _ II II .i I ii ii i g Li io II Z o I z 916 mr II 1 sIe >R sle '� l' I I ❑ 1 1 �1 O I 1 SI _ E YOLWsllpzllvYl - I` $ dolsaL7zllr„ I I 61 I c I I I al I 1 1 9I zm T i 111 1 1 1 ,1�J1 I I �� -� ML06•�A11`�� - •I t I169 91fcl Il 461 L ill�rAl .H5 r9z ,HI L-�I .fit? 2g.1 91K I-05 < 10. = seoweS 6uueeui6u310lueuwedea coN`dld ONIWV dd JOO'd o M N o S.1,3...............m, ' \" StlX31 0 Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 USIHHO snda00 io AID KM svx31'11siaw3sneaoo MIGWOMMOUs C NouvisanS 30110d HIfIOS dvi w g a U wuaa�53a A9 3tM 'oN N01$N3a NOadla�5ia AB 7 'ON N05N3a zC7 __ y� OZO6 y s R .01 oil 2. a I v w x I i a a age Q I 3 — � � � �i •. � �OO Oa — 1 r u� I J _ E aI aw g g a 9s I a ices "� lFal < m = SO0116uueeul6u3}alueupedep u7 co S1IVJAG NOIIV(]Nno=i o M o m s,3.................,.,.` StlX31 0 rN o Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 USIHHO snda00 io h110 Ywec SW31 LLsII MISWI0lNtloAW9 o 3 N011tl1S8nS 30110d Hinos dvi w g a U wuaa53a .ie wo ox xasvae9 tic rvoudlxs3a we ova ox rvolsvaa 9 y{ d g A W6e'OEC S Ld @ e lix mrz o a s H III- a �. € , Cp E �71 A NIAO'®!.)6 A wA0®OS IN p3� � o a m gig �k3 4 � — oc tz u — � III_ -�- u�� b ®gym I g Q w in €a2ovt a I I I o I I o — a F? -I l m L----- _T F N L = Q 22 I \ l!2 I � N EI LO B O --- 5� 5�s A IUSG re'axx Nlm®� A waa'®as A 411A0'®IS I I� � �51� � � � I III III= � � � � ".• III �� Ms: a � � � •; 115i� �� a �2F IN LID �_ = seOweS 6uueeui6u310lueuwedea cow S1IVJAG NOIIV(]Nno=i _ M =N m ....... ...... .....,.,,,, woe s 1 3 3 1 1 H 0 H StlX31 0 = 6� rj o Z3NIWVH I Mum IlSIliHO Sf1da00 io hll0 r re svz3 usiaH3sneaoo ameH w Nao�eus o 3 N0uvisonS 30I10d H1fl0S dvi w g a U WLLd1K1530 A9 31v° ON HgSN3tl N°Ildlip53° AB 31V0 '°N N°5N3tl "7a asp o Fm Ln _U7 a> ��a r om 5 Ell SU Erl �� ~c f?� � �15 $a 9 9 ilk tu Z Z o s aas Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y S a w 8 wm'aags ro 0 _ a5 _ 8 ppyy QQ 92 0 � m z co, / 2 0 X A W / \ 0 3 a _ a m Ls! a x a a - a m L- r! ar! a a / \ pp55� � = seoweS 6uueeui6u3 JO lueuw9dep Cf) 1Pd134 NOIIV(]Nf1O3 o M N o S 1 3..................,., \', StlX31 0 Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 USIHHO snda00 io h110 KM svX31'11s1aw3sneaoo MIGWOMMOU9 C NOIltl1S8m 30110d Hinos dvi w g a U wuaa�53a A9 31M 'ON N01SN3a NOadla�5ia AB 31v4 'ON N05N3a C7 4 g RHO i t m � � � 3 _ � KIP Mag 9€ g! A e-i— 'WOe 91 3 � V 7 uj €' < C, d ! s 8 ®gas MQ 3a bad _ a� � gill a was �Z � o y o C-- --- 92 0 o AM MVINS do 1 � � a �2�0 H x m < _sLn alOYn Q�Y®17fM1S 7N 1h5 SI Yfbd k F b a n. .o $ ; ({� AYA TINM JO A'S LUN'aunm irce do iwowm,xm v' 51 Nnli'NS ffi1YJ1 SLA s _ No1j +ePY 7� 'g@� y<; J W !l m =o bi 1�2 C\1 15 1 ill a NO'�'N'N =� aSi° �R ��ss� Na § 4 SE 8 @ L9 $ G 6[8 Sc qK 1. LL w oZ O o� k s Mize, EEO l i _ ti3 b. I -- H 5� NVId HS-�M'/A = MINOS 6uueeui6u310 lueuwedep u7 co SIIVID0 JNIWV'dA o M o m s 1,o..,,....,.,.o m,.,. \" StlX313ilH 0 HMO MO snda00 io hll0 KM svx31'u ea siaw3snoo MIGWOMMOU9 Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 NOIltl1S8nS 30110d Hinos dvi w g a U wuaa�53a Ae alvo 'Oa a019N3tl NOadla�5ia AB 31va 'mi N05Vda C7 Z $ 3 Z 3 k Im- _---_ ---_-- z 52 3 ----- ----- g d g aci Pi 2 Q 8 — -- — o � w 3tc Z a m _ oC a _ .4ti < py S T4� VJ g a� mj NINO 3 � r o I o mW a a = seOweS 6uueeui6u310 lueuwedep u7 co w SIIVIDO JNIWV'dA _ M =N y ....... ...... .....,.,,,, woe s13311H0H StlX31 0 = 6� o Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 USIHHO snda00 io All r re svz3'usiaw3eneaoo w e uw�aoeeus o 3 qp NOIltl1SonS 30110d Hinos dvi w g a U IALLd1K153a A9 WO ON MCVWe NOIIdIip53a AB 31v4 'ON N05N3tl C7 w e g m o 0 4 o �o a L 8m va U �= o z � N o N N Z 0 W-v v a 15 G " > b n uo lo o $$ A 7=- w I I I Ie, F ' R m < 2 m gI 2 o2 all � W � g � �W � a Fie o @ — _ o ~ a W 0 p L----- a = seoweS 6uueeul6u3}a lueuwedep u7 co SIIVIDO JNIWV'dA o M NZ37J1HVH s13 ...............,, StlX31M 1213N21f11 USIHHO sndHOO io h110 KM svx31'u ea siaw3snoo MIGWOMMOU9 N011tl1SenS 30110d Hinos atld w g a U wuaa�53a a alv0 'Oa NgSN3tl NOadla�5ia AB 31v4 'ON N05N3a s a39 Pi 0 r S jiit gLi LD a Z 01 nag o0 � o0 � a 0 5 6 a 8 0 E51e - - --- - - - - - - - o a O —— — o[ r71 0 �� a Ilk - s 1 1, oa F < a URI = Se0weS 6uueeui6u3101ueuwedep coS91ON 1"9N39 _ M m .... ....,. SVX31 0 "0 S 1 0 3 1.1 H O m V \ Q 64YSLStlX31'I1SItl1YJ SOda00'OAIe NMO1Mtl0A SlL9 (p 3 o z3aiwva I Mum IlSIaHO Snda00 i hll0 o Ur a NOuvisonS 30110d H1nOS atl3 w g a U wuaa�a3a Ae aLvo ox xasvas rvouaia�a Ae 7 ox rvo5vaa C7 zy � 9, w @ee �� 2gg s 1hi jW �i W $S a �g� $ U., ,g Y F Ili (all G $22g$3 § 99 SEF F 8ggn g��g�F p� far � ga sga JIMI, H s Iasi �a53 €"a"$` a � � a •F y still 1 & p� � a��€ g � � c �I� g �3 g �3� �� F� m�• ��� a `� [ p F a $AEla Ba s E s g s p a geg € g $ a $e $a �e $egs 11-16 11 33 �m� a as s g� a m n a $s€ 'E $g 2s aw ` �� P. � � 5jla; € A a a3g a$ fag €1e e A Lr g � �$ � ��� �a a � �� W t �' � � e a^ as a� 6®tg HIM gg 4 zps a g5 ° aa #p ssg gg =Bra €§§�_� x s ffi s a $ 'EE eag a F aE Ea ; s€fl a 4a r``s $ R it ' HIN2 a §:, $ B p a fl Fa § a 3's 6 t✓ Sa a "_ s I NyE € €� g 5g g i $ g@¢s e ' Sg to $'a In 8e§ z� :� 11.0 1i 1 � � � -� z��':E z � €va� 1F z� g'e psi " g Ate' 3 HI gee I a4 3S - �€ g $ g,iz FF� 3 Fa a P a5 g a t 5 $a 7` y $ 1 _$ € gb $ F$ F s$ § lit F 1Ix =c a E € a = t � $ s; nfrsEtg l et a q Ille HIP ^c1 F1 a s Bn � i-�attts''$a aF' sO I a1e g � s € 1 'a € $a€a�= n�� € a 9 s t e a x sg a Ygpff xg € g$ $ _ 8t g 3 d ➢ g -s' $ � 6 3`,� �� IF� ea g�gg F €i Ea s" F€ a2ga9ieag lit �E a � a 12 p lit F pWs $ $e'_ x yR g t0l sli§ as tl_ 21 g p g a BE 9 �� e $ & "ga � F ssF 2g I .E. 1 gl $,$fi1,1 ll§ JAI �as � ���� $"z � � � a n � h M a�s 1 N 3 p g�zE ; F$E¢¢F g F $=gge.g €aggF $S P'g -�y �� _ gg § eg I'll €IM 8 SA ��� b: „�Rs s �� F _ � �� � $ ' gHE eP g3L � � UM P ufl I M-€ s g� seg 11 lit &8� m a �a9� rEg g ef€ 8 a gam? F= � x F� Ygn SyyE g€g §°saa $ �e E x- big a;P§, _ A §•F tel+ $' g8;�€ $5$ �� a 5�.:,,_�.,� s u� 9 g a$p $ Ygs C €aE Et Pi 131F EFss' a m off` aL": xesaa �E �$ a saowag 6uuaaui8u3 jo juawpeda4 NH1d N011110INK IiIS N o CO w e LL Z321I�3iiHaav I SHX31 0 O7 F m 51 ILslaHo sndaoo>•o ulo ro��sZsrxai'aslauo snaaoaa�ie wo-�oiaaona«s = a m v WV21 213N21f11 o NOUViS8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o m0 Noiidi� ns 3iea oN ww,— NoudI—K ne Siva ON Noisuv,3a U) — LU Z LU p p3 p = } _ o Lll w opw Z O _ W �3rc LU fn ---------- — Eli 8 T II I II TI II � � I -----—---- _ o � I E#) i � I E �I LJ II I I I I I I I I II I saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo luawpeda4 NH1d 311S 11V213A0 a Z3211.�,3, I SHX31 I1SIUHO SndHOO 10 A11O t��ZSVxl lSlHHosndaoo a�ie wo-�oiaaona«s oo o rn w Q ` Q o a WV21 213N21f11 v & MR NOI1H1S8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0- - Noiidi� ns 3iea oN Nas1— Widid—G ne Siva oN NoiWuv 5 Z LU _ LU - ZLU LU cl Q 5 W Off- LU LU LU rc�rc o��g3vwi3333 � ®w z G O Y O a 0 m v U ii as 77 r — o 0 s i nn o a -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- J------- saoiI6uuaaw8u3 jo juawUeda4 S1lV13C 31lS SHX31 llslaHO SndHOO to AilO Z3211 ro��ea srx3i usiaHo snaaoo aaie wo-�oiaaona«s o rn w Q ` Q o a WVU 83NHn.L v & NOI1V1S8nS 30I10d H1nOs uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — NoII ne 3iea oN Nasin3a NoII A —1 oN NoiWuv vaaas w I�.o ell J W 0 a � o a- w am � IIIII � aw - w °aN 9 J ® r f 2LID a _ Q w --- _ ___ --- Z Z (L ¢w Q N p - N = 1E LU J 0 e LL J m 2 ¢ J w a a 3 M w -------- ----- ------- ----- — ------------- I Milk IIIIIIIIIi f W - W II SWWII�I�`��_ O II IIII�II�II-_ J w mi Wur- a Illl III- III II III III-IIII EIIl Ills rW_�II�II�II III 5 _ WW�WW LL h I W . l = saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawPeda4 Sllyl3a 31lS SHX31 OF 0 - Z3211�WV21 213N21f1 U I1SIUHO SndHOO to A �11O t� ZSVx I u o sieHosndaoo a�ie wo-�oiaaona«s o r n Q ` Q o a 1 u� V MR NOI1H1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Noiidi� ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G A —I oN NoiWuv du.sll W Z W F W to Q z. W z zw _ seawaS 6uueeui6u310lueu4jedea NV1d HOOIJ MISOMOO M s'i °3°ix°�a tl SVX31 0 � N Q a Z3H MVH I N3 un I1SldH0 snda0010 h110 >Lre sv 'usmNosnaaoa ame uo�aoeeus o iw NOIltl1SenS 30110d Hinos uvi N RE c U NOIIda053p A9 3IWI 'ON NgSN3tl NOOdIa0530 AB 31tl0 'ON NOISN3a LW aN3ow dMf zwu L §� a 5 sEeew bxw �m� U.368 wyw ----- p " CL °J u 06 o �o E Momm � � fflR o zwz� ®r ' LL t 0 LL Q �-I----- - F J w _ w ,1 a ------- --- `Y y b O I R — $ = 4� n , 1 tt ff /PV—al q� a /al � „a 4 e g � , W i U i a ' ruff, � 9 a _s , , m r m h _a i , I � ozln „Ir 0 m i e e ---------------- _ .. a a. � tl „p W �/ saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawUeda4 NVId 102i1NOO 1HN01SN3W1a 31lSOd VAOO *se+ a Z3211�3iH„sae SHX31 0 = O7 Qo v4 o a s WV21 213N21f11 I1SIUHO SndHOO to A110 tLb ZSNX31I1SIHHJsnaao �alew?SolNaonFlCs Q l^ NOI1H1S8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o m 'Jdu s � � � — Nolidl� ne 31ea oN Ml— Widid—G ne ON Nolsuv,3a .8,5 E'63 <—V-ED ZI45-,84 B/S b'9Z ZI4-',62 f D3 0'Bl D3 81l 4'.64 BT 6',Ll ao Z ———————————— J O a LL J — — Z J .Ills .a514-¢.alL s-,E Q .PILB-Z Z_ B.EH-Z LU 0 �N r 81£ll-1 N c J i — i <<<< flN m' M 0 0 �_ ---------- _ A O — o ---------------- -------- - -- c i o �m v ' HSINj 01 ------------------ "n-11 V l l-61 .HwE S-ZZ u L �i O B'1o9-Tl - .HIS 6-8 „Op k o HSINjfD IV m o / a 0 �f 1 BILb'.H .ZII ti"H BIIZ'Z IL a5 H15 6'.4 bll G'l 6.Zg18" - .8L6 bb aryl8" 20'H� ,6y.15i8" _ saainlas6uuatlui6u31oluawyedaa SNV1d21001303J21V1N3 LO M ..S ,3,1,., .�,.a.v SVX31 s I IlSIliHO Sf1da00�o hll0 >Lre2 svX31'11MHO snaaoo(wo NMovwAo s 2•> 3 Q o Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 n (D o 5 g NOI1V1SonS 30110d Hinos aV3 CO U 3tl NOI WSM AS 3lYO 'oNNgS NOOdINo530 AB 31Yo 'oN NOISN3tl 4 WnoN3mv dw zNFO L 0 12 0 Z W 6 �a.- 0 5 7t .k; b m a ,a JL LU 3 Q 6 n O to r g O Q n i e F e Lu Ul F il• rm-tw y w Js °€ -xs °'o.M L-d ZM1Mb 9-s JM1L-8 '^� I F At F B 5-.I 4 e� 6 8 F 6g Z LUCW�JEmY ¢ x i 44� Wuj O _2 W9 b rn N 0 o xw = OO W .Mt-1 J142.1 ❑*l r ? o wa rcN J1 z El w 6 s c� �O1 mi3tl ��ol tf3i3b � � Ana r �Lb saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawueda4 SllVi]C1 NVId N o CO 0 0 *SO+LLa Z3211�3iH„sae SVX31 0 = O7 Qo v4 o a s WV21 213N21f11 I1sIUHO SndHOO to'kilo t� ZSVx I IISIHHosndaoo a iewo-oiaaona«s o r^ NOIlV1S8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Noiidi� ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G ne Siva ON Noisuv,3a J W 3- 3 IL Q Q V k s Lu LU o ❑ as _ Z W �' r, r, ❑ W - °a z J f (L Q J � a W z Q c U w ❑ a Te z � zw = I ¢ LL o„ U) p � m 00 a x W 2�E LL ., z 0 - W _j F = w J s W W _ t.) Z m LL H W }} W>1 ❑ I :I Z z ¢ o z � a z 0 ¢ 0 z W z r _w haw- - N -=? �. y�- _ W w' o w ao W _ 2< Zc W^z» ,q W LL M W a Z Q W n ❑ J z Z Z Z O x Z W Ix ~ Z y Z ¢ ¢ ❑ co N���✓ 0 � o T_ M1 � V _ r saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo luawUeda4 SlIHl34'8 NHId d00d IiISOdhOO 0 0 *SO+LLa Z3211�3iH„sae SHX31 0 = O7 Q o a s WV21 213N21 f11 o I1sIa HO SndHOO to Adlo tLb ZSVX l IISIHHJsnaao ale wSolNaon Fl Cs Q l^ NOliViS8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Nolidl� ns 3iea oN Ml— Widid—G A oN NolWuv ny _ QO - - ED LU z Z LL O F Z W Z W C7 LU LL z LLs W El 0El ir o�� - a U � D;'. 000 0 w a. 0 2 W 0 W o O D O D O 0 0 U n z o aa. w a. W Lu i gig= a / ww aw _222 �wW w z - o z wow W N r N Y y-r m Q LL WO -- -- i IL H F • • W W + I I I I v I a -w 9 LU F a. 62 I Q ' e� - o� saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawPeda4 sliviEc 300d N o CO *se+ a SHX31 Z3211�3iH„sae 0 = O7 Q o o a s WVH a3NHn IisIUHO sndHOO to'kilo �edsr i'IisiaHosndaoo a iewo-oiaaona«s o r^ MR NOliViS8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Nolidl� ns 3iea oN Ml— Widid—G A —I oN NolWuv z Q Q Z W W R - I I - Z I \ I V 1❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ M c D 0 w: ❑ ❑ zN i% w - Z g6 LU F m Q 4 3pu LL W ° Z 2 = U �c Q Jp LL- p� - LL- J'W ° it - o LU w LU w - CL ) c ° k E- a. a N CINII >w Zw > - f� LO saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawPeda4 sliviEc 300d N o CO N o 4 *S+LL s �3iH�ae SHX31 Z321VH a3NHn IisIUHO sndHO O to'kilo t��ZSV I IISIHHosnda000v Q o 0 = O7 a ie wo-oiaaona«s o r^ NOliViS8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — rvoiidi� ns 3iea ouuMl— Widid—G A —I ory rvoiWuv r w s a4 p as w a x U a» w 8: o a. _ — a� Fw _ _ U Ai LU LL a- Ow Ky J q a w - z -¢ p- - ¢ a LL L a - w I ao z" w6 oLL �i, O = LL a 0: LU z z off¢ pro �`- 88 p LL - oo= - - N - ---------- — -- --- --- - w a K z _ - _ w w' w a w, w P = w J N F- e� - saawas 6uuaaui6o3)o luauyedaa s LO M Q g SNOIIVA313 HON31X3 SVX31� �� � Z1 >Llsv> '11MHOsndmoo(woNmovwAow31WV2 N2f IlSIiHOSfd00�o llJ ao o I Lc, g (D o $ ,� 5 NOIltl1S8f1S 30110d H1flOS atl3 N SCO U 3tl NOLL WSM AS 3lVO 'ON NgSN3tl NOOdlNO530 AB .1. 'ON NOISN3tl 4 WnaN3oav dw ZNBO L Z € b Z a e a r �gLL > W§ N ff z J4 W I caw ~� 0 �F z o L•Dl yiY H� W� I Y�2.2s t N I I S k ZT N NyaH z M g s� O s Q is � og I J. i dx W a »a 3 ' z�.i.ate si H 0 RY s 4w k LLUL ff8 £a d £9 A h a �z O ■ ry m o a m m o o m �o b u � y 3 I � a 6 � s o o S aF; n g a Z / II L 3 y. z a m4R � d 9 s� e� s� €Q 43 CO saoil 6uuaaw8u3 jo juawUeda4 SN01103S JNlmins SHX31 Q o v a WVa a3NHn IislaHOsndaoO o >oulo Z3211 �s sr i'usiaHosndaooaiewo-oiaaona«s o rn NOIlH1S8nS 30110d H1nOS!it/i w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — NoII ne 3iea 'oN Nasin3a NoII ne 3iva 'ON Noisuv,3a r uoisin3a 01e-3ad door oUoere o N� a � E-uEITi=EIS =mow ass fr�III � w I r = H I ri IIE H I ulilm li H uEI �I II m w w w m= w — IF. NIII II II ® II ml II III IIIII o�ili m Z IIIEmm II Z I�Il sl�l Z ` m �= III IIE B _ II III w Elm J w EIII EIFI J'.. II Ilmll I� J J m— `� mIII=II mm IEIL-I�� m h m N : EIIE—L IIE m N II IIH 7 M I EE CV � IE�I-ICI I � II I�ImII I II IIEIT=III=IIEII 1111 II II EIII II�m IE II _wmll- =_ = m EImIII �o 0 - EIII-III IE EIIE II TImTI 11 _ _- - —m w -m= y w zp II II I � = I- I�illil=lw° z E EII=IrIEiI w m m u= czw7 = do z _ F77 III II 4 - 0 0 o will o IIE II-III- EIII 0 IFNE - -w - w- ; II EII EIII =III= w EII E EII IIE w w= w o -- w ® IEEIII==III IE " IiIII=I -u eIII-II EIII I�I=E II III EIII—IIE III III I o — E Ww LL a --II a w w—� " � EIII ��II�EII EI �w -_ --- -- ---- -�-- -- — =WIC w= w— �� �IIW—II �I�IIIII�I -I E � EIIII IIE II III.II — _ IIEIIII�I,EE ������ a �IIII�II�IIIIII�III I11 I , , I , I " x op w o. r o saoil 6uuaaw8u3 jo luawueda4 SNOUOIS JNI41Ins SHX31 I1sIUHO SndHOO to Z3211� Q o v o a WV21 213N21f11 'kilo �s sr ai lislauosndaoa a lewo-oiraona«s � o rn NOliViS8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0- - NoII ns 3\ea -ash NoII ne 3\va ON Nolsuv,3a qq qq Q q INDISIn3a01e-3ad dmr goUoere o I�. � EE s uuEEI'eo - Z i w w Z w Z p EIiiITl= p = W p elr-uI _II Eill= � elieleilW � � IE I �W lil w uWIiI w =1 w �'m N 'lu E"E'�'ITr, (A - "LEuI lil N Wm C7 m--ir�sWmm f7 - Ilii EW_I p =�Ele mlil Z�� IIi�EII MITI. Z=' Z=' I ell IC- o= I IlelelE o� I I>r>=111 III o-` ",. III J M I III II F,WIIW J E II IIE J a m IIEIII IW EIII M E w N IIE � m m e� e1111 4110111 W mom O il z m w W z 7 �•-�'III' T IIII = W (IIII II z E O 3 IIE o \ - = W _ - w e =IIIII- rc m _"IIW IEIII I Q I I IIIII - IIEIII-I WW_OF III II - IIEII = W III - - - o w o IE II - - IIII r I I IIE III II W II'EEIIIWI J W' EEI II =IIW I IE�IEI EI IIW - W= UILFIII m IEEE' IIEII III IIIII III W� WW IIE L= E e o l = W YEIEIE EIII all\ _ Ell Im-W II EIIEW F F1 X,I I W� z II IIEII =1 � AlIII II _ __ _ __________ IW I EIII IIL- IIEIIEIII - EIII=III. II III W�-' IIEIIEIII= o IIII IIE L= = EI III II'_W _W II IIEI � IIEIIEIII - - - IIEIII-III- EllEmil IIE"Ynm lf. II 111�.1�11 Ellel'l 11 "III' I III III "II'E'n'm=III =1If W I_ m- m- 06 F` Ell elllml _ II II EIII-II i I I EE \ - a ,a --I-----r- } s ® EEIEw IIma EUIxii HIM iI. e u Imo = p © = XH EEE b a xx III _II11IEI s l L"4\ Ir II IW111 III III ® A I IIII ilel = ap ® I II IF -----Xx ul E W 1 EW- II__1111111111 Hill EIII` il- ® u IEueoW- m= eu EUE eu EWW I W-ii WW CL 'EE - IIEIiEW WWW elel- ueu 111 eL ® m IEuem-i _ueul-i - �® IEelel Lel u= ueu- =ueu= uE ul Ile mm -1 1 ------------- -------------- ITIEIIT� <I - IIEIII ele I eE _.._ - saoil 6uuaaw8u3 jo luawUedaO SN01103S-PVM N o CO b SHX31 0 CF) F ri m m" Y g a 3 1 H a a e I1sIUHO SndHOO 10 A110 ro��easrx3i'asiaHosnaaoo aaiewo-�oiaaona«s — Q g Z3HIWVH 83NHn.L _ _ coo (� �bmr"� . �,�o NOI1H1S8nS 30110d H1nOs uvi w o m0 NOl Js3O 19 3 3 'ON Nq Sl— NOIl A9 31V0 'ON NOIsV,3a 1 p z z 4 o"IN o j 2 w w p oa m 4 w '1 __ III II III=�111�11 IIL- J`. ImLm 3 I ml I ml���l I I z w oC N I 1o¢�_�EII�II�II I_I n� cm -7o F w w III z w m y �II III-111E IIEII II EIII= J IE I I-III I I IE I I III I I EI II IIIEIIE IIEII II EIII- Q a II� M IIEIII= EIEI w� - - - z w En - _ Ell= Ell= Ell J -EIII111 I\ Q I I�W�W 3 y �a S A �lt1u u�-ut-ur z =W= llWWWWW7 - III III-II r I�W�Wu w 9 �I III IIIII IIIIII J=II�IIIII IIIII�II II III III II J w e (- IIEII III�II�I III�II�II� Q� _ w �� m a ono �ll�ldll�ll�ldldldl Ln saoiI6uuaaw8u3 jo juawUeda4 SN01103S-PVM N o CO *se+ a Z3211�3iH�ae SHX31 0 = O7 Q o v4 o a s WV21 213N21f11 I1sIaHO SndHOO to'kilo tI,sZSVx l I1SIHHosndaoo � a iewo-oiaaona«s o r^ NOliViS8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — NoII ne 3ieaoN Nasin3a NoII ne 3iva ON Noisuv,3a Z LU x -19 J v �II�II-111-111�11-1�I=11E r ICI � r�s 0 It — — f Lu N �_ IIWWu III Il-m-a =m=111�II�rl=m- �u=ul=ul�Il=ul=u wu u l= -- wu haw us _ __ U III—w—W= W w iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii w—w m m A'S M I�I�II�II=m=1lGlu III�II-III-III�II� All I I I�I I�I I-11I-11I�I I- mmmm =111�11=m-I�I�II� AIIiII III- m�-mmmm ° HEIR051-III-I11GIG x SON m m�ll_mmm�ll�� II��E III��E� III� =rIwm diLIII 11=ICI-m��'I \ � I -MINK N IBK �11=III=III= I�'111�11��I=m=1� I - 3 x �N �z Gw saoiI 6uuaaw8u3 jo juawUeda4 SN01103S-PVM N o CO N o *SO+LLa Z3211�3iH„sae SHX31 0 = O7 Qo v4 o a s WV21 213N21f11 I1sIUHO SndHOO to'kilo tI,sZSVx l I1SIHHosndaoo a iewo-,oiaaona«s o r^ NOliViS8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o CO — NoII ne 3iea oN Nasin3a NoII ne 3 G ON Noisuv,3a Z '�Ili''i lli W' 0 �IIII�_ J W J 77 m - - m LL` .I'Ilirl-ill=- It ? Z J J s= N,Q` III -- --------------- ----- =111�11= i WWW-_ 11I�II�II-1-=n- -11I�I I-11I-11I-11I-.ulilw �u=W=m=W - WWWW I I�III�I W W- IIWIIIWIII m 3 w p lliirli�il�l =r s 3 Is £2 Z �LL o F iw Imi' "l J J w =MINIM W'W WWWI�-- TI,IIEIMRAM II AV IOW=�i��l II�II"WWW II�II ICI III= III III=III saoiI6uuaaw8u3 jo juawPedad MlViK-PVM 0392JV N3 rn o *SO+LLa Z3211�3 °iH�ae SHX31 0 = O7 Qo v4 o a s WV21 213N21f11 13WHO SndHOO to'kilo tI,sZSVx l I1SIHHosndaoo a iewo-loiaaonal s o r^ NOliViS8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o CO - NoII ne 3ieaoN Nasin3a NoII ne 3iva ON Noisuv,3a J =p� d�6�zap'.� - III li. � ❑ m III-m RI'-_ w =l ele 1-11=hell � W N� pkdlell�male C7 p ❑a a` J� OM y` Z w V w U� m� r el� - � _ t = W o -GI III- _ w w ICI III(= III IIIII (7 m l W ❑G W Il lllalllll'I J ,�.i • � \ =m II Il���I I I III I����I I �, i mN N o s o �I cc N N Q x- J ❑ F I�I�hT ill- H -- Q aT11iTe1' W J =lfll �_ ❑ u-m= _ F � '.'..I�Fla.l l�Gll 1 J W rt ,7°'Ie111�= r Y a LL r ..I,._ m- a poW ulll 11 ISM, Z II ar=u Zw _ w 11 11 111 Q _ _ '�o-II 1 LL z'i G � p '� 1 11 II II 111111=11 ILkI III X III m s » m, gl#«3d mmyg COG , yy § % Gvx31 T / 3 ) ) } }� _.. S m= N a G�pGe maS m Ug < z z}�neN/ milv2g93$iw Rnosuv/ ( � { LL § » § �( !) < � » « [ ( � \ \ - - ( 2 : \ ` °` saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo luawPedad S1 ViK-PVM 0392JV N3 N o CO Ln *se+ a Z3211�3iH„sae SHX31 0 = O7 Qo v4 o a s WV21 213N21f11 I1sIUHO SndHOO to'kilo tLb ZSNX31IISIHHJsnaaoo GAIGN SolNdOU11s Q l^ NOliViS8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o CO — Noiidiaos3a ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G ne Siva ON Noisuv,3a K o n €r ~ s W Z 11 1111 Hill Hill Hill n n r F Q I J I Q F I W Y§ I a 0m Z w U 3 I _ m r r — k Fi �w a 2 L saoinlas 6uua8ui6u3 10 luaulyedaa Sad ki 3WtlH3/HOW T M o H StlX31 SNOIltlA3l31NOHd3HOlS'31f103HOS H000 CIO o ¢sb+d SIJ 311H�tiv \ 1 06 fd ;`' 1 I g Z321WV2 N2f IlS1dH3 snda0O 10 A113 o1YBl SYX31'11MH3 sndaoo aa NmovwA ow Q x o cI.D (� o 5 NOIltl1S8f1S 30I10d H1flOS Htli N SCO U 3tl NOLL WSM AS 3lva 'ON NgSN3tl NOOdINOS30 AB 31YO 'ON NOI— 1W aN3oav dW Zza L I` BVR IYIq CaY2 ll aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaa as aaaaaaa aaaaaaa p rnR Iws W BaYaYaYaYaBa YaBaYaBaBaYaYaYaBaYaBa9aYaBa YaBs YaTaYaYaYa N ' � \ W H ZYaYBY OSAN O kx 31€W W q W` \ Ng 93 1 B gg 66t3 W��- 11�MwiR Y 2 - 00 tl 8 p c o \�R Iar3,xAim -oroA-m \ \ zevre n LL 2 gtln3. .3. .3.5. .h. 5.7• Sh. � M1LLm e �J�\ bu. zu \ Fbbbbb bbbbbbbbbbbbbb bbbbbbbbbbb bbbb b �� `� $ L--L-7 U➢fMAiP6 Oro A-AI il maa°t,LLwwp .'d 0 5 ccg1p \ \R \ \U� In \ \\ ` cn o. \ H z aaY�ossr u. O$ W H O� o_ aar�ass d w o m $ a 0 -A ma,x roroA-AI Ila �z -\\Q EXN �anna3w�sry x-z z-z m � � ledrs z R � o3r�asr 11 lotaf MAalflN OroA-A4 saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawPedaO SMIVAO MOCNIM' d000svx3i co� IlSIUHO SdHOO 1 AilJ ro���svi usiaHosndaoaanieNno�aon�cs ooZ321WV2 23N21a o �br ,o g NOliViSOPS 30I10d Hinos adi w o CO - Noiidi� ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G ne Siva ON Noisuv,3a _ - - Q LU c z 3 i s s Q �K�a � s - - - W p= =c Q w z J LL K N a cn M N cn Kam' e e r _ J F tb s w C Gw G C� o Q a ` o tE LU w wir w =ue m O< LL �II 3 L z a LL W cn F as p x -- 5 - W LU W i = Z = Q a J llll W Z it GC Q 4 F w w m J W a a� t W _ NR saoiNaS s » m, MIV OamNy»a m G , ® GH 1 @ ( U3 \ � emaSmUg ��m=�_\a\wlƒ )�mlvl2g93$1w RnSwuv CO LU . ))(}2;8 ` 7 4; \{ §) MELL . \ 04 \\\}\\ \-g LU / q§ ) ; )7 � z � ( : - - - - - � » saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawPedaO SMIVAO MOCNIM'8 d000 N 00 o � *S:+LL IlSIUHO S dHOO 1 AilJ ro���svi usiaHosndaoaanieNno�aon�cs oZ321WV2 23N21 o ti � a NOliViSOPS 30I10d Hinos adi w o CO — Noiidi� ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G ne Siva ON Noisuv,3a y o Esc s w w 'Q 2 z W z R 1Li O Llr7 Iy w w O :3 J= z F- �w z< • x z g wd w w -- -- -- --- M N r _LLB m pn m a 0 J W En D o c a co J > w O� z LL w s w °IT= w-w- W—W—IL J w � III III III IIII II= i Z J V Q W- • L � d a a_ �G o o w co - 2Lu ' J dLu O= 00 a gw p saoiI 6uuaaw8u3 jo juawPedaO MIVAO MOCNIM'8 dOOO IlSIUHO S dHOO 1 AilJ ro���sviusiaHosndaoaZ321WV2 23N21 �a anieNnno�aona�cs ti o g NOliViSOPS 30I10d Hinos adi w o CO — NoII ne 3iea oN Nasin3a NoII ne 3 G ON Noisuv,3a O wa _ 3d w m Jp o m W s� 0 IIII IIIIII = �� LL � w O 1 a IIIIII 0 J J III J O� Uh M N 0 0 Ll 6_4 O �i O LL LU 7 W O — p y R' Z„ � � O O 0 H Z O R' w W K o � V) J v Q W m W W Ny U7„ 7 r 7 r F F a O a Z Z saoiNaS s » m, MIV OamNy»a m G , ® ^ :„ GH 1 \ �3 \ � emaSmUg ��m=�_���a p\a\wlƒ ):mlvl2g93$1w RnSwuv CO x 29�zab25 ,u ,§2_ � \\<2< LU d\ s \ §} ;s , ww « - [} L; C4 \ _ } IT- , ( B �� ---- (j ---- - - - - L :74 \ } \ § \ LU ) ~ ` :: > - . > 2! co ._ ® saoiI6uuaaw8u3 jo juawUeda4 S11d134 JN11130'8 NHId JNI1130(E1031d d N o CO 00 *SO+LLa Z3211�3 iH„sae SHX31 0 = CF) Qo v4 o a s WV21 213N21f11 llslaHO SndHOO 10'kilo tI,eZSVx l I1SIHHosnaaoo aaiewo-loiraonalas o r^ NOliViS8nS 30110d H1nOS uvi w o < I"I "I i 0 mr� 'Jdu s — — Noudia�s3a ne 3iea oN Nasin3a Noudia�s3a A —1 oN NoiWuv <V ED W Z o H J m O O z J O ga a � O z w J Z o11> ILL w C7 a N o's sa O LL O a J H W u _ W w — Z = K w — J O W U W w H U W 3 J LU .............. D3 ➢3 LL LU W F D am �� �`•.� .,f',T s`¢� � �w nL&J O= (D E) r p �m ➢3 a9-.9 �-o D � — 13 13 b.. NN _ _� ml al d i I NKI � m m s » m, S�IVGSNg1 CO \/ G 1 m= a \a\ \} ( S wnlege �pGemaSmUg \ : \/ � MR mivl2g93$iw RnSwuv CO §[ ( \g\2[ j} \ \ © _ § § §LU } N \ LU %} § � m (M LU ){ § ) \ ° � > - m(« saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawUeda4 Wd HSINIJ WO0 J 31lSOdHOO SMRHX31 Z321 WV2 23N21 IiSIUHOsnddO O to uIo ty�ZSV l IISIHHosndaoo GAIGN OiNdOU11s og 0ti o rVO^7 MR o NOI1H1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0- - Noiidiaos3a ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G A Siva oN NoiWuv <-V'co ED tj c Y o p fn o , III r `.� i Ills I i i I IIII I III it I I i�i I � ",r sa 21, z it `I I II i I I IIII II W e w w 1 k� C - 80�� k sywo �� , I ail l II,I�II�II III I� I I II�I�I' till IIII hi II II I�H� Iil III II III I I III I li i , I � alICI II I I�I�I I III IIII I LO _ <Y - saawas6uuatlui6u3)ojuawuedaa 31na3HOS HSINI3 INOON M H °se SVX31 0 = � S 1 O 3 1 1 H O N V \ 0 VIVO[SVX31'11MHO SOdNOO OATS NmovwA ow (p a ~= m+o g zaaiwva I Mun IlSIaHO Sf1da0O hllO I, o Ur NOI1tl1S8nS 30110d Hinos atl3 C U � � s �3tl NCLLdM1S30 A9 31V0 'ON NgSVaN NOOdItlOSiO AB 31V0 'ON NOISN3tl L NOISVOtl ae3Bd dM YZWA 0 HIM CS c c aj jjj I j iii I WI 4 Gk�E�_��Y�`E5 kgSgEkGE��_CEF� p S J _ WIa GG GG GG GG GG Y �" W W Z QM d wgo }wy & a o Apo J Jz m �Q C�a p�3yw8p w_ E3 I-:i N U " p=6.8Y IEd`eEE€E`s Sd ry"so a .e o �80 o m a w 2i w K�c�cccc€ccccczc2`scc,cccccE o�owog3 i _ aa � �[ = $ d _• mEEEEEE 'SgSLLu$a� a w o 4 e`e 8 c, zi �., 2 o 10" 8 Ad a ��' �€ a__ __ � a`s�ts_�s�_�"c`s�€s:s��s`���`e?`s��`s d d .orc .vll.all .orc .orc ass .B'I I .ere oc LU kirNN�`e`e 22�NE��kN_�N 8 w a 6 gg g s 12 26 9a eeae a4e -- ---- ss ass g = 4 a z Wg py y o z8 �8 y N 88 �3g 4 g ul �� 'affiC fig& So`LLQ w G G flour m w� �- z ^� os "se e> ®p> "aH 4 os � Gyspo 8- G- H, z G w x m z Q N w �� sm a� ��`� a g s sN �� g�ggmg�g Q s w S ti PH 5� `- z a s e s § ksLN .% cwi y w y a � o gep � $ fes ¢ s w a a n -HU w zcn �w mawwa 4wo� Z h a $ 8> � 4� s 8 s� 4� $p8 4 t. 4= 8 aS' rc..4� ` d'^ 2� Hag - a3 g wc��&we�§ aLL � � $u '- _ � �" H.H.9 ,b s s a� s Eats"ate a y z ah " � gg5 � � � 2 a9 0` &isaps g� �, �� w s 4 : gk LLsg a -� a �E `doss 4 - ` g U 4$ z aN aH= E H Ew � H£ a� ��4 N& pp � =H= H HOH H a LL &� NHS�.. sLL 2ya 2� a #LL e Hyy o w n T ®il,= $ a $` '€ jg^ ffig3 ¢ �5 Syw it '" 4, w W < J m �wk z q p m H a a F mw� w 03 w S a 3 9 LL Q s4 N . 0 0 o ss 55� s 45 s5� s ti <� 5g s�ss�s4 zsb 5 - ss rn 4Gs- s GALL o a� �a sN�s a� �s&-8 =H w Ey 9M..o @�1 ��� 2 �� 0 2% s � H 3 N o :M- M- LL = F saainlas6uuaaui6u31oluawyedaa SNOUVA313210R131N1 Lo = M SVX31 0 = 0-) o +d S 1 J 3 1 1 H tl V 1 IlSIliHO Sf1da00 10 h110 CIVBl SVX31'11MHO snaaoo ams NMo1NH0A ow I. o Z3211WV21 1213N21f1-L I� g (� 5 g NOI1tl1SonS 30110d Hinos atl3 o m ¢ U NOLLdM1S3p A9 31V0 'ON NgSN3tl NOOdItl0530 A9 31V0 'ON NOISN3tl QQ $ H 1_ � "de z w Q z Icm w . N z o " \ \ Z o a w --nn gLu MIN W 3 Q o \\ ocr F o W a z \\� yb w "w a 0 b F \\ \ -4- Z" \ \NE s \ \\ W w \\\\�l Ng\�\ETWV C54 1 R W ® gg" o ; goow, Cl srnua,a� T ga F �T� r, o 0 as t is W xm.r 1 1 1 s Q Q§ o y�sv €N> tl R'a a wQ F gob71 s y \ \ �\�\\\\�� N sr L t Lww g 00 � � a Lu *film. W W a e cc o o a0 W m 3 a - Jm c1f-i- 411— K w F w W 3 w A_ 2 Zy s LO saainlas6uuaaui6u31oluawyedaa SNOUVA313210R131N1 M + SVX31 0 = C3) d S 1 J 3 1 1 H tl V 1 N " I1SldH0 snda0010 h110 >Lre svx3'usmHosnaaoa ameNM1onaoeeus co � o 5 Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 NOI1tl1SonS 30110d Hinos atl3 o CO NOLLdM1S30 A9 3IYL 'ON NgSN3tl NOOdItl0530 AB 31Y0 'ON NOISN3tl 4 WIl(IN300V dw I zwa L Q& N cn y g W O Wo V4 0 W O w o F" '-' - uj m z OW ® QIA°QAO ® 13 0 > L T 0 J uj Q' O ® W q's H w m O° 5 � a 4 o w v=i F 3 ®® c W w j Z w e U 3 s� =3 O - zz'6wq y u) ® W 9.1 H2 O ` W zw N K gku OOm r� ® 00 o 4 ® g4 13 b N \ \ y W ® g \ m N W g Q sYw°waa J W N $ ' uj = luk�z QO m 0000°Apa ® � " k T,a Sosg� �" O an rinoi Z ? "B w w T M -Jb s m� 000u, oan o s ¢ -- �" � � Q w O- O0 OOV=OQa 00] " W a m °vr K S p r s-z S,L m-z uj El R 2" oia3rw ® appa ® S a 0 s z z �C a O10 ® 010a000 ® " M ul 3 mm ® 000u amn ® 0000 oom ® o000°mao o000 o ® Q)p•mm 13 mm 'm o IN-M � foolLLI `s 2 sg m > d J W w� w 21 " z _ saainlas 6uuaaui6u3 10 luawyedaa SNOUVA313 210R131N1 LO M SVX31 0 = C3) o +d S 1 D 3 1 1 H tl V 1 N m " I1SldH0 snda0010 h110 rLre svx3'usmHo snaaoa w eNM1 on aoeeus rn � o 5 Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 NOI1tl1SonS 30110d Hinos atl3 o CO NOLLdM1S3p A9 3lYL 'ON NgSN3tl Ng1dI� AB 31YO 'ON NOISN3tl LW aN300V dw z%m L N O Z Y C7SiB oY, �e .M42-.r N 4G I "' O W �I Sy 1 W I 2 Z w O 2 = R C7 *�coY w K O i W Z O Z 0 0 O 2n O N w U uj 0 Z !R .n- id L o F y ❑ a ® W J K W W Z D-s z z m _ N W 'R t O a -------- --- ¢ ° oo O` 3 0 > 3uuex�mi 0 Q D- y W W w O§ T— o S I 00 FF' UR LU Ir w m$ O s r R i D Q 0 co51 y e. owe t O o o w > O 7 W > J 'a- W eakV �. N 0 e rvn o � N 1H,lf�TYli_ _� 0 f �� •- a wi W w T a � P ® WLU � 2 uN I O' w'. 35 F F 2 d K Dr � w 0 K 3 W ei.o-.L 9WD-.r D-t z p.z W Z Q W 0 > o O` w K o aww a 0. zy _j M W 5 2 fh ��oi N3i a' j a N CD t � � F 3 a-s "' w a I w F Ir Ir U h 0 a - > Y W Lu J ® J o W ¢8 W K a w \� ? O` 0. K� rzR - Ww Z a QO 3u D e 9 flE � m�6uueQul6u3!_ < SNO Ae3a a 1N m � � E \\ . , ._ G ,_. SVX 1 \ ; te e !\| \: ,i .= � � Slaoga»@ug __aem=e__w 2a Vi ene No11v@R p2dESsav \ } � \ jaj \ uj \�\ § g ! ` ` �� ! \ \ m : ` . ` q § @ LLI ( q -- Lu | ; e ) ) ) F | . e ! § \ r j §, « ! , ..: : o; / b_° §` §§ � (\ � q | | \ ! | ( z � a �, )R ) k \ § § /': ) a : ( , M ) M ; \ a . > I g | 2 | § (| ) ` $! Hl - 0§ . .� §� | (\ Luj ~` ~ C ® §LLI ); § e \ /LLI \ n E §§ --- LLI � � �z® _ saainlas6uuaaui6u31oluawyedaa WdMiniIN2iniTiN3WdinO331ISOdW00LO M o H °se SVX31 0 = o +d S 1 J 3 1 1 H tl V 1 tY1 m " I1SldH0 snda0010 h110 >Lre sv 'usmHosnaaoa(we NM1ovaoeeus o 5 Z3111WVH I N3 un NOI1tl1SonS 30I10d Hinos atl3 o CO NOLL WSM AS 3lYO 'ON NgSN3tl NOOdINO53O AB 31YO 'ON NOISN3tl LW aN3Oav dw ZNBO L S 5 SS 685 SSS € O y 8 85 SS 58S � g Y _ H ———————————— 2 9 W S w W a � a x � a. enEl w z R % 5 l Y.m b 1 Y HOW T 11 f i T � Ff 0 O 0 F.+64.JY-•• i 4 O ❑ �:: -------------------- a� R s i i ' s O` 1 saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawPeda4 SllVi34>NOM11IW N o CO SHX31 o � Z321 WV2 23N21 IisIUHO sndHOO to'kilo tLbZSNX1'IISIHHosndaoo CVl^o o m v g MR NOIiViS8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Noiidi� ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G A —I oN NoiWuv z H J _ Y - s z y h w ,? w y J LU r2 - RI i D D _ N 4 ..... ........ ..... L-J L_J L--- ® C ® J w J LO 3w f e :o w LU m VLL liz - G N LL � - a i J ,•_ ....... ......... J LJ L___J ® ® J w ..... ....... ..... �, N a J i Um N x z m � w Q Ko F w J c_f a LI �-:z 2 ae [� [� J 2 Y m z w yip= U w 3 a � U w J Lz a Z y �i Z m w �`_ 0a Co s" _ saowag 5uuaaui6u3 jo juawPeda4 Sll Vi34>NOM11IW N o CO 51�3iH„sae SHX31 a�ie wo-�oiaaona«s c7 0 �O j7 Z321 WV2 23N21 IisIUHO sndHOO to'kilo t��ZSV I usieHosndaoo m V ,o g MR NOIiViS8nS 30I10d H1nOS uvi w o mr� 'Jdu s 0— — Noiidi� ns 3iea oNuMl— Widid—G ne Siva ON N0194,3a J Q W � Y LU J K 7. y ® ® J w N J F F LL 7q 17® (win y N z 0 w Y LL' LU _ J J N J` �y Q 0 K J J LL 7 O� J w N N seawag 6uuaaui6u3 jo juawpedea ON3931 IVOINVH03VY N o co SVX31 0= O-) 5 1 9 3 1 1 H tl V IISIHHO SndH001 A1I0 O m I O 6418LSV%31'LLSItlH�SMNOAl9 NMO1Ntl0A Bl[9 z3alwva I Muni _ _ NOIItlIS9nS 30I10d HInOS Htl3 a U HOLLd1YJ530 AB Wo ON NgSN3tl NOOdIN0530 A9 31Y0 'ONNOS k iw': Iglm 45 w. % vff - o ga ��YEHi e �a- nq $ :�W8R 4y�! ;HIM � e 3 s a "gg " _ as Ell p- k3 � � w$ � � 5� � :P �� Y Lu wOa p fl�o jo;kg.�W s 21� - § dd d 110 aga -Min U ssg aH = W U a g� g �d aps ip a o $ da g a Sg= € A ?w a n al t w3 o � 2i ? Y 6 � v Y N m 8 WLLI LU III III g J S r s s ¢ lea as ok am o 9 tw w �' U Z 3 a gY 7 N s S a ffi 5 a d a 7 Y ' z k 9 7 a m a a a co 5 T� fi1 # TT H i 114 H40 i t a } seawag 6uuaaui6u3 jo juawpedea NVId 2 o co H SVX31 �= 0-) r-I m 5 1 0 3 1 1 H O tl Y \ 0 KM SYMIUSINH0 S1dHO0'aAIS NMOMOA SI[9 1L)3 I ~ z31iNva I Mun I1sIaHO sndaoO uI� o o NOI1tl1S9nS 30I10d H1nOS atl3 NOLLdM153o AB Wo ON NOISN3N NOadIN053o Ao 31Yo 'ONNOS hY EHi; .4 Comm wp g � N I � 0 0 wM w n 42 8 ° Po ° 0 Cskn .. w C as S I=1® zi ON O IA o-, ~ o ° , ° = Cie - lalz Igl Iyl�I�I I-V - Q r � � i�� O � I ❑i�, Iss I_I k' � s EW s � 0 u c < I isi r 0 p � � o p LL 8 G w p w Oi@, EW � sgpgs s RU < 688 I_I I_I ICI I_I � i <•aa ©Ra O _ Ill� _ P- V — — < I�I 5i 3 3 s goC Dir, C°a= IAI� O C ��'� a � w �mg' _I -- — s X DOE 9 — g of Q I❑n„ Iml m ° N� UE7 s<rc rc e eo i s is � o`8' 5� seawag 6uuaaui6u3 jo juawpedap NHId 300a IVOINVH03VY N o M N S031 0-) r-I m 5 1 0 3 1 1 H O tl V 0 V1MSVU1'LLS1HH3SndaO'J'aAl9NMOOWA%L9 9p Q I ~ z3aiwva I a3Nanl I1sIaH0 sndaoO uI� NOI1tl1S9nS 30I10d H1nOS atl3 a U NOLLdiC. AB WQ ON NOISN3tl NOadIip93O A9 31Y0 'ON NOISN3tl md gg N V wp"�m I a $ I I E S 8 0o jig opo gip. w��o � I owe W goo. E§ . s = ga gLL og w � �3 I 4 OU 1 °cgs o3=I o xpa xpa ° out "s, o= p3ou --------------- - �� �s88 &88p O a O O O I IN Eli log nil w �pHN f I I oil W �1 M Q—- -—- - -t- - - - - -—- - - - ---— SRI °cgs 1 o w win 1 x ass3g§3 -D QB - - -- - - - - -&o� � �p Oppg8 I seawag 6uuaaui6u31ojuawpedap S31n03HOS IVOINVH03VI N o co ,� H SVX31 0= 0-) iN m 5 1 0 3 1 1 H O a V \ I 0 V4M S03111SINH3 Sn aOAl9 NWOWA%L9 a ~ J g z3aiNva I Mun IlSIHHO Snda001 All0 ao o Ur o NOI1tl1S9nS 30I10d H1nOS atl3 a U NOLLda0S3O AB 31Y0 ON NOISN3a NOadIaO53O A9 31Y0 'ONNOS y8m�45 -ate~f ! I �02Rw 'hY 1Hl�a_ .4 wgL p m z 23ba tNi gg N V wp"�m #t� � A gad ®rea®ease � e �o spy o _1 z�89`i5 ° x � r �;- Lu Lu w o �g ¢a LLQ a z w 8mm waw�m U - ""- m£ o € b com § . a $ � � mmmmmmmm 3a � au8g4 $� 3�= Y° 41" gSa LL �ws § #z IN Ed ` off �i x �i I HI 1i �i a J 2 ni i �£ W W a ga . 6 6a Mill J � l ££ w �S e3445��3e€ J � re re re R re re re w x U ® m U w � af w. 14� _ a El El 00000000000000000000 seawag 6uuaaui6u3 jo juawpedap S31nG3HOS IVOINVH03VI N o co N H SVX31 0� O-) = m 5 1 0 3 1 1 H O a V N 0 V4M S03111SINHO Sn a00'aAl9 NWOWA%L9 o0¢ ~ J g z3aiNva I Mun IlSIHHO Snda001 AllO ,o o Ur o NOI1tl1S9nS 30I10d H1nOS atl3 a U NOLLda0930 AB 31Y0 ON NOISN3a NOadIa0530 A9 31Y0 'ONNOS .4 tNi gg N Im V wp"�m m � � p u A g �s � >;'R- w w $ fn Q� AFC o g m tl3 �o01- �BR 12 os o5 as =sg �pta � o€�Wp�° 3 a O aLL- s tit t �tttg oSp„ tea` ...g= 3 § � o �' F wdF8R83ogf; ggggggg� 3w �8m83ag° >i8 = seawag6uuaaui6u3jojuawpedea SIIVi l IVOINVH03W N o M ,� N SVX31 �= O-) M m 5 1 0 3 1 1 H O tl V \ I 0 KM SMIUSINH0 S1dHO0'aAIS NMOMOA SI[9 �3 � ~ Z3aiwva I Mun I1sIaHo sndao� uI� OD o NoI1tl1S9nS 30110d H1noS atl3 HOLLdiC1530 AB 31Y0 ON NOISN3N NOadIN0530 A9 31Y0 'ONNOS ao £�� p € arm€< boxm '° w ':'•Z I=I E a sga £a� s ° as; a S o .4 J / F- a- 9 ^' g ■r 2s j Z_ a / ° G 4 0 UQ F � 0 P i;w B ez3 nj a a� �5g 0ig (7 �yfl me og ag 8 z� �� m og oaa 8 3gq 8 �2 F- gia6 a;� J �R� ° of =w o F �o; m a =( o s s m a —� o 3a Lu o Y ;tt _ p ufl ow IF n Z J F- ma a ws i � of ____ J p F- g o r j § z co ° $Y g gb Q K5 ® bzW wo€G off R oo � Z � �§ w r g¢g a a s _UUU o R s< of w r ° E ¢ sg o O im 6 a o w K ;n m3 7 W 4 = 4 F wO a8 ¢e C) F sa�wag6uuaaui6u3Wl�WU�aO veld a3IS IMAMB N 5 M m N� ,,..,......................,.: Sal 0) � 5 1 J 3 1 I H tl tl \ Q vmL svxm'LiswHo srwwo'OAl0 NW NWA OU9 0 3 w z3aiwva I a3Nanl IlSIaHO Snda00! AID0,o Ur a Noonan30110d H1nOS atl3 w g a U NOLLdtl]530 ne a va 'm xasvaN Noudixs3a Ae 31w oxrvo5vaa ® 33§ Smw VAci PH�6 .44 N 4� S3 n pg a iwm -pi �p 8 03 0 8 �� �o .'. 1y !■r vi 5�< 8 km g =� a op �� o 8 p p" o G w� s� al^ LLL !8 - €� z "Y �" �'g os§ gg"g "b "° & gap €. §; �8E zQ 4��s;... 60 q s 8 'd" ` 3� o d g �a s �G 9�'8 �sS a s GF �� � �4 �F '22 UP Lu 1<=2u t "gp a .yu 8 o " o "g o� �a" �p Swp . Epp p $ " � �' z oG sG �w �_ o &eago �o og 8 8 w=" o Wa3ss= s a4 a� a =ape 3" t' AEw ='s � 0 s81,08 8 <> "LL Q =s 8 tinEe >time a -8 m - " o " v� 0 00 00000 O 1& 04 ® O ® ® © ® ® ® o� 6 3 u I z � ® i o z o 4 ® e 7.. 1H3W39tl3 SS300V OMnd AS ------------------------------------------------------------------- tln = saawag6uuaaui6u3WlueWUed80 veld 6ugy611leou}oa13 N o M w s i a 3 i i H a a v USIHHO SndHOO! u1O ° L NFL m Q oloeLStl%31'LLSIBNa SfldNaa'aAlO NMall180A e1[9 LU z3aiwva 1 83N8n-L NOIltl1S8nS 3O110d H1nOS atld w g a U NOLLdMJ530 ne 3<w .�xasvan Noudixs3a 177731raoN NoSvaa L NOIW,3H aeMd n am a zo WNaN30aV ola7/ 4 L o ti ;pnd'y ;Ien 44 � _ o asp s � y@� osmww ..�� o '� rl■ W - a sLL o2= is ° ., y 2 mg INA gtsew a w W fill s N.° b M Mg � id 0 0 0 0 00 0 u� AE EEL Ell ° w0 I 'Ell --------------- is J F4 14 - CIOsaawag6uuaaui6a3Wl�WU�80 U81d�OModIBOUI3913 N M " w o N SVX31 z _ M S 1 O 3 1 1 H O^tl tl \ Q VML Stl%31'LLSWHO SHdHOO M19 NW NWA 9419 CV 3 ' ~ w z3aiwva I 83N8ni IlSIaH�SndaO�! AID .o Ur a NOIltl1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS atl3 w g a U NOLLd9a530 ne 3tw .�xasvan Noudixs3a L — nw NOISV,H ae3Bd aLF 7Alt Wf1aN3mv 6Za7/ 4 L 6 � a Pow 4 Q S z� o ° Gvo 3<0 g w uAci <3 3 � s st � 3 �p € o s a s g �� € � �� s 'n ` ii, S G $ m www m 0 �° a g S v - ,g _ $ wg av 8 G« k 'OLL'wg oLL a N g 2 a y £ L $ o" ns k yaffi S"� �w &� �� two a d g K ap o s �g x"�° dl 4o�G?f8a9 �°Q a k 5 do § $;g x Q:` �or'g�a o&.caoo3�aea3we'ajW'aa'�:" l�F ■ul�■ s`at 12 i wg &m s. § �9 8 og g3 's w p' <� °�& tw p'° ; �o 6��58 cg= _ �� 3 o m g` so g LL;&= m 1 . �a =pie 9° 'g $ §< ?2 a 'H az� go o $N omy gs AGE $ � g° o s s ° 19 HE n. uz w & �s= o « _ .40 W Mfg €a w p s €€LLg � psw. I I � I % 6 m m I ry m 3 ,m �m o 3 "�� n �I t7� 3 __ CIO saOwag 6uuaaui6u3 W IueWUedaO veld JOMOd}OOa IBOIJIO913 N M w o N N SVX31 5 1 J 3 1 I H ^tl tl \ Q KM Stl%31'LLSWHO SHdHW M19 NW NWA OU9 w z3aiwva I 83N8ni IlSIaH�SndaO�! AIDo,o Ur a NOIltl1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS atl3 w g a U NOLLdMJ530 AB 3twON NOISN3N NOHdIip530 AB 31Y0 'ON N05Vdtl mxwnaN3aatl o g w Is" Is"o 000g IM, 44 N QY�aT, � 3 8 Yaw y,..,��..::8/� ■r � s`t 4 8d9 o 0 Q %,YYT1a;w yy u pY � yo 8R� ff 89= 8 I El I � R I rc 4 I a F� 0 LEE]0 A 0 � 0 USE] E 0 �w I dso °`ay o11Q M I � ig�� g �b 6^ b" M@ = SOOVUSS6000OUI6u3WlueWUed80 veld swa;sAS lepedS 1e3u 913 N o CIO w CY SVX31 _ m 5 1 3 1 1 m v \ 0 3 1 Wz3aiwva I a3Nanl USIHHO SndHOD io AID VMLSMi'LLMHOSndtl 3 M19NWLNWAOU9 �Q � a NOIltl1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS atld w g a U NOLLdMJ530 ne atwox xasvan Nouaixs39 Ae 3Lwoxrvo5vaa w :g o � s s 0 °o =- 6 y < § OAci spy 3 w 3 qq o { 2 �l R o oao S 3 w S 0 tS Q4 wl'LWZ N oW � �Q � 2 �up^m w %sodo y ye o '� ii' y ytp p p sa sp'o 4 � a� 3u 40 8Ei� 8 �le and 12 ;iH ; ao�w o; w w 0 m s£ o� HEY ��E�opo `�ma QzE © Y o Via- � Vl w' Sao �. Y opo B ` y m 2 U ;ow UE zu LN- ° _p ED o _4 8� Em = SeawaS6000OUi6U3WlueWUed80 salnpayoSIBou}Oa13 N CIO w C� M SVX31 6� S 1 O 3 1 1 H O tl tl \ Q VIWL SVXM'LLSWHa SHdHOO M19NW NWA94[9 l39 3 L ~ w z3aiwva I 83N8nl IlSIaH�SndaO�i ul� NOo1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS atl3 w g a U NOLLdMJ530 Ae 3tw .�xasvan Noudia�a Ae 31sa oN NoSvaa L NOISV,3H ae3lid 4Z9LaF19a 0 zomnaN3"j 1 6ZOM4 1L tj � p g{ � � � � S m � g s Yr a � � � � � � e e ;'bi o �Lul■ W a� � e r r � a � p f f � R R R � � g a x ® a IS R it p 5 g `<gcg9g a R R a $ $ �LLL Lii L L R gs ` k'kkkkk MINIMA 14, 8 � A a � ec a Y p<k kkkkkr&mk<s � U �^-mmF=vm2R3RRRx3xxE:339x^„3$x8 A���sMMIIasv s ;A LEkg 5 ��........ a af=a g� �• � e � . . ...�� ON A d 3N ` g waaa she $�gs�ps��geepss�s��$xg���aR � s�®s"a"a nnan a u u R � � R _ e aaa �'a�aaa'aRi�aaaaadRa4'R =aa aaaaaaa iksk � k s a us '$ �<a <a <a <® as � �<A kkkkkkakkkaakakkkaaa `aka k` ak n p ?��LE$$$ES333;£LL i i i£LLiLLi£L LL L L LLi z i i�L;i r� tlYgLiL8a8888�Pp � gsssNg3$��aRamge�e$��,.s$�% ; $ tog""=w���w�oaoQ�" ZLu G ZLu <mmm z z _ a �- mFPPFPFRRI a - FRNFRmRR&R:T7C$�HE6A� d FRR.CR C) F saawag 6uuaaui6u3WluBWU�80 we�6eip gull-9up IBOu}O913 N 5 M m �N ,,..,..�....................,.: Sal 0 � S 1 a 3 1 1 H a tl tl \ Q VML SVXM'LLSWH$SfWHaa Ml9 NW NWA OU9 (p 3 w z3aiwva I 83N8nl IlSIaHO SndaOD i ul� .g Ur a NOo1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS atl3 a U NOLLdMJ530 ne 3tw .�xasvan Noudlxs3a Ae 31ra .�Nolsvaa m#maN3" VMM41 o H �g, uAg 09 aK 2 � I----I Was & I�wm`=�N y MESwF j�`Ti�lo �t �� IU HAWS pia plot< p�2o 32 it �awa� aW �p�wsws iu�wa�mgv w� 8 R 8 8 0 �2g � � � g s 0 13 4 o S w w o pz F - a LO CIOsa�wag6uuaaui6u3Wl�WU�aO SHWO leOUI3913 N o w 5 1 J 3 1 I H ^tl tl \ Q VML SW31'LLMHO Snda 3 M19 NW NWA 9419 �3 ~ w Z3aiwva I a3Nani IlSIUHO SndHOD! AID m o Ur a NOIltl1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS atld w g a U NOLLdMJ530 ne 3twox xolsvan Noualxs3a Ae 31woxrvolsvaa ® 33§ ® d� 1' Z Zg�FiBM H� ��� ���s g`� � /u / U ��wm � �U$ g � r n1�i�,a��► PI =� HOFm gg g w 4 Q $ sa_ m w wmw a Y IIq °po q- k' U �B tl �w wo s �� :'p W i Z pzpV-o OQ 4x �i uxi w �' U6 8�tm A m z3:3g p J I g NQ < f q3z j W $ t=i tZo � rl g Wa O T- --- I_T __T I U e rpo_ n �KS J o,. U M O w� p=ss� p W lip x W 3g� �ffi O F i5C W 9 e�m co N 0 fO g� F n �O w - yF- �k � z w r � a5 @ z Q w 5 $ r w b € w Ho6< 3 0 <w o ru z 6 O i o a A 3 N ® � \ p s i e z x wNa� g wow<s �� w �$ H� w3's�st a ®® W o rosHs k tp, pp s t €m pia z ®® u w F HAR sr u wz�''�u q �' w ME, �z�46p z U / ) Wow Z e pwy z3 a rc �s oo � � @�< =off ffio = z whoa Cw7s age M o a CIOsa�wag6uuaaui6u3Wl�wU�80 SHWOleOUI3913 N (Y w o m =N SF1X31 6� ti 5 1 J 3 1 I H tl tl \w Q VML SW31'LLMHO SIdH 3 M19 NW NWA 9119 'o 3 zaaiwva I aaNani IlS14iH�SndaO�i AIDo,o Ur a NOIltl1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS atli w g a U NOLLdMJ530 ne 3twox nasvan Noudixs39 Ae 31woxrvo5va9 ® 33§ ® d� Z ZN�FiBM �titi u F� N . 1%251 qqz ik yas=o � 8404' 4HOU 4b�i Q dl KW CS z w -- a S if a z < S z 4 ff 0 w I CLI m t -______ ____________________ � I �8 5•c ga k 3 I � 8 I I g_ y1I, I pgg m—'1 69 8 o I o bo S I rc w 3 O Ys LLJ w y I z $¢ 9 U Q W � U w w W a N s� F- z z o J@ (74 N = Mwag6uuaaui6u3WlueWUedaO SGION+gpua691IP-PaB No M w m sal �� m �M ,,..,......................,.:.,. 5 1 3 1 1 H tl tl \ Q vmL svxm'LLswHo srwwo'OAIa NW NWA OU9 �3 w zaaiwva I a3Nanl Il MO Snd803! u1D o,o Ur a NOo1S8nS 30I10d H1nOS atld w g a U NOLLdMJ530 ne atw °x xasvaN Nouaixs3a Ae = oxrvo5vaa ® 33§ yy o=€ v ♦ WN ?pmm u.l d a „ALL € ZwpN � $ ogs �„ a s�' �! �� ■r 2���� g a o�3 a��� � ���aw�y ul■ W a z 9 BRA$$ 0 p �!g ass mH H. k.1 � � a NMI ww w$ p 8- gag- EN A-H 2'e. E HOW ;'� s�o 3 a� py=owaa og gaas z " s a= �p §� � = o AH 50 j w LL s Sp 8 a8°ca ep W was H. Qos �< < §a_ �05 -��aaaaaaaa w Z LLI J ro U_ e w do �as6 0s a sa wga t gaa u s ua�a��p Kos xUw �09 9 gg Vie_ �°3°°3°°°�° s°b P,°°off ° s Q 8 K iW F i s s 6p5. o �w � sya a m § All JillF °q< 2-a 3=3° o T »»» »a6db 64d)o8dh se01m9g 6uuaaui6u3 10 Pawiredea S0N3J31 JNievc1d N o co 5 1 3 1 1 H 7 tl V \ o m 11SIHH0 sndU0010 A110 h118 SY%31'usaH�snaaa�w eww Naoeella o a Z3211WVH I Muni _ _ o ('� NOI1tl1SenS 30110d Hinos dvi T. � a U lgWip530 AB Iva ONNOIB NOIIdIipS30 A9 alto 'ON NOISNatl 6 alp a f ¢§ 10 91H OWN WyF��m lii a H � a s 29bI N H _ a2 Z ama 11w � W F p goo a 1. 0" 3=°R° "a JAI jff as g x $ �$ as 6��€a o i a "x £g m uz No Jew" a � oaf a .g s =a. � _ ya sc� €" '$'�§$ ®�a a' s $o pow w� � a € $ pass $^ "aa Y. ": $ ❑� $"$nWd Q'° a� " s aw=w ne �34a $a c e� a3 ga l a8�ya$$a $_ 55 � � y 9�s $ a£ gw �$ _ ao' G � dFH �� NoN ooY a3z�a3 �W.='s_.a ,P g e� ".w 4„LL 3 ;moQ a4 MIT 3� Rail H up $ ;; � � 4 93Se a s -w ' b3� : �= a $ 'ay €H SHIA, l'u"ao <„" � y"�§ _� Ia4�_� $ a a a o _- �" seam "€o "$ g as ws " w " w yg= e= �£aLL a� ia� � t god" sa cg o$ - $ 8 s 3 ��O no T OE I° a"Wi es s1�$LLaw q# Qt's= z " as 8 � eBgN e4 on°€ �c sago sgwu a € haw"sYeae;6a s sW, 3€� '$s a� dgs �a g€��d In igaz 'lull �m$ ;HMI j�€3Qg� �ds�q„a� �nae s3 �a$a §s�a�mn s: ���w$ s� s ^•� � 3� "Q c �a �� �a a� ��'a� amp � s w aW g a�" � � 3- 9 I g 5�i° ��z 55a 33i ig 5 1 Y Y 5zg z 5z Isz �® �6a kg 4 "dig ES �Yz h kz a �r'y �r' 3�§ th oil IM EL w s p QQ a ## 66 m a8B m a a oo s seairu9S6uua8ui6u3jojuawpedaa Ntlld 311S JN18Wflld N o M " w co 5 1 3 1 1 H 7 tl V IISIHHO s m nddOO 10 AI10 KMSVUI'ILSIHHa sndHoa anlflNW noA e1L8 \ 0 a Z31JIMVH I Muni _ _ o ('� NOIItlISenS 30I10d HIfIOS Hvi a U Houauasao a mra oexu� alm ox HOISN3tl 4 W 2 8 8 0< �I■W Ba12 o f � �Wc��� y M. gp5 5--------------------------------------------------- t 6 �ca3 ® 1 sS gg h f" = seOwag 6uua8ui6u3 jo juawpedap Wd 21001d NNO JN18Wflld N o M " SVX31 5 1 3 1 1 H 7 tl V m IlSIHHO Sfldlf0010 A110 h118 SY%31'usaH3snaaaO w ewwllnoeeus o a � Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 \ _ _ o ('� o NOI1tl1SenS 30110d Hinos atl3 U lgWip530 AB 31tla 'ONNgB NOIIdIipS30 AB 31tl0 ON NOISIA3L IHolsln3eala3ld owzloFJeo 0 gg€ lo ell Is mgN q< % _ -R-H ci of LL h6Haw 1 p ay ww oz I I Rti p �e I I �i II p l II "$ jig► p 3� j £yF —�} a� '�� �oC p0 — II o ui CJ U NO >u o4 p a xo JU - seOwag 6uua8ui6u3 jo juawpedap Mdld 8001d H31`dM JNievynld N o M w N N N St1X31 O� 5 1 3 1 1 213N21f1H 7 tl V \ o z m IlSIHHO Sfldlf0010 A110 h118 SY%31'usaHasnaaa�w eww�noeeus cn o a � Z3211WV21 11 _ _ NOI1tl1SenS 30110d Hinos atl3 U H!•LLdM1530 AB uva 'ONNgB NOIIdIK)530 AB 31tl0 off NOISIA3tl IHolsln3eala3ld owzroFJeo 0 gg Eli52 Wye m ly i >o4w�Z wN o3 � ,-,-,hdRi Yaapo Ypp Y 3 a 0if 8i;i 8 dig sa o°I 4 �' 88 4� p 9 I '®�E s; Hi � LL \ ` i J I II u ok i N a w-emu �C�C°0 o< 1r pig T-- ; b lot _ _o sa E = sGOlm9S6uua8ui6u3jojuawpedaa N�11dd0021JN18Wflld No M " u �� r co St1X31 0') R 5 1 3 1 1 H 7 tl V \ a IlSIHHO Sfldlf0010 A110 rloazsvxai'usaHosnaaau an eNmo�noeeus o o 6 o Z3211WV21� 213N21f11 NOI1tl1SenS 30110d Hinos atl3 U lgLLdM1530 AB alva 'ONNgS NOIIdIipS3o AB 31tl0 Nolsvaea ON N0O-I— Ila�la owzroFJeo gg o Iw o N_I= s N _ 3 a o o osp wy ° 8 °os w �I■W8 g you f o� 3 _ ol - I Ot Ott i § z i .---ttr .N � b =� F1 Ala W�Nb b p roe /� ry 1 �i0yN b 8 _ �o sGOlm9g 6uua8ui6u310 luawpedaa S31f103H0S JN18Wflld N o M " w �_ " co St1X31 O') R 5 1 3 1 1 H 7 tl V �N m IlSIHHO Sfldlf0010 A110 tKMsvxa>.'usIaHosnaaau amew,w�noesus o a � Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 \ _ _ NOI1tl1SenS 30110d Hinos Hvi a U NaLLdi[I53a Ae uva 'oN NgSN3a NOaalaaS3o A9 31va 'oN NOISN3tl 28 ° ffl a H9'-- - m &Fa=si° amg ao �;d R =s8 a o '�� r $<� ?$wg•a asm�= �.o ox ho wg ��$ = u='zsw� .°m�F� 'd€"$"�%� = k'= _ r :LL21�25 ri ?s�r S 11N_I� p4'd G r 3g w "sg $' �s�- s Sg€F°"a ���"= gaysS ok== wo=��w =� �s� §gmzsffi a=-^ aa" �; ""z w WMid �g�a&ag w°• �°��=p�6m$= �o�- €��s� Ow��� p-°"d °css a. U <, " $aw"=` G"5d w d 'WUH31,d P=--sss s � � s sx38��'s< t s�� ff ns n� 5=�,>gs8a 8swsi >Ie2� Z m N M j S S J H HE s�� ® L titc >�2k g20° zP< m€° a 3 h &LL wx f wa '�'_ Fi�bbU<k' $§zm Szn 4€ z. °�E" $ zII > ffi' g=p sC, -cgs$ _ 8 '5 1'1pa�� €awOG° 3 €�uw < 2 �_°�1 g8' ": �oge� w:Ion "HNo as" acJ�= 'os°= ;g= " *" -�sz " m<z s0qz: 3s " g< � $ � 2=g� � �� g"s ¢$ Ewa W&Has d r §��o �= e� ¢�� B ws` =ac£ '�."3 d a3� d E v` a - pkk QFJaw 8w� Y $ 3ez �d a &'a- go Sri pis $ ga, sw�S SJ� $ €">, & =G wash 8 G ?E" ;75 fl b s ° + w4 �o �88 ..m'ko '�cw M 's Gmgo;�ag � &" "oa€ G$� F �j "oMa �a� w c t _>a� ��_$�€ " z �_ <epa°-" " $�S'" =� gaga ;% s' ri - ..�< .m s�` n 3!K g°gip;; 9co _ c" d_ �_ .a- ❑ s �s ° � �€a �sg ¢ a = '-�s s la _ a° sa� 2gg ap<="- a �sg4 i �daand id=ai3 So Ga G °"w ,� vol & a LL Est=" _ E" ` az 3 3 F 1 ="oz w ;a xa des<2° &g ;p5oo�.p5;-gas "o,a " �� �" € �dLL_$" -_��kgga' a gw " �a a"o �a; �: �zs� o€ =a °d�qk„wpg �° � x sa 433„a< 7a< d €° z s ='s ==wp s==°J"�'s<6;" ,, ;.w" a' is "m= LLz k "3Jsga 0 €3 �d £� gga � ¢ � $ o d^ $ F gEa g��gig w <� sa os� sas gas oars s 4ss3 s FsR3 sxu HIM.a� � � � E21 eRl �;�s;ads�a z z =s8m $ Na IM asp ; I ti a I I I 2 a I tl'S a m 3 a l I I I I I I i I H Ig I 12 59g g gg5 p� 9 gXg s g� g�q RR i 0 'i d U_'j �� a Iz �g3 s m ? st o e s r+ _�$$ e�� 82 y i�E< a Q R � m i;�6 w _ ❑ a w a Y ❑ r ❑ Y X s a g ¢ € LL z � " " e awl b y �H� 3 � seOwag 6uua8ui6u3;o;uawpedap Sll`d130 JNievynld N o co 5 1 3 1 1 H 7 tl V o z M m IlSIHHO Sfldlf0010 A110 hKMSY%31'usIaHasnaaaO wlew,w�noeeus a � Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 \ _ _ o NOI1tl1S9nS 30110d Hinos Hvi a U NaLLdM153a A9 uva aNNgSN3tl N0adIipS3a A9 31YU 'aN N0ISN3tl ab � w J 501 z yI W Z w b a N O SH ❑ C w w :■428� w ❑ n R1 as WN SA a`3ff a: a� @eB 3�f Ga 6 � W ❑ $ ❑ } Q z `•'. _ 6 Z W w J z a o WE EsN �d � y 8 E 3 � m wS N r� g ng n 9g ygg s ELLS xQ = zLL' � waw � - �� =s ❑ Z o Np� $ 4oa= au 0 oLL 8 � 8 3 ;y 7PH; pu�aR .... .. ... �. ..'•. xR < <'a'aS.H °Y =O C'wu=im�� � l � � e I g ag ff boog zpE pp��, 38s� of N W ❑ =p Y.'" w ; gg gay _€- YSf�p 34bo ? z sw n $ $ a o a o 3wxQwF�� p a w= < g zi s F qV-4 sway' >s� g Fff ��aos3 awe s I€gig m w 8msgffi° ° w pp � r �8oa�N wwi�.`wt��k �° ®$ia 4 i n 3 ILJIr ~ ,.aie�'6 $wrci zoo rcSEog4 Ti_g €_ 9 I? w i oar ° HIM1€�3�HHE8 ���ias��$� � r Lu a J z z to s E & N ° " w� �a z po 9 BQ ~ K < 3 < 3 ss ' g o o ugh 4 z �a R III OR �� � �� -$m :� JR ,c 3- ❑'s = seawag 6uua8ui6u3 jo juawpedap SWtR OVIG N3SW JNisold N o M " w N �_St1X31 0') S 1 a 3 1 1 H a tl V m IlSIHHO Sfldlf0010 A110 SY%31'u aa saHasna�am �n ewwoeeus ^o a � Z3211WV21 1213N21f11 \ _ _ h118 NOI1tl1SenS 30110d Hinos atl3 U rauatps3o AB 3tYa ON NgSN3tl NWIdItl�S3a AB 31tl0 ON NOISIA3L L NOISWOH ae3Nd >ZOZM78a a g �ess4 W� ��meq 4 gg N V wp"�m r ,j a� r Am o° 4 ll 'z r � cF WI f- �• erg--"1� O ACC � C i5 �LL o i1 II a gO W N\atNues qo .SYl.,..,...,...aMY saai ag6uiaaaui6u3oluawaeda) aN3J31'RS1O9WASAEMONHO31 N o CM J "`Q�� ` , SHX31 0 O- FO o �•y., wN 3 11 H J 21 V J 1 I1sIaH0 sndao0 to u10 h t?ISIX31'LLSIaHO sndKO OATS NMOi OD o 9l[9 o '^ w .=-z- z3a�wva I a3Nani r`■ v a m m �a.ro NOI1H1S9nS 10110d H1nos Hvi N C �ryod a3a3 � NOLLdIaJs30 Ae 31tl0 'ON Na SV,3a NOI1dl—K Aa 31V0 'ON No15113a IF oC g �£ QwLLao oaaaphhh..>>> Z Q O O Q w W _H W ~ z Z of � a a w } am � �w � w Z m Q m LU LLJ z J z o6 U' J J K U o .b ❑ ❑ N 5`- Z - - - 4oLU m U 3 [n F 3 a F = O - t w m - LL $ ' w H _ P "z m j - g v a ` § ` U C, > U3 aw O a a^ a = - > � w� tN oes $1tlX'S^tltl'15 Ye9MY1 saainaag 6uiaaaui6u3 jo luamjaedat) Mdld 31IS AOMONHO31 N o M J J 1 IlSIHH`J SndHOO 10 AIIO hlbBL stiX31'I1SIaH�sndao�'t)�18 Nh1o1 ol;laoA 8lL9 o '^ w\\.=-a� z3aiwva aaNanl r`■ v a J~ 'y m m a NOIlH1S9nS 30110d H1f10S i1t13 N CO �WkNO)03HU rvoudiaas3a ne 3Lva ory rvasin3a rvoudiaas3a ns 37 roNNoisU __ - w - -- - oho ou -- - pg_ - - - _ aa°o- g°do of _ _ - - _ ep �h3oza�ozQ �3r�U - ��oc C)0 (S) (2) G (s G 0 i ---------- - - i - I n co cn a is ✓, I U Ia. I � I I I' I -----------------------------------------L —_ i i i I _ i i i i ° 3W � a - � 04 w� F ,z e ,N3 13,13ss3 NHa,e9d ---------------------------------------------- -----------------------eN ` } \ " \ ® » m: ma am Sq#oA SAme @ , E \§\ ~ k} \ \am/\enn | S 1 2 ; / . : �\ }� IUgemAm m Uo :_=mom va /er \ m.±y mivl3m91mi2/nosHv ) \ CO } �!( } \ \} \} \} } } § \ \( \} \) ( } 'I es e S @@ a �Jff co �p�Nt\oxoes/,74prp M saowag6uuaaui6u3yojueuq/edep 9d HOOl3 1 13ATA90IONHO31 N o M StlX31 0 z rV m \•V s-, c v 3 1 H J a V USIHH0 snda00 io AIDro�os�srx�•iislaHosn daoo an�e HN,oiolHaoAe«s r •�=- Z3211 VH I M3 un NOIld1S8nS 30110d Hinos Htl3 N g 00 a31 L NGida]$3p 19 3va NgSN3tl agldla�330 AB 31vO 'ON l�fluDVJ 91FlliZOd l Q owti 98, ° d 04 € p vi v;$ ��a ��= s< ;< w goo ��s °s z y a, io °F o n w =zgw 5_ 3rog -.R^ 6 So4-612 59 s ao � was oG° ff &� o w � 51, � LLw $: _ ��E$ 4 €g g w €w € ow<.81p 'a�g' 8 �$ 5 gw so 0�" 9oY� B yof ���� Bop R� o � <& B '' o% dot p ��a °°w ffid "6 o�i5' o1 2-20 w6 g, y o off° t� N 3 � guw ,a a= �c g �.`° Map .gyp " 'A sw o sw Pow$ �gE SW� =LL ;p 3 ffa g8oc flq{s{�LL= g � a � &'� go � xwx oLL s� sxs g w� boo °3 42 °a y=aw �woS �k" S� LLw¥ Quo 0�4 gzz» a � rO� a.i <� � s °a o� �o Poi= ao n R;�Z�,j Ro _ pop u� u =�= _ _ _ _ =& x �3 = �03 � o os soot e W � �Ww&a s ° rN S. ���sa owm w pass Qw s' dG Ng'o s �gEgg 4 "w = 8 _ 4F t' dw g a ,sww wp°¢ gm@ m < s� p�C ` ��'o°w� �'a 2 ogw LLGa %° �o, gown if owl €M _� ww a e€ g's p oo w° �os� �w o p�,, w s £° 1�< LL', s9 �- s'6� &fie oR °Gpowwo < an° b< <�€ $ O 5�0$ o8g=fig g z 08 g#3 goo € �sYo 5 RCS R & fa@; � G B z � � pm s ° € z�a g o„= g` y� 6H o-off g _ N� °� � Y gym` � moo mix ==g s `s ®g o os� 8£' W g$ Y �� �� w 4 � 12, g� �a as &w pwwy 8 s20W SIN Sew= cg s s�; 1 6 & 3 �'. sew s s> ss� s a � s w � o's :w ens g aH aQu i no aY OR, e��m 'sd� aa�a� m • • _ _ _ _ PI O O O O O O O O 00 4 0,, ------------- �o I a r =n � ® b� �L 04 w ` } ƒ ry ® » m: s3GSm9m�mOmm1 @ , � E \§\ ~ k} \ \am/\enn | S 1 2 ; / . : \ , ;.,}� IUge mAm m Uo :_=m .a / /er \ m.±y mivl3m91mi2/nosHv ) \ CO / � [ ) \ j ( ) { \( ) \ \ e \ O Ge ea8eee2Ga@W` @230 O � go w \etNuesi o .5,1 SftlX'S^tl'15YeMY saai agsuuaauisu3oluawueda) SlIVAO 3ld)dA9OlONH031 N o CM J Fo H �•\cavy 3 11 H J 21 V J 1 IlSIHH`J SndHOO 10 uM ht?l SIX31 LLSIaHO sndaoO DAIS NMOi ODKa 91[9 z3a�wva a3Nani r`■ _ v o fnmm == y�°""�da3a3 'a NOIlH1S9nS 30110d H1f10S i1t13 N SCO NOLLdIaJs3O Ae 31tlO 'ON Na SV,3a NOI1dl—K Aa 31V0 'ON NUI5113a IF U' - -oow3a d.a Z - - - _ O 3N --_ _ - - O --_ ZO 2 o _ ° N �w i m33Q rc ❑ o p z° i ❑ - z z z a a w a A 86 6 S Q C}9 ❑ z - - ° aN � U O F k a = 0 om_ Q�a Z Ozl zo tz z�a ° 10o0o m w3 p U a- Bo w O z a w w _ o 0o O U z r6nmi� _ z zi ❑ o„ A o0 U a w a w F d °�C, if ES - - - -cl ID G at NZ U� O° 8 Oz w O° O U �" �° z— O w O > �w x � m O❑�-v U . T g o W N\etN DES IC, .5,1 SftlX'S^etl'15Ye MY saai agsuiaaauisu3 oluamueda) 3W3HOS 9NIl30Hl W01d 11 A9010NH031 N o M C) E ` , SHX31 0 O- F o o �•yg N 3 11 H J 21 V J 1 IlSIHHO Snda0010 uI0 hlbBL stiX31'I1SIaHDSndaoO't)A18 Nh1o1 oLIaoA 81L9 Lo .=—ap z38Iwva 83Nani r`■ v a m m �a. N0I1H1SSnS 10I10d H1nOS Hvj N C �ryod a3a3 � NOLLdIaJs30 Ae 31tl0 'ON Na 11— NOLLdl—K Aa 31V0 'ON No15113a IF o� LU W p W aoo ood ao0 006 w x = U U III IIII J W U III IIII W 00 IIIIIIIIIIII ° Q Q J ryP z m U Lzu Y o U o W J Q _ m m ® ° L W ® W m ® U) •® LL (n aa J Q °I9 � ° III III III III III III III III III III III .® ,� e� IIII IIII W o� -- p00 OOq =— 00 000 m _ V LL J s LL 5 12 LLJ W W (U) _ W 0 O N 0 0 C.D — z)J 0 00 0 o oo o M ° z A�0 tl�0 p�0 9�0 Q 11�1 p�° p�° LU ° ° ° ° J ° ° w =Ho floo° W z flo° ° O ® � ° ° ° ° U ° ° ° o Q 0 s0 m ©`0 0 `0 z� ° ON oo � o® o o � vJo 0°°p�° v p fl°° 000 o OY �0 0 ° 0 ° ° UUQ °= ° °w Qfl0 0 U 0°o 0°oJ°°0 Kdaa — o o 0 o F o a a a 0y �/ g F royt�Nood"ao3aes3mi�c Fqe' saai ag6uiaaaui63 o uampeda4 rN o UCj4NIS11R s1osmS wnSIAOI4nv C woo S1X31 m 31H�a� u V Y—- o H aLs<X3 SaHus du a,sNnoio o s«s ISIOSn00l0Q c' . - m . COa NOIlH1S9fS 30110d H1nOS Ht3 , Gw rvoudiaas3a ne 3iva ory rvasin3a rvoudiaas3a ns 37 roNNIOU co w — — --- — — ❑ — W a H — m LU ate- El n � I Y Q - U` — w z O w w ❑ W J Lu 0 ❑ Z H J 06 CO O m J Q Cl) co O _O ❑ 5 - Q - - - ua a ® o o 0 o D o o 0 p 0 0 0 U - J O co (n - - n D D O D o 0 0 0 0 0 o D o o LEI 0 0 0 0 co o �pe�t\oxoes/���� saowag6uuaaui6u3yo�ueuq/edep NV Id d0H llVM3A0lHf1SIA0ionv N o CO Q H V F 5,1.:...:...:...:..... I SM 0 = 0-) d a V Z " USM Sf� M io AUD ro ros srx�usaHoswaoo MISwwiolHao�s«s Z37JIMV!18 N"Nvll cy w zip a° NOIld uns 30HOd Him mvj a U a3 L rvcuaa�o ne atw ox xasvaa rva�aos� we ova ox � 4 ubM�DVO 90lliZ0d l Q s s &o 91 Wood 2�2Q fg� a2 w� dot � ���g ��g=�fangHn o pit A Z gp g 0 in HPI os$�u;Hg N it m � �a�w <"g��s=� uNy ��e � g w w "�B"°'a 3 > PQ 'I` g €I p Q "o l �" in �w siow",=- $ 's p� �e �$ w� w�� �a� tNpo18� " oil Sug @y � � � i -avow Ou��= oM� 4 HT as its ° �3g ��4 Ply go98�w€a�l;��a ogj �O� .oi- yw� �sa� o� : �p���a � aw= o o °e : 3w g=, a � _ 'o € mE3Q'z �s��€'g'�r � IN 9" Usk 69 N2 Nh R1Fs� 8�q a.,i ti6H"- MY2 is 'fag �Bg �7�� s��p 88€=sRIH'51! S"e 15 A ga $$ a& g e ����5�`�gg o �p of a gREP P. 0 'PH im a a i s��SlY�4e8884 - i J& �L - g g � 3 a r r > O j yq O" a. am �peVN,O DES1,�Fq SOONOS 6uuaaui6u310 jueu4edep NVId KOId 113A3I IVASIAOlOf1V N o CO Q H V F 5,1.:...:...:...:..... I SVX31 0 d __ N° J 3 1 1 H J a V Z " USIHHO snda00 io All0 ro roeesrx3t iisaHosndaoo MIS NOI OINWA W9 Z37JIHV!I M3Nan (� m6 3 NOIld1S8nS 30110d Hinos Htl3 N g CO e31 L NGida]$3p 19 3va ON NgSN3tl H� AB 31vO '°N 4 N^M�DVO 90lliZOd l Q "€wp 00000 IN ,8 o `� s= „�. moo w= „$ x<psw�so sR o �� oessLL € N,o €�3t pa , � s� :.�.s°u=° �. Q) m °a w a m 5o o��x-.2,JpI- O gw8 4°g 2� c �` sW€ o7w° �;°. on � fi ibozm = app <� &HgKc 8��sw��' ,w _' ° a °8yw JE, "4wF F�,.&a �gsM�oaB$o�w8i, ys'a€�p°xs xG goggi °a= WmguPoi m EVI�H Ha ayows��< o=_w<< swy <=�yQy E ulx &% �8 w Q 35 8 o -- jq £.:_ =w3 uLL:zfggseon w o�� goo � xi s o�n, ed s =a s =l-H „ z ° °% gg ° G Hw is �€ t p , RH H gn 11 <a TW w:'M- ° p sLL< pG Q a"lw o o 0 eIm - O � as — wq 5� O N O@ a— g F Qeoto"oesiC,Fq saai agsuiaaauisu3 jo uamueda4 SNOIlVA3l3 43�J2JHlN3lVf1SIA014f1t1 N o C�j F oM m N N e svx31 VYM- IlSIHHO Snd0 01011 aLs<X3 SaHus du a,sNnuio o s«s z- z3a�wva a3Nani m oo o U, Gw NOIlH1S9fIS 30110d H1f10S Ht13 NCO �ryod a3a3 � NOLLdIaJs30 Ae 31tl0 'ON Na SV,3a NOI1dl—K Aa 31V0 'ON N015113a IF 30 sR _ 0 �"ap soo 03 O O O IHHHHHHHHHHHHHHgHHHHH Lz O 6 .019E� 2 U � Kq K- U� O � Q O w Q W Q � � Q LL to z F eOJS\ONOES/ Fq saainaag6uiaaaui6u3jojuamjaeda4 swim ivoidulHnslnOlanv N o eY) to � .� r o o (N e 5 1 : St1X31 CD F, m Y Mum SmWo►o u10 h t?ISIX3i 11SNH3Sndi0D OA,9NMO aDKa 91Z9 0 w z38Iwva UMuni MR N011H1S9nS 30110d H1nOS Hvj N CO %Main rvoudiaos3a ne 3iva ory rvasin3a rvoudiaos3a ns 3iva ory rvoisi�3a DIM All sit , HIM o � t n n! a H& mi Won - �� Z Z C G �w e, S/ m 3� SP, H �g< J ip - _ - - - "'gyp TIN § z $ z VMS 0 Eli to it wUN 510 .21 _ z III O I inn HH1 �a O.oshOO �`� �^ �dm Oa.. �z w d W Jw %______________ __ a pis o 0 H " LL H 0 a 8/ _ ow A Am Ru- LL n4 t, _ z O� O ON a w wz Z ww 00 O S 1 O T �p� J� m a z UO I i 1 ¢ 'l Ho - «sg ;. � OC� Qept�oN OEsiFq saainaag 6uiaaaui6u3 jo juamjaeda4 ON3J3l'RSl08WAS/lllbflo3S N o M 0 0 •� o NE 'o sia3iiHaav St1X31 � O� o m _ �.V Y IlSIHHO SndHOO 101110 aLs<X3 saHus dao a,sNn,uio ao s«s o ( w o .=-z- Z38iwva I 83Nani N~ o MIN! a, NOIlH1S9nS 30110d H1f10S i1t13 N SCO NOLLdIaJs30 Ae 31tl0 'ON Na SV,3a NOI1dl—K Aa 31V0 'ON No15113a IF w2zz E KS � F H. U = m Q W w _H W ~ Z of � a a N m o N 5 5 U Z N L1.1 N s _ 0 W - Z 3 Q o2S w ❑ ® � ® O ® � �- o 0 0 0 0� � v 0 o 0 w N 0 w z - - _ z 0 0 a e - _ N N 0 - U Z 0 0 0 © D o o ❑ o ® lil © (D o o ® o 0 0 0 0 0 0 ❑ m � - ° 0 0 0 © © ® D D o 0 0 0 ® a] Ill o © IC o © o [ o 0 0 Qept�oN OEsi Fq saainaag 6uiaaaui6u3 jo juamjaeda4 NH1d 311SAiNn03S N o M 0 0 •� O� o NE 'o sia3iiHaav svx31 � IISIHHO SndH001o)dl0 aLs<X31llsl H s d ,sNn,ulo ao s«s � o .=-=A Z38114VU 83Nanl �y�ryry Ma3n3 �a• NOIIVIS9nS 30I10d H1nOS Hvi N C a NOI1dIaJs30 Ae 31tl0 'ON Na I'— NOIldl—. AH 31V0 'oNNMI- p ap wsm34 00 "HE - _ q - - So _ wnxz m — QoxW�ai�ozsw — opop a�mumr — N -- W3cmi5a�j = -- — - - — — — - -pc�G — -- m - — ��wrr z� ¢✓d ou w o — — — — _ Wo3 v, t:wu�o a__ as v.nr mom. uv,v.x ¢rc¢�xzao °3m uo._ au� a=<w add aoN3�°o°w°Om¢ mw¢A H W .—.—.—.—.—. w �_—_—_—_—_—_—_________—_—_—_—_—_—_—_—_—_—_--. I I I I I I I I I I I � o I I a I � �o Uo 15 co �peVN,O DES1,�Fq SOONOS 6uua9ui6u310 jueu4edep Wd 110013 l 13A31 AlR non N o M CO .CD V Y _. ...5 1 I SVX31 m ° o J 3 1 1 H J a V fn1 g = USIHHO snda00 io AI ro roeesrx3t'iisalloswaoo an eNmoiolHao�e«s N V w Z Z3MIHVH M an J jly NOIld1S8nS 30110d Hinos Htl3 w g CO e31 L NOLLdMM AN wo ON NgSN3tl Ng1dItlO33O AB 31vO 'ON 4 ubM�DVO 9011iZOd l Q R g wo� Qa° gy�m -$sMNgW mc o € LL_ GLLI 5.s= €€ogaw- u9 u p aa„ ' o � ,� LLg$Poso4s-0 8V2 g<a ft. So9$i V c `p H Hi tj Poop Q�)' o yas Po s ;ozFo o<g�°oq�q gaa off° § HE s gg� sg� �< sq €� w81wPo�, goyp? s p °m pw° off' ° 3 °3 s IHq ffil ;� wa _ w �g Cagy Mo �wpw= s J y' . u r-1 — C; $ O Q o� � i a S Po LJ � 8 O x u J �� rc� w cO .-R co SOONOS6uuaaui6u310jueu4edep SlIV1301VO1&UAURInO3S N o CO v`ri ...5 l I SVX31 0 = d m 0 3 1 1 H 0 N V Q KWL Stlx311 MHO SnaO'J'OAIS NMOI O1NWA RL9 Z - zaaiwva I aaNani USIHH0 sndao0 i uI0 $ j Nouvis8ns 30I10d H1nos HV3 w g CO 031 L NaLaa09ao ne ana .0„;;Z NOudtaasa0 =7F=T 9lliZOd l Q O Z O O O) 1�; 3S a$ z g 'z _a3 Ue j8:a �Uz $ 3y e e wm � 3 Wov m.H Hg8 s3s w `gs a a8 gg ;D'di a g08 ' S; a Y $ m S U .a a:q�LL' s �g6 3f d ^.'�Z ZO sH �`� ' oya' 8 o °8a o `N °"g d 00 H ohs Q p X N d as8 Hfi w M $ =s 'os38 - Ow '_ -vs, o -ea ----- 5 w � y 00 00 0000 z S S S OS OS SSO O ❑ � �o z0w ��o a7d JOOWF �o azo 3w� ------------ 6 Jh €< Ig SL C�€9s 1� g; a $ag�z _ za Ys s1 11 Y spa sg"g Il a: s .€ B k z $,i Yea %a$6 E ti6 a y5 �9a n o es � d §° £ g@gg'axed a U Y� �o F11 E a¢ :� ale a 3 0 8 " @ e85 Ig `sH Se g#§ IN a ¢ O 7 sg M, 3e-B 38 4 0_' B 3Y a N 8e t " 3 Y� -,R 11e®o Z qq o 9 3s" § N @E s $ � a 19 gas g 96 a a a gw i <� ?€ 3 A SSS O S OSOO 00 �� =g =e1=eli =u 5 N I'=98 a q�Z° OS S O SOS O S 0 0 0 O OW S S S SO SS SO � �ww w Xz wRw oho p 4 @ OO � j z GGGHill Z ] U Q O 110,811 o -------------------- Nu R �6 i�F jyboNn3 g SSS as SOSOo o y figsq9y£y� g3 9 �g X W J W a�' w tl 8 "8 EE 8 i T 3 LL>K U2 z ass 0 S 0800 00 0: w 0❑ �— U ¢w "/ 0� a z=) o u wz 0 �� o t�N.�oN E=OE s—i Fq-' saainag 6uiaaaui63 jo juawjaeda4 s3lna3HOS AiNA03S o �o UM lo oQ S1X31 'n IISIHHO SndHOO 10 lo aLs<X3 saHus du a,sNnuio o s«s z- w z3a�wva a3Nani N~ o MIN! p NOI1H1S9nS 30I10d H1nOS Hvi N C NOLLdIaJs3O Ae 31tla 'ON Ng51— NOI1dl—K na 31Va 'ON NO15113a IF J U - - - - - - - - - - - - - - W Q _ - � u _ 4 P W W W rc - LLI h U) h U Q J J < h v w w a a saovuaS buiaaaul5u3�o juawueda4 M u-1 1INS HIA0O o Cf) m �yVd �qs �5 as° w c°Z I1SIHHOSnddOO10AJO tMISVX3lILSIHHOSndaoO'OIONMODIHOA9[L9 �J NIN33NION3ZON S1NINIAMW onond EO 1 x�!rc.PRp4�o y �' Ell'I N18-Sf1dWV0 H1flOS aVW l30 � a NoaUaas3a 1e 7— oN Nas;.aa NOUN— ne 3iya ON NW A3H Q O Z o E wo O11H IL W -m wo� - VN = Z - -V-owB Eg F o3§j �4 _ y W 60 O W aTT _ oa a. LL - __ a. F- oa � � � olr„ cn Fw z O W a (D U w ULJ W ¢ F O — — — ' � � Z i w w w w y m V) m — aaao = � a r c U. o W z a a a o D , W W a m w w w S J W U U W W Z Z Z Z K J cc t I W W F J < ¢ < < O F W W W 2 0 > > w > r r r r G HI U U U U' o > > > > U O o Z o U U f U U U U U U U U U „ W a a d a a a a a a d d W H Ck W F Z y0 ff l- a W a �; JIc �f LU III ' a i H0 i W a ic J IL oab i i � � a Z w U s � uVi J uVi N fJ �z oz saovuag buiaaaul5u3�o juawueda4 _ M u� I SRON IINO o rf m SVX31 0 = m z° an oaasas; I1SIHHOSnd'd0O1 AJO tMISVX31'�1s�HHOsndaoO'OAIONMODIHOA9[a � 3 3W o � yd ONI833NION3ZONOW S1N3W3�OadWl�IlBfld N o m c ol E ll'L NIO SndWVD Hinos dvn l30 a NOUIass3a NOUN:,s3a ne 3iya or�Noisvaa Q - LU 'moi �£w z4 obF��z F �a§a - W -- �`xJ'o ya Qo xws a - ��x" z € p3¢-➢_ zs o9 z z58� j¢ Q - o wEig - JOm w£ - - - �Gp - - o - G wyx o� - z - Uiao� z ~NVao ¢� i6Oz x�w z zz oso�3z x a �3¢gL3 _-_ m E zO N� _ ooz u�p aG��pm o zo�oWOQJm rc - z W - z _ -D Q¢ - - - aiM aoo - _" p2____ _pro - �'2 € - o oza - - .o¢ a Yoz3�o o'er 30 _ - �Fz z�oaacz zCmo�a3o - _ H. YG a o ppo _ w€"_ ___ �x kwY o�£�� - - G - � m z ¢k✓aoo�o � - - - a��alloLgN�o« z�U- wow - - - �€�`� - p�p�3� apap==e w`w �oWwa€ o�w ��xxoyxo�8ww�,.,,..w€woFo Uda _ a`J ji€p y w�� x _G Boa aoa�rxzaodw�o¢�"�z m OjJ_ j o -x _ _ xm _ `r¢' o G p o j o�o a �_g 8E �opo - o v 2 w � z5w �r - - b � G_ - - _ - m€ Fy'a a _��p €a - i€6 N_ - - _ o�p _a4 try K tj - = _ _ Q kl if - a �oox�aw,x„p O'- sz¢ �FwW.wa s �ao�pwxo w,..aa>5 r ar.xr Q �aaas"z"p w¢¢o oV z oxz o W - KN`"EW W�p3���o�xo��oz�LL saovuaS buiaaaul5u3�o juawueda4 _ M u-1 II SRON lUVO o r) m SVX31 0 = � z° �V an oaasag; I1SIHHOSnddOO10AJO tMISVX31'ILSIHHOSndaoO'OAIONMODIHOA9[L9 � 3 o fI c yd �qs �5 ONIN33NION3ZONnw MINIMUM onondol x�!rc.PRp4�o y E ll'I NIO SndWVO Hinos dvn l30 a rvoudiass3a ne 3ill ory rvaa;�a rvoudia:,s3a ne 3iyaory rvoisvaa Q O Z o E Lu .21 Arc 0 °a§ ° Z _ oho Li H.R w Vok V S g a w a< ~'2� Uo a5�g� owa000 000�o�F�o - z - V�� ti a - >€zm =G _ - �� Ep E _ a - p'�o¢zN€ - agm_ M r inaw 3n nrw �ran.� is n saovuag 5uuaaui5u3�o juawueaa4 ON3931 B 31f103HOS ONIISK WHIN39 o C''� m ". SVX31 0 = m z° �V an oaasag; I1SIHHOSnddOO10AJO tMISVX31'ILsIHHOsndaoO'OAIONMODIHOA9[L9 � 3 o fI c yd �q ONIN33NION3ZONnw S1NINIA N onondol �J a 1 x�!rc.PRp4 20 N E ll'I NIO Snd[NVO Hinos dvn l30 a rvoudiass3a ne 3ill ory rvaa;.sa rvoudia:,s3a ne 3iyaory rvoisvaa Q O Z o E 'L dE N W oa N coc ff+®ZdyT®® I =z i W .21 .o z o z W _ Lu - � w Z :LB - - x - ©Z �b� �O�Tn ® TIIT YIITII ��+� W d w�so 0 g. -- ag - -- - -_ 30 1— oGj zN oo - - mym-- Gz _ os saovuaS buiaaaul5u3�o juawueda4 _ o u-1 NHId AD IIVd3AO SVX31 0 = m z° �V an asag; USIHHO SnddOO 10AJO tMISUM IL3IHHOSnd'dOO 0Am9WAWA 9[a � 3 o fI c yd �qs �5 ONIM33NION3ZONnw MINIMUM onondol x�!rc.PRp4�o y E ll'I N18 SndINV3 Hinos dvn 130 Co rvoudiaos3a ee 3Lvaory rvaan3a rv0udiaos3a ne 3iva ON rvoisa`3a Q O O Z Gz Gz Iwo FQ FQ pW r5lpc+i"O �av� fav� pi LL�ao LL�ao 00 00 o - - zJuo zIuo mod w z= - �a �a � zo 70 0 70 p ULL aQaiw. �O- pia 0b ON f _ _°a�mm�ao O,o ON _zoLL _ le�la3°h.oa,os2 LLO LL' i°w - Ko kcmQW3pOa Wpo n rvo,° orvN,°Hs x x rN _ P. LL3w - PL + — F �a. w W C1 W I � I O k_ II � ¢+o aazx�orc +o� � ata .�p.oLw _ F + Iw � + a I 'll III 1��,• o L - � " - n " x7-0LL �iS � �JLLy I�Ix a 0 i65 .O a O W_I ,+•+ ,Y+ -� - S IwK II ° _ LI I call, f ¢H...o 0 WWOF G-' Q J O W O H m W I + c - zaW n m ^aAGP m o I l�a W LL es 85 O LL F I L J m I w z X. "'1 + + + + o e u, Y I Ilw I I m } I I I I Ila i I I I II,o I I I I I I 1= I I + - PL PL 'PL Pl. ` L PL PL PL + + +„+ + I= + + + + O = O � O r Z. �ao a-LL�3 mO VW O=OYIM I� J ~ O Fo, =0= 0 0�°54a4 W j N W F LL 0 W¢Q b Do 7 G Qy =QO 2 J Q m W ad"arms ¢ 7 V N ¢ OJ O m'LO o C F F SaOINGS buiaaaul5u3�o juawueda4 _ o u-1 1 3IIdOdd'R NHId Aill11f1 SVX31 0 z° �V sago I1SIaHOSfldbOOloAllO tMISVX3i'IiSIHHOSnd'dOO'OAIONmODIHOA9[a 3 � w ONIN33NION3 ZONnw �� MINIMUM onond �' E ll'I NIO SndWHO Hinos dvn I30 N a NOudiHOs3a 1e 7— roN Jq— NOUN— we Siva ON NOisN3H Q O Z -moo s= N Q V 3 N 1 l H O 1 V W L 1 3 3 H S O 1 N 3 J 3 N �■all vt I■ �.� � a <g a"5 0 — ---- --- —' --- N �+ v ---------- -- —--------- x/X/ a - --- ——— - c �- — ✓�/j�/a ----- -----_ ___—_____________i�__ F �- w w j /xj U.— ti — V// w w_ o „w /N 77 aye w3= } - - T O UU NII O� 2> ry co saovuaS 5uiaaaul5u3�o juawueda4 1131Id021d NVldAlllllfl SVX31 0 z „n asas; USIHHO SnddOOl AJO tMISVX31'�1S�HHOSnd'dOO O IONMODIHOA9[a � 3 3W o � ONI833NION3 ZONOW S1N3W3�OadWl�IlBfld N o m e ol E ll'L NIO SndWVO Hinos dvn l30 a Noudiaos3a ee eiva oNNJSU d NOUN— we Siva I oNNoisa`3a Q O Z E -moo s= N Q 8 3 N 1 l H 3 1 V W 8 1 3 3 H S O 1 N 3 =1 3 N m ----- 1----a� of __ W�a ��/i�/i� z m -=. €=w ��/ice/i� ivvice lix --i— o xx'�d xx',o�deix rva rvu,o„s �\/\ 3 } y ��', sv rvou�aiaaa.no-a.hsz �I -----f��/f//� ——----- ---------- W' Row a / /a 11a,l ✓A�VA%� p ; xr W y ua NJ // -- _ \ 6 W o LI . m o Wo s LL Q V 3 N I I H O 1 V W 9 1 3 3 H S 01 N 3 3 3 N a N t M F N T U U Ni> o SaOINGS buiaaaul5u3�o juawueda4 _ o u-1 III 31WW 8 NVId kiniin SVX31 0 z° �V sago I1SIHHOSnddOO10AJO tMlSVX31'liSIHHOSnd'dO'anlONMODIHOA9[a 3 � w o fI c yd 4, ONIN33NION3ZONnw MINIMUM onond ,x�!rc.PRp4 �' E ll'I N18 SndWV3 Hinos dvn 130 a NOudiaos3a 1e 7— —as— NOUN— we Siva ON NOISv\3a Q O Z -moo s= N Q O 3 N 1 l H 3 1 V W 6 1 3 3 H S 01 N 3 =1 3 N -------------------j --- �� a -/�/f w � pd y -,ane Na RRR ------------- New, . 9 e ----- X7/// Al aoP �j//jam „aP O i ----- ----_-_�\�� of - ----- ----- �xr We` xx�e'xx,ondH^i 1 9 ° o_ {- //// 8 3 N 1 I H 0 1 V W L 1 3 3 H S O 1 H 3 3 3 N 10 a F a + u< by N �> 31Id0 saovuaS bulaaaul5u3�o juawueda4 _ o u-1 AI ?Jd'R NHId Allllin SVX31 0 z° �V sago USIHHO SnddOO 10 AJO tMISvx3i'IISIHHOSnd'dOOOAIONMODIHOA9[a 3 w o fI c yd 4, ONIN33NION3ZONnw S1NINIA N oniond �J a x�!rc.PRp4 20 N �' E ll'L NIO SndWHO Hinos dvn 130 a NoudiHosea 1e 7— —as— Noudie— oN N0191— Q O Z -moo s= N Q o 3 ° xx oe xxows ----- 1----- �____ ___— -------- w' PL „sNoa3aao�3 /AAA/AAA/ �.N3..3sd3,�n - p - a \ \ aa=w s \ o ��'i 3 i ✓AA�VA�V� > en i m onena.- ------ --ice \ , z - _______________ �--_ A \ 3 _ I Y y a = o w aw mom`; --- -_ \ \ \ a ✓ w m = w ,m- _ w� p %%%a 's - l�//�// p m > w O 3 INI � H � lt/ W 8 1 3 3 H S O 1 H 3 =1 3 N O N t O F {0 �y saovuag 5uuaaui5u3 io guamueaa4 SlIHl34 OdHONH1S?J31VM 0000 o CM 33�+e I s deb 7=777771SVX31 0 = � z° �V sag USIHHOSnd'dOSI0AJO t€ta1Svx3i'LSIHHOSnd'dOO'OA19NMODIHOA9[a o o fI c y0- 'qs �5 ONIM33NION3ZONOw S1NINIA N onond �J a E ol Y x�!rc.PRp4�o y ll'!N18 SndWH0 Hinos dvn 130 a NOudi= ne 3iaa 'ONNas;.,a NOUN— ON Nasvaa Q O _ Z `s siaw� srx3 w ' J E Z3 ; 7 ,1 Q LI 2 it � iieeli till! 4i� k p g 1111 ! ! !; p !1 ! pBe$P! ! g a I j}U� u €5 e9 �! �t C@B� t t Nii�, ggii!1d. I € P! aY tgi € o !t i !14.6 9 I P It' a - ° B. t L t ` �g o el gtl$ �i iy —6T l i 'PPle $�lld;p 1 Fgi gCt ,', ! ! t�M lit g tee,g 4 t 1 j9 t a 4 ! i..•,l B !',i le. lilt hili'lla ill D. Oil fit', t gea a` Y�I i g t� k ' 3§i� s ��6 � �yd�p p! �9�pl��lE�.'S z1i8€ ; a a �y•� Mh jil T- i E at lit'Ili lilp!tti'� l lilt !!Al!tl e e t g ii , !° € t !e i Ik i I Pel get � �ppppdpgg`1g�t� Pg! dl�g� �!a! il�� ! gy ! P � I g��•�G$ al�t�Mg� v lieg.i '@ € k`is P 11 i a d ! Pkded 1PIP g�lk aidee! g tlitg`ggPtya e t ! �1 i6° 8 P pltledel�l ixg@@+°! za @ z § @ k° i s� € e r �3 € t s. :tt §i,li s � d@� @�!! 1°�I ��I°gl ���a9tE �I 'le�� �� �!'� ��a I �1 ! � !i i !� � @°��g�eaF gg..Ig! Ya° IP -!e$$3 ! dzye@! € ga kdp a !� a d z ' , !ie I'1y°°4°! 6l�g f k a3 i z=€ t kt tt !egg ie ; �$agPsta$eldiap@lag°�,3! gi't rdag$3•g!tlit g !° 0 lil i= €=$1etl$� Pdiegtj g €, 1ggg gtlG �°gd i� d �. Ilt@IlI !!`g tg; is 1$ I,,,t gg�Il� , P e€Yk k€P"xtla€k ld k�i aelt t $9lsld lzla i ial§ �t:gt l.� as i @ ! €� t °se!lettgltllllt t In saovuag 5uuaaui5u3�o juawueda4 SlIVAO S31ON),roil(a31Vm d CM "' SVX31 7 z° �V o sas° I1SIHHOSnddOO10AJO tMISVX31'ILSIHHOSndaoO'OAIONMODIHOA9[a o fI c yd �qs �5 ONIN33NION3ZONnw S1NINIA N onond �J a 1 x�!rc.PRp4�o y �' E ll'L NIO Snd[NVO Hinos dvn l30 a NOUIaas3a ne 7— —as— rvoudia: I ne 3iya —asvaa Q O Z Sow 0 pap - - _ _ Z z N - ad e8 ��o 5 ova � -- o W �m=o�m�m?a�gom5mmac45_ Z 2�8e J Gac � W m W w Es in zo€ - Q 5 Of z or a Saw o o 5 a3a -��oo o zwp mom ( l z .,T N,/Nrvr)NN r. 3 U H N o Za a �a ww�o o m � P o a5� o� oC 55a o G� o1< _ �§ALL -- ❑ F �o 0 3V� - } �e c�a 1 s ¢pG�a 3 - a `da G- -ao z '^ omN a dm o n pEtoo'a `a 00 � G a wpo G 0 a >o J o �M _ Z O _ Y _ a - U Ei Z m � U r ono < a a o� M� In